diff options
Diffstat (limited to 'old')
| -rw-r--r-- | old/7bull10.txt | 11615 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/7bull10.zip | bin | 0 -> 247359 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/8bull10.txt | 11615 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/8bull10.zip | bin | 0 -> 247373 bytes |
4 files changed, 23230 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/old/7bull10.txt b/old/7bull10.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e3632b3 --- /dev/null +++ b/old/7bull10.txt @@ -0,0 +1,11615 @@ +The Project Gutenberg EBook of With Buller in Natal, by G. A. Henty +#14 in our series by G. A. Henty + +Copyright laws are changing all over the world. Be sure to check the +copyright laws for your country before downloading or redistributing +this or any other Project Gutenberg eBook. + +This header should be the first thing seen when viewing this Project +Gutenberg file. Please do not remove it. Do not change or edit the +header without written permission. + +Please read the "legal small print," and other information about the +eBook and Project Gutenberg at the bottom of this file. Included is +important information about your specific rights and restrictions in +how the file may be used. You can also find out about how to make a +donation to Project Gutenberg, and how to get involved. + + +**Welcome To The World of Free Plain Vanilla Electronic Texts** + +**eBooks Readable By Both Humans and By Computers, Since 1971** + +*****These eBooks Were Prepared By Thousands of Volunteers!***** + + +Title: With Buller in Natal + A Born Leader + +Author: G. A. Henty + +Release Date: January, 2005 [EBook #7334] +[Yes, we are more than one year ahead of schedule] +[This file was first posted on April 15, 2003] + +Edition: 10 + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ASCII + +*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK WITH BULLER IN NATAL *** + + + + +Produced by Tony Hyland, Charles Franks and the +Online Distributed Proofreading Team. + + + + +WITH BULLER IN NATAL + + +[Illustration: "CHRIS SPRANG AT HIM."] + + +WITH BULLER IN NATAL + +OR, A BORN LEADER + +BY + +G. A. HENTY + + + +PREFACE + +It will be a long time before the story of the late war can be written +fully and impartially. Even among the narratives of those who witnessed +the engagements there are many differences and discrepancies, as is +necessarily the case when the men who write are in different parts of +the field. Until, then, the very meagre military despatches are +supplemented by much fuller details, anything like an accurate history +of the war would be impossible. I have, however, endeavoured to +reconcile the various narratives of the fighting in Natal, and to make +the account of the military occurrences as clear as possible. +Fortunately this is not a history, but a story, to which the war forms +the background, and, as is necessary in such a case, it is the heroes of +my tale, the little band of lads from Johannesburg, rather than the +leaders of the British troops, who are the most conspicuous characters +in the narrative. As these, although possessed of many admirable +qualities, had not the faculty of being at two places at once, I was +obliged to confine the action of the story to Natal. With the doings of +the main army I hope to deal next year. + +G. A. HENTY + + + +CONTENTS + +I. THE BURSTING OF THE STORM + +II. A TERRIBLE JOURNEY + +III. AT THE FRONT + +IV. DUNDEE + +V. THE FIRST BATTLE + +VI. ELANDSLAAGTE + +VII. LADYSMITH BESIEGED + +VIII. A DESPERATE PROJECT + +IX. KOMATI-POORT + +X. AN EXPLOSION + +XI. BACK WITH THE ARMY + +XII. THE BATTLE OF COLENSO + +XIII. PRISONERS + +XIV. SPION KOP + +XV. SPION KOP + +XVI. A COLONIST'S ADVENTURE + +XVII. A RESCUE + +XVIII. RAILWAY HILL + +XIX. MAJUBA DAY + +XX. LADYSMITH + + + +ILLUSTRATIONS + +"CHRIS SPRANG AT HIM" + +CHRIS OFFERS HIS SERVICES TO SIR PENN SYMONS + +CHRIS AND HIS COMPANIONS SCOUTING + +"BOTH RIFLES CRACKED AT ONCE" + +"THERE WAS A TREMENDOUS ROAR AND A BLINDING CRASH" + +"WITH A SHOUT OF TRIUMPH THE TWO BOERS RAN DOWN" + +"PRESENTLY FROM BEHIND THE FOOT OF THE HILL SIX HORSEMEN DASHED OUT" + +THE NAVAL GUNS ON MOUNT ALICE + +"ONE OF THE BOERS HELD UP HIS RIFLE WITH A WHITE FLAG TIED TO IT" + +THE RELIEF OF LADYSMITH + + + + +[Illustration: SOUTH EASTERN AFRICA] + +WITH BULLER IN NATAL + + + + +CHAPTER I + +THE BURSTING OF THE STORM + + +A group of excited men were gathered in front of the Stock Exchange at +Johannesburg. It was evident that something altogether unusual had +happened. All wore anxious and angry expressions, but a few shook hands +with each other, as if the news that so much agitated them, although +painful, was yet welcome; and indeed this was so. + +For months a war-cloud had hung over the town, but it had been thought +that it might pass over without bursting. None imagined that the blow +would come so suddenly, and when it fell it had all the force of a +complete surprise, although it had been so threatening for many weeks +that a considerable portion of the population had already fled. It was +true that great numbers of men, well armed, and with large numbers of +cannon, had been moving south, but negotiations were still going on and +might continue for some time yet; and now by the folly and arrogance of +one man the cloud had burst, and in thirty hours war would begin. + +Similar though smaller groups were gathered here and there in the +streets. Parties of Boers from the country round rode up and down with +an air of insolent triumph, some of them shouting "We shall soon be rid +of you; in another month there will not be a rooinek left in South +Africa." + +Those addressed paid no heed to the words. They had heard the same thing +over and over again for the past two months. There was a tightening of +the lips and a closing of the fingers as if on a sword or rifle, but no +one replied to the insolent taunts. For years it had been the hope of +the Uitlanders that this would come, and that there would be an end to a +position that was well-nigh intolerable. Never before had a large body +of intelligent men been kept in a state of abject subjection by an +inferior race, a race almost without even the elements of civilization, +ignorant and brutal beyond any existing white community, and superior +only in the fact that they were organized and armed, whereas those they +trampled upon were deficient in both these respects. Having no votes, +these were powerless to better their condition by the means common to +civilized communities throughout the world. They were ground down by an +enormous taxation, towards which the Boers themselves contributed +practically nothing, and the revenue drawn from them was spent in the +purchase of munitions of war, artillery, and fortifications, so +enormously beyond the needs of the country, that it was no secret that +they were intended not only for the defence of the republic against +invasion, but for a general rising of the Boer population and the +establishment of Dutch supremacy throughout the whole of South Africa. + +The Boer government was corrupt from the highest to the lowest. The +president and the members of his family piled up wealth to an enormous +amount, and nothing could be done without wholesale bribery. The price +of everything connected with the mining industry was doubled by the +supply being in the hands of monopolists, who shared their gains with +high state officials. Money was lavished like water on what was called +secret service, in subsidizing newspapers to influence public opinion +throughout Europe, and, as it was strongly suspected, in carrying on a +propaganda among the Dutch in Cape Colony, and in securing the return of +members and a ministry secretly pledged to further in every way the aims +of the Presidents of the Transvaal and the Orange Free State. The +British and other aliens were not only deprived of all rights of +citizenship, but even freedom of speech and the right of public meeting +was denied them; they were not allowed to carry arms except by a special +license, their children were taught in Dutch in the schools, they had no +right of trial by jury; judges who had the courage to refuse to carry +out the illegal behests of the president were deprived of their offices, +and the few editors of newspapers representing the Uitlanders--as all +men not born in the state were called-were imprisoned and their journals +suppressed. + +Intolerable as was such a state of things to a civilized community, it +might have been borne with some patience had it not been that the +insolence of their masters was unbounded. Every Boer seemed to take a +pleasure in neglecting no opportunity of showing his contempt for the +men whose enterprise and labour had enormously enriched the country, and +whose superior intelligence he was too grossly ignorant to appreciate. A +Boar farmer would refuse a cup of water to a passing traveller, and +would enforce his refusal by producing his rifle immediately if the +stranger ventured to urge his request. Of late the insolence of the +Boers had greatly increased; the manner in which England had, instead of +demanding justice with the sternness and determination that the +circumstances called for, permitted her remonstrances to be simply +ignored, was put down as a consciousness of weakness. And having now +collected arms sufficient not only for themselves but for the whole +Dutch population of South Africa, the Boers were convinced that their +hour of triumph had come, and that in a very short time their flag would +float over every public building throughout the country and the Union +Jack disappear for ever. + +The long discussions that had been going on with regard to a five or +seven years' franchise were regarded with absolute indifference by the +Uitlanders--even the shorter time would have afforded them no advantage +whatever. The members from the mining districts would be in a hopeless +minority in the assembly; and indeed, very few of those entitled to a +vote would have cared to claim it, inasmuch as they would thereby render +themselves citizens of the republic, and be liable to be commandeered +and called upon to serve in arms, not only against the natives, upon +whom the Boers were always making aggressions, but against England, when +the war, which all foresaw could not long be delayed, broke out. + +For months the negotiations went on between President Kruger and Mr. +Chamberlain, the British colonial minister, and the certainty that the +Boers were bent upon fighting became more and more evident. Vast +quantities of rifles, ammunition, and cannon poured into the Transvaal, +their passage being more than winked at by the Dutch ministry of Cape +Colony. + +It was that day known that President Kruger had thrown off the mask of a +pretended desire for peace, and that an ultimatum had been telegraphed +to England couched in terms of such studied insolence that it was +certain war must ensue. The greatest civilized power on earth would have +shown less arrogance towards the most feeble. Not only was England +called upon to send no more troops to South Africa, but to withdraw most +of her forces already in the country, and this by a state that owed its +very existence to her, and whose total population was not more than that +of a small English county. + +The terms of that ultimatum had just become known in Johannesburg, and +it was not surprising that it had created an intense excitement. All had +long felt that war must come, and that at an early date, but the step +that had now been taken came as a surprise. From all appearances it had +seemed that the negotiations might be continued for months yet before +the crisis arrived, and that it should thus have been forced on by the +wording of the ultimatum showed that the Boers were satisfied that their +preparations were complete, and that they were in a position to overrun +Natal and Cape Colony before any British force capable of withstanding +them could arrive. England, indeed, had been placed in a most difficult +position. The ministry were not unaware of the enormous preparations +that the Boers were making, and had for some time past been quietly +sending out a large number of officers and a few non-commissioned +officers and men to the Cape. But so long as there was a hope that the +Boers would finally grant some redress to the Uitlanders, they could not +despatch any considerable number of troops, for had they done so they +would have been accused not only on the Continent, but by a section of +Englishmen, of forcing on a war with a weak state, whereas in point of +fact the war was being forced on by a country that most erroneously +believed itself to be stronger than England. The Boers of the Transvaal +knew already that the Orange Free State would join them at once, and +believed firmly that every Dutchman in Natal and Cape Colony would at +the signal take up arms. + +Presently a gentleman detached himself from the crowd in front of the +Exchange, and joined a lad of some sixteen years old who was standing on +the other side of the street. + +"Well, father, is it all true what they say?" the latter asked--"that +Kruger has sent such an ultimatum to England that war is certain?" + +"It is quite true, Chris; war is absolutely certain. Kruger has given +the British Government only two days to reply to the most insolent +demand ever addressed to a great power, and worded in the most offensive +manner. I imagine that no reply will be given; and as the ultimatum was +sent off yesterday, we shall to-morrow morning be in a state of war." + +"Well, father, there is no doubt what the result will be." + +"No doubt whatever as to the final result, but I am afraid things will +go very badly for a time. I am glad, very glad, that Kruger should have +sent such an ultimatum. It cannot but be accepted as a defiance by all +England; and I should say that even the opposition, which has of late +continually attacked Mr. Chamberlain, will now be silenced, and that +Government will be supported by all parties." + +After a quarter of an hour's walk they arrived at home. It was a +handsome house, for Mr. King was one of the leading men in Johannesburg. +He had come out with a wife and son ten years before, being sent by some +London capitalists to report to them fully upon the prospects of the +gold-fields. Under his advice they had purchased several properties, +which had been brought out as companies, and proved extremely valuable. +He was himself a large holder in each of these, and acted as manager and +director of the group. "What is the news, Robert?" his wife asked, as he +and her son came in. "I have had three or four visitors in here, and +they all say that there is quite an excitement in the town." + +"It has come at last," he said gravely; "war is inevitable, and will +begin in twenty-four hours. Kruger has sent one of the most +extraordinary demands ever drawn up. He calls upon England to cease +sending out troops, and to speedily recall most of those now in South +Africa, and has given two days for a reply, of which one has already +expired. As it is absolutely certain that England will not grant this +modest request, we may say that the war has begun. I wish now that I had +sent you and Chris down to Durban a fortnight ago, for there will be a +fearful rush, and judging by the attitude of the Boers, I fear they will +make the journey a very unpleasant one. As we have agreed, it is +absolutely necessary that I should remain here. There is no saying what +steps the Boers will take with reference to the mines; but it is certain +that we must, if possible, keep them going--not for the sake of the +profit, which you may be sure Kruger will not allow to go out of the +country, but because if they were to be stopped it would cost an immense +deal of money to put them in working condition again, especially if, as +is likely enough, the Boers damage the machinery. I shall do as little +work as I can; and the Boers will not, I fancy, interfere with us as +long as they can benefit by the working. For myself, I would risk any +loss or damage rather than aid in supplying them with gold, but for the +sake of our shareholders in Europe I must do my best to save the mines +from destruction. Indeed, if I don't work them, probably they will do so +until the end is at hand, and will then do as much damage as possible. +You know we have agreed on this point." "Yes, I suppose it is best, +Robert; but it seems terrible leaving you alone here, and I shall be in +a perpetual state of anxiety about you." + +"I don't think there is any occasion for that; as long as I am working +the mines and they are taking the gold, which no doubt they will have to +repay when our army are masters here, they will not interfere with me. +They treat us badly enough, as we know; but they love the gold even more +than they hate us, so I have no fear whatever as to my personal safety. +I am afraid, dear, that for a time things will go very badly with us. +Already we know that commandos have gone forward in great strength to +the frontier, and I should not be surprised if the whole of South Africa +rises; at any rate, the Boers are confident that it will be so. +Gladstone's miserable surrender after our disasters at Laing's Nek and +Majuba have puffed them up with such an idea of their own fighting +powers and our weakness, that I believe they think they are going to +have almost a walk over. Still, though it was certain that we should +have a hard time whenever war came, we have been hoping for years that +England would at last interfere to obtain redress for us, and we must +not grumble now that what we have been so long expecting has at last +come to pass. I believe there will be some stern fighting. The Boers are +no cowards; courage is, indeed, as far as I know, the only virtue they +possess. In the long run they must certainly be beaten, but it will only +be after very hard fighting." + +"What do you think they will do, father?" + +"I can't say what they will do, but I am sure that what they ought to do +is to merely hold the passes from Natal with enough men for the purpose, +and to march their whole force, broken up into half a dozen columns, +into Cape Colony. There is no force there that could resist them, they +would be undoubtedly joined by every Dutchman there, and I am convinced +that the Africander ministry would at once declare for them, in which +case England would have to undertake the tremendous work of conquering +the whole of South Africa afresh, for certainly she could not allow it +to slip from her hands, even if it should prove as stern a business as +the conquering of half India after the Sepoy Mutiny. Now to business. +Fortunately we sent down your clothes and everything we had of value to +our friends the Wilsons, at Durban, six weeks ago. What you have +remaining you must leave behind to take its chance. You will be able to +take no luggage whatever with you. We know how terribly the trains have +been packed for the past fortnight, and a week ago almost all the +carriages were commandeered for the use of the troops going south. + +"You must take with you a basket of provisions, sufficient, if +necessary, for two or three days for you both. There is no saying how +long you may be on your way to the frontier; once beyond that you will, +of course, be able to obtain anything you want. But you need expect no +civility or courtesy from the Boers, who, indeed, would feel a malicious +pleasure in shunting you off into a siding, and letting you wait there +for any number of hours. You must mind, Chris, above all things, to keep +your temper, whatever may happen. You know how our people have been +insulted, and actually maltreated in scores of cases, and in their +present state of excitement the Boers would be only too glad to find an +excuse for acts of violence. I was speaking to you about it three days +ago, and I cannot impress it too strongly upon you. I have already given +you permission to join one or other of the corps that are being raised +in Natal, and if anything unpleasant occurs on the road, you must bottle +up your feelings and wait till you get a rifle in your hand and stand on +equal terms with them." + +"I promise that, father. I think, after what we have had to put up with +here, during the past two or three months especially, I can bear +anything for these last few days." + +"Yes, Chris; but it will be more trying now that you have your mother +under your charge. It is for her sake as well as your own that I impress +this so strongly upon you. Now, will you go down at once to the railway- +station and enquire about the trains? I shall go myself to the manager +and see whether I can get him to make any special arrangement in your +mother's favour, though I have no great hopes of that; for though I know +him well, he is, like all these Dutchmen in office, an uncivilized brute +puffed up with his own importance." + +Chris started at once, and returned an hour later with a very +discouraging report. The station was crowded with people. No regular +trains were running, but while he was there a large number of cattle- +trucks had been run up to the platform, and in these as many of the +fugitives as could be packed in were stowed away. As soon as this was +done the train had started, but not half the number collected on the +platform had found room in it. His father had left a few minutes after +him, and presently returned. + +"From what I can hear," he said, "there is no chance whatever of your +being able to get any accommodation, but must take your chance with the +others. Viljoen told me that except the waggons there was not a carriage +of any sort or class left here, and that there was no saying at all when +any would return; but that even if they did, they would be taken for the +use of the troops going south. All he could say was that if, when I came +down to the station with you, he is there, he will see that you go by +the first waggons that leave." + +"That is something at least," Mrs. King said quietly. "I certainly do +not wish to ask for any favour from these people, and do not want to be +better off than others. I have no doubt that it will be an unpleasant +time, but after all it will be nothing to what great numbers of people +will have to suffer during the war." + +"That is so, Amy. And now I think that the sooner the start is made the +better. The rush to get away will increase every hour, and we shall have +the miners coming in in hundreds. Many of the mines will be shut down at +once, though some of them will, like ours, continue operations as long +as they are allowed to." + +"Make your basket, or bag, or whatever you take your provisions in, as +small as possible, mother. I saw lots of baggage left behind on the +platform. You see, there are no seats to stow things under. I should say +that a flat box which you can sit on would be the best thing. And you +will want your warmest cloak and a thick rug for night." + +"I have a box that will do very well, Chris. Fortunately we have plenty +of cold meat and bread in the house. I shall not be more than half an +hour, Robert." + +In less than that time the party were ready. Chris's preparations had +been of the simplest. He carried over his arm a long, thick greatcoat, +in the pocket of which he had thrust a fur cap and two woollen +comforters. He had also a light but warm rug, for he thought it probable +that he might not be able to be next to his mother. He had on his usual +light tweed suit, but had in addition put on a cardigan waistcoat, which +he intended to take off when once in the train. In his pockets he had a +couple of packets of tobacco, for although he seldom smoked, he thought +that some of it might be very acceptable to his fellow-passengers before +the journey was over. He wore a light gray, broad-brimmed wide-awake, +with a white silk puggaree twisted round it, for the heat of the sun in +the middle of the day was already very great, and would be greater still +when they got down to Natal. The box, which a Kaffir servant put on his +shoulder, was about eight inches deep and a foot wide, and eighteen +inches long. + +"What have you in it, mother?" + +"Two tin bottles of cold tea, each holding a gallon." + +"I should hardly have thought that we wanted as much as that." + +"No; but there may be many women who have made no provision at all, +thinking that we shall at least be able to get water at any of the +stations we stop at. I have a small tin mug, and that joint of meat; the +rest of the box is filled up with bread-and-butter. I have cut it up and +spread it, so that it packs a good deal closer than it would do if we +put the loaves in whole." + +Mr. King had his wife's thick-wadded winter cloak and a rug over his +arm, and a small hand-bag with a few necessaries for the journey. Mrs. +King was in her usual attire, and carried only a white umbrella. + +"We look as if we were starting for a picnic rather than a journey that +will last three or four days," she said with an attempt at gaiety. +"There is one comfort, we shall have nothing to look after when we get +to the end." + +Chris walked on ahead to let his father and mother talk together, for +although all arrangements had been discussed and settled during the past +two or three days, there was much they had to say to each other now that +the parting had come. The lad was a fine specimen of the young +Uitlander. A life passed largely in the open air, hard work and +exercise, had broadened his shoulders and made him look at least a year +older than he really was. He was a splendid rider and an excellent shot +with his rifle, for his father had obtained a permit from the +authorities for him to carry one, and he could bring down an antelope +when running at full speed as neatly as any of the young Boers. Four +days a week he had spent in the mines, for his father intended him to +follow in his footsteps, and he had worked by turns with the miners +below and the engineers on the surface, so that he might in the course +of a few years be thoroughly acquainted with all the details of his +profession. + +The last two days in each week he had to himself, and with three or four +lads of his own age went for long rides in search of sport. A couple of +hours every evening were spent in study under his father's direction. He +was quiet in manner, and talked but little. He deeply resented the +position in which the British population in the Transvaal were placed, +the insolence of the Boers towards them, and their brutal cruelty +towards the natives. The restraint which he so often found it necessary +to exercise had had no slight influence on his character, and had given +a certain grim expression to the naturally bright face. Many had been +the discussions between him and his friends as to the prospect of +England's taking up their cause. Their disappointment had been intense +at the miserable failure of the Jameson raid, which, however, they felt, +and rightly, must some day have a good result, inasmuch as it had +brought out the wretched position of the Uitlanders, who, though forming +the majority of the population, and the source of all the wealth of the +country, and paying all the taxes, were yet treated as an outcast race, +and deprived of every right possessed by people of all civilized +nations. + +They had wondered and fretted at the apathy with which the enormous +warlike preparations of the Boers were regarded at home, and the fact +that they were permitted to become a formidable power, capable of +offering a desperate resistance even by the armies of England; whereas, +before they had been enriched by the industry and enterprise of the +immigrants, they had been in danger of being altogether wiped out by the +Zulus and Swazis, and had only been saved by the interference on their +behalf of the British power. Thus, then, while the war-cloud had been +slowly but surely gathering, the lads had watched the approaching crisis +with delight, unmingled with the anxiety and foreboding of the +capitalists, who, without doubting what the end must be, were sure that +enormous losses and sacrifices must result before their deliverance from +Boer oppression could be obtained. + +The scene at the station was an extraordinary one. Men, women, and +children of all ranks were crowded on the platform; the greater +capitalists, the men whose fortunes could be counted by hundreds of +thousands, had for the most part left, but many who in England would be +considered as rich men had remained in the town till the last moment, to +make their final arrangements and wind up their affairs. With these were +well-to-do storekeepers, with their wives and families, together with +mining officials, miners, and mechanics of all kinds. Piles of baggage +rendered movement difficult, for many had supposed that the regular +trains were still running, and that they would be able to carry away +with them the greater portion of their belongings. The scenes at the +departure of the previous trains roughly awakened them to the fact that +all this must be abandoned, and women were crying and men cursing below +their breath at this last evidence of Boer indifference to the +sufferings of those by whose work they had so greatly benefited. Mr. +King soon found that the manager was still there, but on speaking to him +he shrugged his shoulders, and said: + +"I do not see what I can do. Look at the crowd there. When the waggons +come up there will be a rush, and I have no men here to keep such a +number in order." + +"I see that, Mr. Viljoen, but if you would send a man with us to where +the waggons are standing in readiness to come up, my wife could take her +place then." + +"Yes, I will do that at once. You had better go with her outside the +station, and the porter shall take you on from there. If you were to get +off the platform here and walk up the lines, others would notice it, and +there would be an immediate rush." + +He called to one of the porters on the platform, and gave him +instructions, and in a few minutes Mrs. King was seated on her box in +the corner of a truck, which, with a few others, had a covered roof, +although it was entirely open at the sides. In the next half-hour eight +or ten others, who had been similarly favoured by the manager, joined +them. All these were known to the Kings, and it was a great relief to +them to find that they would travel together, instead of being mixed up +with the general crowd. They had packed themselves together as closely +as possible, so that when the train became crowded there should be no +room for anyone to push in among them. Among the party was John Cairns, +a great chum of Chris's. He and his father and mother had been waiting +for two hours at the station, and he told him that there were seven or +eight of their companions there. + +"We will take our seats on that side," Chris said, "and as we move in +shout to them to join us. It will be a great thing to get as many people +we know in here as possible." + +Presently the train began to move. Fortunately, at the spot where it +drew up, a group of their acquaintances were clustered together, and +these all managed to get into the truck, which was speedily filled up +until there was scarce standing-room. Three minutes later the train +moved on. A great number were left behind, although everyone made as +much room as possible, women especially being helped in after the trucks +seemed absolutely choke-full. As soon as the train was fairly in motion +many of the men climbed up on to the roofs of the covered waggons, +thereby relieving the pressure below, and enabling all the women to sit +down. Others ranged themselves along the sides, sitting on the rail, and +so minimizing the space they occupied. But even with all this, the women +were packed inconveniently together. All, however, were so much pleased +at their good fortune in having got away that there was no complaining +or grumbling. That the journey would be a long one, all knew; but at +least they had started, and would soon be a free people in a free +country. Chris and his friends had been among the first to climb up on +to the roof, and they sat down in a group at one end of it. + +"It is going to be pretty cold here to-night, and desperately hot to- +morrow," Chris said; "but we can put up with that. I would stand it for +a month rather than stop any longer among these brutes." There was a +general murmur of agreement. + +"Thank heavens," one of them said, "the next time we meet them will be +with arms in our hands. We have a long score to pay off, and we shall, I +expect, have plenty of chances. The Boers are boasting that they will +soon drive the last Englishman out of South Africa, and seem to regard +it as a sort of general picnic. They will find out their mistake before +they have done." + +"Still, we must not think that it is going to be a picnic our way," +Chris said. "They have quite made up their minds that every Boer in Cape +Colony and Natal will join them at once. If they do, it will be a very +long business to put them down, though I have no doubt it will all come +right in the end. Do you know anything about the others?" + +"I know that Peters and Carmichael and Brown went off with their people +last night, but I don't know about the others." + +"Capper and Willesden and Horrocks went yesterday," another lad said. +"Sankey and Holdsworth were on the platform, and no doubt got into +another truck. + +"There are seven of us here," Chris said, "and as six have gone on, that +makes thirteen certain, and there are eight more to come. Most of us +will stop at Pietermaritzburg, but I suppose some, whose friends are +going straight home, will go down with them to Durban." + +"There will not be many who have to do so," another said. "Sankey's +people and Carmichael's are going to Cape Town, but, so far as I know, +all the others will stay and see it out either at Maritzburg or Durban. +Do you think that we should take any others with us, Chris?" + +"I don't think so. You see we all know each other, and it would be a +nuisance having fellows with us of whom we know nothing. They might not +pull with us, while we have been so much together that there is no fear +of our having any disagreement. I think we have all pretty well settled +that it will be much better to act by ourselves, instead of joining any +of the corps that are sure to be formed down there. Still, if we knew +one of the men getting up a corps--and some of our people are pretty +sure to do so--I do think it would be a good plan to join, if they would +accept us as a sort of independent troop, ready to act with them when +there is any big fighting, and to go about on our own account at other +times. You see, none of us will want any pay. We shall all furnish our +own horses and arms, and shall therefore be on a different footing from +men who have to draw pay and be equipped at the public expense; and I +don't see why any officer commanding a troop in one of these corps +should object to our joining him on those terms. But anyhow, I feel sure +that we should be able to do a great deal more good by being free to +move where we liked, and to undertake expeditions on our own account, +than if we were to act in a more regular manner." + +There was a general chorus of agreement. + +"Now, how long do you think it will be before we cross Laing's Nek? Of +course we ought to be there by to-morrow morning. It is only a hundred +and fifty miles, and at fifteen miles an hour, which is about their +usual rate of travelling, we should cross the frontier at two o'clock, +for it was about four when we started. But there is no saying. My father +thought we ought to take four days' provisions with us; I think we could +hold out for that time." + +"You don't mean to say, Chris, he thought it possible we might be as +long as that?" "He did think so, Peters. He considered that we might be +shunted off very often to let trains with men and stores for the troops +go on ahead of us." + +"Well," the other replied, "I don't care so much for myself, though I +don't say that it would be lively to be stuck up here for four days and +nights, but it would be awful for the women; and I should say that very +few of them have got more than enough provisions for a day. Still, of +course, if we are shunted at a station we shall be able to buy things." + +"I am not so sure of that," Chris said. "You know what the Boers are at +their best; and now that they believe the time has arrived when they are +going to be the absolute lords of all South Africa, they are so puffed +up that there is no saying what they may do to show their hatred and +contempt for us. And whatever happens, you fellows, you must keep your +temper. My father spoke to me very strongly about it. You must remember +that they will not mind what they do, and would shoot any of us down on +the smallest excuse, knowing well enough that we are helpless, and that +it is unlikely any enquiry would ever be made, or anyone punished even +if they shot a dozen of us. We must remember that we intend to pay off +old scores later on, and that we mean to do it with interest." + + + + +CHAPTER II + +A TERRIBLE JOURNEY + + +Twenty-four hours had gone, and not half the distance had yet been +covered. The night had passed painfully to all those in the waggons, for +though most of the women had provided themselves with wraps of one sort +or another, the cold was severe. This, however, was less felt than the +cramped position in which all had to sit on the floor, unable to move or +to stretch their legs, the only change obtainable being by standing up. +The pressure was most felt in the open waggons, where the men as well as +the women were packed together so closely that even sitting down was +impossible. Some slight relief had been afforded by the men on the +covered waggons taking as many from the uncovered trucks as could lie +down there with them; but as the latter were by far the more numerous, a +comparatively small number of men could be so entertained. + +For a time the rising of the sun afforded some relief, but as it gained +in power the position of the fugitives became almost unbearable. The +stoppages were frequent, and at all the stations the Boers from the +neighbourhood had assembled, some from curiosity, but the majority to +wait for the trains that were to take them to the front. Although +sometimes detained for three or four hours, the passengers were not +allowed to alight. The men, indeed, at times, by common impulse, sprang +out, but were soon forced to take their places again, some of the Boers +using their heavy whips over their heads and shoulders, while others +with pointed guns prevented any attempt at retaliation. Men, and even +women, crowded the platform, jeering and cursing those in the waggons, +menacing them with their whips and snatching at such trinkets, and even +cloaks as took their fancy. The men were all several times searched for +weapons, and made to turn their pockets inside out, the contents being +unceremoniously transferred to those of the Boers. Chris and his +companions would have taken their places below with their friends, but +these implored them not to do so, being afraid that they would be +enraged beyond endurance, and might in their anger say or do something +that would give an excuse to the Boers to use their rifles, which they +so often pointed threateningly at women as well as men. It was only when +the train was in motion that food and drink were passed up from below, +as these too would assuredly, had they been seen, have been confiscated +by the brutal tormentors. + +When they steamed into Standerton in the afternoon, the distress of the +women and children for water was so great that men determined at all +costs to endeavour to get some for them. As if by one impulse, when the +train came to a standstill outside the station, they jumped out and made +for the little village. But here all refused to give or sell them water +or food, and in a few minutes a large party of Boers rode in, and +falling upon them with their whips, drove them back to the train. Had +they been armed the men would assuredly have resisted till the last, +although certain to be killed, so mad were they with passion. As it was, +it would have been throwing away their lives, without a chance of even +avenging themselves on their assailants. As they reached the waggons and +climbed into their places again, several had broad blue weals across +their faces, while many more were smarting from the cuts they had +received on the body. Chris and his companions had got out when the +others did so, but had not followed them. Their supply of water and cold +tea was not yet exhausted, as most of the ladies had made preparations +for a journey of two or three days, and Mrs. King and the mothers of the +other lads begged them not to go. + +"The Boers are only waiting for an excuse to use their firearms," Mrs. +King said, "and whatever happens you had better stay here. You can do no +good by going." So, reluctantly, they had again taken their places on +the roofs of the carriages, and sat there with their pulses beating and +their fists clenched as they heard the shouts and the cracking of the +heavy whips in the village, and presently saw the men running back, +pursued by their cowardly assailants. Two or three of the lads were so +enraged at the sight that they would have jumped down had not Chris laid +a restraining hand on them. + +"Wait your time," he said in a hard voice. "We can't repay them now, but +we will remember this when our turn comes." + +The Boers, as they rode up, leapt from their horses, and with shouts of +exultation walked along the waggons, striking at the men, hurling every +epithet of contempt and hatred at them, and even spitting at them. Many +of the women were also struck as well as being grossly insulted. + +"And these scoundrels call themselves Christian men, and their friends +speak of them as simple pious farmers! I call them, both from their +appearance and their actions, as unmitigated a set of ruffians as are to +be found on the face of the globe," Cairns exclaimed passionately. + +They were indeed as unsavoury in appearance as they were brutal in +manner. Water is scarce in the Transvaal, and is used most sparingly for +all purposes of cleanliness. The Boer sleeps in his clothes, gives +himself a shake when he gets up, and his toilet is completed, unless on +very exceptional occasions when he goes outside the door to the water- +cask, fills his hands with water, and rubs them over his face. + +Four times in the year, however, the Boers indulge in a general wash +before starting with their wives and families for four or five days' +stay at the nearest town to attend the services of the church and to do +their quarter's marketing. In dress the Boer is almost universally +slovenly, his clothes hang about him stained and discoloured by long +usage. In the majority of cases he is altogether without education, and +very many Boers are scarcely able to sign their names. Most of them wear +beards and long unkempt hair. But in point of physique they are fine +men, tall and powerfully, though loosely, built, but capable of standing +great fatigue if necessary, although averse to all exercise save on +horseback. All are taught to shoot from boyhood, and even the women in +the country districts are trained in the use of firearms, for it is not +so long since they lived in dread of incursions by the Zulus and Swazis. + +There was no attempt whatever at uniformity of dress. Most of the men +wore high riding boots. Some of the young men from the towns were in +tweed suits, the vast majority wore either shooting jackets or long +loose coats; some were in straw hats, but the elder men all wore large +felt hats with wide brims. They were all, however, similarly armed with +rifles of the best and most modern construction. Their general +appearance was that of a large band of farmers of the roughest type and +wholly without regard for their personal appearance. + +It was fully an hour before the train moved again. Then it was shunted +on to a siding while the Boers entrained with their horses on a long +line of waggons which had just come up, and which started on its way +south as soon as they were on board. Then the emigrant tram crawled on +again. There was another night of wretchedness, and in the morning they +arrived at Volksrust, the frontier town. Here they were again closely +searched for arms, and what provisions remained among them were +commandeered, or as the emigrants called it, stolen. However, they knew +that their troubles were now nearly over, and did not grumble when they +were informed that the train would go no farther, and that they must +make their way on foot to Newcastle. + +They were told tauntingly that they might find some of their friends +there if they had not already run away, and that if they stopped at +Pietermaritzburg for a week they would have another journey down to +Durban as prisoners. All were too glad to get out of the clutches of the +Boers to utter complaints which they knew would be useless, and they +went off at once. The prospect was not, however, a pleasant one. +Newcastle was nearly thirty miles away, but they hoped that at least +they might obtain shelter and rest and food for the women at some of the +scattered farms. At first their progress was slow, for after being for +more than two days and a half packed up like cattle, they had almost +lost the use of their limbs; but gradually the pace was accelerated. Men +took the little children on their shoulders, others helped the women +along. Charlestown, on the British side of the frontier, was already +occupied by the Boers, who hooted and abused them as they passed +through. At Laing's Nek there was a Dutch commando with some guns. + +Two miles on the women could go no further, and they halted at a large +farmhouse which had been deserted by its owners. All the men, however, +who were alone, determined to push on at once to Newcastle, and promised +they would send vehicles of some sort to take them on if they could +possibly be obtained. Mrs. King and the other ladies authorized them to +pay any sums demanded. + +Thankful indeed were the tired women when they reached the farmhouse. +They found the doors unfastened, as the farmer knew that were he to lock +them the Boers would certainly batter them in when they arrived, and +would probably do greater damage to the furniture left behind than if +they had obtained an entry without trouble. The men soon found the wood- +shed, and in a short time great fires blazed in every room. The bedding +had been carried away, but utterly worn out as they were, the women were +only too glad to lie down on rugs and cover themselves with their +cloaks. The men gathered in the lower room and talked for some time +before thinking of going to sleep. There was scarce one who was not +determined to join one of the volunteer corps being raised at Durban and +Maritzburg, and to avenge the insults and ill-treatment to which they +had been subjected. The long-smouldering animosity towards the Boers had +been fanned during the past three days into a fierce fire, and even +those who had not before thought of taking part in the struggle were now +as eager as the others to do so. + +In the morning all were astir early. Had they been supplied with food +they would have waited until waggons came out from Newcastle, but these +could hardly arrive until evening, and at any moment the Boer advance +might commence. They therefore determined to move on early, for if they +met the waggons half-way these could return with them at once to the +town. It was desirable to start as soon as possible so as to get well on +the way before the heat of the day was at its fullest. Accordingly by +six all were in movement. The long night's rest had done them good, +still more so the thought that by the end of the day they would be among +friends, and they were disposed to laugh and joke over their present +situation. All the men had cut themselves heavy cudgels from the stock +of firewood, and the fact that they were not as before wholly +defenceless was no slight gratification to them. Even the ladies spoke +confidently of being able to walk the twenty miles to Newcastle should +they not meet vehicles coming to fetch them. They could go ten miles now +and then halt till the sun was setting, and after such a long rest could +certainly go on to Newcastle. + +"I am afraid, mother," Chris said as they started, "that what seems so +easy now will be too much for many of the women. We started without +breakfast, and unless we can get something by the way I doubt if many +will reach the town to-night. Of course for the men it is nothing. Very +often when I have been out on the veldt and have started early, I have +had nothing till I got back late in the evening. What are you wearing +that veil for, mother? I saw that you pulled it down over your face +yesterday afternoon. I suppose you did it to keep the dust out of your +eyes, but there is none now." + +"I had a reason for doing it, but I can put it up now." + +She lifted the white veil to its usual place round her hat; as she did +so, Chris uttered a sharp exclamation as his eye fell on a bluish-red +mark across her face. + +"You don't mean to say, mother," he said in a tone of horror, "that one +of those scoundrels struck you?" + +"They struck a good many of us, Chris, and there was no reason why I +should escape more than another." + +The lad's face grew white. + +"Why did you not call out? I would have--" + +"I know you would," she interrupted gently, "and so of course I did not +cry out. You had all had enough to try you to the utmost, and I was not +going to risk your life by letting you know what had happened. It +flashed across me at once that if you had seen it happen you would have +been down from the roof in an instant and struck the man. Had you done +so, your fate would have been sealed, you would have had half a dozen +bullets in your body; therefore, I simply dropped my veil, and I can +assure you that the smart of the Boer's sjambok gave me less pain when I +felt that you knew nothing of it." + +Chris walked along silently for a minute or two; then he said quietly: +"Thank you, mother. I am sure it would have been as you said. I could +not have helped it. No one could see his mother struck without +interfering." + +"I can understand that, dear; but it would have been a poor consolation +for me had you been killed in endeavouring to right a wrong that I could +very well put up with, and shall forget in a week." + +"I suppose so, mother. I should not so much mind if I only knew the +fellow's name, or even knew him by sight, so that I might possibly have +the chance some day of settling accounts with him." + +They walked on until eight o'clock, and then rested under the shade of +some rocks. Fortunately there had been some rain two days before, and +they had been able to quench their thirst at a little stream that came +down from the hills. There were in all some thirty women and eighteen +men. + +"Look here, Harris," Chris said, "there is a farmhouse over there, and +as I see cattle and horses, it evidently is not deserted. Let us go and +see if we can get some bread and some milk for the women." + +"All right!" + +The other lads were quite ready to go also, and they walked across to +the house, which stood some half a mile away. As they approached it a +Boer came out. On seeing them he re-entered it, and appeared again with +a rifle. + +"I am afraid we shall get nothing here," Harris said. "The Dutchmen in +Natal are only waiting for the Boers to advance to join them." + +"Well, we will try anyhow," Chris said doggedly. "I dare say that you +are right; but Boer or no Boer, if there is any food in that house I +mean to get it." + +They went quietly on. When they were within fifty yards the Boer shouted +to them to go back. + +"We have some women and children with us," Chris replied, continuing to +advance. "They are exhausted from want of food and fatigue, and we have +come to ask for some bread, and if you have it in the house, some milk." + +"If the house was full of both you should not have a crumb of bread or a +drop of milk. Halt! I say, or I will put a bullet into you." + +Chris did not heed the command. + +"We have plenty of money to pay you, and are willing to give ten times +its fair price." + +He was now within ten yards of the farmer. The latter burst into a +torrent of abuse, and was in the act of raising his rifle when Chris +sprang at him. The Boer, who had no idea that this lad would venture to +attack him, discharged his rifle almost at random, and the ball passed +through the brim of Chris's hat. An instant later his heavy stick fell +on the Boer's head, and levelled him to the ground. + +"Now, Harris," he shouted, "do you and the others go into the house, and +first of all bring me out one of these fellows' whips. Cairns, pick up +his rifle, and reload it. Sankey, do you and the others keep guard at +the door, and don't let those viragoes out"--for three women had just +appeared, and were cursing with a fluency that Billingsgate would have +envied. + +Harris had already come out with a heavy whip by the time Cairns had +reloaded. Chris took it and said to the Boer, who, in view of the +formidable sticks the lads carried, had thought it best to lie quiet; + +"Now you can get up, you hulking ruffian. I am going to give you a +lesson in civility. Oh, you won't get up? Well, it will make no +difference to me," and he proceeded to give the howling Boer a +tremendous thrashing. "There," he said, when his arm was tired, "you may +get up and go, and I hope that the lesson will do you good. Now, Cairns, +we will search the house. It is likely enough he has a lot of rifles +hidden somewhere, and perhaps when we have gone he may go and fetch some +more of his class. We may as well possess ourselves of them." + +The seven lads went into the house, paying no further attention to the +Boer. In spite of the fury of the women, they searched the house +thoroughly, and in a large case in a disused room they found twelve +Mauser rifles, with a thousand cartridges. They then took a basket and +filled it with bread, and emptied the milk from two large pans into a +pail. + +"We are not thieves and robbers, like your people," Chris said to the +women, as he threw five shillings on the table. "Your man has been good +enough to tell us that he will be in Maritzburg with the Boers in a +week's time. Therefore, as war has been declared, the muskets are lawful +spoil taken from a rebel. Now, boys, let's be off." + +The cartridges were divided among them; then, with the thirteen guns, +the basket, and pail, they started to rejoin their friends. "Well, that +is a fair capture to begin with," Chris said. "As far as we are +concerned, the war has begun. The Boer has made off, I see. I should not +be surprised if we hear of him and some of his friends again. However, +now we are well armed they can come as soon as they like." + +Great was the joy among the women and children when they returned with +the much-needed refreshment. + +"I was getting very anxious about you, Chris," his mother said. "We +heard the man fire. But where have you got all these rifles from?" + +"The owner of the farm is a Boer, mother, and as he told us, a rebel. As +he began the affair by putting a bullet through my hat, and abusing us +and our nation heartily, we took the liberty of searching his house, +with good success. I need not say that he did not give us this bread and +the pail of milk of his own free-will, but I left the money for them." + +His mother had turned pale when he said that a bullet had gone through +his hat, but she said nothing. + +"What became of the man?" she asked. "You did not kill him, I hope?" + +"No, mother; I contented myself with thrashing him with one of his own +whips until my arm ached." + +There was enough bread for all to have a slice. The women and children +had as much milk as they could drink, the rest was divided among the +men. The extra rifles were given to those who could best use them. In +half an hour the women said that they were ready to go on again, and +that they would rather do that than wait, for they greatly feared that +the Boer might gather some of his friends and attack them. Feeling +greatly strengthened and refreshed, they started at a good pace. They +had gone about a mile when Sankey said to Chris: + +"Look, there is a party of mounted men across the valley." + +"Then we had better plant ourselves among the rocks, and let the unarmed +men go on with the women and children, and take shelter a bit farther +on. I don't suppose they will venture to attack us when they find, to +their disgust, that we are armed with as good rifles as their own. They +have a great respect for their lives." + +Accordingly the seven lads and the six men with rifles at once took up a +position among the rocks. The rest of the party went forward two hundred +yards and then took shelter also. The Boers, feeling certain that the +party was unarmed, did not trouble themselves to open fire at a +distance, but rode forward in a clump at full gallop. + +"They are about a thousand yards away now," one of the men said. "We may +as well give them a volley." + +The thirteen rifles flashed out almost simultaneously. There were, as +they had counted, sixteen Boers. Five horses fell, three others galloped +off riderless, and the party broke up and rode off at full speed in +various directions. + +"I don't think we need trouble any more about them," said Sankey's +father, who, was one of the party, as he rose to his feet. "You may be +sure that several of those who got away carried bullets somewhere about +them." + +As they turned to rejoin their friends there was a general exclamation +of satisfaction, for two large waggons were seen coming along the road. +In ten minutes the women and children, with all the older men, were +comfortably seated and on their way to Newcastle. Chris and his party +accompanied them on foot so as to form a rear-guard. "We have won our +first battle," Chris laughed. + +"But for you there would not have been any battle at all," Field said. +"I don't think any of us would have gone forward after that fellow +warned us back had you not done so." + +"I was determined to get some milk for the children," Chris said, "and +would have gone forward even if I had been alone. I don't think I ever +felt such a satisfaction as I did in thrashing that Boer. One of them +struck my mother across the face, you know, in the train, and though it +was not the same man, I feel better now that I have taken it out of +someone." + +At Newcastle they found a small British force, and learned that there +were four or five thousand troops at Dundee. Trains were still running, +and after only an hour's delay at Newcastle to obtain a meal, the whole +party went on. Late that evening they arrived at Colenso. Mrs. King and +the ladies and gentlemen of the party had decided to sleep there, but +hearing on the road that the little town was crowded with fugitives from +the Transvaal and the farms near the frontier, they determined to +continue the journey to the capital, which they reached the next +morning. The lads had quite decided upon their course before starting, +and had arranged with their parents to remain at Maritzburg. The general +opinion was that the British force at the front could not possibly +maintain itself, but that as soon as the invasion began in force they +must fall back, as the Transvaal Boers would be able to attack them in +front and on the right flank, while the Free Staters would pour down +through Van Reenen and De Beers Passes and make straight for Ladysmith, +and so threaten their line of retreat. + +There were a few indeed who still believed that the Boers would stand +entirely upon the defensive so far as Natal went. They would occupy the +formidable passes through the Drakensberg and await attack there, while +they would invade Cape Colony at many points and raise the Boer +population. However, the general opinion was that they would advance +into Natal in great force, and in that case it was doubtful, indeed, +whether Sir George White could oppose them successfully north of +Maritzburg. He might even, it was thought, be obliged to fall back to +Durban until reinforcements arrived from England. Already there was a +rush to the offices that had been opened for the volunteer corps. Many +of the fugitives from the Transvaal had joined, as had most of the young +farmers who had been obliged by the hostility of their Dutch neighbours +to abandon their homes in the north of Natal, while numbers of all ranks +in Maritzburg, Durban, and other towns were giving in their names. All +the lads who had come down with Chris had some time before obtained +their parents' consent to join a volunteer corps, or form one among +themselves, and as it was evident that the crisis was at hand no +objections were raised to their doing so at once. Mrs. King would go +down to Durban with her friends, so that there was no need for her son +to accompany her. + +It had been agreed by the other lads that they would all meet at ten +o'clock at the hotel where Chris put up, and the party mustered in +greater strength than had been expected, for they found that the boys +who had preceded them had all waited in the town, and were stopping at +the various hotels. They too had been as badly treated by the Boers as +the last arrivals, and were all eager to begin work. + +"There is no getting a private room here," Chris said, "so we had better +go outside the town and talk things over." As they went they chatted +over their adventures on the road, and great satisfaction was felt among +those who had not been present on hearing how Chris had thrashed the +Boer, and had gone tip to him in spite of his threat to shoot. At their +last meeting at Johannesburg they had elected him their captain, but he +had at the time refused to accept the post, saying that it would be +wiser to decide that afterwards, as one of the others might show himself +better fitted for the position. However, their first step when they sat +down by the bank of the little river outside the town was to again elect +him by acclamation. + +"Very well," he said, "as you all wish it I will accept the post. I +suppose we are well provided with funds. Our fathers all said they would +find our outfit, and money enough for all expenses." There was a general +assent. "Well, we start better than we had expected, for we have +thirteen rifles: twelve of them are Mausers, the other we will sell; so +we shall have to buy nine others. That had better be done this morning, +for we may be sure that there will be a rush to the gunsmiths' shops. In +the next place we must each buy a saddle and saddlery. We have agreed +that we will not have any approach to uniform; because, as we all speak +Dutch, we shall be able to pass unobserved, if necessary, among them. +But I have been thinking it over, and it seems to me that if we have +nothing of the sort we shall run the risk of being shot by our own men." + +"What are we to do, then, Chris?" + +"I think that we had better get flat caps, like the fatigue caps our +soldiers wear. They can be carried in our pockets inside our shirts when +we are in the neighbourhood of the Boers, and when we are riding +anywhere near our own troops we can put them on instead of our felt +hats. It would alter our appearance altogether when riding in groups, +and even at a distance we could hardly be taken for Boers." + +All agreed that it would be an excellent plan. + +"We shall, of course, have bandoliers for our cartridges, and haversacks +for our provisions and spare packets of ammunition. Not an hour must be +lost in getting these things. I hear that Captain Brookfield, who came +up to Johannesburg last year and stayed a fortnight with us, has raised +a corps, which he has named the Maritzburg Scouts. I will call upon him +this afternoon and tell him that there are one-and-twenty of us, all +somewhere about my age, and that we mean fighting; and that as we all +speak Dutch we think we can do more good by scouting about on our own +account than by joining any regular corps; but that at the same time we +should like, if there was anything like regular fighting, to place +ourselves under the orders of an officer like himself. It is rather +difficult to explain, you know, but I think he will understand what we +mean. We should be, in fact, a section of his troop, acting generally on +independent service, either scouting, or going in among the Boers and +getting intelligence, trying to blow up bridges, and engaging looting +parties--for we may be sure that the Boers will be scattering all over +the country plundering. + +"Of course I shall say, if he won't accept us on those terms, we shall +do as we best can on our own account; but that as we don't require pay, +and will provide ourselves with all necessaries, we do not see that we +should be any burden when we join him. I propose that we meet here again +this afternoon, and I hope that by that time we shall all have got our +mounts and saddlery. I hear that many of the loyal farmers north have +driven their animals down here, and are only too glad to sell the horses +at the usual prices. Mind, the clothes we have now won't do; we must get +them of farmer fashion. Don't go together to any shop, but let each +choose for himself; we don't want anything like uniformity of pattern. +The stuff must be strong. We shall each want a couple of blankets; one +of these, with a slit cut in the middle to slip over the head, will +serve as a greatcoat. Now, let us be off! To save trouble, I should say +that we had each better put a certain sum, say twenty pounds, to go into +a fund for general expenditure--food and ammunition, and that sort of +thing--into one of the banks, and we can draw upon that as we require +it." + +"I should say, Chris," Sankey said, "that we had better put all our +money into the fund. Our people are all going to pay for our outfit, and +you know they have agreed to give us a hundred pounds each to last us +through the war. It is of no use carrying money about with us. I think +we should agree to pay it all into the common fund, and that at the end +of the business what remains is to be divided among those of us who go +through it." + +"I think that is a good plan, Sankey. Certainly we cannot all expect to +come out alive, and that arrangement will save all trouble about money." + +On going back into the town they learned that a large farmer had +encamped two miles away, with a big drove of cattle and a couple of +hundred horses, many of which were fine animals, and it was agreed at +once that Sankey, Carmichael, and Peters should hire a buggy and drive +over there and choose twenty-one good horses. Harris and Field undertook +the purchase of the rifles, and Chris went to the office which Captain +Brookfield, who had been an officer in the English army had taken. He +had sent in his name, and was at once shown in. + +"Well, Chris," he said cordially as he entered, "I am glad to see you. +You have grown and widened out a good deal since last year. I suppose +your father and mother have both come down with you?" + +"My mother has come down, sir, but my father thought that he ought to +remain behind to look after the mines." + +"Have you come here to enlist?" + +"Not exactly, sir, and yet I have to a certain extent;" and he told the +officer of the little corps that had been formed among his companions at +Johannesburg. + +"A very good idea. Speaking Dutch, as you say they all do, they ought to +do good service as scouts. But why have you come to me?" + +This Chris explained. + +The captain laughed. "I suppose the fact is, Chris, you think that you +will be able to see and do more if you are altogether independent of +other people's orders." + +"Perhaps that is it, sir; but if there is any cavalry fighting we should +much rather be under orders. Such a small corps would look ridiculous +marching out by itself." + +"Well, I don't see any reason why you should not carry out your plan. It +would certainly be better that you should have some--what I may call-- +official sanction. All the men in our corps are paid five shillings a +day, and as your troop would serve under different conditions, you can +to a certain extent dictate your own terms. I will, if you like, accept +you as an independent corps, attached to my command when with me, but at +other times free to scout and to act as you choose; but mind, I cannot +be responsible for any scrape that you get into. You might call +yourselves the Johannesburg section of the Maritzburg Scouts, +maintaining yourselves at your own expense, and drawing neither pay nor +rations." + +"Thank you very much, sir; that is just what we want." + +"Then, if you will bring your companions here this evening, I will swear +you in. I shall administer a different oath to you from that which the +others take, and merely pledge you, when under my orders, to obey them, +with permission to withdraw from the corps when you choose. And indeed, +receiving no pay or assistance from government, you would naturally be +free to do so." + +Leaving Captain Brookfield, Chris went and bought his clothes, bandolier +and belt, and saddlery, and then returned to the hotel and told his +mother how he had got on, and that a horse and rifle would, he hoped, be +obtained that afternoon. + +"It seems to me a terribly dangerous business, Chris; but as your father +agreed to it, of course I need say no more. I have a cheque for five +hundred pounds for my expenses and yours." + +"Father gave me a hundred before I started, mother; that will more than +pay for my outfit. I don't know what we shall do for the horses, but +there will certainly not be much over." + +"Yes, I know, Chris; and he told me to hand you over another hundred +when I went to the bank, which I shall do this afternoon." + + + + +CHAPTER III + +AT THE FRONT + + +At five o'clock the lads from Johannesburg again met and reported the +result of the afternoon's work. The nine Mauser rifles had been bought, +and six thousand rounds of ammunition had been purchased. This appeared +an excessive amount, but as there might be a difficulty in obtaining +this ammunition, they bought up all that could be found in the town. +Peters and his party had chosen the horses for the troop. The farmer was +a well-known breeder of good stock, and was glad to dispose of some of +them at a fair price in order to lessen their number. He had already had +several enquiries from corps that were being raised, but the prices were +higher than could be paid for ordinary troopers, though several had been +bought by officers. The lot the lads had picked out had been put aside, +and they had given the farmer fifty pounds earnest-money, to hold them +till the next morning. + +"They are as good a looking lot of horses as I ever saw," Peters said, +"in fact, by a long way the best. I always heard that he was one of the +largest breeders of good horses in South Africa. He had eight or ten +extraordinarily good ones, but, of course, he wanted extra prices for +these; but from the rest--and he has some three hundred of them--he let +us choose any we liked at one price, and I think I can say that we shall +be as well mounted a corps as any out here. Of course we avoided the +showy-looking horses, and chose those specially suited to the country +and likely to be fast. Mr. Duncan had several thoroughbreds from home, +and there is no doubt that his stock has benefited by it; they are all +of the country type, sturdy and compact, and yet somewhat finer in the +limb than any I ever saw in the Transvaal. We were delighted with them." + +All the lads were accustomed from childhood to horses, but those Chris +had selected as the committee of inspection were admitted by their +friends to be the best judges of horseflesh in the party, their fathers +being wealthy men who always bought the finest horses money could +obtain. + +"We will go over in a body to-morrow," Chris said, "and pay for them and +bring them back. We are lucky indeed to have got hold of such a good +lot. Are they pretty even animals, Peters?" + +"Yes, I really don't think there is anything to choose between them." + +"Well then, the fair way will be, to make one-and-twenty tickets with as +many numbers and fasten one to the mane of each horse, then we will put +another twenty-one numbers into a hat and draw them; in that way +everyone will be satisfied. Those of you who have not got their money +from their people had better ask them for it this evening, so that we +can settle up to-morrow for the horses and rifles and ammunition. The +hundred pounds we have each been promised will well cover all our +expenses up to the moment we start, and I should think leave us with +something like twenty pounds apiece in pocket, but all we have and the +other hundred for future expenses we had better put into the bank here +to-morrow. We must arrange for four of us to sign cheques, each cheque +to be signed by two, but we had better give them all our signatures so +that in case what we can call the finance committee of four are all +killed or taken prisoners there will be no bother about having fresh +signatures to arrange about." "Well," Sankey said, "we might as well +settle that at once. I propose that Field, Carmichael, Capper, and, of +course, you form the committee." As no amendment was offered, this was +at once agreed to. + +"What time did you say that we would come over to fetch the horses?" + +"About ten o'clock." + +"Well, will you all be at my hotel to-morrow at half-past eight with +your money? Then we will all sign our names on paper the committee +first; afterwards they shall go with me to the bank and pay all the +money in, give them the list of signatures, and tell them that until +further notice two of the four first names will sign the cheques, but +that should circumstances prevent any two of them being able to do so, +others will sign instead. The account had better stand as the +Johannesburg Scouts. When we have arranged that we will hire a couple of +light waggons and start. Have you all got your saddlery?" + +"Yes." + +"Well, we will take it with us, and then we can ride the horses back. I +will get the tickets made out." + +As soon as the bank opened in the morning, Chris and his three +companions presented themselves, and had an interview with the manager, +who was somewhat surprised when twenty-one cheques and cash to the +amount of three thousand five hundred pounds were handed in, each member +having deducted the amount paid for saddlery and clothes. "We wish the +account to stand in the name of the Johannesburg Scouts, and cheques +will be signed by two of the four names standing first on this list; but +as casualties may occur, you will please accept any of these signatures. +Our little corps will form part of the Maritzburg Scouts, but in money +matters we keep to ourselves, being all volunteers serving without pay." + +The manager ran his eye over the cheques. All the names were well known +to him as those of prominent men at Johannesburg, and the great majority +had already accounts at his bank, as all had some time previously made +arrangements for drawing money in case of necessity. + +"I suppose, Mr. King," he said, "that as you and your friends represent +the corps, you are all young men?" + +"We are all boys," Chris answered with a smile, "but we are old enough +to do men's work, and in the Transvaal the Boers are commandeering all +boys two or three years younger than we are." + +"Well, I congratulate you all both on your patriotism and your pluck, +Mr. King, and I have no doubt that you will do good service." + +Receiving a cheque-book, they drew two hundred pounds for current +expenses, and then going back to the hotel found the two Cape-carts and +their companions ready, and the saddlery already stowed away. On +arriving at the farm all were highly pleased with the horses their +comrades had selected. They had on the way agreed that it would be a +good plan to buy four others to act as pack-horses, and to furnish them +with remounts in case any of their own were shot. These were to be sent +into the town by two Kaffirs, whom they arranged to take into their +service, for the farmer said at once, when they asked him that he could +very well spare them, as he would be parting with a considerable number +of his horses and cattle, and would not require so many hands as he had +at present. The two men he chose for them were both active young +natives; they made no objection to the exchange of masters, and, indeed, +seemed pleased at the thought of going with them to fight the Boers, who +were universally hated by the natives. + +A cheque was given to the farmer for their purchase, then the horses +were chosen by lot as agreed, and were at once saddled and mounted. They +had all been partially broken in, and as the boys were good riders, they +were after a little preliminary struggle soon at their ease, and, taking +a couple of hours' sharp ride through the country, returned on good +terms with their mounts. Two or three hours were spent in teaching the +horses to stand steady as soon as the reins were thrown over their +heads, this being a training to which all horses in the Cape are +subjected. Then they rode back to the town and arranged with a farmer +near it to picket their horses in one of his meadows, and for their feed +while they remained there. The rest of the day was spent in laying in +their supplies. The rifles and ammunition were paid for, pack saddles +bought for the four spare horses, a brace of revolvers purchased for +each member, haversacks ordered for the whole party, and bags to carry a +supply of grain for each horse. In the evening they went out to the +farm, and after discharging their rifles a few times fed their horses. + +This they repeated in the morning, so as to familiarize them with the +sound of firearms; then they saddled and mounted them, and after riding +for half an hour drew up in line, as Captain Brookfield, who had sworn +them in on the previous afternoon, was to inspect them at eight o'clock. +They had all put on their working clothes, bandoliers and belts, and +high boots, and the captain on his arrival, after closely inspecting +them, expressed his strongest approval of their appearance. + +"I really congratulate you, Mr. King," he said, "on having command of +twenty such serviceable-looking young fellows. As they all can ride, +and, as you tell me, can all shoot, they ought to do really good +service, and I should be well pleased if all my troop were composed of +such good material. From the fact that you can all speak Dutch, and most +of you Kaffir, you will have great opportunities of obtaining +information, and can, in case of need, pass as young Boers. In fact, I +may say that there is some danger of your being mistaken for them by our +men. I should take you for them myself, except that you all look +brighter and more wide-awake than Boers generally do; but an +artilleryman could hardly be blamed if he plumped a shell among you at a +distance of two or three thousand yards." + +"We thought of that, sir;" Chris turned to his band, "Change caps!" All +pulled field-service caps from their pockets, took off the soft felts, +rolled them up and forced them into their valises, and put on the caps. + +"That is excellent!" Captain Brookfield exclaimed. "That certainly +alters your appearance altogether, and as far as your figures could be +made out through a glass, it could be seen that you are an irregular +body of some sort. And this can be still more plainly seen if, as I +should advise you, you always ride in fours when you are approaching our +lines; there will then be little chance of a mistake being made. Where +did you pick up all those horses?" + +"We bought them yesterday from a farmer named Duncan, who has brought +them down from his place near Dundee." + +"Ah! that accounts for it; he is one of the best-known horse-breeders in +the colony. I had not heard that he had come down." + +"He only arrived two days ago, sir. We were fortunate to hear of it, and +some of us rode over early yesterday and were lucky enough to secure +them." + +"You were lucky. There are several mounted corps being formed here and +at Durban, and horses will go up in price rapidly. Where is he +staying'?" + +"About a mile and a half farther out, sir. If you want horses I should +think that you had better go on at once, for he told me that he had sold +sixty yesterday, but that very few of them were anything like as good +horses as these." + +"No. People are subscribing handsomely, but we cannot afford to mount +our troopers on such horses as these. A good many gentlemen have found +their own horses, and of course will be well mounted; but a good, sound, +country horse is all we can afford for the others; they are excellent +for ordinary work, though, of course, not so fast as yours, nor quite so +big. Your horses have all a strain of English thoroughbred blood, and if +you should at any time have to ride for it there would be little chance +of the Boers overtaking you, though some of them are very well mounted, +for the two things a Boer will spend money on, are his horse and his +rifle. And when do you start?" + +"We are going to-morrow morning. I went to the station-master yesterday +evening and arranged for trucks for the horses to be attached to an +early train to Dundee. We want to get up in time to see the first of it, +and we should lose three days if we were to travel by road." + +"That is the right spirit, and I wish I could go with you; but my troop +will wear a sort of uniform, Norfolk jackets and riding-breeches, and +the outfitters are so overwhelmed with orders that it will be another +couple of days at least before they are ready. Then the men must have +two or three days' drill before they start; I am still short of horses, +so I will ride on and see Duncan. I want thirty-five more, and as yet, +although subscriptions are coming in well, we are still a good deal +short of our requirements. However, I dare say I shall be able to make +some arrangement with Duncan, as I shall probably have enough to pay him +in full by the end of the week. Altogether, I don't suppose I shall be +ready to start for another ten days, and unless the Boers delay their +advance I am afraid that I shall not get to Dundee." + +"Do you not believe that we shall be able to hold the town?" + +"I hardly think that there is a chance of it, and I am sure we made a +mistake in sending a portion of the force there. I know the premier was +most anxious that our troops should be posted as far north as possible, +in order to save the loyal farmers from plunder. If the position were +stronger and impossible to be turned, the case would be different; but +it is not strong, and can be turned on each flank. If the Boers march to +attack General Symons, who is in command there, he may possibly beat +them off; but as they can advance towards Ladysmith either from the Free +State on one side or the Transvaal on the other, he and his troops would +be cut off, and the loyal farmers would be plundered just as much as if +Symons had remained at Ladysmith. I fancy all the military men think +that a grave mistake has been made, and that General White should not +have exposed half his force to disaster. Besides, the position of +Ladysmith is no more defensible than that of Dundee. The Tugela would be +the natural line of defence, but even that could be turned by troops +from the Transvaal going through Zululand, and the line of the river +would be very difficult to defend by a force of less than twenty +thousand men. However, we shall see how the thing works out--how +enterprising the Boers are, and how warmly the Free Staters throw +themselves into the work." + +"You think that we shall have a hard time, Captain Brookfield?" + +"Yes, I think that is certain, even if Cape Colony keeps quiet, which I +am very much afraid it will not do. If it rises, it will take all the +strength of England to put it down. Well, I wish you all luck. I can +assure you I feel proud of my Johannesburg section, and I shall be glad +when you join me." + +He shook hands with the whole of the lads and then rode off. + +"The train starts at eight o'clock," Chris said. "We had better get our +good-byes over to-night, get some breakfast if we are able to do so at +half-past five, and meet here at six. We ought to be at the station at +least an hour before the train starts. We shall not only have to get the +horses into the trucks, which is certain to be a troublesome business, +as they are altogether new to it, but we shall have to see to our other +stores and belongings. I have arranged that we shall travel with the +horses, so that we can each stand at the heads of our own animals, and +if they are very wild, we can blindfold them until they become +accustomed to the situation. I have bought a couple of trusses of hay +from Thomas, and he will send down two of his native boys to the +station. I should advise you all to put some food into your haversacks, +there is no saying how long we may be on the road." + +"What sort of trucks are they, Chris?" "They have high sides, but no +roofs. Of course I would rather have had roofs, but the station-master +could not provide any waggons with them. But he showed me these, and as +the sides are quite high enough to prevent the horses getting out, they +will do very well." + +The saddles were taken off and piled together. There was no chance of +rain, so they were left uncovered. The lads then walked back into the +town. There was, of course, a sad parting that evening between Chris and +his mother, but she bore up well. She knew that hundreds of other women +were parting with husbands or sons, and she felt that, as the main cause +of the war was to rescue the Uitlanders in the Transvaal from the +oppression of the Boers, it behooved all the fugitives from that country +to do their utmost. + +In the morning the lads all arrived punctually at the rendezvous. The +horses were fed to the accompaniment, as usual, of pistol shots. Then +they were saddled up, the valises the lads had brought down with them +were strapped on, and with their rifles slung behind them they rode to +the station. + +It was, as they had expected, a long and troublesome business to get the +horses into the trucks, but at last this was managed. Nose-bags were put +on, with a few double-handfuls of grain, then one trooper was left to +each two horses, while the rest saw to their bundles of blankets, their +stores of tea, sugar, and flour, preserved milk, cocoa, bacon, and +tinned food. A couple of frying-pans, and a canteen of tin cups and +plates, a knife, fork, and spoon each, and two kettles, completed their +outfit. They had put their soft felt hats in their valises, and were all +in their flat fatigue caps. + +The train was a long one, but the carriages with it were empty, for +while the trains from the north were closely packed, there were few +persons indeed proceeding up country. The trucks, however, were well +filled, as great quantities of stores were being taken up, some to +Ladysmith, and others for the force at Dundee. The horses soon became +accustomed to the motion, and their masters took the opportunity of +familiarizing themselves with them, by talking to them, patting them, +and giving them pieces of bread and an occasional lump of sugar. The two +Kaffirs had brought on the pack-horses four water-skins and a couple of +buckets, and in the heat of the day the horses were allowed a good +drink, while their masters, whose haversacks had been filled by their +friends, enjoyed a hearty meal, washed down by tin mugs full of +champagne. + +They were in the highest spirits, although the meal was taken under +difficult circumstances, for all were seated on the upper rails of the +trucks, there being no room for them to sit down among the horses. The +plates were all packed up, and fingers and teeth served for knives and +forks, which was the less important since chickens were the staple of +the meal; and these had been cut up before starting. Many were the jokes +that passed along the line. All felt that it was the last experience +they were likely to have of civilized food, and that it would be a long +while before champagne or any other wine would fall to their lot. The +Kaffirs, who had each charge of two spare horses, enjoyed themselves no +less, for they had a fair share of the provisions of their masters, and +were in a high state of contentment with their prospects. + +There was a halt of an hour at Ladysmith. Many of the officers and +soldiers gathered at the station, their work for the day finished, and +the arrival of the train being always an event of some importance in the +little town. They were amused and interested at the party of young +fellows who alighted to stretch their legs and get a change of position. + +"Which is your leader?" a major asked Field. + +"The one talking to an officer. His name is Chris King." + +"Is he chosen because he is the oldest of you?" + +"No, that has nothing to do with it. We are all within a year of the +same age. We have all been chums and friends, and have hunted and shot +together, and he is the one we elected as our leader, just as you would +choose the captain of a cricket club. We all come from Johannesburg, +find our own horses, arms, and outfits, and ask nothing whatever from +the government; and as we speak Dutch, and all know more or less Kaffir, +we fancy we can make a good deal better scouts than your cavalry, who +can't ask a question of a Boer or get information from a native." + +The major laughed. He saw that the lad a little resented the joking tone +in which he had asked the question. + +"I have no doubt that you are right," he said, "and I am quite sure I +should like half a dozen of you as subalterns. When did you come from +Johannesburg?" + +"We left there about a week ago, and as we were only at Maritzburg three +days, we have not lost any time." + +"Indeed, I think that is a record performance. Of course you are all +looking forward to your first skirmish; I can assure you we are." + +"We had our first on the way down here, when we were between Newcastle +and the frontier. Four or five of us went to a farmhouse to try and get +some food and milk for the women and children. It was a Boer's place, +and the fellow came out with a rifle and warned us off. We went forward, +and he took a shot at King when he was quite close to him, but +fortunately the bullet only went through his hat. Chris knocked him down +and gave him a tremendous thrashing with his own whip. Then we took some +provisions and paid for them, and searching the house, found twelve +Mauser rifles and a lot of ammunition. We took these off without paying +for them. The Boer had made off while we were searching the house, and +he and some twenty others pursued us, not dreaming that we were now +armed. However, we gave them a volley, and emptied three saddles and +killed three or four horses, and they moved off without trying to make +our further acquaintance." + +"Well done, lads!" the officer said warmly, "that was an excellent +beginning, and I have no doubt that you will follow it up well." + +Similar conversations were going on all along the platform, and when at +last the lads again took their places in the trucks, a hearty cheer was +given them. The sun was setting when they arrived at Dundee. It was a +larger place than Ladysmith, as there were some coal-mines in the +neighbourhood, and a considerable number of men were employed in them. +Like Ladysmith it is situated on a plain dominated by hills. The camp +was some little distance out of the town. An officer was at the station +with a party of men to receive the stores brought up by the train. Chris +at once went up to him and saluted. + +"We have just arrived, sir; we are a section of the Maritzburg Scouts, +acting independently. As we are all from Johannesburg, and find our own +horses, equipment, and food, provide our own rations, and, of course, +serve without pay, we propose to scout on our own account, and as we all +speak Dutch well, I think that we may be useful in obtaining +information. We shall, of course, search the country in whatever +direction may be considered most useful." + +"I have no doubt that you will be of good service, sir," the officer +said. + +"I suppose we can camp anywhere we like." + +"I should think so. As you do not draw rations, it can matter little +where you post yourselves; but I don't think that you will be able to +get tents to-night." + +"We shall not want them, sir; we have each a large waterproof sheet, and +intend to use them as tentes d'abri. I suppose I had better report +myself at the headquarters of the general?" + +"Yes, that would be the proper thing. The camp is a mile and a half +away; if you follow the Glencoe railway, you cannot miss it." + +As soon as the horses were detrained and the baggage packed, the little +party mounted and left the station, and choosing a piece of unoccupied +ground a few hundred yards away, proceeded to unsaddle and picket the +horses, while Chris rode away to the camp accompanied by one of the +natives to hold his horse there. He had no difficulty in finding it, and +dismounting, walked to the group of head-quarter tents. His appearance +excited a good deal of amusement and some chaff from the soldiers he +passed. He looked, indeed, like a young Dutch farmer in his rough +clothes, and his rifle, and a bandolier of cartridges. Seeing a young +officer close to a tent, he asked him which was that of the adjutant- +general. + +"He is there talking to the general at the door of his tent. Do you wish +to speak to him?" + +"I should be glad to do so," Chris replied. The officer walked across +and informed the colonel that Chris wanted to speak to him. + +"Bring him across, Mr. Williams," the general himself said. "He is +evidently a young farmer, and possibly brings in some news of the +enemy's movements." + +The lieutenant returned to Chris and led him up to the general. + +"You have some news that you wish to give us, sir?" Sir Penn Symons +said. + +"No, general; but I hope to be able to do so to-morrow." + +He then stated his position and the nature of his command. + +"We are all very well mounted, sir," he went on, "and as we all speak +Dutch, hope to be useful. At any rate, we shall be no trouble to you, as +we draw neither rations nor pay. We think we can pass anywhere as Boers; +that is why we have not adopted any uniform." + +"I have no doubt you will be of service," the general said, though I +hardly think that you will pass as Boers with those caps." + +"We have all wide-brimmed hats to use while we are scouting, general; +but we carry these too, so that on our return towards your lines we can +be recognized even at a distance as not being Boers, and so avoid being +fired at." + +"Yes, that is a very necessary precaution. I will have officers +commanding cavalry and artillery detachments warned, that a section of +Maritzburg volunteers are dressed as farmers, but may be known in the +distance by having caps similar to the ordinary infantry field-service +caps. + +"Well, sir, I shall be glad if you will to-morrow ride to the south, +following the river, and endeavour to find out whether the Boers have +any considerable force in that direction, either on this side of the +river or the other, I may tell you that five of the Natal police were +captured on the evening of the 13th at De Jagers Drift. The Boers have +been in possession of Newcastle for the past three days, and they are +certainly crossing the passes from the Free State. You must be very +careful, for they have scouting parties across the river almost as far +as the Tugela. However, we hardly expect any serious struggle for +another week or ten days; for all the accounts are to the effect that +the Boers are still very deficient in transport, and that for the past +week those at Laing's Nek, and the other passes, have been very much +straitened for provisions. It would be as well for you, while you are at +Dundee, to come over once a day to report your doings, and to receive +orders as to the point where we most need information. Have you gone +into lodgings in the town?" + +"No, sir. We have waterproof sheets that form tentes d'abri, and we +prefer being with our horses, which were only bought a few days ago; so, +as we shall not have much opportunity of sleeping otherwise than in the +open for some time, we thought it as well to begin at once, especially +as the weather looks threatening, and the horses, being unaccustomed to +be picketed, might pull up the pegs and get loose were there a heavy +rain." + +"You seem to be well fitted for the work, and to set about it in the +right spirit." + +"We have all been accustomed to hunting expeditions, sir, when we have +often been out for some days, so that we understand how to shift for +ourselves, though we are new to campaigning." + +"What rifles have you? that does not look like a Lee-Metford." "No, +general, it is a Mauser. We captured twelve of them, at a Boer's +farmhouse three or four miles this side of Newcastle six days ago. He +fired at us, and though his bullet only went through my hat, we thought +ourselves justified in searching his house." + + +[Illustration: CHRIS OFFERS HIS SERVICES TO SIR PENN SYMONS.] + + +"Certainly you were. We heard that there had been a skirmish on the +road, and learned the particulars from one of those who took part in it, +and who stayed here for two or three days before going down the country. +He said that four or five young gentlemen, who were coming down with a +party of women and children from Volksrust, had gone to a farmhouse to +try and get food, milk, and bread for the females. The Boer farmer +insulted them, and shot at one of them when but two or three yards away; +he had been tremendously thrashed by the young fellow, and they returned +laden with a good supply of milk and bread, and twelve rifles and a lot +of ammunition that they had found at the farm. And with these they and +some of the men had beaten off an attack of a score of Boers without any +loss to themselves." + +"Yes, general, that was our party; we had sent forward for some waggons, +and got into Dundee two hours after the skirmish; and as there was a +train just going we went on at once, and reached Maritzburg the next +morning, where we were joined by some of our party who had come down the +day before. As we had made all our plans before leaving Johannesburg, we +were able to start this morning, which was the third after our arrival +there." + +"You were prompt indeed," the general said with a smile, "and must have +needed money as well as brains." + +"We had all obtained leave of our families, general, and were well +provided with funds to carry us through the campaign if it lasts for a +year. We wanted to be in time for the first fight." + +"I think yours was the first fight, except that a few shots were +exchanged between our scouts and the Boers on the morning after the +ultimatum expired. Now, sir, if you should at any time be in want of +necessaries I shall be glad to supply you; but I cannot furnish you with +ammunition, as the Mausers carry a smaller bullet than our rifles." + +"Thank you, general, but we have enough to last us for a considerable +time, having brought up six thousand rounds." + +"A good provision indeed," the general laughed; "enough to last you +through half a dozen pitched battles. I shall be in the town at six +o'clock to-morrow morning, and shall be pleased to inspect your little +corps before you start." + +"I thank you, general; we shall all be very proud to be inspected by +you." + +Then saluting he returned to his horse and rode back to Dundee. He was +pleased to see that the eleven little tents had been erected strictly in +line, that the horses were all standing quietly at the picket-rope, and +that two of the troop were placed as sentries. A large fire was blazing +in front of the tents, the two natives were squatting by it, the kettles +were swung over it, and a joint of meat was roasting there. Two or three +of the lads were standing talking together; the rest had gone into the +town. Cairns came up to him as he dismounted. + +"Have you heard the news, Chris?" + +"No, I have not heard any particular news." + +"I was at the station a quarter of an hour ago, and a telegram had just +been received that the Boers were, when it was sent off, entering +Elandslaagte station, and were in the act of capturing the passenger +train that was standing there. The message stopped abruptly, as no doubt +the Boers entered the room where the clerk was at work at the needles." + +"By Jove we are in luck!" Chris said. "Of course that was the train that +had to leave three hours after us. If we had stopped for that, the +horses, rifles, and kit would all have gone, and we should now be +prisoners. It is serious news, though, for it is evident that not only +are they marching against us in front, and on both flanks, but have cut +our communications with Ladysmith. There can be no doubt that, as +everyone said there, it was a mistake to send General Symons forward +here, as it was almost certain that with four regiments, three batteries +of artillery, a regiment of cavalry, and a few hundred of the Natal +police and volunteers, he could never maintain himself here. Why, we +heard at Ladysmith that a column had gone out the day before towards +Besters station, as the news had come in that they were even then in the +neighbourhood. It was a false alarm, but it was enough to show that the +Boers were likely to be coming down and cutting the railway in our rear. +General Symons told me that he did not expect any general advance of the +enemy just yet, because he heard that their transport was incomplete, +and that they were very short of provisions. But I don't think the want +of transport would prevent their advancing. We know well enough that the +Boers think nothing of going out for three or four days without any +prospect of getting any more provisions than they carry about them, +unless they have the luck to bring down an antelope. And as Utrecht and +Vryheid and Newcastle are all within a few miles of us, and the Free +Staters have already come down through some of the passes of the +Drakensberg, they must be within an easy ride of us; and if they are in +force enough to drive us out of this place, they must know they would +find themselves in clover, for we heard at Ladysmith that there were +provisions and stores for two months collected here." + + + + +CHAPTER IV + +DUNDEE + + +After picketing his horse, Chris went into the town. He found the +streets full of excited people, for the news that the railway had been +cut was serious indeed, and the scene reminded Chris of that which he +had witnessed in the streets of Johannesburg but eight days before. Only +eight days! and yet it seemed to him as if weeks had passed since then. +So much had been done, so great had been the changes. As at +Johannesburg, a considerable portion of the population had left, seeing +that, although the troops might for a time defend the town, the Boers +were certain to cut the line of railway. Work at the coal-mines had been +pushed on feverishly of late, for strangely enough there was no store of +coals either in Dundee itself or at any of the stations down to Durban, +and the authorities had only woke up a few days before to the fact that +coal would be required in large quantities for the transports on the +arrival of the troops. But now all this was to come to a stop. The hands +would be thrown out of employment, and the town would become stagnant +until it was captured by the Boers, or until an army arrived of +sufficient strength to clear Natal of its invaders. That evening many +who possessed vehicles started by road for Ladysmith, feeling that in +another twenty-four hours it might be too late. + +At seven o'clock, as had been arranged when they arrived, all the +members of the band met at the bivouac for supper. There was a general +feeling of excitement among them. They had known that hostilities must +soon begin, but to find that the line had already been cut, and that the +enemy were closing in in all directions, came almost as a surprise. +This, however, in no way prevented them from enjoying their meal. After +it was over they held, at Chris's suggestion, a sort of council. He had +already told them what the general had said to him, and that they were +to be inspected in the morning. As their saddlery was all new, there was +nothing to be done in the way of burnishing buckles and rubbing up +leather. As Chris remarked, all that would be necessary was an hour's +work in the morning grooming their horses. + +"Now," he said, "that the work is going to begin, we must draw up a few +rules, for, volunteers though we are, we must have some regulations. In +the first place, I find that the troops all parade in order of battle +before daybreak, so as to be able to repel a sudden attack or move in +any direction that may be required. If it is necessary for them, it is +still more necessary for us, and I think that it should be a standing +rule that we are all ready to mount at daybreak. Sentries must be posted +at night, however safe we may feel. I think there should be two, +relieved every two hours. There will he no hardship in that, as each +would only go on duty every other night. In the next place, I think +there should be what they call an officer of the day, who would +generally be in charge of the arrangements, see that the Kaffirs +attended to their horses properly, and so on. You see, we shall not be +always acting together, but might sometimes be broken into four troops, +in which case one in each five should command. I think the same lot +should always keep together. What do you think? Would it be better that +in each group of five one should be in charge each day, or that each +group should choose one to act as non-commissioned officer?" + +There was no reply. + +"What do you think yourself, Chris?" Sankey asked after a pause. + +"You are as well able to judge as I am," he replied. "I think that it +would perhaps be the best way to write down the twenty names and put +them in a hat, and draw them one by one. The first five should be number +one squad. I don't know whether that is the right word, but anyhow it +will do for them. The next five number two, and so on. Then each five +can vote whether they would prefer alternate commands, or to choose one +of their number as permanent non-commissioned officer. If they prefer +this, they must then ballot as to which among them shall be leader. If +you can think of any way that you would like better, by all means say +so." + +All agreed that the plan that he proposed should be adopted. Four groups +were first chosen. Before they proceeded to the next step, Peters said: + +"Of course I am quite game to carry it out as you suggest, Chris, but +don't you think it would be a good plan to let the final decision stand +for a week or two, each taking the leadership of his group in rotation? +At the end of that time we should be better able to make a choice than +we can be now." + +"I think that is a very good idea, Peters. What do you all say? Will you +each take your turn alphabetically for the present, and at the end of +fifteen days, when each of you have led three times, you can decide +whether each squad shall choose a permanent leader or go on as you have +begun." + +All at once agreed to the proposal. They felt, good friends as they +were, that it would be very difficult to decide now. + +"Very well, then, it shall be so," Chris said. "To-morrow we shall +certainly do some scouting, but in a day or two you may be shut up here; +and until we get away there will be no scouting to be done. We must have +some signals. Suppose we are scattered over two or three miles, we may +want to assemble, and must be able to signal. I thought of it before we +started from home, and put down in my pocket-book the sort of thing that +I fancied would be wanted. I will read it out to you." + +He stirred the fire into a blaze and then read: + +"One shot followed by another and a third, with ten seconds between +them, will mean 'Enemy seen on the right'; with twenty seconds between, +'Enemy seen on the left'; then, after a pause, two shots in quick +succession will mean 'Enemy in strength'; three shots will be 'Small +party only'; one shot, followed at an interval of ten seconds by two in +succession, will mean 'Retire to the point agreed on before we +separated'; followed by three shots in quick succession, will be 'Close +in to the centre'. We can think of others afterwards, but I think that +will do to begin with. I know that you have all pocketbooks, so take +down these signals at once." + +"We ought to know where you will be," Field said, "so that we could +rally round you ready for the next order." + +"That might be so; therefore we had better fix on three shots in quick +succession, followed in ten seconds by a fourth. The sound will be +sufficient to let you know pretty well where I am, and you will on +hearing it, join me at once. Are there any other suggestions?" + +There was silence and then the books were closed. + +"I cannot too strongly impress upon you all," Chris said, after they had +chatted for some time, "the necessity for being extremely cautious. We +know how slim the Boers are, and how accustomed they are to stalk game; +and we shall have to be as watchful as deer, more so, in fact, since we +have not their power of smell. When we break up into four parties, each +party must scatter, keeping three or four hundred yards apart. On +arriving at any swell or the crest of a hill, a halt must be made, and +every foot of the country searched by your field glasses, no matter how +long it takes. You must assure yourself that there are no moving objects +in sight. When you get near such a point you must dismount, and, leaving +your horse, crawl forward until you reach a point from where you have a +good view, and on no account stand up. While you are making your +observations any Boers who might be lying in sight would be certain to +notice a figure against the skyline, and we know that many of them are +provided with glasses as good as our own. We must be as careful as if we +were out after game instead of men. You all know these things as well as +I do, but I want to impress them upon you. You see, they have captured +five of the Natal police, who are a very sharp set of fellows. However, +a few days' scouting will show us far better what is required than any +amount of thinking beforehand. There is one thing that I want to say to +you. You elected me for your leader, but it is quite probable that when +we have worked together for a bit some of you may prove much better +qualified for the post than I am. What I want to say now is, if this is +the case, I shall feel in no way aggrieved, and shall serve just as +cheerfully under his orders as I hope you will under mine so long as I +command you." + +There was a general chorus of "No fear of that, Chris. We all know you +well enough to be sure that we have made a good choice. We knew it +before we left Johannesburg, but your pluck in walking up to that Boer +with his loaded rifle clenched the matter." + +"Well, we shall see," Chris said. "I shall do my best, but, as I said, +the moment you want a change I shall be ready to resign; and now I think +that we may as well turn in. It is nine o'clock, and we must be up at +daybreak. Squads number one and two will each furnish a man for the +first watch, taking the first on the list alphabetically. At eleven they +will be relieved by two from squads three and four; then one and two +furnish the next pair, and so on. Four watches will take us on till +daybreak. The two of each squad who will be on duty to-night turn in to +the same tent together, then the others will not be disturbed." + +The blankets were spread in the little shelter tents, and all except the +two men on duty were soon asleep. Chris had a tent to himself, there +being an odd number, and an extra waterproof sheet had been carried for +this purpose. Before leaving Maritzburg twenty-two poles, a little +longer than cricket stumps, had been made under Chris's direction. They +were shod with iron, so that they could be driven into hard ground. At +the top was a sort of crutch, with a notch cut in it deep enough to hold +another of the same size. Twenty-two other sticks of the same length +were to form the ridgepoles. Half these were provided with a long brass +socket, into which its fellow fitted. The whole, when they were +accompanied by the spare horses, would be packed with their stores and +spare blankets. At other times each rider would carry two of the poles +strapped to his valise behind him. + +Chris was the first to stir in the morning. There was but the slightest +gleam of daylight in the sky, but he at once blew a whistle that he had +bought that evening in the town, and heads appeared almost immediately +at the entrances of the other tents, and in half a minute all were out, +some alert and ready for business, others yawning and stretching +themselves, according to their dispositions. + +"First of all, let's put on the nose-bags, and let the horses have a +meal," Chris said; "then set to work to groom them. Remember, there must +not be a speck of yesterday's dust left anywhere." + +All were soon hard at work. The Kaffirs stirred up the embers of the +fire, which they had replenished two or three times during the night, +hung the kettles again over it, and cut up slices of ham ready to fry. +By half-past five Chris, after inspecting all the horses closely, +declared that nothing more could be done to them. Then they were +saddled, the valises, with a day's provisions and a spare blanket, being +strapped on. Then all had a wash, and made themselves, as far as +possible, tidy. By this time breakfast was ready, and they had just +finished their meal when a party of horsemen were seen in the distance. +Rifles were slung over their shoulders, and bandoliers and belts full of +cartridges strapped on, and they donned their forage-caps after coiling +up the picket-ropes and halters and fastening them with their valises to +the saddles. Then they mounted and formed up in line just as the +general, with two of his staff, rode up. After saying a few words to +Chris, the general examined the horses and their riders closely. + +"Very good and serviceable," he said, "and a really splendid set of +horses. Of course, gentlemen, you would look better if you were in +uniform, but for your purpose the clothes you have on are far more +useful. Let me see you in your hats; I can then better judge how you +would pass as Boers." + +The lads all slipped their forage-caps in their pockets, and put on +their felt hats, which were of different shapes and colours. As they had +agreed beforehand they at once dropped the upright position in which +they had been sitting, and assumed the careless, slouching attitude of +the Boers. + +"Very good indeed," the general said with a laugh. "As far as +appearances go, you would pass anywhere. The only criticism I can make +is that your boots look too new, but that is a fault that will soon be +mended. A few days' knocking about, especially as I fancy we are going +to have bad weather, will take the shine out of them, and, once off, +take good care not to put it on again. A Boer with clean boots would be +an anomaly indeed. Now, I will detain you no longer." + +The only manoeuvre the boys had to learn was the simple one of forming +fours. This they had practised on foot, and performed the manoeuvre with +fair accuracy. Then Chris gave the word, and, after saluting the +general, led the way off at a trot. + +"They are a fine set of young fellows," the general said to the two +officers with him. "They are all sons of rich men, and have equipped +themselves entirely at their own expense. They are admirably mounted, +and provided they are not caught in an ambush, are not likely to see the +inside of a Boer prison. It says a good deal for their zeal that they +are ready to disguise themselves as Boer farmers instead of going in for +smart uniforms. However, they are right; for, speaking Dutch, as I hear +they all do, they should be able singly to mingle with the Boers and +gather valuable information." + +As soon as they were fairly south of the town, Chris said: + +"Now our work begins. Number one squad will make its way towards the +river, and follow its course, keeping always at a distance from it, so +that while they themselves would escape notice, they can ascertain +whether any bodies of the enemy are this side of it, or within sight +beyond the other bank. Number four will take the right flank, and keep a +sharp look-out in that direction. Squads two and three will, under my +command, scout between the flanking parties, and examine the farmhouses +and the country generally. The whole will, as I said last night, +maintain a distance of about three hundred yards apart, and each man +will as far as possible keep those next to him on either hand in sight." + +The two flanking companies starting off, those under Chris separating as +they rode off until they were as far apart as he had ordered, and then +moved forward. When on level ground they went fast, but broke into a +walk whenever they came to the foot of rising ground, and when near the +top halted, dismounted, and crawled forward. Each man carried a Union +Jack about the size of a handkerchief, elastic rings being sewn to two +of the corners. When necessary these flags could be slipped over the +rifles, and a signal could be passed from one to another along the whole +line--to halt by waving the flag, to advance by holding the rifles +steadily erect. Other signals were to be invented in the future. Chris +took his place in the centre of the line, in readiness to ride to either +flank from which a signal might be given. + +For five or six miles no signs of the enemy could be perceived. Most of +the fields were entirely deserted, but round a few of the scattered +farmhouses animals could be seen grazing, and these Chris set down as +belonging to Dutch farmers who had no fear of interference by the Boers, +and were prepared to join them as soon as they advanced. Many of these, +indeed, during the past fortnight had trekked north, and were already in +the ranks of the enemy. Presently Chris, who was constantly using his +glasses, saw the flutter of a flag on a hill away to the left, and a +minute later the signal to halt passed along the line. It had been +agreed that signalling by shot should not be attempted unless the enemy +seen were so far distant that they would not be likely to hear. + +"What do you see, Brown?" Chris said as he reached the lad who had first +signalled. + +"There are a good many men and animals round a farmhouse about two miles +away. The house lies under the shoulder of a hill to the left, I suppose +that that is why the others did not see it." + +Dismounting, Chris crawled forward with the other until he could obtain +a view across the country. As Brown had said, the farmhouse stood at the +foot of the line of hills they were crossing, and was fully a mile +nearer to those on the right flank than to the point from which he was +looking at it, but hidden from their view. Bringing his glass to bear +upon it, he could distinctly make out that some forty or fifty men were +moving about, and that a large quantity of cattle were collected near +the house. + +"It is certainly a raiding party," he said to his companion. "They are +too strong for us to attack openly, at least if they are all Boers. It +would not do to lose half our number in our first fight. Still, we may +be able to frighten them off, and save the farmer, who is certainly a +loyalist, and cattle. You gallop along the line as far as it extends and +order all to come over to the right. I shall go on at once and get a +view of the ground close by. By the time they have all assembled we can +see what had best be done." + +Going back to their horses they started in opposite directions. In a few +minutes Chris reached a point which he believed to be nearly behind the +farmhouse, picking up some of the scouts by the way. + +"I expect I shall be back in about a quarter of a hour," he said as he +dismounted. "You, Peters and Field, may as well come with me, I may want +to send back orders." + +They walked forward fast until so far down the hill that they could +obtain a view of the farmhouse. The moment they did so they lay down, +and made their way across some broken ground until they were within a +quarter of a mile of it; then seated among some rocks they had a look +through their glasses, and could see everything that was passing as +clearly as if they had been standing in the farmyard. It was evident the +Boers had only arrived there a short time before Brown noticed them. +Parties of two or three were still driving in cattle, others were going +in and out of the house, some returning with such articles as they +fancied and putting them down by their horses in readiness to carry them +off. Two men and some women and children were standing together in a +group; these were beyond doubt the owners of the farmhouse. + +"How many Boers do you make out? I have counted thirty-eight." Peters +had made out forty, and Field forty-three, the difference being +accounted for by those going in and out of the house and sheds. + +"Well, we will say forty-five, and then we shan't be far wrong. We +certainly can't attack that number openly, but we may drive them off +empty-handed if we take them by surprise." He examined the ground for +another minute or two, and then said: "I think we might make our way +down among these rocks to within three hundred yards of the house. I +will send six more down to you. With the others I will go down farther +to the left, and work along in that little donga running into the flat a +hundred yards to the east of the house. You keep a sharp look-out in +that direction, and you will be able to see us, while we shall be hidden +from the Boers. We shall halt about three hundred yards beyond the +house. As soon as we are ready I will wave a flag, then you and your +party will open fire. Be sure you hide yourselves well, so that they may +not know how many of you there are; they are certain, at the first +alarm, to run to their horses and ride off. Directly they do so we will +open fire on them, and finding themselves taken in the flank they are +likely to bolt without hesitation. Don't throw away a shot if you can +help it, but empty your magazines as fast as you can be sure of your +aim. Between us we ought to account for a good many of them." + +"I understand, Chris; we will wait here till the others join us, and +then, as you say, we will work down as far as we can find cover." + +Chris at once returned to the main party, who had by this time all +assembled. "We can bring our horses down a good bit farther without +being seen," he said. "There is a dip farther on with some rough +brushwood. We had better fasten them there; they have learned to stand +pretty fairly, but they might not do so if they heard heavy firing." + +Leading their own horses and those of Field and Peters they walked down +to the spot Chris had chosen, and there threw the reins over the horses' +heads as usual, unfastened the head ropes, and tied them to the bushes. +Chris had already explained the situation to the troop, and had told off +six of them to go down to join Peters. He now advanced cautiously with +these till he could point out to them exactly the spot where the two +scouts were lying. Then he returned to the others, and they walked along +fast until they came upon the break in the hill, which lower down +developed into a depression, and was during the rains a water-course. +Down this they made their way. On reaching the bottom they found it was +some twelve feet below the level of the surrounding ground. + +A couple of hundred yards further they could tell by the sound of +shouting, the bellowing of cattle, and other noises, that they were +abreast of the farmhouse, and going another three hundred yards they +halted. Chris went up the bank until he could obtain a view, and saw +that he was just at the spot he had fixed on. Making signs to the +others, they took their places as he had directed, some ten yards apart. +Then he raised his rifle after slipping the little flag upon it. A +moment later came the crack of a rifle, followed by other shots in quick +succession. Chris, with his eyes just above the level of the ground, +could see all that was passing round the farmhouse. With shouts of alarm +the Boers at once rushed towards their horses, several dropping before +they reached them. As they rode out from the yard the magazine rifles +kept up a constant rattle, sounding as if a strong company of troops +were at work. Chris waited until they were nearly abreast of his party, +and then fired. + +His companions followed his example, and in a moment a fire as rapid and +effective as that still kept up from the hill was maintained. This +completed the stampede of the enemy. They were soon half a mile away, +but even at that distance the Mauser bullets continued to whistle over +and among them, and they continued their flight until lost in the +distance. Chris's whistle gave the signal for ceasing fire, and the two +parties sprang to their feet, gave three hearty cheers, and then ran +towards the farmhouse. In the yard lay five Boers and seven or eight +horses; the riders had jumped up behind companions, for as they passed, +Chris had seen that several of the animals were carrying double. The +little group, so lately prisoners, advanced as they came up, almost +bewildered at the sudden transformation that had taken place, their +surprise being increased on seeing that they had apparently been rescued +by another party of Boers, and still more when on their reaching them +they found that these were all mere lads. + +"We are a party of Maritzburg Scouts," Chris said, with a smile at their +astonished faces; "though, as you see, we are got up as Boers so as to +be able to get close to them without exciting suspicion. We were +fortunate in just arriving in time." + +"We thank you indeed, sir," the settler said, "for you have saved us the +loss of all our property, and, for aught I know, from being carried off +as prisoners. We were intending to trek down to Ladysmith today, and had +just driven in our herds when the Boers arrived. If they had been +content with stealing them, they would have been away before you +arrived; but they stopped to plunder everything they could carry off, +and, as I should say, from noises that we heard in the house, to smash +up all the furniture they could not carry off. We are indeed grateful to +you." + +"We are very glad to have had the chance of giving the plunderers a +lesson," Chris said. "It will make them a little cautious in future. But +I think that you are wise to go at once, for there are certainly parties +between this and Elandslaagte, where they have cut the line; so I should +advise you to travel west for a bit before you strike down to Ladysmith. +We have not heard of any of them being beyond the line of railway yet. +Now we have work to do. Number one and two squads will at once go up and +fetch down the horses, number three and four will examine the Boers who +have fallen here and out on the plain and will bring in any who may be +only wounded." + +He went out with this party; they found that eight more had fallen. +Three of these lay at a short distance from the farmhouse, and had +evidently fallen under the fire of the party on the hill; the others had +been hit by those in the ambuscade. Altogether ten horses had been +killed. Five of the Boers were still alive. + +"Have you a spare cart?" Chris asked the farmer. + +"Yes, I can spare one. Fortunately I have a small one besides two large +waggons. May I ask what you want it for?" + +"I want it to carry these wounded men to within reach of their friends. +Which is the nearest drift?" + +"Vant's Drift, and it is there, no doubt, that the party crossed. It is +a little more than two miles away." + +"Then we will place the wounded in the cart, and you might send one of +your Kaffirs with it to the drift and stick up a pole with a sheet on +it; they are sure to have halted on the other side, and will guess that +there are wounded in it. As soon as the Kaffir comes within two or three +hundred yards of the river he can take the horses out and return. I dare +say he will be back again before you are off." + +The cart was driven along the line that the Boers had taken, the wounded +being carefully lifted and placed in it as it reached them. Two more +were found dead and three wounded some distance beyond the spot where +the searchers had turned, having fallen nearly a mile from the farm; the +lads who accompanied the cart then returned. Long before they reached +the house the horses had been brought down. The settler and his Kaffirs +were hard at work loading the stores into two ox-waggons. The lads all +lent their assistance, and in less than an hour the settlers started for +Ladysmith, the women and children in the wagon, and the men on horseback +driving their herds with the aid of the Kaffirs. After a hearty adieu, +Chris and his party rode on together for some little distance before +again scattering widely to recommence their work of scouting. Hitherto +they had been too busy for conversation, but now they were able to give +words to the satisfaction they all felt at their success. + +"It has been splendid!" Sankey said enthusiastically. "We have defeated +a force twice as strong as ourselves, have killed or badly wounded +eighteen of them, and you may be sure that of those that got away +several must have been hit. Not one of us has a scratch." + +"Splendid!" another exclaimed. "It could not have been better managed. I +think we ought to give three cheers for Chris." Three rousing cheers +were given. "After this, Chris," Carmichael said, "I don't think you +need talk any more about resigning the command. General Symons himself +could not have done better." + +"I think, at any rate, we have begun to wipe off old scores," Chris +said. "We have paid for a few of the insults the ladies had to submit to +as we came along, and I am heartily glad that we were in time to do it. +We have baulked them of the haul they expected to make, and saved +something like a thousand head of cattle for the colony, to say nothing +of preventing these people from being absolutely ruined. It is only a +pity that we had not our horses with us. If we had, not many of the +Boers would have recrossed the river. But we could not have taken them +with us without being detected before we got into position, and in that +case we might have had a hard fight, and matters would probably have +turned out altogether differently." + +There was a general expression of assent, for all felt that in an equal +fight the Boers, being twice their own numbers, would have been more +than a match for them. It was evening when they returned to Dundee, +having come across no more Boers during the day's work. Directly they +arrived at the little camp where they had left the tents standing in +charge of their two Kaffirs, Chris wrote a short report of their doings, +stating briefly that they had come upon a party of forty-five Boers in +the act of driving off the cattle and sacking the house of Mr. Fraser, a +loyal settler. Having dismounted and divided into two parties, they had +attacked the Boers and driven them off, with the loss of ten killed and +eight seriously wounded left on the field. Many of their horses had been +killed. The wounded Boers had been sent in a cart to Vant's Drift, and +the farmer and his herds had been escorted as far as the line of +railway, which they had crossed and were making for Ladysmith. There had +been no casualties among his party. + +Field rode over with this report and delivered it at headquarters, +remaining to ask whether there were any orders for the next day. When he +returned he brought a line from the general. It contained only the +words, "I congratulate you most heartily. The affair must have been +managed excellently, and does you all the greatest credit. Continue +scouting on the same line to-morrow." + +The lads were all highly delighted when Chris read this aloud, and then +sat down to a well-earned meal, which was the more enjoyed as it had +been voted that Field, as one of the finance committee, should go into +the town and buy half a dozen of champagne in honour of their first +victory. In the course of the evening one of the general's staff rode +into camp on his way to town, having been requested by him to obtain +full particulars of the fight at Eraser's farm. He took his seat by the +fire with them, and Chris gave him a full account of their proceedings. + +"Upon my word, Mr. King," he said, "you managed the matter admirably; no +cavalry leader could have done it better." + +"There is no particular credit about the management," Chris said; "we +acted just as we should have done had we been stalking a herd of deer +instead of a party of Boers. One always manages, if possible, to put a +party on the line by which they are likely to take flight, before +crawling up within shot. If we could have taken our horses down with us +before we opened fire we should have done so, and being so well mounted, +I think few of them would have got away; but we could not manage it +without risking being seen, and in that case the Boers, on making out +what our strength was, would certainly have shown fight; and even if we +had beaten them, which I don't suppose we should have done, we should +have suffered heavily." + +"You were quite right not to risk it," the officer said; "we know by old +experience that the Boers are formidable antagonists when behind +shelter, and, accustomed as they are to shooting on horseback, I dare +say they will do well when not opposed by regular cavalry, who, I am +convinced, would ride through and through them. I am quite sure that in +the open they will not be able to make any stand whatever against +infantry, which is the more important, as in so hilly a country as Natal +our cavalry would seldom be able to act with advantage." + +In the course of conversation he told them that there was no news of any +large body of the Boers being near. Joubert's force had not moved out of +Newcastle, and nothing had been heard of the Free Staters or of the +Utrecht force under Lucas Meyer. "We have sentries on all the lower +hills round here and Glencoe, and there is no fear of our being +surprised. The sooner they come the better, for we are all longing to +get at them; and I can tell you we felt quite jealous when we heard of +your spirited affair to-day. I can assure you that we shall have a +greater respect for the volunteers than we had before, and if all do as +well as you have done to-day they will be a most valuable addition to +our force." + +After their visitor had left, they sat chatting round a fire till ten +o'clock, and then turned in. + + + + +CHAPTER V + +THE FIRST BATTLE + + +All in the little camp, save the two sentries, slept soundly until, at +two in the morning, they awoke with a sudden start. A deep boom and a +strange rushing sound was in their ears. With exclamations of surprise +they all scrambled out of their tents. + +"What is that?" Chris asked the sentry. + +"It is a big gun on the top of that high hill they call Talana. We saw +the flash of light, and directly after heard the report, and a rushing +sound. I suppose it was a shot overhead; if it had been a shell we +should have heard it burst and seen the flash. It must have been fired +at the camp." + +The horses, startled by the report, were plunging and kicking, and the +lads at once ran to their heads and patted and soothed them. Not until +they were quiet did they gather again. + +"What time is it?" Chris asked. + +"The clock on the church struck two a few minutes ago," Brown, who was +on sentry, said. As he spoke another gun boomed from Talana, or as it +was generally called in the town, Smith's Hill, from a farm owned by a +settler of that name at its foot. It was about a mile and a half east of +the town, and therefore some three miles from the camp. + +"It must be a very heavy gun by its sound--as big as the largest of +those we have heard fired from that fort above Johannesburg. Joubert +must have started from Newcastle early to have managed to get it up +there by this time, or it may be the force from Utrecht; anyhow, they +must be strong to venture to attack us in this way. We may as well +saddle up, though it is hardly likely the cavalry will be engaged. I +shall not send to camp for orders; the general will have enough to think +about, and it will make no matter where twenty men place themselves. +However, I shall ride over to camp and see what is going on there; it is +likely enough that there will be an attack by the Free Staters on the +other side. Carmichael and Horrocks, do you run into the town and see +what is going on there. I will not start till you get back; if any of +the staff see me they may ask some questions about it." + +In a quarter of an hour the two lads returned. The people there were +completely scared at the unexpected attack, and the streets were full of +half-dressed men; however, they seemed to be getting over their first +terror, now that they found it was the camp and not the town that was +being fired at, and the volunteer corps was already gathering in +readiness for orders. + +"We may be pretty sure that nothing will be done till daylight," Chris +said. "Our men know the ground now, and none of the Transvaal Boers can +do so, and I don't think they will venture to move till they can see +their way about. I am glad, indeed, that most of the women and children +were sent off two days ago, and that the scare on the evening that we +arrived, when the news came of the railway being cut at Elandslaagte, +sent the greater part of the men who had remained behind, and who did +not mean fighting, off by road. If they bombard the town they may do +damage to property, but there will be no great loss of life. You had +better give the horses a feed--that is, if they are disposed to eat at +this hour--while I am away." + +On reaching the camp, Chris found all the troops under arms. They had +been roused before the Boer fire began, as a picket to the east of +Dundee had been attacked and driven in. It was not, however, supposed +that the Boers were in force until their guns opened fire. All lights +were out in the camp, and the enemy's shot had gone wide. It was by no +means clear why the Boers should have betrayed their presence on the top +of the hill until it was light enough for them to use their guns with +effect. Chris had, before starting, put on his flat cap. + +As he approached the camp he was challenged by a sentry: "Who comes +there?" and on his replying, "An officer of the Maritzburg Scouts," the +sentry called out: "Advance, officer of the Maritz Scouts, and give the +countersign." + +Fortunately, as it happened, the officer had given it to Chris on his +visit to their camp, and he therefore answered at once, "Ladysmith," and +was relieved when the sentry called out, "Ladysmith pass, and all is +well." + +When he entered the camp he found the men were standing in lines, but at +ease, with their rifles piled in front of them, and there was a hum of +conversation in the ranks. At the head-quarter tents everybody was +astir. Presently an officer came up. + +"Who are you?" he asked as he advanced. + +"I am in command of the party of Maritzburg Scouts." + +"Mr. King, is it not?" the officer asked. + +"Yes, sir. I have ridden in to ask if there are any orders." + +"No, and there will be none issued until it is daylight, and we can make +out how matters stand and what is the force of the Boers. It is not +likely that you will have any special orders, but can act with the +cavalry and mounted infantry." + +"Thank you, sir. Then I will ride back at once." On returning to camp, +he said: "There is nothing to be done till morning. So far they have no +idea of the force of the Boers. This is just the work we were formed +for. Peters, you and Field and Horrocks certainly speak Dutch better +than any of the others. It is half-past two now, and we have at least +two and a half hours of darkness, therefore I propose we try to find out +what force the Boers have got up there. It is no use for more than four +of us to go, so the others can turn in, except the two sentries; but all +will, of course, be ready to mount in case any party of Boers should +come down upon the town before it is light. The next time I want three +men on special duty I will give others a chance." + +"Shall we ride, Chris?" + +"I think so. Of course it will be more difficult getting up there in the +dark; but I shall make a detour of three or four miles, and come up on +the other side, and we should be much more likely to be questioned if we +were on foot than on horseback. Should we come upon any party of armed +Boers, remember we have just arrived from Standerton, and finding when +we got to Newcastle that the force had moved on, and were to take up +their station at Talana Hill, we rode on to overtake them. When we get +fairly there among them, we will dismount; Field and Peters will stand +by the four horses, Horrocks and I will go on. If you hear a row, you +will mount and wait a minute or two, and then if we do not come, you +will ride off with our horses as well as your own. We shall try and make +our way to the edge of the hill, and ought to be able to slip away in +the darkness if we can get there before we are shot down or overtaken. +However, I don't think there is much chance of our being recognized. +Indeed, I expect most of them will be lying down for a sleep before the +time comes for action. If there is one thing a Boer hates it is being +kept awake at night. I will take one of the Kaffir boys with us. They +can see in the dark a great deal better than we can; and as the Boers +are sure to have some natives with them, he is quite as likely to pick +up news as we are--more so, perhaps, for the natives will sit and talk +all night while their masters are snoring. I think the one we call Jack +is the sharpest." + +Jack was called up, and on being told what was required, at once agreed +to accompany them. + +No time was lost. Chris and his three companions mounted, and with the +Kaffir running alongside they set off at a trot. Keeping to the north of +east, they rode on for some two miles, Jack leading the way with as much +ease as if it had been daylight. When they had, as they calculated, come +upon the ground the Boers must have passed over, they turned south, and +kept on until they saw the dark mass of Talana on their right, and made +towards it. On this side the hill sloped gradually, while on that facing +Dundee it was extremely steep and strewn with boulders. They were now +going at a walk, and they soon came upon an immense gathering of +waggons, carts, oxen and ponies, crowded without any order, just as they +had arrived two hours before. "There is no fear of our being detected," +Chris said in a whisper, "and we can't do better than stop here. There +is no getting the horses through this crowd, and if we did manage to do +so there would be no getting them back, certainly not in a hurry. You +had better lie down beside them, it is not likely that any Boers will be +coming up or down. If the whole camp is like this there is not the +slightest fear of our getting caught." Jack had already been instructed +that when he got into the camp he was to leave them and join any party +of Kaffirs he found awake, and talk to them as if he were one of the +bullock drivers. As Chris and his companions returned, the former would +blow his whistle softly, and he was then to make his way down to the +horses at once. + +Passing on unquestioned they neared the top of the hill, having left the +mass of the vehicles behind them. There were, however, large numbers of +ponies assembled here in readiness should their masters require them. +Hitherto they had heard no voices since entering the camp, but as they +went farther they heard talking. Here the fighting men were assembled. +For the most part they were lying down; some were asleep; others, +however, were moving about, and joining or leaving groups gathered +together discussing the events of the next day. Horrocks and Chris now +separated and joined different parties, some twenty yards from each +other. They attracted no attention whatever. Their appearance in their +broad hats and rough clothing, their bandoliers and rifles, was +precisely similar to that of the men standing about. + +No doubt whatever that the morning would bring them a brilliant victory, +appeared to be entertained by the enemy. The artillery would first crush +that of the British, then they would charge down and finish the affair. +"They say that they have less than four thousand altogether," one said. +"We are as many, and, as everyone knows, one Boer is a match for any +three rooineks. It will not be a fight, it will be slaughter. We shall +stop a day to gather the plunder and send it off in the waggons, then we +shall go south and destroy the force at Ladysmith. Three days later we +shall be in Maritzburg, and within three or four days afterwards shall +drive the British on board their ships at Durban. We shall get grand +plunder there and at Maritzburg. But I think it is time now to take a +hand at building up that wall along the front. Ebers' commando have been +at it for three hours, and it is our turn now." + +[Illustration: CHRIS AND HIS COMPANIONS SCOUTING.] + +There was a general movement, which was accelerated by a sharp order, +and a minute later Horrocks and Chris again came together and moved on +with the others. Three hundred yards farther they came upon six guns, +beyond which a number of men were at work carrying and placing great +stones to form a rough wall. These left off their work as soon as the +party arrived. Having now seen all that was necessary, the two lads +joined them and returned with them down the hill. The others threw +themselves down near their horses, but Chris and his companion went on. +Through the huge gathering of waggons they made their way with great +difficulty, Chris giving a low whistle occasionally. At last they were +through the camp. Jack was standing by the horses, and Peters and Field +at once rose to their feet. Without a word they mounted, and rode +without speaking till they were some little distance from the waggons. + +"You are back earlier than I expected," Field said. "You have been gone +scarcely an hour." + +"No; the only difficulty we had was making our way through the mass of +waggons and animals all mixed up higgledy-piggledy, and there has been +no more excitement than if we had been walking through Dundee. We have +got all we wanted to know. Their strength is about four thousand. They +have six guns. They are building a stone wall along the brow of the +hill, and they are cock-sure that they are going to thrash us without +difficulty." Field and Peters laughed. + +"They are fools to count their chickens before they are hatched," the +latter said. "If they think it is going to be another Laing's Nek +business they will find themselves mightily mistaken, though it will be +a very difficult business to scale that hill from the other side under +such a rifle fire as they will keep up." + +Jack had now taken his place ahead of them again, and kept there with +ease, although, they broke into a canter as soon as they reached the +level ground. In half an hour they reached their camp. + +"Now, Jack," Chris said when he had dismounted, "we have not heard what +news you have picked up." + +"Not much news, baas. Talk with some Kaffirs; all hope that we beat them +to-day, but think we cannot do so. Too many Boers and big guns. They say +Boers very angry because the other commandos not here, and Free State +Boers not arrived. They sure going to beat the rooineks, but are afraid +that some may get away. If Joubert and Free Staters here, catch them in +a trap and kill them all." + +Such was the substance of Jack's answer in his own language. By this +time the rest of the party had turned out to hear the news. They had had +but little sleep, for all were intensely anxious as to the fate of their +four comrades, and although delighted that they had returned safely, +were a little disappointed on finding that the affair had been so tame +and unexciting. While they were talking the two Kaffirs had stirred up +the fire, put some wood and some coal on, and hung up the kettle. + +"That is right, Jack," Chris said; "day will begin to break in half an +hour, and we may have to be moving." All was quiet until half-past five, +and the lads had just finished their meal when the Boer guns opened +fire, and two or three minutes later those of the British replied. + +"It is an uncomfortable feeling sitting here with that terrific roaring +noise overhead," Chris said. "One knows that there is not the slightest +risk of being hit, but, to say the least of it, it is very unpleasant. +There, a shell has just burst over the camp. So it is shell that they +are firing." + +Indeed, the Boers had been using these missiles only, but owing to some +fault in the loading, or the badness of the fuses, they fell for the +most part without bursting. It was soon evident to the lads that the +range of the British guns was shorter than that of the heavier pieces +from Talana. The distance was five thousand yards, and the elevated +position of the Boer guns added to the advantage given by their superior +weight. + +"I will ride in now," Chris said as he got up from breakfast, "and tell +the staff what we have gathered as to the Boers' strength." He had on +his way down the hill exchanged his hat for his forage-cap, and taking +Horrocks with him he galloped to the camp. Sir Penn Symons was standing +on a small elevation watching the fire. Chris rode up and saluted. + +"I have no orders for you, Mr. King, except that when the fighting is +over you will join the cavalry in pursuit." + +"Thank you, sir; I have not come for orders, but to report to you that +with Mr. Horrocks and two others, and one of our Kaffir servants, I +entered the Boer camp last night in order to ascertain their strength." + +"You did!" the general exclaimed in surprise. "You hear that, +gentlemen?" he said, turning round to three or four of his staff +standing but a short distance behind him. "Mr. King and three of his +party absolutely entered the Boer camp last night to discover their +force. Well, sir, what was the result?" + +"There are about four thousand of them, sir, over rather than under, and +they have six guns, all of heavy calibre. When I was there they were at +work building a thick wall some five feet high of rough stones along the +edge of the hill. It will scarcely shelter the guns, but it will provide +cover for the riflemen at the edge of the hill. There is an immense +gathering of waggons and carts--there are certainly not less than a +thousand of them--in a confused mass behind the hill. Arriving in the +dark, each seems to have gone on until it could get no farther. The +fighting men are all on the top of the hill, and between them and the +waggons are their ponies. They certainly could not ride away till the +waggons have been passed through, but possibly a passage may have been +left on each side of these for them to get through, in order, as is +their intention, to charge your army when their guns have silenced your +artillery. I gathered that expected commandos had not come up. They were +disappointed at hearing nothing of the Free Staters, who they expected +would have attacked Glencoe from the other side. They are absolutely +confident of success, and expect to overwhelm General White at Ladysmith +in three days from now, and to be in Pietermaritzburg in a week, and are +talking of driving the last rooinek on board the ships at Durban shortly +after." + +The general smiled. "I am much obliged to you for your information, Mr. +King, and am much pleased at the courage with which you and your +companions entered the Boer camp to obtain it. It is satisfactory to +learn that their force is not much greater than our own. It is also +useful to know that their ponies are gathered so close to them, for +shells that go over the hill may burst among them; and I believe that +one of the Boers' most vulnerable points is their horses, for without +them they would feel absolutely lost. I am sure, Mr. King, that you +would wish to be in the thick of the fighting, but I would rather that +you curbed your impetuosity, for after the manner in which you obtained +this news for me, I can see that your party will do far greater service +in scouting and in gaining intelligence than they could afford in +action. I should advise you to shift your camp, as the troops are about +to advance into the town, and the enemy's shot will soon be falling +there." + +A few minutes later two field batteries moved forward and took up their +position south of Dundee, escorted by the mounted infantry and the +rifles. The third battalion of the Lancashire regiment remained to +protect the camp should it be attacked by the Free Staters, while the +Dublin Fusiliers and the Royal Irish Fusiliers were to march through the +town to a donga or river-bed half a mile to the east. Beyond this the +long ascent to Talana begins. The King's Royal Rifles were to take up a +position under cover to the east of the town. + +Chris had ridden back fast to Dundee. The work of taking down the tents +and packing their materials and all the stores on to the spare horses +took but a few minutes, and two of the lads went with the two natives +and saw the horses safely placed in a sharp depression half a mile away, +in which they would be safe from Boer shells. Chris had told his +companions what the general had said. They all looked disappointed. + +"We shall have plenty of opportunities afterwards, and it is a +compliment that he considers we had better reserve ourselves for +scouting, which, after all, is the work we always intended to carry out. +Still, though, after what he has said, we cannot absolutely join the +cavalry, we will manage somehow to see some of the fighting without +getting into the thick of it. Besides, I should say that in any case the +whole brunt of the affair must fall upon the infantry and artillery. If +they silence the Boer guns and capture the hill, the battle is won, and +the cavalry will have to wait for their chance till they can get the +Boers to fight on ground where they can act." + +Drizzling rain had now set in, but this and the fact that they had +started without breakfast in no way abated the spirits of the troops who +soon came along, marching with light step and eager faces which showed +that they were delighted at the prospect of action. The batteries to the +right had already come into play, and a vigorous cannonade was being +directed at the crest of the hill, from which the Boer guns kept up a +slower though steady fire in return. + +"While nothing else is doing we may just as well ride over and see how +things are getting on there," Chris said. And as soon as the two Irish +regiments had passed, the little troop trotted across to the rising +ground and dismounted a few hundred yards from the guns. They soon saw +with satisfaction that the fire of the Boers was far from effective, +their aim was not good, and a very small proportion of the shells burst; +while on the other hand the shrapnel from the British batteries burst +with splendid accuracy over the crest of the hill. For two hours the +artillery duel continued, then the Boer guns gradually ceased their +fire. The mist that had partly shrouded the summit of Talana, eight +hundred feet above the plain, and the smoke that still hung thickly +there, rendered it impossible to say whether they had all been put out +of action or simply withdrawn, but when it cleared off they could no +longer be seen. It was now the turn of the infantry. Beyond the donga in +which they were lying the rise of the ground was gradual, up to a +plantation which surrounded Smith's farm. Beyond this the ground was +rocky. The men advanced at the double in open order, and the moment they +were seen by the Boers a continuous fire of musketry was opened. The +distance was about a mile, but the Mauser rifles had a much greater +range than this and the bullets pattered thickly on the ground. Only +four men, however, fell. The two regiments halted in the plantation and +farm buildings, and the advanced line at the edge of the trees opened +fire in answer to that to which they were exposed. The general at first +had taken up his position with the guns, but as soon as the men advanced +from the donga he joined them and accompanied them as far as the +plantation. Then he returned to the battery, which continued its fire +with greater activity to prepare the way for the further advance of the +infantry. + +The Rifles had joined the two Irish regiments, and at half-past nine +General Symons galloped up to the farm and gave the order for the +advance. This was received with a cheer by the men, who had been +impatiently awaiting it. Scarcely had the cheer died away when the +general was mortally wounded by a bullet that struck him in the stomach. +Unconscious that the wound was so severe he retained his seat a minute +or two, and was then carried by the Indian bearer company into the town. +The troops, ignorant of the misfortune that had befallen them, were now +working their way up the hill, taking advantage of every stone and +boulder, and although exposed to a terrific fire, gradually pushing on +until they reached a stone wall which ran round the face of the hill. +Beyond this the ground was much rougher and very much steeper--so steep, +indeed, that it was almost impossible to climb it. The fire of the enemy +was now terrific. The troops were some three hundred yards from the +crest, and it was certain death to show a head above the wall. An +officer placed his helmet on the end of his sword, and the moment he +raised it, it was riddled by five balls. + +For a time it was impossible to advance farther, but when the Boer fire +moderated a little the order ran along the line for the men to storm the +position. A signal was made to the artillery to cease fire, and as it +did so the men leapt over the wall and rushed forward. There was now no +thought of taking shelter or returning the Boers' fire, every effort was +needed for surmounting the difficulties in their way. In some places the +rock was so steep that the men had to climb on their hands and knees, +sometimes those below pushed their comrades up and were in turn assisted +by them to climb. The roar of musketry was unceasing. It seemed to be an +impossibility for any man to reach the top unscathed, and yet there was +no hesitation or wavering. Numbers fell, but panting and determined the +rest pressed on. The Rifles suffered most heavily, and out of the +seventeen officers who advanced with them five were killed and seven +wounded. At last the steepest part of the ascent was surmounted. Those +who first reached this point waited until joined by others, and then +fixing bayonets they rushed up the slope to the edge of the plateau +cheering loudly. + +The Boers did not await the onset; the great body had already fled. They +had believed it impossible for mortal men to scale the hill under their +continuous fire, and our steady advance through the hail of bullets had +astounded them and shaken their courage. The artillery, after ceasing +fire, had galloped off at full speed and taken up their position on the +ridge known as Smith's Nek, overlooking the plain behind the hill. For a +distance of three miles this was covered with waggons and galloping men. +The guns were about to open fire upon them when a white flag was +hoisted, and, believing that the Boers had surrendered, the gunners +abstained from firing. It was, however, but the first of numerous +similar acts of treachery, and the Boers were thus enabled to make their +escape. + +The appearance of the plateau gained by the troops was appalling. Some +five hundred of the Boers lay dead or wounded, and many had doubtless +been carried off. Three of the guns lay dismounted, the others had been +removed; for as they could not be sufficiently depressed to bear upon +the stormers, they had been taken off as soon as the advance began in +earnest. Beyond the plateau smashed waggons and dead animals lay +thickly. Great numbers of the Boer ponies had been killed; many were +still standing quietly waiting for their masters, lying dead above. + +Pursuit was out of the question. The men were exhausted by their +efforts; they were wet to the skin by the rain that had for nine hours +come down unceasingly; they had had no food since the previous day, and +the tremendous climb had taxed their powers to the utmost. For a time +they cheered vociferously, the first joy of victory overcoming the +thought of their dead and wounded comrades, who had to be collected and +carried down. The loss had been severe, ten officers and thirty men had +been killed, twenty officers and a hundred and sixty-five men wounded; +and nine officers and two hundred and eleven men did not answer to the +roll-call. This loss was unaccountable. + +Chris, as soon as the infantry advance began, had, after talking with +the others, agreed to set out in the direction in which the three +squadrons of cavalry had started in the morning with instructions to +work round, and be prepared to cut off the enemy's retreat. They had +with them some of the mounted infantry and a machine-gun. + +As the whole Boer force would be concentrated on the hill, Chris thought +that there would be no danger in riding round, especially as, even had +the Boers posted a force to protect their line of retreat, he was +confident that the speed of his horses would prevent any chance of +capture. From some natives he learned the direction that the cavalry had +taken, and presently on rising ground, saw two parties halted in hollows +some two miles apart. The farthest out on the plain appeared to be the +largest, and to this he rode. The officer in command had seen him in +camp, and as he saluted on riding up, said: + +"So you have come to lend us a hand, sir? Can you tell me how matters +are going on at Dundee?" + +"At the time we rode off, sir, the advance of the infantry had just +begun, the Boer guns had been silenced, and our men were advancing from +Smith's farm under a very heavy fire of the enemy, which continued +without intermission as long as we were within hearing distance." + +"Did you see the other squadron as you came along?" + +"They are in a hollow two miles away." + +"Ah! that is where we left them." + +The troopers were all dismounted, and the scouts followed the example. +The boom of the British guns was continuing unabated. "They can be +getting on but slowly," the officer said. "I am afraid we shall find it +a very tough job. I suppose there is a strong force up there?" + +"Over four thousand." + +"How do you know?" + +"I was up there last night," Chris said, "with three of the others. We +did not go up in these caps, as you may suppose, but in wide-brimmed +hats. We were able to get about without exciting any suspicion whatever. +We found they had six guns and over four thousand men. As we all speak +Dutch fluently there was really no chance of our being detected." + +The other officers of the squadron had all gathered round. + +"Danger or no danger, it was a very plucky action," their leader said. +"I suppose that was the news you brought in just before the troops +marched off. Well, I wish that we had got our breakfast and the horses a +feed before we started. It is more important for the horses than it is +for us, though I should not be sorry for breakfast myself." + +"We have some food in our haversacks, sir. We breakfasted before we +started, and we filled our haversacks with biscuits, thinking that +perhaps they would be welcome, for we knew that none of the troops had +anything to eat before leaving." + +"You are very good to offer it," the colonel said. "But we could not eat +while the men have nothing." + +"It will go round, sir, though it will be but a small portion for each. +We each put about ten pounds of biscuits in our haversacks, and shall +not be sorry to get rid of the weight. It will make something like +three-quarters of a pound per man all round." + +"More than that," the officer said. "I am indeed greatly obliged to +you." + +The haversacks were emptied and divided into four heaps of equal size, +with a proportionate heap for the ten officers. Four men were called up +from each troop, and in a short time the soldiers were all munching +biscuits, every man dividing his rations with his horse. The sight of +the rough-looking troop had at first excited some amusement and a little +derision among the soldiers, but this feeling was now exchanged for +gratitude, and it was unanimously agreed that these young farmers were a +capital set of fellows. The hours passed slowly until the officers, +through their glasses, saw a great movement in the encampment on the +hill. The waggons standing lowest separated from the others, and +gradually a general movement set in. + +"Our men must be gaining ground," the colonel said, "and the Boers are +beginning to funk." + +The bits were put into the horses' mouths again, the saddles buckled up +tightly, and an expression of satisfaction succeeded that of disgust at +the long hours standing in the pouring rain. Presently, when the leading +waggons were abreast of them, at a distance of about a mile, the order +was given to mount, and the two squadrons dashed across the plain and +were soon among the fugitives. There were many mounted men among them, +these being the first to steal away from the fight. They opened fire as +the cavalry approached, but were soon overthrown or driven away in +headlong flight. Many of the waggons were seized, but each moment their +defenders became stronger. The Boers were now flocking down in great +numbers, and seeing their teams and property in danger they dismounted, +formed some of the waggons up in a square, and from them opened a heavy +fire upon the troopers. Chris dismounted his party, and returned the +fire, but the officer in command, seeing that with so small a force of +infantry he could do nothing, and that the numbers of their enemies were +increasing, drew off. He would have continued the fight, but he supposed +that the artillery would soon be at work, and knew they could not open +fire as long as he was engaging the Boers, he therefore retired with the +long train of captured waggons, and late in the afternoon reached camp. + +Nothing was seen of the other squadron and mounted infantry, nor was any +news received of them until the following day, when a medical officer +with some wounded men came in. Like the larger force, they too had +ridden in among the waggons, but had taken a more northerly line, and +had come on a point where the Boers were thickest. They had charged and +taken several prisoners, and inflicted severe loss on the enemy. These, +however, had swarmed round them, keeping up an incessant fire and +barring their retreat. They took up a defensive position in a farm, and +for three hours repelled all the attacks of the Boers, until their +horses were all killed or had broken away and the ammunition exhausted, +while the Boers had just brought up the three guns they had withdrawn +from the hill. Further resistance would have ended in the extermination +of the whole party, and Lieutenant-Colonel Moller was therefore obliged +to surrender. + + + + +CHAPTER VI + +ELANDSLAAGTE + + +The scouts erected their tents again on their former ground. The +remaining inhabitants of Dundee were jubilant over the victory that had +been won, and did their best, by hanging out flags from the windows, to +decorate the town. Jack and his companion had returned to the camp with +the spare horses as soon as the hill was carried, and had the fires +lighted by the time the party came in. In spite of having worn their +blankets as cloaks, all were wet through, but after changing their +clothes, they went into the town to gather the news of how the hill had +been won, and by the time they returned their meal was ready. + +"What do you think of affairs, Chris?" + +"I think that the officer at Ladysmith was right, and that it was a +frightful mistake to divide the force and send four thousand men up +here. They have thrashed the Boers today, but they may be back again on +the top of that hill tomorrow. Besides, we know that Joubert's force was +not engaged to-day, and they and the Free Staters will be gathering +round. We might win another victory, but we are certain to be obliged to +fall back soon, and my opinion is that we shall be very lucky if we get +through safely." + +"Why not start to-morrow morning, Chris?" Peters said. "We shall be of +no use scouting here, and not much use if there is hard fighting. I hear +that some natives have brought in the news that there was some firing +to-day at Elandslaagte. If that is the case, we must have troops there, +and the chances are that they will be there to-morrow." "Yes, that is +very likely," Chris agreed. "General White will be sure to hold the line +there if he can, for he must feel sure that the force here will have to +retreat now that it is attacked in earnest. When we were talking to-day +to the cavalry, one of the officers mentioned that we had still +telegraphic communication with Ladysmith, for although the wires by the +railway are cut, it is possible to communicate through Helpmakaar. The +Boers seem to have forgotten that, for it is quite out of the direct +line, and nearly double as far round. Well, as we had no orders to come +here, I suppose there is no occasion to get orders to go back. I think +Peters's proposal is a very good one, but on a point like this everyone +ought to give an opinion. My view is that we might be a great deal more +useful there than here, and that if we stop we shall run a great chance +of being captured. I think that it would be a fair thing to put it to +the vote." + +He took two or three leaves out of his pocket-book, and tore them up +into narrow slips of paper. + +"Now," he said, "write 'Yes' if you are in favour of going back, 'No' if +you are for stopping here. Drop them into my cap and the majority shall +decide." + +When the strips of paper were examined, it was found that only two out +of the twenty-one were in favour of remaining. + +"That settles it," Chris said. "It is thirty miles down to Elandslaagte +by road, and as from here to Glencoe is five miles, and we are no nearer +there than we are here, by cutting across to Waschbrank we shall have +only five-and-twenty miles to ride. It is well that we should get there +as early as possible, so we will settle to start at five o'clock, which +will take us there by eight, in time to see anything that is going on. +No doubt we shall be able to hear from natives as we go along whether +the troops are still there; at any rate if they are, we are sure to hear +firing before we get there, unless, of course, the Boers have retired." + +The horses had already had an extra feed, and the Kaffirs were warned of +the hour at which they were going to start. The pack-horses were able to +keep up with the rest, for their loads were by no means heavy--in fact, +they carried less weight than the others. The two hundred pounds of +biscuits given to the hussars made no difference in their baggage, for +this had been bought at Dundee, as the lads decided to keep their stores +as far as possible intact for a time when they might for some days be +away scouting in a district where no provisions could be obtained. + +At four o'clock the sentries roused the others, and having taken a cup +of coffee and some cold meat and bread, and led the horses down to the +stream while the Kaffirs were loading up the packets and bundles, they +mounted at five o'clock and set off at a trot, Jack and Japhet, a name +suggested by Field, who was the wag of the party, were allowed to ride +on two of the horses that carried the lightest burdens. All the lads +were provided with compasses, but these were not necessary, as both the +natives were well acquainted with the country, which was wild and +mountainous. + +When they reached Wessels station, nine miles from Elandslaagte, they +heard the sound of guns. At this proof that there was still a force +there, they turned off from the road, and riding west, struck the point +where the main road to Meran crossed the Sundays River, and then, still +keeping a mile west of the line of railway, found themselves abreast of +the station. Just as they did so, a body of mounted volunteers galloped +up towards them. As soon as they were seen, they exchanged their hats +for forage-caps, and some of them, by Chris's orders, hoisted their +union-jacks on their rifles. + +"It is well that you raised those flags," the officer in command said. +"We made sure by your appearance that you were Boers, and rather took +your change of caps as one of their slim devices, and had our rifles +ready to give you a warm reception. I suppose you come from Dundee? We +heard news yesterday evening of the battle, and were sorry to hear how +heavy the losses were, and particularly of General Symons' wound. I +suppose you have no later news?" + +"No, beyond that we heard he was very dangerously hit indeed. He is +either at the church or town-hall. Both have been turned into +hospitals." + +"There is a good deal of anxiety at Ladysmith," the officer said. "The +general opinion is that, with the Boers closing in all round it, the +position is a very serious one." + +"I am afraid so, sir. There is nothing to prevent the Boers from +returning to their position on Talana Hill to-day; and soon after we +left the town this morning we heard the sound of guns away on the right, +and supposed that the Free Staters had approached Glencoe. As mounted +men are of very little use there, and our party is too small to be able +to do any good, we thought it would be best to come back here, +especially as there was a native report that there was firing in this +direction." + +"Yes; a party of our cavalry under French came up with a battery of +field artillery. There was a little skirmishing, but in the evening the +Boers were strongly reinforced, and our cavalry returned to Ladysmith. +It was only a reconnaissance to ascertain the general situation. To-day +we are stronger. Squadrons of the 5th Dragoon Guards, 5th Lancers, the +Natal mounted, battery, and several detachments of mounted volunteers, +including the Imperial Light Horse, and half the Manchester Regiment, +are coming up in an armoured train. I suppose you are not attached to +any other corps?" + +"Yes; we form a section of Captain Brookfield's corps of Maritzburg +Scouts. As you see, we are not in uniform; it being thought that, as we +are all from Johannesburg, and speak Dutch and Kaffir, we should be of +more use for scouting if able to appear as Boers." + +"A very good idea," the officer said, "but somewhat dangerous; for if +they caught you they would assuredly shoot you as spies." + +"We don't mean to be caught if we can help it, as you see we are very +well mounted." + +"Uncommonly well. Brookfield's subscriptions must have come in +handsomely for him to be able to buy such horses as those." + +"We provide our own mounts and equipments," Chris said, "and consider +ourselves very lucky in getting hold of this batch of horses from Mr. +Duncan on the day he arrived at Maritzburg. I really think they were +very cheap at sixty pounds each." + +"They were not dear, certainly; and the fact that they came from him is +in itself a sufficient recommendation. We have got some thirty from him, +but they are a different stamp of animal and did not cost half that +figure. And now we must be riding to join the rest of our fellows. We +made you out when you were a couple of miles away, and were sent off to +ascertain what you were. By the way, you will find Brookfield there. He +arrived with his men by rail last evening." Riding on, they soon came +upon the mounted corps, and were warmly received by Captain Brookfield. + +"You are back just in time," he said. "I suppose that you saw something +of the fight yesterday, but, as I see your number still complete, you +can scarcely have been in the thick of it?" + +"We were with two squadrons of Hussars, and captured a good many waggons +and did a little fighting, but nothing very serious. There were only a +few casualties. We heard, however, from Colonel Yule, who has succeeded +poor Symons, that up to ten o'clock last night, another of the squadrons +of the Hussars and a company of mounted infantry with them had not +returned, and nothing was known of their whereabouts." + +"Had they not got into camp when you started?" + +"I did not hear, sir. In fact, we set off by daylight. But last night it +was hoped that the squadron, which was acting independently, had lost +their way, and would come in this morning. Where is the Boer force now?" + +"Our batteries have shelled them out of the station. They were wholly +unprepared for it, and bolted at once to those hills a mile and half +east of the line. Their camp lies at the bottom of that conical hill. +You can make them out from here with your glass. There, French is moving +forward." + +The order had indeed been given to advance, the artillery accompanying +the cavalry, and halting every two or three minutes to deliver their +fire. The ground was flat, but cut up by gullies. As soon as they came +within range, the colonials dismounted and added their fire to that of +the guns. An immense confusion was seen to reign in the Boer camp, and +thirty-seven British subjects, including the officials and staff at the +railway-station, and some of the coal-miners, took advantage of this and +ran forward to join their friends. They were at once sent back into +Ladysmith, after having given the information that General Koch was in +command of the Boers, and that Commandant Miellof and the German Colonel +Shiel, with many of the Johannesburg commando, were there. Chris and his +comrades felt great satisfaction at the news. + +"We have a chance of paying off old scores on the right persons now," +Chris said. "I do hope that the fellows who insulted us when we were +coming down are here, and that we shall manage to get among them." + +For the time, however, this wish was not gratified. The Boers now seeing +that they had such a small force opposed to them, steadied themselves +and opened fire with some guns, Maxims, and rifles from the crest of the +hill, while a swarm of horsemen and dismounted men poured out to +threaten the flanks of the British. The odds were too great; the +comparatively heavy guns of the enemy were well aimed and served, and +quite overpowered the fire of the light cannon of the field and mountain +batteries. The order was given to fall back, which was done in good +order, though the troops were harassed by a hot fire from the enemy +concealed in the gullies. On reaching the high ground near Modder +Spruit, the country was more in favour of the British, who were now +extended on each flank. The Boers were unable or unwilling to move their +heavy guns from their position on the hill, and being now beyond their +range, and exposed to the fire of four batteries as well as the +infantry, those pressing forward fell back. General French had brought +out a signalling apparatus with him, and the telegraph wires were +tapped, and a message sent to General White asking him for +reinforcements in order to carry the Boer position. + +The fight now ceased for a time. A party of the Boers occasionally crept +forward and opened fire, but the Colonial Horse dashed forward and sent +them flying back to the hills. From nine o'clock till a quarter to two +the troops remained idle, but the reinforcements then arrived, a battery +of field artillery, several squadrons of Dragoons, Lancers, and +Colonials, and the Devonshire regiment and Gordon Highlanders, the +infantry being brought up by train. These were under the command of +Colonel Ian Hamilton, who had a thorough knowledge of Boer tactics, and +knew how to handle his troops. It was well that it was so, for, led by a +less experienced commander, they would have suffered terribly in their +advance. While the infantry detrained, the Colonials, followed by the +5th Lancers, rode towards some low hills, whence some parties of Boers +had maintained a distant fire. These were at once scattered. The +infantry marched along some ridges parallel with the railway, but a mile +away, while the Devonshire regiment kept along the low ground by the +line. The 5th Dragoon Guards, with some troops of Colonials and one of +the field batteries, moved forward on the left. + +The Manchesters were on the right of the infantry, the Gordons in the +centre, and the Devons on the left, as they set their faces towards the +Boer position. At three o'clock the action began, the Boer riflemen +opening a heavy fire. It was still too distant, however, to do any +serious execution, and the British moved forward as regularly and +unconcernedly as if it had been a field day. The Boer fire grew in +intensity, and one of our batteries opened with shrapnel to drive them +from the lower ridges. At half-past three the Boer artillery joined +their deeper roar to the rattle of musketry and the sharp cracks of the +British guns. Although it was still early the light was indistinct, for +a heavy thunder-storm had been for some time brewing, and this burst +before the heat of the action really began. The darkness was all in +favour of the advancing infantry, who in their khaki uniforms were +almost invisible to the Boers. + +The troops were now in extended open order, and advanced towards the +foot of the hill by rushes, taking advantage of the ant-hills that +studded the plain and afforded an excellent cover, being high enough to +cover them while lying down, and thick and compact enough to resist the +passage of a Mauser bullet. The Highlanders were suffering the most +heavily, their dark kilts showing up strongly against the light sandy +soil, and while the Devons and Manchesters sustained but few casualties, +they were dropping fast. They and the Manchesters were somewhat in +advance of the Devons, who were guarding their flank, which was +threatened by a large number of Boers gathered on the ridges on that +side. + +The storm was now at its height, the thunder for a time deadening the +roar of the battle, but through the driving rain the infantry pressed on +until they reached the foot of the Boers' hill. Large numbers of the +enemy were on the slope, hidden from sight by the boulders, but these +could not long maintain their position, for the British marksmen shot as +straight as the Boer. Our batteries, which had almost silenced those of +the enemy, scattered their shrapnel among those higher up the hill, and +as the Boers rose to fly before the bayonets of our cheering troops, +they were swept away by volleys of the Lee-Metfords. So, with short +pauses when shelter was obtainable, our troops bore upwards, cheering +and even joking, until they reached the last shoulder of the hill. The +Boers made a short but plucky struggle, numbers pushing up from behind +to help their comrades, but nothing could check the impetuosity of our +troops. The magazines of the rifles were now for the first time set in +action, and the Boer force withered away under the terrible storm of +shot. + +The men of the Imperial Light Horse, who had dismounted and joined in +the advance, were fighting side by side with the Highlanders and +Manchesters. The pace was now increased to a run, and shouting and +cheering the men went forward with levelled bayonets. Many of the Boers, +lying behind rocks, maintained their fire until the troops were within +two yards of them, and then rising, called for quarter. The men, furious +at seeing their comrades shot down when all hope of resistance was over, +would have spared none, had not the officers with the greatest +difficulty restrained them from bayoneting the Boers, and many of these +were in fact killed. As the troops, now joined by the Devons, were +rushing down upon the camp, the Boers raised a white flag, and the bugle +sounded "Cease firing". The men halted for a moment and then were +advancing quietly when a tremendous fire broke out from the Boers, who +were scattered over the ridges of the hillside and a slope leading to +its summit. + +Hitherto the British loss had been wonderfully small considering the +storm of bullets through which they had passed, but numbers now dropped, +and taken wholly by surprise, the troops ran up the hill again. But not +for long. Halting when they reached the crest, and furious at the +treachery that had been practised with such success upon them, they +turned again, and rushed down the hill, scattering the Boers, who still +clung to their shelters, with their fire. It was just six o'clock when +the Devons carried the last defence of the Boers and then with the +Manchesters swept down into the camp. It was now the turn of the +cavalry. These had in the darkness moved forward unnoticed, and the +Lancers and Dragoons, with a few of the Colonials, among whom were the +Maritzburg Scouts, fell upon the flying Boers and cut them up with great +slaughter, and, although it was now quite dark, followed them for +upwards of two miles, and then returned to camp. + +The losses were heavy. The Gordons had lost four officers killed and +seven wounded, and a total of a hundred and fifteen casualties among the +four hundred and twenty-five men led into action. The Imperial Light +Horse lost their colonel and had seven officers wounded, and eight men +killed and forty wounded. Two hundred of the Boers lay dead upon the +field. Their wounded were vastly more numerous, and most of the +principal officers were killed or captured. General Koch, two of his +brothers, a son, and a nephew were all wounded; Shiel, Viljoen, and many +others killed or captured. Everything had been left behind. Three guns, +all their baggage, their waggons, a great quantity of arms and +ammunition, and many horses fell into the hands of the victors. Several +battle flags were also captured, and two hundred prisoners were brought +in by the cavalry. The night was a dreadful one, the rain still +continued to come down, the cold was bitter, and it was next to +impossible to find, still less to bring down, the wounded. Nevertheless +the soldiers carried on the work during the greater part of the night. +Boer waggons were turned for a time into hospital tents, and here by the +light of their lanterns the surgeons laboured unweariedly in giving what +aid was possible to those brought in, whether Boers or Britons. Chris +and his band worked as hard as the rest, and carried down a great number +of wounded; but in spite of all the exertions of the troops many +remained on the hillside all night, the sufferings from the wounds being +as nothing to that caused by the wet and cold. The lads' flasks were of +great use now, and enabled many a man, too badly wounded to be carried +down the rough hillside, to hold on till morning. General White had +arrived from Ladysmith while the battle was going on, but he left the +command in the hands of General French. On the following morning orders +came for General French to retire, as strong parties of the enemy had +been seen further south, and it was hourly becoming more and more +evident that it would be impossible to hold the country beyond +Ladysmith, and many were of opinion that even this position was too far +advanced. + +The splendid valour shown by our soldiers at Dundee and Elandslaagte, +and the heavy losses they suffered, had been practically thrown away. +The coal-fields of Northern Natal had been lost, the loyal settlers had +been plundered and ruined. Colonel Yule's force was in imminent peril, +and all that had been obtained was the temporary possession of the two +heights, both of which had to be relinquished on the following morning. +Beyond showing the Boers how enormously they had underrated the fighting +powers of the British troops, no advantage whatever had been gained by +the advance beyond Ladysmith. + +Three of the Johannesburg Scouts had been wounded in the charge among +the Boers. None of the injuries were severe, being merely flesh wounds, +of which they were hardly conscious during the fighting, and which would +not be likely to keep them long from the saddle. None of them applied +for medical assistance, as the surgeons were so fully occupied with +serious cases. Their comrades bound up the wounds and placed them in the +most sheltered position they could find, five of their comrades +remaining in charge of them and the horses, there being no possibility +of finding the two Kaffirs and the spare animals in the confusion and +darkness. + +"We have had one lesson," Chris said, as at seven in the morning the +party assembled, worn out by the long night's work, "and that is, that +blankets are well enough against a passing shower, but that when there +is any probability of wet we must carry our waterproof sheets with us. +Of course they would have been no good last night, but on occasions when +there is no need for us to be using our hands they will be an immense +comfort." + +"But we should have been wet through before we lay down, Chris." + +"Yes, they would not have kept us dry, but they would have gone a long +way towards keeping us warm. It would be like putting oilskin over wet +lint; we should have felt as if we were in a hot poultice in a short +time. And even while riding it would have been very comfortable, if we +had worn them as we did the blankets, with a hole in the middle to put +our heads through." + +"But that would spoil them for tents," Carmichael said. + +"Well, we could have flaps sewn so as to cover the hole." + +"Our blankets were very useful last night," Horrocks remarked. "I don't +know how we could have got many of those poor fellows down the hill if +we had not carried them in the blankets. It was infinitely easier for +them and a great deal easier for us. I saw lots of soldiers using theirs +in the same way." "Are you sure you will be able to sit your horses down +to Ladysmith?" Chris asked Brown, Capper, and Harris, the three wounded. + +All laughed. "One would think that we were babies, Chris," Harris said. +"We could ride to Maritzburg if necessary, though I feel my arm rather +stiff, and no doubt it will be stiffer still to-morrow. I felt a bit +miserable at sunrise after lying there shivering, and envied you fellows +who could keep yourselves warm by working; but I am beginning to thaw +out now, and the sight of the Kaffirs coming towards us with the horses +half an hour ago, and the thought of hot coffee, did even more than the +sun to warm me." + +"It will be ready soon," Willesden, who was specially in charge of the +stores, said. "It was a capital idea bringing that large spirit stove +and the paraffin with us; even a native could not find any dry sticks +this morning." + +"Except as the soldiers have done," Chris said, pointing to where, a +quarter of a mile from the spot where they had gathered, a dozen fires +were blazing, the soldiers having utilized some of the Boer waggons that +had been smashed by the shell for the purpose of firewood. + +"Yes, but if we were by ourselves, Chris, there would be no broken +waggons; besides, after all I should not care to go down and scramble +with the soldiers for a place to put a kettle on. At any rate, the stove +will be invaluable out on the veldt." + +"We all agree with you, Willesden," Peters said, "and it was because you +were the one who suggested it that we promoted you to the office of +superintendent of the kitchen. It is a comfort, too, that we have some +clear water instead of having to get it from one of these muddy streams. +The storm has done good anyhow, for if it had not been for that there +would have been no breakfast for the troops until they had moved to the +river." + +In another twenty minutes they were drinking hot coffee and munching +biscuits. At ten o'clock the bugle sounded the assembly, and the troops +formed up, the wounded were placed in ambulance waggons or carried on +stretchers, and all returned to Elandslaagte station. Here the wounded +were sent on by train, while the infantry and cavalry returned by road. +Talking to some of the officers of the Imperial Horse, several of whom +were friends of his father, and had only left Johannesburg a short time +before the declaration of war, Chris learned that the principal object +in fighting the battle was to drive the Boers off the line by which the +Dundee force would retreat; for Colonel Yule in his telegraphic despatch +had stated, that although a victory had been won he felt that the +position was untenable, and that he might at any moment be forced to +evacuate it. He also learned that the safety of the line beyond +Ladysmith was already threatened, but whether Sir George White would +decide upon falling back towards Pietermaritzburg or would hold +Ladysmith no one knew. Certainly nothing could be determined upon until +General Yule rejoined with the division from Dundee. + +The position there was indeed growing worse every hour. While the battle +of Elandslaagte was being fought the Boers had opened fire from the +hills above Glencoe on the British camp, and had compelled it to shift +its position. The next day they were again obliged to move by artillery +on the Impati mountain, and it was then that General Yule decided to +retire at once on Ladysmith. A cavalry reconnaissance which was sent out +found that the Boers were in great strength in the pass of Glencoe, and +it was therefore determined to move by the roundabout way through +Helpmakaar. Some stores of ammunition that had been left under a guard +in the other camp were fetched, and with full pouches the little army +started on its long and perilous march at nine o'clock on the evening of +the 22nd. The camp was abandoned as it stood. The wounded remained with +some surgeons under the protection of the Red Cross flag. All the +available transport accompanied the column, but the men's kits and all +other encumbrances were left behind. They were obliged to pass through +Dundee to get upon the southern road, but so quietly was the movement +effected that but few of the townsmen knew what was happening. + +The column was led by Colonel Dartnel, chief of the Natal Police, whose +knowledge of the district was invaluable to the troops. The roads were +heavy, and the rain continued to pour down in torrents. Each man carried +three days' provisions; they tramped along silently through the night; +stoppages by swollen streams were frequent, and by daybreak the next +morning they had only accomplished nine miles of their journey. Early in +the morning the townspeople had woke up to the fact that the army had +gone, and there was a general exodus of all who could obtain +conveyances. The Boers remained for some time in ignorance that the +force whose capture or destruction they had regarded as certain had +slipped away. They saw the tents, but the fact that neither men nor +horses were visible puzzled them, and it was eleven o'clock before some +of the more venturesome galloping down found that the English force had +escaped. + +Then from all sides they poured into the town. Had they at once pursued +they might still have overtaken the retreating force before nightfall; +but they immediately set to work to loot the great stores of provisions +left behind, and to gather their pickings from the deserted houses of +Dundee, and so let slip their opportunity, and no pursuit whatever was +attempted. For four days the column continued its march, resting for a +few hours each day and usually marching all night. The road was terribly +bad, leading through narrow mountain passes, and had but a small force +of the enemy held the Waschbrank gorge, where the sides were for three +miles nearly perpendicular, a terrible calamity might have taken place. +Happily, however, the Boers were in absolute ignorance of the road which +the British troops were following, and concluded that they must have +somewhere crossed the railway and were making their way down by the +roads to its west. That they had gone through Helpmakaar does not appear +to have occurred to them, for after marching some thirty miles to that +town the column was as far off Ladysmith as when it started. + +The anxiety at the latter town was intense. The line being still uncut, +the arrival of the column at Helpmakaar was known, but beyond that no +communication could be received. On Tuesday the 24th Colonel Dartnel +arrived in Ladysmith with the news that the column was now twenty miles +away, all well, and he at once returned to them with supplies and a +small relief force. On Wednesday many of the men came in, and on +Thursday the remainder arrived and were heartily greeted. On the 24th-- +in order to divert the attention of Joubert and the Free State Boers, +both of whom were converging upon General Yule's column, still making +its way through the passes--a force composed of three regiments of +cavalry, four of Colonial Mounted Infantry, three batteries, and four +infantry regiments went out. The enemy were found near Reitfontein. No +actual engagement took place, but for some hours an artillery and rifle +duel was maintained and the Boers fell back. The number of casualties +was not large, and these were principally among the Gloucester regiment, +who, on entering a valley supposed to be untenanted, were received by a +heavy fire from a strong party of the enemy hidden there. The fight, +however, fulfilled the object for which the advance was undertaken, that +of occupying the Boers' attention and enabling the column from Dundee to +make its way into Ladysmith unmolested. The Boers were now closing in on +the latter town from all directions, and preparations for defence at +once began. The town-hall and the schools were fitted up as hospitals +and everything arranged for the reception of wounded. As the Boers had +already been seen near Colenso, sixteen miles to the south, it was +certain that the communications would ere long be cut. + +No more unsuitable place for a military camp could well have been +selected than Ladysmith, which had indeed been chosen, years before the +war was thought of, on account of its position on the railway, and the +vicinity of the Klip river. The fact that the country immediately round +was fertile and forage was obtainable no doubt influenced the military +authorities in their selection. Lying in the heart of a mountainous +country, it was commanded by steep and rocky hills at a distance of from +two to four miles. Just as many castles built in the days before +firearms were in use were rendered untenable against even the clumsy +cannon of early days placed on eminences near, so the improvement in +artillery and the possession of powerful modern guns by the Boers had +gravely imperilled the position of Ladysmith. The military authorities +could never have anticipated that the town would be besieged by foes +armed with artillery that could carry over five miles. But such was the +case now, and all there felt, as soon as it was decided to defend the +place till the last, that the position was a precarious one. + +Fortunately, a considerable store of provisions had been collected, and +so long as the line was open additions were being sent up by every +train. The line was a single one, winding along through passes among the +hills, and therefore open to attack by small bodies of the enemy. In +point of size Ladysmith was the third largest town in Natal. Durban +boasted a population of thirty thousand, Pietermaritzburg of twenty +thousand, and Ladysmith of four thousand five hundred, being four +hundred larger than that of Dundee. It was the point at which the line +of railway forked, one branch running north through Glencoe to the +Transvaal, the other northwest through Van Reenen's Pass to +Bloemfontein. It was a pretty straggling town with its barracks, +government buildings and large stores. Almost all the houses were +detached and standing in their own gardens, and as these were largely +wooded its appearance was very picturesque, with the Klip river, a +branch of the Tugela, running through it. The houses were, for the most +part, one-storied, and the roofs were all painted white for the sake of +coolness. No perfectly open town had ever before undergone a siege by an +army of some thirty thousand men provided with excellent guns, and yet +the garrison awaited the result with perfect confidence. + + + + +CHAPTER VII + +LADYSMITH BESIEGED + + +On the 30th, the Boers being now in force on many of the hills around +the town, and having inflicted the first annoyance upon Ladysmith by +cutting the conduit that brought down the water-supply to the town from +a reservoir among the hills, and so forced it for the future to depend +upon a few wells and the muddy water of the river, it was determined to +make an effort to drive them back and to gain possession of some of the +hills from which it was now evident the town would stand a risk of being +bombarded. Hitherto there had been considerable apathy in taking +measures for keeping the enemy as far as possible out of range. A few +redoubts thrown up during the last week and strongly held would have +been invaluable, but it seemed to be considered by the military +authorities that the siege could be but a short one, and that the Boers +would speedily be driven off by the troops now pouring into Durban. + +An effort was now to be made to repair the consequences of this +remissness and to drive the Boers off the positions they occupied, and +it was hoped that if a heavy blow were dealt them they would draw off +altogether. The forces of Joubert, Meyer, and the Free Staters were now +all within a distance of a few miles, and were all to be beaten up. +Their central position was on a hill afterwards known as Signal Hill, +and on this they had already planted a forty-pounder gun. A force +composed of six companies of the Royal Irish Fusiliers, four and a half +of the Gloucesters, a mountain battery and a troop of Hussars started at +midnight towards a hill known as Nicholson's Nek, occupied by the Free +Staters. Major General Hunter with a brigade of infantry, three +batteries, and a small cavalry force were to attack Meyer's commando to +the east, while General White, with two infantry brigades, French's +cavalry, and six batteries of field artillery moved against Joubert's +force on Modder Spruit. It was hoped that the Boers, if defeated, would +find their retreat barred by the force that had stated early for +Nicholson's Nek. All were well away from the town before daylight broke. + +At five o'clock in the morning the guns spoke out, and were at once +answered by the Boer artillery, and the roar of fire soon became +general. General White's central column was screened by a ridge near the +railway, and the big gun on Signal Hill directed its fire partly against +the town and partly against the cavalry which could be seen by them in +rear of the column. As only a few of the Volunteer Horse had been +ordered to accompany the attacking force, Chris and his companions took +up their position on an eminence that afforded a general view of the +battle, and here a large number of the townspeople also gathered. The +general plan of operations was that the two movable columns should form +a rough arc of a circle and, driving in both flanks of the Boers, sweep +the whole force before them. + +"They have a great many guns," Peters said, as the rattle of the +machine-guns and the thud of quick-firing one-pounders joined the +continuous fire of several Boer batteries and the deeper roar of their +big gun, "and they seem to be in greater force than was supposed, for I +can make out large reinforcements coming up to them from behind." + +Our artillery were first placed about four thousand yards from the Boer +position, but as this was on higher ground than that occupied by our +guns our fire did not appear to be effective. They were therefore moved +forward some distance, supported by two battalions of the Rifles and the +Dublin Fusiliers. The infantry force with them pushed forward rapidly +and gained a crest from which they threatened to take the Boer position +on Signal Hill in rear; but the Boers, very strongly reinforced, moved +to meet them, and heavy fighting took place, until the enemy's force +became so strong that they not only checked the further advance of the +brigade, but threatened it on both flanks. Two batteries went to their +assistance, but even with this aid they could not continue their +advance, pressed as they were by greatly superior numbers and harassed +by the fire of the Boer field batteries on the hill. + +At other points our advance was opposed as hotly. Nowhere were our +infantry gaining ground. The enemy had not wasted their time, but had +thrown up intrenchments on the steep hills they occupied, and from these +shelters maintained a terrible fire, while their numerous machine-guns +swept the ground with a hail of bullets and shells. On such ground the +cavalry were useless, and the range of the Boer guns was much greater +than that of our own. + +"It seems to me," Chris said, "that instead of gaining ground we are +losing it. We can't see at all what is going on, but certainly the +firing seems nearer than it was." + +All had thought the same though none had cared to suggest such a thing. + +"Hurrah! there is a train coming in," Field said. "I heard they were +expecting a party of sailors with naval guns. They would be useful just +at the present moment. Let us go down and see, we can make out nothing +from here." + +Glad to be doing something they went down the hill. As they reached the +station they saw a large detachment of sailors at work detraining some +twelve-pounders and two large quick-firing guns. Teams of oxen were +brought up, the sailors harnessed themselves to ropes, and with +tremendous exertions one of the guns was taken up to an eminence, and at +eleven it opened fire. It was but just in time. In steady order the +columns were retiring with their faces towards the Boers, answering shot +for shot, carrying off their wounded as they dropped, in spite of the +terrible rifle fire and the roar of the Boers' batteries; but as soon as +the first naval gun opened fire, amid the cheers of the townspeople, the +situation was changed. The first two shells burst close to the Boer big +gun, the third in the midst of the artillerymen, and it was some time +before its fire was resumed. In the meantime the sailors had turned +their attention to other Boer batteries which the field artillery had +scarcely been able to reach, and one by one these were withdrawn over +the crest. + +At one o'clock Colonel Hamilton's brigade, which had hitherto been lying +behind the crest they first occupied, in readiness to repel any counter- +attack the Boers might make, now moved out and took up their position to +cover the retirement of Hunter's column and Howard's brigade, and +although the Boers pressed hotly upon them they held their ground +steadily until their comrades had all reached their camp, and then +marched in unhindered by the enemy, whose big cannon had now been +finally silenced by the naval gun and their batteries for the most part +obliged to retire. + +After seeing the naval gun open fire Chris had gone down to speak to +Captain Brookfield, when he met two soldiers of a mountain battery +carrying an injured comrade. They took him into the hospital and then +came out. Their shoulder-straps showed them to belong to the mountain +battery that had gone out with the Royal Irish Fusiliers and the +Gloucesters, of whom nothing had been heard, though occasionally, in +momentary intervals of fire, the sound of distant musketry could be made +out in the direction of Nicholson's Nek. + +"How are your party getting on?" he asked. + +"We don't know anything about them, sir," one of the men said, "except +that they have been heavily engaged since daylight. I am afraid that +they are in a tight place." + +"How is it you know nothing about them?" + +"It has been a bad job altogether," the man said. "We were marching up a +steep valley with only room for us to lead two mules abreast; we were in +the rear of the column. Suddenly a boulder came rolling down the hill +and some shots were fired. In a moment the mules stampeded. One or two +began it, kicking and plunging and squealing like wild beasts, then the +others all set to. There was no holding them? it was almost pitch-dark, +and before one could say 'knife' they were tearing down the road we had +come up. There was no time to stop, and those who were lucky jumped out +of their way, those who were not were knocked down and trampled on. As +soon as they had gone those of us who were not hurt set off after them +and looked for them everywhere, but only two or three were caught. Where +the rest went I don't know, but I hope that they got into the enemy's +line of fire and were all shot. At last we gave it up as a bad job and +went back to bring in the fellows who were hurt. I think most of them +are in now. We have been a long time, for Thompson's leg was broken and +one of his arms, and, I expect, most of his ribs, and it hurt him so to +be moved that we have had to stop every two yards." "It is a bad +business indeed," Chris said; "and of course all your guns are lost?" + +"Every one of them, and what is worse, all the reserve small-arm +ammunition is lost too. The mules carrying them were with ours, and as +the fighting up there has been going on ever since, I am afraid the +infantry must have pretty well used up their last cartridges." + +It was not until the next day that the extent of the calamity was known, +when a Boer came down with a white flag asking that doctors might be +sent up. The little column instead of, as had been hoped, surprising the +Boers had itself been ambushed, being suddenly attacked by two strong +parties of the enemy. They at once seized a little eminence, threw up a +breastwork of stone, and defended themselves successfully until the +ammunition was entirely exhausted, and a hundred and fifty had been +killed or wounded. The Boers had, by taking advantage of every bit of +cover, crept up close to them, and a murderous fire was poured in. The +two regiments asked Colonel Carleton, who commanded them, to allow them +to charge with their bayonets and cut their way through. He consented to +allow the desperate attempt to be made, and the men were in the act of +fixing bayonets when someone raised a white flag, and the Boers standing +up advanced to receive the surrender. + +After this the laws of war permitted no further defence, and the men, +half mad with fury at the situation in which they were placed, threw +down their rifles and were made prisoners. This was at two o'clock in +the afternoon, after the rest of the force had returned to Ladysmith; +and thus some nine hundred men fell into the hands of the Boers. Apart +from this the loss was comparatively small considering the heat of the +engagement. The day's work had been altogether unsatisfactory; no +advantage whatever had been gained beyond the discovery of the Boers' +position, and their unexpected strength and fighting powers, and it was +evident that the force at Ladysmith was unable to drive off the enemy +unaided, and must undergo a siege until the arrival of a relieving army. +There were provisions calculated to last for two months, and no one +doubted that long before that time General Buller would arrive to their +rescue. So confident had the military authorities been, that not only +had no defensive works been thrown up, but they had omitted to send the +women and children, and the men unfitted to give active assistance, to +the rear. + +On the following morning the scouts held a council of war. + +"Now," Chris said, "we have to decide the all-important question. It is +quite certain that the town is going to be besieged, and I should say +that the siege will last for some time, as nothing can be done to +relieve them until a lot of troops arrive from home. We have shown at +Dundee and Elandslaagte that our fellows can drive the Boers from their +kopjes, but a force arriving to relieve Ladysmith would have to fight +its way through a tremendously mountainous district, and to capture at +least eight or ten such positions. At Dundee and Elandslaagte the Boers +had only a few guns, and the big one from Pretoria had not arrived, nor +had they time to fortify themselves. It is certain, therefore, that it +will require a very big force to fight its way in here, especially as +the Tugela has to be crossed, and the Boers will of course destroy the +bridges. + +"It may be a couple of months before the place is relieved. Of course +the question is, Shall we stay here or go? I don't think we should be of +much use here; indeed, I don't see that cavalry would be any good at +all, whereas if a portion of the Boers push south we may be very useful +in our own line of scouting. Still, this is a question for you to +decide. You chose to make me your commander when at work, but we should +all have an equal voice in a matter of this sort." + +There was little discussion; all were of their leader's opinion that it +was best for them to leave. The prospect of a long siege in which they +could take but little active part was not a pleasant one, and it was +decided at once that they should leave. + +"Very well," Chris said. "Then I will go in to Captain Brookfield and +ask his permission to go. Now that we are in camp with him he must be +consulted." + +They had since Elandslaagte taken their places as a part of the +Maritzburg Scouts, and had been drilled for some hours each day. They +were already favourites among the corps, who were proud of the work they +had done, and being a pleasant set of lads their uncouth appearance, +which had at first been viewed with much disfavour by many of their +comrades, had been forgiven. Chris went to the commander's tent and laid +the matter and their decision before him. + +"I think that it is just as well that you should go, Chris," the officer +said; "and indeed I was on the point of telling you that we are all +leaving. For myself I cannot understand why the cavalry should be kept +here, and indeed I know that it is their opinion also, and that they +have asked the general to let them leave. However, he has decided to +keep them. I am sure it is a mistake. Before the siege is over forage is +sure to run short, and half the cavalry will be dismounted before the +end comes. However, I have seen him and pointed out that as scouts we +should be useless here. He has given me leave to go, but has requested +me to join the first troops that come up the line. When we are once away +I shall give you leave to act altogether independently of us, which will +I am sure suit you better than being kept for weeks perhaps at Colenso +or Estcourt. Another thing I will do. General Yule was speaking to me +only yesterday of the manner in which your party defeated and cut up +more than double your number, and how you and three of your party went +into the Boer camp at Talana and ascertained their strength for General +Symons. I expect that General Buller will come on here, as it is +certainly the most serious point at present. I will ask Yule to give you +a letter of introduction to him, it will be useful; and I have no doubt +that he will give you a free hand, as I have done. I should not call +upon General Buller in that rig-out, if I were you. I have heard he is +somewhat of a martinet at the War Office, and we know that they have a +very poor opinion of volunteers there." + +Chris smiled. "Volunteers have done good service at the Cape before now, +sir, and have shown over and over again that a man can fight just as +well in plain clothes as if he were buttoned up to the chin in uniform; +and as the Boers are themselves nothing but volunteers, I should think +that before this war is over the War Office will see its mistake." + +"I should think so indeed, Chris, but at present they have certainly not +woke up to the fact. I see by the telegrams that the London Scottish and +the London Irish have both volunteered almost to a man for service here, +and that they have not even had a civil reply to their application. I +tell you, lad, this war is going to be a big thing, and before it is +over we may have both militia and volunteers out here, and perhaps +troops from the colonies. I heard that some of the Australian colonies +have already offered to send bodies of mounted men, and that our +government are ordering out a larger number of men than was at first +intended. I hear this morning that at Kimberley and Mafeking fighting +has begun. On the 24th Kimberley made a successful sortie, and on the +25th a general attack on Mafeking was repulsed. The fact that both these +places are beleaguered, and that we have again been obliged to fall back +here, and are likely to be cut off altogether, has evidently stirred +them up, and they begin to understand that it is going to be a much +bigger affair than they expected. + +"I wrote to your mother yesterday at Durban, and told her that I +intended to leave while it is still possible. Of course you have +written; but I told her of the flattering way in which General Yule had +spoken of the doings of you and your party, and said that I hoped she +would not be anxious, for it was quite evident that you were able to +take good care of yourselves. My letter was in answer to one she wrote +to me from Durban, begging me to keep you from undertaking what she +called 'mad-brained business', and expressing some regret that you and +the others had been allowed to form a separate corps, instead of being +under the command of an experienced officer like myself. I told her that +I thought that you would have less chance of coming to harm in scouting +work than if you had to work in a regular way as the general ordered. If +this sort of fighting--I mean, of attacking in front every position the +Boers choose to take--goes on, our numbers will very speedily dwindle +away. + +"The fact is, as far as we colonials can see, the regulars do not as yet +understand fighting the Boers. Nothing could be more splendid than the +behaviour of the troops, both at Dundee and Elandslaagte, but in our +humble opinion neither fight was necessary; and if Talana was to be +attacked, it should have been done by marching the troops round the hill +and taking it in the rear. In that case the Boers would have bolted +without firing a shot. That it could have been done is shown by the fact +that the cavalry did it, and encountered no difficulty on the way. +Again, at Elandslaagte the object of keeping the road open would have +been equally well attained if, after driving them out of the station, we +had taken up a strong position there and waited for them to attack us. +Therefore, Chris, I think that fighting in our way--that is to say, in +Boer fashion--and trusting to skill as much as to shooting, you will be +running a good deal less risk than you would in fighting under British +generals in British fashion. We shall go off quietly this evening. We +must keep a bright look-out on the way, for the trains have been fired +upon, and at any moment the Boers may pull up the rails and block the +roads altogether." + +Two hours later all was ready for a start, and just before sunset the +corps rode out of Ladysmith. They kept a sharp look-out as they went, +but saw no signs of the enemy, and crossing the Tugela by the bridge +near Colenso, halted there for the night. Here Captain Brookfield +reported his arrival to the officer in command of the troops, and on the +following day Chris and his friends rode on to Estcourt. They had seen +some parties of mounted men in the far distance, but none had come near +them, and as the military authorities were well aware of the Boers being +in the vicinity, there was nothing to be gained by scouting. But it was +now decided that they were in advance of the point that any large number +of the enemy were likely to reach, and might therefore strike across the +country and resume what they considered their regular work. They added +to their stores several articles whose want they had felt, had slits +made in the waterproof sheets, and covers sewn on to close the holes +when they were used for tents, and had some triangular pieces of the +same material made to buckle on so as to close the rear of the tents, +which had before been open to the wind and rain. They had employed much +of their spare time in training their horses and in teaching them to lie +down when ordered, and thus share the shelter taken up by their masters, +behind rocks or a wall. + +The officer commanding the small force at Estcourt had at first viewed +them with some suspicion, but Colonel Yule had purposely left open the +letter with which he had furnished Chris, so that it could be shown to +any officers commanding posts or detached forces, and its production now +caused his cold reception to be converted into a warm welcome. Riding +across country they met more than one farmer trekking with his cattle +and belongings towards the ferry across the Mooi river. These reported +that the Boers had overrun the whole of the country north of the Tugela, +and that some parties had already crossed at the ferry on the road +between Helpmakaar and Greytown. Fugitives had come in from the villages +on the other side, and complained that the Boers were looting +everywhere, and had driven off thousands of cattle and numbers of +horses, and had everywhere wantonly destroyed the furniture and +everything they could not carry off, in the farmhouses they visited. + +A vigilant look-out was kept as the scouts advanced. On the second day +after starting they encamped on a slight elevation near Mount Umhlumba, +and early next morning they saw a party of some twenty Boers riding in a +direction that would bring them within rifle-shot of their camp. All +were at once on the alert. + +"We will not go out and attack them," Chris said to the lads who were +running towards their horses. "That would mean that though we might kill +all of them, half of us would probably be shot. We will ambush them. Get +the picket ropes loose and the bridles on ready for mounting, and then +leave the horses in charge of the natives where we camped. They will be +out of sight there. When you have done that take your places quietly +among the rocks. Do you, Capper and Carmichael, put yourselves twenty or +thirty yards apart; you are our best shots. When the Boers get within a +thousand yards, which is as near as they will do if they keep the line +they are going, open fire upon them and keep it up steadily, but not too +fast. When they see that only two men are firing they will think that +you are a couple of farmers whose place they have plundered, and who are +determined to have their revenge. You are safe to hit some of them, and +the others will decide upon wiping you out, and will probably leave +their horses and crawl up in their usual style. When they get close it +will be our turn. I don't think many of them are likely to get away." + +His orders were carried out, and five minutes later the two rifles +flashed out one after another. The Boers were riding in a clump. One was +seen to fall, and the horse of another gave a violent plunge. + +"Very good," exclaimed Chris, who, like the rest, was lying down behind +a rock. "Don't fire too fast. Wait half a minute, and then each take +another turn, one a little time after the other." The man who had fallen +was instantly picked up by one of his comrades, and all rode off at full +gallop, but before they could get beyond the range of the Mausers each +of the lads had fired two more shots. No more of the Boers dropped, but +the watchers, who had their glasses directed upon them, thought by their +movements that two had been hit. The Boers, when the firing ceased, +stopped, and for some little time remained clustered together. Then they +took a long sweep round to a point where the ground was broken, and a +shallow donga ran up in a direction that would bring them within a +hundred yards of the position occupied by their hidden assailants. There +they were seen to dismount, and, after some talk, leaving all the horses +in the charge of one man, probably one of the wounded, they entered the +donga. Its course was irregular, and once or twice the two lads were +able to get a shot at them. The Boers did not return the fire but +hurried past the exposed points. As they approached a head was +occasionally raised above the bank to view the position, and then +disappeared again. The ground between the camp and the nearest point of +the donga was thickly strewn with boulders, with bushes growing between +them. The lads had all shifted their position to this side. + +"Don't open fire till I give the order," Chris said quietly. "We have +got them now." + +Except for a slight movement of the bushes, it would not have been known +that the Boers had left the donga. Once or twice Capper and Carmichael +caught a momentary glimpse of one of them, but held their fire, as Chris +had said, + +"Let them come within twenty yards, then both fire at once, whether you +catch a glimpse of them or not. Thinking that your rifles are +discharged, they will all jump up and make a rush. Then it will be our +turn." + +[Illustration: "BOTH RIFLES CRACKED AT ONCE."] + +Presently a man's head was seen peering round a rock at about the right +distance. Both the rifles cracked at once, and a Boer fell prone on the +ground beyond his shelter. At the same moment there was a shout, and his +comrades all sprang to their feet and rushed forward. A volley from the +whole of the scouts flashed out. Twelve of the Boers fell, the others +leapt back behind their shelters, and in turn opened fire. + +"Keep in shelter!" Chris shouted. "They know now that we are two to +their one, and will soon be making off." + +The combatants were so close to each other that neither dared expose +shoulder or head to take aim, and after the first shots fired at the +Boers all remained quiet. Chris waited for three or four minutes, and +then told four of the lads who were in the best shelter to crawl back, +mount their horses, and ride out down the other side of the slope, and, +after making a slight circuit, to gallop straight at the Boers' horses. + +"The fellows may be some distance away already," he said, "as they may +have slipped off directly they discharged their rifles. In any case +there is no time to be lost in getting hold of their ponies, or at any +rate in driving them off." + +As two or three minutes again passed without a shot being fired by the +Boers, Chris was in the act of calling off half the troop to watch the +donga and fire at the Boers if they saw them running past the exposed +points, when at this moment he heard the horses returning, and directly +afterwards one of the lads he had sent off ran up to him. + +"There are a whole lot of them coming round the other side," he said, +"sixty or seventy of them at least. Some distance behind I can see a lot +of cattle and waggons. I suppose they were making for home when they +heard the firing." Just at this moment two or three shots rang out, +telling that the surviving Boers were seen running down the donga. + +"Never mind them," Chris shouted; "we are going to be attacked by a big +party. Put down your rifles all of you, and pile the stones on the +crest, so as to make a shelter, as quickly as you can. We shall have a +few minutes. Those who are coming up can't know yet what the firing +means." He ran up to the top. "They are not more than six or seven +hundred yards away," he said, "and it would be better to fight it out +here than to take to our horses. Some of us would certainly not get off +without a bullet. You need not mind showing yourselves when they come +up. They won't be able to make out what we are." + +The Boers, indeed, reined in their ponies when they saw Chris appear on +the brow of the eminence, and as a preliminary some of them rode off in +both directions and endeavoured to ascertain the position. Those on the +right soon caught sight of the clump of horses. + +"They will soon know all about it," Chris said, as two of them galloped +off. "We may as well teach them to keep their distance. Take your places +behind rocks, and then open a sharp fire with your magazines. They +cannot know how many of us there are here. Now, are you all ready? Yes? +Well, then, set to work!" + +In a moment an almost incessant rattle of musketry broke out upon the +astounded Boers, who, turning their horses, scattered at full gallop to +escape the hail of bullets; but more than a dozen had fallen before they +were beyond the range of the Mausers and were fully two thousand yards +away. + +"I don't think we need stop," Chris said. "Fill up your magazines again, +and then make for the horses." Directly the first party of Boers had +been seen, Jack and Japhet had set to work taking down and rolling up +the tents and loading the spare horses. + +"Jump up," Chris said to them, "we are off. Mind you keep well with us. +Now," he went on, as they rode off in a body, "we will do a little +cattle raiding on our own account. Make for them, lads!" + +With a shout they rode off at full gallop towards the great herd of +cattle. As they approached, the Kaffirs who were driving them fled. +Separating as they rode, waving their hats and shouting at the top of +their voices, the lads dashed at the herd, who at once turned and went +off at a rate that would have astonished animals accustomed only to +small pastures and other enclosures. + +"Don't press them too much," Chris had ordered before the band +separated, "or they will break down. Listen for my whistle; when you +hear it, Field, Willesden, Harris, and Bryan will follow up the herd +with the Kaffirs and keep them moving, the rest will dismount, make +their horses lie down, and open fire. That narrow valley we passed +through yesterday afternoon will do to make a stand. It is about five +miles away, head the cattle for it. The Boers won't be far behind us +when we get there." + +The enemy indeed had not noticed them leave the little kopje, as they +were hidden by a slight fall in the ground where they descended, and it +was not until they observed a commotion among the cattle that they +perceived what had happened. Then, furious not only at the loss they had +suffered, but at seeing their booty driven away, they mounted and +pursued in hot haste. But the party had obtained a start of fully a +mile, and the valley was reached by the fugitives while the Boers were +still half that distance in their rear. Chris rode along until he came +to a narrow and defensible point; the horses were taken a hundred yards +on and made to lie down, and he and his sixteen companions then ran back +and took up their positions among the rocks on each side of the track +and the slopes above it. + + + + +CHAPTER VIII + +A DESPERATE PROJECT + + +Scarcely had the band taken cover in the gorge than the Boers appeared +some five hundred yards away. + +"Open fire at once!" Chris shouted, "the farther they have to come under +fire the less they will like it." + +The rifles at once spoke out. The lads had all used the boulders behind +which they crouched as rests for their rifles, and confident of their +shooting and their position, their aim was deadly. Five or six of the +leading Boers fell and several horses, the rest came to an abrupt pause, +galloped back some little distance and then dismounted, and leaving +their horses in shelter, disappeared from sight. In a short time a +dropping fire was opened from both sides of the valley. + +"Don't fire unless you see a man," Chris ordered, "there are gaps on the +hillside that they can't pass without giving you a chance. Fire in +rotation, it is no use wasting a dozen bullets on one man; if the first +misses, let the next shoot instantly, and so on. When they learn that it +is death to leave shelter, they will soon get sick of it. Keep +yourselves well under cover." + +The rifle duel continued for an hour. As Chris had said would be the +case, after seven or eight had fallen, as they were trying to make +rushes across pieces of ground where boulders afforded no cover, the +rest became very cautious, and at last only an occasional shot was +heard. + +"We will fall back now," Chris said, "for aught we know a party of them +may be working round somewhere to take us in rear. We know that they +have not got their horses with them, for we can see the spot where they +hid them. Still, we do not want to be caught between two fires. Let four +on each flank crawl back; keep well among the rocks, and don't let them +catch sight of you. We will fire occasionally to let them know that we +are still here. When you have got the horses up and everything is ready, +whistle, and we will come back to you. It will be a long time before +they venture to crawl up and discover that we have gone, an hour most +likely, and by that time the cattle will be a dozen miles on their way +to Estcourt, and the Boers are not likely to follow them." + +Ten minutes later all were in their saddles. They had left the horses at +a spot where there was a sharp elbow in the gorge, and their retreat +could not be seen from the valley below. They cantered along in high +glee; not one had received a scratch, while some twelve of the first +party of Boers had fallen, and fully fifteen of the second, and it was +certain that at least as many more must have been wounded. + +"I expect they really gave up all idea of carrying our position long +ago," Chris said, "and have only been keeping up their fire to prevent +our turning the tables upon them. They must have seen that we are better +mounted than they are, and have been afraid that we should in turn take +the offensive. I should not be surprised if they stay where they are all +day, and don't venture to mount and ride off till it gets dark" "You are +something like a leader," Peters said enthusiastically. "We knew that +you were a good fellow, and would make the best leader among us, but no +one could think that our choice would turn out so well as it has done. +This is the second fight we have had with the Boers, and we have +thrashed them well each time, although the first time they were twice as +strong, and in the second something like four times, and we have not +lost one of our number. I am sure if we had been caught where we were +without you with us, at least half of us would have been killed, and we +should have been lucky to get away with only that." + +Riding without pressing their horses, it was two hours before they +overtook the party with the cattle. These had now broken into a walk. + +"We kept them at it till half an hour ago," Willesden said +apologetically, when they came up, "but the Kaffirs said that unless we +gave them a rest half of them would drop, so we let them go easy till +you came up." + +"Quite right," Chris said. "We have given the Boers such a thrashing +that there is no fear of their continuing the pursuit. Unless we meet +some more of these thieves, we can go on as quietly as we like. I have +some sort of respect for men like those we met at Dundee and +Elandslaagte, who fight manfully and stoutly, but for these raiding +scoundrels who only come out to rob and plunder, and do wanton damage to +quiet people, one feels only disgust, and shoots them without the least +compunction." + +There was a general chorus of agreement. + +"Did they get near you, Chris?" + +"Not within about four hundred yards. They got it so hot at first that +they dismounted and took to the rocks; they pushed on for a bit, and if +the whole hillside had been covered with boulders we might have had some +sharp fighting, but there were some open spaces to be crossed, and after +getting over two or three of them they found it safer to lie as close as +rabbits. For aught we know they are there still." + +They travelled quietly till sunset, and then halted in an open valley +where there was water and good grass. Half the company kept watch by +turns, being posted with their horses some half a mile out in the +country, taking the animals with them not only because they could fall +back more quickly, but because they knew the horses would hear any +approaching sound long before their masters were able to do so, and +would evince their uneasiness unmistakably. There was, however, no +alarm, and two days later, travelling by easy stages, they arrived at +Estcourt, where their arrival with so large a number of cattle created +quite a sensation. They at once put up a notice at the post-office, that +all persons who had been raided by the Boers could come and inspect the +herd and take all animals bearing their brand. It soon appeared that the +cattle were the property of four farmers living within a short distance +of each other. They had arrived in Estcourt with their families two days +previously, weary and broken down with fatigue, hunger, and the loss and +ruin of their property. Their gratitude was deep indeed at this wholly +unexpected recovery of a large portion of their herds, and they started +the next morning, mounted on some ponies they had picked up for a +trifle, to drive them down the country. + +Chris saw the officer in command as soon as they arrived in the town, +and gave him an outline of their adventure, upon which he was warmly +congratulated. "Shall I send in a written report to you, sir?" Chris +asked. + +"No, you are not under my orders; and I should say that you had better +write and post it to the officer commanding the force at Maritzburg. I +do not know who it may be." + +"Is the road closed to Ladysmith?" Chris asked. + +"Yes, two days since. General French, who is ordered to Port Elizabeth +to take command of the cavalry brigade that is forming to drive back the +Boers who have crossed the Orange River, came down in the last train +that got out. It was hotly fired upon by the Boers, but luckily they had +not taken up the rails, and the train got through safely. We have had no +news since, for even the wire to Colenso has been cut, and for anything +we know the place may be in possession of the Boers. We have a little +fort here, and have been throwing up entrenchments, but if they come in +any force there is not much hope of our getting off. We have an armored +train, which yesterday ran to within a mile or so of Colenso without +being interfered with, though several parties of the enemy could be seen +in the distance. I have great hopes that we shall get half a battalion +up from Maritzburg to-morrow; if so, by loopholing the houses and +throwing up some breastworks, we ought to be able to keep the Boers out +of the place, unless they come in force. At any rate, I should advise +you to scout next time beyond the Mooi River and to make Maritzburg your +head-quarters. So far as we know the Boers have not yet gone beyond that +river, and any news of their doing so would certainly be of value. You +have done marvellously well in getting away from that party you met, but +you might not be so lucky next time, for as they push on they are sure +in a short time to be strong all over the country between the Tugela and +the Mooi." + +This, after some consultation, was agreed to by the troop. There was no +reason for haste, and they rode by easy stages down to Maritzburg, +stopping at Weston and Hawick. Many of their friends had gone down to +Durban, but some still remained, and from these they received a hearty +welcome. All found letters awaiting them, for it had been arranged that +as it would be impossible to give any address, these should be sent to +Maritzburg. Their friends were scarcely ready to credit their stories, +but, on being shown General Yule's letter, saw that at least the +accounts of their early doings were strictly correct. + +Troops were coming up fast from Durban, and there was already a strong +brigade there. Chris called upon the brigadier and presented General +Yule's letter, and his own report of the fight with the Boers +subsequently. + +"This shows what can be done by young fellows who are good shots and +good riders, and who, I may say, Mr. King, have been admirably +commanded. What are your wishes now? There are two or three troops of +volunteer horse here; would you wish to be attached to one of them? Of +course, if you do so there will be no difficulty about it; but really, I +think that you would be more useful in carrying on your work in your own +way." + +It had been known for a long time past that a large proportion of the +cannon, rifles, and ammunition of the Boers had been landed at the +Portuguese port of Lorenzo Marques, and taken up by rail from there to +Komati-poort--a station on the frontier, where there was a bridge across +the Komati river--and thence by rail to Pretoria. Chris heard that it +was generally known that the Portuguese officials, who had long been +influenced by Boer money extracted from the Uitlanders, were still +winking at the practice, although it was a breach of neutrality. So much +indignation was expressed on the subject at Maritzburg that Chris, one +day when the party assembled at the spot where their horses were +tethered, said: + +"I want to have a serious talk with you all. You have all heard that +immense quantities of arms and dynamite are passing through Lorenzo +Marques. Now, at present we don't see much for us to do here. My idea +is, that if we could manage to blow up the bridge across the river that +divides Portuguese territory from the Transvaal, we should do an +infinitely greater service than by killing any number of plundering +Boers." + +His troop looked at each other in surprise. + +"You are not really in earnest, Chris?" Peters said; "it would be a +tremendous business." + +"It would be a big business, no doubt, but I was never more earnest in +my life than in proposing it. Now that we know how strong the Boers are +round Ladysmith, and what terribly hard work it will be for an army to +fight its way through all those hills, we can see that the first +calculations as to the time when it can be relieved are a good deal +short of the mark. There must be at least twenty thousand men collected +here to do it, and I think it is more likely to be the end of January +than the end of December before the Boers are driven off. We have in the +one case seven weeks and in the other twelve before the place is +relieved, and we begin to turn the tables on the Boers; and according to +the way we carry my idea out it depends whether we are back here by the +end of the year or by the end of January--that is, I acknowledge, if we +get back at all. + +"I have been thinking it over. There are two ways of doing it. We can go +on board a ship touching at Durban and going on to Lorenzo Marques. I +don't say that we could not all do it, but it would be better to choose +only four; a larger number would excite more observation. Those who go +will of course take dynamite with them. We can buy that at Durban. At +Lorenzo Marques we should assume the character of four young Irish +fellows. We know there are lots of them already up there, and Germans +too, fighting in the Boer ranks and I am glad to know that they got +peppered at Elandslaagte, although that is not to the point. We should +go as four Irish lads who have come across from America to fight for the +Boers. We have heard plenty of Irish in the mines and at Johannesburg, +so shall be able to put enough brogue in our talk to pass. I know from +what I have heard that a trip to the Portuguese officials would be quite +sufficient for them to pass anything without examination; but even if +they did open our cases and find dynamite in them, we could account for +it by saying that we had been told before starting that it would be the +handiest thing to take with us, and would be of more assistance to the +Boers than anything we could bring them. + +"No doubt some of the passengers would know that we got on board at +Durban, but if any questions were asked we could account for that by +saying that the ship we came over in, was going on to Australia, and +therefore we had been obliged to land and take another on to Lorenzo +Marques. Once landed, we should of course take a train for Komati-poort, +and slip off it after dark at some station a few miles from there. Then, +you know, we could first reconnoitre the bridge, and when we had settled +on the best place for the dynamite, we could put it there the next +night. I know a good deal about the use of dynamite. It is not like +gunpowder, that you have to put in a hole and fasten up tightly, you +only have to lay it upon an iron girder or arch, and light your fuse and +leave it to do its work." + +The boys listened with increasing surprise to his proposal. + +"And what is your other plan?" Peters asked after a long pause. + +"The other plan is that we should all take a passage in some small +craft, which we could hire, to St. Lucia Bay, and then go up through +Zululand and Swaziland, which extends to within a short distance of +Komati-poort. Both tribes are friendly enough with us, and hate the +Boers like poison. Of course in that case we shall take the dynamite +with us, and then must be guided by circumstances as to our course and +what we should do when we got to the bridge." + +There was again a long silence, then Brown said: "If anyone but you had +proposed it, Chris, I should have scoffed at it as impossible, but for +myself I have come to have such confidence in you that I believe you +would manage it. There can be no doubt that it would be a grand thing if +we could do it. I have heard my father say that the river is a terribly +bad one, and that sometimes it is altogether impassable for weeks at a +time. Except by the bridge, even in the best times, I should think, from +what he said, it would be quite impossible for them to take heavy things +like cannon across. Anyhow, I am ready to go with you." + +"Thank you, Brown," Chris said. "I should certainly not ask anyone to +go. Those who are willing to do so must volunteer. Of course we only +combined for the purpose of acting as scouts, and no one ever +contemplated doing more. So far, we have, as all allow, carried out that +object well; and I have no doubt that those who do not care to join in +what is a sort of forlorn hope, will continue to do well after we have +started on it, and of course I shall, if I get back, rejoin them. My +scheme would, no doubt, be considered a very wild one, but I can see no +reason why, with good luck, it should not succeed. Indeed, I believe +that it will succeed, if, when we arrive there, we do not find that the +Boers are guarding the bridge. Of course, if they do so there is but +little hope of carrying the matter out. They will know the importance of +the bridge to them, and how greatly its destruction would be desired by +the British Government, and may think it possible that such an attempt +as I propose would be made, and take precautions to prevent its success. + +"I do not mean to throw away my life. If, when I get there, I find that +it is next to impossible to carry the matter out, I shall give it up; +but even then the information I should get about matters up there, both +as to the Boers and the Swazis, would be of use. We know that Boer +agents have been doing their utmost to get the Basutos to join them, and +it is likely that they may be trying to induce the Zulus and Swazis to +do the same; and even if we fail in the principal object, I should say +that the time would not be wasted. When I am up there, I can, of course, +get news as to how the war is going on, and if I find that our forces +are pushing up into the Transvaal, I shall make straight across the +country and join them. I have been thinking over the matter a good deal +since we came here, and made up my mind that anyhow I shall try to carry +it out, so I now resign the leadership, and also for the present my +membership. Now, I don't want to influence you in any way. It has all +come suddenly upon you. You had better talk it over together. All I ask +you is that you will not say a word about it to anyone, not even to your +relations. + +"Not only because, as I know would be the case, they would be afraid of +having anything to do with what they would consider an absolutely mad +scheme, but because a chance word might prove fatal to success. As +everyone knows, there are a great number of Dutch in the colony, who, +although they may not be openly hostile, are in favour of the Boers, and +will no doubt keep them acquainted with every movement of troops here, +and can have no difficulty in communicating with them by native runners. +Were one of our friends even to mention it casually that we had gone +north, suspicions might be aroused. Therefore I beg that no one will +breathe a word about the matter, but that you will decide for yourselves +without consulting anyone. I shall leave you now, and we will meet here +at the same time to-morrow. You will have had time to think it over +then. I wish to say before I go that I don't consider that the success +of my plan depends upon my having the whole twenty of you with me. I +repeat, that four would be quite sufficient. + +"There are advantages as well as disadvantages in having only that +number. We should travel without exciting so much notice; we should have +less difficulty about food; we could conceal ourselves more easily in +case we were pursued. On the other hand, with a stronger party we could +repulse an attack if chased by the Boers. So you see I really do not +want more than three of you to join. I think four is the best number, +and should be glad if only two besides Brown wished to go with me; but +at the same time if more desire it, of course, as we are all comrades, +they would have a right to go." + +So saying he turned away, leaving the others to talk the matter over. +They went through their usual drill that afternoon without any allusion +being made to the subject. When they met the next day Chris said +cheerfully, "Well, what have you decided? First, Brown, do you stick to +what you said yesterday, or do you think better of it?" + +"Certainly I stick to it," Brown said. "When I say a thing I mean it." + +"And how about the others?" + +"I have made up my mind to go with you, Chris," Peters said, "and so has +Willesden. Field and Capper and Sankey would all go with you if you +wanted to take more than four, and all would go if you wanted the troop; +but if you would rather only have three of us, it is settled that Brown, +Willesden and I go." + +"Very well," Chris said, "that just suits me. I am glad that you would +all go if you were wanted; but really I think that four would be the +best number, so we will consider that as settled. And now there is one +other thing I want to ask you about. You see, we have no right to take +any money out of the common fund, but we shall have some heavy expenses. +In the first place we shall want, I should say, a couple of hundred +pounds of dynamite; then we shall have to take some natives with us, a +couple of Zulus and two or three Swazis. There will be no difficulty in +getting them, as so many have been thrown out of employment owing to the +farmers losing their herds. We may find it useful to make presents to +chiefs as we go along, and, of course, we shall have to take a certain +amount of provisions for the party. Have you any objection to our each +taking half our share out of the bank? Nothing has been drawn at +present, and with a couple of hundred pounds between us we shall have +enough and to spare for however long we may be away." + +There was a chorus of agreement. + +"We are all awfully sorry that you are going, Chris," Field said. "It +won't be the same without you at all. We have agreed to ask you to +nominate a leader during your absence." + +"I would much rather not do that," Chris said. "Everyone has done +equally well, and it is a question that you should settle among +yourselves." + +"We are all against that," Field said positively. "We have talked it +over and agree that we shall never be able to fix on one. Suppose our +votes were divided between four and five I don't think we should feel +more comfortable afterwards. We would rather put all the names in a hat +and draw one out, just leaving it to chance." + +"I almost think that it would be better," Chris said, "to do as you +propose. Agree first that, as we have done up till now, all important +matters shall be discussed and decided by vote, then draw all the names +from a hat and let each be leader for a week in the order in which they +come out, with the proviso that if as time goes on you find that you can +have more confidence in one than another, you can by a majority of three +to one elect him as permanent leader." + +"That would be a very good plan," Carmichael said, "but, you see, the +difficulty is that, supposing we were going to attack the Boers or the +Boers attack us, the plan the leader fixed on might not seem to us at +all the best. In the two fights we have had there was not that +difficulty, for everyone felt that the plan you adopted was the best, +and indeed much better than any of us would have been likely to think +of. I don't say that that would occur, but it might. It is not everyone +who could fix upon the best thing to be done all at once as you did." + +Chris thought for a minute. "I would suggest," he said, "that in such a +case as you mention the leader should tell the next two on the list what +he proposed. If one of the two agreed with him it would be a majority, +and there would be nothing more to be said on the matter. If both +disagreed with him there must be a general vote. I should hope such a +thing would never occur, because the loss of five minutes would +sometimes be disastrous, though in some cases it might not make any +difference. Still, that is the best plan I can think of. There is no +occasion for you to decide that straight off. At any rate, if you should +find that any arrangement you make does not act perfectly well, I should +advise you to join Captain Brookfield's troop and act with him." + +The general opinion was strongly in favour of Chris's suggestion. It was +agreed that at any rate the first leader should be chosen by chance. +Carmichael's name came first out of the hat. + +"I shall not have much responsibility," he said, "as we have settled to +remain here until the advance begins. Now, Chris, about the spare +horses." + +"I should like to take one of them. We may have to gallop for it, and it +is of no use our being well mounted if we are hampered with a pony that +cannot keep up with us. We have only to lighten its load by getting rid +of most of its burden, and then we should be free to go our own pace. + +"I should like to take one of our Kaffirs. They have both turned out +very well, and have a good idea of cooking, and are accustomed to our +ways. I don't care which I have, but I should certainly like to have one +of them. He would stick to the spare horse, while the other natives +would be all right if they scattered and shifted for themselves." + +"Would you not like two spare horses, Chris?" + +"No, thank you, one would be enough. He would carry our stores, and I +should get two native ponies to take the dynamite along. We shall not be +travelling at any extraordinary rate of speed, and if they broke down we +could always replace them. Certainly there would be no danger if we go +through Zululand, and, I should think, not until we get north of the +Swazis' country; for though I know there are Boers settled among them, a +good many would of course have joined their army, and it would be easy +to avoid the others. The danger will only lie in the last part of the +journey." + +"Then you have settled to go by land?" + +"Yes, I have decided to go all the way on horseback. We might find +difficulties with the Portuguese at Lorenzo Marques, and if we manage to +blow up the bridge, should have no horses, and should have a very bad +time indeed in getting back. If I can get dynamite here I shall go all +the way by land, and it would be safer. No doubt the Boers have spies at +Durban, and we might have difficulty in hiring a craft to take us to St. +Lucia, and our starting with horses and five or six natives would be +safe to attract the attention of someone looking out for news to send to +the Boers. I think the best plan will be to keep a little to the east of +the road to Greytown, where no doubt there are some Dutch, and strike +the road that runs from there to Eshowe. A little west of Krantzkop +there must be either a drift or a bridge or a ferry where it crosses the +Tugela. I shall of course avoid Eshowe, and then keep along inside the +Zulu frontier as far as the Maputa, which is its northern boundary, then +we shall cross the Lebombo range into Swaziland. I don't know how far it +would be by the way we should have to go, but as the crow flies it is +about three hundred miles from here. I suppose, what with the detours +and passes and so on, it will be four hundred. Ordinarily that distance +could be done in twenty days, but we must allow a good bit longer than +that; fifteen miles a day is the utmost we can calculate upon. However, +in about a month after we start we ought to be there or thereabouts. +Coming back we should do it more quickly, as we should have got rid of +our weight and need not be bothered with pack ponies." + +"You talk as coolly about it," Field laughed, "as if you were going out +for a few days' picnic." + +"It is the same sort of thing," Chris said, "except that it will be +longer, a bit rougher, and a good deal more interesting." + +"When will you start?" + +"As soon as possible; all I have to see about are the dynamite and +stores for the journey. We know pretty well by this time what we shall +want. We are sure to be able to buy mealies and a bullock when we want +one from the natives. Some tea and coffee, a dozen tins of preserved +milk, and half a hundredweight of biscuits, in case of finding ourselves +at a lonely camp with no native kraals near, and we shall be all right. +Of course we will take a gallon or two of paraffin, a frying-pan, a +small kettle, and so on, and a lantern that will burn paraffin. We will +fill up our pouches with a hundred rounds of rifle cartridges and fifty +for our revolvers, and then I think we shall be ready. Now mind, the +success of our enterprise depends entirely upon your all keeping the +secret absolutely. Neither Willesden, Brown, nor Peters have friends +here to bother themselves about their absence. We are not likely to be +missed, but if any questions are asked, you can say casually that we are +off on a scouting expedition. I shall write four or five letters, with +dates a week or ten days apart, and direct them from here, and leave +them for you to post one by one to my mother. Be sure you send them in +the right order. As she will suppose that we are stopping here quietly, +and out of all harm, she won't be uneasy about me. Peters' and +Willesden's friends have gone to England, so they are all right, and +Brown's are at the Cape. You had better write two or three letters too, +Brown, to be posted a fortnight or three weeks apart." + +When these matters were arranged, Chris saw Jack, and the Kaffir agreed +without hesitation to go with him. He had been so well treated since he +joined them that he had become quite attached to Chris, who generally +gave him his orders. He was only told they were going up on an +expedition to Zululand and Swaziland. + +"I want you to find two good Zulu and two Swazis. Do you think that you +could do that?" + +"There are plenty of them here, baas. I look about and get good men. +What shall I tell them that they will have to do?" + +"To act as guides, to tell the chiefs who we are, and on the march to +look after two or three ponies. We shall only take one of the spare +horses, you will look after him." + +"Will they have guns, baas? All men like to have guns." + +"Yes, they may as well carry guns, and you too, Jack." + +"Much better for men to have guns, baas. They would be thought nothing +of without them." "All right Jack, there shall be no difficulty about +that; the stores are full of them." + +This was the case. Men entering the volunteer corps, or who intended to +do any fighting, sold the rifles they had previously used and obtained +those of Government pattern and carrying the regulation cartridge, so +that for ten pounds Chris got hold of five really good weapons, +carefully selecting those that carried the same-sized cartridge. + +"You can take whichever you like," he said to Jack, who had gone with +him to buy them; "and I shall tell the men I engage that if at the end +of the journey I am well satisfied with their behaviour, I shall give +them the guns in addition to their pay." + +A few hours afterwards Jack brought up four natives for his inspection. +They were all strong and well-built men, and looked capable of hard +work. Having been thrown out of their employment by the events of the +past fortnight, they were glad of a fresh job, and were highly satisfied +when they were offered wages considerably higher than those they had +before received. All preparations were completed by the following +evening, and the next morning at daybreak, after bidding their comrades +a hearty farewell, the little party started. + + + + +CHAPTER IX + +KOMATI-POORT + + +The four lads were no longer dressed in the guise of farmers. These +suits were carried in the packs to be resumed when they neared the +Transvaal. They now dressed in the tweeds they had worn at Johannesburg, +and either felt hats or straw. They still wore jack-boots. The heat of +the day was now great, much more so, indeed, than they had been +accustomed to, for while Maritzburg lies two thousand two hundred feet +above the sea, Johannesburg is five thousand seven hundred. Behind them +Jack led the spare horse, and the four new men stepped lightly along +with their muskets slung behind them by the side of two strong Basuto +ponies, each carrying a couple of boxes containing half a hundredweight +of dynamite. These were concealed from view by sacks and blankets, the +cooking utensils, and other light articles. The spare horse carried the +flour, paraffin, fuses, and other stores, which brought up the weight to +a hundred and twenty pounds. This was somewhat lighter than that carried +by the ponies, but they were anxious to keep it in good condition in +case one of their own gave out. + +The baggage had all been very carefully packed, so that even when going +fast it might not be displaced. They had found no difficulty in +obtaining the dynamite, as several of the stores kept it for the use of +the mines. They made no difficulty in selling it, and would not have +been sorry to part with their whole stock. In view of the possibility of +a siege, it was not an article that any sane man would care to keep on +the premises. Chris had gone round to these stores and had obtained an +offer from each, and as he said that he intended to accept the lowest +tender, it was offered to him at a price very much below what he would +ordinarily have had to give for it. The cases were sewn up in canvas, on +which was painted respectively, Tea, Sugar, Biscuits, and Rice. +Travelling five hours and halting at ten o'clock at a farmhouse that was +still tenanted, and again travelling from half-past three until eight, +they made about twenty-five miles the first day. Then they encamped at a +spot where there was a small spring and consequently good feed for the +horses, and knee-haltering them and taking off their saddles they turned +them loose. + +The natives had collected fuel as they went along, and a fire was soon +made. When the kettle approached boiling, some slices of bacon, of which +they had brought thirty pounds with them, were fried. There was no +occasion to make bread, as they had enough for a two days' supply. The +natives parched some mealies (Indian corn) in the frying-pan when the +bacon was done, the fat serving as a condiment that they highly +appreciated, and they quenched their thirst from the spring. + +Four days' travelling took them to the drift across the Tugela. So far +their journey had been wholly uneventful. Before crossing the next day +they had a long talk with the two Zulus. Their language differed +somewhat from that of Jack, but Chris understood them without +difficulty; for a considerable portion of the labourers in the mines at +Johannesburg were Zulus, and mixing with these, as Chris had done, he +understood them even better than he did Jack. + +The different routes were discussed, and the position of kraals, at +which mealies for the five natives and the horses could be purchased, +and meat possibly obtained. This, unless they bought a sheep, would be +in the form of biltong, that is, strips of meat dried by being hung up +in the sun and wind, and similar to the jerked meat of the prairies and +pampas of America. The points at which water could be obtained were +discussed. Some were at considerable distances apart; but the Zulus were +of opinion that the late heavy rains had extended to the hills of +Zululand, and that there would be abundance of water in little dongas +and water-courses that would be dry after a spell of fine weather. While +passing through Zululand there would be no occasion whatever for +vigilance by day or a watch at night, for there perfect order reigned. +Here and there resident magistrates were stationed, and at these points +a few white traders had settled. All disputes between the natives were +ordinarily decided by their own chiefs, but in serious cases an appeal +could be made to the nearest magistrate, who at once interfered in cases +of violence or gross injustice. + +At the first kraal they came to they learned that the natives were +everywhere much excited. They were most anxious to be allowed to join in +the war against their old enemies, and were greatly disappointed on +learning from the magistrates that this was only a white man's war, and +that no others must take part in it. If, however, the Boers invaded +their territory they would of course be allowed to defend themselves. + +Some of the Zulus urged with reason, that though the English might wish +to make it a white man's war, the Boers did not desire it to be so, for +they knew that they had been urging the Swazis and the Basutos to join +them against the English, and that offers of many rifles and much +plunder had been made also to some of their own chiefs. To this the +magistrates could only reply, that they knew of old that the Boers' +words could not be trusted, and that they were always ready to break any +arrangement that they had made. "They would like you to join them," they +said, "because they would take your help and afterwards turn against you +and steal your land. You know well enough that we have always stood +between you and them; but they would know that if you had joined them +against us we should be angry, and after our war with them was over +would no longer protect you." The Zulus, from their knowledge of the +Boers, felt that this would be so. But in any case no offers made to +them would have induced them to side with the Boers; and it was the +general hope that something might occur which would induce the English +to allow them to attack their enemies. + +Chris and his friends had laid aside their bandoliers, retaining only +the cartridges carried in their belts, in order to assume the appearance +of Englishmen merely travelling for sport, and as they went on they +generally managed to shoot deer enough for the needs of the whole party. +Occasionally they slept in the kraals of chiefs, but greatly preferred +their own little tents as the smoke in them was often blinding, and more +than once the attacks of vermin kept them awake. Still, it would have +been a slight to refuse such invitations, and they had to go to the +kraals as it was necessary to frequently buy supplies of mealies. At +times the travelling was very rough, and with the utmost exertions they +could not make more than twelve or fourteen miles a day, and at other +times they could make five-and-twenty. Without the supply of Indian +corn, the ponies could not have continued this rate of going without +breaking down. The native horses are accustomed occasionally to make +very long journeys, and can perform from sixty to eighty miles in a day, +but after such an exertion they will need a week's rest before making +another effort. With their Basuto masters they are not called upon to do +so. When one of these makes a long journey he will leave his pony with +the person he visits and return on a fresh mount, or if he returns to +his own home after his first day's journey he will take a fresh horse +from his own stock, which may vary from five to fifty ponies. As they +rode they seldom talked of the work that was to be done. Until they saw +the country, the positions, and approach, no plans could possibly be +formed, and they therefore treated the matter as if it were a mere +sporting expedition in a new country, and enjoyed themselves thoroughly. +They had heavy work in crossing the Lebombo range, and, travelling a +day's journey farther west, turned to the north again. They were now in +Swaziland, a wild and mountainous country. Here also they were +hospitably received where they stopped, although the Swazis were deeply +aggrieved by the shameful manner in which England had refused, after the +valuable aid they had rendered in the last war, to give them any support +against the Boers. A word would have been sufficient to have kept the +latter out of Swaziland, as it had kept them from raiding in Zululand; +but that word was not given, and the unfortunate people had been raided +and plundered, their best land taken from them, and they themselves +reduced to a state of semi-subjection. However, they were glad to see +four English sportsmen among them again, and to learn something of the +war that had broken out between their oppressors and the British. + +"If you beat them we shall be free again," they said. "Last time you +were beaten, and gave over the whole country to the Boers, and left all +our people, who had fought for you, at their mercy. This time you must +not do that. If you beat them, shoot them all like dogs, or make slaves +of them as they make slaves of the natives who dwell in their land. Only +so will there be peace." + +"I don't know that the English will do that," Chris said; "but you may +be sure that, when the war is over, the Boers will be no longer masters, +and there will be just law made by us, and all white men and all natives +will be protected, and no evil deeds will be allowed." + +"We are no longer united among ourselves," one of the chiefs said. "Some +have been taken by the promises and gifts of the Boers, and our queen is +also, it is said, in their favour. She is afraid of them, but most of us +would take advantage of their fighting you to drive all of them out of +our land, and to win back all the territory they have taken from us. We +are very poor, our best land is gone, we can scarce grow enough food; +and we long for the time when once again we can have rich mealie +patches, and good grazing land for our oxen and our horses, and are +again a strong people, and they afraid of us. Had not the English +interfered and taken over the Boer country, we should have wasted it +from end to end; and they knew it well, and begged your Shepstone to +hoist your flag and protect them. Ah, he should have stayed there then! +The natives, our friends in the plain, still talk of that happy time +when you were masters, and the Boers dared no longer shoot them down as +if they were wild beasts and treat them as slaves, and the towns grew +up, and your people paid for work with money and not with the lash of a +whip or a bullet. All of us have mourned over the time when the English +bent their knee to the Boers, and gave them all they wanted,--the +mastery of the land, and the right to kill and enslave us at their +will." + +"That was not quite so," Chris said. "They promised to give good +treatment to the natives; that was one of the conditions of the treaty." + +"And you believed them!" the chief said scornfully. "Did you not know +that a Boer's oath is only good so long as a gun is pointed at him? +Perhaps it will be like this again, and when you have conquered them you +will again trust them, and march away. But they tell us, it is not you +who will conquer them, but they who will conquer you. They tell our +people that they will be masters over all the land, and that your people +will have to sail away in your ships. Runners have brought us news that +they have gathered round the place where our people go to work digging +bright stones from the ground, and that very soon they will take all the +English prisoners, and that they have also beset Mafeking, and that they +have beaten the English soldiers in Natal, and there will soon be none +left there; and more than that, that the people of the other Boer state +have joined them, and have entered the English territory, and are being +joined by all the Boers there. Therefore we, who would like to fight +against them, are afraid. We thought the English a great people; they +had beaten the Zulus, and dethroned the great King Cetewayo. But now it +seems that the Boers are much greater, and our hearts are sore." + +"You need not fear, chief," Chris said. "Our country is very many miles +away, many days' journey in ships; it will take weeks before our army +gets strong. The Boers have always said they wanted peace, and we +believed them and kept but a few soldiers here, and until the army comes +from England they will get the best of it; but we can send, if +necessary, an army many times stronger than that of the Boers, and are +sure to crush them in the end." + +"But how could you believe they wanted peace?" the chief asked. +"Everyone knew that they were building great forts, and had got guns +bigger than were ever before seen, and stores full of rifles. How could +you believe their words when your eyes saw that it was not peace but war +that they meant?" "Because we were fools, I suppose," Chris said +bitterly. "It was not from want of warnings, for people living out here +had written again and again telling what vast preparations they were +making, but the people who govern the country paid no attention. It was +much easier to believe what was pleasant than what was unpleasant; but +their folly will cost the country very dear. If they had sent over +twenty thousand men a year ago there would have been no war; now they +will have to send over a hundred thousand men, perhaps even more; and +great sums of money will be spent, and great numbers of lives lost, +simply because our government refused to believe what everyone out here +knew to be the fact. We did nothing, and allowed the Boers to complete +all their preparations, and to choose their own time for war. But though +we have made a horrible mistake, do not think, chief, that there is any +doubt about our conquering at last; the men who now govern our country +are men and not cowards, and will not, as that other government did, go +on their knees to the Boers, and even if they would do so, the people +would not sanction it." + +"If what the chief has heard is correct," Chris said as they rode along +the next morning, "we must get back again as soon as we can. The Boers +may be lying, and, of course, they would make the best of things to the +Swazis. It certainly sounds as if not only at Ladysmith, but at all +other places, things are going badly at present. However, in another +couple of days we shall not be far from the bridge. The chief said that +the frontier was only a few miles away, and our own men tell us that it +is a very hilly country on the other side, just as it is here. We have +certainly come faster that we had expected. Thanks to their good +feeding, the horses have all turned out well. If it is really only two +days farther, we shall get there in just three weeks from starting." + +They had not brought the same ponies all the way; as soon as one showed +signs of fatigue, it was changed for another with the arrangement that, +should they return that way, they would take it back and give the chief +a present for having seen that it was taken care of. The four natives, +although well contented with the way in which they were fed and cared +for, were much puzzled at the eagerness of their employers to push on, +and the disregard they paid to all the information obtained for them of +opportunities for sport. Several times they had said to Jack: "How is it +the baas does not stop to shoot? There are plenty of deer, and in some +places lions. There are zebras, too, though these are not easy to get +at, and very difficult to stalk. Why do you push on so fast that the +ponies have to be left behind, and others taken on? We cannot understand +it. We have been with white men who came into our country to shoot, or +to see what the land was like, but they did not travel like this. +Besides, we shall soon be in the land of the Boers, and as the English +are at war with them, they will shoot them if they find them." + +Jack had only been told that his masters were going to strike a blow at +the Boers, and had not troubled himself as to its nature. He had seen +how they had defeated much larger parties than their own, and had +unbounded confidence in them. He therefore only said: + +"The baas has not told me. I know that all the gentlemen are very brave, +and have no fear of the Boers. I do not think that we need fear that any +harm will happen. They shoot enough for us to eat heartily, they buy +drink for us at every kraal they stop at, and if they have seen no game +they buy a sheep. What can we want more? They have got you guns, but you +have never needed to use them; perhaps you may before you get back. If +the Boers meddle with them you will be able to fight." + +The prospect of a chance of being allowed to fight against the Boers +would alone have inspired the four natives to bear any amount of fatigue +without a murmur, and each day's march farther north had heightened +their hopes that they might use their guns against their old enemies. It +was on the twenty-first day after starting that, from a hill commanding +a broad extent of country, they caught sight of a train of waggons, and +knew that their journey was just at an end. They had debated which side +of the Komati river would be the best to follow, and had agreed to take +the eastern bank. + +The Boer territory extended a few miles beyond this. Komati-poort was +close to the frontier. As they knew nothing as to the construction of +the bridge beyond the fact that it was iron, and were not even sure +whether it was entirely on Boer ground, or if the eastern bank of the +river here belonged to the Portuguese, they decided that at any rate it +was better to travel as near the frontier as possible, as, were they +pursued they could ride at once across the line. Not that they believed +that the Boers would respect this, but they would not know the country +so well as that on their own side, and would not find countrymen to join +them in the pursuit. + +Keeping down on the eastern side of the hills, they continued until they +could see the white line of steam that showed the direction in which a +train from the south-east was coming, and were therefore able to +calculate within half a mile where the bridge must be situated. They +camped in a dry donga, and next morning at daybreak left their horses +behind them in charge of the men and walked forward. A mile farther they +obtained a view of the bridge. It stood at the point where the river, +after running for some little distance north-west, made a sharp curve to +the south. The bridge stood at this loop. If the object had been to +render it defensible, it had been admirably chosen by these Boers who +laid out the line to the Portuguese frontier, for from the other side of +the bank the approach could be swept by cannon and even musketry on both +flanks. + +Lying down, they took in all the details of the construction through +their glasses, and then, choosing their ground so that they could not be +seen by any on the bridge, they kept on until they were able to obtain a +view from a distance of a quarter of a mile. The examination that was +now made was by no means of a satisfactory nature. Near the bridge there +were sidings on which several lines of loaded trucks stood. An engine +was at work shunting. At least a score of natives were at work under the +direction of Portuguese, while several men, who were by their dress +evidently Boers, were pointing out to the officials the trucks they +desired to be first forwarded. Three or four of these carried huge +cases, two of them being each long enough to occupy two trucks. + +"There is no doubt those are guns," Chris said. "If we can do nothing +else, we can work a lot of damage here, which will be some sort of +satisfaction after our long ride. As to our main object, things don't +look well." + +Half a dozen armed Boers could be made out stationed at the Portuguese +side of the bridge, and as many more at the opposite end. Two lately- +erected wooden huts, each of which could give shelter to some fifty men, +stood a short distance beyond the bridge, and it was evident by the +figures moving about, and a number of horses grazing near, that a strong +party was stationed there to furnish guards for the bridge. + +"I am afraid we cannot do it," Peters said, after their glasses had all +been fixed on the bridge for several minutes; "at least, I don't see any +chance. What do you say, Chris?" + +"No, I am afraid there is none. If we were to crawl up to them to-night +and shoot down all at this end of the bridge, we should be no nearer. +You see, there are a line of huts on this side, and two or three better- +class houses. No doubt the railway officials and natives all live there; +they would all turn out when they heard the firing, and the Boers would +come rushing over from the other side. It would be out of the question +for us to carry forward those four boxes to the middle of the bridge, +plant them over the centre of the girders, and light the fuses. A +quarter of an hour would be wanted for the business at the very least, +and we should not have a minute, if there is as good a guard by night as +there is by day. It is likely to be at least as large, perhaps much more +than that. The thing is impossible in that way. However, of course we +can crawl up close after dark and satisfy ourselves about the guard. + +"If it is not to be managed in that way, we must go down to the river +bank and see whether there is anything to be done with one of the piers. +If that is not possible, we must content ourselves with smashing things +up generally on this side. Several of the trucks look to me to be full +of ammunition, and there are eight with long cases which are no doubt +rifles. We all remember that terrific smash at Johannesburg, and though +I don't say we could do such awful damage as there was there--for there +were I don't know how many tons of dynamite exploded then, I think about +fifty--still, it would be a heavy blow. Any amount of stores would be +destroyed, some thousand of rifles, and, for aught I know, all those +waggons with tarpaulins over them are full of cartridges. However, the +bridge is the principal thing. We will stop here for an hour or two and +examine every foot of the ground, so as to be able to find our way in +the dark. We need not mind about the trucks now, we can examine their +position to-morrow if we have to give up the idea of the bridge." + +On returning to their horses they had a long talk. Chris was deeply +disappointed, but the others, who had never quite believed that his +scheme could be carried out, were greatly delighted at the knowledge +that at any rate they might be able to do an immense deal of damage to +the enemy. As soon as it became quite dark, they set out again; they did +not take their rifles with them, but each had his brace of revolvers. +They had no intention of fighting, except to secure a retreat. Before +starting, each had wound strips of flannel round his boots, so that they +could run noiselessly. Brown had in the first place suggested that they +should take their boots off, but Chris pointed out that if they had to +run in the dark, one or other of them was sure to lame himself by +striking against a stone or other obstacle. There were several large +fires in the shunting yard, and at each end of the bridge, and at the +Boer barracks. Crawling along on their hands and knees they were +completely in the shade, and managed to get within some twenty or thirty +yards of the Boers, who were sitting smoking and talking. They were all +evidently greatly satisfied with news that they had heard during the +day. Listening to their talk, they gathered something of what had +happened since they left Estcourt. Colenso had been evacuated by us, an +armoured train coming up from Estcourt had been drawn off the line, and +most of the soldiers with it had been killed or captured. The last news +was that the British had sallied out from Estcourt, which was now +surrounded, and had attacked the Boers posted in a very strong position +near a place called Willow Grange, but had been repulsed, principally by +the artillery, with, it was said, immense loss. This was not pleasant +hearing for the listeners. The Boers then had a grumble at being kept so +far away from the fighting. It was not that they were so anxious to be +engaged, as to get a share of the loot, as it had been reported that +something like twenty thousand cattle and horses had been driven off +from Natal. + +Then their conversation turned upon a point still more interesting to +the listeners. A commando had started from Barberton, a border town some +thirty or forty miles to the west, into Swaziland. A native had +mentioned to one of the Boers there that four Englishmen had passed +north. They had stopped at his chief's kraal. They were all quite young, +and had five natives with them, and three pack-horses. They had come to +shoot and see the country, they said; but they had spoken with one of +the men with them, who said that so far they had not done much hunting, +only enough for food; he supposed that they were going to begin further +on. The Boer had an hour later ridden down to Barberton with the news, +and it had been at once resolved to send off a commando of a hundred men +to search the hills, for there was a suspicion that the hunters were +British officers who had come up to act as spies. + +"Our cornet had a telegram this afternoon," one of them said, "that we +were to be specially vigilant here, and we must keep a sharp lookout at +night. I don't suppose they are on this side of the river. They may be +going to pull up the railway, or blow up a culvert somewhere between +this and Barberton. Four men with their Kaffirs might do that, but they +certainly could not damage this bridge." + +At ten o'clock most of the party retired into a small shed a few yards +away, but two remained sitting by the fire, and were evidently left on +guard, for they kept their rifles close at hand. The lads now crawled +away some distance, and then made their way down a steep bank to the +river. It was a stream of some size, running with great rapidity, and it +did not take them long to decide that it would be impossible to swim out +with the cases and place these in such a situation that the explosion +would damage the structure. They then moved quietly up to the spot where +the end of the last span touched the level ground; it rested upon a +solid wall built into the rock, and ran some forty feet above their +heads. They were now just under where the Boers were sitting, could hear +their voices, and see the glow of their fire. They were unable to make +out the exact position of the girders, but they had, when watching it, +obtained a general view of the construction. + +It consisted of two lines of strong girders on each side, connected by +lattice bars, with strong communications between the sides at each pier. +The depth of the girders was some twenty feet. After cautiously feeling +the wall and finding that there were no openings in which their +explosives could be placed, they crawled away noiselessly, ascended to +the bank again a couple of hundred yards from the bridge, and returned +to their camping ground. They observed as they went that there were +still fires burning in the station yard, that some Kaffirs were seated +near these, and as, in the silence of the night, a faint sound could be +heard like that of a distant train, they had no doubt that they were +waiting up for one to arrive. Indeed, before they had reached the +camping place they saw a train pass by. It had no lights save the head- +lights and that of the engine fire, and they therefore had no doubt that +it was another train with stores. + +When they reached their tents they had a long consultation. No fire had +been lighted. The horses had been taken some way up a little ravine down +which a stream of water trickled; here the four natives had taken up +their post. These had only come down in the middle of the day to fetch +their food, which Jack cooked over the spirit stove. This was alight +when the lads returned, but was carefully screened round by blankets so +that not the slightest glow could be seen from a distance. + +"What do you think of it, Chris?" Brown said. + +"I don't know what to think about it. I have no idea what effect +dynamite would have when exploded at a distance of thirty or forty feet +below a bridge. Certainly it would blow the roadway up, but I have very +great doubts whether it would so twist or smash the main girders as to +render the bridge impassable. The distance to the first pier is not +great, and unless one entirely destroyed the bridge, I should say that +it could be repaired very soon--I mean, in a week or two--by a strong +gang. If the girders kept their places, two or three days' work might +patch it up temporarily. If it were destroyed altogether as far as the +first pier, it would stop the cannon getting over till a temporary +bridge is constructed; but by rigging up some strong cables, they could +pass cases of musket ammunition across the gap in the same way, you +know, as I have seen pictures of shipwrecked people being swung along +under a cable in a sort of cradle. What do you think, Peters?" + +"Two hundred pounds of dynamite would do a lot of damage, Chris. I +should think that it would certainly bring the wall down." + +"I have no doubt that it would do that, Peters, but the ironwork goes +some ten yards farther, and no doubts rests on the solid rock. I expect +the wall is put there more to finish the thing off than to carry much of +the weight. Again, you see it is only a single line, and not above ten +feet wide, which is against us, for the wider the line the better chance +it has of being smashed by an explosion some forty feet below it. Well, +we will have another look at the bridge and the waggons to-morrow. Of +course the bridge is the great thing if it can be managed, though I +don't say that blowing up the yard would not be a good thing if we can't +make sure of the other. Anyhow, we need not feel down-hearted about it. +We came up here on the chance, and even though we may not be able to do +exactly what we want, we ought to manage to do them a lot of damage." + +After eating their supper they turned in to their two little tents. The +spirit-lamp had been extinguished, and as they had not the least fear of +discovery, they did not consider it necessary to place a sentinel. In +the morning they were out again early and at their former post of +observation. + +"What are they up to now?" Brown said an hour later when he saw a party +of Boers come down the opposite side close to the bridge, carrying posts +and planks. + +Chris made no answer, he was watching them intently. They stopped near +the bank of the river close to the bridge. Then some of them set to work +to level a space of ground, while others made holes at the corners. + +"I am afraid that it is all up with our plans as far as the bridge is +concerned. They are going to put up a hut there, and I have not the +least doubt it means they are going to station a guard under the bridge. +If they do it that side, they are probably doing the same on this, only +we can't see them. The Boers are stupid enough in some things, but they +are sharp enough in others, and it is possible that the commando from +Barberton has come upon one of the kraals where we slept, and asking a +lot of questions about us, they have found out that we had four heavy +boxes with us, and the idea may have struck them that these contained +explosives. If that did occur to them, it is almost certain that a man +has been sent off at once to Barberton with orders to telegraph here and +to other bridges, to take every precaution against their being blown up. +Anyhow, there is a hut building there, and I don't see that it can be +for any other purpose." + +After three hours' work the hut was completed, and a party of eight men +brought down blankets and other kit. Two of these at once ascended the +bank with their rifles and sat down at the foot of the wall. + +"That ends the business," Chris said. "However, I will creep round to a +point where I can get a view of this side of the bridge. Possibly they +have only taken precautions on their own side, for we were travelling +for some time in the Swazis' country to the west of the Komati, and that +is where they will have heard of us." He crawled away among the rocks, +and rejoined his companions an hour later. + +"It is just the same this side. They have settled the question for us. +Now we will give our attention to the waggons." + + + + +CHAPTER X + +AN EXPLOSION + + +Having given up all hopes of blowing up the bridge, Chris and his +comrades turned their whole attention to the lines of waggons. The train +that had come in on the previous evening had added to the number, +although it had taken some of them away with it up country. They now +made out that there were eight waggons piled with cases, that almost +certainly contained rifles; six with tarpaulins closely packed over +them, and these they guessed contained ammunition boxes; four, each with +two large cases that might contain field guns; while the two with what +they were sure were big guns still remained on the siding. + +"I should say that about four or five pounds of dynamite would be an +abundance for each of those ammunition waggons; less than that would do, +as we could, by slitting the tarpaulins, put a pound among the cases, +and if one case were exploded it would set all the others off. There is +no trouble about them. I will just take a note. They are on the second +siding; there are eight other waggons in front of them and six behind, +so we cannot make any mistake about that. There must be a good heavy +charge under the rifle trucks, for we shall have to blow them all well +into the air to bend and damage them enough to be altogether +unserviceable. As for the guns, and especially the heavy ones, it is a +difficult question. Of course, if we could open the cases and get at the +breech-pieces, and put dynamite among them, we could damage all the +mechanism so much that the guns would be useless until new breech-pieces +were made, which I fancy must be altogether beyond the Boers; but as +there is no possibility of opening them, we must trust to blowing the +guns so high in the air that they will be too much damaged for use by +the explosion and fall. We have got altogether two hundredweight; now +two pounds to each ammunition waggon will take twelve pounds. What shall +we say for the rifles?" + +"Ten pounds," Brown suggested. + +"That would take eighty more pounds," Willesden objected, "which would +make a big hole in our stores." + +"We must have a good charge," Chris said. "Suppose we say nine pounds to +each, that will save eight pounds; fifteen pounds apiece ought to give +the eight cases which we suppose hold field-guns a good hoist; that will +leave us with over a hundred pounds, fifty for each of the big guns. Now +that we have seen all that is necessary, we may as well be off and begin +to get ready." + +The covers were taken off the boxes of dynamite, and these were +unscrewed, and the explosive was with great care divided into the +portions as agreed upon. Two of the cases furnished just sufficient for +the ammunition waggons and the two big guns, the other two for the +smaller cannon and the trucks with the rifles. The charges were sewn up +in pieces of the canvas, the smaller charges for the ammunition boxes +being enclosed in thinner stuff that had been sewn under the canvas used +in packing; the fuses and detonators were then cut and inserted. Chris +was perfectly up in this work, having performed the operation scores of +times in the mines. The length it should burn was only decided after a +discussion. + +There would be in all nineteen charges to explode, and these were in +three groups at some little distance from each other, all the cannon +being on the same siding. It would be necessary, perhaps, to wait for +some time till all these were free from observation by natives or others +who might be moving about the yard, then a signal must be given that +they could all see. It would not take long to light the fuses, for each +of them would be provided with a slow match, which burns with but a +spark, and could be held under a hat or an inverted tin cup till the +time came for using it. The question was how far must they be away to +ensure their own safety, and Chris maintained that at least four or five +hundred yards would be necessary to place them in even comparative +safety from the rain of fragments that would fall over a wide area. +Finally it was agreed to cut the fuses to a length to burn four minutes; +this would allow a minute for any hitch that might occur in lighting +them, and three minutes to burn. It was of course important that they +should be no longer than was absolutely necessary, as there existed a +certain risk that one of the little sparks might be seen by a passing +Kaffir, or, as was still more probable, the smell of burning powder +should attract attention. It was agreed that Chris should light the +fuses at the cannon, which were farthest from the others, that Peters +should see to the six rifle trucks, and Willesden and Brown attend the +eight trucks with the ammunition, one to begin at each end of the line. + +When each had finished his work, he was to run straight away in the +direction of the encampment, and all were to throw themselves down when +they felt sure that the time for the explosions had arrived. As soon as +all was over they were to meet at their place of encampment. Tents and +all stores were to be removed before the work began to the ravine where +the horses were, the men with them being charged to stand at the +animals' heads, as there would be a great explosion, and the horses +might break loose and stampede. The matter that puzzled them the most +was how, when they reached their respective stations--separated from +each other by lines of waggons, and in some cases by distances of a +couple of hundred yards--they were to know when the work of lighting the +fuses was to begin. It could not be done by sound, for this would reach +the ears of any awake in the yard or the sentries at the bridge. Chris +at last suggested a plan. + +"When we start, Jack shall be stationed at a point on the hillside high +enough for us to see him from all points of the yard. We will show him +the exact spot while it is light. When we start he shall go down with us +to the edge of the yard, and as we separate will turn and go up to the +point we had shown him. He will be ordered to walk up quietly, and not +to hurry; that will give us ample time to get to our stations before he +reaches his. We must all keep our eyes fixed on that point. He will take +the dark lantern with him; when he gets there he must turn the shade +off, so as to show the light for a quarter of a minute. That will be our +signal to begin. It is most unlikely that anyone else will see it, but +even if they did they would simply stare in that direction and wonder +what it was. Of course, only a flash would be safer; but some of us +might not see it, and would remain waiting for it until the other +explosions took place." + +All agreed that this would be a very good plan. Chris crawled up with +Jack until he reached a spot where he commanded a perfect view of the +yard, and explained to him exactly what he was to do. He had already +been told what was going to take place. Knowing that the Kaffirs have +very little idea of time, he said: "You will hold it open while you say +slowly like this, 'I am showing the light, baas, and I hope that you can +all see it.' You will say that over twice and then turn off the light, +and lie down under that big rock till you hear the explosion. Wait a +little, for stones and fragments will come tumbling down. When they have +stopped doing so make your way straight to where the horses are; you +will find us there before you. Now, repeat over to me the words you are +to say slowly twice." + +Jack did so, and finding on questioning him that he perfectly understood +what he was to do, Chris went back with him to the encampment, where +they remained quietly until the sun set and darkness came on. Then, +according to arrangement, the four natives came in and carried all the +things back to the ravine, and laid them down ready to pack the horses +as soon as their masters returned. + +The day passed slowly to the lads. All were in a state of suppressed +excitement, an excitement vastly greater than they had felt during their +two fights with the Boers. + +"How they will wonder who did it when they hear the news down in Natal!" +Peters said. + +"I don't expect they will hear much about it," Chris said. "You may be +sure the Boers will not say much; they make a big brag over every +success, but they won't care to publish such a thing as this. Probably +their papers will only say: 'An explosion of a trifling nature occurred +on the Portuguese side of Komati-poort. Some barrels of powder exploded; +it is unknown whether it was the result of accident or the work of +spies. Due precaution will be taken to prevent the recurrence of the +accident. Beyond a few natives employed at the station, no one was +hurt.'" + +The others laughed. "I suppose that will be about it, Chris. However, I +have no doubt that that commando from Barberton will keep a very sharp +look-out for us as we go back." + +"Yes, but they won't catch us. We won't venture into Swaziland again, +but will make our way down on the Portuguese side, following the railway +till we are fairly beyond the mountain range. We can ride fast now that +we have got rid of the dynamite. It will be some time before they get +the news about what has happened here, for the telegraph wires are sure +to be broken and the instruments smashed. I really think that our best +way will be to ride straight down to Lorenzo Marques. When we get there +we can very well state that we had been ordered to leave Johannesburg, +and that, as the trains are so slow and so crowded with fugitives, we +had ridden down. I don't suppose that we shall attract the least notice, +for we know that a great many of those who had intended to stay have +been ordered off. That way we shall get back to Natal in a few days and +avoid all danger." The others agreed that this would be a capital plan; +and the distance by the road, which they had crossed a few miles to the +south, and which runs from Lorenzo Marques up to Ladysdorp and the +Murchison and Klein Lemba gold-fields, would not be above seventy miles. +They would wait till daybreak showed them the amount of damage that had +been done, and then start, and would be down at Lorenzo Marques in the +evening, when, even if the news of the explosion reached the town, the +Boers' suspicions that some Englishmen were in the hills, and that it +was probably their work, would not be known. Not until ten o'clock was a +move made. Then they took up the packages of dynamite, and, accompanied +by Jack, made their way noiselessly down to the railway yard. + +Here they separated. Chris, aided by Jack, carried the big packets for +the large guns and for the eight smaller ones. They met no one about, +and depositing their packages in the right position under them--the +fuses had been already inserted--they returned to the spot they had +left. In a minute or two they were joined by the others. Peters had +placed his parcels under the eight trucks with rifles; Willesden and +Brown had cut holes in the tarpaulins of the ammunition trucks, and +thrust down their charges well among the boxes. All was ready. While the +others stood closely round him Jack opened the lantern just widely +enough for them to light their slow matches. + +"Now, you are not to hurry back to the place, Jack; we shall all be on +the look-out for you by the time you get there. You know your +instructions; you are to turn round, open the slide of the lantern, say +the words I told you over twice slowly, then shut the lantern and get +under that great boulder lying against the rock. You will be perfectly +safe in there." + +"I understand, baas," he said, and at once turned and went off. The +others hurried to their respective posts, and then turned round and +gazed at the spot where the light would be shown. In their anxiety and +excitement the time seemed interminable, and each began to think that +the native had somehow blundered; at last the light appeared, and they +turned at once to their work. Half a minute sufficed to light the fuses, +and then they hurried away cautiously until past all the waggons, and +then at full speed along the hillside, their thickly-padded shoes making +no noise upon the rocks. Knowing that they were sure to be confused as +to the time, they had calculated before the sun had set how far they +could run in three minutes, which should be, if all went well, the time +they would have after leaving the yard. They thought that even on the +rough ground, and in the dark, they could make a hundred and fifty yards +a minute, and at about four hundred and fifty from the waggons there was +a low ridge of rock behind which they would obtain protection from all +fragments blown directly outwards. + +Chris was the first to arrive, for the trucks with the cannon were those +farthest away from the bridge, and he was able to run for some distance +along the line before making for the elope, and therefore travelled +faster than his companions, who had farther to run on broken ground. In +half a minute they rushed up almost together. + +"Throw yourselves down," Chris shouted; "we shall have it directly." + +Twenty seconds later there was a tremendous roar and a blinding crash, +and they felt the ground shake. Almost simultaneously came eight others, +then in quick succession followed six other reports, and mingled with +these a confused roar of innumerable shots blended together. There was a +momentary pause, and then a deafening clatter as rifles, fragments of +iron and wood came falling down over a wide area. Several fell close to +where the lads were crouched against the rock, but none touched them. +For a full half-minute the fragments continued to fall, then the boys +stood up and looked round. It was too dark to see more than that the +yard was a chaos; the long lines of waggons, the huts and buildings, had +all disappeared; loud shouts could be heard from the other side of the +bridge, but nearer to them everything was silent. There was no doubt +that the success of the attempt was complete, and the lads walked back +quietly until they were at the spot where the horses had been placed, +Jack overtaking them just as they reached it. + +"It was terrible, baas," he said in an awed voice. "Jack thought his +life was gone. Things fell on the rock but could not break it." + +"Nothing short of one of those big cannon would have done that, Jack. +Well, we shall see in the morning what damage is done." + +The four natives, although they had been warned, were still terribly +frightened. The horses had at the first crash broken away and run up the +ravine, but they had just brought them down again, still trembling and +lathering with fear. For some minutes the boys patted and soothed them, +and accustomed to their voices and caresses they gradually quieted down, +but were very restless until day began to break. The boys had no thought +of sleep. The lamp was lit and tea made, and each of the Kaffirs was +given a glass of spirits and water, for they had brought up a bottle +with them in case of illness or any special need; and it was evident +from their chattering teeth and broken speech that the natives needed a +stimulant badly. Before it became light the horses were saddled, and the +five natives told to take them along the hill a mile farther. When they +had seen them off the lads returned to their former post above the +station. They had several times, when they looked out during the night, +seen a great light in that direction, and had no doubt that some of the +fallen huts had caught fire. + +[Illustration: "THERE WAS A TREMENDOUS ROAR AND A BLINDING CRASH."] + +Prepared as they were for a scene of destruction, the reality far +exceeded their expectations. All the waggons within a considerable +distance of the explosions were smashed into fragments, their wheels +broken and the axles twisted. The ammunition trucks had disappeared, and +many close to them had been completely shattered. Those in which the +muskets had been were a mere heap of fragments; the rest of the trucks +lay, some with their sides blown in, others comparatively uninjured. +Some were piled on the top of others three or four deep; their contents +were scattered over the whole yard. Boxes and cases were burst open, and +their contents--including large quantities of tea, sugar, tinned +provisions in vast quantities, and other stores--ruined. + +Some still smoking brands showed where the huts had stood, and the dead +bodies of some twenty natives and several Portuguese officials, were +scattered here and there. The bodies of eight Boers were laid out +together by the bridge, and forty or fifty men were wandering aimlessly +amid the ruins. A huge cannon stood upright nearly in the centre of the +yard. It had fallen on its muzzle, which had penetrated some feet into +the earth. They could not see where its fellow had fallen. Five others, +which looked like fifteen-pounders, were lying in different directions, +the other three had disappeared. Rifles twisted, bent, and ruined were +lying about everywhere. + +"It is not as good as the bridge," Chris said after they had used their +glasses for some time in silence, "but it is a heavy blow for them, and +I should think it will be a week before the line can be cleared ready +for traffic. Even when they begin they will feel the loss of so much +rolling-stock. There were five engines in the yard. Every one of these +has been upset, and will want a lot of repairs before it is fit for +anything again. I wish I had a kodak with me to take a dozen snap-shots, +it would be something worth showing when we get back. Well, we may as +well be moving. The Boers look as if they were stupefied at present, but +they will be waking up presently, and the sooner we start for Lorenzo +Marques the better." + +Half an hour later they had mounted and were on their way, travelling +slowly till they came upon the road, and then at a fast pace. Jack rode +the spare horse, the other natives rode the ponies in turn, those on +foot keeping up without difficulty by laying a hand on the saddles. +Sometimes they trotted for two or three miles, and then went at a walk +for half an hour, and stopped altogether for four hours in the heat of +the day, for they were now getting on to low land, being only some three +hundred feet above the sea. They reached Lorenzo Marques at about nine +o'clock in the evening, and failing to find beds, for the town was full +of emigrants from the Transvaal, they camped in the open. In the morning +they sold the two ponies, and were fortunate in finding a steamer lying +there that would start the next day. Being very unwilling to part with +their horses they arranged for deck passages for them, taking their own +risk of injury to them in case of rough weather setting in. Every berth +was already engaged, but this mattered little to them, as they could +sleep upon the planks as well as on the ground. + +They found that there was some excitement in the town, as there was a +report that there had been an explosion and much damage done near +Komati-poort. No particulars were, however, known, as the railway +officials maintained a strict silence as to the affair. It was known, +however, that the telegraphic communication with the Transvaal was +broken, and that three trains filled with Kaffir labourers, and +accompanied by a number of officials and a company of soldiers, had gone +up early that morning. Among the fugitives strong hopes were expressed +that the damage had been serious enough to interrupt the traffic for +some little time, and to cause serious inconvenience to the Boers, and +some even hazarded the hope that the bridge had suffered. This, however, +seemed unlikely in the extreme. + +Fortunately the weather was fine on the run down to Durban, and the +passage of three hundred miles was effected in twenty-four hours. It was +now just a month since they had left Maritzburg, and as soon as they +landed with their horses and followers they learned that much had taken +place during that time. + +They had started on the 10th of November. The Boers were then steadily +advancing, and so great did the danger appear, that Durban had been +strongly fortified by the blue jackets, aided by Kaffir labour. On the +25th Sir Redvers Buller had arrived, and by this time a considerable +force was gathered at Estcourt. The British advance began from that town +on the following day. The place had been entirely cut off, Boers +occupying the whole country as far as the Mooi river. General Hildyard, +who commanded at Estcourt, had been obliged to inarch out several times +to keep them at a distance from the town, and one or two sharp artillery +engagements had taken place, the Boers being commanded by General +Joubert in person. They had always retired a short distance, but their +movements were so rapid that it was useless to follow; and the troops +had each time fallen back to Estcourt. On the 28th the Boers had blown +up the bridge across the Tugela, and our army was moving forward, and a +great battle was expected shortly. On landing Chris rode at once to the +address given by his mother, and found that she had sailed for Cape Town +a week before. Riding then to the railway, he found that the line was +closed altogether to passenger traffic, but that a train with some +troops and a strong detachment of sailors was going up that evening. +Learning that a naval officer was in command, as the military consisted +only of small parties of men who had been left behind, when their +regiments left, to look after and forward their stores, he went to him. +He had, before landing, donned his civilian suit. + +"What can I do for you, sir?" the officer, who was watching a party +loading trucks with sheep, asked. + +"My name is King, sir. I have just returned from an expedition to +Komati, I and three friends with me, and we have succeeded in blowing up +a large number of waggons containing a battery of field artillery, two +very heavy long guns, which, by the marks on the case, came from +Creusot, some eight or ten thousand rifles, and six truck-loads of +ammunition." + +"The deuce you have!" the officer said, looking with great surprise at +the lad who told him this astonishing tale. Then sharply he added: "Are +you speaking the truth, sir? You will find it the worse for you if you +are not." + +"What I say is perfectly true," Chris said quietly. "We only arrived an +hour since from Lorenzo Marques. This open letter from General Yule will +show you that the party of boys of whom I was the leader, have done some +good service before now." + +The officer opened and read the letter. "I must beg your pardon for +having doubted your word," he said, as he handed it back. "After +adventuring into a Boer camp, and giving so heavy a lesson to a superior +force of the enemy, I can quite imagine you capable of carrying out the +adventure you have just spoken of. Now, sir, what can I do for you?" + +"I have come to ask if you will allow myself and my three friends to +accompany you." + +"That I will most certainly. And indeed, as you have a report to make of +this matter to General Buller, you have a right to go on by the first +military train. Is there anything else?" + +"Yes, sir; I should be greatly obliged if you will authorize the +station-master to attach a carriage to the train to take our five +horses." + +"I will go with you to him," the officer said. "I can't say whether that +can be managed or not." + +The station-master at first said that it was impossible, for his orders +were for a certain number of carriages and trucks, and with those orders +from the commanding officer he could not add to the number. + +"But you might slip it on behind, Mr. Station-master," the officer said. +"There are four gentlemen going up with a very important report to Sir +Redvers Buller." + +"I would do it willingly enough," the station-master said, "but the +commanding officer is bound to be down here with his staff, and he would +notice the horses directly." + +"They might be put in a closed van, sir," Chris urged. "And as there are +so many full of stores, it would naturally be supposed that this was +also loaded with them." + +The official smiled. "Well, young gentleman, I will do what I can for +you. As the officer in command of the train has consented, I can fall +back upon his authority if there should be any fuss about it. The train +will start at eight this evening; you had better have your horses here +two hours before that. Entrain them on the other side of the yard, and I +will have the waggon attached to the train quietly as soon as you have +got them in. The general is not likely to be down here till half an hour +before the train starts, and it is certainly not probable that he will +count the number of carriages." + +It was now half-past five, and Chris joined his friends, who were +waiting with the horses and Kaffirs near the station. They had hardly +expected him so soon, as they did not know that his mother had left. + +"Good news," he said. "There is a through train going up this evening, +and I have got permission for us and the horses to go; but they must be +put in a truck by half-past six, and we may as well get them in at once. +We still have our water-skins; the Kaffirs had better get them filled at +once, and a good supply of mealies for the horses on the way; there is +no saying how long we may be. Willesden, do you run into a store and get +a supply of bread and a cold ham for ourselves; a good stock of bread +for the Kaffirs, and a jar of water, and a hamper, with a lock, +containing two dozen bottles of beer, the mildest you can get, for them. +We are sure to get out for a few minutes at one of the stations, and can +then unlock the hamper and give them a bottle each. It would never do to +leave it to their mercy; they would drink it up in the first half-hour, +and then likely enough quarrel and fight. For ourselves, we will have a +small skin of water and, say, three bottles of whisky. The carriage is +sure to be full, and it will be acceptable in the heat of the day +tomorrow. The remainder of our supply of tea and so on, and the lamp and +other things, had better all go in with the horses, and everything we do +not absolutely want in the train with us; there will be little room +enough. Get an extra kettle, then we can not only make ourselves a cup +of tea or cocoa on the road, but give some to any friend we may make; +besides, it is sure to come in useful when we get to the front." + +"I will see to all that." + +"If you will, take Jack with you to carry the things you buy." + +"I had better take two of them; it will be a good weight." + +"Very well, take one of the Zulus; the other can lead the spare horse, +and likely enough we shall have some trouble in getting them into the +waggon." + +That work, however, turned out more easy than he had expected. The +station-master pointed out the waggon that he was to take, which was +standing alone on one of the lines of rails. They all set to work, and +were not long in running it alongside an empty platform, from which the +horses were led into it without trouble, being by this time accustomed +to so many changes that they obeyed their masters' orders without +hesitation. They had, too, already made one railway journey, and had +found that it was not unpleasant. The station-master happened to catch +sight of them, and sent two of the porters to take the waggon across the +various points to the rear of the train, where it was coupled. The +water-skins had been filled and the horses given a good drink before +entering the station, and the stores, waterproofs, and other spare +articles stowed with the horses. The shutter was closed, and the Kaffirs +told that on no account were they to open it or show their faces until +the train had left the station. + +In a few minutes Willesden came up with the two natives heavily laden. +As soon as the stores and natives were all safely packed away and the +door of the van locked by one of the porters, the lads went out and had +a hearty meal at an hotel near the station. When they returned a large +number of soldiers and sailors were gathered on the platform. Their +baggage had already been stowed, and they were drawn up in fours, facing +the train, in readiness to enter when the word was given, the officers +standing and chatting in groups. The station was well lighted, as, in +addition to the ordinary gas-lamps, several powerful oil-lamps had been +hung up at short intervals. The naval men were in the front part of the +train, and on Chris walking up there the officer in command beckoned to +him. + +"I will take you in the carriage with me, Mr. King. We want very much to +hear your story, and there is plenty of room for you. Your three +companions will go in the next two compartments, which will contain +junior officers and midshipmen, and I am sure that they too will be very +welcome. Before we board the train I will get you all to go and sit at +the windows at the other side. If you will bring your friends up I will +introduce them to their messmates on the trip. As soon as we have all +entered, we shall be at the window saying good-by to our friends, and no +one will catch sight of you. It is just as well, for although I feel +perfectly justified in taking you on to make your report to the +commander-in-chief, my senior might fuss over it; and although he might +let you go on, there would be a lot of explanations and bother. Have you +got your horses in?" + +"Yes, sir; we were able to manage that capitally." + +"Then you had better bring your comrades up at once, Mr. King, and I +will introduce them to those they will travel with." Chris brought up +his three friends and introduced them to the officer, who then took them +to the group of youngsters. + +"Gentlemen," he said, "these three gentlemen will travel in your +compartment. They have seen a great deal of the war, and belong to one +of the mounted volunteer corps. They have a wonderful story to tell you, +and I am sure you will be delighted with their companionship. They will +take their seats just before the men entrain. They must occupy the seats +near the farther window, and as you will no doubt all be looking out on +this side, they will probably not be noticed, which would be all the +better, as it is a little irregular my taking them up." + +By this time a considerable number of people were crowded in the +station, friends of the officers and comrades of the sailors, who looked +enviously at those going forward, while they themselves might possibly +not get a chance of doing so. A quarter of an hour later the officer +said: + +"I am going to give the order to entrain. This is my compartment. You +and your friends had better slip into your places at once." + +As soon as they had got in the order was given, and with the regularity +of a machine the three hundred men entered the train. As soon as they +had done so the officers took their places. The crowd moved up on to the +platform, and there was much shaking of hands, cheering, and +exhortations to do for the Boers. Suddenly there was a backward movement +on the part of the spectators, and the commanding naval officer on the +station, with several others and a group of military men, came on to the +platform. They were received by the officers in command of the sailors +and soldiers, and walked with them along the platform talking. This was +evidently a matter of ceremony only. The usual questions were put as to +the stores, and after standing and chatting for eight or ten minutes the +officers took their places in the train, the engine whistled, and the +train moved on, amid loud cheering both from those on the platform and +the men at the windows. As soon as they were fairly off, Chris's friend +said: + +"I have already introduced you to these officers, Mr. King, but I have +not told them any of your doings. I can only say, gentlemen, that this +young officer is in command of a section of Volunteer Horse, and has +done work that any of us might be proud indeed to accomplish. The best +introduction I can give him, before he begins to tell his story, is by +reading a letter with which General Yule has furnished him." + + + + +CHAPTER XI + +BACK WITH THE ARMY + + +While the letter was being passed round from hand to hand, a good deal +to Chris's discomfort, he had time to look more closely than he had done +before at his travelling companions. Three of them were young +lieutenants, the fourth an older man, shrewd but kindly faced. In +introducing him, his friend said: "This is our medico, Dr. Dawlish. I +hope that you will have no occasion to make his professional +acquaintance." When they had all read the letter, the senior lieutenant +said: "Now, Mr. King, we won't ask much of you to-night; we shall have +all to-morrow to listen to your story. We have all had a pretty hard +day's work, and shall before long turn in. Perhaps you will tell us to +begin with what your corps is, and how you became the officer." "There +are twenty-one of us, sir, and we are all about the same age. We were +great friends together at Johannesburg, where our fathers were for the +most part connected with mining. As things went on badly, we decided to +form ourselves into a corps if the war broke out. They chose me as their +leader--for no particular reason that I know of--and with the +understanding that if I did not quite give satisfaction, I should resign +in favour of one of the others. We all came down with our families from +Johannesburg when war was declared, and were grossly insulted and ill- +treated by the Boers, several of the ladies, among them my mother, being +struck on the face with their whips; which, you can imagine, quite +confirmed our determination to fight against them. We had all obtained +our parents' consent, and when we got to Pietermaritzburg, proceeded to +get our horses and equipments. That is all." + +"A great deal too short, Mr. King," the lieutenant said. "We want to +know what steps you took, and how you managed it. Did you come down all +the way by train?" + +Chris related the events of the journey with more detail, and how, all +being well furnished with money, they had lost no time in getting all +they required, and going back by train to Newcastle. + +"That is a good point to leave off," the officer said. "Tomorrow morning +we will take your story in instalments, and I do hope you will give us +the details as minutely as you can. They will greatly interest us, as we +are going in for that sort of thing, and it will show us what can be +done by a small number of young fellows accustomed to the country, well- +mounted, and, I am sure, from what General Yule says, remarkably well +led." All were provided with flasks, and after sampling the contents of +these, they wrapped themselves in their rugs and were soon fast asleep. +The other three lads did not get off so easily, the younger officers +were all so delighted at the prospect of soon being engaged that they +were in no way inclined to sleep, and it was not until the seniors had +long been soundly off that they too agreed to postpone the rest of the +boys' narrative until the next morning. The train travelled very slowly, +and Pietermaritzburg--a distance of seventy miles--was not reached until +day was breaking. Here there was a long pause, and all alighted to +stretch their limbs. The lads ran to the end of the train; Jack was +looking out. + +"I thought that we should stop here, baas," he said; "and I have got the +kettles boiling and ready." + +"Good man!" Chris said. "How have the horses passed the night?" + +"They have been very quiet, baas." + +"That is good to know. Take the kettles off and put three good handfuls +of tea in each." + +"Yes, baas." + +"When they are emptied, fill them with fresh water and put them again on +the stove. When they boil, bring them to our carriages, having of course +put some tea in before you take them off the lamp. Now, give me one of +those large loaves and the ham, and all the mugs and knives. We will +start breakfast first in my compartment, Willesden; we will pass you in +the ham when we have done with it. Anyhow, the kettles will hold enough +for a mug for everyone in our three compartments, and by the time we +have drunk that the second lot will be boiling. Open a couple of tins of +milk, Jack, and then you can bring them along when you have taken the +kettles. There is no extraordinary hurry, for I heard them say that we +should wait here at least an hour." + +There was some amusement among the soldiers and sailors as Jack, +carrying the kettles, and Chris, Willesden, Brown, and Peters with ham, +bread and butter, tin mugs, plates, and three open tins of preserved +milk, came along down the platform. + +"What have you got here?" the doctor asked in surprise, as they arrived +at the carriage. + +"Breakfast," Chris said. "It is in the rough, but you will get it +rougher than this before you get to Ladysmith." + +"Why, you must be a conjurer. Where did you get the water from? We were +just discussing whether we should go out and try to fight our way to +those barrels of beer where the Tommies are clustered, or content +ourselves with spirit and water, a drink I cannot recommend in the +morning." + +There were exclamations of pleasure from all in the carriage as Jack was +handing in the things. + +"We shall not want the ham, Mr. King," the senior lieutenant said. "We +provided ourselves with a great basket of eatables and a few bottles of +wine, but the idea of making tea in the train did not, I think, occur to +any of us." + +Chris was not allowed to cut his ham, for the basket contained pies, +chicken, and other luxuries; but the tea was immensely appreciated. By +the time that the first mugs were empty Jack arrived with the fresh +supply, and long before the train started breakfast was over, pipes had +been lighted, and all felt thoroughly awake and cheery. "Do you always +travel so well provided, Mr. King?" the doctor asked. + +"We always carry tea, preserved milk, and preserved cocoa, and two or +three gallons of paraffin for cooking with. In case we can't find wood +for a fire, it makes all the difference in the world in our comfort." + +"Now, Mr. King, we must waste no more time; so please begin at once, or +there will be no time to hear all your story. Tell us something about +your expedition to Komati-poort. The other we shall hope to hear on +another occasion in our camp, where we shall all be glad to see you at +any time." + +Chris then related the idea he had formed at Maritzburg, of blowing up +the bridge, and how he had carried out the adventure. He passed very +briefly over the journey, but described fully how they had been obliged +to relinquish their original project, owing to the bridge being so +strongly guarded at both ends; and how, failing in that respect, they +had determined to do as much damage as possible to the great assemblage +of waggons filled with arms and military stores; and fully detailed the +manner in which this had been accomplished, and the aspect of the yard +on the following morning. + +"Splendidly planned and carried out!" the commander of the party +exclaimed, and the others all echoed his words. It was astonishing +indeed to think that such a plan should have been conceived and carried +out by a lad no older than some of their junior midshipmen, and assisted +by only three others of the same age. + +"The day before we started," the doctor said, "I saw in one of the +Durban papers a telegram from Lorenzo Marques saying that there had been +an explosion at Komati-poort, where a few waggons had been injured and +two natives killed, but that the Boers had suffered in any way, and that +the damage would be repaired and the line opened for traffic in a few +hours." + +"There is only one word of truth in that, sir," Chris said smiling, "and +that is that no Boers suffered. I am convinced that is strictly true, +for the eight Boers at the bridge were certainly instantaneously killed; +and of the natives, whom I am sorry for, there were certainly eighteen +killed, together with some eight or ten Portuguese employes. If I could +by any possibility have got the natives out of the way I would have done +so. As to the Portuguese I do not feel any great regret, for I believe +all the officials in the custom-house on the railway are bribed by the +Boers to break the official orders they receive as to observing strict +neutrality, and aid in every way in passing the materials of war into +the Transvaal." + +There was no time for further conversation, for they were now within a +short distance of the Tugela, and the train was winding its way between +steep hills which could have been held successfully by a handful of men. + +"The only wonder to me is," another officer said, "that the Boers did +not take up and drag away the rails all the way from here to Estcourt. +If they had lifted them out of their sleepers, they had only to harness +a rail behind each horse and trot off with it. I know that there is a +considerable amount of railway material at Durban, but I doubt if there +is anything like sufficient to make twenty miles of road. And the +business would have been still more difficult if the Boers had collected +the sleepers in great piles and burned them. Of course they have +destroyed a good many culverts and the bridge at Estcourt. It is +wonderful that the railway people should have managed to get up a +temporary trestle bridge so soon, and to make a deviation of the line to +carry the trains over. It does their engineers immense credit. This pass +is widening," he added after putting his head out of the window. "I +fancy we shall be at Chieveley in a few minutes." + +The train came to a stand-still at a siding a short distance outside the +station, which was crowded by a long line of waggons with stores of all +kinds. A number of sailors were unloading shells for their guns, and a +crowd of Kaffirs, under the orders of military officers, were getting +out the stores. As they alighted, after hearty thanks to the officer +whose kindness had been the means of their getting forward so promptly, +and who now went to report his arrival to Captain Jones, who was +superintending the operations of the sailors, Chris and his party +hurried to the rear waggon. It was a work of considerable difficulty to +get the horses out, and could not have been accomplished had there not +been a stack of sleepers near the spot. A number of these were carried +and piled so as to make a sloping gangway, by which the horses were +brought down. The sleepers being returned to their places, Chris and his +friends mounted and rode to the camp, which was placed behind a long, +low ridge which screened it from the sight of the enemy on the opposite +hills, although within easy range of their heavy guns. + +Here before daybreak on the 12th, Major-general Barton's Fusilier +brigade, with a thousand Colonial Cavalry, three field batteries, and +the naval guns, had marched north, and were the following night joined +by another brigade with some cavalry. The next day the big naval guns +had opened fire; but although their shell had reached the lower +entrenchments of the Boers, their batteries on the hill had proved to be +beyond their range even with the greatest elevation that could be given +to them, while the Boer guns carried far beyond the camp. + +Chris had learned at Estcourt, where the train stopped a few minutes, +that Captain Brookfield's troop formed part of the Colonial Horse that +had advanced with General Barton's brigade, and they soon discovered +their position. Leaving the horses with the natives, they went to his +tent. + +"I am delighted to see you back," he exclaimed as they entered. "I heard +in confidence from one of your party, when they joined me a week back, +that you had gone on a mad-brained adventure to try and blow up the +Komati-poort bridge. I was horrified! I had, of course, given you leave +to act on your own responsibility, but I never dreamt of your +undertaking an expedition of that sort. Of course you found it +impossible to get there. A lad told me that you had reckoned on being +away six or seven weeks, and it is less than a month since the date on +which he told me you left. Anyhow, I heartily congratulate you on all +getting back." + +"We got there, sir, but nothing could be done with the bridge, it was so +safely guarded. However, we did blow up two big cannon and a battery of +small ones, some ten thousand rifles, and an enormous quantity of +ammunition." "You don't say so, Chris? Then you had better luck than you +deserved. One of the correspondents told me this morning that there was +news in the town by a telegram from Lorenzo Marques that there had been +an accidental explosion at Komati-poort, but it did not seem to be +anything serious. Tell me all about it." + +"I congratulate you most heartily," he said, when Chris had finished the +story. "Of course you have written a report of it?" "Here it is, sir. I +have made it very brief, merely saying that I had the honour to report +that, with Messrs. Peters, Brown, and Willesden, I succeeded in blowing +up, with two hundredweight of dynamite, the things I have mentioned to +you, destroying a large quantity of rolling stock, badly damaging five +locomotives, and destroying roads and sidings to such an extent that +traffic can hardly be resumed for a fortnight. Is the general here, +sir?" + +"No, but he will be here this afternoon. Now, I will not detain you from +your friends. No doubt they saw you ride in, and will be most anxious to +hear of your doings. You will hardly know them again. When they came up +to join us they adopted the uniform of the corps, feeling that it would +be uncomfortable going about in a large camp in civilian dress. They +brought with them uniforms for you all, for they seemed very certain +that you would return alive." + +"I am very glad of that, sir, for the soldiers all stared at us as we +came up here. I suppose they took us for sight-seers who had come up to +witness the battle." + +As they left the tent they found the rest of their party, gathered in a +group twenty yards away, and the heartiest greeting was exchanged. The +delight of the party knew no bounds when they found that their four +friends had not had their journey in vain. They had two tents between +them, and gathering in one of them they listened to Peters, who told the +story, as Chris said he had told it twice, and should probably have to +tell it again. The four lads at once exchanged their civilian clothes +for the uniforms that had been brought up. They were, like those of the +other Colonial corps, very simple, consisting of a loose jacket reaching +down to the hip, with turned-down collar and pockets, breeches of the +same light colour and material, loose to the knee and tighter below it; +knee boots, and felt hats looped up on one side. + +The first step when they were dressed was to mount an eminence some +distance in rear of the camp, whence they had a view of the whole +country. In front of them was a wide valley with a broad river running +through it. Beyond it rose steep hills, range behind range. It was +crossed by two bridges, that of the railway, which had been blown up and +destroyed, and the road bridge, which was still intact; though, as +Sankey, who had accompanied them, told them, it was known to be mined. +To the left of the line of railway was a hill known as Grobler's Kloof, +on the summit of which a line of heavy guns could be seen. There were +other batteries on slopes at its foot commanding the bridge, to the +right of which on another hill was Fort Wylie, and in a bend of the +river by the railway could be seen the white roof of the church tower of +Colenso. There was another battery behind this, and others still farther +to the right on Mount Hlangwane. Heavy guns could be seen on other hills +to the left of Grobler's Kloof; while far away behind Colenso was the +crest of Mount Bulwana, from which a cannonade was being directed upon +Ladysmith and an occasional white burst of smoke showed that the +garrison were replying successfully. On all the lower slopes of the +hills were lines, sometimes broken, sometimes connected, rising one +above another. These were the Boer entrenchments, and Cairns said that +he heard that they extended for nearly twenty miles both to the right +and left. + +"It is believed that we don't see anything like all of them," he went +on, "but we really don't know much about them, for the Boers only answer +occasionally from their great guns on the hilltops, and although +yesterday the sailors fired lyddite shells at these lower trenches, +there was no reply." + +"It is an awful place to take," Chris said, after examining the hills +for a quarter of an hour with his glasses. "We have seen that the Boers +are no good in the open, but I have no doubt they will hold their +entrenchments stubbornly, and it is certain that a great many of them +are good shots. I have gone over the ground at Laing's Nek, and that was +nothing at all in comparison to this position. Do you know how many +there are supposed to be of them, Cairns?" + +"They say that there are about twenty-five thousand of them, but no one +knows exactly. Natives get through pretty often from Ladysmith, but they +know no more there than we do here. They are all jolly and cheerful +there, in the thought that they will soon be relieved." + +"I hope that they are not counting their chickens before they are +hatched," Chris said. "I doubt very greatly whether we shall carry those +hills in front of us, and if we do the ranges behind are no doubt +fortified. How about crossing the river?" + +"There are several drifts. There is one about four miles to the left of +the bridge, called Bridle Drift. Waggon Drift is about as much farther +on. There is a drift just this side of where the Little Tugela runs into +it, and one just farther on; there is Skeete Drift and Molen Drift, with +a pontoon ferry; there is an important one called Potgieter's Drift, +where the road from Springfield to Ladysmith crosses; and another, +Trichardt's, where a road goes to Acton Homes. I know there are some to +the right, but I don't know their names." + +"Well, that is comforting, because even if we take Colenso there would +be no crossing if the bridge is mined. And as the town will be commanded +by a dozen batteries, we should not gain much by its capture. Well, I +tell you fairly that I am well satisfied that we belong to a mounted +corps and shall be only lookers-on, for even if we win we shall +certainly lose a tremendous lot of men. Is there no way of marching +round one way or the other?" + +"I believe not. The only way at all open seems to be round by Acton +Homes; that is a place about fifteen miles west of Ladysmith, and on the +principal road from Van Reenen's Pass. From there down to Ladysmith the +country is comparatively open, but it is a tremendously long way round. +I don't know how far, but I should say forty or fifty miles; and +certainly the road will in many places be commanded by Boer guns; and +they will most likely have fortified strong positions at various points. +But, of course, the great difficulty will be transport; I am sure we +have nothing like enough to take stores for the army all that distance. +Besides, Chris, I don't see that we should gain any advantage from going +to Ladysmith that way, we should be as far as ever from thrashing the +Boers, and certainly could not remain in Ladysmith; we should eat up all +the provisions there in no time." + +"I don't like the outlook at all," Peters said. + +"Ah, there is a general officer with a staff riding into the camp. Most +likely it is Buller. We had better go down, for if Brookfield gives in +my report he may want to speak to me." + +The party went down the hill. When they reached their camp they were at +once sent for to Captain Brookfield's tent. + +"I am glad that you are back," he said. "Sir Redvers Buller has just +ridden up on to the ridge, I will speak to him as he comes down. You had +better come with me and stand a short distance off. Bring your rifles +with you, and stand in military order; you three in line, and Chris two +paces in front of you." + +Having got their rifles they followed Captain Brookfield till he stopped +at the foot of the slope below the point where the general and his staff +were standing. Their leader advanced some fifty yards ahead of them. In +a quarter of an hour the party were seen descending the hill. Captain +Brookfield stepped forward and saluted the general as he came along a +horse's length in front of his staff. Sir Redvers checked his horse a +little impatiently. + +"What is it sir?" he said sharply. "I cannot attend to camp details +now." + +"I command the Maritzburg Scouts," Captain Brookfield said. "Three of my +men, with Mr. King, who commands the section to which they belong, have +just returned. I wish to hand you Mr. King's report; it contains news +which is, I think, of importance." + +"Give it to Lord Gerard," the general said briefly, motioning to one of +the officers behind him. "Please see what it is about, Gerard." And he +then moved forward again, briefly acknowledging Captain Brookfield's +salute. He had gone, however, but twenty yards when Lord Gerard rode up +to him and handed to him the open dispatch. + +"It is of importance, sir." + +Supposing that it was merely the report of four scouts who had gone out +reconnoitring, and with his mind absorbed with weightier matters, the +general had hardly given the matter a thought. Without checking his +horse he glanced at the paper, and then abruptly reined in his charger +and read it through attentively. Then he turned to where Captain +Brookfield was still standing and called him up. + +"I do not quite understand this report, sir," he said. "Is it possible +that your men have been up to Komati-poort? I gathered from your words +that they had merely returned from reconnoitring." + +"No, sir; they only came in this morning by the train from Durban with +the naval detachment with details." + +"But how in the world did they get to Komati-poort?" + +"They started from Maritzburg, sir, and rode up through Zululand and +Swaziland. Their object was to blow up the bridge, and to stop supplies +of munitions of war continuing to pass up through Lorenzo Marques. I may +say that they acted on their own initiative. The section to which they +belong is composed entirely of gentlemen's sons from Johannesburg; they +provide their horses and equipment, and draw no pay or rations, and when +they joined my corps made it a condition that so long as not required +for regular work they should be allowed to scout on their own account." + +Before calling up Captain Brookfield the general had handed back the +despatch to Lord Gerard, with the words, "Pass it round." + +"Are those your men?" the general said, pointing to the little squad. + +"Yes, sir." + +Sir Redvers rode up to them, and on returning their salute, said: "You +have done well indeed, gentlemen; it was a most gallant action. Have you +your own horse with you?" he asked Chris. + +"Yes, sir." "Then mount at once and join me as I leave camp. Then you +can tell me about this matter on my way back." + +Chris was soon on horseback. He waited at a short distance while the +general talked with General Barton, and as soon as he saw him turn to +ride off cantered up and joined the staff. The general looked round as +he did so. He beckoned to him to come up to his side. + +"Now, sir, let me hear more about this. The captain of the troop that +you belong to, tells me that you and twenty other young fellows, all +from Johannesburg, formed yourselves into a party of scouts, and are +making war at your own expense, and that although in a certain way you +joined his troop you really act independently when it so pleases you." + +"Yes, sir. We and our families have received great indignities from the +Boers; and although we are conscious that we should be of little use as +troops, we thought that we could do service as scouts on our own +account, and have been lucky in inflicting some blows on them. I was +fortunate enough to attract Colonel Yule's attention at Dundee, and he +furnished me with an open letter addressed to you, and to officers +commanding stations, saying that we had done so." + +"Have you it about you?" + +"Yes, sir." + +Sir Redvers held out his hand, and Chris handed him the letter. "So you +went into the Boer camp! Do you speak Dutch well?" + +"Yes, sir; we all speak Dutch fairly, and most of us Kaffir also, that +was why we thought that we should be more useful scouting; until now we +have all been dressed as young Boers, and could, I think, pass without +suspicion anywhere." + +"Now as to this other affair," Sir Redvers said, returning Colonel +Yule's letter. "You had better take this, it will be useful to you +another time. Now tell me all about it. Was it entirely your own idea?" + +"I first thought of it, sir, and my three friends agreed to go with me. +I did not want a large number. We started from Maritzburg with our own +Kaffir servant, and two Zulus and two Swazis to act as guides, two +ponies, each of which carried a hundredweight of dynamite; we had also a +spare riding horse." + +He then related their proceedings from the time of their start to their +arrival at Komati-poort; their failure at the bridge in consequence of +the strong guard that the Boers had set over it; and how, finding that +the main object of their journey could not be carried out, they +proceeded to wreck the station yard and its contents. + +"Thank you, Mr. King," the general said, when Chris concluded by +mentioning briefly how they had ridden down to Lorenzo Marques, and +taken a ship to Durban, and come up by train. "I saw the telegram of the +accident at Komati-poort. I imagined that it was probably more severe +than was stated, but certainly had no idea that such wholesale damage +had been effected, or that it was the work of any of our people. I think +that it would be unwise for me to take any public notice of it at +present; possibly there may be another attempt made to destroy that +bridge. If nothing more is said about it, the Boers may in time cease to +be careful, and a few determined men landed at Lorenzo Marques may +manage to succeed where you were unable to do so. It would be worth any +money to us to put a stop to the constant flow of arms and ammunition +that is going on via Lorenzo Marques. I consider your expedition to have +been in the highest degree praiseworthy, and to have been conducted with +great skill." "My father is a mining engineer, and managing-director of +several mines round Johannesburg, general. I have been working there +under him and learning the business, and therefore know a good deal +about dynamite, and what a certain quantity would effect." + +"Have you thought of going into the army? because if so, I will appoint +you and your three friends to regiments at once, and you will be +gazetted as soon as my report goes home." + +"I am very much obliged to you, general, but I have no thought of +entering the army. I will, of course, mention it to my friends. I have +never heard them say anything on the subject. We are fighting because we +hate the Boers. No one can say, unless he has been resident there, what +we have all had to put up with, for the past year especially. On the way +down the Boers not only threatened to strike us, but struck many of the +ladies, my mother among them, besides robbing everyone of watches and +all other valuables. If it had not been for that, some of us might have +changed our minds before we got down here. That settled the matter. And +besides, sir, I hope that we shall be able to do more good in our own +way than if we became regular officers, as we know nothing about drill +and should be of very little good, whereas we do understand our own way +of fighting. I can say so without boasting, for we have twice thrashed +the Boers; once when they were twice our number, and the other time when +they were nearly four times as strong as we were." + +"Go on doing so, Mr. King; go on doing so, you cannot do better. +However, if any of your three friends, or all of them, choose to accept +my offer, it is open to them." + +They were by this time close to Frere, and the general went on: "I am +sorry that I cannot ask you to dine with me this evening, as we shall +all be too busy for anything like a regular meal, for in a few hours +there will be a general advance. Good-evening. When I am less busy I +shall be glad to hear about those two fights that you speak of. You +colonists have taught us a few lessons already." + +Chris saluted, wheeled his horse round, and cantered back to Chieveley. +There was much satisfaction among the whole of the party when Chris +related what General Buller had said. None of his three companions had +any desire to accept a commission. Willesden's father was a doctor with +a large practice in Johannesburg, and the lad himself was going home +after the war was over to study for the profession and to take his +medical degree; while Brown and Peters were both sons of very wealthy +capitalists. + +"If I could not have done any fighting any other way I should have liked +a commission very much. Of course I could have thrown it up at the end +of the war. But I would a great deal rather be on horseback than on +foot, and I own I have no inclination to fight my way across those +hills. Talana was a pretty serious business, but it was child's play to +what this will be." + +"Very well," Chris said; "I did not think that any of you would care for +it, although I could not answer for you. There is no need for hurry in +sending in a reply; there will be time to do that when we get into +Ladysmith. Then I will get Captain Brookfield to draw up the kind of +letter that ought to be sent, for I have not the least idea how I should +address a commander-in-chief. Of course, a thing of this sort ought to +be done in a formal sort of way; I could not very well say, 'My dear +general, my three friends don't care to accept your kind offer. Yours +very truly.'" There was a general laugh, and then they talked over the +coming fight, for it was now generally known that the attack was to be +made in a couple of days at latest. The next morning General Buller's +column started before daybreak, and were by nine o'clock encamped on the +open veldt three miles north of Chieveley; Barton's brigade having +already marched out to the site of a new camp, some five thousand yards +south of Colenso. Although well within reach of their guns, the Boers +made no effort to hinder the operation, or to shell the camp after it +was formed. It was evidently their policy to conceal their guns until +the last moment, and although a very heavy bombardment of their +positions was maintained all day by the naval guns, no reply whatever +was elicited, though through the glasses it could be seen that much +damage was being done to the entrenchments. + +"I don't like this silence," Chris said, as he and some of the others +were standing watching the hills in front of them. "It does not seem +natural when you are being pelted like that not to shy something back. I +am afraid it will be a terribly hot business when they do open fire +tomorrow." + +There had been a discussion that morning whether the four natives Chris +had engaged for his expedition should be taken on permanently, and they +unanimously agreed that they should be. It was quite possible that all +the colonial corps would at some time be called upon to act as infantry, +and it would be a good thing to have six men to look after the twenty- +five horses while they were away. Then, too, it would be very handy to +have a stretcher party of their own. On the question being put to them, +the four men had willingly agreed to follow the party whenever they went +into a fight, to take two stretchers with which they could at once carry +any who might be wounded back to camp. They were all strong fellows +belonging to fighting peoples, and would, the boys had no doubt, show as +much courage as the Indian bearers had displayed at Dundee and +Elandslaagte. In the evening Captain Brookfield sent for Chris. + +"The orders for to-morrow are out," he said, "as far as we are +concerned. A thousand mounted infantry and one battery are to move in +the direction of Hlangwane--that is the hill, you know, this side of the +river to the right of Colenso. We shall cover the right flank of the +general movement and endeavour to take up a position on the hill, where +the battery will pepper the Boers on the kopjes north of the bridge. Two +mounted troops of three and five hundred men will cover the right and +left flanks respectively and protect the baggage. Half my troop are to +accompany Dundonald, the other half will form a part of the force +guarding the left wing. Your party will be with this force. You have had +your share of fighting, and none of the others have yet had a chance." + +"Very well, sir, I shall not be sorry to be on this duty; for naturally +we shall have a good view of the whole fight, while if we were engaged +we should see nothing except what was going on close to us." + +"Yes, it will be something to see, Chris, and something to hear, for I +doubt whether there has been so heavy a fire as that which will be kept +up to-morrow, ever since war began. We have some twenty-three thousand +men, and the Boers more than as many, and what with magazine-guns, +machine-guns, and fast-firing cannon of all sizes, it will be an +inferno." + + + + +CHAPTER XII + +THE BATTLE OF COLENSO + + +By daybreak next morning the whole force was under arms. General +Hildyard in the centre was to attack the iron bridge at Colenso. General +Hart's Irish brigade was to march towards Bridle Drift, and after +crossing to move along the left bank of the river towards the kopjes +north of the iron bridge. General Barton was to move forward east of the +railway towards Hlangwane Hill, and to support General Hildyard, or the +Colonial troops moving against that hill as might appear necessary, +while General Lyttleton's brigade, half-way between those of Hildyard +and Hart, were to be prepared to render assistance to either as might be +required. One division of the artillery was to follow Lyttleton's +brigade. The six naval guns were to advance on his right. The sixth +brigade were to aid General Hart, and three batteries of Royal Artillery +to move east of the railway, under cover of the sixth brigade, to a +point from which they could prepare the way for Hildyard's brigade to +cross the bridge. + +The action began before six o'clock, the naval guns opening with lyddite +on the trenches on Grobler's Hill, and those between it and Fort Wylie. +No reply whatever was made by the Boers, and the troopers standing by +their horses' heads in readiness to mount should any party of Boers make +a raid on the camp, began to wonder whether the enemy had not retreated. +Hildyard's men advanced in open order close to the railway; the Queen's +own, with the West York in support, on the right of the railway; and the +Devons, with East Surrey behind them, on the left. They marched as +steadily and in as perfect alignment as if on parade, eight paces apart. +Hart's Irish brigade, far away to the left, were in close order. The +cavalry could be seen proceeding at a trot towards Hlangwane, General +Barton's brigade still bearing to the east; and Colonel Long and Colonel +Hunt with their batteries, without waiting for their protection, +galloped straight forward, and, taking up a position almost facing Fort +Wylie, a few hundred yards beyond the river, opened a heavy fire; the +six naval guns, which were drawn by bullocks, being still a considerable +distance behind them. + +Still the Boer guns remained silent. But at half past six their musketry +opened suddenly upon the Queen's Own, the Devons, and the guns, in one +continuous roar. It came not only from the entrenchments on the face of +the hill, but from trenches close down by the river, and from the houses +of Colenso, from some railway huts, and from the bushes that fringed the +south bank of the river, which had been believed to be wholly +unoccupied. Five minutes later their cannon joined in the roar, with +machine-guns, one-pounder Maxims, and the great Creusots and Krupps. And +yet through this storm of lead and iron our soldiers went on quietly and +steadily. The very ground round them was torn up by bullet and ball. +Many fell, but there was no flinching; while on their right, Long's +batteries, though swept by a hail of missiles from unseen foes, +maintained a continuous fire at Fort Wylie. + +"It is awful!" Peters exclaimed as he lowered his glasses. "I thought it +would be dreadful, but I never dreamt of anything like this. Look at the +bodies dotting the ground our men are passing over, and yet the others +go on as if it was a shower of rain through which they were passing. I +can't look at it any longer." "It is as bad for the artillery," Chris +said, with his glasses still riveted upon them. "I saw a lot of the +horses go down before they were unlimbered, and I can see the men are +falling fast. Surely they can never have been meant to go within five or +six hundred yards of magazine rifles. I thought everyone had agreed that +artillery could not live within range of breech-loaders. Why doesn't +Barton's brigade move down towards them, and try and keep down the fire? +How is Hart getting on?" + +But it was not easy to see this even with glasses. They had not become +engaged until a little later than the others, but as they approached the +river an equally terrible fire opened upon them. Being in comparatively +close order, they suffered more heavily than Hildyard had done. +Presently they came upon a spruit which they took to be the main river, +and under a tremendous fire from the Mausers and guns, dashed across it, +and swinging round their left made for the drift, sweeping before them a +number of Boers who had been hidden in the long grass. Trenches were +there line after line, but over these the four regiments--the Connaught +Rangers, the Border regiment, the Inniskilling and Dublin Fusiliers-- +dashed forward with such fury that the Boers did not stop to meet their +bayonets. By a quarter-past seven the enemy had been driven across the +Tugela. Without hesitation the Irish dashed into the river. Many fell +headlong, for along the bottom barbed wires had been stretched. Worse +still, it was found that instead of being two feet deep, as was +expected, it was eight feet; for the Boers had erected a dyke across the +river a little lower down, and had dammed the water back. + +Some swam across with their rifles and ammunition, but it was a feat +beyond all except the strongest swimmers, and after maintaining +themselves for some time they were forced to retire. The naval guns did +their best to assist them, and silenced some of the Boer cannon that +were pounding them, but they failed to draw the Boer fire upon +themselves. It was only in the centre that even partial success was +gained. Hildyard's men had reached but not captured Colenso bridge. In +spite of the tremendous fire, some of the soldiers tried to make their +way along it, but were recalled; for they were deprived of the support +of the artillery that should have covered their passage, had no hope of +Hart bringing his brigade round to clear the enemy out from the kloofs +on the opposite side, and but little of aid from Lyttleton, who had been +obliged to move farther to the left to lend assistance to Hart. Some of +the Scottish Fusiliers had joined them from Barton's brigade, but the +brigade itself was far away. + +Terrible as the fighting was at all points, it was the batteries down by +the river that most engaged the attention of the anxious spectators. +Desperate attempts were being made to get the guns back. Almost all the +horses had been killed, but the drivers of the teams of the ammunition +waggons, the few survivors of the officers, and several of the general's +staff dashed recklessly forward under a hail of fire. Horse and man went +over, but two of the guns were carried off. Fortunately, the naval +battery and the third field battery had not been taken so far forward, +and were withdrawn with comparatively little loss; and the ten guns +stood alone and deserted by the last of the party as it seemed. Then, to +the surprise of the watchers, one of them spoke out, for four of the men +who worked it had stood to their charge to the last. Again and again it +sent its shrapnel among the Boer trenches. One fell and then another, +but two remained. They continued to fire until the last round of reserve +ammunition was finished. Then those who were near enough to make out +their figures saw them take their stand, one on each side of the gun, at +attention, until both fell dead by the side of the piece they had served +so well. Even on the right, where success might really have been hoped +for, everything had gone badly. The dismounted Colonials had fought +their way gallantly up the slopes of the Hlangwane, and nearly reached +the crest. But they were not seconded by Lord Dundonald's cavalry; +Barton's brigade, which was charged with aiding them, were kept at a +distance, and the Colonials were at last forced to fall back. + +Great as was the loss at other points, the failure to capture this hill +was really the greatest misfortune of the day. From its position on the +south of the river, and in a loop, batteries erected on its summit would +have taken all the Boer defences on the lower slopes of the hills in +flank, and it would have covered the crossing of the river at Colenso. +Cut off by the river from the rest of the Boer position it could hardly +have been retaken, and its fire would have searched the valley up which +the roadway ran almost as far as Mount Bulwana. + +Renewed attempts were made for some time to carry off the guns, but +early in the afternoon the general saw that it was but a waste of life +to persevere further, and orders were despatched for the troops to +retire. It had been a day of misfortunes, and yet a day of glory, for +never had the fighting power of British troops been more splendidly +exhibited, never were greater deeds of individual daring performed; +never had troops supported with heroic indifference so terrible a fire. +Undoubtedly the English general had greatly underrated the fighting +powers of the Boers and the amount of artillery to which he was exposed. +Had he not done so, he would scarcely have distributed his force over so +wide a face, or attacked at three points nearly four miles apart, but +would have prepared for the grand assault by seizing Hlangwane and +firmly establishing some of his batteries there, even at the cost of two +or three days' labour, and only attempted to cross the river when the +movement would have been covered by their fire. + +The Boers were quick in discovering the importance of the hill, and +speedily covered its face with such entrenchments, that not until after +long weeks of effort and failure was an attack again attempted against +it; and the success of that attack opened the way to Ladysmith. But had +the general's orders been carried out at all points it would probably +have been captured. Hart's brigade was to have begun the attack, but +owing to the map with which he was furnished being defective, his troops +losing their way in the spruit, and their being led in far too close a +formation under the enemy's fire, its attempt failed; this being, +however, largely due to the astuteness of the Boers in damming back the +river and rendering the ford impracticable. The impetuosity of the +officers commanding two of the batteries of artillery, in pushing their +guns forward unattended by infantry as ordered, not only caused the loss +of ten guns and of nearly all the men who worked them, but deprived +Hildyard's column of the protection they would have had in crossing the +bridge, and rendered the undertaking impossible; while the failure of +Barton's brigade to give assistance either to Hildyard or to the +assailants of Hlangwane, contributed to the one failure, and entirely +brought about the other. + +General Buller and General Clery had been wherever the shots were flying +the thickest. Three of the former's staff, Captains Schofield and +Congreve, and Lieutenant Roberts, son of Lord Roberts, had ridden +forward as volunteers to try and get the guns off. Roberts was fatally +wounded, Congreve was wounded and taken prisoner, and Schofield alone +escaped unharmed with the two guns that were saved. + +The day had been almost more terrible for the troops who remained +unoccupied near the baggage than for those actually engaged in the +terrible light. The latter, animated by excitement and anger at their +inability to get at the foe, had scarce time to think of their danger, +and even laughed and joked in the midst of the hail of bullets, but the +watchers had nothing to distract them during the long hours. With their +glasses they could plainly see that no advance had been made at any +point. To them it seemed incredible that any could come back from that +storm of fire. From time to time they learned from wounded men brought +up by the bearers, who fearlessly went down into the thick of the fire +to do their duty, news of how matters were going on in the front. + +Gladly, had they received orders to do so, would they have dashed down +to try and carry off the guns. Many shed tears of rage as they heard how +the Irish strove in vain to cross the deep river, and how many were +drowned in their attempts to swim it. They expected, when in the +afternoon the troops came in, that they would see an utterly dispirited +body of men, and were surprised when the Irish, who were the first to +return to camp, marched along smoking their pipes and joking as if they +had returned from a day of triumph rather than of failure. They were +animated by a knowledge that they had done all that men could do, had +proved they were worthy successors of their countrymen who had won glory +in so many hard-fought fields, and that no shadow of reproach could fall +upon them for their share in the day's work. Although they had suffered +far more heavily than the other brigade, they returned more cheerfully. +And yet there was no depression anywhere evinced, although there was +anger, fierce anger, that they had not been able to get at the enemy, +and a grim determination that next time they met, things should go +differently. + +A good many prisoners had been lost. Parties had spread along among the +bushes that lined the river, and maintained a steady fire against the +Boer entrenchments facing them. Some of these had not heard the bugle +sounding the retire. When they were aware what was being done some had +left their shelter and rushed across the open ground to join the +columns, the majority being shot down as they did so. Others had waited +among the bushes, intending to try after nightfall; but as soon as we +fell back the Boers had again crossed the river and spread along its +banks, and had thus made prisoners those who were in hiding there or in +the little dongas. Among those so captured were fourteen of the Devons +and as many gunners, with Colonel Hunt, Colonel Bullock, Major +MacWalter, and Captains Goodwin, Vigors, and Congreve; the total loss in +killed, wounded, and prisoners amounted to about one thousand five +hundred, of whom nearly half belonged to the Irish brigade. That evening +the searchlight, which had been placed on a lofty hill visible from one +end of the high kopjes held by the garrison of Ladysmith, flashed the +news that the attack had failed, and that the garrison must be prepared +to hold out for some time yet. + +The news of the reverse created a tremendous sensation throughout Natal, +where it had been confidently anticipated that the army would brush +aside without difficulty the opposition of the Boers, relieve Ladysmith +and, advancing sweep the invaders out of the colony. In England, too, +the sensation was scarcely less pronounced, and for the first time the +gravity of the war in which we were engaged was recognized. Hitherto it +had been thought that fifty thousand men would suffice to bring it to a +successful conclusion; now it was perceived that at least double that +number would be required. The offers of the colonies to aid the mother +country with troops had hitherto been coldly received, but these were +now accepted thankfully, and although our military authorities would not +as yet recognize that the volunteers could be relied upon as a real +fighting force, there was a talk that some of the militia regiments +might be embodied, and a large number of reservists were at once +summoned back to the ranks. + +At the front matters went on as before. It was now known how it was that +the guns had advanced so far. Colonel Long had sent forward some of his +mounted men with two officers. The Boers allowed them to approach the +river bank without firing a shot. One of the scouts actually rode across +the bridge to the other side, and returning to the battery they reported +that there were no Boers about, and it was only after receiving this +message that Colonel Long took the guns forward to within six hundred +yards of the river, and twelve hundred of Fort Wylie. + +The wounded were all taken to Frere or Estcourt, where hospitals had +been prepared. Hart and Lyttleton's brigades were sent back to Frere, +and the camp at Chieveley was moved nearer to the station, both for +convenience of supply, and because the position now taken up was a more +defensible one, and was less exposed to the fire of the big Boer guns; +large numbers of transport animals and waggons were brought up country. +It was known that a newly-landed division under General Sir Charles +Warren was now coming up, one regiment, the Somersets, arrived in camp +two or three days after the battle, and the loss of the cannon was to +some extent retrieved by the arrival of a 50-lbs. howitzer battery. + +It was but dull work in camp. The more impetuous spirits were longing to +be employed in annoying the Boers by frequent surprises at night; but as +these could have achieved no permanent advantage, and must have been +attended with considerable loss of life, Sir Redvers Buller set his face +against any such attacks, and went steadily on with his preparations. As +troops came up anticipations of a certain success when the next forward +movement was made were generally entertained. Chris and his companions +passed the time pleasantly enough. Being old friends they had plenty to +talk about, and occasional scouting expeditions to the east gave them a +certain amount of employment. Not having been engaged in the attack on +Hlangwane, they did not participate in the soreness felt by the rest of +the colonials at their failure to capture the hill, owing to the want of +support from Lord Dundonald's cavalry or Barton's brigade. + +The chagrin felt at the mistake that had been made in not making this +the prime object of attack was general, for the Boers could be seen +working unceasingly at their entrenchments. They had not only made a +ford by throwing great quantities of rock and stones into the channel, +but had also built a bridge, so that the force on the hill could be +speedily reinforced to any extent, and what could have been effected on +the day of the attack by half a battalion of infantry would now be a +very serious undertaking even by a whole division. + +The lads were chatting one day over the chances of the next fight, most +of them taking a very sanguine view. + +"What do you say, Chris?" one of them said after the discussion had gone +on for some time. "You have not given us your opinion." + +"My opinion does not agree with yours," Chris replied. "After what I saw +the other day, I think the difficulties of fighting our way over those +mountains are so enormous that I doubt whether we shall ever do it." + +There was a chorus of dissent. + +"Well, we shall see," he said. "I hope that we shall do it just as much +as you do, but it is tremendous business. I have no doubt Sir Redvers +will go on trying, but I should not be surprised if at heart he has +doubts that it can be done. The Boers have more guns that we have, and +any number of those Maxims and Hotchkiss that keep up a stream of balls. +The Boers' trenches enable them to fire at us without showing anything +but a head, except when they stand up or have to move across the open. +If we drive them out of one position they have others to fall back upon. +It is not one natural fortress that we have to take, but a dozen of +them. They know every foot of the country they occupy, while we know +nothing but just what we can see at a distance." + +"Well, if Sir Redvers thought as you do, why should he go on hammering +at it?" + +"For several reasons, Peters. In the first place, if Ladysmith saw that +there was no chance of rescue it would at last give in; and in the +second place, if there was an end of all attempts to relieve the place +England would go wild with indignation; and in the third place, and by +far the most important, Sir Redvers knows that he is keeping from +twenty-five thousand to thirty thousand of the Boers inactive here, and +so relieving the pressure on our troops on the other side. We know +regiments are arriving from England at the Cape every day. When they get +strong enough to invade the Orange Free State and take Bloemfontein, and +march north, the Boers here will be hurrying away to defend their homes. +Of course the Free Staters will go first, but the Transvaalers will have +to follow. We hear that Methuen has been beaten at Magersfontein, and +that he has been brought to a stand-still within the sound of the guns +round Kimberley, just as we are here, and that the Boers have a very +strong position there also. So at present the advance is as much checked +there as it is here. Gatacre has had a misfortune too, so that we are +all in the same boat. I saw a Pietermaritzburg paper in the naval camp +just now; there are about twenty thousand men on the sea at the present +moment, besides those in the colony, and two more divisions are being +formed. So it is safe to come right in the long run. But at present, if +those twenty-five thousand Boers opposite to us were not there now, they +would be riding all over Cape Colony, and if Buller were not to keep on +hammering away here a good many of them would be off at once. They say +Ladysmith can hold out for another three months. By that time there +ought to be such a big force in the Orange State that the Boers won't +dare to stop here any longer, and no end of loss of life will be +avoided. + +"I never thought that you were a croaker before," Field said, "except +just before the last fight; but certainly things have gone very badly +lately. Three disasters in seven or eight days are a facer; but I cannot +think that we shall not succeed next time. When Warren's division is up +Buller will have over thirty thousand men with him, in spite of our +losses the other day, and we ought to be able to do it with that." + +"Well, we shall see, Field. I hope you are right." + +The news of Methuen's repulse and the terrible losses in the Highland +brigade, and of Gatacre's disaster, cast a greater gloom over Buller's +army than their own failure had done. The one topic of conversation +among the officers was, what would be the feeling in England, and +whether there would be any inclination to patch up another dishonourable +peace like that after Majuba. But the feeling wore off as day after day +the news came that the misfortunes had but raised the spirit and +determination of the people of Great Britain to carry the war through to +the bitter end; that recruiting was going on with extraordinary +rapidity; that fresh regiments had been ordered out; that Lord Roberts +had been appointed to the supreme command in South Africa, and that Lord +Kitchener was coming out as chief of his staff. The fact, too, that the +volunteers had been asked to send companies to the regiments to which +they were attached, that the City had undertaken to raise a strong +battalion at its own expense, that the Yeomanry were to furnish ten +thousand men, and that public, spirit had risen to fever heat, soon +showed that these apprehensions were without foundation, and that +Britain was still true to herself, and was showing the same indomitable +spirit that had carried her through many periods of national depression, +and brought her out triumphant at the end. + +Christmas passed cheerily; no gun was fired on either side, although the +Boers worked diligently at their trenches; and our men feasted as they +had not done since they landed at Durban. Bacon, milk, fresh bread, +beef, and a quart of beer were served out for each man, and on these men +and officers made a memorable meal; the latter producing the last +bottles of wine and spirits that had been specially sent up to them from +Maritzburg. And on that and the following day there were sports--lemon- +cutting, tent pegging, races for the cavalry; athletic sports, tugs-of- +war, mule and donkey races for the infantry. The drums and fifes played +national airs, and the sailors bore their full share in the fun. As time +went on the preparations for the next move advanced. None were more +pleased at the prospect of active work again than the Colonial +Volunteers, who had several times entreated to be allowed to get out and +drive back the bands of plundering Boers, who were still wasting the +farms and destroying the farmhouses and furniture of the loyalists. + +On the 27th a small party of Captain Brookfield's scouts had been sent +out to reconnoitre the windings and turnings of the Tugela to the east, +to ascertain as far as possible what the Boer positions were on that +side, and whether they had placed bodies of skirmishers on the south +side of the river as they did opposite Fort Wylie. Included in the +party, which was a hundred strong, was the Johannesburg section. When +well away from the camp they were broken up into small parties, the +better to escape the observation of the Boers on the Hlangwane and other +heights. The instructions given by their commander were that they should +take every advantage of ground to conceal their movements from the +enemy, but where the ground near the river was level and fit for +galloping they should dash across it, and, if not fired at, should skirt +along the banks, mark if there were any tracks by which horses or cattle +had at some time come down to the water, and observe if similar tracks +were to be seen on the opposite bank, as this would show that, though +possibly only in dry weather, the river was fordable there. Where the +ground was too broken and rock-covered to permit of horses passing +rapidly across it, they were to dismount and crawl down the river to +make their observations. + +Only a small portion of the troop had been engaged on this work, the +main body were to keep along on the hills, maintaining a vigilant watch +over the country to the south and east as well as that around them, as +many parties of marauding Boers were known to be still across the river. +Knowing the sharpness of the lads, Captain Brookfield had told off their +section to explore the river bank, a choice which excited no jealousy +among the rest, as these were hoping for a brush with some wandering +party of Boers, and the satisfaction of rescuing cattle and goods they +might be carrying off. His instructions to Chris were that he was to +detach two of his party at each mile, choosing points where they could +best make their way to the river unobserved. As he himself with the main +body would go up considerably farther, each pair, when they had searched +their section, were to ride a mile or so back from the river and fall in +with the main body on its return. + +Riding rapidly along, Chris carried out his instructions, until, when +some twelve miles from the camp, he remained with only Sankey with him. +The country they had passed was rolling, and from time to time he had +caught sight of small parties of Captain Brookfield's scouts. Arriving +at a spot where there was a slight depression running down towards the +river, he said, "We may as well follow it, Sankey. It will deepen into a +donga presently, no doubt, and we can leave our horses there and go on +on foot. It looks to me as if this had been used as a path. Of course it +may only have been made by cattle going down to the water, but it may +lead to a drift. If it is, we must be all the more careful, for it is +just at these points that the Boers are very likely to be on the look- +out." + +They rode for some distance and then dismounted, knee-haltered their +horses and moved forward cautiously. Chris still believed they were on a +track, but the heavy rains of the week before had sent the water rushing +down it in a torrent, which would have destroyed any marks there might +have been. When they could see the opening to the river in front of them +they climbed the side of the donga. All seemed quiet, and stopping and +taking advantage of the bushes, they crept forward to the edge of the +water. There was no sign of a break in the opposite bank. + +"There is no drift here," Chris said. "If there had been there would be +a pass cut or worn down on the other side. Now let us push on, but don't +show yourself more than you can help, any Boer lurking on the other side +could hardly miss us. A hundred and fifty yards, I should say, is about +the width." + +After walking some little distance along they suddenly came upon another +break in the bank. + +"There is a break opposite, Sankey. Ten to one this is a drift. The +question is, how deep is it? You can see the river is not as high as it +was by four feet, and I dare say that it will be lower yet if we get +another week of fine weather. It's very important to find out. I will +try to ford it; it's hardly likely there are any Boers so far down, but +have your rifle ready, and keep a sharp look-out on the opposite side." + +A minute later they went down the slope. "Keep back under the shelter of +these bushes as soon as I go in, Sankey." Then he stepped into the water +and waded out. In a few yards it was up to his waist; then it deepened +slowly. He was a third of the distance across when two rifles cracked +out from some bushes on the opposite bank. Chris felt a sudden smart +pain in his ear. He instantly threw himself down in the water, and +diving, made for the shore, allowing the stream to take him down. +Swimming as hard and as long as he could, he came for a moment to the +surface, turning on his back before he did so, and only raising his +mouth and nose above water. He took a long breath and then sank again, +swimming this time towards the shore. His breath lasted until he was in +water too shallow to swim farther, and, leaping to his feet, he dashed +up the bank and threw himself down. He heard two bullets hum close to +him, but the Boers had not been looking in his direction, and only +caught sight of him in time to take a snap shot. He crawled along +through the high, coarse grass, feeling very anxious as to what had +become of Sankey. He had heard the report of the Boer rifles, but there +came no reply from his friend, who would assuredly have been lying in +shelter in readiness to shoot as soon as he saw a flash on the opposite +bank. Could he have forgotten to take cover the instant he himself +entered the water, could he possibly have remained standing there +watching him? Two shots had been fired: one had certainly hit his ear; +had the other been aimed at Sankey? He crawled along until he came to +the point where he could see down on to the road. To his horror Sankey +was lying there on his back. + + + + +CHAPTER XIII + +PRISONERS + + +The exclamation that burst from Chris's lips as he saw Sankey on the +ground was answered by another from his friend. + +"Thank God that you are there, Chris. I have been in an awful state +about you. I saw you go down into the water just as I was bowled over. I +made sure that you were killed, and I was in a state, as you may +imagine, till I heard two more shots. That gave me a little hope; for as +you had not been killed in the first, you might have escaped the +others." + +"But what is the matter with you, Sankey. Where are you hit?" + +"I am hit in the arm. I can't tell much about it. I only know that I +went slap down; and there is certainly something the matter with my +shoulder. Like an idiot I did not take shelter as you told me, but I was +watching you so anxiously I never thought about it. If I had not been a +fool I should have jumped up and got under cover at once; but I fancy I +must have knocked my head as I fell. At any rate, I did not think about +moving till I heard those two shots." + +"It is just as well that you didn't," Chris said. "They could have put +half a dozen bullets in you with their Mausers before you had moved a +foot. The question is, what is to be done?" + +"Have you got your rifle, Chris?" + +"Yes, I stuck to that, and I expect it is all right; these cartridges +are quite water-tight. The question is how to get you out of their line +of sight." "The best plan will be for me to roll over and over," Sankey +said. "I expect it will hurt a bit, but that is no odds." + +"No, no; don't do that yet. Let us think if we can't contrive some plan +of attracting their attention." + +"Don't do anything foolish, Chris," Sankey said earnestly. "I would +rather jump up and make a run for it than that anything should happen to +you." + +"I will be careful, Sankey. The first thing to do is to find out whether +there are only two of these fellows or half a dozen. Where I am lying +now the ground is a foot lower than it is just at the edge of the bank. +I will put my cap on my rifle and raise it so as just to show." + +The instant he did so three or four rifles cracked and two bullets +passed through the cap. As it dropped a shout of triumph rose from the +Boers. He at once crawled forward, and as he did so five of them ran +down the bank and as many more stood up, believing that both the scouts +had been killed. + +Throwing the magazine into play Chris fired three shots in close +succession, and then rolled over two or three yards, half a dozen +bullets cutting the grass at the spot he had just left. Peering +cautiously out again he saw that the Boers had all disappeared except +two, one of whom lay apparently dead just at the edge of the water; the +other was sitting down, but was waving a white handkerchief. + +"I am not going to shoot you," Chris muttered, "though I know the +fellows with you would put a bullet at once into Sankey if they thought +that he was alive. Hullo, there!" he shouted in Dutch; "I will let you +carry off your wounded man and the dead one if you will let me carry off +my dead comrade." The answer was three bullets, but he had drawn back a +yard or two before he spoke and was in shelter. The thought of firing +again at the wounded man did not enter Chris's mind, and he crawled back +to the spot where he had before spoken to Sankey. The latter was looking +anxiously up. + +"Are you all right?" he asked. + +"Yes." + +"Well, I wish you would not do it," Sankey said angrily. "If you do I +will get up, and they can either pot me or take me prisoner." + +"Don't be an ass, Sankey. I am going on all right. I have shot two of +them; there are about a dozen of them over there, I should say. Now let +us talk reasonably. Of course, if I was sure they would not cross, I +would make off to where the horses are, ride out, and meet Brookfield +and the others as they come back. The orders were that we were to join +them in about an hour and a half, which would give them time to go seven +or eight miles farther, and for us to do our work thoroughly. But I am +afraid that if I went away the Boers would presently guess I had done +so, and would come across and carry you off. But though it would be no +joke for you to be taken prisoner to Pretoria, it would be a good deal +better than for you to have two or three more rifle bullets in your +body, which I am sure you would have were you to move. So we must risk +it. Anyhow, I will stop for another hour. There will be plenty of time +then for me to make off and meet the others." + +Chris crept forward again and watched the opportunity. Half an hour +later he saw what he thought was a head appear, and at once fired, +rolling over as before the instant he had pulled the trigger. Three or +four shots answered his own almost instantly and there was a laugh that +told him that they had practised the same trick that he had done, and +had only raised a hat to draw his shot. Again there was silence for some +time. Then he went back and told Sankey that he was about to start. + +"All right, Chris; I shall be very glad when you have gone. You will get +hit sooner or later if you go on firing, and I shall be a great deal +more comfortable when you are once off. I don't believe they will +venture across the drift; they know how straight you shoot." + +Chris crawled back for some distance, and then got down into the road. +He had scarcely done so when a shot rung out fifty yards away. His right +leg gave way and he fell, and with a shout of triumph two Boers ran up +to him. Chris did not attempt to move. The rifle had flown from his hand +as he fell, and lay some five or six yards away. + +"I surrender," he said when they ran up to him. + +"Well, rooinek," they exclaimed, "you are a brave young fellow to make a +fight alone against a dozen of us. It would have been wiser if you had +gone away when you were lucky enough to get up the bank without being +hit. What was the use of staying by your dead comrade?" + +"He is not dead," Chris said. "He is hit in the arm or shoulder, but he +knew if he moved he would be hit again to a certainty." + +"But where are you hurt?" + +"In the calf of my leg." + +"It is lucky for you," the Boer said, "that I stumbled just as I fired. +Now, get up and I will carry you across the drift." + +They helped him up, and the other assisted him on to his shoulders. The +man's clothes were wet. + +[Illustration: "WITH A SHOUT OF TRIUMPH THE TWO BOERS RAN DOWN."] + +"Did you swim the river?" Chris asked. + +"No, there is a drift a mile lower down. It is a bad one, but we managed +to get across. We knew that you were alone, and as you seemed determined +to remain here, we made sure of getting you." + +As they came near to Sankey, Chris called out, "You can get up, Sankey; +they have beaten us." + +"I am very glad to hear your voice," Sankey replied as he raised himself +into a sitting position. "When I heard that shot behind me I made sure +it was all up with you. Where are you hit?" + +"Only in my calf. Luckily this gentleman who is carrying me stumbled +just as he fired, and I got the ball there instead of through my head. +It serves me right for not having thought before that some of them might +cross somewhere else and take us in rear. Well, it can't be helped; it +might have been a good deal worse." + +The other Boer had picked up the two rifles. They now entered the river. +The stream in the middle was breast-high, and the Boer with the rifles +told Sankey to hold on to him, which he was glad to do, for the force of +the stream almost took him off his feet. The other Boers had now left +their hiding-places, and received them when they reached the opposite +bank. The one who seemed to be their leader said not unkindly, "You have +given us a great deal of trouble, young fellows, and killed one of our +comrades and badly wounded another." + +"If you had left us alone we should have been very glad to have let you +alone," Chris said. + +The Boers laughed at the light-heartedness of their prisoner, and then +examined their wounds. Chris had, as he said, been hit in the calf. The +ball had entered behind, and had come out close to the bone. Chris +believed that he could walk, but thought it best to affect not to be +able to do so. The wound had bled very little, and the two holes were no +larger than would be made by an ordinary slate-pencil. Sankey had been +hit just below the shoulder. The ball had in his case also gone right +through, and from the position of the two holes it was evident that it +must have passed through the bone. The Boers bandaged the wounds, and +told them to lie down under the shade of a bush, and then took their +places near the bank to watch the drift again. + +"I suppose we have a journey to Pretoria before us," Sankey said. "I +don't care so much about myself, because that is only the fortune of +war, but I am awfully sorry that you are taken, Chris, and all through +my beastly folly in not taking shelter as you told me." + +"Oh, we may just as well be together, Sankey. Besides, I don't mean to +go to Pretoria, I can assure you. I believe I could walk now if I tried; +but you may be sure I don't mean to try. I should advise you to avoid +making any movement with your arm; make them put it in a sling. When +they start with us, we had better be sent up with wounded prisoners +rather than with the others. They won't look so sharply after the +wounded, and it will be very hard if we cannot manage to slip away +somehow. I hope the others will find the horses all right, or that if +they don't the horses will find their own way back." + +"Oh, they are safe to find them," Sankey said confidently. "There will +be a hunt for us when it is found that we have not joined the others. +Anyhow, they will search to-morrow. I am quite sure that some of our +fellows will be out the first thing in the morning, and I dare say they +will take a couple of the natives with them. If they start at the point +where we turned off they will track the horses down that donga without +any difficulty, and even if they have strayed away they will soon have +them." + +"Yes, I suppose they will be all right," Chris agreed. "Of course we +have got the spare horses, but we should miss our own, and I think they +are as fond of us as we are of them." + +As the sun got low two of the Boers brought up four ponies which were +grazing some little distance from the river. They lifted Chris on to +one, and helped Sankey to mount another, and then taking their seats on +the other horses, rode off at a walk, and arrived an hour and a half +later at a camp in a hollow behind Fort Wylie. Here they were put into a +large tent, where some thirty wounded prisoners were lying. A German +surgeon at once examined and again bandaged their wounds. + +"You are neither of you hurt badly," he said in English. "A fortnight +and you will have little to complain of. These Mauser bullets make very +slight wounds, except when they hit a vital spot. You are a good deal +better off than most of your comrades here." + +As it was now dark they lay down at once, after taking a basin of +excellent soup. The German ambulance was scrupulously clean. The more +serious cases were put in beds, those less severely wounded lay on the +ground between them; for the number of wounded to be dealt with was very +large, and in the tents in which the Boers were treated were many +terribly mangled by fragments of shrapnel and lyddite shells. The boys +were some time before they went off to sleep, for their wounds smarted a +good deal. However, they presently fell off, and it was broad daylight +when they woke. Chris lay where he was, while Sankey got up and went +round the tent. The men all belonged to either the Devon or the Queen's +Own regiment. Most of them were awake, and all asked anxiously for news +from Chieveley, and looked disappointed when they heard that it was +likely to be some time before a fresh attempt was made to relieve +Ladysmith. + +"They are all right there. Of course they were disappointed that we did +not get in, but they have provisions enough to last for some time yet." + +"The Boers don't seem to think so," one of the men said. "As they were +carrying us in here I heard one of them say that they had certainly got +Ladysmith now, for the provisions there were pretty nearly exhausted, +and in a few days they would have to surrender. If they did not, they +meant to carry it by assault." + +"I don't think they will do that," Sankey said confidently. + +"Not they," the soldier replied scornfully. "They will find that it is a +very different thing meeting our chaps in the open to what it is +squatting in a trench, and blazing away without giving us as much as a +sight of them. It is a beastly cowardly way of fighting, I calls it. I +was not hit till just the end of the day, and I had been blazing away +from six in the morning, and I never caught sight of one of them. I +should not have minded being hit if I could have bowled two or three of +them over first." + +After breakfast the surgeon said to the two lads: "You will be sent off +in half an hour; all the slight cases are to go on. There may be another +battle any day, and room must be made for a fresh batch of wounded." + +"Very well, sir," Chris replied, "as we have to go, it makes no +difference to us whether it is to-day or next week." + +"You are colonists, I suppose, as you have not the name of any regiment +on your shoulder-straps?" + +"Yes, sir; we belong to Johannesburg. I know your face. You are Dr. +Muller, are you not?" + +"Yes; I do not recognize you." + +"I am the son of Mr. King, sir; and my comrade is the son of Dr. +Sankey." + +"I know them both," the doctor said. "I am not one of those who think +that the Uitlanders have no grievances, and I am not here by my own +choice. But I was commandeered, and had no option in the matter. Well, I +am sorry for you lads. For though I believe that in the long run your +people will certainly win, I think it will be a good many months before +they are in Pretoria. They fight splendidly. I watched the battle until +the wounded began to come in, and the way those regiments by the railway +advanced under a fire that seemed as if nothing could live for a minute, +was marvellous. But brave as they are, they will never force their way +through these hills. They will never get to Ladysmith. Well, perhaps we +shall meet some day in Johannesburg again." + +"Yes, doctor. I suppose we shall be taken up in waggons?" + +"You will, for a time, certainly. But I don't know about your friend." + +"Oh, do order him to be sent up with me, doctor, that is, if it will not +hurt him too much. You see, his wound is really more serious than mine, +as the ball has gone through the bone." + +"Yes. I have a good many cases of that sort, but all seem to be healing +rapidly. However, I will strain a point and give instructions that he is +to be among those who must go in the waggons." + +"Thank you, sir," both boys said; and Sankey added: "We are great +friends, sir. Though I don't care for myself, it would be a great +comfort to us to be together, and my wound really hurts me a good deal." + +"I have no doubt it does," the surgeon said. "You can't expect a ball to +pass through muscle and bone without causing pain." + +Half an hour later some natives came into the tent, and under the +directions of the surgeon carried out Chris and three others whose +wounds were all comparatively slight, and placed them in a waggon which +already contained eight other wounded prisoners. Sankey, with his arm in +a sling, walked out and was lifted into the waggon, into which he could +indeed scarcely have climbed without assistance. Seven more were +collected at other tents, and the waggons then moved off and joined a +long line that were waiting on the road. Some more presently came up, +and when the number was complete, the native drivers cracked their whips +with reports like pistols, and the oxen got into motion. Some twenty +mounted Boers kept by the side of the waggons. They followed the road +until within four or five miles of Ladysmith, then turned off, crossed +the Klip river, and came to a spot where a hospital camp had been +erected; here they halted for the night. + +The wounded were provided with soup and bread, and such as were able to +walk were allowed to get out and stroll about. The surgeon who +accompanied the train and the doctor in charge of the hospital attended +to all the serious cases, and these were carried into the tent for the +night thus making room for the others to lie at length in the waggons. +Only three of these contained British wounded, the others were all +occupied by Boers. Chris and Sankey excited the admiration of the +wounded soldiers by conversing with the Boers and the natives in their +own languages. Most of the Boers, indeed, could speak English perfectly, +but did not now condescend to use it. Some even refused to speak in +Dutch to the lads, as their dislike to the colonists who had taken up +arms against them was even more bitter than that which they felt for the +soldiers. + +For six days they travelled on, at the end of that time Chris felt sure +that he could walk without difficulty. He had, at very considerable pain +to himself, each night undone his bandage, and had with his finger +scratched at the two tiny wounds until they were red and inflamed, so +that on the two occasions on which they were examined by the doctor, +they appeared to be making but little progress towards healing. The +inflammation was, however, only on the surface, and after several +furtive trials, Chris declared that he was ready for a start. A move was +generally made before daylight, in order that a considerable portion of +the day's journey should be got over before the heat became very great. + +"Are you quite sure, Chris?" + +"I am as sure as anybody can be who has not actually tried it. I may be +a little stiff at the start, but I believe that once off, I shall be +right for eight or ten miles; and after the first day, ought to be able +to do double that." + +They had been travelling at the rate of about twelve miles a day, and +halted that night near Newcastle. Chris heard from the guards that they +would only go as far as Volksrust, and there be put in a train. The +reason why this had not been done before was that the railway was fully +occupied in taking down ammunition and stores, and that no carriages or +trucks were available. The watch at night was always of the slightest +kind. The Boers had no thought whatever that any of the wounded would +try to escape. Two were posted at the leading waggon, which contained +stores and medical comforts that might, if unguarded, be looted by the +native drivers. The rest either slept wrapped up in their blankets, or +in any empty houses that might be near. + +At nine o'clock the boys told the others in the waggon that they were +going to escape. They had before informed them of their intention to do +so, somewhere along the road, and had taken down the names and regiments +of all of them, with a note as to their condition, and the addresses of +their friends. These they had promised to give to the commanding +officers if they got safely back. They had filled their pockets with +bread, all those in the waggon having contributed a portion of their +ration that evening. After a hearty shake of the hand all round, and +many low-muttered good wishes, they stepped out at the rear of the +waggon, with their boots in their hands. It was a light night, and the +figures of the two men on sentry over the store waggon could just be +made out. There was no thought of any regular sentry duty, no marching +up and down among the Boers; the two men had simply sat down together to +smoke their pipes and chat until their turn came to lie down. The lads +therefore struck off on the opposite side of the waggon, and making +their way with great caution to avoid running against any of the Boers, +they were soon far enough away to be able to put on their boots and walk +erect. + +"How does your leg feel, Chris?" "It feels stiffer than I expected, +certainly, but I have no doubt it will soon wear off. We must take it +quietly till it warms up a bit." + +Gradually the feeling of stiffness passed off, and going at a steady but +quiet pace they made their way along the road, to which they had +returned after they had gone far enough to be sure that they were beyond +the hearing of the Boers and Kaffirs. From time to time they stopped to +listen for the tread of horses, which could have been heard a long way +in the still night air, but they were neither met nor overtaken. After +walking for five hours they came upon a stream that, as they knew, +crossed the line at Ingagone station and ran into the Buffalo. They had +gone but ten miles, and decided to leave the road here, follow the +stream up half a mile, and then lie up. Chris admitted that he could not +go much farther, and as they would not cross another stream for some +distance they could not, even putting his wound aside, do better than +stop here. Sankey was equally contented to rest, for his arm, which he +still carried in a sling, was aching badly. + +"It does not feel sore," he said, "or inflamed, or anything of that +sort; it just aches as if I had got rheumatism in it. I dare say I shall +have that for some time; I have heard my father say that injuries to the +bones were often felt that way for years after they were apparently +well, the pain coming on with changes of weather. However, it is no +great odds." + +Neither wanted anything to eat, but had taken long draughts when they +first struck the stream, and as soon as they found a snug spot among +some bushes a short distance from the water they lay down and were soon +asleep. They remained quiet all the day, only going out once after a +careful look round to get a drink of water. Starting again as soon as +darkness closed in they walked on, with occasional rests, until within a +few miles of Glencoe, having followed the line of the railway, where +they had no chance whatever of meeting anyone. Here they again halted at +a stream. They had agreed that they would on the following night cross +the line between Glencoe and Dundee, and take the southern road by which +the British force retired after the battle there. By that route they +would be altogether out of the line of Boers coming from Utrecht or +Vryheid towards the Boer camps round Ladysmith. Their stock of food was, +however, now running very short, and they ate their last crust before +starting that evening. This they did earlier than usual, as they were +determined if possible to get some bread at Dundee. They knew that a few +of the residents had remained there, and probably there would not be +many Boers about, for as Dundee lay off the direct line from Ladysmith +to the north there would be no reason for their stopping there. Sankey +had insisted on undertaking this business alone. + +"It is of no use your talking, Chris," he said positively; "I can run +and you can't. I may not be able to run quite as fast as I could; but I +don't suppose this arm will make much difference, and anyhow, I could +swing it for a bit, and I would match myself against any Boer on foot. +We will cross the line, as we agreed, about a mile from Dundee. When we +strike the southern road you can sit down close to it, and I will go +in." + +"I don't like it," Chris said, "but I see that it would be the best +thing. I wish we had our farmer's suits with us, then I should not fear +at all." + +"I don't think that makes much odds, Chris, lots of the Boers have taken +to clothes of very much the same colour; really, the only noticeable +thing about us is our caps. If I come upon a loyalist I will see if I +can get a couple of hats for us, either of straw or felt would be all +right. Well, don't worry yourself; it will be a rum thing if I can't +bring you out something for breakfast and dinner to-morrow." + +"Don't forget a little bit extra for supper to-night, Sankey," Chris +laughed; "that crust went a very short distance, and I feel game for at +least a good-sized loaf." + +Although he said good-bye to his friend cheerfully, Chris felt more +down-hearted than he had done since he had said farewell to his mother +more than two months before, as Sankey disappeared in the darkness, +leaving him sitting among some bushes close to the road. His last words +had been, "It is somewhere about nine o'clock now; if I am not back by +twelve don't wait any longer. But don't worry about me; if I am caught, +I have no doubt sooner or later I shall give them the slip again, but I +don't think there is any real occasion for you to bother. Unless by some +unlucky fluke, I am safe to get through all right." Then with a wave of +his hand he started confidently along the road. + +He met no one until he was close to the town. The first thing he had +determined upon was to get hold of a hat somehow. The houses were +scattered irregularly about in the outskirts of the town; but very few +lights were to be seen in the windows. + +"Of course they have all been plundered," he said to himself; "but if I +only had a light I have no doubt I should be able to find an old hat +somewhere among the rubbish, but in the dark there is no chance +whatever." Presently he saw a light in a window in a detached house of +some size. He made his way noiselessly up and looked in. A party of five +or six Boers were sitting smoking round a table. "The place has not been +sacked," he said to himself; "therefore there is no doubt the owner is a +traitor. It is a beastly custom these Boers have of wearing their hats +indoors as well as out, still there are almost sure to be some spare +ones in the hall. A Boer out on the veldt would not be likely to possess +more than the hat he wears, but a fellow living in such a house as this +would be safe to have a variety for different sorts of weather. At any +rate I must try." + +He took off his boots, and then stole up to the front door and turned +the handle noiselessly. As he expected, no light was burning there, but +the door of the room in which the men were sitting was not quite closed, +and after he had stood still for a minute, his eyes, accustomed to the +greater darkness outside, took in his surroundings. To his great delight +he saw that four or five hats of different shapes and materials were +hanging there, and a heap of long warm coats were thrown together on a +bench. Looking round still more closely he saw five or six rifles in the +corner by the door, and to these were hanging as many bandoliers. He +first took down two felt hats of different sizes, and picked out two of +the coats; then, with great care to avoid any noise, he took two rifles +with their bandoliers from the corner and crept out through the door, +which he closed behind him carefully; for if they found it open the +Boers might look round and discover that some of their goods were +missing, whereas any one of them coming casually out, even with a light, +would not be likely to notice it. He put on one of the bandoliers, then +a coat, and then slung one of the rifles behind him; then, after putting +on his boots he went out with the other articles and hid them inside the +gate of an evidently deserted house a hundred yards from the other. He +felt sure that even when the loss was discovered there would be no great +search made for the thief. It would be supposed that some passing Kaffir +had come in and stolen the things, and they would consider that, until +the following morning, it would be useless to look for him. Feeling now +perfectly confident that he could pass unsuspected, he entered the +principal street. Here there were a good many Boers about, but none paid +the slightest attention to him. Presently he came to a store that was +still open. The owner was of course Dutch. He had been a pronounced +loyalist when Sankey was last in Dundee, but had evidently thought it +prudent to change sides when the British left. Sankey had been in the +shop twice with Willesden, and had found the man very civil, and, as he +thought, an honest fellow, but with so much at stake he dared not trust +him now. Food he must have, that was certain, but if he had to obtain it +by threats, he must do it at one of the outlying houses. It would be +dangerous anyhow, for, though he could frighten a man into giving him +what he required, he could not prevent him from giving the alarm +afterwards. While he was looking on a mounted Boer stopped at the shop +door. He dismounted at once, and lifted a large bundle from his saddle. + +"Look here!" he said to the shopkeeper. "I have just come into the town, +having ridden up from near Greytown. I picked up some loot at a house +that had been deserted. Here are twenty bottles of wine and a lot of +tea--I don't know how much. There was a chest half-full, and I emptied +it into a cloth. What will you give me for them? I am riding home to +Volksrust. I want three loaves and a couple of bottles of dop [Footnote: +The common country spirit.], and the rest in money." The bargaining +lasted for some minutes, the storekeeper saying that the wine was of no +use to him, for no Boer ever spent money on wine; the tea of course was +worth money, but he had now a large stock on hand, and could give but +little for it. However, the bargain was at last struck. The Boer brought +out the bread and two bottles of spirits and placed them in his saddle- +bag, then he went back into the shop to get the money. The moment he +entered Sankey moved quietly up to the other side of his horse, +transferred the bottles of spirits to his own pocket, and then, +thrusting the loaves under his coat, crossed the street, and turned down +a lane some twenty yards farther on. He had gone but a few steps when he +heard a loud exclamation followed by a torrent of Dutch oaths. He stood +up for a moment in a doorway, and heard the sound of heavy feet running +along the street he had left, with loud shouts to stop a thief who had +robbed him. The instant that he had passed Sankey walked on again, and +in five minutes was in the outskirts of the town. He made his way to the +place where he had hidden the other things, and taking them up, walked +briskly on until he came to the bushes where his friend was anxiously +expecting him. As he uttered his name Chris sprang out. + +"I had not even begun to expect you back, Sankey. How have you done? I +see that you have got on another hat and a coat." + +"That is only a part of it. I have got three loaves and two bottles of +dop, and a coat and a hat for you, and a rifle and ammunition, as well +as clothes for myself and the gun that you see over my shoulder." + +"But how on earth did you do it, Sankey?" + +"Honestly, my dear Chris, perfectly honestly. The rifles and clothes +were fairly spoils of war, the loaves and spirits were stolen from a +thief, which I consider to be a good action; but let us go on, I will +tell you about it as we walk. Here is your bandolier, slip that on +first; there is your coat and hat. Now I will put the sling of the rifle +over your shoulder. There you are, complete, a Boer of the first water! +I will carry the bottles and the bread. Now, let's be going on." + +Then he told Chris how he had obtained his spoil, and they both had a +hearty laugh over the thought of the enraged Dutchman rushing down the +street shouting for the eatables of which he had been bereaved. + +"It was splendidly managed, Sankey. I shall have to appoint you as +caterer instead of Willesden. He pays honestly for all he wants for the +mess, but I see that if we entrust the charge to you, we shall not have +to draw for a farthing upon our treasure chest. And how is your arm +feeling?" + +"I have almost forgotten that I have an arm," Sankey said. "I suppose +the excitement of the thing drove out the rheumatics." + +"We might have some supper," Chris suggested. + +"No, no, we must wait till we can get water. I can't take dop neat." + +"But how are you going to mix it when you do get water?" "I had not +thought of that, Chris," Sankey said in a tone of disgust. "Well, I +suppose we shall be reduced to taking a mouthful of this poison, and +then a long drink of water to dilute it. We shall not have very far to +go, because, if you remember, we crossed a little stream three or four +miles after we rode out from Dundee. I am as hungry as a hunter, but it +would destroy all the pleasure of the banquet if we had to munch dry +bread with nothing to wash it down." After walking two miles farther +they came upon the stream and going fifty yards up it, so as to run no +risk of being disturbed, they sat down and enjoyed a hearty meal. + + + + +CHAPTER XIV + +SPION KOP + + +"It is almost a pity that you did not commandeer two ponies and saddles +while you were about it," Chris laughed, as they set off again feeling +all the better for their meal. "We only want that to complete our +outfit." + +"You should have mentioned it before I started, Chris. There is no +saying what I might not have done; and really, without joking, a pony is +one of the easiest things going to steal when there are Boers about. +They always leave them standing just where they dismount, and will be in +a store or a drinking-place for an hour at a time without attending to +them." + +"It is not the difficulty, but the risk; for even if a thief gets off +with a pony, he is almost sure to be hunted down. It is regarded as a +sort of offence against the community, and a man, whether a native or a +mean white, would get a very short shrift if he were caught on a stolen +horse." + +"Yes, I know. Still, for all that, if I could come upon a saddled pony, +and there was a chance of getting off with it, I should take it without +hesitation as a fair spoil of war." + +"Yes, so should I, for the betting would be very strongly against our +running across its owner; and in the next place, it would greatly +increase our chance of getting safely through. It is the fact of our +being on foot that will attract attention. We could walk about a camp +full of Boers without anyone noticing it, but to walk into the camp +would seem so extraordinary, that we should be questioned at once. A +Boer travelling across the country on foot would be a sight hitherto +unknown." + +"There I agree with you; and I do think that when we get to Helpmakaar, +which we can do to-morrow evening if we make a good long march to-night, +we had better see if we can't appropriate a couple of ponies. We can +walk boldly into the place, and no one would notice we were new-comers. +There are sure to be ponies standing about, and it will be hard if we +cannot bag a couple. Then we can ride by the road south from there to +Greytown, and after crossing the Tugela, strike off by the place where +we had the fight near Umbala mountain, which would be a good landmark +for us, and from there follow our old line back to Estcourt. It would be +rather shorter to go through Weenen, but there may be Boers about, and +the few miles we should save would not be worth the risk." + +They made a long journey that night, slept within seven or eight miles +of Helpmakaar, and started late in the afternoon. When near the town +they left the main road, passed through some fields, and came into the +place that way, as had they entered by the road they were likely to be +questioned. Once in the little town, they walked about at their ease. It +did not seem that there were any great number of Boers there, but the +town was well within the district held by them, and such loyalists as +remained were sure to be keeping as much as possible without their +houses. In front of the principal inn were nearly a score of Boer +ponies, but the lads considered it would be altogether too risky to +attempt to take a couple of these, as their owners might issue out while +they were doing it; however, they stood watching. For some time there +was a sound of singing and merriment within, and for a quarter of an +hour no one came out. + +"If we had taken a couple of ponies at first," Sankey said savagely, "we +might have been two miles away by this time." + +"Yes; I don't know that it is too late now. Wait till they strike up +another song with a chorus, none of them are likely to leave the room +while that is going on, and it will drown the sound of hoofs." + +There were few people about in the streets; and even had anyone passed +as they were mounting, he could not tell that they were not the +legitimate owners. + +"If anyone should come out," Chris said, "don't try to ride away. We +should have the whole lot after us in a minute, and it is not likely we +should have got hold of the fastest ponies. Besides, they would shoot us +before we got far. So if anyone does come out and raises an alarm, jump +off at once and run round the nearest corner, and then into the first +garden we come to. We should be in one before they could come out, mount +their ponies, and give chase. Once among the gardens we should be safe. +If the man who comes out does not shout we would pay no attention to +him, but ride away quietly. If the ponies don't happen to belong to him +or some friend of his, he would not be likely to interfere, for he would +suppose that we were two of the party who had left the place without his +noticing them. But if he gives a shout, jump off at once, and rush round +the corner of the nearest house." + +They waited for a minute or two, and then two Boers came out, mounted a +couple of the ponies, and rode quietly down the street. At that moment +another song was struck up. "That is lucky. If anyone comes out and sees +us mounting he will take us for the two men who have just ridden off." +Then they strolled leisurely across the street, took the reins of two of +the ponies, sprang into the saddles, and started at a walk, which, +twenty yards farther, was quickened into a trot. The two men had +fortunately gone in the other direction. Once fairly beyond the town, +they quickened their pace. "Now we are Boers all over," Chris said +exultantly; "but there is one thing, Sankey, we must be careful not to +go near any solitary farmhouse. There must still be some loyal men left +in these parts, and if we fell in with a small party of them the +temptation to pay off what they have suffered might be irresistible." + +"Yes, Chris; but they certainly would not shoot unless certain of +bringing us both down, for if one escaped, he would return with a party +strong enough to wipe them out altogether. However, we need not trouble +about that for the present, though no doubt it will be well to be +careful when we are once across the Tugela." + +"Well, we shall be there long before morning; it is not more than seven- +or eight-and-twenty miles." + +They rode fast, for it was possible that when the loss of the ponies was +discovered someone who might have noticed them go down the street might +set the Boers on the track, and in that case they would certainly be +hotly pursued. The ponies, however, turned out to be good animals, and +as the lads were at least a couple of stones lighter than the average +Boer, they could not be overtaken unless some of the ponies happened to +be a good deal better than these. + +After riding at full speed for eight or nine miles, they broke into a +walk, stopping every few minutes to listen. They knew that they would be +able to hear the sound of pursuit at least a mile away, and as their +ponies would start fresh again, they were able to take things quietly. +So sometimes cantering sometimes walking, they reached the river at +about one o'clock in the morning. On the opposite bank stood the little +village of Tugela Ferry. Here there was a drift, and there was no +occasion to use the ferry-boat except when the river was swollen by +rain. It now reached only just up to the ponies' bellies; they therefore +crossed without the least difficulty, and after passing through the +village, left the road, and struck off across the country to the south- +west. When four or five miles away they halted at a donga, and leading +the ponies down, turned them loose to feed, ate their supper, and were +soon asleep. + +It was no longer necessary to travel by night, and at eight o'clock they +started again. They kept a sharp look-out from every eminence, and once +or twice saw parties of mounted men in the distance and made detours to +avoid them. So far as they were aware, however, they were not observed. +The distance to be ridden from their last halting-place was about +thirty-five miles, and at one o'clock they were within five miles of +Estcourt. On an eminence about a mile in front of them they saw a +solitary horseman. + +"That is evidently one of our scouts," Chris said. "I dare say there is +a party of them somewhere behind him. If I am not mistaken I can see two +or three heads against the sky-line--they are either heads or stones. We +should know more about it if the Boers hadn't bagged our glasses when +they took us." + +Two or three minutes later Sankey said, "Those little black spots have +gone, so they were heads. I dare say they are wondering who we are, and +put us down either as Boers or as loyal farmers, though there cannot be +many of them left in this district." + +Presently from behind the foot of the hill six horsemen dashed out. The +lads had already taken the precaution of taking off their hats and +putting on forage-caps again. + +"It is always better to avoid accidents," Chris said. "It would have +been awkward if they had begun to shoot before waiting to ask questions, +especially as we could not shoot back. They are Colonials; one can see +that by their looped-up hats, which are a good deal more becoming than +those hideous khaki helmets of our men." + +The horsemen had unslung their guns, but seeing that the strangers had +their rifles still slung behind them with apparently no intention of +firing, they dropped into a canter until they met the lads. + +"Who are you?" the leader asked. "Do you surrender?" + +"We will surrender if you want us to," Chris said; "though why we should +do so I don't know. We belong to the Maritzburg Scouts, and were taken +prisoners, being both wounded, eight or nine days ago; and, as you see, +we have got away." + +"I dare say it is all right," the officer said; "but at any rate we will +ride with you to Estcourt." + +"We shall be glad of your company, though I don't suppose we shall be +identified until we get to Chieveley. Will you please tell us what has +taken place since we left?" + +"That, I think had better be deferred," the officer said dryly. "We +don't tell our news to strangers." + +"Quite right, sir." + +"It is evident that you are not Dutch," the officer went on; but there +is more than one renegade Englishman fighting among the Boers, and +except for your caps you certainly look as if you belonged to the other +side rather than to ours." + +"Yes, they are Boer coats, Boer ponies, and Boer guns," Chris said. "We +have taken the liberty of borrowing them as they borrowed our guns and +field-glasses. Whether they borrowed our horses we shall not know till +we get back. You see," he went on, opening his coat, "we still have our +uniforms underneath. Who is at Estcourt now? Ah, by the way, we are sure +to find some officers in the hospital who know us." + +The officer by this time began to feel that the account Chris had given +him of himself was correct, and when they arrived at Estcourt it was +rather as a matter of form than anything else that he accompanied him to +the hospital. Upon enquiry Chris found that among the wounded there was +one of the naval officers he had travelled with from Durban. Upon the +surgeon in charge being told that he wished to see him, he was allowed +to enter with the officer. The wounded man at once recognized him. + +"Ah, King," he said, "I am glad to see you again. Have you brought me +down a message from Captain Jones or any of our fellows?" + +"No; I am very sorry to find you here, Devereux, but I am glad to see +you are getting better. I have really come in order that you might +satisfy this gentleman, who has taken me prisoner, that I am King of the +Maritzburg Scouts." + +"There is no doubt about that. Why, where have you been to be taken +prisoner?" + +"Oh, it was a fair capture. I was with one of my section caught while +out scouting, and have got away in Boer attire, and as we were riding in +we met this officer's party some five miles out, and not unnaturally +they took us for the real thing instead of masqueraders." + +[Illustration: "PRESENTLY FROM BEHIND THE FOOT OF THE HILL SIX HORSEMEN +DASHED OUT."] + +"I can assure you that King is all right," the sailor said. "He came up +in the train with three of his party from Durban." + +"Thank you," the officer said with a smile. "I am perfectly satisfied, +and was nearly so before I came in here. Well, I wish you good-day, sir, +and hope we may meet again," and shaking hands with Chris he left the +tent. + +Chris remained chatting for a few minutes more with the sailor. + +"I suppose there is no great chance of getting a bed here?" he said, as +he rose to go. "We have had two pretty long days' ride, and I don't care +about going on to Chieveley." + +"Not a chance in the world, I should think." + +"Well, it does not matter much. We have been sleeping in the open for +the past five nights, and once more will make no difference. We are just +back in time, Sankey," he said when he joined his friend outside. +"Devereux tells me that there is a big movement going on, and that a +severe fight is expected in a day or two. He hears that the baggage +train has been moving to Springfield, so that it will be somewhere over +in that direction; and I suppose we are going to move round to Acton +Homes and force our way into Ladysmith through Dewdrop. You know, they +say that it is comparatively flat that way." + +They got rid of their long coats and fastened them to their saddles; +then led their ponies to the station, and leaving them outside entered. +An enterprising store-keeper had opened a refreshment stall for the +benefit of the troops passing through, or officers coming down from the +front to look after stores or to visit friends in hospital. Chris had +explained their position to Devereux, and the latter had said: "Then I +suppose they have eased you of all your money?" + +"Yes; they did not leave us a penny." + +"There is my purse with my watch in that little pocket over my bed," he +said. "You must let me lend you a sovereign till I see you again." And +Chris had thankfully taken the money. + +They now had what to them was a gorgeous feast; some soup, cold ham, and +a bottle of wine. They gave what little remains they had of bread to the +ponies, and then led them a quarter of a mile out of the town and camped +out with them there, the Boer coats coming in very useful. The next +morning they started at daybreak, and arrived at their camp at Chieveley +just as their friends were sitting down to breakfast. They were received +with a shout of welcome, and a torrent of questions was poured upon +them. + +"I will leave Sankey to tell you all about it," Chris said. "I must go +and report myself to Brookfield and get our names struck off the list of +missing. I shall not be five minutes away." + +The captain received Chris as heartily, though not so noisily, as his +comrades had done. + +"We have been very anxious about you," he said, after the first +greeting. "When we came back to the point where you left us, and did not +find you there, we thought there might be some mistake, and that you had +ridden on. We picked up all the others, but were not uneasy until we got +into camp, and found that you did not return. Then two of your friends +took fresh horses and rode out again, taking two of your blacks with +them. The blacks found the place where you had left us, and following +your tracks down came on your horses. Then they went on till they saw +the river in front of them. The blacks traced your footsteps along near +the bank till they came to a spot where there was evidently a drift, as +a road was cut down to the water on both sides. They then crawled along +till they could look down into the road. They were some time away, and +returned with the news that they had seen below them on the road a patch +of blood and the mark of a body in the mud, another step they said had +gone down to the water, and had not come back. Crawling along by the +edge of the bank they found some empty cartridges. They said whoever had +been up there had crawled once or twice to the edge above the sunken +road where the other was lying, and that he had then gone back from the +river and afterwards down into the road. A little farther there seemed +to have been a fall, and then two men with big feet came to the spot, +and, they asserted, carried the one who had fallen there down to the +other; but they could not see what had happened then, for it was evident +that the Boers were in force on the other side of the river, and they +dared not go down farther to examine the tracks. Enough had been seen, +however, to show that you must both have been wounded. It was pretty +certain that you had not been killed, for if so the Boers would not have +troubled to carry your bodies across the drift. Now, Chris, let us hear +your story." + +"If you don't mind, Captain Brookfield," Chris said with a smile, "I +will put off telling it for another half-hour. The fact is, breakfast is +ready, and I have only had one square meal since I went away, and that +was yesterday at Estcourt." + +"Go, by all means," the captain laughed. "I breakfasted half an hour +before you came in, and forgot that it was possible that you had not +done so." It was a full half-hour before Chris returned, and when he did +so he left Sankey still telling the story of their adventures, which had +made very little progress, as he had declared that he could not enjoy +his breakfast if he was obliged to keep on talking all the time. When +Chris, on his part, had told the story to Captain Brookfield, the latter +said: + +"I can't say that I am altogether surprised to see you back, though I +certainly did not expect you for a long time, for I felt sure that if +you and Sankey were not seriously wounded you would manage to give them +the slip before you got to Pretoria; and I thought we should hear the +first news of you at Durban, for it would be shorter and easier for you +to make your way down again to Lorenzo Marques than to follow this +line." + +"We should certainly have gone that way if we had not escaped until we +were near Pretoria, but it was a great deal easier to slip away from the +waggons than it would have been if we had been once put into the train. +I hope, sir, we have not been returned as missing, for it will have +frightened our mothers terribly if we have been." + +"No; I thought that there was no occasion to give your names until you +had been away for a month. If you were not heard of by that time, I +should consider it certain that you were dead or at Pretoria. I knew +that, as you say, it would be a terrible shock to your mothers if they +were to see your names among the missing; while it could do no harm to +anyone if I kept it back for a month, and put you down as missing the +first time after the corps were engaged. Well, you are just back in time +for a big fight, though we are not likely to take any part in it. It is +supposed to be a secret as to the precise position, but orders have been +privately circulated this morning. Dundonald with the regular cavalry, +the Natal Horse, and the South African Light Horse went on four days +ago, with one or two other colonial corps, and occupied Springfield, and +the baggage train followed them; and after occupying the place, instead +of waiting for infantry to come up, he moved on to a river. Some of his +men, with extraordinary pluck, swam across and managed to bring the +ferry-boat over under a very heavy fire. Then a number of them crossed, +scattered the Boers like chaff, and took possession of a rough hill +called Swartz Kop, and held it till support came up. It was a capitally +managed affair, and one cannot but regret that the same care was not +shown at Hlangwane. We are to go on this afternoon, but as we are not in +Dundonald's brigade I expect that our duty will be, as it was in the +last fight, to guard the baggage." + +"But what will Dundonald's brigade do?" + +"The general opinion is, that they will push round to Acton Homes. I am +not sure that the whole force is not going that way. It would be a grand +thing if it could be done; but I doubt whether the train could carry +enough stores, for it would be a long way round, and we should probably +have to fight two or three times at least, and it might take us five or +six days." + +"Then most of the infantry have gone on already?" + +"Yes, Hart's and Hildyard's brigades have marched straight from Frere. +By the way, did you hear of the Boer attack on Ladysmith on the night of +the 6th?" + +"No; that was the night we were at Glencoe. On our way up we did hear +some very heavy firing. At least, we were not certain that it was +firing, and rather thought it was a distant thunder-storm." + +"The firing began at two o'clock in the morning," Captain Brookfield +said, "and was so heavy that everyone turned out. It lasted four hours, +and there was no doubt that the Boers were making a determined attack. +Everyone wondered that we did not at once make a diversion. When the day +broke it could be seen that numbers of mounted Boers were hurrying off +from their camps among the hills towards Ladysmith, but it was not until +two in the afternoon that five battalions of infantry marched down +towards Colenso, and the naval guns opened in earnest on their lines. It +had the effect of bringing the Boers scurrying down again to their +trenches. Our fellows marched in open order and worked their way nearly +down to Colenso, which was more strongly garrisoned than it had been at +the time of our last attack. No doubt they had seen us preparing to +advance, and strongly reinforced the garrison. Our guns were taken a +long way down, and at six o'clock their trenches were bombarded; then it +came on to rain, and the Boers ceased to fire, and at seven o'clock our +men turned into camp. The firing in Ladysmith had ceased some time +before that." + +"And what had taken place there?" Chris asked anxiously, "for I know the +place has not fallen or we should have heard of it." + +"No, they beat the Boers off splendidly. However, they had hard work to +do it, for the heliograph flashed a signal at about nine o'clock in the +morning to say that they had so far beaten off the enemy, but were much +pressed. We heard the next day that this had indeed been the case. +Caesar's Camp had been taken and retaken several times--by our men at +the point of the bayonet, by the Boers, by rushing up in overwhelming +numbers. It is said that we have twelve hundred casualties, and the +Boers at least fifteen hundred, of whom a large number were bayoneted. +They say the loss fell chiefly upon the Free Staters, who were put in +the front by the Transvaal people. They fought pluckily, and several of +their commanders were among the killed. I should think that they would +hardly try it again. A native got through two days afterwards with a +despatch. We have not heard what it contained, but we fancy from what +has leaked out that our defences were very weak." + +"We ought to take a lesson from the Boers," Chris said. "I saw something +of their trenches as we went up the railway valley, and they are +wonderful." + +"Yes, we must do the Boers the justice to say that they are not afraid +of hard work. Ever since they first came here they have been at work +everywhere every day in the week, including Sundays. Of course, as we +are not standing on the defensive, there is no occasion for us to +construct works to the same extent; but I cannot myself understand why +we do not throw up batteries for our guns, pushing forward zigzags every +night, and advancing the batteries until we can plant all our naval and +field guns within a hundred yards of Colenso, when we should be able to +smash their entrenchments in no time, and effectually cover an advance +across the bridge or one of the drifts. When I was in the army it was +always said that the next war would be fought with the spade as much as +with the rifle, but so far we have seen nothing whatever of the spade, +except just by the guns. We were also taught that strong positions held +by steady troops armed with magazine guns and supported by good +artillery were absolutely impregnable against direct attack. I grant +that Dundee and Elandslaagte, and Belmont and Enslin on the other side, +seemed to contradict that idea, but our experience here is all the other +way; and if we keep on knocking our heads against those hills I suppose +the axiom is likely to be finally confirmed." + +"Then you don't think that we are going to fight our way into Ladysmith, +Captain Brookfield?" + +"Not direct into Ladysmith. Possibly we may work our way round; but +after what we saw of the fire from their position, trench above trench, +and miles upon miles in length, my own conviction is, that allowing to +the utmost for the gallantry and devotion of our men, we shall never win +our way across those hills." + +"Then we move off at two o'clock, sir?" + +"Yes, fresh batches of waggons are going on, and we are to escort them, +and if we reach Springfield by to-morrow night we may think ourselves +lucky, for some of the officers who went with the first lot have come +back, and say that the roads are simply awful--there are dongas to be +passed where the waggons sink up to their axles--and that at one point +ninety oxen were fastened to a single waggon and could not pull it out +from a hole in which it was sunk, and there it would be now if one of +the Woolwich traction engines hadn't got hold of it and drawn it out. +They are doing splendid work, and if the War Office authorities can but +take a lesson to heart, the next war we go into we shall have five +hundred of them and not a single transport animal. They would cost +money, no doubt, but they would eat nothing and drink nothing; they +would only require to be oiled and cleaned occasionally to keep them in +order, and when they were wanted they would do the work without our +having to hunt the world over for transport animals. They would save +their cost in one war; there would be a thousand drivers and stokers +instead of twenty thousand camp followers; it would not matter whether +the country was burnt up dry or deep in grass, they would drag their +fuel with them; and would save the artillery horses by dragging the guns +till they were in the neighbourhood of an enemy. It might not look so +pretty or picturesque as the present system, but it would be enormously +more useful, and in the long run vastly more economical. I should like +to see Kitchener put at the War Office with authority to sweep it out; +Hercules in the Augean stable would be nothing to it." + +Chris laughed at the earnestness and vehemence with which the commander +spoke. + +He went on. "I am an old army man, and have been as staunch a believer +in army traditions as any man, but I tell you fairly that I am disgusted +at the amount of routine work, delay, and, if I may use the word, +priggism, that I see going on. I am not surprised that the Colonials to +a man are convinced that they would manage matters infinitely better if +they were left to themselves. They would harass the Boers night and day, +sweep their plundering parties out of the land, make a circuit no matter +how far into Zululand, and come down behind and cut the line of railway, +and blow up the bridges, and worry them out of the colony. I don't say +they would succeed, but I am sure they would try, and I believe firmly +that five thousand mounted Colonials fighting in their own way would +relieve Ladysmith and clear Natal sooner than we with thirty thousand +shall do. I am not saying that they would succeed in a Continental war, +though they would certainly harass and bother any regular force four +times their own strength. To succeed they would require guns and a +greater degree of discipline than they have got, but such a force would +be absolutely invaluable as an assistant to a regular army. Don't repeat +what I say, Chris; there is a good deal of soreness of feeling on both +sides already, and I don't want any utterance of mine to add to it. +Still, I can assure you it has been a relief to me to let the steam +off." + +At the appointed hour the Maritzburg Scouts and another Colonial corps +started with a train of two hundred waggons, and with immense exertion +made eight miles before it became dark. The men were more often on foot +than in their saddles, sometimes roping their horses to the sides of the +waggons to aid the oxen, sometimes putting their shoulders to the +wheels, or working with a score of others with railway sleepers that had +been brought for the purpose, to lever the axles out of deep holes into +which the wheels had sunk. + +"I don't think I ever knew what it was to be really dirty before," Field +said, as they finally dismounted and prepared to camp. "I thought I did +know something about mud, but I can see that I did not. I feel that I am +a sort of animated pie, and could be cooked comfortably in an oven. If +we could but get a big fire and stand round it, our crust might peel +off; and I really don't see any other way. There is one advantage in it, +and that is that we shall be able to skirmish, if necessary, across +either a sandy or muddy country, without the possibility of our being +made out more than fifty yards away by the keenest-sighted Boer. What do +you propose, Captain Chris? If there were running water near, the course +would be clear. We would lie down by turns, and be rolled over and over, +and thumped with stones, and rubbed with anything that came handy till +we were in a state of comparative cleanliness." + +"Why running water?" Chris asked. "Why not a pond?" "A pond!" Field +said, contemptuously. "Why, sir, before our section alone was washed, +the water of anything short of a lake would be solid." + +There was a general burst of laughter. + +"Well, Field, you do us almost as much good as a wash," Peters said. +"Anyhow, we are better off than the others. We have got our tents and +our spirit-lamp, and can have our tea with some degree of comfort, which +is more than the others will be able to do. Now, as we have not running +water, I think we might as well scrape as much of this mud off as we +can." + +"I would almost rather remain as we are," Field said. "Hitherto I have +felt rather proud of our appearance. As we only got our uniforms when we +came up here, and have always had our tents to sleep in, we looked a +great deal cleaner than the average. Now we shall be conspicuous for our +dirtiness." + +"In spite of what Field says, I will adopt your suggestion, Peters. We +had better help the Kaffirs to get up our tents first," Chris said, +"then we can do the scraping while they are getting our supper ready. It +is very lucky that we had the water-skins filled before starting. We +should hardly taste the tea if it had been made from water from any of +these spruits." + +The tents were erected, and then jack-knives were taken out; and giving +mutual aid to each other, they succeeded in removing at least the main +portion of the mud. That done, they sat down to supper. Fortunately, the +rain that had come down steadily the greater portion of the day had now +ceased, and with a tin of cocoa and milk, and some fried ham and +biscuits, they made an excellent meal. Their less fortunate comrades +brought their kettles, which were boiled for them one after another, +until all who had waited up in hopes of their turn coming had been +served. As they carried tea and their ration bread, they were able to +make a fairly comfortable meal, instead of going supperless to bed, +which they would otherwise have done, as few would have cared after +their hard work to go out into the veldt to gather soaked sticks, which +they would hardly have been able to light had they found them. A small +ration of spirits and water was given to each of the five natives, and +then the lads crept into their tents feeling that after all, things +might have been much worse. + + + + +CHAPTER XV + +SPION KOP + + +The country immediately round Springfield was level and well cultivated, +with pretty farmhouses and orchards scattered about. Some little +distance to the west rose two hills, Swartz Kop, which had been occupied +by the mounted infantry, and Spearman's Hill, named from a farm near its +base. Here General Buller had established his head-quarters. Spearman's +Hill, which was generally called Mount Alice, was a very important +position, and here the naval guns were placed, their fire commanding the +greater portion of the hills on the other side of the Tugela, and also +Potgieter's Drift, where it was intended the passage of the river should +be made. Swartz Kop was a less important position, though it also +dominated a wide extent of country; but as ridges on the other side +covered some important points from its fire, Mount Alice was selected as +the position for the naval battery, and also for the signallers, as from +here a direct communication could be kept up by heliograph and flash- +light with one of the hills held by the defenders of Ladysmith. + +[Illustration: THE NAVAL GUNS ON MOUNT ALICE] + +It was late on the 16th when the convoy which the Maritzburg Scouts were +escorting arrived at Springfield. All day they had heard the boom of +artillery and the rattle of machine-guns and musketry along the line of +hills on the other side of the Tugela and from the heights of Mount +Alice, and groaned in spirit as they laboured at their work of assisting +the waggons, that they were thus employed when hard fighting was going +on within eight miles of them. + +At half-past two that day Lyttleton's brigade had moved forward along +the foot of Mount Alice to force the passage of the river at Potgieter's +drift. As soon as the Boers caught sight of them, they could be seen +galloping forward to take their places in the trenches. + +A thunder-storm that burst and a torrent of rain screened the movements +of the advancing troops from view for some time, and enabled them to +near the river without having to pass through any shell fire from the +Boer batteries on the hilltops. Between Mount Alice and the river the +brigade passed across meadows and ploughed fields. They reached the +ferry, but the boat was stuck fast, and an hour was lost at this point +before a party of sailors and colonial troops accustomed to such work +came forward to the aid of the Engineers, and speedily got it into +working order. But in the meantime the Scottish Rifles and the Rifle +Brigade had moved along the banks to the drift. Although usually almost +dry, the water was now coming down it breast-deep. Two gallant fellows +went across, and when they found the line of shallow water they returned +and guided their comrades over. The rush of the water was so great that +many would have been swept away; but, joining hands, they crossed in a +line, and although this was broken several times, it was always +reformed, and not many lives were lost. + +As soon as some of the troops had passed, they lined the bank until the +two battalions were over, and then advanced over some low hills, +clearing out a few Boers who occupied some advanced trenches. By six +o'clock the ferry-boat began to carry the main body across, taking over +half a company at a time; but it was not until half-past three in the +morning that the horses, waggons, the guns of the brigade, and a +howitzer battery were on the northern bank, and the whole brigade +established on a ridge a mile beyond the river. + +The Maritzburg Scouts were delighted at receiving orders on the morning +after their arrival at Springfield that they were to move forward at +once and encamp close to Spearman's Farm, and to furnish orderlies for +carrying messages for the general. They started at once, and after an +hour's fast riding arrived at the point assigned to them. + +Twenty men and an officer were at once sent to the farmhouse. They took +with them three tents which they had brought in the regimental waggon, +and erected these some fifty yards from the house; the rest of the troop +established their camp at a point indicated by a staff officer a quarter +of a mile away. It had been two o'clock in the morning before the convoy +had reached Springfield, and horses and men were alike tired out; and as +soon as breakfast had been prepared and eaten most of the troopers +turned in to sleep. Chris and half a dozen of his party, however, +obtained leave from Captain Brookfield to ascend Mount Alice and see +what was going on. From half-past five a tremendous fire had been kept +up on the Boer positions. The naval guns were distributing their heavy +lyddite shells among the entrenchments distant from three to six miles, +and occasionally throwing up a missile on to the summit of the lofty +hill known as Spion Kop away to the left front. Not less steadily or +effectively the howitzer battery was pounding the Boer position. + +At eight o'clock the lads reached the top of Mount Alice, and watched +with intense interest the picturesque and exciting scene. Here they were +far better able than they had been when at Chieveley to see the general +aspect of the country. On the right from Grobler's Kloof hill after +hill, separated apparently by shallow depressions, rose, and from the +higher points occasional flashes of fire burst out as the guns tried +their range against those on Mount Alice, whose heights, however, they +failed to reach. Spion Kop stood out steep and threatening, its summit +being some hundred feet higher than that of Mount Alice. They could now +see that it was not, as it had appeared from the distance, an isolated +and almost conical hill, but was, in fact, connected with hills farther +to the left by a ridge of which it was the termination. + +Immediately behind it was a deep valley, and the ascent from this side +was to some extent commanded by the guns on Mount Alice and Swartz Kop. +Between Spion Kop and the river there was a flat belt of country, and it +was along this that Lord Dundonald had ridden with his brigade of +cavalry to Acton Homes, where he was still stationed. The point of +greatest interest, however, was at Trichardt's Drift, lying six miles +west of Mount Alice. From their look-out they could make out the +division under the command of Sir Charles Warren advancing to the ford. +As far as they could see, no serious opposition was being offered; they +could, however, in the intervals of silence of the guns, hear a dropping +musketry fire in that direction, and a few rounds of shot from Warren's +field-guns, but it was evident that only a small party of the enemy +could be disputing the passage. + +Peters, who was intently watching what was going on through his glasses, +said: "They are at work at two points on the river. I think they are +building bridges." + +The naval guns dropped a few shells among the farm buildings and +orchards facing the spot where the troops were gathered, as a hint to +the Boers that it was well within their range, and that they had best +abstain from interfering with what was going on. In an hour from the +time the troops reached the bank two bridges had been thrown across the +river, and the passage began. By ten o'clock the whole were across, the +firing soon after ceased, and Warren's troops bivouacked quietly. It was +all over for the day, and the lads returned to their camp. The next day +passed quietly, except that in the afternoon the Boer entrenchments near +Spion Kop and Brakfontein, a hill facing the position occupied by +Lyttleton's brigade, were pounded by the naval guns and howitzers. A +message was heliographed from Ladysmith that two thousand Boers were +seen moving towards Acton Homes, and as the occupation of that village +was of no value until the infantry arrived there, the cavalry were +recalled to a position where they could protect Warren's left flank from +attack. + +On the 19th, Warren pushed forward a portion of his force with a view to +driving back the Boers' right and gaining the main road leading through +Dewdrop to Ladysmith, while Woodgate's brigade watched Spion Kop. +Fighting went on all day, the British forcing the enemy back step by +step. On the 20th it began early and continued the whole day. Every inch +of the ground was contested stubbornly by the Boers, but the Irish +Brigade, who were in the hottest position, pressed them back fiercely +with sudden rushes, and, had the rest of the division kept up with their +advance, might have cleared the way through the enemy's centre. But the +cannonade to which the advancing troops were exposed was terrible. +Maxims and Nordenfeldts, the heavy cannon, and the field-pieces captured +from us a month before, hurled shot and shell incessantly among them, +while the rattle of the Boer rifles was continuous. Still, fair progress +was made, and with less loss than might have been expected in such +strife. Two officers only were killed, Captain Hensley of the Dublin +Fusiliers, and Major Childe, who was a most popular officer. He had a +presentiment that he would fall, and actually asked a friend the evening +before to have a tablet placed over his grave with the inscription, "Is +it well with the child? It is well." + +At three o'clock the fighting slackened, and a heavy thunderstorm seemed +to be the signal for firing to cease. Later Sir Charles Warren summoned +all the officers commanding corps, and pointed out that there was not +sufficient food remaining to allow of the wide circuit by Acton Homes to +be carried out, and gave his opinion that now they had won so much +ground, it was better to continue to advance by the shorter line on +which they were pushing, but that in order to do this it was necessary +that Spion Kop, whose fire would take them in the rear, should be +captured. This was unanimously agreed to, and General Warren then saw +the commander-in-chief, and obtained his consent to the change of plans. +It was not, however, considered necessary to take Spion Kop until the +troops had farther advanced. All Sunday, fighting was continued as +before, but the progress made was slower, as the Boers were largely +reinforced and fresh guns brought up. + +The 22nd was comparatively quiet. The situation was not improving. Five +miles of rough ground had been won in as many days' fighting, but the +force was becoming lengthened out and the line weaker. Lyttleton's force +had to guard the line from Potgieter's Drift to Warren's right against +any attempt of the Boers to cut the lines of communication. Woodgate was +similarly employed in keeping the line from Trichardt's Drift to +Warren's left, and it became increasingly evident that not much further +progress could be made until the left of the advance was protected by +the establishment of guns on the great hill. It was then, on the 23rd, +decided that Woodgate's brigade should assault Spion Hop that night. It +was known that it was not strongly held. + +Starting at six o'clock, the column made its way slowly and with vast +difficulty up the ascent. This was everywhere rugged and rocky, and in +many places so precipitous that men had to be pushed or pulled up by +their comrades. + +Colonel Thorneycroft led the way with a few men, finding out the spots +at which an ascent was practicable, and scouting on either side to +discover if Boers were hidden; behind him followed Woodgate leading his +men. He was in bad health and quite unfit for such a climb, but in spite +of remonstrances he had insisted upon going, although he was obliged to +be assisted at the more difficult places. The distance was not more than +six miles, but it was not until nearly ten hours after starting that the +summit was gained. The hilltop was enveloped in mist, and they were +unseen until the Lancashire Fusiliers, who were leading, were within +fifty yards of the top. Then a Boer challenged them, and directly fired +his rifle. Almost instantly a dozen of his comrades joined him, and +bringing their magazines into play opened a fierce fusillade. But the +aim was hurried, they could scarce see their foes, and the Lancashire +men, cheering loudly, rushed up to the crest without loss. + +The Boers did not await their arrival; only one of them was bayoneted +before he turned to fly, and but two or three were overtaken by the +eager soldiers. As soon as the Boers had gone, the troops set to work to +construct breastworks to hold the spot they had gained against any +attempts of the Boers to recapture. The ground was too rocky for +digging, and the stones that were scattered thickly about were used for +the purpose; but long before the breastwork could be completed a +dropping fire was opened by the enemy. The morning was gray and misty, +and the clouds hung heavily on the hilltop. As these cleared off slowly, +it could be seen that the position was less favourable than it had +seemed, for the flat crest extended some distance beyond the point they +had entrenched, and from the rocks and low ridges a hot fire broke out. +Before the mist cleared off, the Boers had crept up in considerable +force, and were, it was evident, preparing to retake the position that +had been wrested from them. + +By six o'clock the scattered fire had grown into a continuous roar, the +Boers occupying not only the nek itself, but the flanks of the hill. +Several times our men made rushes to endeavour to clear off the foe, but +these proved too costly, and they were now lying or kneeling behind the +unfinished barricade. In a very short time the clouds had lifted +sufficiently for the Boer artillery to discover the exact position, and +from the hills on three sides a terrible fire of shot and shell, from +cannon great and small and machine-guns, rained upon them. Again and +again parties of men started to their feet and dashed forward to drive +the hidden Boers facing them from their hiding-places. Sometimes they +succeeded for a time, but their numbers thinned so fast that the +survivors were forced to fall back again. To add to the horror of the +situation, the shot from our own guns also fell among the defenders, the +officers commanding the batteries not having been informed of the +intention to occupy the hill, and knowing nothing of the situation. +Scores of men were killed or wounded, but the position was held +unflinchingly. + +At ten o'clock General Woodgate was mortally wounded by the fragment of +a shell that struck him in the eye, and Colonel Crofton took the +command. He at once flashed a message to General Warren, stating that +Woodgate was killed, and that reinforcements must be sent at once; +General Coke was therefore ordered to take the Middlesex and Dorset +regiments, and assume the command. Immediately afterwards Warren +received an order from General Buller to appoint Lieutenant-colonel +Thorneycroft, who was colonel of a colonial force, to take the command. +It was now hoped that all was well there. Unfortunately, neither Buller +nor Warren was able to give his undivided attention to the struggle on +the mountain, for Lyttleton's brigade had advanced before daybreak +against the eastern slopes of the hills running north from Spion Kop. +They advanced briskly, their Maxims clearing out the Boers, from whose +fire they suffered but little; but they sustained some loss from the +shell fire from Mount Alice, the sailors having been as uninformed of +the advance the brigade were to make as they were of the capture of +Spion Kop. The Scottish Rifles and the 3rd King's Royal Rifles pushed on +rapidly and gained the spur farthest north. Had there been guns on Spion +Kop the object of the movement would have been attained, and the advance +by direct road on Ladysmith have become a possibility; but no guns had +reached the summit, and the troops there were so far from being able to +render assistance that they were with difficulty maintaining their +desperate resistance. As the two rifle regiments were therefore exposed +to a concentrated fire from the Boer batteries, and were without +support, they were directed to withdraw, but the order had to be +repeated three times before it was obeyed. The fire slackened at this +point to some extent in the afternoon, no farther advance being +attempted, but it raged as hotly as ever on the summit of Spion Kop. + +As neither General Buller nor Warren had come up to see the state of +things on the all-important position of Spion Kop, General Coke went +down in the evening to explain the situation. He stated that unless the +artillery could silence the enemy's guns the troops could not support +another day's shelling. In the evening two naval twelve-pounders, the R. +A. mountain battery, and one thousand two hundred men as reliefs, +started to ascend the hill and to strengthen the entrenchments. On the +way up they met Colonel Thorneycroft and the rest of the force coming +down, that officer, who had displayed splendid gallantry throughout the +day, having decided on his own responsibility that the position could +not be longer held. Strangely enough, the news of the retirement was not +communicated to General Buller, who, after reporting in his despatches +written next morning that Spion Kop was firmly held, was riding to the +front when he for the first time learned the news. Altogether it was a +day of strange blunders, redeemed only by the splendid bravery of the +troops engaged. The news came as a heavy blow to the army, but it was +supposed that a fresh attempt would be made to capture the position by +ascending the northern spurs that had been carried and held for a time +by the two rifle battalions. But while soldiers think only of the +chances of battle, and burn to engage the enemy, a feeling only +accentuated by previous failures, generals in command have to take other +matters into consideration. They may feel that they may conquer in the +next fight, but what is to follow? In this case the chances of success +would be smaller than before, the loss more serious, for the Boers from +all parts had united to oppose us. Many of the cannon had been brought +over from the positions from which Ladysmith was bombarded. The +advantage of surprise gained by the long march from Chieveley had been +lost; more serious still was it that a large proportion of the +provisions, brought at the cost of so much labour and exhaustion of the +transport animals, was consumed, and what remained would be insufficient +had fresh battles to be fought to capture the positions, one behind +another, held by the Boers. + +General Buller was the last man to retire as long as there was a hope of +success. He knew that not only at home, but all over the civilized +world, men were anxiously awaiting the news of his second attempt to +relieve Ladysmith, and it must have been hard indeed for him to have to +acknowledge a second reverse; but in spite of this he sternly determined +to fall back. The movement was admirably executed; every horse, waggon, +gun, and soldier was taken safely across the Tugela without hindrance by +the Boers, a fact that showed how deeply they had been impressed with +the valour of our soldiers. Sullenly and angrily the troops marched +away. Had they had their will they would have hurled themselves against +the Boer entrenchments until the last man had fallen. To them the +necessities of the situation were as nothing; to retreat seemed an +acknowledgment that they had been beaten, a feeling that is seldom +entertained by British soldiers. Their losses had been heavy, but there +were still enough of them, they thought, for the work they had to do, +and it was with a deep feeling of unmerited humiliation that they +received the order to retire. + +The feeling, however, was not of long endurance, for two days later, +when they had settled down in camp near the Tugela and round Spearman's +Farm, the general rode through the lines, congratulating the troops on +the valour they had displayed, and promising them that ere long they +would be in Ladysmith. + +"I shall be heartily glad when we are there," Chris said when he heard +what the general had promised, "not only for the sake of the town, but +for our own. We are really doing no good here. It is hateful to look on +when other fellows are fighting so desperately. If it were not that the +orders were strict against the mounted Colonial corps going out over the +country, to clear the scattered Boers out, we might be doing useful +service; and as soon as Ladysmith is relieved--that is to say, if we can +hold out till we get there--I should certainly vote that we come back +here instead of staying with the army, and go on again on our own +account." + +"I quite agree with you," Carmichael said. "Still, it is something to +have seen two big fights." + +"Yes," Brown grumbled, "but if we tell anybody that we were there, +naturally the first question will be, 'What part did you take in it', +and we shall have to own that we took no part at all, and only looked on +at a distance at the other fellows fighting. I call it sickening." + +"Well, never mind, Brown," Chris said; "after all, during this business, +we have killed twice our own number of Boers at the least, and if +everyone had done as much the Boers would be pretty well extinct." + +"Yes, there is certainly something in that," Brown admitted, "but if we +had been allowed to scout on our own account it would be hard if we had +not killed twice as many more by this time." + +"We certainly might have done so, but you must remember, also, that a +great many of us might have been killed too. One cannot always expect to +have the luck we had in those two fights; and, I am sure, we should +bitterly regret gaps being made in our number." + +"That we should," Harris said warmly. "We were all good friends before, +but nothing to what we are now after living so long together, roughing +it and sharing each others' dangers. For my part I would rather go +without any more fighting than that any of us should go down." + +"I agree with you thoroughly, Harris," Chris said. "As most of us are +likely to remain out here for life, we shall often meet, and I do hope +that when we talk of these times we shan't have our pleasure marred by +having to say how we miss so and so, and so and so. I should be sorry +even to lose one of our blacks. They have stuck to their work well, and +are always cheerful and willing in the worst of weather and under the +most miserable conditions. I should really be very sorry if any of them +were killed." + +It needed but a day or two for the troops to recover their cheerfulness. +It was certain that they would soon be launched against the enemy again, +and it was known that General Buller would himself command. The ground +was now more known than it was before, the plans could he better laid, +and all looked forward confidently to the next engagement. + +No thanks were due to the weather for the renewed spirits of the men. It +rained almost unceasingly. The flat ground on which the troops were +encamped was a sea of mud. There was one good effect in this: there was +water in all the spruits, and the men were able to indulge in a wash-up +of their clothes and an occasional bath; and although they had to put +their clothes on wet, they were scarcely more damp than when they took +them off. There was other work to be done. Two naval guns, a mountain +battery, and some large cannon were with great labour got up on the top +of Swartz Kop. + +The lads had given up the two tents allotted to them to let the rest of +the men have more room, and they now felt the full benefit of their +little shelter tents. The allowance throughout the rest of the camp was +sixteen men to a tent. On coming in and out, as the men were muddy up to +the knees, it was impossible to keep these even tolerably clean, and the +discomfort of so many men crowded together and obliged to live, eat, and +sleep in such confined quarters was very great indeed. + +The lads on the other hand, suffered from none of these inconveniences, +and except that they could not stand up, and could only sit upright in +the middle of the tent, they were perfectly comfortable. The tents were +about seven feet wide on the ground, and as much long. Their natives had +cut and brought in bundles of grass, which made them soft beds, one on +each side of the tent. A blanket was stretched on each bed, another +doubled lay over it. It was a strict rule that everyone should take off +his boots on entering his tent, and leave them just inside the entrance. +They had purchased at the sale of the effects of some of the officers +killed in action some more blankets and rugs, and these were thrown over +the entrance to the front of the tents at night, and made them perfectly +warm and comfortable. A trench some eighteen inches deep was dug round +each tent, and this kept the floor fairly dry. + +Some blankets had been given to the Kaffirs, who constructed a little +shelter, in which they squatted by day and slept at night, and in which +cooking operations were carried on. The lads had no occasion to feel +dull, for they now knew many officers in the line regiments, and among +the Colonial troops, as well as the naval brigade; and "Brookfield's +boys", as they were generally called, were always welcome, and it was +seldom that more than half of them dined in their own camp. Chris could +always have been an absentee, for the sailors had told to each other the +story of his attempt to blow up the bridge at Komati-poort, and he +received any number of invitations. But he by no means liked to have to +retell the story, and generally made some excuse or other for remaining +in camp. + +Another battery of artillery arrived on the 31st of January, and on the +3rd of February there were sports in the camp of the South African Light +Horse, and a camp-fire sing-song afterwards. The men were all now in +high spirits, for it was certain that in a day or two another attack +would be made. On Sunday, February 4th, it was known that the move would +commence the next day. + +General Buller's plan was to make a strong feint against Brakfontein, +the highest hill of the ridge connected with the Spion Kop range, while +the real attack was to be delivered against an isolated hill named Vaal +Krantz, which, as viewed from Swartz Kop and Mount Alice, seemed to be +the key to the whole position, and it was thought that its possession +would open the way for a direct advance to Ladysmith. All was now in +readiness for the attack, and the sailors had with steel hawsers, and +the aid of the troops, got four more naval guns on to Swartz Kop. + +Before daybreak the troops were ready to advance. The regular cavalry +were near the base of Swartz Kop, while all the Colonial Horse, under +Lord Dundonald, were near Potgieter's Drift. At six o'clock the cavalry +went forward, but not far, for the morning was so misty that the +artillery could not make out the Boer positions until an hour later, +when a tremendous fire was opened from Mount Alice, Swartz Kop, and guns +placed on a lower spur of Spion Kop. While this was going on, a bridge +was thrown by the Engineers across another drift. Major-general Wynne +led the Lancashire brigade in the direction of Brakfontein. They went +forward in skirmishing order, supported by five field batteries and the +howitzer battery, all of which kept up an incessant fire of lyddite, +shell, and shot against the Boer position, their fire being guided by an +engineer officer in a balloon, who was able from a lofty altitude to +signal where the Boers were clustering most thickly. + +When another bridge had been completed General Lyttleton advanced with +his brigade across it, and as the feint against Brakfontein had +succeeded in gathering the greater portion of the Boers at the spot they +supposed to be most in danger, the Lancashire brigade was withdrawn, +retiring in excellent order, the movement being covered by an incessant +firing of the guns with them, which completely dominated those of the +Boers. Lyttleton's brigade now pressed forward under a storm of musketry +and shell from machine and other guns, which were answered even more +thunderously by the British artillery. The din was tremendous--greater +even than any that had been previously heard. It seemed impossible that +men could live for a moment in such a storm of missiles. But they +pressed on unfalteringly, and the batteries with them as steadily +maintained their fire, though shells fell continually round and among +them. The batteries that had gone out with the Lancashire Brigade now +directed their fire against Vaal Krantz, having moved across from +Brakfontein under a tremendous fire. One of the waggons lost all its +horses; but the five artillerymen with it manned the wheels and brought +it safely out of fire. + +At three o'clock Lyttleton's brigade advanced in earnest, and dashed +forward at the double against Vaal Krantz, heedless of the rifle fire +from the hills on both flanks and from the front. The defenders soon +lost courage, as they saw the Durhams and 3rd King's Royal Rifles +dashing up the hill with bayonets fixed, and scarce two hundred of them +remained till the British gained the crest. These were speedily +scattered or bayoneted. + +The position when won was found to be unsatisfactory, for it was +dominated by a hill beyond, which could not be seen from the British +look-out stations, and the cannon of Spion Kop were able to sweep the +plateau. At one time the Boers gathered and made an effort to retake the +hill, but two more battalions were sent up to reinforce the defenders, +and the enemy were driven back and the fire gradually languished. The +troops remained on the ground they had won during the night. From +prisoners they learned that four thousand Boers occupied Doornkloof, the +hill on their flank, and that the whole of the Transvaalers under +Joubert were gathering in their front. + +The baggage waggons were all collected by the river in readiness to +advance; but the way was not yet sufficiently cleared for them, and the +Boer guns on Brakfontein and Spion Kop commanded the road which they +would have to traverse. It was evident to all that no advance was +possible until the guns on these heights had been silenced or captured. +For the same reason the two brigades of cavalry had remained inactive. +During the night the Boers set fire to the grass on Vaal Krantz, and by +the assistance of the light kept up a shell and Maxim fire upon the +troops holding it. By morning they had brought up one of their big +hundred-pound Creusot guns on to Doornkloof, and it added its roar to +the chaos of other sounds. Under the shelter of its fire and that of the +other guns the Boers made several attempts to recapture the hill, but +were smartly repulsed each time they advanced. + +All day Tuesday and Wednesday the uproar of battle never ceased. We +could advance no farther. The Boers could not drive us back, although +they made a very determined night attack on Hildyard's brigade. That +afternoon General Buller held a council of war, at which all the +generals were present. Their opinions were unanimous that the Boer +position could not be forced without terrible loss, and that when they +arrived at Ladysmith they would but add to the number shut up in that +town, as it might be found as difficult to force their way out as to +arrive there. General Hart pleaded to be allowed to make an attempt on +Doornkloof with his brigade; but, strongly held as that position was, it +was deemed impossible that it could be captured by a single brigade. The +original intention was that guns should be taken up on to Vaal Krantz, +and that with their assistance a strong force would wheel round and take +Doornkloof in the rear; but owing to the discovery that the former hill +was dominated from several points, it was found impracticable to carry +the plan into execution. Orders were therefore given for the supply +column, which had advanced some distance, to retire. + +As the movement was being carried out, the Boers kept up a heavy fire +upon the waggons and on the hospital, which, relying upon the protection +of the Red Cross flag, had advanced within range, but here, as upon +almost every occasion, the enemy paid no respect whatever to the Geneva +emblem, although when, as once or twice happened, one of our shells fell +near an ambulance of theirs, they had sent in indignant protests against +our conduct. All that night and the next day the movement to the rear +continued, and not only were the infantry moved across the Tugela, but +the guns on Swartz Kop and Mount Alice were removed, and orders were +given for a general retirement to Springfield, a proof that the next +attack would be made in an entirely different direction. + + + + +CHAPTER XVI + +A COLONIST'S ADVENTURE + + +In the morning after the battle orders were issued for the greater part +of the troops to return to Chieveley, and among the first to leave were +the Maritzburg Scouts. They were heartily glad to be off. During the +three preceding days the position of the cavalry had been a galling one. +They had seen nothing of the fighting, being kept down at Potgieter's +Drift in readiness to advance the moment that orders came. They had +nothing to do but to stand or sit down near their horses, watching the +fire from the enemy's batteries on the hills, and the bursting of our +lyddite shells among them, the outburst of brownish-yellow smoke +rendering them easily distinguishable from the sudden puffs of white +vapour caused by the explosion of the shrapnel shells of the artillery. +How the battle was going was only known from the wounded men brought +down from the front. The reports at first were encouraging, but it +became evident on the following days that no progress was being made. + +Each evening when the sun set both the colonial and regular cavalry +returned to their camp, for it was certain that they could not act at +night. When it became known on Wednesday evening that a retreat was +ordered, the news came almost as a relief, for the suspense had been +very trying. + +After dinner Chris went into the tent where the officers of the troop +were gathered. As usual, the talk was of the battle, but in a short time +Captain Brookfield said: + +"Let us try and get away from the subject. We have talked of nothing +else for the past three days, and I defy anyone to say anything new +about it; it is not a pleasant subject either. Richards, you were in the +last war, I know, and took part in the defence of Standerton. Suppose +you tell us about that; it is one of the few pleasant memories of that +time." + +"I don't know that there is much to tell you about it, but I will let +you know how I came to take share in it. That was an exciting time for +me, for I was never so near rubbed out in all my life. Just before the +last business broke out I happened to be returning from Pretoria, +intending to sell for anything that I could get a large farm that I +owned in the Leydenburg district. Of late the Boers had been getting so +offensive in their manner that I thought something would come of it, and +made up my mind to sell out at any price and return to Natal. When I +rode into Leydenburg I found that two hundred and fifty men of the 94th +Regiment were starting next day with a large train of waggons for +Pretoria. As I was frequently in the town, and had made the acquaintance +of several of the officers, I thought it would be pleasant to ride down +with them, as it made no difference whether I got into Pretoria a day or +two earlier or later. The general idea was that war would come of it, +but no one thought it would begin without the usual notice and warning. + +"I told the officers that I would not trust the Boers further than I +could see them, for that a more treacherous set of fellows are not to be +found on the surface of the earth. Still, I must own that I had no more +idea that an attack would be made upon us than they had. Well, you all +know what came of it. We were going along a hollow with rising ground on +either side when, without the slightest warning, a tremendous fire was +opened from both flanks. It can hardly be said that there was any +resistance. The troops were strung out along the line of waggons; +numbers were shot down before a single musket was fired in defence. The +main body, such as it was, fought stoutly, but as they could only catch +an occasional glimpse of the heads of the enemy, while they were +themselves altogether exposed, there could be but one end to it. A +hundred and twenty men were killed or wounded in a few minutes, and to +save the rest from a similar massacre the officer who commanded +surrendered. + +"I fired a few shots at first, but as soon as I saw how it would end I +rode for it. I was with the rear-guard when the firing began, and so +took the back track. As soon as the firing ceased I saw half a dozen +Boers galloping after me. My blood was up, as you may imagine, and on +getting to a dip I jumped off my horse, left it in shelter, and threw +myself down on the crest of the hollow, and as they came within range I +picked off the one who was nearest to me. That brought the others up +with a round turn. They retired a little way, then dismounted and +separated, and proceeded to stalk me. We exchanged shots for an hour or +two. I killed another, and got, as you see by this scar on my cheek, a +graze. However, I think they would have tired of the game first. But +suddenly I saw a dozen Boers galloping across the country in our +direction. They were doubtless a party who had arrived too late to take +part in the fight, if you can call such a treacherous massacre a fight, +and hearing the sound of shots were riding to see what was going on. + +"I saw that things were getting too hot, and ran down to my horse again +and rode along in the hollow, which fortunately hid me from the sight of +either the men I had been fighting or those riding up. I had therefore +about a quarter of a mile start when I heard a shout, and knew that they +were after me. After what had happened I did not dare ride for +Middleburg, as there was no saying whether that place might not have +already risen; so there was nothing to depend upon but the speed and +bottom of my horse. It was a fairly good animal, but nothing particular. +It had had an easy time of it while on the march, for we had only done +some fourteen or fifteen miles a day. I might have had hopes that I +should outride the men in pursuit of me, but they would be joined by +more men on fresh horses from any Boer farmhouse or village we came +near. Besides, the news of this intended attack on the convoy must have +been known far and wide. Occasionally a shot was fired, but as I was +riding at a gallop, and the Boers were doing the same, I had no great +fear of being hit. I gained a little at first, but after two hours' +riding they were about the same distance behind as when they had first +started on the chase. + +"I felt that my horse was beginning to fag a bit, but the sun was +setting, for the attack had taken place in the afternoon. I kept on till +it was too dark for me to make out my pursuers, some of whom were not +more than three hundred yards behind me; then, while my horse was going +at full gallop I leapt of? without checking him, a trick that most +hunters can do. I chose the spot because I could make out that there was +some low scrub close to the road. Stooping among this I ran forward. I +was glad to hear that my horse was still galloping at the top of his +speed, and, deprived of my weight, would probably get a good bit farther +before he was taken, if he did but keep on. This I hoped he would do, +for he had evidently entered into the spirit of the chase, and had laid +back his ears whenever the Boers raised their voices in a yell or a +rifle was fired. They were yelling pretty hard when they passed me, +urging their horses on in the belief that the chase was almost at an +end. I heard no more of the Boers that time, for as soon as they had +gone on I ran at the top of my speed for some distance, and then broke +into a trot, and by the morning must have been thirty miles away. + +"I decided to make for Standerton, for there I felt sure I should be +safe, for at that place was a considerable English population, and they +would certainly hold out. I had a Colt's rifle with me and a brace of +revolvers, for even when I went down to Leydenburg I heard that several +Englishmen had been maltreated, and one or two shot by Boers they met. I +tramped for four days, and as the attack on our troops had been made on +the 20th of December, it was now Christmas-eve. I had not ventured to go +near a Boer farm, for fortunately I had shot a springbok, and was +therefore under no trouble as to food; but on the previous day I had not +come across water, and the heat was terrible, so I felt that whatever +came of it I must go and ask for a drink. I saw a farmhouse about nine +in the morning and made for it. As I approached, a woman came out of the +door and, seeing me, re-entered, and two Boers with their guns in their +hands ran out. + +"Who are you?" they shouted. Of course I speak Dutch as well as English, +and shouted back that I only wanted some water. + +"'Are you an Englishman?' they shouted again. + +"'Yes, I am,' I said; 'but what difference does that make?' I saw their +guns go up to their shoulders, and flung myself down, and their shots +went over my head. It was my turn now, and I fired twice, and the two +Boers rolled over. I walked forward now ready to fire on an instant, as +there might be more of them. Some women ran out but no man, and I went +straight up. They were screaming over the bodies of the men, and heaped +curses on me as I came up. I slung my rifle behind me, and taking out my +pistols I said, 'Your men brought it on themselves. I only asked for +water, and they fired at me. I don't want to hurt any of you, but if you +attack me I must protect myself.' Several times I thought they would +have done so, but the sight of my pistols cowed them, I walked straight +into the house, dipped a pannikin into a pail of water, took a long +drink, then I filled my water-bottle, and went out. Though they cursed +me again, they did not attempt to stop me, as I rather feared they +would; but I understood it when, before I had gone fifty yards, I heard +a horse's hoofs, and looking round saw a girl riding at full speed +across the veldt. She had no doubt gone to fetch the men who were away +or to the next farm to summon assistance. The draught of water had done +me a world of good, and I soon broke into a run, though I did not +conceal from myself that I was in a bad fix. Once out of sight of the +farm I changed my course, and did so several times in the course of the +next two hours; then, on getting to the crest of high ground, I saw a +river half a mile away. This, I felt sure, was Broot Spruit. Before +starting to walk down I looked round, and a little over a mile away +could see a party of some fifteen Boers. I ran at full speed down the +slope, and could see no other place where I could make a fight of it; +but many of the rivers have, like those here, steep banks, and I could +at least sell my life dearly. It could only be for a time, for some of +the Boers would cross the spruit and take me in rear. Still, there was +nothing else to be done. + +"When I reached the bank I gave a shout of satisfaction. The river was +in flood; there must have been rain up in the hills, and you know how +quickly the streams rise. Unless the Boers knew of some very shallow +place, there would be no crossing it; for it was running like a mill- +stream, and except at some waggon drift the banks were almost +perpendicular. At any rate I could not hope to swim half across before +the Boers came up, and so I must fight it out where I was. I had +scarcely found a point where I could get a comfortable foothold on the +bank, with my head just above the level, when the Boers appeared on the +top of the hill. They stopped for a minute and then broke up, and +scattering rode forward. They felt sure that I must have made for the +river, as there was no other place where I could be concealed. When they +came within a couple of hundred yards of it they dismounted, and three +or four came forward on foot. When the nearest was within a hundred +yards of me I fired. + +"At so short a distance, and with so good a rest, I could not miss, and +before the smoke cleared away I winged another, and the rest ran back +hastily. I sent a shot or two among them as they were consulting, with +the result that they rode off three or four hundred yards farther back. +They did not attempt to return my fire, for, except when I raised my +head for a moment, they could see nothing of me. They doubtless learned +from the women that I had a Colt's rifle and a brace of revolvers, and +that if they were to make a rush across the open not many of them were +likely to reach me. After a talk two or three of them mounted their +horses and rode so as to strike the river both above and below me, +intending no doubt to cross if they found a place where there was a +chance of doing so. I felt pretty sure that they would do nothing till +it was dark, then they would crawl up and make a rush; I was certain, +anyhow, that they would not give it up, as there were two of their +number lying on the veldt besides the two at the farmhouse. There was, +however, more pluck in them than I had given them credit for, for about +mid-day they began to advance, crawling along the ground as if stalking +a quarry. The men who had gone out on horseback had all returned, but +just as the others started crawling up three of them galloped away down +stream. I determined at once to shift my position a bit, so as to put +off the evil hour. I pulled a stone as big as my head out of the clay of +the bank and put it on the edge where my head had been, and then got +down into the water. It was waist-deep at a couple of feet from the +bank, which above was too steep to walk along. I had gone a hundred +yards when I saw, seven or eight inches above the water-level, a hole, +and pushing my arm in I found it was a place where a good bit of the +bank had caved in. Laying my gun and pistols down on a ledge I felt +about farther. At the top it went in nearly three feet, and was higher +at the back than it was at the water's edge. At any rate it afforded a +good chance of safety. Holding the revolvers, the chamber of the rifle, +and my ammunition above water, I stooped until I could get into the +hole, which was but just wide enough for the purpose; then I pushed +myself back to the end. I found there was just height enough for me to +sit with my mouth above water. The back sloped so that I had to dig my +heels into the clay to prevent myself from slipping forward. + +"It was not a comfortable position, but that was a secondary +consideration. I had noticed as I came along that the river was already +falling, so that I had no fear of being drowned as long as I kept my +position. With some trouble I fastened my pistols and ammunition on the +brim of my hat; the rifle I was holding between my knees. There I sat +hour after hour. Fortunately, being pretty near midsummer day, the water +was not cold. I had at least the consolation of knowing what a state of +fury the Boers must be in. They would have seen by my footsteps where I +had entered the river, just below where I had been standing. No doubt +they would have gone along the top of the bank to see if I had come out +of the water again, and when they reached their friends on horseback and +heard that I had not swum down the river, they would have concluded that +I must have been drowned. Had I managed to cross, they would have seen +me climb the opposite bank. + +"In an hour the water had fallen to my shoulders, and when it became +dark it was but waist-deep where I was sitting. To make a long story +short, by midnight the water was below my feet and still falling +rapidly. I waited a couple of hours and then started to cross. It was +about fifty yards wide, and I was fully half-way over before it reached +my chin. The stream had lost much of its force, and I had no difficulty +in swimming across the rest of the way, though the water was deep until +I was within a couple of yards of the bank. Then I climbed the bank and +made off. I saw nothing more of my pursuers, and three days later I +arrived at Standerton, and remained there til the end of the war, for +the gallant little town repulsed all attempts of the Boers to capture +it." + +"That was a narrow escape indeed, Richards," Captain Brookfield said. +"If you hadn't had your wits about you the Boers would certainly have +got you. It was a first-rate hiding-place, but I don't think many of us +would have thought of adopting it. Now, will someone else give us a +yarn?" + +Two or three more stories were told, and then the party broke up, +feeling all the better for having for an hour avoided the standing +topic. Two days later all were settled at Chieveley again, and it was +generally believed that the next attack would take place very shortly, +and that it would probably be directed against Colenso. That evening a +farmer came into camp. His horse had dropped dead a mile away. He +stopped, as he passed through the tents of the scouts, and asked where +he could find the general. Captain Brookfield, who heard the question, +stepped out from his tent with Chris, to whom he had been talking. + +"Why, Searle, is it you? I thought the voice was familiar to me. What is +it?" + +"I have ridden in to get help. The other day a raiding party of Boers +came down through Inadi, and riding in between Dingley Dell and Botha's +Castle--you know the hill--swept off a quantity of cattle. They have not +penetrated so far before, and no one about thought that there was any +danger while you were attacking them up here. One of the farmers rode to +Greytown for help. Most of the young men there had joined one or other +of the colonial troops, but fifteen of us said that we could go out. It +seemed that there were not more than some fifteen or twenty Boers. Well, +I can't tell you all about it, for, as it is a matter of life and death, +I have not a moment to lose. However, we came up to them north of +Botha's Castle. We had a sharp fight. Two of our men were killed and +five of the Boers; the rest rode off. We set to work to bunch all the +cattle, and as we were at it we were attacked suddenly by a party sixty +or seventy strong. The fellows that we had driven off had evidently come +across them and brought them down upon us. We made a running fight, but +our horses were not so fresh as theirs; and seeing that they had the +speed of us we made for an empty farmhouse, and as they rode up we +brought down several of them. + +"There was a wall round the yard, and the Boers drew off for a bit to +consider. Then they dismounted and planted themselves round the house in +such shelter as they could find within two or three hundred yards, and +the affair began in earnest. The first day they kept up a heavy fire, to +which we could make but little reply, for it was certain death to lift a +head above the wall or to show one's self at a window even for a moment. +We lost three men that way. During the night they tried to carry the +place, but we were all at the wall; and had the best of it, as we had +only to show our heads, while they were altogether exposed. There was +not much firing next day, and it was evident that they meant to starve +us out. There was not a scrap of food to be found in the place; but +fortunately there was a small thatched kraal inside the yard which gave +some forage for the horses. The next day we killed one of them for food. + +"That night we agreed that when the Boers saw that we did not surrender +in a day or two they would be sure that we must be eating the horses, as +any food we brought with us must be exhausted, and they would then make +a determined attack; for we knew we had killed eight or ten of them, and +that they would not go away. So we decided that the only hope was for +one of us to ride here; we tossed up who should try to get through the +Boers, and the lot fell upon me. I took the best of the horses. We had +agreed from the first that this would have to be done, and had given +what scraps of bread we could spare to it; besides which, they were all +in fair condition, as the yard was strewn with rubbish, and some party +of Boers had ripped up all the beds and straw mattresses and scattered +the contents about. + +"Some of them were sure to be on watch, and I rode at a walk. I made for +the north, as that side was less likely to be watched. I had gone about +two hundred yards when a man jumped up just in front of me. My rifle was +ready, and before he could lift his I shot him, and then clapped spurs +to nay horse. There was a tremendous hubbub; shots were fired at random +in all directions, but I doubt whether they could have seen me after I +had gone fifty yards. I rode for a quarter of a mile due north, and then +turned west. I had no fear of being overtaken, for although the Boers +would all have their horses close, in readiness to mount if we should +try to break out, I must have got a good quarter of a mile start, and +they were not likely to keep up the chase long, as they could not tell +which way I might have doubled, and if they pursued far, it would be in +the direction of Greytown. It was about a seventy-mile ride, and as I +started about twelve, I have done it in nine hours. I foundered the +horse, but fortunately he did not drop till I was within half a mile of +the camp. Now, where can I find the general?" + +"You will find him at Frere, but I am afraid it will be of no use. We +have tried him again and again--at least, one or other of us have done +so--to let us go out scouting, but he will not hear of it, though the +whole of us Colonials are terribly sore at leaving the whole country at +the mercy of the Boer marauders; and now that we shall probably be at +work here again directly, he is less likely than ever to let anyone go." + +"You can't go without orders, I suppose?" + +Captain Brookfield shook his head. "We are just as much under orders as +the regular troops are, and it would be a serious matter indeed to fly +in the face of his repeated orders on this subject." The farmer made a +gesture of despair. + +"Captain Brookfield," Chris said, speaking for the first time, "I think +that by the terms of our enlistment in your corps we were to be allowed +to take our discharge whenever we asked for it?" + +"That was so, Chris, but--" + +"Then I beg now, sir, to tender our resignation from the present +moment." + +"But Chris, you have but twenty men, and by what Searle says, there are +sixty or seventy of them." + +"Of whom ten or so have been killed. Well, sir, we have fought against +nearly a hundred before now, and got the best of it; besides, we shall +have the help of the little party shut up. However, now that we have +resigned, that is our affair. I suppose that if we rejoin you, you will +have no objection to re-enlist us?" + +Captain Brookfield smiled. "I should have no objection certainly, Chris, +but General Buller might have." + +"I don't suppose he will know of our having been away, sir; he has +plenty more serious things to think of than the numerical strength of +your troop, and as the news of a skirmish some thirty miles north of +Greytown is not likely to be reported in the papers, or at any rate to +attract his attention, I don't think you need trouble yourself on that +score. Besides, if it was reported, it could only be said that one of +the besieged party escaping, returned with a small body of volunteers he +had collected; and the name of the Maritzburg Scouts would not be +mentioned. I am sure that Mr. Searle would impress the necessity for +silence about that point, on his friends." + +"Well, I accept your resignation, Chris; a headstrong man will have his +way; and indeed I have great faith in your accomplishing, somehow, the +relief of this party." + +The farmer had listened with surprise to this discussion between the lad +and Captain Brookfield. The latter now turned to him and said: + +"This young gentleman is the commander of twenty lads of about his own +age. They have been in two serious fights, and in both cases against a +Boer force much superior to themselves in numbers, and I have as much +confidence in them as in any men in my troop. They are all good shots, +and admirably mounted, and you can be perfectly sure of them, and can +take my assurance that if any twenty men can relieve your friends, they +will do so." + +"Will you be able to ride back again with us, sir? I can mount you." + +"Certainly I can, if my friend Captain Brookfield can furnish me with a +meal before I start." + +"That I will with much pleasure. How long will it be before you are +ready, Chris?" + +"Half an hour, sir. I left them all rubbing down their horses when I +came in here a quarter of an hour ago, and it will take but a very short +time to pack up and start." + +"Very well; I dare say that Mr. Searle will be ready by that time. +Breakfast shall be ready for you in ten minutes, Searle, and while you +are eating it I will tell you enough of these gentlemen's doings to +reassure you, for I see that you do not feel very confident that they +will be able to tackle the Boers." + +"After what you have said, Captain Brookfield, I can have no doubt that +they will do all they can, but it seems to me that twenty men--or twenty +boys--are no match for fifty or sixty Boers. While they were speaking, +Chris had returned to his camp. The lads were all engaged in rubbing up +their saddlery. + +"You can knock off at once," Chris said; "I have need for you. You no +longer belong to the Maritzburg Scouts." + +There was a general exclamation of astonishment. + +"What do you mean, Chris?" + +"I mean that I have resigned in my own name and yours, and Captain +Brookfield has accepted the resignation." + +"Are you really in earnest, Chris?" + +"Very much so; but I will not keep you in suspense. A small party of +Greytown men are besieged near Botha's Castle; one of them has just +ridden in for help. But you know well enough that Buller will not hear +of detached parties going out all over the country; and Captain +Brookfield told the farmer that it was of no use his going to the +general, and that none of the Colonial troops could leave the camp +without orders. As it was evident that there was nothing more to be +done, and we could not leave the man's friends to be massacred, the only +thing to do was to give in our resignation at once; and of course, now +that it is done and accepted, we are at liberty to mount and ride off +where we please. When we have done our work we will come back and +reenlist, and no one will be any the wiser. We shall start in half an +hour. We need not take the tent poles, or anything but a blanket and a +waterproof sheet." + +There was lively satisfaction at the news that they were again going to +be employed in what they considered their proper work. + +"What shall we do about the men and stores?" Willesden asked; "you know +that those two big boxes of the things we ordered at Maritzburg arrived +yesterday." "I think, Willesden, we will take Jack and the two Zulus, +and leave Japhet and the Swazis here in charge of the stores, and +blankets, and other things we leave behind us. Captain Brookfield will +keep an eye on them for us. The farmer is going to ride back with us on +one of the spare horses, and the three natives can ride the others. +There is a hundredweight of biscuits in the sack that came with the +boxes; each of us can take five pounds in his saddle-bag, a tin of cocoa +and milk, and a pound or two of bacon. Jack can take a kettle and +frying-pan, and the natives their blankets and twenty pounds of mealie +flour for themselves and five times as much mealies for the horses. We +can get them at the stores that were opened a few days ago." + +Some of the men from the other tents walked over on seeing the tents +pulled down and the waterproof sheets and blankets rolled up, and asked: +"Where are you fellows off to?" + +"We have resigned; we are sick of doing nothing." + +As it was known that they drew neither pay nor rations, the news did not +create much surprise. + +"You are lucky fellows," one said. "We get no share of the fighting and +a full share of the hardships; still, I wonder you do not stop till we +are in Ladysmith." + +"When is that going to be?" Field asked innocently. "We have been told +that we shall be in Ladysmith in a week many times since we first came +up here in the middle of December, and we are no nearer now than when we +arrived here. Do you think that you could guarantee that we should be +there in another week? because, if so, we might put off going." + +The trooper shook his head with a laugh. "That is a question no man in +camp can answer," he said. "Perhaps in a week, perhaps in a fortnight, +perhaps," he added more gravely, "never. We know by the messages they +flash out that they are nearly at the end of their food, and if we don't +get there in a fortnight or thereabout, our motive for going on may be +at an end. In that case I suppose we shall wait here till Roberts has +relieved Kimberley and marches on Bloemfontein. That will send all the +Free Staters scurrying back in a hurry, and even the Transvaalers will +begin to think that it is time to go. Then I suppose we shall advance +and clear Natal out." + +"Well, perhaps we may be back again to help you by that time," Field +answered; "but we are heartily tired of this place, and of watching the +Boers making their positions stronger and stronger every day." + +"It is about the same with us all," the trooper grumbled, "and I for one +wish that I could go down with you to Maritzburg and have a week off. It +would be such a comfort to sleep in a dry bed and to dress in dry +clothes, that I doubt whether I should ever have the strength of mind to +come back again. I wish that the general would issue an order +dismounting us all and filling up the gaps in the line regiments with +us. Then at least we should have a chance of fighting, which does not +seem likely ever to come to us here. You are not going to leave those +big boxes behind you, are you?" + +"Yes, we are going to leave them in the care of the captain, with a note +saying that if we do not turn up again before Ladysmith is relieved, +they are to be handed over to the poor beggars there." + +"There is one thing I cannot say, and that is that we have been short of +food, for the Army Service Corps has done splendidly, and no one has +ever been hungry for an hour, except when on a long march or engaged in +a battle. If everything had been worked as well, we should certainly +have no reason whatever to complain. If I were my own master, and could +afford it, I would go down to Durban and take a passage for myself and +my horse for Port Elizabeth, and then go up and enlist in one of the +yeomanry corps with Roberts. When he once starts there will be plenty of +movement on that side; while here, even if we get to Ladysmith, we may +be fixed there for no one can say how long. You see what it is here, and +if the Boers don't lose heart, and defend the Biggarsberg and the +Drakensberg, we shall find at least as much difficulty there as we shall +here. It is quite certain that the Ladysmith men will take a long time +to recover from what they have gone through; and as for the cavalry, I +fancy their horses have been eaten. If they had been out here with us, +instead of being cooped up in there, we should have been able to make it +hot for the Boers when they retire, and to keep them on the run, but +with so small a force as we have we should hardly be able to do so. +Besides, they have so many lines of retreat. The Free Staters can go +over to the left to Van Reenen and the other passes; another commando +can go east; there are plenty of fords on the Buffalo; and they would +retire on Vryheid, while the main body could make a stand at the +Biggarsberg; and as they always seem able to carry their cannon off with +them, our cavalry would do nothing without artillery and infantry." + +There had been no pause in the work of preparation while they were +talking, and the horses were now saddled, the food divided, the saddle- +bags packed, and the blankets and waterproofs strapped on. Chris went +across to Captain Brookfield's tent. "We are all ready for a start, +sir." + +The officer looked at his watch. "It is three minutes under the half- +hour, Chris. How much ammunition are you taking with you?" + +"A hundred and fifty rounds each, sir, of which I don't suppose we shall +use above ten at the outside. Still, there is never any saying; and if +we should get besieged we shall want it all. Your horse is ready for +you, Mr. Searle." + +"And I am ready too," the farmer said, getting up from the table and +stretching himself. "I ought not to have sat down. I could ride as far +as most at twenty, but I have not done so much for the last fifteen +years, and I feel stiff in every limb. However, I shall be all right +when I have gone a few miles, and that wash I had before breakfast has +done me a world of good. Now, sir, I am ready, and whether we shall +succeed or not, I thank you with all my heart for coming with me." +"Good-bye, Chris!" Captain Brookfield said. "I expect you will all turn +up again, like bad pennies, before many days have gone." + +"I hope so, sir," Chris said. "I should be sorry to miss the end here +after having seen it so far." + + + + +CHAPTER XVII + +A RESCUE. + + +When Chris went out with Captain Brookfield and the farmer, the lads had +shaken hands with all their friends, and were standing by the side of +their horses ready to mount. Jack and the two Zulus were standing a few +yards behind them. Japhet had brought up the other spare horse. + +"It is a nice piece of horse-flesh," the farmer said as he looked at it +critically. + +"Yes, it was bred by Duncan. We purchased pretty well the pick of those +he brought down the country." + +"That accounts for it. They are in good condition, too." + +"Yes; our horses all get two feeds of mealies a day, or, when it is wet, +one feed of mealies and a hot mash made of mealie flour, besides what +they can pick up, for we don't draw horse rations. Now, sir, we will be +off;" and he gave the word "Mount!" + +The lads all in a second swung into their saddles. + +"Good-bye, lads, and good luck!" Captain Brookfield said; and the men +standing by broke into a hearty cheer. + +There was a strong suspicion that the party were not going down to +Maritzburg. It was felt that they were not the sort to throw it up +before Ladysmith was relieved. And their suspicions were heightened when +they saw the farmer mount and ride by the side of Chris. + +"It is all gammon about their resigning, is it not, Brookfield?" one of +the officers said, as they stood looking after them. "Why should they +have left two of their men here with some of their traps and stores if +they had not been coming back? They would naturally give them all away. +Besides, I noticed that farmer come in on foot half an hour ago; there +was no talk of their leaving before he arrived, and he has gone off with +them on one of their horses." + +Captain Brookfield smiled. + +"All I know about it officially is that this morning Mr. King resigned +in the name of himself and his party; and as you know, I told you when +they first joined us, they did so on the explicit understanding that +they should be allowed to resign when they chose, and that provision was +inserted when they were sworn in." + +"That is all you know officially?" + +"Yes. If they are missed, and the question is asked me what has become +of them, that is the answer I shall give. What else I know I must for +the present keep to myself." + +"I suppose we shall see them back soon?" + +"Well, I consider that that is within the limits of possibility." + +"I suppose that you have formed no plan yet, Mr. King?" the farmer said, +when they had left the camp. + +"No; my present idea is to follow the line half-way down to Frere. If we +were to strike off towards the country at once, we should, of course, be +noticed; so I would rather get three miles on. You say it is about +seventy miles?" + +"About that." + +"Well, allowing for a halt, we can do it in twelve hours; that would be +just as it is getting dark. Of course we shall not show ourselves till +they begin to attack the house. I hope we shall find your friends still +holding out." + +"I hope so indeed. You see, the Boers were quiet when I started, and I +should hardly think that they would make an attack again after I left. +They seemed to have settled down to starve us out; but it is quite +possible that now I have got away they will grow nervous lest I should +bring help up, and are very likely to make another attempt this evening. +They would be pretty sure to succeed this time, for there are only seven +of us left there; and though they could make a good fight in daylight, +they would have no real chance if the Boers went at them in earnest, +which they are sure to do next time. We agreed before I started that it +would not do to try to defend the yard. After I left they were going to +pile everything movable against the doors and windows and fight hard to +keep the Boers out, and would then go upstairs and sell their lives +dearly." + +"How far are the Boer horses out?" + +"About five hundred yards away, in a dip. We know they always keep three +or four men on guard there, for we have seen them come out of the hollow +sometimes." + +"And the cattle, have they driven them off yet?" + +"Yes; four of the Boers and twenty or thirty natives went straight on +with them as soon as they had driven us into the farmhouse. I am afraid +there is no use thinking of getting them back." + +"It depends upon how far they have gone," Chris said. "The rains have +brought the grass up, and as likely as not they may halt when they get +to some good pastures and wait till the others join them. It is not +likely that all that gang came from one place." + +"I expect that they have been gathered up from lonely farmhouses where +they have escaped the commandos, and they will want to divide their +plunder between them; they don't trust each other a bit, and each would +cheat his fellows of his share if he could. So I should think that what +you suggest is likely enough, and that it has been arranged to wait when +they come to a good place till the others arrive. But you are not +thinking of rescuing them, are you?" + +"If we thrash the Boers at the farm I shall certainly have a try. We did +carry off two or three thousand head about two months ago from the hands +of at least as large a party as this, and I don't see why we should not +do it again. It was near Mount Umhlumba." + +"Was it your party that did that?" the farmer exclaimed. "Why, it was +the talk of the whole district, and some of the cattle belonged to a +friend of mine. He told me how he had been saved from ruin. Well, sir, +after that I shall feel more confident than I acknowledge I have been up +to now. Captain Brookfield told me about your going into the Boer camp +in disguise, and to Komati-poort, and how you surprised a party of Boers +looting a farm near Dundee; but he did not mention that. In fact, he had +only just finished telling me the other affairs when you came in saying +that you were ready to start. Well, well, it is wonderful that a party +of young gentlemen like yours should have done such things!" + +They did not hurry their horses, but for the most part went at the +steady canter to which the animals were most accustomed; occasionally +they would walk for a bit. + +At Weenan, where they crossed the Bushman river, they halted for half an +hour, and for double that time after crossing the Mooi at Intembeni; +then as the sun began to lose its power they went fast, until, when they +reached one of the farthest spurs of Botha's Castle, the farmer said: + +"When we get over the next rise we shall see the house." + +Chris gave the order to dismount, and, going forward on foot, they threw +themselves down when close to the crest, and crawled forward until they +obtained a fair view. Sankey and Chris were again provided with glasses, +having bought them on the day before starting at the sale of the effects +of several officers who had fallen in a fight at Vaal Krantz, and all +gazed intently for some time at the house. "Thank God they are all right +so far!" Chris said to the farmer. "I can see the Boers lying all round +the house, and that dark clump is their horses; so our ride has not been +in vain. I suppose it is about a mile and a half from here. I don't see +the gate into the yard. Which side is it?" + +"That corner of the house hides it. It is on the eastern side." + +"It will be quite dark in an hour; when it is so, we will move down a +bit farther, then we will halt till we hear them attacking. We must not +go nearer, for the moon will be up by that time. If I had known that we +should have got here before dark, we need not have troubled to bring the +Zulus. I intended to send them forward to see how matters stood, then +they could have guided us right up to the gate. However, as they have +all got guns, and can shoot, it will add to the panic our attack will +create, and they will all be pleased at the chance of at last getting a +shot at the Boers. They were complaining to me the other day that they +were very happy in all other respects, but they were very much +disappointed at not having had a fight." + +The natives were indeed delighted when, on Chris rejoining them, he told +them that they should take their share in the attack on the Boers. Chris +and his friends all threw themselves on the ground, after sending up +Jack to the crest to keep watch. But the farmer said, "I dare not lie +down; if I did, I should never get up again." + +He had, indeed, to be lifted off his horse when they dismounted. + +"I can quite understand that," Chris said. "I feel stiff and tired +myself, and you must be almost made of iron to have ridden one hundred +and forty miles almost without halting." + +"If anyone had told me that I could do it, I should not have believed +him. Of course one is on horseback a good many hours a day. Often, after +going round the farm, I start at two or three o'clock and ride into +Greytown and back; but that is only a matter of some fifteen miles each +way. Still, when one has got seven men's lives depending upon one, one +makes a big effort." + +"I tell you what, Mr. Searle. The best thing you can do is to strip and +lie down. I will set the two Zulus to knead you. You will find yourself +quite a new man after it." + +"That is a good idea, King, and I will adopt it." + +For half an hour the two men rubbed and kneaded the farmer's muscles +from head to foot, exerting themselves until the perspiration streamed +from them. Then one of them brought up one of the water-skins and poured +the contents over him. + +"That has certainly done me a world of good," the farmer said when he +had dressed himself. "I don't say the stiffness has all gone, but I +certainly don't feel any worse than I did when I got to your camp. I +should never have thought of it myself." + +"It is what is done after a Turkish bath," Chris said. "I have had them +often at Johannesburg. The natives do something of the same sort. They +make a little hut of boughs, and fill a hole in the middle with hot +stones and pour water over them, and steam themselves, and I believe get +rubbed too." + +As soon as they considered it dark enough to be perfectly safe, they led +their horses down until they judged that they were within half a mile of +the house, then dismounted and waited. Chris had already made all +arrangements. Carmichael, who was the leader for the time being of one +of the sections of five, was with his party to ride straight for the +Boers' horses directly the attack began. The firing at the house would +act as a guide to the spot where they were placed, and he was, if +possible, to attack them from behind. He was to shoot down the guards, +but not to pursue them if the horses bolted on hearing the attack on the +house. + +"What you have to do is to stampede them," Chris said. "As soon as you +have got them on the run, keep them going, and if they scatter, do you +scatter too. The Boers without their horses will be at our mercy. Don't +stop till you have driven them five miles away. Then you can halt till +morning. As you come back, you are likely enough to hear firing, and can +then ride towards it and join us. But don't get within rifle-shot of the +Boers. I don't want any lives thrown away. If you hear three shots at +regular intervals during the night ride towards the sound. I may want +you here." + +It was just ten o'clock when there was a violent outburst of fire at the +farmhouse, and all sprung into their saddles. + +"Now, Carmichael, do you gallop on. Get as close as you can to the +horses without being observed. Go at a walk the last hundred yards or +so; the horse guards are not likely to hear you, they are sure to be up +on the edge of the dip watching the farm. Stay quiet till you hear our +yell, and then go straight in to them. In that case you may manage +without their getting a shot at you, for as likely as not they will have +strolled up without their rifles." + +As soon as Carmichael's little party had started, Chris moved on with +the rest at a walk. + +"There is no occasion to hurry," he said. "It will take the Boers some +time to force their way in, and the hotter they are at work the less +likely they will be to hear us." In two or three minutes he ordered them +to canter. "It is of no use charging; I expect that they are all inside +the yard." It was, however, at a fast pace that they rode up towards the +wall. Chris blew his whistle, and the cheer of the whites and the warcry +of the two Zulus burst out at the top of their voices. + +"Give it to them hot, lads!" Chris shouted, for the benefit of the +Boers. "Kill every man-jack of the scoundrels!" And at once nineteen +rifles opened upon the dark figures clustered round the house. "Use your +magazines," Chris shouted again. "Don't let a man of them get off." + +Appalled by the sudden attack, ignorant of the number of their +assailants, and mown down by the terrible fire, the Boers on the two +sides of the house exposed to it did not think of resistance, but all +who could do so made a rush round to the other sides, and, joining their +companions there, clambered over the wall and made for their horses; but +these had already gone. As Chris had anticipated, the four guards were +watching the farmhouse, and did not hear the approach of Carmichael's +party. As Chris's whistle sounded these galloped forward, and at their +volley three of the Boers fell, the other fled. At once with loud shouts +they charged in among the ponies, who were already kicking and plunging +at the sudden sound of firearms. A minute later they were all in full +flight, followed by the five lads shouting and yelling. The firing had +been unnoticed by the Boers round the house, and these, when on arriving +at the hollow they found their horses gone, gave vent to their alarm and +rage in many strange oaths, and then scattered in flight all over the +country. + +"It is of no use trying to pursue," Chris said, as soon as it was found +that all the Boers, save those lying dying or dead, had escaped from the +yard. "We should only ruin the horses, and they have done a big day's +work already." + +The besieged could be heard hastily removing the barricades against the +door, and in two or three minutes ran out, almost bewildered at the +suddenness of their relief, when they thought that nothing remained to +be done but to sell their lives dearly. A few hurried words explained +the position to them, and their gratitude to Chris and his party was +unbounded. Their first step was to attend to the fallen Boers. Of these +there were eighteen wounded and eleven killed, and as soon as all in +their power had been done for the former, and they had been carried into +the house, a blazing fire was lit in one of the rooms and the party all +gathered there. + +"Now, Mr. King," Searle said, "you are the baas of this party; what do +you think had best be done?" + +"I think the first thing," Chris said, "is to post half a dozen men, +three or four hundred yards away, round the house. We must not run the +risk of the tables being turned on us by the Boers crawling up and +surprising us; they may still be hanging about in numbers. Peters, you +take Harris, Bryan, and Capper, and the two Zulus, and post them round +the house. The natives' ears are much sharper than yours are, and if +either of them thinks he hears anything let them crawl out in that +direction and reconnoitre. When I whistle, do you come in to me, leaving +the others on guard, then I will tell you what we have decided upon." + +The four named at once went outside, and, calling the natives, left the +yard. Jack had already filled the kettles the colonists had brought with +them, and placed them over the fire. + +"While the tea is getting ready," Chris said, "we had better give a good +feed of mealies to all the horses. How many of yours are there left?" he +asked one of the colonists. + +"All the twelve we had at first were unwounded this evening, but I can't +say whether any of them have been hit since. The wall was too high for +bullets to touch them as long as the Boers were outside, but most likely +as we were firing through the window we may have hit some of them." + +"I don't suppose you did so, because I fancy that directly the Boers +began fighting here the horses bunched in one corner of the yard. Well, +will you feed them also, and see how many are uninjured. That is a +matter of importance, for our horses will scarcely be fit for work in +the morning. Do you think yours may be?" + +"Yes, I think so; we have only been shut up three days, and they have +had a good deal of pickings, what with the beds and what was lying about +in the yard before; and a good feed now will certainly set them up. What +do you propose to do?" + +"Well, I want in the first place to get enough of the Boer ponies in to +mount us all, and in the second to overtake and cut the Boers off if +possible, and lastly to rescue the cattle. Five of our party are away +after the horses, but their object was to scatter them. They were to +halt about five miles away, and if they heard three rifle shots at +regular intervals they were to ride towards them." + +"Do you want them in here? if so, I will go out and give the signal. We +have taken it by turns to sleep, so we are all fairly fresh." + +"Yes, I want them in, but I specially want them to collect and drive in +a score of the Boer ponies." "At daybreak we will all go," another of +the farmers said, "and lend a hand." + +"With this moon we ought to be able to find some of the men without +waiting for daylight," Chris said. "It would be an immense thing if we +could be after them before they have got too long a start." + +"It would indeed. Well, we will feed our horses at once, and by the time +we have had a cup of tea they will be ready to start. If we have luck, +we ought not to be away more than a couple of hours." + +"It would make our success pretty well a certainty if we could get the +ponies by that time," Chris said. + +In less than half an hour the seven farmers started. Only one of the +horses had been killed, and they rode away at a rate that showed that +the others were none the worse for their three days on somewhat short +rations. + +"Now," Chris said, after seeing them off, "we will get a couple of +hours' sleep. I wish Peters and his party could do the same, but it +would not do to trust to the Boers not coming back again." + +All were asleep in a few minutes, but an hour later they heard a shot +fired, followed by several others. They leapt to their feet, seized +their rifles, and ran out into the yard. There was, however, no +repetition of the firing, and a few minutes later Peters came in and +reported that the Zulus had discovered a number of Boers making their +way cautiously forward. Both had fired, and some shots had been +returned, but the Boers had at once drawn off. + +"I don't suppose we shall hear any more of them. They hoped they might +catch us asleep. Now they find that we are on watch. I expect they will +give up the idea and make off. It is a nuisance having been disturbed, +but I am not sorry for it, for the Boers will have lost a couple of +hours, and even if the horses do not come in we shall still have a +chance of overtaking them. Now, Peters, you had better get forty winks; +I will go out with Brown, Field, and Sankey, and relieve the three out +there. I don't suppose they will come in, but they can take a nap where +they are. You need not send out when the farmers come back; we shall see +them." + +Chris had been nearly two hours on watch when he made out in the bright +moonlight a number of horses and mounted figures going towards the +house. He at once woke the sleepers and called the others in, and by the +time they reached the farm some thirty unmounted ponies, followed by +Carmichael's party and the farmers, came up. + +"We have been longer than we expected," one of the latter said as he +dismounted, "but we were lucky at last in finding this lot together in a +kloof. Have you seen anything of the Boers? We thought we heard a few +shots." + +"Yes, they came here and tried to turn the tables on us; but we had the +Zulus and some of the scouts out. When they found that we were watchful +they decamped. Now, Carmichael, go in with your party and get a cup of +tea." + +"What! are we going to start again?" Carmichael asked rather dismally; +"we were only just getting off to sleep when Willesden, who was on +watch, heard three shots." + +"Some of us have only had an hour's sleep, Carmichael. But there is +another day's work before us, and after that you may sleep for twenty- +four hours if you like." + +"Oh! I suppose I can do it if the others can; still, after seventy-five +miles here, five miles out, and something like five miles chasing the +horses, and five miles back again, I think we have done a pretty good +day's work." "No doubt you have," Chris said, "a thundering good day's +work; but a fellow is not worth calling a fellow if he can't manage to +do two days' work at a stretch for once in a way. At any rate, the +horses will be fresh, which is of much more importance than our being +so; they have had three days' perfect rest. Now, while you are having +your tea we will see about the other arrangements. Of course Mr. Searle +will stop here; he has done double the work that we have. His friends +can do as they like. Naturally we shall be glad to have them with us, +but that is as they choose." + +"Of course we will go with you," one of the colonists said. + +"Thank you! At any rate two of you had better stop with Mr. Searle. +There are the wounded Boers to look after. I see there is a waggon in +the yard; I should think they had better be put in that and carried to +Greytown. If we recover the cattle, we will drive them down there." + +None of the farmers was willing to stay, and at last they had to decide +the question by lot. + +"Now," Chris said, "you gentlemen know the country a great deal better +than we do, and can tell us which way they are most likely to take their +cattle." + +"They are sure to go north, there is no other way for them to go. If the +whole party were together and mounted, they might go up through +Zululand; as it is, they would not venture to do that. They will cross +the Tugela, I should say, between the point where the Mooi runs into it +and its junction with the Buffalo, and go up through Colsie, and then +either through Helpmakaar or Lazarath." + +"Well, I hope we shall catch them long before they get to the Tugela." + +"I expect the cattle will be somewhere near Inadi; there is some good +grazing along there, and as all the loyalists have cleared off long ago +they will have no fear of being disturbed." + +The saddles were transferred from their own horses to the Boer ponies, +and it was finally arranged that the waggon with the wounded should not +start until their return. Jack and the two Zulus were left with them, +and even should another party of Boers come along the six men would be +able to defend themselves till the others returned. Half an hour after +the arrival of Carmichael's party they started in pursuit, and directed +their course for Inadi, as it would have been useless to search for the +Boers, and it was certain that these would make for the point where it +had been arranged that the cattle should cross. It was some fifteen +miles away, and they were confident that they would arrive there before +the Boers, who, bad walkers at the best of times, and disheartened by +their failure, at the loss of many of their companions and of all their +horses, would not have got more than half-way by the time they started. + +It was half-past two when they left, and when they approached Inadi day +was breaking. They had put on their Boer hats, and knew that the men in +charge of the herd would take them to be some of their own party until +they were quite close. To their satisfaction they saw the herd grazing +half a mile south of the village, and it was not until they were within +a hundred yards of the spot where the smoke of a fire showed that the +guard were posted, that they saw any movement. Then a man rose to his +feet, and, looking at them earnestly, gave a shout of alarm. The others +leapt up at once and ran towards their ponies; these were fifty yards +away, and before they could reach them Chris and his party dashed up, +rifle in hand. "Surrender," he shouted in Dutch, "or we fire! Down with +your rifles!" + +Seeing that resistance was useless the Boers threw down their weapons, +and in a minute were tied hand and foot with the ropes from their +saddles. They were then lashed to bushes at some little distance from +each other, so as to prevent their rolling together and loosening each +other's cords. The natives with them had at the first alarm fled at full +speed, and were already out of sight. Then the whole party rode to a +ridge a quarter of a mile back, dismounted at its foot, and crawled up +to the crest. A mile away some fifty men could be seen wearily making +their way on foot towards them. + +"We have done quite enough in the way of fighting," Chris said, "and I +should think that they have had more than enough; we will get them to +surrender if we can. We will wait till they are within forty or fifty +yards and then fire a few shots over their heads, and see what comes of +it. We have good cover here, and they are in the open. They will know +very well that there is not a chance of their getting away, for, as we +have horses and they have none, we could defend any eminence we chose to +occupy, and ride off to another if they were likely to take it. Besides, +they would never be able to cross the river under our fire." + +When the Boers were within eighty yards half a dozen rifles were +discharged. They at once threw themselves on the ground. + +"I will give them a chance of talking it over," Chris said, "then I will +hail them." + +A pause ensued, and the Boers could be heard talking excitedly together. +When he thought that he had given them time enough to appreciate their +condition, Chris shouted in Dutch: + +"Hullo, Boers! We don't want to have to kill you all, which we could +certainly do. You must see that you are at our mercy. If you choose to +surrender you may go home; if you don't, we shall let you lie there as +long as you like, and shoot you down when you get on your feet. I will +give you five minutes to make up your minds." + +At the end of that time one of the Boers held up his rifle with a white +flag tied to it. + +[Illustration: "ONE OF THE BOERS HELD UP HIS RIFLE WITH A WHITE FLAG +TIED TO IT."] + +"That is not good enough for us," Chris shouted. "That trick has been +tried too often. If you surrender, you will take off your bandoliers and +belts and leave them and your rifles behind you, and come forward +unarmed." + +There was a shout of fury among the Boers as they found that their +treacherous design had failed in success. + +"I will give you another five minutes," Chris shouted; "and if you don't +do as I tell you we shall open fire on you." + +Before that time was up the Boers were seen to be taking off their +bandoliers, and one by one they rose and came forward in a body without +their rifles. Chris allowed them to come half-way, so that they could +not, when they found themselves in superior force, run back to their +arms again. He gave the word, and his party rose to their feet. + +"Now," he said, as the Boers came up, "you will turn all your pockets +inside out. I have not the least doubt that you are all taking off +mementos of your visit here." + +Indeed, the pockets of the prisoners were all bulging out. Sullenly the +Boers obeyed the order. The collection was a miscellaneous one. They had +between them the spoil of a dozen farms. Women's finery formed a large +proportion of their loot, and was evidently intended for their wives at +home. Besides this were spoons, forks, and cutlery, chimney ornaments, +children's clothes, several purses, and packets of spare cartridges. + +"That will do very nicely," Chris said, when it had been ascertained +that all the plunder had been disgorged. "Now, gentlemen, you are at +liberty to go, and I wish you a pleasant walk home. It is only about a +hundred miles. Your friends with the cattle shall join you at once. I +have no doubt that you will be able to obtain food from your countrymen +as you go along. You are sure to find friends at all the villages, and +some of you may get ponies at Helpmakaar." + +Then, paying no attention to the curses and threats of the Boers, the +party rode forward and collected the Boer guns, emptied the bandoliers +and belts, and then rode back to the cattle and released the four Boers +with them, and, pointing to their comrades, told them to rejoin them. +Then they collected the cattle, and, driving them before them, rode off. +When they had gone five miles away they halted, and the farmers +undertaking to keep watch by turns, the lads, throwing themselves down, +were in a few minutes fast asleep. + +In four hours they were roused, and continued their course till they +reached the farm. Here they rested till the next morning, then at +daybreak the wounded Boers were placed in a waggon; the ammunition was +divided among the farmers; and the rifles taken from the Boers, and +those that belonged to the killed and wounded, amounting in all to +eighty-one, were, after the charges had been carefully drawn, also +placed in the waggon, Chris saying, "They would be useless to us, and +they may be useful to you, for they will arm all the people in Greytown; +and with eighty magazine rifles you ought to be able to beat off any +parties you may meet. As the cattle are all branded you will have no +difficulty in returning them to their owners; as to the Boer ponies and +saddles, no doubt there are many who have lost their horses who will be +glad of them." + +Then, after renewed expressions of gratitude from the farmers, the party +separated, the colonists going south to Greytown, while the scouts rode +west by the line they had come, and late that evening arrived at +Chieveley. They had intended to halt after crossing the Bushman's river +at Weenan, but they heard the sound of artillery and knew that Buller +was again moving forward. + +Their return created quite an excitement in the camp of the Maritzburg +Scouts, and innumerable questions were asked. + +"We have been on a little business of our own," Chris said. "Beyond the +fact that it has been successful we have nothing to say. You know how +strict the orders are against scouting, and therefore I can only say +that we wanted to give our horses a change of food, and have taken them +three days off." + +"Your horses don't look any better for the change, anyhow," one of the +troopers said. "They look as if they had been worked off their legs." + +"Yes, they look a little drawn, but in a couple of days they will feel +the benefit of it; they were getting too fat before. Some day we may be +able to tell you more about it, but just at present we feel that it is +as well to keep the matter to ourselves. What has been doing here? We +heard the firing; that brought us in, or we should not have been back +till to-morrow." + +"Nothing particular, except that we have been battering them all along +the line. No move has been made yet, but the general idea is that we +shall this time make a try at Hlangwane to-morrow." "I hope we shall +take it," Chris said. "We shall have a good deal more trouble about it +than we should have had at the attack in December, when it was virtually +in our hands, whereas now it looks stronger than any point along the +line." + +Chris, however, was much more communicative to Captain Brookfield, who +said as he entered his tent, "Well, Chris, did you get there in time?" + +"Yes, sir; we caught them as they were attacking the house at ten +o'clock that night. They were too busy to notice us, and we killed +eleven and wounded eighteen, and stampeded their ponies. They bolted on +foot, but came back in hopes of surprising us two hours later, which I +need hardly say they failed to do. Then they made off for the place +where the herds they had captured were waiting for them. We drove their +ponies in, as our own were too much done up to go on, and intercepted +the Boers close to Inadi, and made them surrender. We took their guns, +ammunition, and loot from them, and let them go. There were forty-nine +of them altogether, and we did not see what we were to do with them. We +could not have brought them here without the whole thing being made +public, and we were certainly not disposed to escort them down to +Maritzburg. They will have at least a hundred miles to tramp home. We +recovered all the cattle, about two thousand head. We gave them to the +farmers to find their proper owners, and thirty of the Boer horses that +we captured. I dare say they will pick up some more of them; for as we +were in a hurry, we only drove in as many as we wanted. We have no +casualties. It could hardly be called a fight, it was a sudden surprise, +and they did not stop to count us." + +"Bravo! bravo, Chris! And now I suppose you are going to enlist again?" +"Yes, sir, if you will take us." + +"Certainly I will. Fortunately Buller was at Frere until they moved on +again yesterday, and nobody has missed your little camp as far as I +know, so I don't think that there is any chance of questions being +asked. I will swear you all in again if you will bring the others +round." + + + + +CHAPTER XVIII + +RAILWAY HILL + + +There was little talking that evening. As soon as the tents had been +erected, a cup of cocoa and a biscuit taken, all turned in, and even the +constant booming of the artillery and the occasional sharp crack of +musketry had no effect whatever on their slumbers. Just before Chris lay +down, however, an orderly told him that Captain Brookfield wished to see +him. + +"I have just received orders, Chris, that our brigade of cavalry is to +turn out tomorrow morning to support the infantry. Hildyard, Lyttleton, +and Barton are going. Their object is to carry Cingola, which is the +small peak at the end of the nek extending from it to the high peak of +Monte Cristo. The duty of the mounted infantry will be to clear the +eastern side of the southern end of the range, and to hold the nek +separating it from the highest peak, and so prevent the Boers from their +main position reinforcing the defenders of the lower peak. I think that +your party had better remain in camp, for after doing over seventy miles +today they won't be fit for work tomorrow." "We should not like to be +left behind here, sir, and the hill is not very far away, so that it +would not be hard work for the horses. No doubt we should be dismounted +a considerable part of the day." + +"Then you would rather go, Chris?" + +"Much rather, sir. We should all be terribly disappointed if we could +not go out the first day that there has been a chance of our doing +something." + +"It is always as well to be on the right side, but I hardly think so +many troops will really be required; and I think it is a symptom that a +serious attack will be made in a day or two on Monte Cristo and +Hlangwane. You see, the possession of Cingola and Monte Cristo will take +us pretty well round its flank, and I do not expect the Boers will be so +much prepared there as they are in front." + +An hour before daylight all were out engaged in grooming their horses, +which, having received a hot mash of mealie flour directly they came in +on the previous evening, looked better than could have been expected +after their hard work on two days out of three. By the time they had +finished, the natives had breakfast ready, and they had scarcely eaten +this when a trumpet sounded to horse. Five minutes later the mounted +infantry belonging to the regular regiments and the Colonial Horse +formed up, and, led by Lord Dundonald, marched north-east, followed by +the three infantry brigades and some batteries of artillery. When within +a couple of miles of the nek, the mounted infantry galloped forward, and +selecting a spot where the ascent was gradual, pushed rapidly up the +hill until they reached its brow. Here the horses were placed in a +depression, and the men scattered themselves across the crest. They were +but just in time, for a considerable force of Boers from Monte Cristo +were hurrying along to assist the defenders of Cingola, it having now +become evident to them that this was the point to which the infantry +moving across the plain were making. + +A brisk fire was opened as they approached, and the Boers at once +stopped in surprise, for as they came along they had been unable to see +that the cavalry had quitted the rest of the column, and had therefore +no idea whatever that their way to Cingola was barred. As the rapid fire +showed them that the nek was held in force, they did not think it +prudent to advance farther, but after an exchange of fire fell back to +Monte Cristo. The task of the infantry was now comparatively easy. +Cingola was not held in any great force; and seeing that their retreat +along the nek was cut off, and that they could not hope to resist the +strong force that was approaching, the enemy contented themselves with +keeping up a brisk fire for a time, and then retreated hastily down the +northern face of the hill, and scattered among numerous kopjes between +it and the river. Lyttleton and Hildyard's brigades occupied the peak, +and Barton, with the Fusilier battalions, remained to the left of its +base. + +As the mounted infantry had, before opening fire, taken shelter behind +bushes and rocks, there were only two or three casualties, and they were +much disappointed that the affair had been so trifling. It was afternoon +now, and for the rest of the day comparative quietude reigned, although +Monte Cristo threw an occasional shell on to the crest of Cingola. The +mounted infantry remained all night in their position, acting as an +advanced guard to the infantry; but they had orders to descend the hill +before daybreak and return to Chieveley, there being no water obtainable +for their horses, and their services not being required for the +succeeding operations. The next morning (Sunday) a battery of field- +artillery, which had been taken half-way up Cingola, began to shell +Monte Cristo, and as if this had been the signal, the whole of the +artillery on the plain opened a terrific fire on the entrenchments of +Monte Cristo, Hlangwane, and Green Hill, which was close to Monte +Cristo. + +On the morning of the 18th, Lyttleton and Hildyard's brigades moved +forward to storm the precipitous peak, and Barton's brigade marched +against the tangled and difficult ground that surrounded Green Hill. The +Queen's on the right and the Scotch Fusiliers on the left led the attack +against the peak. The hillside was partly wooded, but although the +smokeless powder gave little indication as to the progress the troops +were making, occasional glimpses of the Boers flitting among the trees +showed that these were falling back. The roar of musketry was +continuous, as Hildyard's brigade and Lyttleton's were both engaged. For +a short time there was a pause, and then Lyttleton's men, having +gathered at the edge of a wood some couple of hundred yards from the +summit, advanced with a rush up the terribly steep rocks. The Boers +fired hurriedly, but the bullets flew for the most part far over the +heads of the Queen's, and then, fearful of being caught by Hildyard's +men, who were also rapidly coming up, they fled hastily. + +The opposition had finally been trifling. The vast majority of the Boers +had cleared off, and the rest, after emptying their magazines, had +followed their example before the troops gained the summit, upon which a +heavy cannonade was at once opened from Grobler's Hill, Fort Wylie, and +other Boer positions. This, however, gradually slackened under the storm +of lyddite shells with which they were pelted by the naval guns, and the +important position of Hlangwane was at last secured, and no time was +lost in getting up guns and preparing for a farther advance. Barton's +brigade had been equally successful in their attack, and half an hour +after the capture of Monte Cristo the Fusiliers crowned the summit of +the wood-covered Green Hill. + +The Boers' defences were now examined, and proved to be of a most +formidable nature. On the south face of the hill the trenches were in +tiers, line behind line. Most of them were fully six feet deep, and in +many cases provided with shelter from the weather by sheets of +corrugated iron, taken from the roofs of the houses in Colenso. In some +cases these were supported by props, and covered with six feet of earth. +These had evidently been used for sleeping and living places. The ground +was strewn with straw, empty tins, fragments of food, bones, cartridge- +cases, old bandoliers, and large quantities of unopened tinned food and +sacks of mealie flour. Here and there were patches of dried blood, +showing where the wounded by our shell had been brought in, and laid +down until they could be removed to the hospital under cover of night. +On the plateau the scene was similar. Here every irregularity of ground +had been utilized, and long lines of trenches intersected it, showing +that the Boers had intended to make a desperate resistance even after we +had won our way up the hill. These were in a similar state of litter and +disorder. + +Although they had saved their guns, they had left behind them large +quantities of ammunition and provisions in the hurried flight, +necessitated by our attack being delivered in a direction from which no +danger had been apprehended, Four waggons full of ammunition had been +left by them in a kloof near the river. These had been observed by the +Engineers in the balloon, and their position had been signalled to the +naval brigade, who, turning their guns upon them, before long succeeded +in blowing them up. + +When the infantry prepared for their final rush the Boers appeared, +indeed, to be entirely disconcerted at an attack from an altogether +unexpected direction. While for weeks they had been working incessantly +to render the hill impregnable, they had prepared it only on the face +against which they made sure the British infantry would dash itself. +Nevertheless, in this, as in every action, the Boers, as soon as they +saw that there was a risk of the position being taken, began early to +make preparations for retreat. While keeping up a very heavy musketry +fire on the woods through which the British infantry were advancing, +they began to withdraw their guns. + +The speed and skill with which on every occasion throughout the war they +shifted heavy pieces of artillery from one point to another, or withdrew +them altogether, was a new feature in warfare. Except when the garrison +of Ladysmith, on two occasions of night sorties, surprised and destroyed +three of their guns, they scarcely lost a piece either in the numerous +actions during our advance to Ladysmith, or in their final retreat from +that town. And similarly on the other side, of the very large number of +guns employed at the fight on the Modder, at Magersfontein, and in the +siege of Kimberley the whole were, with the exception of a few pieces +captured when Cronje was surrounded, withdrawn in spite of the hurried +evacuation of their position, a feat almost unparalleled even in an army +accompanied only by field-artillery, and extraordinary indeed in the +case of works mounting heavy siege-guns. + +No farther advance was made till the afternoon, when General Buller +arrived on the summit of Green Hill, and seeing that Hlangwane was not +entrenched on its northern side, which was completely turned by our +advance, sent Barton's brigade against it. But the loss of Monte Cristo +had for the time quite taken the fight out of the Boers, and after +maintaining a brisk fire for a short period, they evacuated the position +as soon as the infantry neared the summit, and, hurrying down the +western slope, crossed the Tugela. Three camps full of provisions, +blankets, and the necessaries of Boer life fell into the hands of the +captors, together with a large amount of rifle and Maxim ammunition. The +place had been turned into a fortress. Trenches and some breastworks +covered all the approaches by which the Boers might look for an attack, +and as the whole mountain was covered with huge boulders, they were able +to withstand even the storm of lyddite shell that was poured upon them. + +On the following day Hart's brigade received orders to advance towards +Colenso. This was still held in force by the Boers, but was now +commanded by guns that had been got up the slopes of Hlangwane, and on +Tuesday morning General Hart captured the position without serious loss, +the Boers suffering severely from our shrapnel fire as they retreated, +some by the iron bridge and others by a ford. Thorneycroft's Mounted +Infantry, which was called up in the evening, took advantage of the +discovery that a drift existed there, and a squadron forded the river in +spite of a scattered fire from the Boers on the opposite bank. Another +portion of the colonial force occupied Fort Wylie, a redoubt that had +been thrown up by our troops when they occupied Colenso, but had been +abandoned when the advance of the Boers to cut the line between Colenso +and Frere forced them to retire. + +The next morning Thorneycroft's regiment crossed, and, moving to the +left, seized the kopjes facing Grobler's Kloof; the Boers, still +suffering from the effect of their unexpected reverses, offered no +resistance, but, abandoning all their camps, trenches, and redoubts, +retired at once to the hill. The Scouts had followed Thorneycroft's +Horse in support, and now, placing their horses under shelter in the +abandoned entrenchments, prepared to act as infantry should the Boers +take the offensive. This, however, they showed no intention of doing, +and in the afternoon the troops who had crossed were able to examine the +deserted camps. They presented very much the same appearance as those on +Monte Cristo and Hlangwane. Many of them appeared to have been occupied +by men of a better position, as many articles of luxury, choicer food, +wearing apparel, newspapers, Bibles, fruit, and other signs of comfort +littered the places; but even here dirt had reigned supreme. Although +they must have been inhabited for a long time, it could be seen that no +attempts had been made to clear away the refuse, or to make them in any +degree tidy. As was natural, the effect of the heat of the sun on scraps +of food, vegetables, and refuse of all kinds caused a sickening stench, +and the soldiers spent as short a time as possible over their +investigations. One article which would have been found in a British +camp was altogether absent from those of the enemy, and it was a joke +among our troops that the only piece of soap ever captured was found in +the pocket of a dead Boer, and that its wrapper was still unopened. + +The strength of the position was, however, even more surprising than the +state of filth; every trench was enfiladed by another, great boulders +were connected by walls of massive construction, this being specially +the case where guns had been placed in position. Colenso itself had been +in a similar manner rendered almost impregnable to a frontal attack, and +could hardly have been captured by an assaulting force until Hlangwane +had been taken. + +The hills beyond the railway still covered the road bridge by their +fire, and had the troops marched across it they would have suffered +severely. Accordingly a pontoon train was sent through an opening in the +Hlangwane range, and a bridge thrown over the Tugela north of Fort +Wylie. The Dorsets, Middlesex, and Somersets crossed at once, and, +ascending the kopjes, extended their line south until they were in +communication with Thorneycroft's men, holding therefore the railway +line along the river bank nearly half the distance between Colenso and +Pieters station. Other regiments and artillery followed. + +It was now six days since the advance had commenced, and for the past +four fighting had been almost continuous. On Wednesday the three +regiments advanced towards Grobler's Hill in order to ascertain what +force was occupying it. They met with no opposition until they reached +the lower slopes, nor could any Boers be seen moving. Then suddenly a +heavy fire broke out from the boulders which covered the whole face of +the hill, and afforded such perfect shelter that it had not been +considered necessary to form entrenchments. As only a reconnaissance, +and not an attack, had been ordered, the force retired, the Somersets, +who were the leading regiment, having nearly a hundred casualties. The +other regiments had as many more between them. The next day a continuous +fire from all the points held by the Boers showed that large +reinforcements had reached them. The Lancashire Brigade, under Colonel +Wynne, started at two o'clock that afternoon to carry the kopjes up the +Brook Spruit, which ran in the rear of Grobler's Kloof. The Royal +Lancasters led the way, but as soon as they left the shelter of the +ridges by the side of the railway they were exposed to a terrible fire, +both in front and from Grobler's Kloof. The artillery on Hlangwane, and +those still on the plain, endeavoured to silence the enemy's guns, but +though they poured numbers of lyddite and shrapnel shells among them +they were unable to do so. The Lancasters advanced with the greatest +coolness up the spruit, followed by the South Lancasters. As they +pressed forward they were met by a heavy rifle fire both from the kopjes +in front and on the left. The Boers stuck to the hill until the +Lancasters were within a hundred yards, then most of them slunk off. Not +knowing this, the Lancasters lay under shelter for a few minutes until +their ammunition pouches had been replenished, then, being joined by the +South Lancasters and King's Royal Rifles, they rushed to the crest. + +For the past two days the Dublin Fusiliers had been lying near Colenso. +They had suffered very heavily in the first attack at Potgieter's Drift, +but they now volunteered to take Grobler's Hill; and this, aided with +the fire of the artillery and Colonel Wynne's brigade, they did in +gallant style, the Boers being evidently nervous that they might find +their retreat cut off should the Lancasters advance farther up the +spruit. + +On Friday afternoon the Irish Brigade advanced along the line, and then +turned off towards Railway Hill, a steep jagged eminence almost +triangular in shape, with one angle pointing towards the river. The +sides were broken with sharp ledges covered with boulders. The railway +passed through this, separating the last jagged ledge from the higher +portion of the hill, which rises almost precipitously. Running back +several hundred yards at the base of this line was a dip full of thorn +trees. This deep winds round the rear of the hill, and here there was a +large Boer Camp. + +A little farther to the rear was another steep hill, on which the +enemy's Creusot guns were now mounted. Several trenches were cut +alongside the hillsides, and on the crest were some strong redoubts. It +was a most formidable position, but as it seemed to bar all progress +farther up the line, it was necessary to carry it at all costs. The +mounted infantry had, after the skirmish towards Grobler's Kloof, +returned to the camp, as the country was so terribly broken as to be +altogether impracticable for mounted men. + +On Thursday, Captain Brookfield had obtained a pass for himself and +three other officers to go to Hlangwane to view the operations, but one +of these being unwell, Captain Brook-field invited Chris to take his +place. After inspecting the plateau, they made their way down to the +left. Hearing that an attack was about to be made on Railway Hill, they +clambered down until they reached a point where, seated in an open spot +among the trees, they could command a view of what was passing. + +"It is an awful place," Chris said, "and it seems to me almost +impossible to be carried." + +"It is an awful place," Captain Brookfield agreed. "This is one of the +times, Chris, when one feels the advantage of belonging to a mounted +corps, for without being less brave than other men, I should regard it +as an order to meet certain death were I told to attack that rugged +hill. Ah, there are the Irish Brigade!" + +The storming party consisted of the Inniskillings, with companies of the +Dublins, the Connaught Bangers, and the Imperial Light Infantry. From a +building called Platelayer's House at the mouth of the spruit, to the +foot of the hill, the ground was perfectly open to the point where the +left face of Railway Hill rose steeply up, and across this open ground, +a distance of half a mile, the assailants had to march. + +"Here they come!" + +As, in open order, with their rifles at the trail, the Inniskillings +appeared in view, a terrible fire broke out from every ledge of Railway +Hill, while the cannon joined in the roar. The guns on Hlangwane, and +those on the slopes nearer the river, with Maxims and quick-firing guns, +replied on our side. + +"It is awful," Chris said, speaking to himself rather than to the +captain who was standing beside him. "I don't think that even at +Badajos, British soldiers were ever sent on a more desperate enterprise. +It looks as if nothing could live under that fire even now; what will it +be when they get closer?" + +Not a shot was fired by the advancing infantry in reply to the storm of +bullets from the Boer marksmen. Every round of ammunition might be +wanted yet, and it would only be wasted on an invisible foe. They took +advantage of what little shelter could be obtained, sometimes close to +the river bank, sometimes following some slight depression which +afforded at least a partial protection. At last they reached a deep +donga running into the river; this was crossed by a small bridge, and in +passing over it they had to run the gauntlet of the Boer fire. Many fell +here, but the stream of men passed on, and then at a double rushed to a +sheltered spot close to the foot of the ascent, where they had been +ordered to gather. Here they had a breathing space. Their real work was +yet to begin, but already their casualties had been numerous. The +Inniskillings alone had lost thirty-eight killed and wounded. Not a word +had been spoken among the little group on the hill, for the last ten +minutes; they stood with tightly-pressed lips, breath coming hard, and +pale faces looking at the scene. Occasionally a short gasp broke from +one or other as a shell burst in the thick of the men crossing the +little bridge, a cry as if they themselves had been struck. When the +troops gained their shelter there was a sigh of relief. + +"They will never do it," Captain Brookfield said decidedly. "It would +need ten times as many men to give them a chance." + +This was the opinion of them all, and they hoped even now that this was +but the advance party, and that ere long they would see a far larger +body of men coming up. But there were no signs of reinforcements, and at +five o'clock the troops were re-formed and the advance began. They +dashed forward up the hill under a heavy fire, to which the supporting +line replied. The boulders afforded a certain amount of shelter, and of +this the Inniskillings took every advantage, until they reached the last +ledge with comparatively little loss. But the work was still before +them. Leaping over, they rushed down on to the railway line. Here a +wire-fence arrested their course for a moment, and many fell while +getting through or over it. Then they ran across the line, passed +through a fence on the other side, and dashed up the steep angle of the +hill to the first trench. Hitherto the fire of the Boers had been far +less destructive than might have been expected, their attention being +confused and their aim flurried by the constant explosion of lyddite +shell from the British batteries. They had but one eye for their +assailants, the other for the guns, and as each of the heavy pieces was +fired, they ducked down for shelter, only to get up again to take a +hasty shot before having to hide again. + +Thus, then, they were in no condition to reckon the comparatively small +numbers of their assailants, and as they saw the Irishmen dashing +forward, cheering loudly, with pointed bayonets, they hesitated, and +then bolted up the hill to the next trench. Instead of waiting until the +supports had come up for another rush, the Irishmen with a cheer dashed +across the trench in hot pursuit. But the next line was far more +strongly manned, and a storm of bullets swept among them. Still, for a +time they kept on, but wasting so rapidly that even the most desperate +saw that it could not be done; and, turning, the survivors retreated to +the trench that they had already won, while the supports fell back to +the railway, both suffering heavily in the retreat. No fewer than two +hundred of the Inniskillings had fallen in that desperate charge, their +colonel and ten officers being either killed or wounded, while the +Dublins also lost their colonel. + +All through the night the trench was held sternly, in spite of repeated +and desperate efforts of the Boers to dislodge its defenders. Nothing +could be done for those who lay wounded on the hill above. Morning +broke, and the fight still continued. At nine o'clock another desperate +charge was made; but the Boers were unable to face the steady fire that +was maintained by the defenders of the trench, and they again turned and +ran for their shelters. Just as this attack was repulsed, Lyttleton's +brigade arrived on the scene, exchanging a hearty cheer with the men who +had so long borne the brunt of this terrible conflict. The Durham Light +Infantry at once relieved those in the trenches, and these descended the +hill for the rest that was so much needed. All that day the fighting +continued, and while Lyttleton's men held to the position on Railway +Hill, there was fierce fighting away to the left, where the Welsh +Fusiliers and other regiments were hotly engaged. The roar of artillery +and musketry never ceased all day, but towards evening white flags were +hoisted on both sides, and a truce was agreed upon for twelve hours to +bury the dead. + +The scene of the conflict presented a terrible sight. The hillside +between the two trenches was strewn with dead and wounded. The +sufferings of the latter had been terrible. For six-and-thirty hours +they had lain where they fell, their only relief being a little water, +that in the short intervals during the fighting some kindly Boers had +crept down to give them. The truce began at four o'clock in the morning +of Sunday the 25th, and the foes of the previous day mingled with each +other in the sad work, conversing freely with each other. The Boers +expressed their astonishment that such an attempt should ever have been +made, and their stupefaction at the manner in which the Irish had +pressed on through a fire in which it had seemed that no human being +could have existed for a minute. When informed of the relief of +Kimberley, and the fact that Cronje was hopelessly surrounded, they +scoffed at the news as a fable, and were so honestly amused that it was +evident they had been kept absolutely in the dark by their leaders. +Captain Brookfield and his party had remained at the lookout until +darkness set in. After the first exclamation of pain and grief as they +saw the attack fail, and the fearfully thinned ranks run back to +shelter, there had been little said. "It was impossible from the first," +Captain Brookfield sighed as they turned. "If the relief of Ladysmith +depends on our carrying that hill, Ladysmith is doomed to fall." + +They returned to the spot where they had left their horses in charge of +two of the blacks, and rode back to Chieveley. It was a sorrowful +evening. The men's hopes had risen daily as position after position had +been carried, and now it seemed that once again the enterprise had +hopelessly failed. On Monday there was a continuation of the lull of +firing. Many of the officers in camp who were off duty rode up to +examine the scene of the fight, and they were not surprised when they +saw the infantry recrossing the pontoon bridge. All wore a dejected +aspect, but especially the men who had fought so heroically and, as it +now seemed, in vain. They sat watching until the last soldier had +crossed, and then rode to the top of Hlangwane. All Chris's party had +come out, and those who had not before seen the view waited there for a +couple of hours, ate some refreshment they had brought with them, +discussed the difficulties that lay in the way of farther advance, and +the probable point against which General Buller would next direct his +attack. + +"Hullo!" Chris exclaimed suddenly, "that pontoon train is not coming +back to camp. Do you see, after moving to the point where it passed +through this range, it has turned to the north again and not to the +south. Hurrah! Buller is not going to throw up the sponge this time. The +Boers have not done with us yet." This indeed was the case. The general, +seeing that Railway Hill was too strong to be carried by assault, unless +with an enormous loss of life, had caused the river to be reconnoitred +some distance farther up, and this had resulted in the discovery of a +spot where, with some little labour, the troops could get down to the +river and a pontoon bridge be again thrown. Such a spot was found by +Colonel Sandbach of the Royal Engineers, and a strong working party was +at once set to work to make a practicable approach. The point lay some +three or four miles below Railway Hill, and the most formidable of the +obstacles would therefore be turned. That night the troops crossed, and +the Boers--who were in ignorance of what had been going on, the point +chosen for the passage being at the bend of the river and hidden by an +intervening eminence from their positions--were astonished at finding a +strong force again across the river. + +As soon as the news reached the camp that the army was again crossing, +satisfaction took the place of the deep depression that had reigned +during the past two days, and the situation was eagerly discussed. Those +who at all knew the country were eagerly questioned as to the ground +farther on near the line of railway. All these agreed that the hill +called Pieter's was a formidable position, almost, though not perhaps +quite, as strong as Railway Hill, but that beyond it the line ran +through a comparatively open country, and that if this hill could be +captured the relief of Ladysmith would be ensured. The Scouts had not +escaped altogether scatheless. At the reconnaissance towards Grobler's +Hill, Brown, Harris, and Willesden had all been wounded, but none very +seriously, although at first it was thought that Willesden's was a +mortal injury, for he had been hit in the stomach. The doctors, however, +assured his anxious comrades that there was every ground for hope, for +very many of those who had been so injured had made a speedy recovery. + +"Poor old Willesden!" Field had said as they talked it over; "it is hard +that he should have been hit in the stomach, for he was a capital hand +at taking care of it." + +"And of ours too, Field. He has been a first-rate caterer. I do hope he +will pull through it." The lad himself had not seemed to suffer much +pain, and three days later the surgeon had been able to assure his +friends that as no fever had set in they had little fear of serious +consequences ensuing. The boys had not been allowed to see him. Captain +Brookfield, however, reported that he was going on capitally, but was in +a very bad temper because he was allowed to eat nothing but a piece of +bread and a sip of milk, while he declared himself desperately hungry, +and capable of devouring a good-sized leg of mutton. + +"I don't think you need worry about him," he said to Chris; "the doctor +told me that in a fortnight he would be very likely to be about again, +and none the worse for the wound, the bullet having evidently missed any +vital point, in which case its passage would heal as quickly as the +little wounds where the bullet enters and passes out usually do." + +Harris had his arm broken just above the elbow, and Brown a flesh wound +below the hip. He was the stoutest of the party, and jokingly said, as +he was carried back, that the bullet had passed through the largest +amount of flesh in the company. Chris once or twice went into the +hospitals with a doctor whose acquaintance he had made. They offered a +strong contrast to the scene that had taken place after the battle of +Elandslaagte, as in the hospitals at Chieveley and Frere everything was +as admirably arranged as they would have been in one of a large town. In +the daytime the sides of the marquees were lifted to allow of a free +passage of air. The nurses in their neat dresses moved quietly among the +patients with medicines, soups, jellies, and other refreshments ordered +for them. There were books for those sufficiently convalescent to be +able to read them, and those who wished to send a letter home always +found one of the nurses ready to write at their dictation. By some of +the bedsides stood bouquets of flowers sent by the ladies of Maritzburg, +and all had an abundance of delicious fruit from the same source. + + + + +CHAPTER XIX + +MAJUBA DAY + + +"Did you hear of that plucky action of Captain Philips, of the Royal +Engineers, last night?" an officer who had just ridden in from the front +asked Chris that evening. + +"No; I heard that the Boers set up a tremendous musketry fire in the +evening after the truce was over, but no one that I have spoken to knew +what it was about." + +"Well, we ourselves didn't know till next morning. The general idea was +that it was a Boer scare. They thought that we were crawling up to make +a night attack, and so blazed away for all they were worth. We found out +afterwards that Philips had conceived the idea that it was possible to +destroy that search-light of the Boers. He had learned from prisoners +that it was the last they had with them, and although we have not made +any night attacks yet, it was possible we might do so in the future, and +so he made up his mind to have a try to smash it up. He took with him +eight blue-jackets, crawled along in the dark beyond our lines, and got +in among the Boers. He had taken particular notice of points he should +have to pass, boulders and so on, and he found his way there without +making a blunder. There were plenty of Boers round, but no one just at +the search-light. The blue-jackets all understood the working of their +own search-lights; but the Boers have no electric lights, you know, and +work their signals with acetylene, and so they stood on guard while +Philips opened the lamp, took out the working parts, whatever they are, +and shut the lamp again. Just as they had done so they heard four Boers +who had been sitting talking together get up. He and his party dropped +among the bushes and lay there quiet while the Boers came up to the +lamp. + +"'We are to keep it going to-night,' one of them said, 'for they may +take it into their heads to make an attack, thinking that after having +had a truce all day we shall not be expecting trouble, and they may +catch us unprepared. I expect our German officer in a few minutes; he +said he would be here about ten o'clock, for the rooineks are not likely +to move until they think we are asleep.' + +"They moved away again, and Philips and his men stole quietly off, but +before they rejoined our fellows they heard a sudden shot, and in a +minute a tremendous rifle fire broke out. Evidently the German had +arrived and found the search-light would not act, and they concluded at +once that we were marching against them, and for twenty minutes every +man in the trenches blazed away at random as fast as he could load. I +should say that they must have wasted a hundred thousand cartridges. As +there was no reply they began to think that they had been fooled. Our +fellows were just as much puzzled at the row, and fell in, thinking that +the Boers might possibly be going to attack them. However, matters +quieted down, and it was not until the next morning that anyone knew +what it had all been about." + +"That was a plucky thing indeed," Chris said; "though, as I should +hardly think we should attack at night, it may not be of much service, +for the Boers have long since given up trying with their feeble flash- +lights to interrupt our night signalling with Ladysmith, especially as, +now the weather is finer, we can talk all day if we like with our +heliograph." + +Chris was just turning in when Captain Brookfield came to the entrance +of his tent. "I have just heard, Chris, that the pontoon bridge has been +successfully thrown across just below the cataract, and that the troops +are all crossing. I just mention it to you. I cannot get away myself, +but if I find you and your boys are--not here in the morning, I shall +say nothing about it. We certainly shall not be wanted. The orders are +out, and there is no mention of our corps nor any of the mounted +colonials." + +"Thank you, sir! I am very much obliged." Chris went round to the tents +and told the others that they must be up an hour before daybreak and be +ready to start at once, as there would probably be another very big +fight. Then he told the natives, who were, as usual, still talking +together in their tent, that they were all going off very early, and +that chocolate must be ready at daybreak, and the water-skins filled, as +the horses would probably be out all day. + +"Will you want anything cooked, baas?" Jack asked. + +"No; we will take some tins with us. There is going to be another big +fight to-morrow; as we are all going, you can go too if you like. We +shall want you for the horses. Three of you can stop with them at a +time, and the others can go and see what is doing, and then change +about, you know, so that you can all see something. The spare horses +must have plenty of food left them, and must have a good drink before we +start." + +They were all astir in good time. The natives had made some hot cakes, +and these they ate with their chocolate. Then they saw that the horses +had a good feed, and a stock of biscuit and tinned meat for themselves +was put into the saddle-bags, and when daylight broke they were across +the plain and arrived at the dip in the hills through which the pontoon +train had gone. Knowing where the cataract was, they were able to +calculate pretty accurately where they had best dismount. This they did +in a small clump of trees. Then each took a tin of meat and a couple of +pounds of biscuit in his pocket. "Now," Chris said to the natives, "you +had better all stay here quietly till you hear firing begin; then, Jack, +you can go with the two Zulus. You can stay and look on till the middle +of the day. When the sun is at its highest you must come back and let +Japhet and the Swazis go. At sunset you must all be here again, and wait +till we come. Perhaps we may be back sooner, and if so we shall ride +away at once; and those of you who are away when we start must go back +to camp at once if you find that the horses have gone when you get here. +Now let's be off." + +They made their way up the hills, well pleased that there were enough +trees and bushes to shield them from observation. The roar of artillery +and the rattle of musketry had been going on for some time, but not with +the fury that marked the commencement of an attack. A fortnight before +it would have seemed to them that a great battle was in progress, but by +this time they were accustomed to the almost incessant fire, and knew +that although the cannonade was heavier than usual, no actual fighting +was going on. They met no officers as they went along, nor did they +expect to do so, for none of these would be able to leave their +regiments, as even were these not included in the force told off to +assault, they might be called upon later in the day. At last they +reached the top of a hill whose face sloped steeply down to the river, +and from here they could obtain a view of the Boer position, and of the +line of railway up and down. + +To the right was Pieter's station, with a steep hill of the same name +rising close to it. To the left of this was another strongly-posted +hill, while beyond it was the scene of the fighting on Friday and +Saturday, Railway Hill, which had been rechristened Hart's Hill, in +honour of the commander of the brigade that had fought so valiantly. It +was evident that at these three points the whole of the fighting force +of the Boers had gathered. A heavy rifle fire was being kept up against +the British infantry, whose passage of the river had now been +discovered, and who were lying crouched behind boulders and other +shelter. + +They now saw that the guns had all been brought forward during the +night, had taken up commanding positions, and were pouring a terrible +fire into the enemy's encampment at a distance of little over a mile. +The enemy's guns were replying, but at this short range the naval guns +were able to fire point-blank, and their shells ripped the defences +erected to shelter the Boer camp into fragments, and carried destruction +everywhere. + +On a kopje about a quarter of a mile behind and above them General +Buller and his staff had taken up their position, and the lads kept +themselves well within the trees to avoid observation. + +"See, Chris, there are some of our fellows creeping along by the side of +the river. They must be hidden from the sight of the Boers. I expect +they will be the first to begin." + +All their glasses were turned upon the column of men. They were two +battalions of the eth Brigade and the Dublin Fusiliers, and these, under +General Barton's command, made their way down the river bank for a mile +and a half. Then the lads saw that they were leaving the river and +crossing the line of railway. + +"They have evidently gone down there," Sankey said, "because that spur +just this side must hide them from the Boers on Pieter's Hill." + +The column were lost sight of for upwards of an hour, and then they +appeared on the opposite crest, five hundred feet above the line; then +they were lost sight of again as they passed beyond the crest. + +"That is a splendid move!" Chris exclaimed. "By working round there they +will gain the top of Pieter's Hill, and come down like a thunderbolt +upon the Boers." + +The roar of artillery continued unabated. Clouds of yellowish-brown +smoke floated over the Boer entrenchments, lit up occasionally by a +vivid flash of a bursting lyddite shell. So terrible was the bombardment +that the rifle fire of the Boers against the troops crouching behind +their shelters was feeble and intermittent, as they dared not merge from +their shelter-places to lift a head above their line of trenches. It was +a long time before Barton's troops were again seen. Doubtless they had +orders to wait for a time when they had gained their desired position, +in order to allow the bombardment to do its work, and prepare the way +for the assault of the other positions by the fourth and eleventh +brigades. It was not, indeed, until the afternoon that the lads saw +Barton's brigade sweeping along to the attack of Pieter's Hill. + +The Boers saw them now, and could be seen leaping out of their +entrenchments, regardless of the redoubled fire of the artillery now +concentrated upon them, and climbing up the hill to oppose this +unexpected attack. But before they could gather in sufficient numbers +the British were upon them, keeping up a terrible fire as they advanced. +The Boers, however, fought sturdily. Many, indeed, had already begun to +make their way along the southern face of the hill, either to join their +comrades on the hill between Pieter's and Hart's, or to escape up the +valleys between them, and so make their way to Bulwana, where a large +force was still encamped. + +"We may as well help," Chris said; "the general can but blow us up." + +Delighted to be able to do even a little towards the success of the day, +the party at once picked up their rifles lying beside them. + +"It is about a thousand yards, I should say, to the middle of the hill. +Take steady aim and try and pick them off as they leave their trenches." + +The firing began at once slowly and steadily, and occasionally there was +an exclamation of satisfaction when a bullet found its mark. Five +minutes later a dismounted staff-officer came down to the trees behind +them. + +"What men are these?" he asked; "the general wishes to know." + +"We are the Johannesburg Scouts," Chris said. + +"Are you in command, sir?" + +"Yes." + +"Then, will you please to accompany me at once to the general." + +On arriving at the spot where the general was standing a little in +advance of his staff, the latter at once recognized Chris. "Oh, it is +you, Mr. King!" he said. "I was afraid some of the men had left their +stations. And what are you doing here?" + +"We are trying to lend a hand to the troops over there, and as we are +all good shots, I think we are being of some assistance." + +"You had no right to leave the camp, sir. I suppose you call this +independent service?" + +"I do, general. I hope that we are affording some help here, and we +should not be doing any good in camp; and as we have been nearly out of +it through all this fighting, and there were no orders for the corps to +do anything to-day, we thought we might be of use." + +"You did wrong, sir," the general said, his face relaxing into a smile +at the lad's defence of himself. "Well, as you are there, you may as +well stop." + +"Thank you, sir!" Chris said, saluting, and then hurried off to rejoin +his comrades. + +"He is a plucky boy," the general said to his staff. "I heard the other +day--though not officially, so I was not obliged to take notice of it-- +that he, with the twenty lads with him, rode out to a place seventy +miles away, and rescued some farmers who were besieged by Boers, +defeated their assailants, killed and wounded more than their own +number, made the rest of them, still double their own strength, lay down +their arms, and recaptured nearly two thousand head of cattle they had +driven off. The news came to me from the mayor of Maritzburg, who had +heard of it from a friend who had ridden in from Grey town. He wrote to +me expressing his admiration at the exploit. I sent privately to their +captain and questioned him about it, intending to reprimand him severely +for letting them go; but he said that they had all resigned, as they had +a right to do, for they are all sons of gentlemen, and draw no pay or +provisions, and that he had therefore no control whatever over their +actions after they left camp. I told him not to say anything about his +having seen me, for that, as they had returned, I should be obliged to +take notice of the matter if it came to be talked about. That young +fellow who came here is the one who, with three of the others, tried to +blow up the bridge at Komati-poort. He could not do that, but he played +havoc with a large store of rifles, ammunition, and six or eight guns. +After that I could not very well scold him." And he again turned his +glass on the opposite hill. + +Here the fighting was almost over, and in a very short time all +resistance had ceased. Some of the Boer guns on the next hill had now +been turned round, and opened upon the captured position, which took +their own in flank. An aide-de-camp was sent off to order some of the +guns to be taken, if possible, up to the top of Pieter's Hill, and after +immense exertions two batteries were placed there. As soon as this was +accomplished, orders were sent for the rest of the infantry to advance. +General Warren was in command, and the fourth brigade, under Colonel +Norcott, and the eleventh, under Colonel Kitchener, now moved forward, +taking advantage of what shelter could be obtained as they advanced. At +the same time a strong force of colonial infantry moved to the right to +attack the Boer trenches farther up the line of railway, and were soon +hotly engaged. The defenders of Hart's Hill, and the position between +that and Pieter's, opened a heavy fire as soon as the British infantry +showed themselves; but their morale was so shaken by the terrific +bombardment to which they had been subjected, by the loss of Pieter's +Hill, and by the rifle fire now opened by its captors, that their fire +was singularly ineffective. Many men dropped, but the loss was +comparatively much smaller than that suffered by the Irish division when +moving across the open on the 23rd. + +Taking advantage of every shelter, the troops moved steadily forward, +maintaining a heavy fire whenever they did so, and winning their way +steadily. Colonel Kitchener's Brigade pressed on towards Hart's Hill, +which on the side by which they now attacked was far less formidable +than that against which the Irish had dashed themselves. It had never +entered the Boer's minds that they would be attacked from this side, and +their most formidable entrenchments had all been placed to resist an +assault from Colenso. Arrived at its foot, the troops were in +comparative shelter among the boulders that covered the slopes. Foot by +foot they made their way upwards, until at last they gathered for a +final assault, and then with a loud cheer scrambled up the last slope +and with fixed bayonets drove the Boers in headlong flight. A similar +success attended the eleventh brigade, who just at sunset carried the +centre position, and a mighty cheer broke out all along the line at the +capture of what all felt to be the last serious obstacle to their +advance to Ladysmith. On the right, the Colonial troops had driven the +Boers in front of them for nearly three miles, capturing entrenchment +after entrenchment, until they arrived at Nelthorpe station. The three +camps of the Boers contained an even larger amount of spoil than had +been discovered in those of Monte Cristo and Hlangwane. It seemed that +they had been perfectly confident that the positions were impregnable, +and had accumulated stores sufficient for a prolonged residence. It was +evident, too, that the wealthier men with them had preferred this +situation to the more exposed camps on the summit of the hills. The +amount of provisions and stores of all kinds was large, Great quantities +of rifle ammunition were found in every trench. Clothes of a superior +kind proved that their owners had been residents of Johannesburg or +Pretoria, and of a different class altogether from the farm-labourers +and herdsmen who formed the majority of the Boer army. The haste with +which they had fled, when to their astonishment they discovered that the +British attack could not be repulsed, was shown by the fact that a good +many watches were found on bed-places and rough tables where they had +been left when the Boers rushed to arms, and in the hurry of flight had +been forgotten. + +The number of rifles that had been thrown away was very large. Among the +dead bodies found were those of two women, one quite young and the other +over sixty. It was notorious that women had more than once been seen in +the firing ranks of the Boers, and there were reports that Amazon corps +were in course of formation in the Transvaal, the Boers, perhaps, +remembering how sturdily the women of Haarlem had fought against the +Spaniards in defence of their city. + +So complete had been the panic evinced by the headlong fight of the +enemy that the general opinion was that it would be some time before +they would again attempt a stand against our men, and that unless any +entrenchments higher up the valley were held by men who had not +witnessed what had taken place, and were commanded by leaders of the +most determined character, Ladysmith would almost certainly be relieved +within a couple of days, and the rescuing army would be thus rewarded +for its toils and sacrifices. + +In a state of the wildest delight the lads returned to the spot where +they had left their horses, where they found that Japhet and the two +Swazis had arrived just before them. They and the Zulus were exhibiting +their intense satisfaction at the defeat of the Boers by a wild war- +dance. The party rode fast back to camp, for their spirits did not admit +of a leisurely pace, and they left the natives to follow them more +deliberately. The news had already been received in camp by the return +of officers who witnessed the scene from a point near to that which the +lads had attained, and its occupants were in a frenzy of delight. The +Colonial corps were especially jubilant. This was the anniversary of +Majuba Hill, the blackest in the history of the Colony, and one that the +Boers in the Transvaal and Orange State always celebrated with great +rejoicings, to the humiliation of the British Colonists. Now that +disgrace was wiped out. A position even stronger than that of Majuba, +fortified with enormous pains, defended by artillery and by thousands of +Boers, had been captured by a British force, and although it was as yet +unknown in camp, the old reverse had been doubly avenged by the +surrender on that day of Cronje and his army. + +Late that evening an order was issued that Lord Dundonald with a +squadron of Lancers and some Colonial corps, in which the Maritzburg +Scouts were included, were to reconnoitre along the line of railway. All +felt sure that no serious opposition was likely to be met with; the +defeat of the Boers had been so crushing and complete that assuredly few +of the fugitives would be found willing to again encounter the terrible +artillery fire, followed by the irresistible onslaught of the infantry. +That evening, in spite of the scarcity of wood, bonfires were lighted, +and the Scouts gathered round them. Every bottle of spirits and wine +that remained in the camp was broached, and a most joyous evening was +spent. + +"I shall be able to breathe freely;" one of the colonists, a man from +Johannesburg, said, "on Majuba Day in future. I have made a point for +years, whenever I wanted to do any business in Natal, to put it off till +that date, so that I could get out of the Transvaal. When I could not +manage it, I shut myself up and stopped in bed all day, though even +there I used to grind my teeth when I heard the brutes shouting and +singing in the streets. Still, to me it was not half such a humiliation +as surrender day. The one was a piece of carelessness, a military +blunder, no doubt; the other was a national disgrace. And though I saw +Majuba myself, it did not affect me half as much as did the abject +backing down of the British Government after they had collected an army +at Newcastle in readiness to avenge Majuba. We could not believe the +news when it came. The fury of the troops was unbounded, and I would not +have given a farthing for the lives of any of the men who were the +authors of the surrender, had they been in the camp that day." + +"What were you doing there?" Chris asked. + +"I had a farm near Newcastle at that time, and two of my waggons had +been taken up by the military for transport purposes. I was not on the +hill, as you may suppose, or I might not be here to tell the story. I +went forward with Colley. It was just the same then as it was at the +beginning here. There were plenty of colonists ready to take up arms, +but the military authorities would have none of them; they could manage +the thing themselves without any aid from civilians. They knew that the +natives had over and over again beaten the Boers, and what natives could +do would be, merely child's play to British soldiers. Sir George Colley +was a brave officer, and I believe had proved himself a skilful one, but +he knew nothing whatever of the Boer style of fighting, while we +colonists understood it perfectly, and could match them at their own +game. As it turned out, the British soldiers on that occasion did not, +and it made all the difference. If Sir George Colley had accepted a few +hundreds of us, who knew the Boers well, as scouts and skirmishers, the +affair would have turned out very differently; for, as you know, they +did not succeed through the whole affair in taking one of the places +held by our colonists. + +"Well, we started from Newcastle, and the blundering began from the +first. It was but twenty-five miles to Laing's Nek. At the time we +started there was not a Boer there, for they were doubtful which line we +should advance by. That twenty-five miles could have been done in a day, +and there we should have been with our difficulties at an end; the +baggage and stores could have come up in two or three days, and then +another advance could have been made. Instead of that, six days were +wasted in going over that miserable bit of ground. The Boers, of course, +took advantage of the time we had given them to prepare and entrench +Laing's Nek. I don't think that troubled the military authorities at +all; an entrenchment thrown up by farmers and peasants could be but a +worthless affair, and would not for a moment check the advance of +British infantry. The consequence of all this was that we got the +licking we deserved. Their entrenchment at the crest of the ridge was +held by something like three thousand men. Colley had but three hundred +and seventy infantry, a force in itself utterly inadequate for the work +in hand. But, seeing some parties of Boer horsemen riding about, he +thought it necessary to leave a strong body for the defence of his +baggage, and accordingly sent only about two hundred and fifty men +forward to attack the place. + +"Well, we among the waggons hadn't a doubt how it was going to turn out. +The one battery with us opened fire upon the entrenchment, but you who +know what their entrenchments are will guess that there was little +damage done; and when the soldiers went up the hill the Boers held their +fire until they were close, and then literally swept them away, and, +leaping over the entrenchments, took many of them prisoners. None would +have got away at all if a few mounted infantry, who had managed to get +up the Nek at another point, hadn't charged down and so enabled the +survivors to escape. One hundred and eighty out of the two hundred and +fifty were killed or taken prisoners. Colley at once fell back four +miles. The Boers on their part, making sure that they had got him safe, +sent a strong force round, and this planted itself on the road between +him and Newcastle, but before they did so some small reinforcements +joined us. Three or four days passed, and then we Colonials quite made +up our mind that there was nothing for it but surrender. Colley +determined at last to try and open the road back, and with about two +hundred and fifty men, with four cannon--two of them mountain guns-- +moved out. Some sixty soldiers were left on a commanding spot to cover +the passage of the Ingogo. As soon as the force under Colley had got to +the opposite crest of the ravine through which the river runs, they were +attacked in great force. They took shelter among the boulders, and +fought as bravely as it was possible for men to fight. The guns, +however, were useless, for in half an hour every officer, man and horse, +was killed or wounded. However, the Boers could not pluck up courage to +make a rush, and the little force held on till it was dark, by which +time more than two-thirds of them were killed or wounded. A lot of rain +had fallen, the Boers thought that the Ingogo could not be forded, and +so, believing they would have no trouble in finishing the little force +in the morning, they were careless. Colley, however, sent down and found +that the water had not risen so high as to make it impossible to pass, +and in the darkness, covered by the blinding rain that was falling, he +and the survivors moved quietly off, crossed the river, picked up the +party left on the eminence commanding it, and returned to camp. + +"It was certain now that unless succoured our fate was sealed, but +fortunately Evelyn Wood came up to Newcastle with a column that had been +pressing forward from the sea. Colley, of course, ought to have waited +for him to arrive before he moved at all, and if he had done so, things +might have turned out very differently. But he made the mistake of +despising the Boers, and thinking that it was nothing but a walk over. +When they heard that the column had reached Newcastle the Boers cleared +off the line of communication, and Colley rode into Newcastle and saw +Wood. We felt that we were well out of a bad business; and were sure +that the Boers, who are no good in attack, however well they fight +behind shelter, would not venture to attack us, and that even if they +did so we could keep them off till help came. But Colley could not let +well alone. Instead of waiting till Wood came up and joined him, lie +thought he might make a good stroke on his own account, and so retrieve +the two defeats he had suffered; so when the 92nd Regiment came up he +determined to seize Majuba Hill. + +"It was well worth seizing, for it completely commanded the Boer's +position on Laing's Nek, and had the whole force come up the Boers must +have fallen back directly it was captured. However, Colley decided not +to wait, and with about five hundred and fifty men and officers he +started at night. The hill was only four miles off as the crow flies, +but the ground was frightfully cut up, and it was not until after six +hours of tremendous work that they reached the summit. Two hundred men +were left at the bottom of the hill to keep open communications with the +camp. + +"From a hill close to the camp we could make out what was going on. Soon +after daybreak we saw a party of mounted men ride towards the hill, +where they usually stationed vedettes. They were fired at as they +approached, and directly a turmoil could be seen on Laing's Nek. Waggons +were inspanned, and we thought at first that they were all going to move +off, but this was not so. They were only getting ready to go if they +failed to recapture the hill, and in a short time we could see all their +force moving towards it. Well, from where we were it seemed that the +force on Majuba could have kept a hundred thousand Boers at bay, and so +they ought to have done. + +"For a time the Boers did not make much progress. With glasses, puffs of +smoke could be made out all along the crest, and among the rocks below. +The firing began in earnest at seven, and between twelve and one the +Boer fire had ceased and ours died away. We thought it was all over, and +went back to our waggons again. Soon after one o'clock there was a +sudden outburst, and the men with the glasses observed that the Boers +were close up to the top of the hill. A few minutes later it was on the +plateau itself that the firing was going on. + +"Colley had not known the Boers. No doubt his men were completely done +up with their six hours' toil among the hills and six hours' fighting, +and I don't think a tenth of them were ever engaged, for Colley thought +it was impossible that the position could be stormed; so he only kept a +handful of men at the edge of the plateau and allowed the rest to lie +down and sleep. Certainly that was the case when the Boers, who had been +crawling up among the rocks and bushes, made their rush. + +"Well, you all know what happened. The few men on the edge were cut down +at once. The Boers dashed forward, keeping up a heavy fire. Our fellows +jumped up, but numbers were shot down as they did-so, and in spite of +the efforts of their officers, a panic seized them. They had far better +rifles than the Boers, and had they been steady might still have driven +them back; but only a few of them ever fired a shot, and but one Boer +was killed and five wounded; while on our side eight officers, among +them Colley himself, were killed, and seven taken prisoners. Eighty-six +men were killed, one hundred and twenty-five wounded, fifty-one taken +prisoners, and two missing. A few managed to make their way down the +hill, and joined the party that had been left there at the bottom. + +"These were also attacked, but beat off the Boers, and, maintaining +perfect order, fought their way back to camp. You can imagine the +consternation there was when the hideous business became known. We fell +back at once to Newcastle, and mightily lucky we thought ourselves to +get there safely. Fresh troops came up, and we were on the point of +advancing again, confident that, after the lesson the Boers had given +us, things could be managed better. Suddenly, like a thunderclap, the +news came that the British Government had surrendered to the Boers, +given up everything, abandoned the colonists, who had so bravely +defended their towns, to their fate; and, with the exception of making a +proviso that the natives should be well treated--but which, as nothing +was ever done to enforce it, meant allowing the Boers to enslave and +ill-treat them as they had done before--and another proviso, maintaining +the purely nominal supremacy of the Queen, the treaty was simply an +entire and abject surrender. + +"There is not a colonist who, since that time, has not known what must +come of it, and that sooner or later the question whether the Dutch or +the British were to be masters of the Cape would have to be fought out. +But none of us dreamt that the British Government would allow the Boers +to import hundreds of thousands of rifles, two or three hundred cannon, +and enormous stores of ammunition in readiness for the encounter. Well, +they have done it, and we have seen the consequences. Natal has been +overrun, and a considerable portion of Cape Colony. We have lost here +some ten thousand men, and half as many on the other side, and we may +lose as many more before the business is finished. And all this because +a handful of miserable curs at home twenty years ago were ready to +betray the honour of England, in order that they might make matters +smooth for themselves at home." Just as the story came to an end the +assembly blew in the camp of the Scouts, and on running in the men found +that Captain Brookfield had received an order to mount at once and ride +to join the cavalry under Lord Dundonald at the front, as a +reconnaissance was to be made in the morning. Five minutes later all +were in the saddle and trotting across the plain towards Colenso, as +they were to follow the line of railway up. + + + + +CHAPTER XX + +LADYSMITH + + +It was exciting work as the mounted horse under Lord Dundonald rode +along. As far as could be seen from the various points in our possession +the passage was clear, but experience had taught how the Boers would lie +quiet, even when in large numbers, while scouts were passing close to +them. At Colenso Colonel Long had sent two mounted men on ahead of his +battery. They had been permitted to pass within a hundred yards of +thousands of Boers among the bushes on the river bank, and had even +crossed the bridge and returned without a rifle shot being fired or a +Boer showing his head. And it was on their report that there were +apparently no Boers in the neighbourhood that the batteries were pushed +forward into the fatal trap prepared for them. So Chris and his +companions, at the rear of the colonial cavalry, trotted along ready at +a moment's notice to swing round their rifles for instant action. They +watched every stone and clump of bushes on the slopes of the valley for +any foe that might be lurking there, and who at any moment might pour +out a rain of bullets into the column. Very few words were spoken on the +way, the tension was too great. They knew that Ladysmith had telegraphed +that the Boers appeared to be everywhere falling back. But a few +thousands of their best fighting men might have remained to strike one +terrible blow at the troops who in open fight had shown themselves their +superiors, and had driven them from position after position that they +believed impregnable. However, as one after another of the spots where +an ambuscade would be likely to be laid passed, and there were still no +signs of the enemy, the keenness of the watch began to abate, and the +set expression of the faces to relax. Then as the hills receded and the +valley opened before them a pleasurable excitement succeeded the grim +expectation of battle. The task that had proved so hard was indeed +fulfilled; the Boers were gone, and the siege of Ladysmith was at an +end. As they emerged from the valley into the plain in which Ladysmith +is situated, there was an insensible increase of speed; men talked +joyously together, scarcely waiting for replies; the horses seemed to +catch the infection of their riders' spirits, and the pennons of the +Lancers in front to flutter more gaily. Onward they swept, cantering now +until they approached the town. + +Then men could be seen running towards the road; from every house they +poured out, men and women, some waving hats and handkerchiefs, some too +much overpowered by their feelings for outward demonstrations. As the +columns reached this point they broke into a walk, and answered with +ringing cheers the fainter but no less hearty hurrahs of those they came +to rescue; and yet the troopers themselves were scarcely less affected +than the crowd that pressed round to shake them by the hand. They had +known that provisions were nearly exhausted in the city, and that for +some time past all had been on short rations; but they had not dreamt of +anything like this. It seemed to them that they were surrounded by a +population of skeletons, haggard and worn, almost too weak to drag +themselves along, almost too feeble to shout, their clothes in rags, +their eyes unnaturally large, their hands nerveless, their utterances +broken by sobs. They realized for the first time how terrible had been +the privations, how great the sufferings of the garrison and people of +Ladysmith. For the soldiers were there as well as the civilians. There +was little military in their appearance; there was no uniformity in +their dress, save that all were alike ragged, stained and destitute of +colour. + +Could their rescuers have seen them, themselves unseen, a few days +earlier, they would have been even more shocked. Then the listlessness +brought about by hope deferred, and of late almost the extinction of +hope, weakness caused by disease and famine, had been supreme; and had +the Boers had any idea of the state to which they were reduced, a +renewal of the attack of the eth of January could hardly have failed of +success. The last few days, however, had revived their hopes. They had +learned by the ever-nearing roar of the cannon that progress was being +made, and for the past four days had from elevated points near the town +been able to make out the movements of our troops on the positions they +had captured. They had seen the Boers breaking up their camps, carrying +off their stores either by waggon across the western passes or by the +trains from Modder Spruit. They had seen the cannon being withdrawn from +their positions on the hills, and felt that their deliverance was at +hand. + +Through an ever-increasing crowd the column moved on. + +[Illustration: THE RELIEF OF LADYSMITH.] + +From barrack and hospital, from dwelling-house and the dug-out shelter- +caves on the railway bank people flocked up. Sir George White and his +staff, the mayor, and the town guards, every officer and soldier, joined +in the greeting. But no stay was made. After a few minutes' talk with +Sir George White, Lord Dundonald gave the order, and the cavalry moved +forward, and as soon as they were free from the crowd trotted on at a +rapid pace in hopes of overtaking the retiring Boers, and glad that the +scene to which they had looked forward with such pleasant expectations +was at an end. There had not been a dry eye among them. None could have +witnessed the sobbing women, the men down whose cheeks the tears +streamed uncontrolledly, and have remained himself unmoved. + +"It is terrible," Chris said to Sankey, who was riding next to him. "I +could not have imagined anything so dreadful as their appearance. I did +not realize what it was like when, two or three months before I left +Johannesburg, I read in Motley's book about the war in the Netherlands +of the state of things in Leyden when the Prince of Orange burst his way +through to their rescue, and of the terrible appearance of the starved +inhabitants, but now I can quite understand how awfully bad it was. It +must have been even worse then. Here there were some rations +distributed--little enough, but some. There the people had nothing but +the weeds they gathered, and boiled down with the scraps they could pick +up. There they died in hundreds of actual starvation; it cannot have +been quite so bad here. But as we see, though there has been just enough +food to keep life together, that has been all, and it has been from +disease brought on by famine, and not by famine itself, that they have +died. Then, too, shells were always falling among them, and at any +moment they might be attacked. I expect that anxiety and fever have had +as much to do with it as hunger." + +"Yes, Chris. You know, when we were grumbling sometimes at not being +employed in the fighting, we have wished we had stopped in Ladysmith, +and gone through the siege there; now, one can thank God that one did +not do so. We have pictured to ourselves everyone actively employed, the +vigilance at all the outposts, the skirmishing with the Boers who crept +up too closely, the excitement of repelling their attack, and all that +sort of thing. It is all very good to read about, but now we know what +it really meant one sees that we were a pack of fools to have wished to +be there." + +"Yes; I suppose one never knows what is g'ood for one, Sankey. Now as I +look back I think that we have been extraordinarily fortunate. We have +had some fights, just in the way we had expected, and, thanks +principally to our being so well mounted, we have done very well. We +have lived well; I don't say we have not had a certain amount of +discomfort, but of course we expected that. What I am most pleased at is +that not one of us has been killed, and only a few of us wounded, the +only serious one being Willesden, and he is fairly on the way to +recovery. For boys we have done a very good share, and I expect that now +we have driven the Boers back here, and Kimberley has been relieved, and +there is a tremendous force gathering on that side, it will soon be +over." + +"Yes, I think with you, Chris. And I fancy that the others are all +beginning to long for the end of it. I should say that those whose +people have gone to England may stop on for a bit, but the rest of us +will go to our friends at Durban or the Cape, at any rate for a time, +till we see how things go. We know that Lord Roberts has got Cronje +surrounded and shut up. I expect that is one of the reasons that the +Boers have been moving from here. The Free Staters will certainly wish +to get back to defend Bloemfontein, and the Transvaal people must feel +that it is no use stopping here when their own country will be shortly +invaded." + +"Yes; I expect that is the reason for their shutting up as suddenly as +they have done after fighting so hard for the first five or six days of +our advance." + +On arriving at Modder Spruit it was found that the last train had left +an hour before; they pushed on, however, until a smart fire from a hill +in front of them, which was evidently held in force, broke out suddenly, +and two cannon from another eminence joined in. Having thus discovered +that the Boers were not entirely evacuating the country, but intending +to defend the Biggarsberg, at any rate until a strong force came up, +Lord Dundonald returned to Ladysmith. In the afternoon General Buller +rode over attended by only one or two of the staff. He stayed but a very +short time, to learn from General White the state of affairs, and then +returned. + +"Do you think that we shall pursue at once, sir?" Chris asked Captain +Brookfield. + +"Not at once, Chris. Practically, as you see, there is not a soldier +here fit to carry arms, nor a horse fit for work, and I should say that +it will be a month before General Buller can reckon upon any assistance +from the garrison. As to his own army, I expect he will keep the main +portion round Chieveley. No doubt he will bring the greater part if not +all the garrison of Ladysmith back to Frere and Estcourt, both to get +them out of the pestilential air here and for convenience of feeding +them. The civilian population will leave, of course, as soon as they +possibly can. I should think that Buller will leave in garrison here an +infantry brigade, part of the cavalry, and two or three batteries, and +this with the sick who cannot be moved, will be about as much as our +transport will be able to manage until the railway bridge is repaired +and the line put in running order. Till that is done there is no +possibility of a general advance; and indeed there will have to be a +great accumulation of stores here, as this will then become our base +instead of Chieveley. + +"No doubt a great deal will depend on how things are going on the other +side. Now that Roberts has as good as captured Cronje and his force he +will of course advance to Bloemfontein and occupy it. He will then be no +more able to advance farther than Buller can--in fact, less able. Our +line of railway is secured, and we can be fed by it; but at present we +have not crossed the Orange River from the south, and the railway +between that and Bloemfontein is in the hands of the Boers, and we know +that they have blown up the bridges across the river. Until these are +restored, and the line secure in our hands, Roberts's army will have to +live on the stores that they have brought with them. Then the work of +forming a base depot from the coast will begin, and it needs something +enormous in the way of provisions and carriage to supply an army of +sixty or seventy thousand men, all of whom must as they advance be fed +from Bloemfontein. + +"As long as he is stationary there it is likely enough that the bulk of +Joubert's army will cling to Natal, knowing well enough that before we +shall be in a condition to move forward they can entrench their +positions on the Biggarsberg and the Drakenberg until they are quite as +formidable as those we have been knocking our heads against. I should +not be at all surprised if it is a couple of months before Roberts is in +a position to advance. Of course at present we have no idea what the +plans are, but likely enough at least half the force here may be sent +down to Durban, and then by water to East London, and from there to +Bloemfontein by rail. It would be ridiculous for us to renew the sort of +fighting we have been doing when the enemy are sure to clear out when +Roberts crosses the Vaal, and Natal be thus freed without any further +loss of life. Possibly the troops may not be sent round by sea, but will +remain here until Roberts gets as far as Kroonstadt. Then, no doubt, a +division will be sent down through Bethlehem to Harrismith, and so open +Van Reenen's Pass, in which case the troops from here can go up by train +to Bethlehem. At any rate, I am afraid that most of us will remain here +for at least two months. + +"You see, most of the colonial irregulars were enlisted for only three +months, and that is up already, and no doubt a great many of them will +not extend their time, and I don't suppose the military authorities will +want them to do so. There is no doubt that while mounted men were +invaluable in the fighting in Cape Colony, and will be so in the Orange +Free State, they are of very little use in this mountainous country in +the north of Natal--they are so many more mouths to be fed, man and +beast, without any corresponding advantage. They have done splendidly +where they have had a chance, and the Imperial Light Horse have suffered +heavily, but as a whole I think that we should have been more useful as +infantry than as mounted men. Infinitely more useful if, instead of +being kept at the head-quarters of the army as we have been, for no +possible reason that anyone can see, we had all been scattered over the +country to the east, in which case we should have kept the marauding +Boers from wandering about, should have saved hundreds and hundreds of +loyal farmers from being ruined, and the loss of many thousands of +cattle and horses, which will have to be paid for after the war is over. +I do not think that there is a single colonist who is not of opinion +that the way in which we have been kept inactive from the beginning of +the war, instead of being employed as irregular cavalry should have +been, in protecting the country, preventing the Boers from drawing +supplies, and forcing them to keep in a body as our own troops have +done, has been a stupendous mistake." + +Chris repeated this conversation to his comrades. "I think," he said, +"that if there is no chance of doing anything for another two or three +months, we might as well break up. I have no doubt a good many of the +Colonials will re-enlist. Numbers of them are working men, either from +Johannesburg or belonging to Natal; they would find it very difficult to +get work here, and the five shillings a day pay is therefore of the +greatest importance to them. But it is different with us. We don't draw +pay, we simply agreed to band ourselves together to have an opportunity +of paying out the Boers for their treatment of us. At the time we agreed +to that, we had no idea that they would invade Natal. Of course that was +an additional inducement to us to fight. As loyalists, and capable of +bearing arms, it would have been our duty, even if we had no personal +feeling in the matter, to enlist to help to clear the country of the +enemy who invaded it. Now that Ladysmith is rescued and there are +certainly enough troops in South Africa to finish the business up, I do +not see that it is our duty to continue our service. Anyhow, I have +pretty well made up my mind to resign and go round to Cape Town. There I +am almost sure to find my mother, and perhaps my father, for we know +that they have expelled almost all the English remaining about the +mines, and he may have been among them." + +"I agree with you heartily," Sankey said. "At any rate, I should vote +for our breaking up for the present. It will be beastly for us to have +to stop here doing nothing for another month or two, and then perhaps, +when Buller moves forward to join Roberts, to be told that the colonial +force will no longer be required." + +Twelve of the others expressed similar opinions. The friends of the +eight who did not do so had returned to England. Carmichael was one of +these. "Well," he said after a pause, "I do not say that you are not +quite right, but I have no one to go to here. My people went home as +soon as they reached Durban. If I were to join them I might hear when I +landed that the war was just over, and that they had either started to +come back again, or were on the point of doing so. I was born out here, +and have never seen any of my relations in Scotland. Though I should +like very much to spend a few months in the old country, it would not be +worth while going home for so short a time; for I am sure my father will +hurry back to his work at the mines as soon as Johannesburg is taken by +us. I fancy all those who have not spoken are in about the same +situation that I am." + +There was a murmur of assent. "I don't say," he went on, "that I should +care, any more than you do, to stop here for the next two months. The +smell of dead horses and things is enough to make one ill. The water of +the river is poisonous, for we know the Boers used to throw their dead +animals in it on purpose. So I shall go down to Maritzburg and wire to +my people where I am, and ask for orders. There remains, Willesden said +the other day, still about L80 apiece at the bank, and I expect we shall +get as much for the horses as we gave for them, so that we who have no +friends here could live very comfortably for two or three months, or +have enough to pay our passage home in case they send for us. I shall +tell them to telegraph, so in a week after sending off my wire I shall +get an answer." + +The others who had no friends in South Africa expressed their intention +of doing the same. + +"I don't think we need bother about the horses," Chris said; "being such +good animals, I have no doubt that there are plenty of officers in the +cavalry regiments here who will be glad to buy them as remounts for the +money we gave for them. That would save us all the trouble of getting +them down by train to Maritzburg and selling them there. Well, then, as +there are no dissentients, I will tell Captain Brookfield what we have +settled." + +"I quite agree with you," the officer said when Chris had told him of +their intentions. "In the first place, it would be a serious waste of +time for you to remain here. Still, that is of comparatively little +consequence, but I do think that it would be a grievous pity for you to +risk your lives further. You have done wonderfully good service. You +have had an experience that you will look back upon with satisfaction +all your lives. You have done your duty, and more than your duty. You +have before you useful lives, and have amply shown that in whatever +position you may be placed you will be a credit to yourselves and your +friends. Therefore, Chris, I think in every respect your decision is +right. It will be some relief to me, for to tell you frankly, when you +started on that expedition to Komati, and the other day, when you all +rode off to the farm, I felt that it would probably be my duty to write +to some of your parents to tell them of your deaths. Therefore, by all +means give me your resignations. I dare say that a good many of the men +in my own and other corps will be leaving also; and in that case those +who remain will, I should think, be formed into one strong regiment, +which will be of a good deal more use than half a dozen small corps." + +It was agreed among the party that as they had decided to go they might +as well go at once. + +"I hear," Chris said, "that General Buller is going to make a formal +entry here on Saturday, and that the garrison will line the road. I +don't know whether Dundonald's brigade will have anything to do with it; +but if he does, Brookfield will certainly like to make a good show. So +until that is over I won't do anything about the horses." + +On the day appointed the garrison turned out to receive the general and +the troops who had struggled so long and gallantly to effect their +rescue, and the Devons, Gloucesters, Rifles, Leicesters, Manchesters, +Liverpools, sappers, artillerymen, and the Naval Brigade marched out +from their camps and lined the road as far as the railway-station, where +the remnant of the cavalry brigade were drawn up. At eleven o'clock Sir +George White, Sir Archibald Hunter, and Colonel Duff and his staff rode +up and took their place in the front of the shattered tower of the town- +hall. Here, too, Captain Lambton and many other officers took their +place. Not far from these were a score of civilians who had not shared +in the general exodus that had been going on from the day on which the +town was relieved, but had delayed their departure in order to witness +the historical scene. At last the head of the column was seen +approaching. Lord Dundonald's men had ridden down on the previous day, +and the mounted Colonial Volunteers had now the honour of forming the +general's escort. They led the way, and after them came General Buller +with his escort. The Dublin Fusiliers were placed at the head of the +column in acknowledgment of the gallantry displayed by them in every +fight; then came the men of Warren's, Lyttleton's, and Barton's +brigades, with their artillery. Great indeed was the contrast between +the sturdy, bronzed, and well-fed soldiers who cheered as they marched, +many of them carrying their helmets on their bayonets, and the lines of +emaciated men through whom they passed. These cheered too, but their +voices sounded strange and thin, and many, indeed, were too much +overcome by weakness and emotion to be able to add their voices to the +shouts. The enthusiasm of the troops rose to the highest when they +passed a group of women and children, who, with streaming eyes, greeted +them as they passed. + +The pipes of the Highlanders and the beating of drums added to the roar +of sound. The contrast between the dress of rescuers and rescued was as +great as their personal appearance. Sir George White's men had of late +had but little work, and had prepared for the occasion to the best of +their power, as if for a review at Aldershot. They had done what they +could. Their khaki suits had been washed and scrubbed until, though +discoloured, they were scrupulously clean. The belts, accoutrements, and +rifles had all been rubbed up and scoured. On the other hand, the +uniforms of regiments that marched in were travel-stained, begrimed with +the dust of battle and the mud of bivouac, until their original hue had +entirely disappeared. They looked as if they had at first been dragged +through thorn bushes and then been given a mud-bath. + +Captain Lambton rode forward to meet the sailors of the Terrible with +the guns that had done such service, followed by the howitzers which had +almost equally contributed to the final success of the operations. He +was loudly cheered by the sailors, and the heartiest greetings were +exchanged between him and their officers. Both in attack and defence the +Naval Brigade had performed inestimable services. + +Behind the column came a large body of men in civilian dress. Their +appearance was as unkempt as that of the troops, but among these there +was no approach to military order, and yet their heroism had been in no +way inferior to that of the troops. These were the stretcher-bearers, +who had in every fight carried on their work of mercy under the heaviest +fire, and that without the excitement that nerves soldiers to face +danger. Many of them had fallen while so engaged, but this had in no way +unnerved their companions, who had not only carried on the work during +daylight, but had often laboured all night until the last wounded man +had been found and carried down to the hospital. When the names of the +heroes of the force that relieved Ladysmith are recounted those of the +stretcher-bearers are worthy of a place among them. + +After the troops had been dismissed and matters had settled down a +little, Chris went over to the camp of the cavalry brigade, and spoke to +the first officer he met. "I have come across, sir," he said, "to ask if +any of you wish to buy remounts. The party to which I belong have +twenty-five horses; they are exceptionally good animals, and cost us +sixty pounds apiece last October. We furnished our own equipment. As we +are all sons of gentlemen at Johannesburg, we did not much mind what we +paid. Anyhow, we are ready to sell them at the price we gave for them." + +"We all want remounts badly enough," the officer said. "Will you come in +with me to the colonel?" + +Entering the mess tent, where the colonel and several officers were +standing talking, Chris's guide introduced him to them, and repeated the +offer he had made. "Well, at any rate, Leslie," the colonel said, "you +and Mainwaring may as well go down and look at the horses; it would +certainly be a comfort to get remounts, for more than half of our +chargers are gone, and the rest are skeletons. I can't ask you, Mr. +King, if you would like to take anything to drink. I suppose it will be +another ten days before we are in a position to be able to offer even +the smallest approach to hospitality." + +"I quite understand that, sir," Chris said. "In that respect we have +been nearly as badly off at Chieveley. We have had plenty to eat and +drink, but a cup of tea or chocolate has been the only refreshment we +have been in a position to offer to a visitor, for the line has been so +fully occupied with government transport that it has been next to +impossible to get up any private stores. I am afraid that very little in +that way can be brought up here until the bridge is repaired and the +line in working order, for it is as much as the transport will be able +to do to bring food enough from Chieveley for the troops and people +here." + +The two officers were more than satisfied with the appearance of the +horses. On their report all their comrades went down, and eleven of the +animals were at once taken; a visit to the camps of two other regiments +resulted in the sale of the remainder. None of the officers was able to +pay in gold, as the paymaster's department had not a coin left, though +small payments were made to the men until nearly the end of the siege. +Chris, however, readily accepted their drafts and cheques, as these +could be paid into the bank at Maritzburg. + +"That is all done," he said to his friends. "Now we will get rid of our +remaining stores which the men brought up yesterday. I propose that +instead of selling them we divide them into three and send them down to +the three cavalry messes. I am sorry we have not a few bottles of +spirits left, but the tea, and chocolate, and sugar, and so on, will be +very welcome to them." + +The six natives carried the things down, and brought back with them +notes of warm thankfulness from the colonels. + +"How about our saddles, Chris?" + +"We can take them with us to Maritzburg. We can hand over the kettles +and so on, and the waterproof sheets, to Brookfield's men who remain +here, and the blankets can be given to the natives when we get there." + +The next day, after a hearty farewell from Captain Brookfield and their +comrades, who sent them off with a ringing cheer, the party started, +marching by the side of one of the waggons that had brought up stores; +in this they placed their saddles and blankets. When they arrived at +Chieveley they had no difficulty in getting a place in a covered truck. +In this they travelled to Maritzburg. Here they stayed for three or four +days; then, after making a handsome present in addition to what they had +promised to the natives, and further gladdening their hearts by giving +them their blankets, Chris and those who were going down said good-bye +to Carmichael and his party, with hopes that they would all meet again +at Johannesburg before long. Three or four whose friends had remained at +Durban stayed there, the rest took passage together for Cape Town. + +At Maritzburg Chris had found a letter awaiting him from his mother, +saying that his father had a fortnight before joined her there, as the +Boers had commandeered the mines and had ordered him to leave, as he +would not work them for their benefit and so provide funds for the +support of the Boer army. She said that they intended to leave at once +for England, and that he was to follow them when he gave up his work +with the army. He therefore, with Field, Brown, and Capper, continued +the voyage straight on to England, and joined his parents in London, +where he enjoyed a well-earned rest, his pleasure being only marred by +the necessity for telling the story of his adventures again and again to +the relations and friends of his parents. + +THE END + + + + + +End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of With Buller in Natal, by G. A. Henty + +*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK WITH BULLER IN NATAL *** + +This file should be named 7bull10.txt or 7bull10.zip +Corrected EDITIONS of our eBooks get a new NUMBER, 7bull11.txt +VERSIONS based on separate sources get new LETTER, 7bull10a.txt + +Produced by Tony Hyland, Charles Franks and the +Online Distributed Proofreading Team. + +Project Gutenberg eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the US +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we usually do not +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + +We are now trying to release all our eBooks one year in advance +of the official release dates, leaving time for better editing. +Please be encouraged to tell us about any error or corrections, +even years after the official publication date. + +Please note neither this listing nor its contents are final til +midnight of the last day of the month of any such announcement. +The official release date of all Project Gutenberg eBooks is at +Midnight, Central Time, of the last day of the stated month. A +preliminary version may often be posted for suggestion, comment +and editing by those who wish to do so. + +Most people start at our Web sites at: +http://gutenberg.net or +http://promo.net/pg + +These Web sites include award-winning information about Project +Gutenberg, including how to donate, how to help produce our new +eBooks, and how to subscribe to our email newsletter (free!). + + +Those of you who want to download any eBook before announcement +can get to them as follows, and just download by date. This is +also a good way to get them instantly upon announcement, as the +indexes our cataloguers produce obviously take a while after an +announcement goes out in the Project Gutenberg Newsletter. + +http://www.ibiblio.org/gutenberg/etext03 or +ftp://ftp.ibiblio.org/pub/docs/books/gutenberg/etext03 + +Or /etext02, 01, 00, 99, 98, 97, 96, 95, 94, 93, 92, 92, 91 or 90 + +Just search by the first five letters of the filename you want, +as it appears in our Newsletters. + + +Information about Project Gutenberg (one page) + +We produce about two million dollars for each hour we work. The +time it takes us, a rather conservative estimate, is fifty hours +to get any eBook selected, entered, proofread, edited, copyright +searched and analyzed, the copyright letters written, etc. Our +projected audience is one hundred million readers. If the value +per text is nominally estimated at one dollar then we produce $2 +million dollars per hour in 2002 as we release over 100 new text +files per month: 1240 more eBooks in 2001 for a total of 4000+ +We are already on our way to trying for 2000 more eBooks in 2002 +If they reach just 1-2% of the world's population then the total +will reach over half a trillion eBooks given away by year's end. + +The Goal of Project Gutenberg is to Give Away 1 Trillion eBooks! +This is ten thousand titles each to one hundred million readers, +which is only about 4% of the present number of computer users. + +Here is the briefest record of our progress (* means estimated): + +eBooks Year Month + + 1 1971 July + 10 1991 January + 100 1994 January + 1000 1997 August + 1500 1998 October + 2000 1999 December + 2500 2000 December + 3000 2001 November + 4000 2001 October/November + 6000 2002 December* + 9000 2003 November* +10000 2004 January* + + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation has been created +to secure a future for Project Gutenberg into the next millennium. + +We need your donations more than ever! + +As of February, 2002, contributions are being solicited from people +and organizations in: Alabama, Alaska, Arkansas, Connecticut, +Delaware, District of Columbia, Florida, Georgia, Hawaii, Illinois, +Indiana, Iowa, Kansas, Kentucky, Louisiana, Maine, Massachusetts, +Michigan, Mississippi, Missouri, Montana, Nebraska, Nevada, New +Hampshire, New Jersey, New Mexico, New York, North Carolina, Ohio, +Oklahoma, Oregon, Pennsylvania, Rhode Island, South Carolina, South +Dakota, Tennessee, Texas, Utah, Vermont, Virginia, Washington, West +Virginia, Wisconsin, and Wyoming. + +We have filed in all 50 states now, but these are the only ones +that have responded. + +As the requirements for other states are met, additions to this list +will be made and fund raising will begin in the additional states. +Please feel free to ask to check the status of your state. + +In answer to various questions we have received on this: + +We are constantly working on finishing the paperwork to legally +request donations in all 50 states. If your state is not listed and +you would like to know if we have added it since the list you have, +just ask. + +While we cannot solicit donations from people in states where we are +not yet registered, we know of no prohibition against accepting +donations from donors in these states who approach us with an offer to +donate. + +International donations are accepted, but we don't know ANYTHING about +how to make them tax-deductible, or even if they CAN be made +deductible, and don't have the staff to handle it even if there are +ways. + +Donations by check or money order may be sent to: + +Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +PMB 113 +1739 University Ave. +Oxford, MS 38655-4109 + +Contact us if you want to arrange for a wire transfer or payment +method other than by check or money order. + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation has been approved by +the US Internal Revenue Service as a 501(c)(3) organization with EIN +[Employee Identification Number] 64-622154. Donations are +tax-deductible to the maximum extent permitted by law. As fund-raising +requirements for other states are met, additions to this list will be +made and fund-raising will begin in the additional states. + +We need your donations more than ever! + +You can get up to date donation information online at: + +http://www.gutenberg.net/donation.html + + +*** + +If you can't reach Project Gutenberg, +you can always email directly to: + +Michael S. Hart <hart@pobox.com> + +Prof. Hart will answer or forward your message. + +We would prefer to send you information by email. + + +**The Legal Small Print** + + +(Three Pages) + +***START**THE SMALL PRINT!**FOR PUBLIC DOMAIN EBOOKS**START*** +Why is this "Small Print!" statement here? You know: lawyers. +They tell us you might sue us if there is something wrong with +your copy of this eBook, even if you got it for free from +someone other than us, and even if what's wrong is not our +fault. So, among other things, this "Small Print!" statement +disclaims most of our liability to you. It also tells you how +you may distribute copies of this eBook if you want to. + +*BEFORE!* YOU USE OR READ THIS EBOOK +By using or reading any part of this PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm +eBook, you indicate that you understand, agree to and accept +this "Small Print!" statement. If you do not, you can receive +a refund of the money (if any) you paid for this eBook by +sending a request within 30 days of receiving it to the person +you got it from. If you received this eBook on a physical +medium (such as a disk), you must return it with your request. + +ABOUT PROJECT GUTENBERG-TM EBOOKS +This PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm eBook, like most PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm eBooks, +is a "public domain" work distributed by Professor Michael S. Hart +through the Project Gutenberg Association (the "Project"). +Among other things, this means that no one owns a United States copyright +on or for this work, so the Project (and you!) can copy and +distribute it in the United States without permission and +without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, set forth +below, apply if you wish to copy and distribute this eBook +under the "PROJECT GUTENBERG" trademark. + +Please do not use the "PROJECT GUTENBERG" trademark to market +any commercial products without permission. + +To create these eBooks, the Project expends considerable +efforts to identify, transcribe and proofread public domain +works. Despite these efforts, the Project's eBooks and any +medium they may be on may contain "Defects". Among other +things, Defects may take the form of incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other +intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged +disk or other eBook medium, a computer virus, or computer +codes that damage or cannot be read by your equipment. + +LIMITED WARRANTY; DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES +But for the "Right of Replacement or Refund" described below, +[1] Michael Hart and the Foundation (and any other party you may +receive this eBook from as a PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm eBook) disclaims +all liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including +legal fees, and [2] YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE OR +UNDER STRICT LIABILITY, OR FOR BREACH OF WARRANTY OR CONTRACT, +INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE +OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE +POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. + +If you discover a Defect in this eBook within 90 days of +receiving it, you can receive a refund of the money (if any) +you paid for it by sending an explanatory note within that +time to the person you received it from. If you received it +on a physical medium, you must return it with your note, and +such person may choose to alternatively give you a replacement +copy. If you received it electronically, such person may +choose to alternatively give you a second opportunity to +receive it electronically. + +THIS EBOOK IS OTHERWISE PROVIDED TO YOU "AS-IS". NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, ARE MADE TO YOU AS +TO THE EBOOK OR ANY MEDIUM IT MAY BE ON, INCLUDING BUT NOT +LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A +PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +Some states do not allow disclaimers of implied warranties or +the exclusion or limitation of consequential damages, so the +above disclaimers and exclusions may not apply to you, and you +may have other legal rights. + +INDEMNITY +You will indemnify and hold Michael Hart, the Foundation, +and its trustees and agents, and any volunteers associated +with the production and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm +texts harmless, from all liability, cost and expense, including +legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any of the +following that you do or cause: [1] distribution of this eBook, +[2] alteration, modification, or addition to the eBook, +or [3] any Defect. + +DISTRIBUTION UNDER "PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm" +You may distribute copies of this eBook electronically, or by +disk, book or any other medium if you either delete this +"Small Print!" and all other references to Project Gutenberg, +or: + +[1] Only give exact copies of it. Among other things, this + requires that you do not remove, alter or modify the + eBook or this "small print!" statement. You may however, + if you wish, distribute this eBook in machine readable + binary, compressed, mark-up, or proprietary form, + including any form resulting from conversion by word + processing or hypertext software, but only so long as + *EITHER*: + + [*] The eBook, when displayed, is clearly readable, and + does *not* contain characters other than those + intended by the author of the work, although tilde + (~), asterisk (*) and underline (_) characters may + be used to convey punctuation intended by the + author, and additional characters may be used to + indicate hypertext links; OR + + [*] The eBook may be readily converted by the reader at + no expense into plain ASCII, EBCDIC or equivalent + form by the program that displays the eBook (as is + the case, for instance, with most word processors); + OR + + [*] You provide, or agree to also provide on request at + no additional cost, fee or expense, a copy of the + eBook in its original plain ASCII form (or in EBCDIC + or other equivalent proprietary form). + +[2] Honor the eBook refund and replacement provisions of this + "Small Print!" statement. + +[3] Pay a trademark license fee to the Foundation of 20% of the + gross profits you derive calculated using the method you + already use to calculate your applicable taxes. If you + don't derive profits, no royalty is due. Royalties are + payable to "Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation" + the 60 days following each date you prepare (or were + legally required to prepare) your annual (or equivalent + periodic) tax return. Please contact us beforehand to + let us know your plans and to work out the details. + +WHAT IF YOU *WANT* TO SEND MONEY EVEN IF YOU DON'T HAVE TO? +Project Gutenberg is dedicated to increasing the number of +public domain and licensed works that can be freely distributed +in machine readable form. + +The Project gratefully accepts contributions of money, time, +public domain materials, or royalty free copyright licenses. +Money should be paid to the: +"Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +If you are interested in contributing scanning equipment or +software or other items, please contact Michael Hart at: +hart@pobox.com + +[Portions of this eBook's header and trailer may be reprinted only +when distributed free of all fees. Copyright (C) 2001, 2002 by +Michael S. Hart. Project Gutenberg is a TradeMark and may not be +used in any sales of Project Gutenberg eBooks or other materials be +they hardware or software or any other related product without +express permission.] + +*END THE SMALL PRINT! FOR PUBLIC DOMAIN EBOOKS*Ver.02/11/02*END* + diff --git a/old/7bull10.zip b/old/7bull10.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..a45838d --- /dev/null +++ b/old/7bull10.zip diff --git a/old/8bull10.txt b/old/8bull10.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..8fdea05 --- /dev/null +++ b/old/8bull10.txt @@ -0,0 +1,11615 @@ +The Project Gutenberg EBook of With Buller in Natal, by G. A. Henty +#14 in our series by G. A. Henty + +Copyright laws are changing all over the world. Be sure to check the +copyright laws for your country before downloading or redistributing +this or any other Project Gutenberg eBook. + +This header should be the first thing seen when viewing this Project +Gutenberg file. Please do not remove it. Do not change or edit the +header without written permission. + +Please read the "legal small print," and other information about the +eBook and Project Gutenberg at the bottom of this file. Included is +important information about your specific rights and restrictions in +how the file may be used. You can also find out about how to make a +donation to Project Gutenberg, and how to get involved. + + +**Welcome To The World of Free Plain Vanilla Electronic Texts** + +**eBooks Readable By Both Humans and By Computers, Since 1971** + +*****These eBooks Were Prepared By Thousands of Volunteers!***** + + +Title: With Buller in Natal + A Born Leader + +Author: G. A. Henty + +Release Date: January, 2005 [EBook #7334] +[Yes, we are more than one year ahead of schedule] +[This file was first posted on April 15, 2003] + +Edition: 10 + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ISO-Latin-1 + +*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK WITH BULLER IN NATAL *** + + + + +Produced by Tony Hyland, Charles Franks and the +Online Distributed Proofreading Team. + + + + +WITH BULLER IN NATAL + + +[Illustration: "CHRIS SPRANG AT HIM."] + + +WITH BULLER IN NATAL + +OR, A BORN LEADER + +BY + +G. A. HENTY + + + +PREFACE + +It will be a long time before the story of the late war can be written +fully and impartially. Even among the narratives of those who witnessed +the engagements there are many differences and discrepancies, as is +necessarily the case when the men who write are in different parts of +the field. Until, then, the very meagre military despatches are +supplemented by much fuller details, anything like an accurate history +of the war would be impossible. I have, however, endeavoured to +reconcile the various narratives of the fighting in Natal, and to make +the account of the military occurrences as clear as possible. +Fortunately this is not a history, but a story, to which the war forms +the background, and, as is necessary in such a case, it is the heroes of +my tale, the little band of lads from Johannesburg, rather than the +leaders of the British troops, who are the most conspicuous characters +in the narrative. As these, although possessed of many admirable +qualities, had not the faculty of being at two places at once, I was +obliged to confine the action of the story to Natal. With the doings of +the main army I hope to deal next year. + +G. A. HENTY + + + +CONTENTS + +I. THE BURSTING OF THE STORM + +II. A TERRIBLE JOURNEY + +III. AT THE FRONT + +IV. DUNDEE + +V. THE FIRST BATTLE + +VI. ELANDSLAAGTE + +VII. LADYSMITH BESIEGED + +VIII. A DESPERATE PROJECT + +IX. KOMATI-POORT + +X. AN EXPLOSION + +XI. BACK WITH THE ARMY + +XII. THE BATTLE OF COLENSO + +XIII. PRISONERS + +XIV. SPION KOP + +XV. SPION KOP + +XVI. A COLONIST'S ADVENTURE + +XVII. A RESCUE + +XVIII. RAILWAY HILL + +XIX. MAJUBA DAY + +XX. LADYSMITH + + + +ILLUSTRATIONS + +"CHRIS SPRANG AT HIM" + +CHRIS OFFERS HIS SERVICES TO SIR PENN SYMONS + +CHRIS AND HIS COMPANIONS SCOUTING + +"BOTH RIFLES CRACKED AT ONCE" + +"THERE WAS A TREMENDOUS ROAR AND A BLINDING CRASH" + +"WITH A SHOUT OF TRIUMPH THE TWO BOERS RAN DOWN" + +"PRESENTLY FROM BEHIND THE FOOT OF THE HILL SIX HORSEMEN DASHED OUT" + +THE NAVAL GUNS ON MOUNT ALICE + +"ONE OF THE BOERS HELD UP HIS RIFLE WITH A WHITE FLAG TIED TO IT" + +THE RELIEF OF LADYSMITH + + + + +[Illustration: SOUTH EASTERN AFRICA] + +WITH BULLER IN NATAL + + + + +CHAPTER I + +THE BURSTING OF THE STORM + + +A group of excited men were gathered in front of the Stock Exchange at +Johannesburg. It was evident that something altogether unusual had +happened. All wore anxious and angry expressions, but a few shook hands +with each other, as if the news that so much agitated them, although +painful, was yet welcome; and indeed this was so. + +For months a war-cloud had hung over the town, but it had been thought +that it might pass over without bursting. None imagined that the blow +would come so suddenly, and when it fell it had all the force of a +complete surprise, although it had been so threatening for many weeks +that a considerable portion of the population had already fled. It was +true that great numbers of men, well armed, and with large numbers of +cannon, had been moving south, but negotiations were still going on and +might continue for some time yet; and now by the folly and arrogance of +one man the cloud had burst, and in thirty hours war would begin. + +Similar though smaller groups were gathered here and there in the +streets. Parties of Boers from the country round rode up and down with +an air of insolent triumph, some of them shouting "We shall soon be rid +of you; in another month there will not be a rooinek left in South +Africa." + +Those addressed paid no heed to the words. They had heard the same thing +over and over again for the past two months. There was a tightening of +the lips and a closing of the fingers as if on a sword or rifle, but no +one replied to the insolent taunts. For years it had been the hope of +the Uitlanders that this would come, and that there would be an end to a +position that was well-nigh intolerable. Never before had a large body +of intelligent men been kept in a state of abject subjection by an +inferior race, a race almost without even the elements of civilization, +ignorant and brutal beyond any existing white community, and superior +only in the fact that they were organized and armed, whereas those they +trampled upon were deficient in both these respects. Having no votes, +these were powerless to better their condition by the means common to +civilized communities throughout the world. They were ground down by an +enormous taxation, towards which the Boers themselves contributed +practically nothing, and the revenue drawn from them was spent in the +purchase of munitions of war, artillery, and fortifications, so +enormously beyond the needs of the country, that it was no secret that +they were intended not only for the defence of the republic against +invasion, but for a general rising of the Boer population and the +establishment of Dutch supremacy throughout the whole of South Africa. + +The Boer government was corrupt from the highest to the lowest. The +president and the members of his family piled up wealth to an enormous +amount, and nothing could be done without wholesale bribery. The price +of everything connected with the mining industry was doubled by the +supply being in the hands of monopolists, who shared their gains with +high state officials. Money was lavished like water on what was called +secret service, in subsidizing newspapers to influence public opinion +throughout Europe, and, as it was strongly suspected, in carrying on a +propaganda among the Dutch in Cape Colony, and in securing the return of +members and a ministry secretly pledged to further in every way the aims +of the Presidents of the Transvaal and the Orange Free State. The +British and other aliens were not only deprived of all rights of +citizenship, but even freedom of speech and the right of public meeting +was denied them; they were not allowed to carry arms except by a special +license, their children were taught in Dutch in the schools, they had no +right of trial by jury; judges who had the courage to refuse to carry +out the illegal behests of the president were deprived of their offices, +and the few editors of newspapers representing the Uitlanders--as all +men not born in the state were called-were imprisoned and their journals +suppressed. + +Intolerable as was such a state of things to a civilized community, it +might have been borne with some patience had it not been that the +insolence of their masters was unbounded. Every Boer seemed to take a +pleasure in neglecting no opportunity of showing his contempt for the +men whose enterprise and labour had enormously enriched the country, and +whose superior intelligence he was too grossly ignorant to appreciate. A +Boar farmer would refuse a cup of water to a passing traveller, and +would enforce his refusal by producing his rifle immediately if the +stranger ventured to urge his request. Of late the insolence of the +Boers had greatly increased; the manner in which England had, instead of +demanding justice with the sternness and determination that the +circumstances called for, permitted her remonstrances to be simply +ignored, was put down as a consciousness of weakness. And having now +collected arms sufficient not only for themselves but for the whole +Dutch population of South Africa, the Boers were convinced that their +hour of triumph had come, and that in a very short time their flag would +float over every public building throughout the country and the Union +Jack disappear for ever. + +The long discussions that had been going on with regard to a five or +seven years' franchise were regarded with absolute indifference by the +Uitlanders--even the shorter time would have afforded them no advantage +whatever. The members from the mining districts would be in a hopeless +minority in the assembly; and indeed, very few of those entitled to a +vote would have cared to claim it, inasmuch as they would thereby render +themselves citizens of the republic, and be liable to be commandeered +and called upon to serve in arms, not only against the natives, upon +whom the Boers were always making aggressions, but against England, when +the war, which all foresaw could not long be delayed, broke out. + +For months the negotiations went on between President Kruger and Mr. +Chamberlain, the British colonial minister, and the certainty that the +Boers were bent upon fighting became more and more evident. Vast +quantities of rifles, ammunition, and cannon poured into the Transvaal, +their passage being more than winked at by the Dutch ministry of Cape +Colony. + +It was that day known that President Kruger had thrown off the mask of a +pretended desire for peace, and that an ultimatum had been telegraphed +to England couched in terms of such studied insolence that it was +certain war must ensue. The greatest civilized power on earth would have +shown less arrogance towards the most feeble. Not only was England +called upon to send no more troops to South Africa, but to withdraw most +of her forces already in the country, and this by a state that owed its +very existence to her, and whose total population was not more than that +of a small English county. + +The terms of that ultimatum had just become known in Johannesburg, and +it was not surprising that it had created an intense excitement. All had +long felt that war must come, and that at an early date, but the step +that had now been taken came as a surprise. From all appearances it had +seemed that the negotiations might be continued for months yet before +the crisis arrived, and that it should thus have been forced on by the +wording of the ultimatum showed that the Boers were satisfied that their +preparations were complete, and that they were in a position to overrun +Natal and Cape Colony before any British force capable of withstanding +them could arrive. England, indeed, had been placed in a most difficult +position. The ministry were not unaware of the enormous preparations +that the Boers were making, and had for some time past been quietly +sending out a large number of officers and a few non-commissioned +officers and men to the Cape. But so long as there was a hope that the +Boers would finally grant some redress to the Uitlanders, they could not +despatch any considerable number of troops, for had they done so they +would have been accused not only on the Continent, but by a section of +Englishmen, of forcing on a war with a weak state, whereas in point of +fact the war was being forced on by a country that most erroneously +believed itself to be stronger than England. The Boers of the Transvaal +knew already that the Orange Free State would join them at once, and +believed firmly that every Dutchman in Natal and Cape Colony would at +the signal take up arms. + +Presently a gentleman detached himself from the crowd in front of the +Exchange, and joined a lad of some sixteen years old who was standing on +the other side of the street. + +"Well, father, is it all true what they say?" the latter asked--"that +Kruger has sent such an ultimatum to England that war is certain?" + +"It is quite true, Chris; war is absolutely certain. Kruger has given +the British Government only two days to reply to the most insolent +demand ever addressed to a great power, and worded in the most offensive +manner. I imagine that no reply will be given; and as the ultimatum was +sent off yesterday, we shall to-morrow morning be in a state of war." + +"Well, father, there is no doubt what the result will be." + +"No doubt whatever as to the final result, but I am afraid things will +go very badly for a time. I am glad, very glad, that Kruger should have +sent such an ultimatum. It cannot but be accepted as a defiance by all +England; and I should say that even the opposition, which has of late +continually attacked Mr. Chamberlain, will now be silenced, and that +Government will be supported by all parties." + +After a quarter of an hour's walk they arrived at home. It was a +handsome house, for Mr. King was one of the leading men in Johannesburg. +He had come out with a wife and son ten years before, being sent by some +London capitalists to report to them fully upon the prospects of the +gold-fields. Under his advice they had purchased several properties, +which had been brought out as companies, and proved extremely valuable. +He was himself a large holder in each of these, and acted as manager and +director of the group. "What is the news, Robert?" his wife asked, as he +and her son came in. "I have had three or four visitors in here, and +they all say that there is quite an excitement in the town." + +"It has come at last," he said gravely; "war is inevitable, and will +begin in twenty-four hours. Kruger has sent one of the most +extraordinary demands ever drawn up. He calls upon England to cease +sending out troops, and to speedily recall most of those now in South +Africa, and has given two days for a reply, of which one has already +expired. As it is absolutely certain that England will not grant this +modest request, we may say that the war has begun. I wish now that I had +sent you and Chris down to Durban a fortnight ago, for there will be a +fearful rush, and judging by the attitude of the Boers, I fear they will +make the journey a very unpleasant one. As we have agreed, it is +absolutely necessary that I should remain here. There is no saying what +steps the Boers will take with reference to the mines; but it is certain +that we must, if possible, keep them going--not for the sake of the +profit, which you may be sure Kruger will not allow to go out of the +country, but because if they were to be stopped it would cost an immense +deal of money to put them in working condition again, especially if, as +is likely enough, the Boers damage the machinery. I shall do as little +work as I can; and the Boers will not, I fancy, interfere with us as +long as they can benefit by the working. For myself, I would risk any +loss or damage rather than aid in supplying them with gold, but for the +sake of our shareholders in Europe I must do my best to save the mines +from destruction. Indeed, if I don't work them, probably they will do so +until the end is at hand, and will then do as much damage as possible. +You know we have agreed on this point." "Yes, I suppose it is best, +Robert; but it seems terrible leaving you alone here, and I shall be in +a perpetual state of anxiety about you." + +"I don't think there is any occasion for that; as long as I am working +the mines and they are taking the gold, which no doubt they will have to +repay when our army are masters here, they will not interfere with me. +They treat us badly enough, as we know; but they love the gold even more +than they hate us, so I have no fear whatever as to my personal safety. +I am afraid, dear, that for a time things will go very badly with us. +Already we know that commandos have gone forward in great strength to +the frontier, and I should not be surprised if the whole of South Africa +rises; at any rate, the Boers are confident that it will be so. +Gladstone's miserable surrender after our disasters at Laing's Nek and +Majuba have puffed them up with such an idea of their own fighting +powers and our weakness, that I believe they think they are going to +have almost a walk over. Still, though it was certain that we should +have a hard time whenever war came, we have been hoping for years that +England would at last interfere to obtain redress for us, and we must +not grumble now that what we have been so long expecting has at last +come to pass. I believe there will be some stern fighting. The Boers are +no cowards; courage is, indeed, as far as I know, the only virtue they +possess. In the long run they must certainly be beaten, but it will only +be after very hard fighting." + +"What do you think they will do, father?" + +"I can't say what they will do, but I am sure that what they ought to do +is to merely hold the passes from Natal with enough men for the purpose, +and to march their whole force, broken up into half a dozen columns, +into Cape Colony. There is no force there that could resist them, they +would be undoubtedly joined by every Dutchman there, and I am convinced +that the Africander ministry would at once declare for them, in which +case England would have to undertake the tremendous work of conquering +the whole of South Africa afresh, for certainly she could not allow it +to slip from her hands, even if it should prove as stern a business as +the conquering of half India after the Sepoy Mutiny. Now to business. +Fortunately we sent down your clothes and everything we had of value to +our friends the Wilsons, at Durban, six weeks ago. What you have +remaining you must leave behind to take its chance. You will be able to +take no luggage whatever with you. We know how terribly the trains have +been packed for the past fortnight, and a week ago almost all the +carriages were commandeered for the use of the troops going south. + +"You must take with you a basket of provisions, sufficient, if +necessary, for two or three days for you both. There is no saying how +long you may be on your way to the frontier; once beyond that you will, +of course, be able to obtain anything you want. But you need expect no +civility or courtesy from the Boers, who, indeed, would feel a malicious +pleasure in shunting you off into a siding, and letting you wait there +for any number of hours. You must mind, Chris, above all things, to keep +your temper, whatever may happen. You know how our people have been +insulted, and actually maltreated in scores of cases, and in their +present state of excitement the Boers would be only too glad to find an +excuse for acts of violence. I was speaking to you about it three days +ago, and I cannot impress it too strongly upon you. I have already given +you permission to join one or other of the corps that are being raised +in Natal, and if anything unpleasant occurs on the road, you must bottle +up your feelings and wait till you get a rifle in your hand and stand on +equal terms with them." + +"I promise that, father. I think, after what we have had to put up with +here, during the past two or three months especially, I can bear +anything for these last few days." + +"Yes, Chris; but it will be more trying now that you have your mother +under your charge. It is for her sake as well as your own that I impress +this so strongly upon you. Now, will you go down at once to the railway- +station and enquire about the trains? I shall go myself to the manager +and see whether I can get him to make any special arrangement in your +mother's favour, though I have no great hopes of that; for though I know +him well, he is, like all these Dutchmen in office, an uncivilized brute +puffed up with his own importance." + +Chris started at once, and returned an hour later with a very +discouraging report. The station was crowded with people. No regular +trains were running, but while he was there a large number of cattle- +trucks had been run up to the platform, and in these as many of the +fugitives as could be packed in were stowed away. As soon as this was +done the train had started, but not half the number collected on the +platform had found room in it. His father had left a few minutes after +him, and presently returned. + +"From what I can hear," he said, "there is no chance whatever of your +being able to get any accommodation, but must take your chance with the +others. Viljoen told me that except the waggons there was not a carriage +of any sort or class left here, and that there was no saying at all when +any would return; but that even if they did, they would be taken for the +use of the troops going south. All he could say was that if, when I came +down to the station with you, he is there, he will see that you go by +the first waggons that leave." + +"That is something at least," Mrs. King said quietly. "I certainly do +not wish to ask for any favour from these people, and do not want to be +better off than others. I have no doubt that it will be an unpleasant +time, but after all it will be nothing to what great numbers of people +will have to suffer during the war." + +"That is so, Amy. And now I think that the sooner the start is made the +better. The rush to get away will increase every hour, and we shall have +the miners coming in in hundreds. Many of the mines will be shut down at +once, though some of them will, like ours, continue operations as long +as they are allowed to." + +"Make your basket, or bag, or whatever you take your provisions in, as +small as possible, mother. I saw lots of baggage left behind on the +platform. You see, there are no seats to stow things under. I should say +that a flat box which you can sit on would be the best thing. And you +will want your warmest cloak and a thick rug for night." + +"I have a box that will do very well, Chris. Fortunately we have plenty +of cold meat and bread in the house. I shall not be more than half an +hour, Robert." + +In less than that time the party were ready. Chris's preparations had +been of the simplest. He carried over his arm a long, thick greatcoat, +in the pocket of which he had thrust a fur cap and two woollen +comforters. He had also a light but warm rug, for he thought it probable +that he might not be able to be next to his mother. He had on his usual +light tweed suit, but had in addition put on a cardigan waistcoat, which +he intended to take off when once in the train. In his pockets he had a +couple of packets of tobacco, for although he seldom smoked, he thought +that some of it might be very acceptable to his fellow-passengers before +the journey was over. He wore a light gray, broad-brimmed wide-awake, +with a white silk puggaree twisted round it, for the heat of the sun in +the middle of the day was already very great, and would be greater still +when they got down to Natal. The box, which a Kaffir servant put on his +shoulder, was about eight inches deep and a foot wide, and eighteen +inches long. + +"What have you in it, mother?" + +"Two tin bottles of cold tea, each holding a gallon." + +"I should hardly have thought that we wanted as much as that." + +"No; but there may be many women who have made no provision at all, +thinking that we shall at least be able to get water at any of the +stations we stop at. I have a small tin mug, and that joint of meat; the +rest of the box is filled up with bread-and-butter. I have cut it up and +spread it, so that it packs a good deal closer than it would do if we +put the loaves in whole." + +Mr. King had his wife's thick-wadded winter cloak and a rug over his +arm, and a small hand-bag with a few necessaries for the journey. Mrs. +King was in her usual attire, and carried only a white umbrella. + +"We look as if we were starting for a picnic rather than a journey that +will last three or four days," she said with an attempt at gaiety. +"There is one comfort, we shall have nothing to look after when we get +to the end." + +Chris walked on ahead to let his father and mother talk together, for +although all arrangements had been discussed and settled during the past +two or three days, there was much they had to say to each other now that +the parting had come. The lad was a fine specimen of the young +Uitlander. A life passed largely in the open air, hard work and +exercise, had broadened his shoulders and made him look at least a year +older than he really was. He was a splendid rider and an excellent shot +with his rifle, for his father had obtained a permit from the +authorities for him to carry one, and he could bring down an antelope +when running at full speed as neatly as any of the young Boers. Four +days a week he had spent in the mines, for his father intended him to +follow in his footsteps, and he had worked by turns with the miners +below and the engineers on the surface, so that he might in the course +of a few years be thoroughly acquainted with all the details of his +profession. + +The last two days in each week he had to himself, and with three or four +lads of his own age went for long rides in search of sport. A couple of +hours every evening were spent in study under his father's direction. He +was quiet in manner, and talked but little. He deeply resented the +position in which the British population in the Transvaal were placed, +the insolence of the Boers towards them, and their brutal cruelty +towards the natives. The restraint which he so often found it necessary +to exercise had had no slight influence on his character, and had given +a certain grim expression to the naturally bright face. Many had been +the discussions between him and his friends as to the prospect of +England's taking up their cause. Their disappointment had been intense +at the miserable failure of the Jameson raid, which, however, they felt, +and rightly, must some day have a good result, inasmuch as it had +brought out the wretched position of the Uitlanders, who, though forming +the majority of the population, and the source of all the wealth of the +country, and paying all the taxes, were yet treated as an outcast race, +and deprived of every right possessed by people of all civilized +nations. + +They had wondered and fretted at the apathy with which the enormous +warlike preparations of the Boers were regarded at home, and the fact +that they were permitted to become a formidable power, capable of +offering a desperate resistance even by the armies of England; whereas, +before they had been enriched by the industry and enterprise of the +immigrants, they had been in danger of being altogether wiped out by the +Zulus and Swazis, and had only been saved by the interference on their +behalf of the British power. Thus, then, while the war-cloud had been +slowly but surely gathering, the lads had watched the approaching crisis +with delight, unmingled with the anxiety and foreboding of the +capitalists, who, without doubting what the end must be, were sure that +enormous losses and sacrifices must result before their deliverance from +Boer oppression could be obtained. + +The scene at the station was an extraordinary one. Men, women, and +children of all ranks were crowded on the platform; the greater +capitalists, the men whose fortunes could be counted by hundreds of +thousands, had for the most part left, but many who in England would be +considered as rich men had remained in the town till the last moment, to +make their final arrangements and wind up their affairs. With these were +well-to-do storekeepers, with their wives and families, together with +mining officials, miners, and mechanics of all kinds. Piles of baggage +rendered movement difficult, for many had supposed that the regular +trains were still running, and that they would be able to carry away +with them the greater portion of their belongings. The scenes at the +departure of the previous trains roughly awakened them to the fact that +all this must be abandoned, and women were crying and men cursing below +their breath at this last evidence of Boer indifference to the +sufferings of those by whose work they had so greatly benefited. Mr. +King soon found that the manager was still there, but on speaking to him +he shrugged his shoulders, and said: + +"I do not see what I can do. Look at the crowd there. When the waggons +come up there will be a rush, and I have no men here to keep such a +number in order." + +"I see that, Mr. Viljoen, but if you would send a man with us to where +the waggons are standing in readiness to come up, my wife could take her +place then." + +"Yes, I will do that at once. You had better go with her outside the +station, and the porter shall take you on from there. If you were to get +off the platform here and walk up the lines, others would notice it, and +there would be an immediate rush." + +He called to one of the porters on the platform, and gave him +instructions, and in a few minutes Mrs. King was seated on her box in +the corner of a truck, which, with a few others, had a covered roof, +although it was entirely open at the sides. In the next half-hour eight +or ten others, who had been similarly favoured by the manager, joined +them. All these were known to the Kings, and it was a great relief to +them to find that they would travel together, instead of being mixed up +with the general crowd. They had packed themselves together as closely +as possible, so that when the train became crowded there should be no +room for anyone to push in among them. Among the party was John Cairns, +a great chum of Chris's. He and his father and mother had been waiting +for two hours at the station, and he told him that there were seven or +eight of their companions there. + +"We will take our seats on that side," Chris said, "and as we move in +shout to them to join us. It will be a great thing to get as many people +we know in here as possible." + +Presently the train began to move. Fortunately, at the spot where it +drew up, a group of their acquaintances were clustered together, and +these all managed to get into the truck, which was speedily filled up +until there was scarce standing-room. Three minutes later the train +moved on. A great number were left behind, although everyone made as +much room as possible, women especially being helped in after the trucks +seemed absolutely choke-full. As soon as the train was fairly in motion +many of the men climbed up on to the roofs of the covered waggons, +thereby relieving the pressure below, and enabling all the women to sit +down. Others ranged themselves along the sides, sitting on the rail, and +so minimizing the space they occupied. But even with all this, the women +were packed inconveniently together. All, however, were so much pleased +at their good fortune in having got away that there was no complaining +or grumbling. That the journey would be a long one, all knew; but at +least they had started, and would soon be a free people in a free +country. Chris and his friends had been among the first to climb up on +to the roof, and they sat down in a group at one end of it. + +"It is going to be pretty cold here to-night, and desperately hot to- +morrow," Chris said; "but we can put up with that. I would stand it for +a month rather than stop any longer among these brutes." There was a +general murmur of agreement. + +"Thank heavens," one of them said, "the next time we meet them will be +with arms in our hands. We have a long score to pay off, and we shall, I +expect, have plenty of chances. The Boers are boasting that they will +soon drive the last Englishman out of South Africa, and seem to regard +it as a sort of general picnic. They will find out their mistake before +they have done." + +"Still, we must not think that it is going to be a picnic our way," +Chris said. "They have quite made up their minds that every Boer in Cape +Colony and Natal will join them at once. If they do, it will be a very +long business to put them down, though I have no doubt it will all come +right in the end. Do you know anything about the others?" + +"I know that Peters and Carmichael and Brown went off with their people +last night, but I don't know about the others." + +"Capper and Willesden and Horrocks went yesterday," another lad said. +"Sankey and Holdsworth were on the platform, and no doubt got into +another truck. + +"There are seven of us here," Chris said, "and as six have gone on, that +makes thirteen certain, and there are eight more to come. Most of us +will stop at Pietermaritzburg, but I suppose some, whose friends are +going straight home, will go down with them to Durban." + +"There will not be many who have to do so," another said. "Sankey's +people and Carmichael's are going to Cape Town, but, so far as I know, +all the others will stay and see it out either at Maritzburg or Durban. +Do you think that we should take any others with us, Chris?" + +"I don't think so. You see we all know each other, and it would be a +nuisance having fellows with us of whom we know nothing. They might not +pull with us, while we have been so much together that there is no fear +of our having any disagreement. I think we have all pretty well settled +that it will be much better to act by ourselves, instead of joining any +of the corps that are sure to be formed down there. Still, if we knew +one of the men getting up a corps--and some of our people are pretty +sure to do so--I do think it would be a good plan to join, if they would +accept us as a sort of independent troop, ready to act with them when +there is any big fighting, and to go about on our own account at other +times. You see, none of us will want any pay. We shall all furnish our +own horses and arms, and shall therefore be on a different footing from +men who have to draw pay and be equipped at the public expense; and I +don't see why any officer commanding a troop in one of these corps +should object to our joining him on those terms. But anyhow, I feel sure +that we should be able to do a great deal more good by being free to +move where we liked, and to undertake expeditions on our own account, +than if we were to act in a more regular manner." + +There was a general chorus of agreement. + +"Now, how long do you think it will be before we cross Laing's Nek? Of +course we ought to be there by to-morrow morning. It is only a hundred +and fifty miles, and at fifteen miles an hour, which is about their +usual rate of travelling, we should cross the frontier at two o'clock, +for it was about four when we started. But there is no saying. My father +thought we ought to take four days' provisions with us; I think we could +hold out for that time." + +"You don't mean to say, Chris, he thought it possible we might be as +long as that?" "He did think so, Peters. He considered that we might be +shunted off very often to let trains with men and stores for the troops +go on ahead of us." + +"Well," the other replied, "I don't care so much for myself, though I +don't say that it would be lively to be stuck up here for four days and +nights, but it would be awful for the women; and I should say that very +few of them have got more than enough provisions for a day. Still, of +course, if we are shunted at a station we shall be able to buy things." + +"I am not so sure of that," Chris said. "You know what the Boers are at +their best; and now that they believe the time has arrived when they are +going to be the absolute lords of all South Africa, they are so puffed +up that there is no saying what they may do to show their hatred and +contempt for us. And whatever happens, you fellows, you must keep your +temper. My father spoke to me very strongly about it. You must remember +that they will not mind what they do, and would shoot any of us down on +the smallest excuse, knowing well enough that we are helpless, and that +it is unlikely any enquiry would ever be made, or anyone punished even +if they shot a dozen of us. We must remember that we intend to pay off +old scores later on, and that we mean to do it with interest." + + + + +CHAPTER II + +A TERRIBLE JOURNEY + + +Twenty-four hours had gone, and not half the distance had yet been +covered. The night had passed painfully to all those in the waggons, for +though most of the women had provided themselves with wraps of one sort +or another, the cold was severe. This, however, was less felt than the +cramped position in which all had to sit on the floor, unable to move or +to stretch their legs, the only change obtainable being by standing up. +The pressure was most felt in the open waggons, where the men as well as +the women were packed together so closely that even sitting down was +impossible. Some slight relief had been afforded by the men on the +covered waggons taking as many from the uncovered trucks as could lie +down there with them; but as the latter were by far the more numerous, a +comparatively small number of men could be so entertained. + +For a time the rising of the sun afforded some relief, but as it gained +in power the position of the fugitives became almost unbearable. The +stoppages were frequent, and at all the stations the Boers from the +neighbourhood had assembled, some from curiosity, but the majority to +wait for the trains that were to take them to the front. Although +sometimes detained for three or four hours, the passengers were not +allowed to alight. The men, indeed, at times, by common impulse, sprang +out, but were soon forced to take their places again, some of the Boers +using their heavy whips over their heads and shoulders, while others +with pointed guns prevented any attempt at retaliation. Men, and even +women, crowded the platform, jeering and cursing those in the waggons, +menacing them with their whips and snatching at such trinkets, and even +cloaks as took their fancy. The men were all several times searched for +weapons, and made to turn their pockets inside out, the contents being +unceremoniously transferred to those of the Boers. Chris and his +companions would have taken their places below with their friends, but +these implored them not to do so, being afraid that they would be +enraged beyond endurance, and might in their anger say or do something +that would give an excuse to the Boers to use their rifles, which they +so often pointed threateningly at women as well as men. It was only when +the train was in motion that food and drink were passed up from below, +as these too would assuredly, had they been seen, have been confiscated +by the brutal tormentors. + +When they steamed into Standerton in the afternoon, the distress of the +women and children for water was so great that men determined at all +costs to endeavour to get some for them. As if by one impulse, when the +train came to a standstill outside the station, they jumped out and made +for the little village. But here all refused to give or sell them water +or food, and in a few minutes a large party of Boers rode in, and +falling upon them with their whips, drove them back to the train. Had +they been armed the men would assuredly have resisted till the last, +although certain to be killed, so mad were they with passion. As it was, +it would have been throwing away their lives, without a chance of even +avenging themselves on their assailants. As they reached the waggons and +climbed into their places again, several had broad blue weals across +their faces, while many more were smarting from the cuts they had +received on the body. Chris and his companions had got out when the +others did so, but had not followed them. Their supply of water and cold +tea was not yet exhausted, as most of the ladies had made preparations +for a journey of two or three days, and Mrs. King and the mothers of the +other lads begged them not to go. + +"The Boers are only waiting for an excuse to use their firearms," Mrs. +King said, "and whatever happens you had better stay here. You can do no +good by going." So, reluctantly, they had again taken their places on +the roofs of the carriages, and sat there with their pulses beating and +their fists clenched as they heard the shouts and the cracking of the +heavy whips in the village, and presently saw the men running back, +pursued by their cowardly assailants. Two or three of the lads were so +enraged at the sight that they would have jumped down had not Chris laid +a restraining hand on them. + +"Wait your time," he said in a hard voice. "We can't repay them now, but +we will remember this when our turn comes." + +The Boers, as they rode up, leapt from their horses, and with shouts of +exultation walked along the waggons, striking at the men, hurling every +epithet of contempt and hatred at them, and even spitting at them. Many +of the women were also struck as well as being grossly insulted. + +"And these scoundrels call themselves Christian men, and their friends +speak of them as simple pious farmers! I call them, both from their +appearance and their actions, as unmitigated a set of ruffians as are to +be found on the face of the globe," Cairns exclaimed passionately. + +They were indeed as unsavoury in appearance as they were brutal in +manner. Water is scarce in the Transvaal, and is used most sparingly for +all purposes of cleanliness. The Boer sleeps in his clothes, gives +himself a shake when he gets up, and his toilet is completed, unless on +very exceptional occasions when he goes outside the door to the water- +cask, fills his hands with water, and rubs them over his face. + +Four times in the year, however, the Boers indulge in a general wash +before starting with their wives and families for four or five days' +stay at the nearest town to attend the services of the church and to do +their quarter's marketing. In dress the Boer is almost universally +slovenly, his clothes hang about him stained and discoloured by long +usage. In the majority of cases he is altogether without education, and +very many Boers are scarcely able to sign their names. Most of them wear +beards and long unkempt hair. But in point of physique they are fine +men, tall and powerfully, though loosely, built, but capable of standing +great fatigue if necessary, although averse to all exercise save on +horseback. All are taught to shoot from boyhood, and even the women in +the country districts are trained in the use of firearms, for it is not +so long since they lived in dread of incursions by the Zulus and Swazis. + +There was no attempt whatever at uniformity of dress. Most of the men +wore high riding boots. Some of the young men from the towns were in +tweed suits, the vast majority wore either shooting jackets or long +loose coats; some were in straw hats, but the elder men all wore large +felt hats with wide brims. They were all, however, similarly armed with +rifles of the best and most modern construction. Their general +appearance was that of a large band of farmers of the roughest type and +wholly without regard for their personal appearance. + +It was fully an hour before the train moved again. Then it was shunted +on to a siding while the Boers entrained with their horses on a long +line of waggons which had just come up, and which started on its way +south as soon as they were on board. Then the emigrant tram crawled on +again. There was another night of wretchedness, and in the morning they +arrived at Volksrust, the frontier town. Here they were again closely +searched for arms, and what provisions remained among them were +commandeered, or as the emigrants called it, stolen. However, they knew +that their troubles were now nearly over, and did not grumble when they +were informed that the train would go no farther, and that they must +make their way on foot to Newcastle. + +They were told tauntingly that they might find some of their friends +there if they had not already run away, and that if they stopped at +Pietermaritzburg for a week they would have another journey down to +Durban as prisoners. All were too glad to get out of the clutches of the +Boers to utter complaints which they knew would be useless, and they +went off at once. The prospect was not, however, a pleasant one. +Newcastle was nearly thirty miles away, but they hoped that at least +they might obtain shelter and rest and food for the women at some of the +scattered farms. At first their progress was slow, for after being for +more than two days and a half packed up like cattle, they had almost +lost the use of their limbs; but gradually the pace was accelerated. Men +took the little children on their shoulders, others helped the women +along. Charlestown, on the British side of the frontier, was already +occupied by the Boers, who hooted and abused them as they passed +through. At Laing's Nek there was a Dutch commando with some guns. + +Two miles on the women could go no further, and they halted at a large +farmhouse which had been deserted by its owners. All the men, however, +who were alone, determined to push on at once to Newcastle, and promised +they would send vehicles of some sort to take them on if they could +possibly be obtained. Mrs. King and the other ladies authorized them to +pay any sums demanded. + +Thankful indeed were the tired women when they reached the farmhouse. +They found the doors unfastened, as the farmer knew that were he to lock +them the Boers would certainly batter them in when they arrived, and +would probably do greater damage to the furniture left behind than if +they had obtained an entry without trouble. The men soon found the wood- +shed, and in a short time great fires blazed in every room. The bedding +had been carried away, but utterly worn out as they were, the women were +only too glad to lie down on rugs and cover themselves with their +cloaks. The men gathered in the lower room and talked for some time +before thinking of going to sleep. There was scarce one who was not +determined to join one of the volunteer corps being raised at Durban and +Maritzburg, and to avenge the insults and ill-treatment to which they +had been subjected. The long-smouldering animosity towards the Boers had +been fanned during the past three days into a fierce fire, and even +those who had not before thought of taking part in the struggle were now +as eager as the others to do so. + +In the morning all were astir early. Had they been supplied with food +they would have waited until waggons came out from Newcastle, but these +could hardly arrive until evening, and at any moment the Boer advance +might commence. They therefore determined to move on early, for if they +met the waggons half-way these could return with them at once to the +town. It was desirable to start as soon as possible so as to get well on +the way before the heat of the day was at its fullest. Accordingly by +six all were in movement. The long night's rest had done them good, +still more so the thought that by the end of the day they would be among +friends, and they were disposed to laugh and joke over their present +situation. All the men had cut themselves heavy cudgels from the stock +of firewood, and the fact that they were not as before wholly +defenceless was no slight gratification to them. Even the ladies spoke +confidently of being able to walk the twenty miles to Newcastle should +they not meet vehicles coming to fetch them. They could go ten miles now +and then halt till the sun was setting, and after such a long rest could +certainly go on to Newcastle. + +"I am afraid, mother," Chris said as they started, "that what seems so +easy now will be too much for many of the women. We started without +breakfast, and unless we can get something by the way I doubt if many +will reach the town to-night. Of course for the men it is nothing. Very +often when I have been out on the veldt and have started early, I have +had nothing till I got back late in the evening. What are you wearing +that veil for, mother? I saw that you pulled it down over your face +yesterday afternoon. I suppose you did it to keep the dust out of your +eyes, but there is none now." + +"I had a reason for doing it, but I can put it up now." + +She lifted the white veil to its usual place round her hat; as she did +so, Chris uttered a sharp exclamation as his eye fell on a bluish-red +mark across her face. + +"You don't mean to say, mother," he said in a tone of horror, "that one +of those scoundrels struck you?" + +"They struck a good many of us, Chris, and there was no reason why I +should escape more than another." + +The lad's face grew white. + +"Why did you not call out? I would have--" + +"I know you would," she interrupted gently, "and so of course I did not +cry out. You had all had enough to try you to the utmost, and I was not +going to risk your life by letting you know what had happened. It +flashed across me at once that if you had seen it happen you would have +been down from the roof in an instant and struck the man. Had you done +so, your fate would have been sealed, you would have had half a dozen +bullets in your body; therefore, I simply dropped my veil, and I can +assure you that the smart of the Boer's sjambok gave me less pain when I +felt that you knew nothing of it." + +Chris walked along silently for a minute or two; then he said quietly: +"Thank you, mother. I am sure it would have been as you said. I could +not have helped it. No one could see his mother struck without +interfering." + +"I can understand that, dear; but it would have been a poor consolation +for me had you been killed in endeavouring to right a wrong that I could +very well put up with, and shall forget in a week." + +"I suppose so, mother. I should not so much mind if I only knew the +fellow's name, or even knew him by sight, so that I might possibly have +the chance some day of settling accounts with him." + +They walked on until eight o'clock, and then rested under the shade of +some rocks. Fortunately there had been some rain two days before, and +they had been able to quench their thirst at a little stream that came +down from the hills. There were in all some thirty women and eighteen +men. + +"Look here, Harris," Chris said, "there is a farmhouse over there, and +as I see cattle and horses, it evidently is not deserted. Let us go and +see if we can get some bread and some milk for the women." + +"All right!" + +The other lads were quite ready to go also, and they walked across to +the house, which stood some half a mile away. As they approached it a +Boer came out. On seeing them he re-entered it, and appeared again with +a rifle. + +"I am afraid we shall get nothing here," Harris said. "The Dutchmen in +Natal are only waiting for the Boers to advance to join them." + +"Well, we will try anyhow," Chris said doggedly. "I dare say that you +are right; but Boer or no Boer, if there is any food in that house I +mean to get it." + +They went quietly on. When they were within fifty yards the Boer shouted +to them to go back. + +"We have some women and children with us," Chris replied, continuing to +advance. "They are exhausted from want of food and fatigue, and we have +come to ask for some bread, and if you have it in the house, some milk." + +"If the house was full of both you should not have a crumb of bread or a +drop of milk. Halt! I say, or I will put a bullet into you." + +Chris did not heed the command. + +"We have plenty of money to pay you, and are willing to give ten times +its fair price." + +He was now within ten yards of the farmer. The latter burst into a +torrent of abuse, and was in the act of raising his rifle when Chris +sprang at him. The Boer, who had no idea that this lad would venture to +attack him, discharged his rifle almost at random, and the ball passed +through the brim of Chris's hat. An instant later his heavy stick fell +on the Boer's head, and levelled him to the ground. + +"Now, Harris," he shouted, "do you and the others go into the house, and +first of all bring me out one of these fellows' whips. Cairns, pick up +his rifle, and reload it. Sankey, do you and the others keep guard at +the door, and don't let those viragoes out"--for three women had just +appeared, and were cursing with a fluency that Billingsgate would have +envied. + +Harris had already come out with a heavy whip by the time Cairns had +reloaded. Chris took it and said to the Boer, who, in view of the +formidable sticks the lads carried, had thought it best to lie quiet; + +"Now you can get up, you hulking ruffian. I am going to give you a +lesson in civility. Oh, you won't get up? Well, it will make no +difference to me," and he proceeded to give the howling Boer a +tremendous thrashing. "There," he said, when his arm was tired, "you may +get up and go, and I hope that the lesson will do you good. Now, Cairns, +we will search the house. It is likely enough he has a lot of rifles +hidden somewhere, and perhaps when we have gone he may go and fetch some +more of his class. We may as well possess ourselves of them." + +The seven lads went into the house, paying no further attention to the +Boer. In spite of the fury of the women, they searched the house +thoroughly, and in a large case in a disused room they found twelve +Mauser rifles, with a thousand cartridges. They then took a basket and +filled it with bread, and emptied the milk from two large pans into a +pail. + +"We are not thieves and robbers, like your people," Chris said to the +women, as he threw five shillings on the table. "Your man has been good +enough to tell us that he will be in Maritzburg with the Boers in a +week's time. Therefore, as war has been declared, the muskets are lawful +spoil taken from a rebel. Now, boys, let's be off." + +The cartridges were divided among them; then, with the thirteen guns, +the basket, and pail, they started to rejoin their friends. "Well, that +is a fair capture to begin with," Chris said. "As far as we are +concerned, the war has begun. The Boer has made off, I see. I should not +be surprised if we hear of him and some of his friends again. However, +now we are well armed they can come as soon as they like." + +Great was the joy among the women and children when they returned with +the much-needed refreshment. + +"I was getting very anxious about you, Chris," his mother said. "We +heard the man fire. But where have you got all these rifles from?" + +"The owner of the farm is a Boer, mother, and as he told us, a rebel. As +he began the affair by putting a bullet through my hat, and abusing us +and our nation heartily, we took the liberty of searching his house, +with good success. I need not say that he did not give us this bread and +the pail of milk of his own free-will, but I left the money for them." + +His mother had turned pale when he said that a bullet had gone through +his hat, but she said nothing. + +"What became of the man?" she asked. "You did not kill him, I hope?" + +"No, mother; I contented myself with thrashing him with one of his own +whips until my arm ached." + +There was enough bread for all to have a slice. The women and children +had as much milk as they could drink, the rest was divided among the +men. The extra rifles were given to those who could best use them. In +half an hour the women said that they were ready to go on again, and +that they would rather do that than wait, for they greatly feared that +the Boer might gather some of his friends and attack them. Feeling +greatly strengthened and refreshed, they started at a good pace. They +had gone about a mile when Sankey said to Chris: + +"Look, there is a party of mounted men across the valley." + +"Then we had better plant ourselves among the rocks, and let the unarmed +men go on with the women and children, and take shelter a bit farther +on. I don't suppose they will venture to attack us when they find, to +their disgust, that we are armed with as good rifles as their own. They +have a great respect for their lives." + +Accordingly the seven lads and the six men with rifles at once took up a +position among the rocks. The rest of the party went forward two hundred +yards and then took shelter also. The Boers, feeling certain that the +party was unarmed, did not trouble themselves to open fire at a +distance, but rode forward in a clump at full gallop. + +"They are about a thousand yards away now," one of the men said. "We may +as well give them a volley." + +The thirteen rifles flashed out almost simultaneously. There were, as +they had counted, sixteen Boers. Five horses fell, three others galloped +off riderless, and the party broke up and rode off at full speed in +various directions. + +"I don't think we need trouble any more about them," said Sankey's +father, who, was one of the party, as he rose to his feet. "You may be +sure that several of those who got away carried bullets somewhere about +them." + +As they turned to rejoin their friends there was a general exclamation +of satisfaction, for two large waggons were seen coming along the road. +In ten minutes the women and children, with all the older men, were +comfortably seated and on their way to Newcastle. Chris and his party +accompanied them on foot so as to form a rear-guard. "We have won our +first battle," Chris laughed. + +"But for you there would not have been any battle at all," Field said. +"I don't think any of us would have gone forward after that fellow +warned us back had you not done so." + +"I was determined to get some milk for the children," Chris said, "and +would have gone forward even if I had been alone. I don't think I ever +felt such a satisfaction as I did in thrashing that Boer. One of them +struck my mother across the face, you know, in the train, and though it +was not the same man, I feel better now that I have taken it out of +someone." + +At Newcastle they found a small British force, and learned that there +were four or five thousand troops at Dundee. Trains were still running, +and after only an hour's delay at Newcastle to obtain a meal, the whole +party went on. Late that evening they arrived at Colenso. Mrs. King and +the ladies and gentlemen of the party had decided to sleep there, but +hearing on the road that the little town was crowded with fugitives from +the Transvaal and the farms near the frontier, they determined to +continue the journey to the capital, which they reached the next +morning. The lads had quite decided upon their course before starting, +and had arranged with their parents to remain at Maritzburg. The general +opinion was that the British force at the front could not possibly +maintain itself, but that as soon as the invasion began in force they +must fall back, as the Transvaal Boers would be able to attack them in +front and on the right flank, while the Free Staters would pour down +through Van Reenen and De Beers Passes and make straight for Ladysmith, +and so threaten their line of retreat. + +There were a few indeed who still believed that the Boers would stand +entirely upon the defensive so far as Natal went. They would occupy the +formidable passes through the Drakensberg and await attack there, while +they would invade Cape Colony at many points and raise the Boer +population. However, the general opinion was that they would advance +into Natal in great force, and in that case it was doubtful, indeed, +whether Sir George White could oppose them successfully north of +Maritzburg. He might even, it was thought, be obliged to fall back to +Durban until reinforcements arrived from England. Already there was a +rush to the offices that had been opened for the volunteer corps. Many +of the fugitives from the Transvaal had joined, as had most of the young +farmers who had been obliged by the hostility of their Dutch neighbours +to abandon their homes in the north of Natal, while numbers of all ranks +in Maritzburg, Durban, and other towns were giving in their names. All +the lads who had come down with Chris had some time before obtained +their parents' consent to join a volunteer corps, or form one among +themselves, and as it was evident that the crisis was at hand no +objections were raised to their doing so at once. Mrs. King would go +down to Durban with her friends, so that there was no need for her son +to accompany her. + +It had been agreed by the other lads that they would all meet at ten +o'clock at the hotel where Chris put up, and the party mustered in +greater strength than had been expected, for they found that the boys +who had preceded them had all waited in the town, and were stopping at +the various hotels. They too had been as badly treated by the Boers as +the last arrivals, and were all eager to begin work. + +"There is no getting a private room here," Chris said, "so we had better +go outside the town and talk things over." As they went they chatted +over their adventures on the road, and great satisfaction was felt among +those who had not been present on hearing how Chris had thrashed the +Boer, and had gone tip to him in spite of his threat to shoot. At their +last meeting at Johannesburg they had elected him their captain, but he +had at the time refused to accept the post, saying that it would be +wiser to decide that afterwards, as one of the others might show himself +better fitted for the position. However, their first step when they sat +down by the bank of the little river outside the town was to again elect +him by acclamation. + +"Very well," he said, "as you all wish it I will accept the post. I +suppose we are well provided with funds. Our fathers all said they would +find our outfit, and money enough for all expenses." There was a general +assent. "Well, we start better than we had expected, for we have +thirteen rifles: twelve of them are Mausers, the other we will sell; so +we shall have to buy nine others. That had better be done this morning, +for we may be sure that there will be a rush to the gunsmiths' shops. In +the next place we must each buy a saddle and saddlery. We have agreed +that we will not have any approach to uniform; because, as we all speak +Dutch, we shall be able to pass unobserved, if necessary, among them. +But I have been thinking it over, and it seems to me that if we have +nothing of the sort we shall run the risk of being shot by our own men." + +"What are we to do, then, Chris?" + +"I think that we had better get flat caps, like the fatigue caps our +soldiers wear. They can be carried in our pockets inside our shirts when +we are in the neighbourhood of the Boers, and when we are riding +anywhere near our own troops we can put them on instead of our felt +hats. It would alter our appearance altogether when riding in groups, +and even at a distance we could hardly be taken for Boers." + +All agreed that it would be an excellent plan. + +"We shall, of course, have bandoliers for our cartridges, and haversacks +for our provisions and spare packets of ammunition. Not an hour must be +lost in getting these things. I hear that Captain Brookfield, who came +up to Johannesburg last year and stayed a fortnight with us, has raised +a corps, which he has named the Maritzburg Scouts. I will call upon him +this afternoon and tell him that there are one-and-twenty of us, all +somewhere about my age, and that we mean fighting; and that as we all +speak Dutch we think we can do more good by scouting about on our own +account than by joining any regular corps; but that at the same time we +should like, if there was anything like regular fighting, to place +ourselves under the orders of an officer like himself. It is rather +difficult to explain, you know, but I think he will understand what we +mean. We should be, in fact, a section of his troop, acting generally on +independent service, either scouting, or going in among the Boers and +getting intelligence, trying to blow up bridges, and engaging looting +parties--for we may be sure that the Boers will be scattering all over +the country plundering. + +"Of course I shall say, if he won't accept us on those terms, we shall +do as we best can on our own account; but that as we don't require pay, +and will provide ourselves with all necessaries, we do not see that we +should be any burden when we join him. I propose that we meet here again +this afternoon, and I hope that by that time we shall all have got our +mounts and saddlery. I hear that many of the loyal farmers north have +driven their animals down here, and are only too glad to sell the horses +at the usual prices. Mind, the clothes we have now won't do; we must get +them of farmer fashion. Don't go together to any shop, but let each +choose for himself; we don't want anything like uniformity of pattern. +The stuff must be strong. We shall each want a couple of blankets; one +of these, with a slit cut in the middle to slip over the head, will +serve as a greatcoat. Now, let us be off! To save trouble, I should say +that we had each better put a certain sum, say twenty pounds, to go into +a fund for general expenditure--food and ammunition, and that sort of +thing--into one of the banks, and we can draw upon that as we require +it." + +"I should say, Chris," Sankey said, "that we had better put all our +money into the fund. Our people are all going to pay for our outfit, and +you know they have agreed to give us a hundred pounds each to last us +through the war. It is of no use carrying money about with us. I think +we should agree to pay it all into the common fund, and that at the end +of the business what remains is to be divided among those of us who go +through it." + +"I think that is a good plan, Sankey. Certainly we cannot all expect to +come out alive, and that arrangement will save all trouble about money." + +On going back into the town they learned that a large farmer had +encamped two miles away, with a big drove of cattle and a couple of +hundred horses, many of which were fine animals, and it was agreed at +once that Sankey, Carmichael, and Peters should hire a buggy and drive +over there and choose twenty-one good horses. Harris and Field undertook +the purchase of the rifles, and Chris went to the office which Captain +Brookfield, who had been an officer in the English army had taken. He +had sent in his name, and was at once shown in. + +"Well, Chris," he said cordially as he entered, "I am glad to see you. +You have grown and widened out a good deal since last year. I suppose +your father and mother have both come down with you?" + +"My mother has come down, sir, but my father thought that he ought to +remain behind to look after the mines." + +"Have you come here to enlist?" + +"Not exactly, sir, and yet I have to a certain extent;" and he told the +officer of the little corps that had been formed among his companions at +Johannesburg. + +"A very good idea. Speaking Dutch, as you say they all do, they ought to +do good service as scouts. But why have you come to me?" + +This Chris explained. + +The captain laughed. "I suppose the fact is, Chris, you think that you +will be able to see and do more if you are altogether independent of +other people's orders." + +"Perhaps that is it, sir; but if there is any cavalry fighting we should +much rather be under orders. Such a small corps would look ridiculous +marching out by itself." + +"Well, I don't see any reason why you should not carry out your plan. It +would certainly be better that you should have some--what I may call-- +official sanction. All the men in our corps are paid five shillings a +day, and as your troop would serve under different conditions, you can +to a certain extent dictate your own terms. I will, if you like, accept +you as an independent corps, attached to my command when with me, but at +other times free to scout and to act as you choose; but mind, I cannot +be responsible for any scrape that you get into. You might call +yourselves the Johannesburg section of the Maritzburg Scouts, +maintaining yourselves at your own expense, and drawing neither pay nor +rations." + +"Thank you very much, sir; that is just what we want." + +"Then, if you will bring your companions here this evening, I will swear +you in. I shall administer a different oath to you from that which the +others take, and merely pledge you, when under my orders, to obey them, +with permission to withdraw from the corps when you choose. And indeed, +receiving no pay or assistance from government, you would naturally be +free to do so." + +Leaving Captain Brookfield, Chris went and bought his clothes, bandolier +and belt, and saddlery, and then returned to the hotel and told his +mother how he had got on, and that a horse and rifle would, he hoped, be +obtained that afternoon. + +"It seems to me a terribly dangerous business, Chris; but as your father +agreed to it, of course I need say no more. I have a cheque for five +hundred pounds for my expenses and yours." + +"Father gave me a hundred before I started, mother; that will more than +pay for my outfit. I don't know what we shall do for the horses, but +there will certainly not be much over." + +"Yes, I know, Chris; and he told me to hand you over another hundred +when I went to the bank, which I shall do this afternoon." + + + + +CHAPTER III + +AT THE FRONT + + +At five o'clock the lads from Johannesburg again met and reported the +result of the afternoon's work. The nine Mauser rifles had been bought, +and six thousand rounds of ammunition had been purchased. This appeared +an excessive amount, but as there might be a difficulty in obtaining +this ammunition, they bought up all that could be found in the town. +Peters and his party had chosen the horses for the troop. The farmer was +a well-known breeder of good stock, and was glad to dispose of some of +them at a fair price in order to lessen their number. He had already had +several enquiries from corps that were being raised, but the prices were +higher than could be paid for ordinary troopers, though several had been +bought by officers. The lot the lads had picked out had been put aside, +and they had given the farmer fifty pounds earnest-money, to hold them +till the next morning. + +"They are as good a looking lot of horses as I ever saw," Peters said, +"in fact, by a long way the best. I always heard that he was one of the +largest breeders of good horses in South Africa. He had eight or ten +extraordinarily good ones, but, of course, he wanted extra prices for +these; but from the rest--and he has some three hundred of them--he let +us choose any we liked at one price, and I think I can say that we shall +be as well mounted a corps as any out here. Of course we avoided the +showy-looking horses, and chose those specially suited to the country +and likely to be fast. Mr. Duncan had several thoroughbreds from home, +and there is no doubt that his stock has benefited by it; they are all +of the country type, sturdy and compact, and yet somewhat finer in the +limb than any I ever saw in the Transvaal. We were delighted with them." + +All the lads were accustomed from childhood to horses, but those Chris +had selected as the committee of inspection were admitted by their +friends to be the best judges of horseflesh in the party, their fathers +being wealthy men who always bought the finest horses money could +obtain. + +"We will go over in a body to-morrow," Chris said, "and pay for them and +bring them back. We are lucky indeed to have got hold of such a good +lot. Are they pretty even animals, Peters?" + +"Yes, I really don't think there is anything to choose between them." + +"Well then, the fair way will be, to make one-and-twenty tickets with as +many numbers and fasten one to the mane of each horse, then we will put +another twenty-one numbers into a hat and draw them; in that way +everyone will be satisfied. Those of you who have not got their money +from their people had better ask them for it this evening, so that we +can settle up to-morrow for the horses and rifles and ammunition. The +hundred pounds we have each been promised will well cover all our +expenses up to the moment we start, and I should think leave us with +something like twenty pounds apiece in pocket, but all we have and the +other hundred for future expenses we had better put into the bank here +to-morrow. We must arrange for four of us to sign cheques, each cheque +to be signed by two, but we had better give them all our signatures so +that in case what we can call the finance committee of four are all +killed or taken prisoners there will be no bother about having fresh +signatures to arrange about." "Well," Sankey said, "we might as well +settle that at once. I propose that Field, Carmichael, Capper, and, of +course, you form the committee." As no amendment was offered, this was +at once agreed to. + +"What time did you say that we would come over to fetch the horses?" + +"About ten o'clock." + +"Well, will you all be at my hotel to-morrow at half-past eight with +your money? Then we will all sign our names on paper the committee +first; afterwards they shall go with me to the bank and pay all the +money in, give them the list of signatures, and tell them that until +further notice two of the four first names will sign the cheques, but +that should circumstances prevent any two of them being able to do so, +others will sign instead. The account had better stand as the +Johannesburg Scouts. When we have arranged that we will hire a couple of +light waggons and start. Have you all got your saddlery?" + +"Yes." + +"Well, we will take it with us, and then we can ride the horses back. I +will get the tickets made out." + +As soon as the bank opened in the morning, Chris and his three +companions presented themselves, and had an interview with the manager, +who was somewhat surprised when twenty-one cheques and cash to the +amount of three thousand five hundred pounds were handed in, each member +having deducted the amount paid for saddlery and clothes. "We wish the +account to stand in the name of the Johannesburg Scouts, and cheques +will be signed by two of the four names standing first on this list; but +as casualties may occur, you will please accept any of these signatures. +Our little corps will form part of the Maritzburg Scouts, but in money +matters we keep to ourselves, being all volunteers serving without pay." + +The manager ran his eye over the cheques. All the names were well known +to him as those of prominent men at Johannesburg, and the great majority +had already accounts at his bank, as all had some time previously made +arrangements for drawing money in case of necessity. + +"I suppose, Mr. King," he said, "that as you and your friends represent +the corps, you are all young men?" + +"We are all boys," Chris answered with a smile, "but we are old enough +to do men's work, and in the Transvaal the Boers are commandeering all +boys two or three years younger than we are." + +"Well, I congratulate you all both on your patriotism and your pluck, +Mr. King, and I have no doubt that you will do good service." + +Receiving a cheque-book, they drew two hundred pounds for current +expenses, and then going back to the hotel found the two Cape-carts and +their companions ready, and the saddlery already stowed away. On +arriving at the farm all were highly pleased with the horses their +comrades had selected. They had on the way agreed that it would be a +good plan to buy four others to act as pack-horses, and to furnish them +with remounts in case any of their own were shot. These were to be sent +into the town by two Kaffirs, whom they arranged to take into their +service, for the farmer said at once, when they asked him that he could +very well spare them, as he would be parting with a considerable number +of his horses and cattle, and would not require so many hands as he had +at present. The two men he chose for them were both active young +natives; they made no objection to the exchange of masters, and, indeed, +seemed pleased at the thought of going with them to fight the Boers, who +were universally hated by the natives. + +A cheque was given to the farmer for their purchase, then the horses +were chosen by lot as agreed, and were at once saddled and mounted. They +had all been partially broken in, and as the boys were good riders, they +were after a little preliminary struggle soon at their ease, and, taking +a couple of hours' sharp ride through the country, returned on good +terms with their mounts. Two or three hours were spent in teaching the +horses to stand steady as soon as the reins were thrown over their +heads, this being a training to which all horses in the Cape are +subjected. Then they rode back to the town and arranged with a farmer +near it to picket their horses in one of his meadows, and for their feed +while they remained there. The rest of the day was spent in laying in +their supplies. The rifles and ammunition were paid for, pack saddles +bought for the four spare horses, a brace of revolvers purchased for +each member, haversacks ordered for the whole party, and bags to carry a +supply of grain for each horse. In the evening they went out to the +farm, and after discharging their rifles a few times fed their horses. + +This they repeated in the morning, so as to familiarize them with the +sound of firearms; then they saddled and mounted them, and after riding +for half an hour drew up in line, as Captain Brookfield, who had sworn +them in on the previous afternoon, was to inspect them at eight o'clock. +They had all put on their working clothes, bandoliers and belts, and +high boots, and the captain on his arrival, after closely inspecting +them, expressed his strongest approval of their appearance. + +"I really congratulate you, Mr. King," he said, "on having command of +twenty such serviceable-looking young fellows. As they all can ride, +and, as you tell me, can all shoot, they ought to do really good +service, and I should be well pleased if all my troop were composed of +such good material. From the fact that you can all speak Dutch, and most +of you Kaffir, you will have great opportunities of obtaining +information, and can, in case of need, pass as young Boers. In fact, I +may say that there is some danger of your being mistaken for them by our +men. I should take you for them myself, except that you all look +brighter and more wide-awake than Boers generally do; but an +artilleryman could hardly be blamed if he plumped a shell among you at a +distance of two or three thousand yards." + +"We thought of that, sir;" Chris turned to his band, "Change caps!" All +pulled field-service caps from their pockets, took off the soft felts, +rolled them up and forced them into their valises, and put on the caps. + +"That is excellent!" Captain Brookfield exclaimed. "That certainly +alters your appearance altogether, and as far as your figures could be +made out through a glass, it could be seen that you are an irregular +body of some sort. And this can be still more plainly seen if, as I +should advise you, you always ride in fours when you are approaching our +lines; there will then be little chance of a mistake being made. Where +did you pick up all those horses?" + +"We bought them yesterday from a farmer named Duncan, who has brought +them down from his place near Dundee." + +"Ah! that accounts for it; he is one of the best-known horse-breeders in +the colony. I had not heard that he had come down." + +"He only arrived two days ago, sir. We were fortunate to hear of it, and +some of us rode over early yesterday and were lucky enough to secure +them." + +"You were lucky. There are several mounted corps being formed here and +at Durban, and horses will go up in price rapidly. Where is he +staying'?" + +"About a mile and a half farther out, sir. If you want horses I should +think that you had better go on at once, for he told me that he had sold +sixty yesterday, but that very few of them were anything like as good +horses as these." + +"No. People are subscribing handsomely, but we cannot afford to mount +our troopers on such horses as these. A good many gentlemen have found +their own horses, and of course will be well mounted; but a good, sound, +country horse is all we can afford for the others; they are excellent +for ordinary work, though, of course, not so fast as yours, nor quite so +big. Your horses have all a strain of English thoroughbred blood, and if +you should at any time have to ride for it there would be little chance +of the Boers overtaking you, though some of them are very well mounted, +for the two things a Boer will spend money on, are his horse and his +rifle. And when do you start?" + +"We are going to-morrow morning. I went to the station-master yesterday +evening and arranged for trucks for the horses to be attached to an +early train to Dundee. We want to get up in time to see the first of it, +and we should lose three days if we were to travel by road." + +"That is the right spirit, and I wish I could go with you; but my troop +will wear a sort of uniform, Norfolk jackets and riding-breeches, and +the outfitters are so overwhelmed with orders that it will be another +couple of days at least before they are ready. Then the men must have +two or three days' drill before they start; I am still short of horses, +so I will ride on and see Duncan. I want thirty-five more, and as yet, +although subscriptions are coming in well, we are still a good deal +short of our requirements. However, I dare say I shall be able to make +some arrangement with Duncan, as I shall probably have enough to pay him +in full by the end of the week. Altogether, I don't suppose I shall be +ready to start for another ten days, and unless the Boers delay their +advance I am afraid that I shall not get to Dundee." + +"Do you not believe that we shall be able to hold the town?" + +"I hardly think that there is a chance of it, and I am sure we made a +mistake in sending a portion of the force there. I know the premier was +most anxious that our troops should be posted as far north as possible, +in order to save the loyal farmers from plunder. If the position were +stronger and impossible to be turned, the case would be different; but +it is not strong, and can be turned on each flank. If the Boers march to +attack General Symons, who is in command there, he may possibly beat +them off; but as they can advance towards Ladysmith either from the Free +State on one side or the Transvaal on the other, he and his troops would +be cut off, and the loyal farmers would be plundered just as much as if +Symons had remained at Ladysmith. I fancy all the military men think +that a grave mistake has been made, and that General White should not +have exposed half his force to disaster. Besides, the position of +Ladysmith is no more defensible than that of Dundee. The Tugela would be +the natural line of defence, but even that could be turned by troops +from the Transvaal going through Zululand, and the line of the river +would be very difficult to defend by a force of less than twenty +thousand men. However, we shall see how the thing works out--how +enterprising the Boers are, and how warmly the Free Staters throw +themselves into the work." + +"You think that we shall have a hard time, Captain Brookfield?" + +"Yes, I think that is certain, even if Cape Colony keeps quiet, which I +am very much afraid it will not do. If it rises, it will take all the +strength of England to put it down. Well, I wish you all luck. I can +assure you I feel proud of my Johannesburg section, and I shall be glad +when you join me." + +He shook hands with the whole of the lads and then rode off. + +"The train starts at eight o'clock," Chris said. "We had better get our +good-byes over to-night, get some breakfast if we are able to do so at +half-past five, and meet here at six. We ought to be at the station at +least an hour before the train starts. We shall not only have to get the +horses into the trucks, which is certain to be a troublesome business, +as they are altogether new to it, but we shall have to see to our other +stores and belongings. I have arranged that we shall travel with the +horses, so that we can each stand at the heads of our own animals, and +if they are very wild, we can blindfold them until they become +accustomed to the situation. I have bought a couple of trusses of hay +from Thomas, and he will send down two of his native boys to the +station. I should advise you all to put some food into your haversacks, +there is no saying how long we may be on the road." + +"What sort of trucks are they, Chris?" "They have high sides, but no +roofs. Of course I would rather have had roofs, but the station-master +could not provide any waggons with them. But he showed me these, and as +the sides are quite high enough to prevent the horses getting out, they +will do very well." + +The saddles were taken off and piled together. There was no chance of +rain, so they were left uncovered. The lads then walked back into the +town. There was, of course, a sad parting that evening between Chris and +his mother, but she bore up well. She knew that hundreds of other women +were parting with husbands or sons, and she felt that, as the main cause +of the war was to rescue the Uitlanders in the Transvaal from the +oppression of the Boers, it behooved all the fugitives from that country +to do their utmost. + +In the morning the lads all arrived punctually at the rendezvous. The +horses were fed to the accompaniment, as usual, of pistol shots. Then +they were saddled up, the valises the lads had brought down with them +were strapped on, and with their rifles slung behind them they rode to +the station. + +It was, as they had expected, a long and troublesome business to get the +horses into the trucks, but at last this was managed. Nose-bags were put +on, with a few double-handfuls of grain, then one trooper was left to +each two horses, while the rest saw to their bundles of blankets, their +stores of tea, sugar, and flour, preserved milk, cocoa, bacon, and +tinned food. A couple of frying-pans, and a canteen of tin cups and +plates, a knife, fork, and spoon each, and two kettles, completed their +outfit. They had put their soft felt hats in their valises, and were all +in their flat fatigue caps. + +The train was a long one, but the carriages with it were empty, for +while the trains from the north were closely packed, there were few +persons indeed proceeding up country. The trucks, however, were well +filled, as great quantities of stores were being taken up, some to +Ladysmith, and others for the force at Dundee. The horses soon became +accustomed to the motion, and their masters took the opportunity of +familiarizing themselves with them, by talking to them, patting them, +and giving them pieces of bread and an occasional lump of sugar. The two +Kaffirs had brought on the pack-horses four water-skins and a couple of +buckets, and in the heat of the day the horses were allowed a good +drink, while their masters, whose haversacks had been filled by their +friends, enjoyed a hearty meal, washed down by tin mugs full of +champagne. + +They were in the highest spirits, although the meal was taken under +difficult circumstances, for all were seated on the upper rails of the +trucks, there being no room for them to sit down among the horses. The +plates were all packed up, and fingers and teeth served for knives and +forks, which was the less important since chickens were the staple of +the meal; and these had been cut up before starting. Many were the jokes +that passed along the line. All felt that it was the last experience +they were likely to have of civilized food, and that it would be a long +while before champagne or any other wine would fall to their lot. The +Kaffirs, who had each charge of two spare horses, enjoyed themselves no +less, for they had a fair share of the provisions of their masters, and +were in a high state of contentment with their prospects. + +There was a halt of an hour at Ladysmith. Many of the officers and +soldiers gathered at the station, their work for the day finished, and +the arrival of the train being always an event of some importance in the +little town. They were amused and interested at the party of young +fellows who alighted to stretch their legs and get a change of position. + +"Which is your leader?" a major asked Field. + +"The one talking to an officer. His name is Chris King." + +"Is he chosen because he is the oldest of you?" + +"No, that has nothing to do with it. We are all within a year of the +same age. We have all been chums and friends, and have hunted and shot +together, and he is the one we elected as our leader, just as you would +choose the captain of a cricket club. We all come from Johannesburg, +find our own horses, arms, and outfits, and ask nothing whatever from +the government; and as we speak Dutch, and all know more or less Kaffir, +we fancy we can make a good deal better scouts than your cavalry, who +can't ask a question of a Boer or get information from a native." + +The major laughed. He saw that the lad a little resented the joking tone +in which he had asked the question. + +"I have no doubt that you are right," he said, "and I am quite sure I +should like half a dozen of you as subalterns. When did you come from +Johannesburg?" + +"We left there about a week ago, and as we were only at Maritzburg three +days, we have not lost any time." + +"Indeed, I think that is a record performance. Of course you are all +looking forward to your first skirmish; I can assure you we are." + +"We had our first on the way down here, when we were between Newcastle +and the frontier. Four or five of us went to a farmhouse to try and get +some food and milk for the women and children. It was a Boer's place, +and the fellow came out with a rifle and warned us off. We went forward, +and he took a shot at King when he was quite close to him, but +fortunately the bullet only went through his hat. Chris knocked him down +and gave him a tremendous thrashing with his own whip. Then we took some +provisions and paid for them, and searching the house, found twelve +Mauser rifles and a lot of ammunition. We took these off without paying +for them. The Boer had made off while we were searching the house, and +he and some twenty others pursued us, not dreaming that we were now +armed. However, we gave them a volley, and emptied three saddles and +killed three or four horses, and they moved off without trying to make +our further acquaintance." + +"Well done, lads!" the officer said warmly, "that was an excellent +beginning, and I have no doubt that you will follow it up well." + +Similar conversations were going on all along the platform, and when at +last the lads again took their places in the trucks, a hearty cheer was +given them. The sun was setting when they arrived at Dundee. It was a +larger place than Ladysmith, as there were some coal-mines in the +neighbourhood, and a considerable number of men were employed in them. +Like Ladysmith it is situated on a plain dominated by hills. The camp +was some little distance out of the town. An officer was at the station +with a party of men to receive the stores brought up by the train. Chris +at once went up to him and saluted. + +"We have just arrived, sir; we are a section of the Maritzburg Scouts, +acting independently. As we are all from Johannesburg, and find our own +horses, equipment, and food, provide our own rations, and, of course, +serve without pay, we propose to scout on our own account, and as we all +speak Dutch well, I think that we may be useful in obtaining +information. We shall, of course, search the country in whatever +direction may be considered most useful." + +"I have no doubt that you will be of good service, sir," the officer +said. + +"I suppose we can camp anywhere we like." + +"I should think so. As you do not draw rations, it can matter little +where you post yourselves; but I don't think that you will be able to +get tents to-night." + +"We shall not want them, sir; we have each a large waterproof sheet, and +intend to use them as tentes d'abri. I suppose I had better report +myself at the headquarters of the general?" + +"Yes, that would be the proper thing. The camp is a mile and a half +away; if you follow the Glencoe railway, you cannot miss it." + +As soon as the horses were detrained and the baggage packed, the little +party mounted and left the station, and choosing a piece of unoccupied +ground a few hundred yards away, proceeded to unsaddle and picket the +horses, while Chris rode away to the camp accompanied by one of the +natives to hold his horse there. He had no difficulty in finding it, and +dismounting, walked to the group of head-quarter tents. His appearance +excited a good deal of amusement and some chaff from the soldiers he +passed. He looked, indeed, like a young Dutch farmer in his rough +clothes, and his rifle, and a bandolier of cartridges. Seeing a young +officer close to a tent, he asked him which was that of the adjutant- +general. + +"He is there talking to the general at the door of his tent. Do you wish +to speak to him?" + +"I should be glad to do so," Chris replied. The officer walked across +and informed the colonel that Chris wanted to speak to him. + +"Bring him across, Mr. Williams," the general himself said. "He is +evidently a young farmer, and possibly brings in some news of the +enemy's movements." + +The lieutenant returned to Chris and led him up to the general. + +"You have some news that you wish to give us, sir?" Sir Penn Symons +said. + +"No, general; but I hope to be able to do so to-morrow." + +He then stated his position and the nature of his command. + +"We are all very well mounted, sir," he went on, "and as we all speak +Dutch, hope to be useful. At any rate, we shall be no trouble to you, as +we draw neither rations nor pay. We think we can pass anywhere as Boers; +that is why we have not adopted any uniform." + +"I have no doubt you will be of service," the general said, though I +hardly think that you will pass as Boers with those caps." + +"We have all wide-brimmed hats to use while we are scouting, general; +but we carry these too, so that on our return towards your lines we can +be recognized even at a distance as not being Boers, and so avoid being +fired at." + +"Yes, that is a very necessary precaution. I will have officers +commanding cavalry and artillery detachments warned, that a section of +Maritzburg volunteers are dressed as farmers, but may be known in the +distance by having caps similar to the ordinary infantry field-service +caps. + +"Well, sir, I shall be glad if you will to-morrow ride to the south, +following the river, and endeavour to find out whether the Boers have +any considerable force in that direction, either on this side of the +river or the other, I may tell you that five of the Natal police were +captured on the evening of the 13th at De Jagers Drift. The Boers have +been in possession of Newcastle for the past three days, and they are +certainly crossing the passes from the Free State. You must be very +careful, for they have scouting parties across the river almost as far +as the Tugela. However, we hardly expect any serious struggle for +another week or ten days; for all the accounts are to the effect that +the Boers are still very deficient in transport, and that for the past +week those at Laing's Nek, and the other passes, have been very much +straitened for provisions. It would be as well for you, while you are at +Dundee, to come over once a day to report your doings, and to receive +orders as to the point where we most need information. Have you gone +into lodgings in the town?" + +"No, sir. We have waterproof sheets that form tentes d'abri, and we +prefer being with our horses, which were only bought a few days ago; so, +as we shall not have much opportunity of sleeping otherwise than in the +open for some time, we thought it as well to begin at once, especially +as the weather looks threatening, and the horses, being unaccustomed to +be picketed, might pull up the pegs and get loose were there a heavy +rain." + +"You seem to be well fitted for the work, and to set about it in the +right spirit." + +"We have all been accustomed to hunting expeditions, sir, when we have +often been out for some days, so that we understand how to shift for +ourselves, though we are new to campaigning." + +"What rifles have you? that does not look like a Lee-Metford." "No, +general, it is a Mauser. We captured twelve of them, at a Boer's +farmhouse three or four miles this side of Newcastle six days ago. He +fired at us, and though his bullet only went through my hat, we thought +ourselves justified in searching his house." + + +[Illustration: CHRIS OFFERS HIS SERVICES TO SIR PENN SYMONS.] + + +"Certainly you were. We heard that there had been a skirmish on the +road, and learned the particulars from one of those who took part in it, +and who stayed here for two or three days before going down the country. +He said that four or five young gentlemen, who were coming down with a +party of women and children from Volksrust, had gone to a farmhouse to +try and get food, milk, and bread for the females. The Boer farmer +insulted them, and shot at one of them when but two or three yards away; +he had been tremendously thrashed by the young fellow, and they returned +laden with a good supply of milk and bread, and twelve rifles and a lot +of ammunition that they had found at the farm. And with these they and +some of the men had beaten off an attack of a score of Boers without any +loss to themselves." + +"Yes, general, that was our party; we had sent forward for some waggons, +and got into Dundee two hours after the skirmish; and as there was a +train just going we went on at once, and reached Maritzburg the next +morning, where we were joined by some of our party who had come down the +day before. As we had made all our plans before leaving Johannesburg, we +were able to start this morning, which was the third after our arrival +there." + +"You were prompt indeed," the general said with a smile, "and must have +needed money as well as brains." + +"We had all obtained leave of our families, general, and were well +provided with funds to carry us through the campaign if it lasts for a +year. We wanted to be in time for the first fight." + +"I think yours was the first fight, except that a few shots were +exchanged between our scouts and the Boers on the morning after the +ultimatum expired. Now, sir, if you should at any time be in want of +necessaries I shall be glad to supply you; but I cannot furnish you with +ammunition, as the Mausers carry a smaller bullet than our rifles." + +"Thank you, general, but we have enough to last us for a considerable +time, having brought up six thousand rounds." + +"A good provision indeed," the general laughed; "enough to last you +through half a dozen pitched battles. I shall be in the town at six +o'clock to-morrow morning, and shall be pleased to inspect your little +corps before you start." + +"I thank you, general; we shall all be very proud to be inspected by +you." + +Then saluting he returned to his horse and rode back to Dundee. He was +pleased to see that the eleven little tents had been erected strictly in +line, that the horses were all standing quietly at the picket-rope, and +that two of the troop were placed as sentries. A large fire was blazing +in front of the tents, the two natives were squatting by it, the kettles +were swung over it, and a joint of meat was roasting there. Two or three +of the lads were standing talking together; the rest had gone into the +town. Cairns came up to him as he dismounted. + +"Have you heard the news, Chris?" + +"No, I have not heard any particular news." + +"I was at the station a quarter of an hour ago, and a telegram had just +been received that the Boers were, when it was sent off, entering +Elandslaagte station, and were in the act of capturing the passenger +train that was standing there. The message stopped abruptly, as no doubt +the Boers entered the room where the clerk was at work at the needles." + +"By Jove we are in luck!" Chris said. "Of course that was the train that +had to leave three hours after us. If we had stopped for that, the +horses, rifles, and kit would all have gone, and we should now be +prisoners. It is serious news, though, for it is evident that not only +are they marching against us in front, and on both flanks, but have cut +our communications with Ladysmith. There can be no doubt that, as +everyone said there, it was a mistake to send General Symons forward +here, as it was almost certain that with four regiments, three batteries +of artillery, a regiment of cavalry, and a few hundred of the Natal +police and volunteers, he could never maintain himself here. Why, we +heard at Ladysmith that a column had gone out the day before towards +Besters station, as the news had come in that they were even then in the +neighbourhood. It was a false alarm, but it was enough to show that the +Boers were likely to be coming down and cutting the railway in our rear. +General Symons told me that he did not expect any general advance of the +enemy just yet, because he heard that their transport was incomplete, +and that they were very short of provisions. But I don't think the want +of transport would prevent their advancing. We know well enough that the +Boers think nothing of going out for three or four days without any +prospect of getting any more provisions than they carry about them, +unless they have the luck to bring down an antelope. And as Utrecht and +Vryheid and Newcastle are all within a few miles of us, and the Free +Staters have already come down through some of the passes of the +Drakensberg, they must be within an easy ride of us; and if they are in +force enough to drive us out of this place, they must know they would +find themselves in clover, for we heard at Ladysmith that there were +provisions and stores for two months collected here." + + + + +CHAPTER IV + +DUNDEE + + +After picketing his horse, Chris went into the town. He found the +streets full of excited people, for the news that the railway had been +cut was serious indeed, and the scene reminded Chris of that which he +had witnessed in the streets of Johannesburg but eight days before. Only +eight days! and yet it seemed to him as if weeks had passed since then. +So much had been done, so great had been the changes. As at +Johannesburg, a considerable portion of the population had left, seeing +that, although the troops might for a time defend the town, the Boers +were certain to cut the line of railway. Work at the coal-mines had been +pushed on feverishly of late, for strangely enough there was no store of +coals either in Dundee itself or at any of the stations down to Durban, +and the authorities had only woke up a few days before to the fact that +coal would be required in large quantities for the transports on the +arrival of the troops. But now all this was to come to a stop. The hands +would be thrown out of employment, and the town would become stagnant +until it was captured by the Boers, or until an army arrived of +sufficient strength to clear Natal of its invaders. That evening many +who possessed vehicles started by road for Ladysmith, feeling that in +another twenty-four hours it might be too late. + +At seven o'clock, as had been arranged when they arrived, all the +members of the band met at the bivouac for supper. There was a general +feeling of excitement among them. They had known that hostilities must +soon begin, but to find that the line had already been cut, and that the +enemy were closing in in all directions, came almost as a surprise. +This, however, in no way prevented them from enjoying their meal. After +it was over they held, at Chris's suggestion, a sort of council. He had +already told them what the general had said to him, and that they were +to be inspected in the morning. As their saddlery was all new, there was +nothing to be done in the way of burnishing buckles and rubbing up +leather. As Chris remarked, all that would be necessary was an hour's +work in the morning grooming their horses. + +"Now," he said, "that the work is going to begin, we must draw up a few +rules, for, volunteers though we are, we must have some regulations. In +the first place, I find that the troops all parade in order of battle +before daybreak, so as to be able to repel a sudden attack or move in +any direction that may be required. If it is necessary for them, it is +still more necessary for us, and I think that it should be a standing +rule that we are all ready to mount at daybreak. Sentries must be posted +at night, however safe we may feel. I think there should be two, +relieved every two hours. There will he no hardship in that, as each +would only go on duty every other night. In the next place, I think +there should be what they call an officer of the day, who would +generally be in charge of the arrangements, see that the Kaffirs +attended to their horses properly, and so on. You see, we shall not be +always acting together, but might sometimes be broken into four troops, +in which case one in each five should command. I think the same lot +should always keep together. What do you think? Would it be better that +in each group of five one should be in charge each day, or that each +group should choose one to act as non-commissioned officer?" + +There was no reply. + +"What do you think yourself, Chris?" Sankey asked after a pause. + +"You are as well able to judge as I am," he replied. "I think that it +would perhaps be the best way to write down the twenty names and put +them in a hat, and draw them one by one. The first five should be number +one squad. I don't know whether that is the right word, but anyhow it +will do for them. The next five number two, and so on. Then each five +can vote whether they would prefer alternate commands, or to choose one +of their number as permanent non-commissioned officer. If they prefer +this, they must then ballot as to which among them shall be leader. If +you can think of any way that you would like better, by all means say +so." + +All agreed that the plan that he proposed should be adopted. Four groups +were first chosen. Before they proceeded to the next step, Peters said: + +"Of course I am quite game to carry it out as you suggest, Chris, but +don't you think it would be a good plan to let the final decision stand +for a week or two, each taking the leadership of his group in rotation? +At the end of that time we should be better able to make a choice than +we can be now." + +"I think that is a very good idea, Peters. What do you all say? Will you +each take your turn alphabetically for the present, and at the end of +fifteen days, when each of you have led three times, you can decide +whether each squad shall choose a permanent leader or go on as you have +begun." + +All at once agreed to the proposal. They felt, good friends as they +were, that it would be very difficult to decide now. + +"Very well, then, it shall be so," Chris said. "To-morrow we shall +certainly do some scouting, but in a day or two you may be shut up here; +and until we get away there will be no scouting to be done. We must have +some signals. Suppose we are scattered over two or three miles, we may +want to assemble, and must be able to signal. I thought of it before we +started from home, and put down in my pocket-book the sort of thing that +I fancied would be wanted. I will read it out to you." + +He stirred the fire into a blaze and then read: + +"One shot followed by another and a third, with ten seconds between +them, will mean 'Enemy seen on the right'; with twenty seconds between, +'Enemy seen on the left'; then, after a pause, two shots in quick +succession will mean 'Enemy in strength'; three shots will be 'Small +party only'; one shot, followed at an interval of ten seconds by two in +succession, will mean 'Retire to the point agreed on before we +separated'; followed by three shots in quick succession, will be 'Close +in to the centre'. We can think of others afterwards, but I think that +will do to begin with. I know that you have all pocketbooks, so take +down these signals at once." + +"We ought to know where you will be," Field said, "so that we could +rally round you ready for the next order." + +"That might be so; therefore we had better fix on three shots in quick +succession, followed in ten seconds by a fourth. The sound will be +sufficient to let you know pretty well where I am, and you will on +hearing it, join me at once. Are there any other suggestions?" + +There was silence and then the books were closed. + +"I cannot too strongly impress upon you all," Chris said, after they had +chatted for some time, "the necessity for being extremely cautious. We +know how slim the Boers are, and how accustomed they are to stalk game; +and we shall have to be as watchful as deer, more so, in fact, since we +have not their power of smell. When we break up into four parties, each +party must scatter, keeping three or four hundred yards apart. On +arriving at any swell or the crest of a hill, a halt must be made, and +every foot of the country searched by your field glasses, no matter how +long it takes. You must assure yourself that there are no moving objects +in sight. When you get near such a point you must dismount, and, leaving +your horse, crawl forward until you reach a point from where you have a +good view, and on no account stand up. While you are making your +observations any Boers who might be lying in sight would be certain to +notice a figure against the skyline, and we know that many of them are +provided with glasses as good as our own. We must be as careful as if we +were out after game instead of men. You all know these things as well as +I do, but I want to impress them upon you. You see, they have captured +five of the Natal police, who are a very sharp set of fellows. However, +a few days' scouting will show us far better what is required than any +amount of thinking beforehand. There is one thing that I want to say to +you. You elected me for your leader, but it is quite probable that when +we have worked together for a bit some of you may prove much better +qualified for the post than I am. What I want to say now is, if this is +the case, I shall feel in no way aggrieved, and shall serve just as +cheerfully under his orders as I hope you will under mine so long as I +command you." + +There was a general chorus of "No fear of that, Chris. We all know you +well enough to be sure that we have made a good choice. We knew it +before we left Johannesburg, but your pluck in walking up to that Boer +with his loaded rifle clenched the matter." + +"Well, we shall see," Chris said. "I shall do my best, but, as I said, +the moment you want a change I shall be ready to resign; and now I think +that we may as well turn in. It is nine o'clock, and we must be up at +daybreak. Squads number one and two will each furnish a man for the +first watch, taking the first on the list alphabetically. At eleven they +will be relieved by two from squads three and four; then one and two +furnish the next pair, and so on. Four watches will take us on till +daybreak. The two of each squad who will be on duty to-night turn in to +the same tent together, then the others will not be disturbed." + +The blankets were spread in the little shelter tents, and all except the +two men on duty were soon asleep. Chris had a tent to himself, there +being an odd number, and an extra waterproof sheet had been carried for +this purpose. Before leaving Maritzburg twenty-two poles, a little +longer than cricket stumps, had been made under Chris's direction. They +were shod with iron, so that they could be driven into hard ground. At +the top was a sort of crutch, with a notch cut in it deep enough to hold +another of the same size. Twenty-two other sticks of the same length +were to form the ridgepoles. Half these were provided with a long brass +socket, into which its fellow fitted. The whole, when they were +accompanied by the spare horses, would be packed with their stores and +spare blankets. At other times each rider would carry two of the poles +strapped to his valise behind him. + +Chris was the first to stir in the morning. There was but the slightest +gleam of daylight in the sky, but he at once blew a whistle that he had +bought that evening in the town, and heads appeared almost immediately +at the entrances of the other tents, and in half a minute all were out, +some alert and ready for business, others yawning and stretching +themselves, according to their dispositions. + +"First of all, let's put on the nose-bags, and let the horses have a +meal," Chris said; "then set to work to groom them. Remember, there must +not be a speck of yesterday's dust left anywhere." + +All were soon hard at work. The Kaffirs stirred up the embers of the +fire, which they had replenished two or three times during the night, +hung the kettles again over it, and cut up slices of ham ready to fry. +By half-past five Chris, after inspecting all the horses closely, +declared that nothing more could be done to them. Then they were +saddled, the valises, with a day's provisions and a spare blanket, being +strapped on. Then all had a wash, and made themselves, as far as +possible, tidy. By this time breakfast was ready, and they had just +finished their meal when a party of horsemen were seen in the distance. +Rifles were slung over their shoulders, and bandoliers and belts full of +cartridges strapped on, and they donned their forage-caps after coiling +up the picket-ropes and halters and fastening them with their valises to +the saddles. Then they mounted and formed up in line just as the +general, with two of his staff, rode up. After saying a few words to +Chris, the general examined the horses and their riders closely. + +"Very good and serviceable," he said, "and a really splendid set of +horses. Of course, gentlemen, you would look better if you were in +uniform, but for your purpose the clothes you have on are far more +useful. Let me see you in your hats; I can then better judge how you +would pass as Boers." + +The lads all slipped their forage-caps in their pockets, and put on +their felt hats, which were of different shapes and colours. As they had +agreed beforehand they at once dropped the upright position in which +they had been sitting, and assumed the careless, slouching attitude of +the Boers. + +"Very good indeed," the general said with a laugh. "As far as +appearances go, you would pass anywhere. The only criticism I can make +is that your boots look too new, but that is a fault that will soon be +mended. A few days' knocking about, especially as I fancy we are going +to have bad weather, will take the shine out of them, and, once off, +take good care not to put it on again. A Boer with clean boots would be +an anomaly indeed. Now, I will detain you no longer." + +The only manoeuvre the boys had to learn was the simple one of forming +fours. This they had practised on foot, and performed the manoeuvre with +fair accuracy. Then Chris gave the word, and, after saluting the +general, led the way off at a trot. + +"They are a fine set of young fellows," the general said to the two +officers with him. "They are all sons of rich men, and have equipped +themselves entirely at their own expense. They are admirably mounted, +and provided they are not caught in an ambush, are not likely to see the +inside of a Boer prison. It says a good deal for their zeal that they +are ready to disguise themselves as Boer farmers instead of going in for +smart uniforms. However, they are right; for, speaking Dutch, as I hear +they all do, they should be able singly to mingle with the Boers and +gather valuable information." + +As soon as they were fairly south of the town, Chris said: + +"Now our work begins. Number one squad will make its way towards the +river, and follow its course, keeping always at a distance from it, so +that while they themselves would escape notice, they can ascertain +whether any bodies of the enemy are this side of it, or within sight +beyond the other bank. Number four will take the right flank, and keep a +sharp look-out in that direction. Squads two and three will, under my +command, scout between the flanking parties, and examine the farmhouses +and the country generally. The whole will, as I said last night, +maintain a distance of about three hundred yards apart, and each man +will as far as possible keep those next to him on either hand in sight." + +The two flanking companies starting off, those under Chris separating as +they rode off until they were as far apart as he had ordered, and then +moved forward. When on level ground they went fast, but broke into a +walk whenever they came to the foot of rising ground, and when near the +top halted, dismounted, and crawled forward. Each man carried a Union +Jack about the size of a handkerchief, elastic rings being sewn to two +of the corners. When necessary these flags could be slipped over the +rifles, and a signal could be passed from one to another along the whole +line--to halt by waving the flag, to advance by holding the rifles +steadily erect. Other signals were to be invented in the future. Chris +took his place in the centre of the line, in readiness to ride to either +flank from which a signal might be given. + +For five or six miles no signs of the enemy could be perceived. Most of +the fields were entirely deserted, but round a few of the scattered +farmhouses animals could be seen grazing, and these Chris set down as +belonging to Dutch farmers who had no fear of interference by the Boers, +and were prepared to join them as soon as they advanced. Many of these, +indeed, during the past fortnight had trekked north, and were already in +the ranks of the enemy. Presently Chris, who was constantly using his +glasses, saw the flutter of a flag on a hill away to the left, and a +minute later the signal to halt passed along the line. It had been +agreed that signalling by shot should not be attempted unless the enemy +seen were so far distant that they would not be likely to hear. + +"What do you see, Brown?" Chris said as he reached the lad who had first +signalled. + +"There are a good many men and animals round a farmhouse about two miles +away. The house lies under the shoulder of a hill to the left, I suppose +that that is why the others did not see it." + +Dismounting, Chris crawled forward with the other until he could obtain +a view across the country. As Brown had said, the farmhouse stood at the +foot of the line of hills they were crossing, and was fully a mile +nearer to those on the right flank than to the point from which he was +looking at it, but hidden from their view. Bringing his glass to bear +upon it, he could distinctly make out that some forty or fifty men were +moving about, and that a large quantity of cattle were collected near +the house. + +"It is certainly a raiding party," he said to his companion. "They are +too strong for us to attack openly, at least if they are all Boers. It +would not do to lose half our number in our first fight. Still, we may +be able to frighten them off, and save the farmer, who is certainly a +loyalist, and cattle. You gallop along the line as far as it extends and +order all to come over to the right. I shall go on at once and get a +view of the ground close by. By the time they have all assembled we can +see what had best be done." + +Going back to their horses they started in opposite directions. In a few +minutes Chris reached a point which he believed to be nearly behind the +farmhouse, picking up some of the scouts by the way. + +"I expect I shall be back in about a quarter of a hour," he said as he +dismounted. "You, Peters and Field, may as well come with me, I may want +to send back orders." + +They walked forward fast until so far down the hill that they could +obtain a view of the farmhouse. The moment they did so they lay down, +and made their way across some broken ground until they were within a +quarter of a mile of it; then seated among some rocks they had a look +through their glasses, and could see everything that was passing as +clearly as if they had been standing in the farmyard. It was evident the +Boers had only arrived there a short time before Brown noticed them. +Parties of two or three were still driving in cattle, others were going +in and out of the house, some returning with such articles as they +fancied and putting them down by their horses in readiness to carry them +off. Two men and some women and children were standing together in a +group; these were beyond doubt the owners of the farmhouse. + +"How many Boers do you make out? I have counted thirty-eight." Peters +had made out forty, and Field forty-three, the difference being +accounted for by those going in and out of the house and sheds. + +"Well, we will say forty-five, and then we shan't be far wrong. We +certainly can't attack that number openly, but we may drive them off +empty-handed if we take them by surprise." He examined the ground for +another minute or two, and then said: "I think we might make our way +down among these rocks to within three hundred yards of the house. I +will send six more down to you. With the others I will go down farther +to the left, and work along in that little donga running into the flat a +hundred yards to the east of the house. You keep a sharp look-out in +that direction, and you will be able to see us, while we shall be hidden +from the Boers. We shall halt about three hundred yards beyond the +house. As soon as we are ready I will wave a flag, then you and your +party will open fire. Be sure you hide yourselves well, so that they may +not know how many of you there are; they are certain, at the first +alarm, to run to their horses and ride off. Directly they do so we will +open fire on them, and finding themselves taken in the flank they are +likely to bolt without hesitation. Don't throw away a shot if you can +help it, but empty your magazines as fast as you can be sure of your +aim. Between us we ought to account for a good many of them." + +"I understand, Chris; we will wait here till the others join us, and +then, as you say, we will work down as far as we can find cover." + +Chris at once returned to the main party, who had by this time all +assembled. "We can bring our horses down a good bit farther without +being seen," he said. "There is a dip farther on with some rough +brushwood. We had better fasten them there; they have learned to stand +pretty fairly, but they might not do so if they heard heavy firing." + +Leading their own horses and those of Field and Peters they walked down +to the spot Chris had chosen, and there threw the reins over the horses' +heads as usual, unfastened the head ropes, and tied them to the bushes. +Chris had already explained the situation to the troop, and had told off +six of them to go down to join Peters. He now advanced cautiously with +these till he could point out to them exactly the spot where the two +scouts were lying. Then he returned to the others, and they walked along +fast until they came upon the break in the hill, which lower down +developed into a depression, and was during the rains a water-course. +Down this they made their way. On reaching the bottom they found it was +some twelve feet below the level of the surrounding ground. + +A couple of hundred yards further they could tell by the sound of +shouting, the bellowing of cattle, and other noises, that they were +abreast of the farmhouse, and going another three hundred yards they +halted. Chris went up the bank until he could obtain a view, and saw +that he was just at the spot he had fixed on. Making signs to the +others, they took their places as he had directed, some ten yards apart. +Then he raised his rifle after slipping the little flag upon it. A +moment later came the crack of a rifle, followed by other shots in quick +succession. Chris, with his eyes just above the level of the ground, +could see all that was passing round the farmhouse. With shouts of alarm +the Boers at once rushed towards their horses, several dropping before +they reached them. As they rode out from the yard the magazine rifles +kept up a constant rattle, sounding as if a strong company of troops +were at work. Chris waited until they were nearly abreast of his party, +and then fired. + +His companions followed his example, and in a moment a fire as rapid and +effective as that still kept up from the hill was maintained. This +completed the stampede of the enemy. They were soon half a mile away, +but even at that distance the Mauser bullets continued to whistle over +and among them, and they continued their flight until lost in the +distance. Chris's whistle gave the signal for ceasing fire, and the two +parties sprang to their feet, gave three hearty cheers, and then ran +towards the farmhouse. In the yard lay five Boers and seven or eight +horses; the riders had jumped up behind companions, for as they passed, +Chris had seen that several of the animals were carrying double. The +little group, so lately prisoners, advanced as they came up, almost +bewildered at the sudden transformation that had taken place, their +surprise being increased on seeing that they had apparently been rescued +by another party of Boers, and still more when on their reaching them +they found that these were all mere lads. + +"We are a party of Maritzburg Scouts," Chris said, with a smile at their +astonished faces; "though, as you see, we are got up as Boers so as to +be able to get close to them without exciting suspicion. We were +fortunate in just arriving in time." + +"We thank you indeed, sir," the settler said, "for you have saved us the +loss of all our property, and, for aught I know, from being carried off +as prisoners. We were intending to trek down to Ladysmith today, and had +just driven in our herds when the Boers arrived. If they had been +content with stealing them, they would have been away before you +arrived; but they stopped to plunder everything they could carry off, +and, as I should say, from noises that we heard in the house, to smash +up all the furniture they could not carry off. We are indeed grateful to +you." + +"We are very glad to have had the chance of giving the plunderers a +lesson," Chris said. "It will make them a little cautious in future. But +I think that you are wise to go at once, for there are certainly parties +between this and Elandslaagte, where they have cut the line; so I should +advise you to travel west for a bit before you strike down to Ladysmith. +We have not heard of any of them being beyond the line of railway yet. +Now we have work to do. Number one and two squads will at once go up and +fetch down the horses, number three and four will examine the Boers who +have fallen here and out on the plain and will bring in any who may be +only wounded." + +He went out with this party; they found that eight more had fallen. +Three of these lay at a short distance from the farmhouse, and had +evidently fallen under the fire of the party on the hill; the others had +been hit by those in the ambuscade. Altogether ten horses had been +killed. Five of the Boers were still alive. + +"Have you a spare cart?" Chris asked the farmer. + +"Yes, I can spare one. Fortunately I have a small one besides two large +waggons. May I ask what you want it for?" + +"I want it to carry these wounded men to within reach of their friends. +Which is the nearest drift?" + +"Vant's Drift, and it is there, no doubt, that the party crossed. It is +a little more than two miles away." + +"Then we will place the wounded in the cart, and you might send one of +your Kaffirs with it to the drift and stick up a pole with a sheet on +it; they are sure to have halted on the other side, and will guess that +there are wounded in it. As soon as the Kaffir comes within two or three +hundred yards of the river he can take the horses out and return. I dare +say he will be back again before you are off." + +The cart was driven along the line that the Boers had taken, the wounded +being carefully lifted and placed in it as it reached them. Two more +were found dead and three wounded some distance beyond the spot where +the searchers had turned, having fallen nearly a mile from the farm; the +lads who accompanied the cart then returned. Long before they reached +the house the horses had been brought down. The settler and his Kaffirs +were hard at work loading the stores into two ox-waggons. The lads all +lent their assistance, and in less than an hour the settlers started for +Ladysmith, the women and children in the wagon, and the men on horseback +driving their herds with the aid of the Kaffirs. After a hearty adieu, +Chris and his party rode on together for some little distance before +again scattering widely to recommence their work of scouting. Hitherto +they had been too busy for conversation, but now they were able to give +words to the satisfaction they all felt at their success. + +"It has been splendid!" Sankey said enthusiastically. "We have defeated +a force twice as strong as ourselves, have killed or badly wounded +eighteen of them, and you may be sure that of those that got away +several must have been hit. Not one of us has a scratch." + +"Splendid!" another exclaimed. "It could not have been better managed. I +think we ought to give three cheers for Chris." Three rousing cheers +were given. "After this, Chris," Carmichael said, "I don't think you +need talk any more about resigning the command. General Symons himself +could not have done better." + +"I think, at any rate, we have begun to wipe off old scores," Chris +said. "We have paid for a few of the insults the ladies had to submit to +as we came along, and I am heartily glad that we were in time to do it. +We have baulked them of the haul they expected to make, and saved +something like a thousand head of cattle for the colony, to say nothing +of preventing these people from being absolutely ruined. It is only a +pity that we had not our horses with us. If we had, not many of the +Boers would have recrossed the river. But we could not have taken them +with us without being detected before we got into position, and in that +case we might have had a hard fight, and matters would probably have +turned out altogether differently." + +There was a general expression of assent, for all felt that in an equal +fight the Boers, being twice their own numbers, would have been more +than a match for them. It was evening when they returned to Dundee, +having come across no more Boers during the day's work. Directly they +arrived at the little camp where they had left the tents standing in +charge of their two Kaffirs, Chris wrote a short report of their doings, +stating briefly that they had come upon a party of forty-five Boers in +the act of driving off the cattle and sacking the house of Mr. Fraser, a +loyal settler. Having dismounted and divided into two parties, they had +attacked the Boers and driven them off, with the loss of ten killed and +eight seriously wounded left on the field. Many of their horses had been +killed. The wounded Boers had been sent in a cart to Vant's Drift, and +the farmer and his herds had been escorted as far as the line of +railway, which they had crossed and were making for Ladysmith. There had +been no casualties among his party. + +Field rode over with this report and delivered it at headquarters, +remaining to ask whether there were any orders for the next day. When he +returned he brought a line from the general. It contained only the +words, "I congratulate you most heartily. The affair must have been +managed excellently, and does you all the greatest credit. Continue +scouting on the same line to-morrow." + +The lads were all highly delighted when Chris read this aloud, and then +sat down to a well-earned meal, which was the more enjoyed as it had +been voted that Field, as one of the finance committee, should go into +the town and buy half a dozen of champagne in honour of their first +victory. In the course of the evening one of the general's staff rode +into camp on his way to town, having been requested by him to obtain +full particulars of the fight at Eraser's farm. He took his seat by the +fire with them, and Chris gave him a full account of their proceedings. + +"Upon my word, Mr. King," he said, "you managed the matter admirably; no +cavalry leader could have done it better." + +"There is no particular credit about the management," Chris said; "we +acted just as we should have done had we been stalking a herd of deer +instead of a party of Boers. One always manages, if possible, to put a +party on the line by which they are likely to take flight, before +crawling up within shot. If we could have taken our horses down with us +before we opened fire we should have done so, and being so well mounted, +I think few of them would have got away; but we could not manage it +without risking being seen, and in that case the Boers, on making out +what our strength was, would certainly have shown fight; and even if we +had beaten them, which I don't suppose we should have done, we should +have suffered heavily." + +"You were quite right not to risk it," the officer said; "we know by old +experience that the Boers are formidable antagonists when behind +shelter, and, accustomed as they are to shooting on horseback, I dare +say they will do well when not opposed by regular cavalry, who, I am +convinced, would ride through and through them. I am quite sure that in +the open they will not be able to make any stand whatever against +infantry, which is the more important, as in so hilly a country as Natal +our cavalry would seldom be able to act with advantage." + +In the course of conversation he told them that there was no news of any +large body of the Boers being near. Joubert's force had not moved out of +Newcastle, and nothing had been heard of the Free Staters or of the +Utrecht force under Lucas Meyer. "We have sentries on all the lower +hills round here and Glencoe, and there is no fear of our being +surprised. The sooner they come the better, for we are all longing to +get at them; and I can tell you we felt quite jealous when we heard of +your spirited affair to-day. I can assure you that we shall have a +greater respect for the volunteers than we had before, and if all do as +well as you have done to-day they will be a most valuable addition to +our force." + +After their visitor had left, they sat chatting round a fire till ten +o'clock, and then turned in. + + + + +CHAPTER V + +THE FIRST BATTLE + + +All in the little camp, save the two sentries, slept soundly until, at +two in the morning, they awoke with a sudden start. A deep boom and a +strange rushing sound was in their ears. With exclamations of surprise +they all scrambled out of their tents. + +"What is that?" Chris asked the sentry. + +"It is a big gun on the top of that high hill they call Talana. We saw +the flash of light, and directly after heard the report, and a rushing +sound. I suppose it was a shot overhead; if it had been a shell we +should have heard it burst and seen the flash. It must have been fired +at the camp." + +The horses, startled by the report, were plunging and kicking, and the +lads at once ran to their heads and patted and soothed them. Not until +they were quiet did they gather again. + +"What time is it?" Chris asked. + +"The clock on the church struck two a few minutes ago," Brown, who was +on sentry, said. As he spoke another gun boomed from Talana, or as it +was generally called in the town, Smith's Hill, from a farm owned by a +settler of that name at its foot. It was about a mile and a half east of +the town, and therefore some three miles from the camp. + +"It must be a very heavy gun by its sound--as big as the largest of +those we have heard fired from that fort above Johannesburg. Joubert +must have started from Newcastle early to have managed to get it up +there by this time, or it may be the force from Utrecht; anyhow, they +must be strong to venture to attack us in this way. We may as well +saddle up, though it is hardly likely the cavalry will be engaged. I +shall not send to camp for orders; the general will have enough to think +about, and it will make no matter where twenty men place themselves. +However, I shall ride over to camp and see what is going on there; it is +likely enough that there will be an attack by the Free Staters on the +other side. Carmichael and Horrocks, do you run into the town and see +what is going on there. I will not start till you get back; if any of +the staff see me they may ask some questions about it." + +In a quarter of an hour the two lads returned. The people there were +completely scared at the unexpected attack, and the streets were full of +half-dressed men; however, they seemed to be getting over their first +terror, now that they found it was the camp and not the town that was +being fired at, and the volunteer corps was already gathering in +readiness for orders. + +"We may be pretty sure that nothing will be done till daylight," Chris +said. "Our men know the ground now, and none of the Transvaal Boers can +do so, and I don't think they will venture to move till they can see +their way about. I am glad, indeed, that most of the women and children +were sent off two days ago, and that the scare on the evening that we +arrived, when the news came of the railway being cut at Elandslaagte, +sent the greater part of the men who had remained behind, and who did +not mean fighting, off by road. If they bombard the town they may do +damage to property, but there will be no great loss of life. You had +better give the horses a feed--that is, if they are disposed to eat at +this hour--while I am away." + +On reaching the camp, Chris found all the troops under arms. They had +been roused before the Boer fire began, as a picket to the east of +Dundee had been attacked and driven in. It was not, however, supposed +that the Boers were in force until their guns opened fire. All lights +were out in the camp, and the enemy's shot had gone wide. It was by no +means clear why the Boers should have betrayed their presence on the top +of the hill until it was light enough for them to use their guns with +effect. Chris had, before starting, put on his flat cap. + +As he approached the camp he was challenged by a sentry: "Who comes +there?" and on his replying, "An officer of the Maritzburg Scouts," the +sentry called out: "Advance, officer of the Maritz Scouts, and give the +countersign." + +Fortunately, as it happened, the officer had given it to Chris on his +visit to their camp, and he therefore answered at once, "Ladysmith," and +was relieved when the sentry called out, "Ladysmith pass, and all is +well." + +When he entered the camp he found the men were standing in lines, but at +ease, with their rifles piled in front of them, and there was a hum of +conversation in the ranks. At the head-quarter tents everybody was +astir. Presently an officer came up. + +"Who are you?" he asked as he advanced. + +"I am in command of the party of Maritzburg Scouts." + +"Mr. King, is it not?" the officer asked. + +"Yes, sir. I have ridden in to ask if there are any orders." + +"No, and there will be none issued until it is daylight, and we can make +out how matters stand and what is the force of the Boers. It is not +likely that you will have any special orders, but can act with the +cavalry and mounted infantry." + +"Thank you, sir. Then I will ride back at once." On returning to camp, +he said: "There is nothing to be done till morning. So far they have no +idea of the force of the Boers. This is just the work we were formed +for. Peters, you and Field and Horrocks certainly speak Dutch better +than any of the others. It is half-past two now, and we have at least +two and a half hours of darkness, therefore I propose we try to find out +what force the Boers have got up there. It is no use for more than four +of us to go, so the others can turn in, except the two sentries; but all +will, of course, be ready to mount in case any party of Boers should +come down upon the town before it is light. The next time I want three +men on special duty I will give others a chance." + +"Shall we ride, Chris?" + +"I think so. Of course it will be more difficult getting up there in the +dark; but I shall make a detour of three or four miles, and come up on +the other side, and we should be much more likely to be questioned if we +were on foot than on horseback. Should we come upon any party of armed +Boers, remember we have just arrived from Standerton, and finding when +we got to Newcastle that the force had moved on, and were to take up +their station at Talana Hill, we rode on to overtake them. When we get +fairly there among them, we will dismount; Field and Peters will stand +by the four horses, Horrocks and I will go on. If you hear a row, you +will mount and wait a minute or two, and then if we do not come, you +will ride off with our horses as well as your own. We shall try and make +our way to the edge of the hill, and ought to be able to slip away in +the darkness if we can get there before we are shot down or overtaken. +However, I don't think there is much chance of our being recognized. +Indeed, I expect most of them will be lying down for a sleep before the +time comes for action. If there is one thing a Boer hates it is being +kept awake at night. I will take one of the Kaffir boys with us. They +can see in the dark a great deal better than we can; and as the Boers +are sure to have some natives with them, he is quite as likely to pick +up news as we are--more so, perhaps, for the natives will sit and talk +all night while their masters are snoring. I think the one we call Jack +is the sharpest." + +Jack was called up, and on being told what was required, at once agreed +to accompany them. + +No time was lost. Chris and his three companions mounted, and with the +Kaffir running alongside they set off at a trot. Keeping to the north of +east, they rode on for some two miles, Jack leading the way with as much +ease as if it had been daylight. When they had, as they calculated, come +upon the ground the Boers must have passed over, they turned south, and +kept on until they saw the dark mass of Talana on their right, and made +towards it. On this side the hill sloped gradually, while on that facing +Dundee it was extremely steep and strewn with boulders. They were now +going at a walk, and they soon came upon an immense gathering of +waggons, carts, oxen and ponies, crowded without any order, just as they +had arrived two hours before. "There is no fear of our being detected," +Chris said in a whisper, "and we can't do better than stop here. There +is no getting the horses through this crowd, and if we did manage to do +so there would be no getting them back, certainly not in a hurry. You +had better lie down beside them, it is not likely that any Boers will be +coming up or down. If the whole camp is like this there is not the +slightest fear of our getting caught." Jack had already been instructed +that when he got into the camp he was to leave them and join any party +of Kaffirs he found awake, and talk to them as if he were one of the +bullock drivers. As Chris and his companions returned, the former would +blow his whistle softly, and he was then to make his way down to the +horses at once. + +Passing on unquestioned they neared the top of the hill, having left the +mass of the vehicles behind them. There were, however, large numbers of +ponies assembled here in readiness should their masters require them. +Hitherto they had heard no voices since entering the camp, but as they +went farther they heard talking. Here the fighting men were assembled. +For the most part they were lying down; some were asleep; others, +however, were moving about, and joining or leaving groups gathered +together discussing the events of the next day. Horrocks and Chris now +separated and joined different parties, some twenty yards from each +other. They attracted no attention whatever. Their appearance in their +broad hats and rough clothing, their bandoliers and rifles, was +precisely similar to that of the men standing about. + +No doubt whatever that the morning would bring them a brilliant victory, +appeared to be entertained by the enemy. The artillery would first crush +that of the British, then they would charge down and finish the affair. +"They say that they have less than four thousand altogether," one said. +"We are as many, and, as everyone knows, one Boer is a match for any +three rooineks. It will not be a fight, it will be slaughter. We shall +stop a day to gather the plunder and send it off in the waggons, then we +shall go south and destroy the force at Ladysmith. Three days later we +shall be in Maritzburg, and within three or four days afterwards shall +drive the British on board their ships at Durban. We shall get grand +plunder there and at Maritzburg. But I think it is time now to take a +hand at building up that wall along the front. Ebers' commando have been +at it for three hours, and it is our turn now." + +[Illustration: CHRIS AND HIS COMPANIONS SCOUTING.] + +There was a general movement, which was accelerated by a sharp order, +and a minute later Horrocks and Chris again came together and moved on +with the others. Three hundred yards farther they came upon six guns, +beyond which a number of men were at work carrying and placing great +stones to form a rough wall. These left off their work as soon as the +party arrived. Having now seen all that was necessary, the two lads +joined them and returned with them down the hill. The others threw +themselves down near their horses, but Chris and his companion went on. +Through the huge gathering of waggons they made their way with great +difficulty, Chris giving a low whistle occasionally. At last they were +through the camp. Jack was standing by the horses, and Peters and Field +at once rose to their feet. Without a word they mounted, and rode +without speaking till they were some little distance from the waggons. + +"You are back earlier than I expected," Field said. "You have been gone +scarcely an hour." + +"No; the only difficulty we had was making our way through the mass of +waggons and animals all mixed up higgledy-piggledy, and there has been +no more excitement than if we had been walking through Dundee. We have +got all we wanted to know. Their strength is about four thousand. They +have six guns. They are building a stone wall along the brow of the +hill, and they are cock-sure that they are going to thrash us without +difficulty." Field and Peters laughed. + +"They are fools to count their chickens before they are hatched," the +latter said. "If they think it is going to be another Laing's Nek +business they will find themselves mightily mistaken, though it will be +a very difficult business to scale that hill from the other side under +such a rifle fire as they will keep up." + +Jack had now taken his place ahead of them again, and kept there with +ease, although, they broke into a canter as soon as they reached the +level ground. In half an hour they reached their camp. + +"Now, Jack," Chris said when he had dismounted, "we have not heard what +news you have picked up." + +"Not much news, baas. Talk with some Kaffirs; all hope that we beat them +to-day, but think we cannot do so. Too many Boers and big guns. They say +Boers very angry because the other commandos not here, and Free State +Boers not arrived. They sure going to beat the rooineks, but are afraid +that some may get away. If Joubert and Free Staters here, catch them in +a trap and kill them all." + +Such was the substance of Jack's answer in his own language. By this +time the rest of the party had turned out to hear the news. They had had +but little sleep, for all were intensely anxious as to the fate of their +four comrades, and although delighted that they had returned safely, +were a little disappointed on finding that the affair had been so tame +and unexciting. While they were talking the two Kaffirs had stirred up +the fire, put some wood and some coal on, and hung up the kettle. + +"That is right, Jack," Chris said; "day will begin to break in half an +hour, and we may have to be moving." All was quiet until half-past five, +and the lads had just finished their meal when the Boer guns opened +fire, and two or three minutes later those of the British replied. + +"It is an uncomfortable feeling sitting here with that terrific roaring +noise overhead," Chris said. "One knows that there is not the slightest +risk of being hit, but, to say the least of it, it is very unpleasant. +There, a shell has just burst over the camp. So it is shell that they +are firing." + +Indeed, the Boers had been using these missiles only, but owing to some +fault in the loading, or the badness of the fuses, they fell for the +most part without bursting. It was soon evident to the lads that the +range of the British guns was shorter than that of the heavier pieces +from Talana. The distance was five thousand yards, and the elevated +position of the Boer guns added to the advantage given by their superior +weight. + +"I will ride in now," Chris said as he got up from breakfast, "and tell +the staff what we have gathered as to the Boers' strength." He had on +his way down the hill exchanged his hat for his forage-cap, and taking +Horrocks with him he galloped to the camp. Sir Penn Symons was standing +on a small elevation watching the fire. Chris rode up and saluted. + +"I have no orders for you, Mr. King, except that when the fighting is +over you will join the cavalry in pursuit." + +"Thank you, sir; I have not come for orders, but to report to you that +with Mr. Horrocks and two others, and one of our Kaffir servants, I +entered the Boer camp last night in order to ascertain their strength." + +"You did!" the general exclaimed in surprise. "You hear that, +gentlemen?" he said, turning round to three or four of his staff +standing but a short distance behind him. "Mr. King and three of his +party absolutely entered the Boer camp last night to discover their +force. Well, sir, what was the result?" + +"There are about four thousand of them, sir, over rather than under, and +they have six guns, all of heavy calibre. When I was there they were at +work building a thick wall some five feet high of rough stones along the +edge of the hill. It will scarcely shelter the guns, but it will provide +cover for the riflemen at the edge of the hill. There is an immense +gathering of waggons and carts--there are certainly not less than a +thousand of them--in a confused mass behind the hill. Arriving in the +dark, each seems to have gone on until it could get no farther. The +fighting men are all on the top of the hill, and between them and the +waggons are their ponies. They certainly could not ride away till the +waggons have been passed through, but possibly a passage may have been +left on each side of these for them to get through, in order, as is +their intention, to charge your army when their guns have silenced your +artillery. I gathered that expected commandos had not come up. They were +disappointed at hearing nothing of the Free Staters, who they expected +would have attacked Glencoe from the other side. They are absolutely +confident of success, and expect to overwhelm General White at Ladysmith +in three days from now, and to be in Pietermaritzburg in a week, and are +talking of driving the last rooinek on board the ships at Durban shortly +after." + +The general smiled. "I am much obliged to you for your information, Mr. +King, and am much pleased at the courage with which you and your +companions entered the Boer camp to obtain it. It is satisfactory to +learn that their force is not much greater than our own. It is also +useful to know that their ponies are gathered so close to them, for +shells that go over the hill may burst among them; and I believe that +one of the Boers' most vulnerable points is their horses, for without +them they would feel absolutely lost. I am sure, Mr. King, that you +would wish to be in the thick of the fighting, but I would rather that +you curbed your impetuosity, for after the manner in which you obtained +this news for me, I can see that your party will do far greater service +in scouting and in gaining intelligence than they could afford in +action. I should advise you to shift your camp, as the troops are about +to advance into the town, and the enemy's shot will soon be falling +there." + +A few minutes later two field batteries moved forward and took up their +position south of Dundee, escorted by the mounted infantry and the +rifles. The third battalion of the Lancashire regiment remained to +protect the camp should it be attacked by the Free Staters, while the +Dublin Fusiliers and the Royal Irish Fusiliers were to march through the +town to a donga or river-bed half a mile to the east. Beyond this the +long ascent to Talana begins. The King's Royal Rifles were to take up a +position under cover to the east of the town. + +Chris had ridden back fast to Dundee. The work of taking down the tents +and packing their materials and all the stores on to the spare horses +took but a few minutes, and two of the lads went with the two natives +and saw the horses safely placed in a sharp depression half a mile away, +in which they would be safe from Boer shells. Chris had told his +companions what the general had said. They all looked disappointed. + +"We shall have plenty of opportunities afterwards, and it is a +compliment that he considers we had better reserve ourselves for +scouting, which, after all, is the work we always intended to carry out. +Still, though, after what he has said, we cannot absolutely join the +cavalry, we will manage somehow to see some of the fighting without +getting into the thick of it. Besides, I should say that in any case the +whole brunt of the affair must fall upon the infantry and artillery. If +they silence the Boer guns and capture the hill, the battle is won, and +the cavalry will have to wait for their chance till they can get the +Boers to fight on ground where they can act." + +Drizzling rain had now set in, but this and the fact that they had +started without breakfast in no way abated the spirits of the troops who +soon came along, marching with light step and eager faces which showed +that they were delighted at the prospect of action. The batteries to the +right had already come into play, and a vigorous cannonade was being +directed at the crest of the hill, from which the Boer guns kept up a +slower though steady fire in return. + +"While nothing else is doing we may just as well ride over and see how +things are getting on there," Chris said. And as soon as the two Irish +regiments had passed, the little troop trotted across to the rising +ground and dismounted a few hundred yards from the guns. They soon saw +with satisfaction that the fire of the Boers was far from effective, +their aim was not good, and a very small proportion of the shells burst; +while on the other hand the shrapnel from the British batteries burst +with splendid accuracy over the crest of the hill. For two hours the +artillery duel continued, then the Boer guns gradually ceased their +fire. The mist that had partly shrouded the summit of Talana, eight +hundred feet above the plain, and the smoke that still hung thickly +there, rendered it impossible to say whether they had all been put out +of action or simply withdrawn, but when it cleared off they could no +longer be seen. It was now the turn of the infantry. Beyond the donga in +which they were lying the rise of the ground was gradual, up to a +plantation which surrounded Smith's farm. Beyond this the ground was +rocky. The men advanced at the double in open order, and the moment they +were seen by the Boers a continuous fire of musketry was opened. The +distance was about a mile, but the Mauser rifles had a much greater +range than this and the bullets pattered thickly on the ground. Only +four men, however, fell. The two regiments halted in the plantation and +farm buildings, and the advanced line at the edge of the trees opened +fire in answer to that to which they were exposed. The general at first +had taken up his position with the guns, but as soon as the men advanced +from the donga he joined them and accompanied them as far as the +plantation. Then he returned to the battery, which continued its fire +with greater activity to prepare the way for the further advance of the +infantry. + +The Rifles had joined the two Irish regiments, and at half-past nine +General Symons galloped up to the farm and gave the order for the +advance. This was received with a cheer by the men, who had been +impatiently awaiting it. Scarcely had the cheer died away when the +general was mortally wounded by a bullet that struck him in the stomach. +Unconscious that the wound was so severe he retained his seat a minute +or two, and was then carried by the Indian bearer company into the town. +The troops, ignorant of the misfortune that had befallen them, were now +working their way up the hill, taking advantage of every stone and +boulder, and although exposed to a terrific fire, gradually pushing on +until they reached a stone wall which ran round the face of the hill. +Beyond this the ground was much rougher and very much steeper--so steep, +indeed, that it was almost impossible to climb it. The fire of the enemy +was now terrific. The troops were some three hundred yards from the +crest, and it was certain death to show a head above the wall. An +officer placed his helmet on the end of his sword, and the moment he +raised it, it was riddled by five balls. + +For a time it was impossible to advance farther, but when the Boer fire +moderated a little the order ran along the line for the men to storm the +position. A signal was made to the artillery to cease fire, and as it +did so the men leapt over the wall and rushed forward. There was now no +thought of taking shelter or returning the Boers' fire, every effort was +needed for surmounting the difficulties in their way. In some places the +rock was so steep that the men had to climb on their hands and knees, +sometimes those below pushed their comrades up and were in turn assisted +by them to climb. The roar of musketry was unceasing. It seemed to be an +impossibility for any man to reach the top unscathed, and yet there was +no hesitation or wavering. Numbers fell, but panting and determined the +rest pressed on. The Rifles suffered most heavily, and out of the +seventeen officers who advanced with them five were killed and seven +wounded. At last the steepest part of the ascent was surmounted. Those +who first reached this point waited until joined by others, and then +fixing bayonets they rushed up the slope to the edge of the plateau +cheering loudly. + +The Boers did not await the onset; the great body had already fled. They +had believed it impossible for mortal men to scale the hill under their +continuous fire, and our steady advance through the hail of bullets had +astounded them and shaken their courage. The artillery, after ceasing +fire, had galloped off at full speed and taken up their position on the +ridge known as Smith's Nek, overlooking the plain behind the hill. For a +distance of three miles this was covered with waggons and galloping men. +The guns were about to open fire upon them when a white flag was +hoisted, and, believing that the Boers had surrendered, the gunners +abstained from firing. It was, however, but the first of numerous +similar acts of treachery, and the Boers were thus enabled to make their +escape. + +The appearance of the plateau gained by the troops was appalling. Some +five hundred of the Boers lay dead or wounded, and many had doubtless +been carried off. Three of the guns lay dismounted, the others had been +removed; for as they could not be sufficiently depressed to bear upon +the stormers, they had been taken off as soon as the advance began in +earnest. Beyond the plateau smashed waggons and dead animals lay +thickly. Great numbers of the Boer ponies had been killed; many were +still standing quietly waiting for their masters, lying dead above. + +Pursuit was out of the question. The men were exhausted by their +efforts; they were wet to the skin by the rain that had for nine hours +come down unceasingly; they had had no food since the previous day, and +the tremendous climb had taxed their powers to the utmost. For a time +they cheered vociferously, the first joy of victory overcoming the +thought of their dead and wounded comrades, who had to be collected and +carried down. The loss had been severe, ten officers and thirty men had +been killed, twenty officers and a hundred and sixty-five men wounded; +and nine officers and two hundred and eleven men did not answer to the +roll-call. This loss was unaccountable. + +Chris, as soon as the infantry advance began, had, after talking with +the others, agreed to set out in the direction in which the three +squadrons of cavalry had started in the morning with instructions to +work round, and be prepared to cut off the enemy's retreat. They had +with them some of the mounted infantry and a machine-gun. + +As the whole Boer force would be concentrated on the hill, Chris thought +that there would be no danger in riding round, especially as, even had +the Boers posted a force to protect their line of retreat, he was +confident that the speed of his horses would prevent any chance of +capture. From some natives he learned the direction that the cavalry had +taken, and presently on rising ground, saw two parties halted in hollows +some two miles apart. The farthest out on the plain appeared to be the +largest, and to this he rode. The officer in command had seen him in +camp, and as he saluted on riding up, said: + +"So you have come to lend us a hand, sir? Can you tell me how matters +are going on at Dundee?" + +"At the time we rode off, sir, the advance of the infantry had just +begun, the Boer guns had been silenced, and our men were advancing from +Smith's farm under a very heavy fire of the enemy, which continued +without intermission as long as we were within hearing distance." + +"Did you see the other squadron as you came along?" + +"They are in a hollow two miles away." + +"Ah! that is where we left them." + +The troopers were all dismounted, and the scouts followed the example. +The boom of the British guns was continuing unabated. "They can be +getting on but slowly," the officer said. "I am afraid we shall find it +a very tough job. I suppose there is a strong force up there?" + +"Over four thousand." + +"How do you know?" + +"I was up there last night," Chris said, "with three of the others. We +did not go up in these caps, as you may suppose, but in wide-brimmed +hats. We were able to get about without exciting any suspicion whatever. +We found they had six guns and over four thousand men. As we all speak +Dutch fluently there was really no chance of our being detected." + +The other officers of the squadron had all gathered round. + +"Danger or no danger, it was a very plucky action," their leader said. +"I suppose that was the news you brought in just before the troops +marched off. Well, I wish that we had got our breakfast and the horses a +feed before we started. It is more important for the horses than it is +for us, though I should not be sorry for breakfast myself." + +"We have some food in our haversacks, sir. We breakfasted before we +started, and we filled our haversacks with biscuits, thinking that +perhaps they would be welcome, for we knew that none of the troops had +anything to eat before leaving." + +"You are very good to offer it," the colonel said. "But we could not eat +while the men have nothing." + +"It will go round, sir, though it will be but a small portion for each. +We each put about ten pounds of biscuits in our haversacks, and shall +not be sorry to get rid of the weight. It will make something like +three-quarters of a pound per man all round." + +"More than that," the officer said. "I am indeed greatly obliged to +you." + +The haversacks were emptied and divided into four heaps of equal size, +with a proportionate heap for the ten officers. Four men were called up +from each troop, and in a short time the soldiers were all munching +biscuits, every man dividing his rations with his horse. The sight of +the rough-looking troop had at first excited some amusement and a little +derision among the soldiers, but this feeling was now exchanged for +gratitude, and it was unanimously agreed that these young farmers were a +capital set of fellows. The hours passed slowly until the officers, +through their glasses, saw a great movement in the encampment on the +hill. The waggons standing lowest separated from the others, and +gradually a general movement set in. + +"Our men must be gaining ground," the colonel said, "and the Boers are +beginning to funk." + +The bits were put into the horses' mouths again, the saddles buckled up +tightly, and an expression of satisfaction succeeded that of disgust at +the long hours standing in the pouring rain. Presently, when the leading +waggons were abreast of them, at a distance of about a mile, the order +was given to mount, and the two squadrons dashed across the plain and +were soon among the fugitives. There were many mounted men among them, +these being the first to steal away from the fight. They opened fire as +the cavalry approached, but were soon overthrown or driven away in +headlong flight. Many of the waggons were seized, but each moment their +defenders became stronger. The Boers were now flocking down in great +numbers, and seeing their teams and property in danger they dismounted, +formed some of the waggons up in a square, and from them opened a heavy +fire upon the troopers. Chris dismounted his party, and returned the +fire, but the officer in command, seeing that with so small a force of +infantry he could do nothing, and that the numbers of their enemies were +increasing, drew off. He would have continued the fight, but he supposed +that the artillery would soon be at work, and knew they could not open +fire as long as he was engaging the Boers, he therefore retired with the +long train of captured waggons, and late in the afternoon reached camp. + +Nothing was seen of the other squadron and mounted infantry, nor was any +news received of them until the following day, when a medical officer +with some wounded men came in. Like the larger force, they too had +ridden in among the waggons, but had taken a more northerly line, and +had come on a point where the Boers were thickest. They had charged and +taken several prisoners, and inflicted severe loss on the enemy. These, +however, had swarmed round them, keeping up an incessant fire and +barring their retreat. They took up a defensive position in a farm, and +for three hours repelled all the attacks of the Boers, until their +horses were all killed or had broken away and the ammunition exhausted, +while the Boers had just brought up the three guns they had withdrawn +from the hill. Further resistance would have ended in the extermination +of the whole party, and Lieutenant-Colonel Möller was therefore obliged +to surrender. + + + + +CHAPTER VI + +ELANDSLAAGTE + + +The scouts erected their tents again on their former ground. The +remaining inhabitants of Dundee were jubilant over the victory that had +been won, and did their best, by hanging out flags from the windows, to +decorate the town. Jack and his companion had returned to the camp with +the spare horses as soon as the hill was carried, and had the fires +lighted by the time the party came in. In spite of having worn their +blankets as cloaks, all were wet through, but after changing their +clothes, they went into the town to gather the news of how the hill had +been won, and by the time they returned their meal was ready. + +"What do you think of affairs, Chris?" + +"I think that the officer at Ladysmith was right, and that it was a +frightful mistake to divide the force and send four thousand men up +here. They have thrashed the Boers today, but they may be back again on +the top of that hill tomorrow. Besides, we know that Joubert's force was +not engaged to-day, and they and the Free Staters will be gathering +round. We might win another victory, but we are certain to be obliged to +fall back soon, and my opinion is that we shall be very lucky if we get +through safely." + +"Why not start to-morrow morning, Chris?" Peters said. "We shall be of +no use scouting here, and not much use if there is hard fighting. I hear +that some natives have brought in the news that there was some firing +to-day at Elandslaagte. If that is the case, we must have troops there, +and the chances are that they will be there to-morrow." "Yes, that is +very likely," Chris agreed. "General White will be sure to hold the line +there if he can, for he must feel sure that the force here will have to +retreat now that it is attacked in earnest. When we were talking to-day +to the cavalry, one of the officers mentioned that we had still +telegraphic communication with Ladysmith, for although the wires by the +railway are cut, it is possible to communicate through Helpmakaar. The +Boers seem to have forgotten that, for it is quite out of the direct +line, and nearly double as far round. Well, as we had no orders to come +here, I suppose there is no occasion to get orders to go back. I think +Peters's proposal is a very good one, but on a point like this everyone +ought to give an opinion. My view is that we might be a great deal more +useful there than here, and that if we stop we shall run a great chance +of being captured. I think that it would be a fair thing to put it to +the vote." + +He took two or three leaves out of his pocket-book, and tore them up +into narrow slips of paper. + +"Now," he said, "write 'Yes' if you are in favour of going back, 'No' if +you are for stopping here. Drop them into my cap and the majority shall +decide." + +When the strips of paper were examined, it was found that only two out +of the twenty-one were in favour of remaining. + +"That settles it," Chris said. "It is thirty miles down to Elandslaagte +by road, and as from here to Glencoe is five miles, and we are no nearer +there than we are here, by cutting across to Waschbrank we shall have +only five-and-twenty miles to ride. It is well that we should get there +as early as possible, so we will settle to start at five o'clock, which +will take us there by eight, in time to see anything that is going on. +No doubt we shall be able to hear from natives as we go along whether +the troops are still there; at any rate if they are, we are sure to hear +firing before we get there, unless, of course, the Boers have retired." + +The horses had already had an extra feed, and the Kaffirs were warned of +the hour at which they were going to start. The pack-horses were able to +keep up with the rest, for their loads were by no means heavy--in fact, +they carried less weight than the others. The two hundred pounds of +biscuits given to the hussars made no difference in their baggage, for +this had been bought at Dundee, as the lads decided to keep their stores +as far as possible intact for a time when they might for some days be +away scouting in a district where no provisions could be obtained. + +At four o'clock the sentries roused the others, and having taken a cup +of coffee and some cold meat and bread, and led the horses down to the +stream while the Kaffirs were loading up the packets and bundles, they +mounted at five o'clock and set off at a trot, Jack and Japhet, a name +suggested by Field, who was the wag of the party, were allowed to ride +on two of the horses that carried the lightest burdens. All the lads +were provided with compasses, but these were not necessary, as both the +natives were well acquainted with the country, which was wild and +mountainous. + +When they reached Wessels station, nine miles from Elandslaagte, they +heard the sound of guns. At this proof that there was still a force +there, they turned off from the road, and riding west, struck the point +where the main road to Meran crossed the Sundays River, and then, still +keeping a mile west of the line of railway, found themselves abreast of +the station. Just as they did so, a body of mounted volunteers galloped +up towards them. As soon as they were seen, they exchanged their hats +for forage-caps, and some of them, by Chris's orders, hoisted their +union-jacks on their rifles. + +"It is well that you raised those flags," the officer in command said. +"We made sure by your appearance that you were Boers, and rather took +your change of caps as one of their slim devices, and had our rifles +ready to give you a warm reception. I suppose you come from Dundee? We +heard news yesterday evening of the battle, and were sorry to hear how +heavy the losses were, and particularly of General Symons' wound. I +suppose you have no later news?" + +"No, beyond that we heard he was very dangerously hit indeed. He is +either at the church or town-hall. Both have been turned into +hospitals." + +"There is a good deal of anxiety at Ladysmith," the officer said. "The +general opinion is that, with the Boers closing in all round it, the +position is a very serious one." + +"I am afraid so, sir. There is nothing to prevent the Boers from +returning to their position on Talana Hill to-day; and soon after we +left the town this morning we heard the sound of guns away on the right, +and supposed that the Free Staters had approached Glencoe. As mounted +men are of very little use there, and our party is too small to be able +to do any good, we thought it would be best to come back here, +especially as there was a native report that there was firing in this +direction." + +"Yes; a party of our cavalry under French came up with a battery of +field artillery. There was a little skirmishing, but in the evening the +Boers were strongly reinforced, and our cavalry returned to Ladysmith. +It was only a reconnaissance to ascertain the general situation. To-day +we are stronger. Squadrons of the 5th Dragoon Guards, 5th Lancers, the +Natal mounted, battery, and several detachments of mounted volunteers, +including the Imperial Light Horse, and half the Manchester Regiment, +are coming up in an armoured train. I suppose you are not attached to +any other corps?" + +"Yes; we form a section of Captain Brookfield's corps of Maritzburg +Scouts. As you see, we are not in uniform; it being thought that, as we +are all from Johannesburg, and speak Dutch and Kaffir, we should be of +more use for scouting if able to appear as Boers." + +"A very good idea," the officer said, "but somewhat dangerous; for if +they caught you they would assuredly shoot you as spies." + +"We don't mean to be caught if we can help it, as you see we are very +well mounted." + +"Uncommonly well. Brookfield's subscriptions must have come in +handsomely for him to be able to buy such horses as those." + +"We provide our own mounts and equipments," Chris said, "and consider +ourselves very lucky in getting hold of this batch of horses from Mr. +Duncan on the day he arrived at Maritzburg. I really think they were +very cheap at sixty pounds each." + +"They were not dear, certainly; and the fact that they came from him is +in itself a sufficient recommendation. We have got some thirty from him, +but they are a different stamp of animal and did not cost half that +figure. And now we must be riding to join the rest of our fellows. We +made you out when you were a couple of miles away, and were sent off to +ascertain what you were. By the way, you will find Brookfield there. He +arrived with his men by rail last evening." Riding on, they soon came +upon the mounted corps, and were warmly received by Captain Brookfield. + +"You are back just in time," he said. "I suppose that you saw something +of the fight yesterday, but, as I see your number still complete, you +can scarcely have been in the thick of it?" + +"We were with two squadrons of Hussars, and captured a good many waggons +and did a little fighting, but nothing very serious. There were only a +few casualties. We heard, however, from Colonel Yule, who has succeeded +poor Symons, that up to ten o'clock last night, another of the squadrons +of the Hussars and a company of mounted infantry with them had not +returned, and nothing was known of their whereabouts." + +"Had they not got into camp when you started?" + +"I did not hear, sir. In fact, we set off by daylight. But last night it +was hoped that the squadron, which was acting independently, had lost +their way, and would come in this morning. Where is the Boer force now?" + +"Our batteries have shelled them out of the station. They were wholly +unprepared for it, and bolted at once to those hills a mile and half +east of the line. Their camp lies at the bottom of that conical hill. +You can make them out from here with your glass. There, French is moving +forward." + +The order had indeed been given to advance, the artillery accompanying +the cavalry, and halting every two or three minutes to deliver their +fire. The ground was flat, but cut up by gullies. As soon as they came +within range, the colonials dismounted and added their fire to that of +the guns. An immense confusion was seen to reign in the Boer camp, and +thirty-seven British subjects, including the officials and staff at the +railway-station, and some of the coal-miners, took advantage of this and +ran forward to join their friends. They were at once sent back into +Ladysmith, after having given the information that General Koch was in +command of the Boers, and that Commandant Miellof and the German Colonel +Shiel, with many of the Johannesburg commando, were there. Chris and his +comrades felt great satisfaction at the news. + +"We have a chance of paying off old scores on the right persons now," +Chris said. "I do hope that the fellows who insulted us when we were +coming down are here, and that we shall manage to get among them." + +For the time, however, this wish was not gratified. The Boers now seeing +that they had such a small force opposed to them, steadied themselves +and opened fire with some guns, Maxims, and rifles from the crest of the +hill, while a swarm of horsemen and dismounted men poured out to +threaten the flanks of the British. The odds were too great; the +comparatively heavy guns of the enemy were well aimed and served, and +quite overpowered the fire of the light cannon of the field and mountain +batteries. The order was given to fall back, which was done in good +order, though the troops were harassed by a hot fire from the enemy +concealed in the gullies. On reaching the high ground near Modder +Spruit, the country was more in favour of the British, who were now +extended on each flank. The Boers were unable or unwilling to move their +heavy guns from their position on the hill, and being now beyond their +range, and exposed to the fire of four batteries as well as the +infantry, those pressing forward fell back. General French had brought +out a signalling apparatus with him, and the telegraph wires were +tapped, and a message sent to General White asking him for +reinforcements in order to carry the Boer position. + +The fight now ceased for a time. A party of the Boers occasionally crept +forward and opened fire, but the Colonial Horse dashed forward and sent +them flying back to the hills. From nine o'clock till a quarter to two +the troops remained idle, but the reinforcements then arrived, a battery +of field artillery, several squadrons of Dragoons, Lancers, and +Colonials, and the Devonshire regiment and Gordon Highlanders, the +infantry being brought up by train. These were under the command of +Colonel Ian Hamilton, who had a thorough knowledge of Boer tactics, and +knew how to handle his troops. It was well that it was so, for, led by a +less experienced commander, they would have suffered terribly in their +advance. While the infantry detrained, the Colonials, followed by the +5th Lancers, rode towards some low hills, whence some parties of Boers +had maintained a distant fire. These were at once scattered. The +infantry marched along some ridges parallel with the railway, but a mile +away, while the Devonshire regiment kept along the low ground by the +line. The 5th Dragoon Guards, with some troops of Colonials and one of +the field batteries, moved forward on the left. + +The Manchesters were on the right of the infantry, the Gordons in the +centre, and the Devons on the left, as they set their faces towards the +Boer position. At three o'clock the action began, the Boer riflemen +opening a heavy fire. It was still too distant, however, to do any +serious execution, and the British moved forward as regularly and +unconcernedly as if it had been a field day. The Boer fire grew in +intensity, and one of our batteries opened with shrapnel to drive them +from the lower ridges. At half-past three the Boer artillery joined +their deeper roar to the rattle of musketry and the sharp cracks of the +British guns. Although it was still early the light was indistinct, for +a heavy thunder-storm had been for some time brewing, and this burst +before the heat of the action really began. The darkness was all in +favour of the advancing infantry, who in their khaki uniforms were +almost invisible to the Boers. + +The troops were now in extended open order, and advanced towards the +foot of the hill by rushes, taking advantage of the ant-hills that +studded the plain and afforded an excellent cover, being high enough to +cover them while lying down, and thick and compact enough to resist the +passage of a Mauser bullet. The Highlanders were suffering the most +heavily, their dark kilts showing up strongly against the light sandy +soil, and while the Devons and Manchesters sustained but few casualties, +they were dropping fast. They and the Manchesters were somewhat in +advance of the Devons, who were guarding their flank, which was +threatened by a large number of Boers gathered on the ridges on that +side. + +The storm was now at its height, the thunder for a time deadening the +roar of the battle, but through the driving rain the infantry pressed on +until they reached the foot of the Boers' hill. Large numbers of the +enemy were on the slope, hidden from sight by the boulders, but these +could not long maintain their position, for the British marksmen shot as +straight as the Boer. Our batteries, which had almost silenced those of +the enemy, scattered their shrapnel among those higher up the hill, and +as the Boers rose to fly before the bayonets of our cheering troops, +they were swept away by volleys of the Lee-Metfords. So, with short +pauses when shelter was obtainable, our troops bore upwards, cheering +and even joking, until they reached the last shoulder of the hill. The +Boers made a short but plucky struggle, numbers pushing up from behind +to help their comrades, but nothing could check the impetuosity of our +troops. The magazines of the rifles were now for the first time set in +action, and the Boer force withered away under the terrible storm of +shot. + +The men of the Imperial Light Horse, who had dismounted and joined in +the advance, were fighting side by side with the Highlanders and +Manchesters. The pace was now increased to a run, and shouting and +cheering the men went forward with levelled bayonets. Many of the Boers, +lying behind rocks, maintained their fire until the troops were within +two yards of them, and then rising, called for quarter. The men, furious +at seeing their comrades shot down when all hope of resistance was over, +would have spared none, had not the officers with the greatest +difficulty restrained them from bayoneting the Boers, and many of these +were in fact killed. As the troops, now joined by the Devons, were +rushing down upon the camp, the Boers raised a white flag, and the bugle +sounded "Cease firing". The men halted for a moment and then were +advancing quietly when a tremendous fire broke out from the Boers, who +were scattered over the ridges of the hillside and a slope leading to +its summit. + +Hitherto the British loss had been wonderfully small considering the +storm of bullets through which they had passed, but numbers now dropped, +and taken wholly by surprise, the troops ran up the hill again. But not +for long. Halting when they reached the crest, and furious at the +treachery that had been practised with such success upon them, they +turned again, and rushed down the hill, scattering the Boers, who still +clung to their shelters, with their fire. It was just six o'clock when +the Devons carried the last defence of the Boers and then with the +Manchesters swept down into the camp. It was now the turn of the +cavalry. These had in the darkness moved forward unnoticed, and the +Lancers and Dragoons, with a few of the Colonials, among whom were the +Maritzburg Scouts, fell upon the flying Boers and cut them up with great +slaughter, and, although it was now quite dark, followed them for +upwards of two miles, and then returned to camp. + +The losses were heavy. The Gordons had lost four officers killed and +seven wounded, and a total of a hundred and fifteen casualties among the +four hundred and twenty-five men led into action. The Imperial Light +Horse lost their colonel and had seven officers wounded, and eight men +killed and forty wounded. Two hundred of the Boers lay dead upon the +field. Their wounded were vastly more numerous, and most of the +principal officers were killed or captured. General Koch, two of his +brothers, a son, and a nephew were all wounded; Shiel, Viljoen, and many +others killed or captured. Everything had been left behind. Three guns, +all their baggage, their waggons, a great quantity of arms and +ammunition, and many horses fell into the hands of the victors. Several +battle flags were also captured, and two hundred prisoners were brought +in by the cavalry. The night was a dreadful one, the rain still +continued to come down, the cold was bitter, and it was next to +impossible to find, still less to bring down, the wounded. Nevertheless +the soldiers carried on the work during the greater part of the night. +Boer waggons were turned for a time into hospital tents, and here by the +light of their lanterns the surgeons laboured unweariedly in giving what +aid was possible to those brought in, whether Boers or Britons. Chris +and his band worked as hard as the rest, and carried down a great number +of wounded; but in spite of all the exertions of the troops many +remained on the hillside all night, the sufferings from the wounds being +as nothing to that caused by the wet and cold. The lads' flasks were of +great use now, and enabled many a man, too badly wounded to be carried +down the rough hillside, to hold on till morning. General White had +arrived from Ladysmith while the battle was going on, but he left the +command in the hands of General French. On the following morning orders +came for General French to retire, as strong parties of the enemy had +been seen further south, and it was hourly becoming more and more +evident that it would be impossible to hold the country beyond +Ladysmith, and many were of opinion that even this position was too far +advanced. + +The splendid valour shown by our soldiers at Dundee and Elandslaagte, +and the heavy losses they suffered, had been practically thrown away. +The coal-fields of Northern Natal had been lost, the loyal settlers had +been plundered and ruined. Colonel Yule's force was in imminent peril, +and all that had been obtained was the temporary possession of the two +heights, both of which had to be relinquished on the following morning. +Beyond showing the Boers how enormously they had underrated the fighting +powers of the British troops, no advantage whatever had been gained by +the advance beyond Ladysmith. + +Three of the Johannesburg Scouts had been wounded in the charge among +the Boers. None of the injuries were severe, being merely flesh wounds, +of which they were hardly conscious during the fighting, and which would +not be likely to keep them long from the saddle. None of them applied +for medical assistance, as the surgeons were so fully occupied with +serious cases. Their comrades bound up the wounds and placed them in the +most sheltered position they could find, five of their comrades +remaining in charge of them and the horses, there being no possibility +of finding the two Kaffirs and the spare animals in the confusion and +darkness. + +"We have had one lesson," Chris said, as at seven in the morning the +party assembled, worn out by the long night's work, "and that is, that +blankets are well enough against a passing shower, but that when there +is any probability of wet we must carry our waterproof sheets with us. +Of course they would have been no good last night, but on occasions when +there is no need for us to be using our hands they will be an immense +comfort." + +"But we should have been wet through before we lay down, Chris." + +"Yes, they would not have kept us dry, but they would have gone a long +way towards keeping us warm. It would be like putting oilskin over wet +lint; we should have felt as if we were in a hot poultice in a short +time. And even while riding it would have been very comfortable, if we +had worn them as we did the blankets, with a hole in the middle to put +our heads through." + +"But that would spoil them for tents," Carmichael said. + +"Well, we could have flaps sewn so as to cover the hole." + +"Our blankets were very useful last night," Horrocks remarked. "I don't +know how we could have got many of those poor fellows down the hill if +we had not carried them in the blankets. It was infinitely easier for +them and a great deal easier for us. I saw lots of soldiers using theirs +in the same way." "Are you sure you will be able to sit your horses down +to Ladysmith?" Chris asked Brown, Capper, and Harris, the three wounded. + +All laughed. "One would think that we were babies, Chris," Harris said. +"We could ride to Maritzburg if necessary, though I feel my arm rather +stiff, and no doubt it will be stiffer still to-morrow. I felt a bit +miserable at sunrise after lying there shivering, and envied you fellows +who could keep yourselves warm by working; but I am beginning to thaw +out now, and the sight of the Kaffirs coming towards us with the horses +half an hour ago, and the thought of hot coffee, did even more than the +sun to warm me." + +"It will be ready soon," Willesden, who was specially in charge of the +stores, said. "It was a capital idea bringing that large spirit stove +and the paraffin with us; even a native could not find any dry sticks +this morning." + +"Except as the soldiers have done," Chris said, pointing to where, a +quarter of a mile from the spot where they had gathered, a dozen fires +were blazing, the soldiers having utilized some of the Boer waggons that +had been smashed by the shell for the purpose of firewood. + +"Yes, but if we were by ourselves, Chris, there would be no broken +waggons; besides, after all I should not care to go down and scramble +with the soldiers for a place to put a kettle on. At any rate, the stove +will be invaluable out on the veldt." + +"We all agree with you, Willesden," Peters said, "and it was because you +were the one who suggested it that we promoted you to the office of +superintendent of the kitchen. It is a comfort, too, that we have some +clear water instead of having to get it from one of these muddy streams. +The storm has done good anyhow, for if it had not been for that there +would have been no breakfast for the troops until they had moved to the +river." + +In another twenty minutes they were drinking hot coffee and munching +biscuits. At ten o'clock the bugle sounded the assembly, and the troops +formed up, the wounded were placed in ambulance waggons or carried on +stretchers, and all returned to Elandslaagte station. Here the wounded +were sent on by train, while the infantry and cavalry returned by road. +Talking to some of the officers of the Imperial Horse, several of whom +were friends of his father, and had only left Johannesburg a short time +before the declaration of war, Chris learned that the principal object +in fighting the battle was to drive the Boers off the line by which the +Dundee force would retreat; for Colonel Yule in his telegraphic despatch +had stated, that although a victory had been won he felt that the +position was untenable, and that he might at any moment be forced to +evacuate it. He also learned that the safety of the line beyond +Ladysmith was already threatened, but whether Sir George White would +decide upon falling back towards Pietermaritzburg or would hold +Ladysmith no one knew. Certainly nothing could be determined upon until +General Yule rejoined with the division from Dundee. + +The position there was indeed growing worse every hour. While the battle +of Elandslaagte was being fought the Boers had opened fire from the +hills above Glencoe on the British camp, and had compelled it to shift +its position. The next day they were again obliged to move by artillery +on the Impati mountain, and it was then that General Yule decided to +retire at once on Ladysmith. A cavalry reconnaissance which was sent out +found that the Boers were in great strength in the pass of Glencoe, and +it was therefore determined to move by the roundabout way through +Helpmakaar. Some stores of ammunition that had been left under a guard +in the other camp were fetched, and with full pouches the little army +started on its long and perilous march at nine o'clock on the evening of +the 22nd. The camp was abandoned as it stood. The wounded remained with +some surgeons under the protection of the Red Cross flag. All the +available transport accompanied the column, but the men's kits and all +other encumbrances were left behind. They were obliged to pass through +Dundee to get upon the southern road, but so quietly was the movement +effected that but few of the townsmen knew what was happening. + +The column was led by Colonel Dartnel, chief of the Natal Police, whose +knowledge of the district was invaluable to the troops. The roads were +heavy, and the rain continued to pour down in torrents. Each man carried +three days' provisions; they tramped along silently through the night; +stoppages by swollen streams were frequent, and by daybreak the next +morning they had only accomplished nine miles of their journey. Early in +the morning the townspeople had woke up to the fact that the army had +gone, and there was a general exodus of all who could obtain +conveyances. The Boers remained for some time in ignorance that the +force whose capture or destruction they had regarded as certain had +slipped away. They saw the tents, but the fact that neither men nor +horses were visible puzzled them, and it was eleven o'clock before some +of the more venturesome galloping down found that the English force had +escaped. + +Then from all sides they poured into the town. Had they at once pursued +they might still have overtaken the retreating force before nightfall; +but they immediately set to work to loot the great stores of provisions +left behind, and to gather their pickings from the deserted houses of +Dundee, and so let slip their opportunity, and no pursuit whatever was +attempted. For four days the column continued its march, resting for a +few hours each day and usually marching all night. The road was terribly +bad, leading through narrow mountain passes, and had but a small force +of the enemy held the Waschbrank gorge, where the sides were for three +miles nearly perpendicular, a terrible calamity might have taken place. +Happily, however, the Boers were in absolute ignorance of the road which +the British troops were following, and concluded that they must have +somewhere crossed the railway and were making their way down by the +roads to its west. That they had gone through Helpmakaar does not appear +to have occurred to them, for after marching some thirty miles to that +town the column was as far off Ladysmith as when it started. + +The anxiety at the latter town was intense. The line being still uncut, +the arrival of the column at Helpmakaar was known, but beyond that no +communication could be received. On Tuesday the 24th Colonel Dartnel +arrived in Ladysmith with the news that the column was now twenty miles +away, all well, and he at once returned to them with supplies and a +small relief force. On Wednesday many of the men came in, and on +Thursday the remainder arrived and were heartily greeted. On the 24th-- +in order to divert the attention of Joubert and the Free State Boers, +both of whom were converging upon General Yule's column, still making +its way through the passes--a force composed of three regiments of +cavalry, four of Colonial Mounted Infantry, three batteries, and four +infantry regiments went out. The enemy were found near Reitfontein. No +actual engagement took place, but for some hours an artillery and rifle +duel was maintained and the Boers fell back. The number of casualties +was not large, and these were principally among the Gloucester regiment, +who, on entering a valley supposed to be untenanted, were received by a +heavy fire from a strong party of the enemy hidden there. The fight, +however, fulfilled the object for which the advance was undertaken, that +of occupying the Boers' attention and enabling the column from Dundee to +make its way into Ladysmith unmolested. The Boers were now closing in on +the latter town from all directions, and preparations for defence at +once began. The town-hall and the schools were fitted up as hospitals +and everything arranged for the reception of wounded. As the Boers had +already been seen near Colenso, sixteen miles to the south, it was +certain that the communications would ere long be cut. + +No more unsuitable place for a military camp could well have been +selected than Ladysmith, which had indeed been chosen, years before the +war was thought of, on account of its position on the railway, and the +vicinity of the Klip river. The fact that the country immediately round +was fertile and forage was obtainable no doubt influenced the military +authorities in their selection. Lying in the heart of a mountainous +country, it was commanded by steep and rocky hills at a distance of from +two to four miles. Just as many castles built in the days before +firearms were in use were rendered untenable against even the clumsy +cannon of early days placed on eminences near, so the improvement in +artillery and the possession of powerful modern guns by the Boers had +gravely imperilled the position of Ladysmith. The military authorities +could never have anticipated that the town would be besieged by foes +armed with artillery that could carry over five miles. But such was the +case now, and all there felt, as soon as it was decided to defend the +place till the last, that the position was a precarious one. + +Fortunately, a considerable store of provisions had been collected, and +so long as the line was open additions were being sent up by every +train. The line was a single one, winding along through passes among the +hills, and therefore open to attack by small bodies of the enemy. In +point of size Ladysmith was the third largest town in Natal. Durban +boasted a population of thirty thousand, Pietermaritzburg of twenty +thousand, and Ladysmith of four thousand five hundred, being four +hundred larger than that of Dundee. It was the point at which the line +of railway forked, one branch running north through Glencoe to the +Transvaal, the other northwest through Van Reenen's Pass to +Bloemfontein. It was a pretty straggling town with its barracks, +government buildings and large stores. Almost all the houses were +detached and standing in their own gardens, and as these were largely +wooded its appearance was very picturesque, with the Klip river, a +branch of the Tugela, running through it. The houses were, for the most +part, one-storied, and the roofs were all painted white for the sake of +coolness. No perfectly open town had ever before undergone a siege by an +army of some thirty thousand men provided with excellent guns, and yet +the garrison awaited the result with perfect confidence. + + + + +CHAPTER VII + +LADYSMITH BESIEGED + + +On the 30th, the Boers being now in force on many of the hills around +the town, and having inflicted the first annoyance upon Ladysmith by +cutting the conduit that brought down the water-supply to the town from +a reservoir among the hills, and so forced it for the future to depend +upon a few wells and the muddy water of the river, it was determined to +make an effort to drive them back and to gain possession of some of the +hills from which it was now evident the town would stand a risk of being +bombarded. Hitherto there had been considerable apathy in taking +measures for keeping the enemy as far as possible out of range. A few +redoubts thrown up during the last week and strongly held would have +been invaluable, but it seemed to be considered by the military +authorities that the siege could be but a short one, and that the Boers +would speedily be driven off by the troops now pouring into Durban. + +An effort was now to be made to repair the consequences of this +remissness and to drive the Boers off the positions they occupied, and +it was hoped that if a heavy blow were dealt them they would draw off +altogether. The forces of Joubert, Meyer, and the Free Staters were now +all within a distance of a few miles, and were all to be beaten up. +Their central position was on a hill afterwards known as Signal Hill, +and on this they had already planted a forty-pounder gun. A force +composed of six companies of the Royal Irish Fusiliers, four and a half +of the Gloucesters, a mountain battery and a troop of Hussars started at +midnight towards a hill known as Nicholson's Nek, occupied by the Free +Staters. Major General Hunter with a brigade of infantry, three +batteries, and a small cavalry force were to attack Meyer's commando to +the east, while General White, with two infantry brigades, French's +cavalry, and six batteries of field artillery moved against Joubert's +force on Modder Spruit. It was hoped that the Boers, if defeated, would +find their retreat barred by the force that had stated early for +Nicholson's Nek. All were well away from the town before daylight broke. + +At five o'clock in the morning the guns spoke out, and were at once +answered by the Boer artillery, and the roar of fire soon became +general. General White's central column was screened by a ridge near the +railway, and the big gun on Signal Hill directed its fire partly against +the town and partly against the cavalry which could be seen by them in +rear of the column. As only a few of the Volunteer Horse had been +ordered to accompany the attacking force, Chris and his companions took +up their position on an eminence that afforded a general view of the +battle, and here a large number of the townspeople also gathered. The +general plan of operations was that the two movable columns should form +a rough arc of a circle and, driving in both flanks of the Boers, sweep +the whole force before them. + +"They have a great many guns," Peters said, as the rattle of the +machine-guns and the thud of quick-firing one-pounders joined the +continuous fire of several Boer batteries and the deeper roar of their +big gun, "and they seem to be in greater force than was supposed, for I +can make out large reinforcements coming up to them from behind." + +Our artillery were first placed about four thousand yards from the Boer +position, but as this was on higher ground than that occupied by our +guns our fire did not appear to be effective. They were therefore moved +forward some distance, supported by two battalions of the Rifles and the +Dublin Fusiliers. The infantry force with them pushed forward rapidly +and gained a crest from which they threatened to take the Boer position +on Signal Hill in rear; but the Boers, very strongly reinforced, moved +to meet them, and heavy fighting took place, until the enemy's force +became so strong that they not only checked the further advance of the +brigade, but threatened it on both flanks. Two batteries went to their +assistance, but even with this aid they could not continue their +advance, pressed as they were by greatly superior numbers and harassed +by the fire of the Boer field batteries on the hill. + +At other points our advance was opposed as hotly. Nowhere were our +infantry gaining ground. The enemy had not wasted their time, but had +thrown up intrenchments on the steep hills they occupied, and from these +shelters maintained a terrible fire, while their numerous machine-guns +swept the ground with a hail of bullets and shells. On such ground the +cavalry were useless, and the range of the Boer guns was much greater +than that of our own. + +"It seems to me," Chris said, "that instead of gaining ground we are +losing it. We can't see at all what is going on, but certainly the +firing seems nearer than it was." + +All had thought the same though none had cared to suggest such a thing. + +"Hurrah! there is a train coming in," Field said. "I heard they were +expecting a party of sailors with naval guns. They would be useful just +at the present moment. Let us go down and see, we can make out nothing +from here." + +Glad to be doing something they went down the hill. As they reached the +station they saw a large detachment of sailors at work detraining some +twelve-pounders and two large quick-firing guns. Teams of oxen were +brought up, the sailors harnessed themselves to ropes, and with +tremendous exertions one of the guns was taken up to an eminence, and at +eleven it opened fire. It was but just in time. In steady order the +columns were retiring with their faces towards the Boers, answering shot +for shot, carrying off their wounded as they dropped, in spite of the +terrible rifle fire and the roar of the Boers' batteries; but as soon as +the first naval gun opened fire, amid the cheers of the townspeople, the +situation was changed. The first two shells burst close to the Boer big +gun, the third in the midst of the artillerymen, and it was some time +before its fire was resumed. In the meantime the sailors had turned +their attention to other Boer batteries which the field artillery had +scarcely been able to reach, and one by one these were withdrawn over +the crest. + +At one o'clock Colonel Hamilton's brigade, which had hitherto been lying +behind the crest they first occupied, in readiness to repel any counter- +attack the Boers might make, now moved out and took up their position to +cover the retirement of Hunter's column and Howard's brigade, and +although the Boers pressed hotly upon them they held their ground +steadily until their comrades had all reached their camp, and then +marched in unhindered by the enemy, whose big cannon had now been +finally silenced by the naval gun and their batteries for the most part +obliged to retire. + +After seeing the naval gun open fire Chris had gone down to speak to +Captain Brookfield, when he met two soldiers of a mountain battery +carrying an injured comrade. They took him into the hospital and then +came out. Their shoulder-straps showed them to belong to the mountain +battery that had gone out with the Royal Irish Fusiliers and the +Gloucesters, of whom nothing had been heard, though occasionally, in +momentary intervals of fire, the sound of distant musketry could be made +out in the direction of Nicholson's Nek. + +"How are your party getting on?" he asked. + +"We don't know anything about them, sir," one of the men said, "except +that they have been heavily engaged since daylight. I am afraid that +they are in a tight place." + +"How is it you know nothing about them?" + +"It has been a bad job altogether," the man said. "We were marching up a +steep valley with only room for us to lead two mules abreast; we were in +the rear of the column. Suddenly a boulder came rolling down the hill +and some shots were fired. In a moment the mules stampeded. One or two +began it, kicking and plunging and squealing like wild beasts, then the +others all set to. There was no holding them? it was almost pitch-dark, +and before one could say 'knife' they were tearing down the road we had +come up. There was no time to stop, and those who were lucky jumped out +of their way, those who were not were knocked down and trampled on. As +soon as they had gone those of us who were not hurt set off after them +and looked for them everywhere, but only two or three were caught. Where +the rest went I don't know, but I hope that they got into the enemy's +line of fire and were all shot. At last we gave it up as a bad job and +went back to bring in the fellows who were hurt. I think most of them +are in now. We have been a long time, for Thompson's leg was broken and +one of his arms, and, I expect, most of his ribs, and it hurt him so to +be moved that we have had to stop every two yards." "It is a bad +business indeed," Chris said; "and of course all your guns are lost?" + +"Every one of them, and what is worse, all the reserve small-arm +ammunition is lost too. The mules carrying them were with ours, and as +the fighting up there has been going on ever since, I am afraid the +infantry must have pretty well used up their last cartridges." + +It was not until the next day that the extent of the calamity was known, +when a Boer came down with a white flag asking that doctors might be +sent up. The little column instead of, as had been hoped, surprising the +Boers had itself been ambushed, being suddenly attacked by two strong +parties of the enemy. They at once seized a little eminence, threw up a +breastwork of stone, and defended themselves successfully until the +ammunition was entirely exhausted, and a hundred and fifty had been +killed or wounded. The Boers had, by taking advantage of every bit of +cover, crept up close to them, and a murderous fire was poured in. The +two regiments asked Colonel Carleton, who commanded them, to allow them +to charge with their bayonets and cut their way through. He consented to +allow the desperate attempt to be made, and the men were in the act of +fixing bayonets when someone raised a white flag, and the Boers standing +up advanced to receive the surrender. + +After this the laws of war permitted no further defence, and the men, +half mad with fury at the situation in which they were placed, threw +down their rifles and were made prisoners. This was at two o'clock in +the afternoon, after the rest of the force had returned to Ladysmith; +and thus some nine hundred men fell into the hands of the Boers. Apart +from this the loss was comparatively small considering the heat of the +engagement. The day's work had been altogether unsatisfactory; no +advantage whatever had been gained beyond the discovery of the Boers' +position, and their unexpected strength and fighting powers, and it was +evident that the force at Ladysmith was unable to drive off the enemy +unaided, and must undergo a siege until the arrival of a relieving army. +There were provisions calculated to last for two months, and no one +doubted that long before that time General Buller would arrive to their +rescue. So confident had the military authorities been, that not only +had no defensive works been thrown up, but they had omitted to send the +women and children, and the men unfitted to give active assistance, to +the rear. + +On the following morning the scouts held a council of war. + +"Now," Chris said, "we have to decide the all-important question. It is +quite certain that the town is going to be besieged, and I should say +that the siege will last for some time, as nothing can be done to +relieve them until a lot of troops arrive from home. We have shown at +Dundee and Elandslaagte that our fellows can drive the Boers from their +kopjes, but a force arriving to relieve Ladysmith would have to fight +its way through a tremendously mountainous district, and to capture at +least eight or ten such positions. At Dundee and Elandslaagte the Boers +had only a few guns, and the big one from Pretoria had not arrived, nor +had they time to fortify themselves. It is certain, therefore, that it +will require a very big force to fight its way in here, especially as +the Tugela has to be crossed, and the Boers will of course destroy the +bridges. + +"It may be a couple of months before the place is relieved. Of course +the question is, Shall we stay here or go? I don't think we should be of +much use here; indeed, I don't see that cavalry would be any good at +all, whereas if a portion of the Boers push south we may be very useful +in our own line of scouting. Still, this is a question for you to +decide. You chose to make me your commander when at work, but we should +all have an equal voice in a matter of this sort." + +There was little discussion; all were of their leader's opinion that it +was best for them to leave. The prospect of a long siege in which they +could take but little active part was not a pleasant one, and it was +decided at once that they should leave. + +"Very well," Chris said. "Then I will go in to Captain Brookfield and +ask his permission to go. Now that we are in camp with him he must be +consulted." + +They had since Elandslaagte taken their places as a part of the +Maritzburg Scouts, and had been drilled for some hours each day. They +were already favourites among the corps, who were proud of the work they +had done, and being a pleasant set of lads their uncouth appearance, +which had at first been viewed with much disfavour by many of their +comrades, had been forgiven. Chris went to the commander's tent and laid +the matter and their decision before him. + +"I think that it is just as well that you should go, Chris," the officer +said; "and indeed I was on the point of telling you that we are all +leaving. For myself I cannot understand why the cavalry should be kept +here, and indeed I know that it is their opinion also, and that they +have asked the general to let them leave. However, he has decided to +keep them. I am sure it is a mistake. Before the siege is over forage is +sure to run short, and half the cavalry will be dismounted before the +end comes. However, I have seen him and pointed out that as scouts we +should be useless here. He has given me leave to go, but has requested +me to join the first troops that come up the line. When we are once away +I shall give you leave to act altogether independently of us, which will +I am sure suit you better than being kept for weeks perhaps at Colenso +or Estcourt. Another thing I will do. General Yule was speaking to me +only yesterday of the manner in which your party defeated and cut up +more than double your number, and how you and three of your party went +into the Boer camp at Talana and ascertained their strength for General +Symons. I expect that General Buller will come on here, as it is +certainly the most serious point at present. I will ask Yule to give you +a letter of introduction to him, it will be useful; and I have no doubt +that he will give you a free hand, as I have done. I should not call +upon General Buller in that rig-out, if I were you. I have heard he is +somewhat of a martinet at the War Office, and we know that they have a +very poor opinion of volunteers there." + +Chris smiled. "Volunteers have done good service at the Cape before now, +sir, and have shown over and over again that a man can fight just as +well in plain clothes as if he were buttoned up to the chin in uniform; +and as the Boers are themselves nothing but volunteers, I should think +that before this war is over the War Office will see its mistake." + +"I should think so indeed, Chris, but at present they have certainly not +woke up to the fact. I see by the telegrams that the London Scottish and +the London Irish have both volunteered almost to a man for service here, +and that they have not even had a civil reply to their application. I +tell you, lad, this war is going to be a big thing, and before it is +over we may have both militia and volunteers out here, and perhaps +troops from the colonies. I heard that some of the Australian colonies +have already offered to send bodies of mounted men, and that our +government are ordering out a larger number of men than was at first +intended. I hear this morning that at Kimberley and Mafeking fighting +has begun. On the 24th Kimberley made a successful sortie, and on the +25th a general attack on Mafeking was repulsed. The fact that both these +places are beleaguered, and that we have again been obliged to fall back +here, and are likely to be cut off altogether, has evidently stirred +them up, and they begin to understand that it is going to be a much +bigger affair than they expected. + +"I wrote to your mother yesterday at Durban, and told her that I +intended to leave while it is still possible. Of course you have +written; but I told her of the flattering way in which General Yule had +spoken of the doings of you and your party, and said that I hoped she +would not be anxious, for it was quite evident that you were able to +take good care of yourselves. My letter was in answer to one she wrote +to me from Durban, begging me to keep you from undertaking what she +called 'mad-brained business', and expressing some regret that you and +the others had been allowed to form a separate corps, instead of being +under the command of an experienced officer like myself. I told her that +I thought that you would have less chance of coming to harm in scouting +work than if you had to work in a regular way as the general ordered. If +this sort of fighting--I mean, of attacking in front every position the +Boers choose to take--goes on, our numbers will very speedily dwindle +away. + +"The fact is, as far as we colonials can see, the regulars do not as yet +understand fighting the Boers. Nothing could be more splendid than the +behaviour of the troops, both at Dundee and Elandslaagte, but in our +humble opinion neither fight was necessary; and if Talana was to be +attacked, it should have been done by marching the troops round the hill +and taking it in the rear. In that case the Boers would have bolted +without firing a shot. That it could have been done is shown by the fact +that the cavalry did it, and encountered no difficulty on the way. +Again, at Elandslaagte the object of keeping the road open would have +been equally well attained if, after driving them out of the station, we +had taken up a strong position there and waited for them to attack us. +Therefore, Chris, I think that fighting in our way--that is to say, in +Boer fashion--and trusting to skill as much as to shooting, you will be +running a good deal less risk than you would in fighting under British +generals in British fashion. We shall go off quietly this evening. We +must keep a bright look-out on the way, for the trains have been fired +upon, and at any moment the Boers may pull up the rails and block the +roads altogether." + +Two hours later all was ready for a start, and just before sunset the +corps rode out of Ladysmith. They kept a sharp look-out as they went, +but saw no signs of the enemy, and crossing the Tugela by the bridge +near Colenso, halted there for the night. Here Captain Brookfield +reported his arrival to the officer in command of the troops, and on the +following day Chris and his friends rode on to Estcourt. They had seen +some parties of mounted men in the far distance, but none had come near +them, and as the military authorities were well aware of the Boers being +in the vicinity, there was nothing to be gained by scouting. But it was +now decided that they were in advance of the point that any large number +of the enemy were likely to reach, and might therefore strike across the +country and resume what they considered their regular work. They added +to their stores several articles whose want they had felt, had slits +made in the waterproof sheets, and covers sewn on to close the holes +when they were used for tents, and had some triangular pieces of the +same material made to buckle on so as to close the rear of the tents, +which had before been open to the wind and rain. They had employed much +of their spare time in training their horses and in teaching them to lie +down when ordered, and thus share the shelter taken up by their masters, +behind rocks or a wall. + +The officer commanding the small force at Estcourt had at first viewed +them with some suspicion, but Colonel Yule had purposely left open the +letter with which he had furnished Chris, so that it could be shown to +any officers commanding posts or detached forces, and its production now +caused his cold reception to be converted into a warm welcome. Riding +across country they met more than one farmer trekking with his cattle +and belongings towards the ferry across the Mooi river. These reported +that the Boers had overrun the whole of the country north of the Tugela, +and that some parties had already crossed at the ferry on the road +between Helpmakaar and Greytown. Fugitives had come in from the villages +on the other side, and complained that the Boers were looting +everywhere, and had driven off thousands of cattle and numbers of +horses, and had everywhere wantonly destroyed the furniture and +everything they could not carry off, in the farmhouses they visited. + +A vigilant look-out was kept as the scouts advanced. On the second day +after starting they encamped on a slight elevation near Mount Umhlumba, +and early next morning they saw a party of some twenty Boers riding in a +direction that would bring them within rifle-shot of their camp. All +were at once on the alert. + +"We will not go out and attack them," Chris said to the lads who were +running towards their horses. "That would mean that though we might kill +all of them, half of us would probably be shot. We will ambush them. Get +the picket ropes loose and the bridles on ready for mounting, and then +leave the horses in charge of the natives where we camped. They will be +out of sight there. When you have done that take your places quietly +among the rocks. Do you, Capper and Carmichael, put yourselves twenty or +thirty yards apart; you are our best shots. When the Boers get within a +thousand yards, which is as near as they will do if they keep the line +they are going, open fire upon them and keep it up steadily, but not too +fast. When they see that only two men are firing they will think that +you are a couple of farmers whose place they have plundered, and who are +determined to have their revenge. You are safe to hit some of them, and +the others will decide upon wiping you out, and will probably leave +their horses and crawl up in their usual style. When they get close it +will be our turn. I don't think many of them are likely to get away." + +His orders were carried out, and five minutes later the two rifles +flashed out one after another. The Boers were riding in a clump. One was +seen to fall, and the horse of another gave a violent plunge. + +"Very good," exclaimed Chris, who, like the rest, was lying down behind +a rock. "Don't fire too fast. Wait half a minute, and then each take +another turn, one a little time after the other." The man who had fallen +was instantly picked up by one of his comrades, and all rode off at full +gallop, but before they could get beyond the range of the Mausers each +of the lads had fired two more shots. No more of the Boers dropped, but +the watchers, who had their glasses directed upon them, thought by their +movements that two had been hit. The Boers, when the firing ceased, +stopped, and for some little time remained clustered together. Then they +took a long sweep round to a point where the ground was broken, and a +shallow donga ran up in a direction that would bring them within a +hundred yards of the position occupied by their hidden assailants. There +they were seen to dismount, and, after some talk, leaving all the horses +in the charge of one man, probably one of the wounded, they entered the +donga. Its course was irregular, and once or twice the two lads were +able to get a shot at them. The Boers did not return the fire but +hurried past the exposed points. As they approached a head was +occasionally raised above the bank to view the position, and then +disappeared again. The ground between the camp and the nearest point of +the donga was thickly strewn with boulders, with bushes growing between +them. The lads had all shifted their position to this side. + +"Don't open fire till I give the order," Chris said quietly. "We have +got them now." + +Except for a slight movement of the bushes, it would not have been known +that the Boers had left the donga. Once or twice Capper and Carmichael +caught a momentary glimpse of one of them, but held their fire, as Chris +had said, + +"Let them come within twenty yards, then both fire at once, whether you +catch a glimpse of them or not. Thinking that your rifles are +discharged, they will all jump up and make a rush. Then it will be our +turn." + +[Illustration: "BOTH RIFLES CRACKED AT ONCE."] + +Presently a man's head was seen peering round a rock at about the right +distance. Both the rifles cracked at once, and a Boer fell prone on the +ground beyond his shelter. At the same moment there was a shout, and his +comrades all sprang to their feet and rushed forward. A volley from the +whole of the scouts flashed out. Twelve of the Boers fell, the others +leapt back behind their shelters, and in turn opened fire. + +"Keep in shelter!" Chris shouted. "They know now that we are two to +their one, and will soon be making off." + +The combatants were so close to each other that neither dared expose +shoulder or head to take aim, and after the first shots fired at the +Boers all remained quiet. Chris waited for three or four minutes, and +then told four of the lads who were in the best shelter to crawl back, +mount their horses, and ride out down the other side of the slope, and, +after making a slight circuit, to gallop straight at the Boers' horses. + +"The fellows may be some distance away already," he said, "as they may +have slipped off directly they discharged their rifles. In any case +there is no time to be lost in getting hold of their ponies, or at any +rate in driving them off." + +As two or three minutes again passed without a shot being fired by the +Boers, Chris was in the act of calling off half the troop to watch the +donga and fire at the Boers if they saw them running past the exposed +points, when at this moment he heard the horses returning, and directly +afterwards one of the lads he had sent off ran up to him. + +"There are a whole lot of them coming round the other side," he said, +"sixty or seventy of them at least. Some distance behind I can see a lot +of cattle and waggons. I suppose they were making for home when they +heard the firing." Just at this moment two or three shots rang out, +telling that the surviving Boers were seen running down the donga. + +"Never mind them," Chris shouted; "we are going to be attacked by a big +party. Put down your rifles all of you, and pile the stones on the +crest, so as to make a shelter, as quickly as you can. We shall have a +few minutes. Those who are coming up can't know yet what the firing +means." He ran up to the top. "They are not more than six or seven +hundred yards away," he said, "and it would be better to fight it out +here than to take to our horses. Some of us would certainly not get off +without a bullet. You need not mind showing yourselves when they come +up. They won't be able to make out what we are." + +The Boers, indeed, reined in their ponies when they saw Chris appear on +the brow of the eminence, and as a preliminary some of them rode off in +both directions and endeavoured to ascertain the position. Those on the +right soon caught sight of the clump of horses. + +"They will soon know all about it," Chris said, as two of them galloped +off. "We may as well teach them to keep their distance. Take your places +behind rocks, and then open a sharp fire with your magazines. They +cannot know how many of us there are here. Now, are you all ready? Yes? +Well, then, set to work!" + +In a moment an almost incessant rattle of musketry broke out upon the +astounded Boers, who, turning their horses, scattered at full gallop to +escape the hail of bullets; but more than a dozen had fallen before they +were beyond the range of the Mausers and were fully two thousand yards +away. + +"I don't think we need stop," Chris said. "Fill up your magazines again, +and then make for the horses." Directly the first party of Boers had +been seen, Jack and Japhet had set to work taking down and rolling up +the tents and loading the spare horses. + +"Jump up," Chris said to them, "we are off. Mind you keep well with us. +Now," he went on, as they rode off in a body, "we will do a little +cattle raiding on our own account. Make for them, lads!" + +With a shout they rode off at full gallop towards the great herd of +cattle. As they approached, the Kaffirs who were driving them fled. +Separating as they rode, waving their hats and shouting at the top of +their voices, the lads dashed at the herd, who at once turned and went +off at a rate that would have astonished animals accustomed only to +small pastures and other enclosures. + +"Don't press them too much," Chris had ordered before the band +separated, "or they will break down. Listen for my whistle; when you +hear it, Field, Willesden, Harris, and Bryan will follow up the herd +with the Kaffirs and keep them moving, the rest will dismount, make +their horses lie down, and open fire. That narrow valley we passed +through yesterday afternoon will do to make a stand. It is about five +miles away, head the cattle for it. The Boers won't be far behind us +when we get there." + +The enemy indeed had not noticed them leave the little kopje, as they +were hidden by a slight fall in the ground where they descended, and it +was not until they observed a commotion among the cattle that they +perceived what had happened. Then, furious not only at the loss they had +suffered, but at seeing their booty driven away, they mounted and +pursued in hot haste. But the party had obtained a start of fully a +mile, and the valley was reached by the fugitives while the Boers were +still half that distance in their rear. Chris rode along until he came +to a narrow and defensible point; the horses were taken a hundred yards +on and made to lie down, and he and his sixteen companions then ran back +and took up their positions among the rocks on each side of the track +and the slopes above it. + + + + +CHAPTER VIII + +A DESPERATE PROJECT + + +Scarcely had the band taken cover in the gorge than the Boers appeared +some five hundred yards away. + +"Open fire at once!" Chris shouted, "the farther they have to come under +fire the less they will like it." + +The rifles at once spoke out. The lads had all used the boulders behind +which they crouched as rests for their rifles, and confident of their +shooting and their position, their aim was deadly. Five or six of the +leading Boers fell and several horses, the rest came to an abrupt pause, +galloped back some little distance and then dismounted, and leaving +their horses in shelter, disappeared from sight. In a short time a +dropping fire was opened from both sides of the valley. + +"Don't fire unless you see a man," Chris ordered, "there are gaps on the +hillside that they can't pass without giving you a chance. Fire in +rotation, it is no use wasting a dozen bullets on one man; if the first +misses, let the next shoot instantly, and so on. When they learn that it +is death to leave shelter, they will soon get sick of it. Keep +yourselves well under cover." + +The rifle duel continued for an hour. As Chris had said would be the +case, after seven or eight had fallen, as they were trying to make +rushes across pieces of ground where boulders afforded no cover, the +rest became very cautious, and at last only an occasional shot was +heard. + +"We will fall back now," Chris said, "for aught we know a party of them +may be working round somewhere to take us in rear. We know that they +have not got their horses with them, for we can see the spot where they +hid them. Still, we do not want to be caught between two fires. Let four +on each flank crawl back; keep well among the rocks, and don't let them +catch sight of you. We will fire occasionally to let them know that we +are still here. When you have got the horses up and everything is ready, +whistle, and we will come back to you. It will be a long time before +they venture to crawl up and discover that we have gone, an hour most +likely, and by that time the cattle will be a dozen miles on their way +to Estcourt, and the Boers are not likely to follow them." + +Ten minutes later all were in their saddles. They had left the horses at +a spot where there was a sharp elbow in the gorge, and their retreat +could not be seen from the valley below. They cantered along in high +glee; not one had received a scratch, while some twelve of the first +party of Boers had fallen, and fully fifteen of the second, and it was +certain that at least as many more must have been wounded. + +"I expect they really gave up all idea of carrying our position long +ago," Chris said, "and have only been keeping up their fire to prevent +our turning the tables upon them. They must have seen that we are better +mounted than they are, and have been afraid that we should in turn take +the offensive. I should not be surprised if they stay where they are all +day, and don't venture to mount and ride off till it gets dark" "You are +something like a leader," Peters said enthusiastically. "We knew that +you were a good fellow, and would make the best leader among us, but no +one could think that our choice would turn out so well as it has done. +This is the second fight we have had with the Boers, and we have +thrashed them well each time, although the first time they were twice as +strong, and in the second something like four times, and we have not +lost one of our number. I am sure if we had been caught where we were +without you with us, at least half of us would have been killed, and we +should have been lucky to get away with only that." + +Riding without pressing their horses, it was two hours before they +overtook the party with the cattle. These had now broken into a walk. + +"We kept them at it till half an hour ago," Willesden said +apologetically, when they came up, "but the Kaffirs said that unless we +gave them a rest half of them would drop, so we let them go easy till +you came up." + +"Quite right," Chris said. "We have given the Boers such a thrashing +that there is no fear of their continuing the pursuit. Unless we meet +some more of these thieves, we can go on as quietly as we like. I have +some sort of respect for men like those we met at Dundee and +Elandslaagte, who fight manfully and stoutly, but for these raiding +scoundrels who only come out to rob and plunder, and do wanton damage to +quiet people, one feels only disgust, and shoots them without the least +compunction." + +There was a general chorus of agreement. + +"Did they get near you, Chris?" + +"Not within about four hundred yards. They got it so hot at first that +they dismounted and took to the rocks; they pushed on for a bit, and if +the whole hillside had been covered with boulders we might have had some +sharp fighting, but there were some open spaces to be crossed, and after +getting over two or three of them they found it safer to lie as close as +rabbits. For aught we know they are there still." + +They travelled quietly till sunset, and then halted in an open valley +where there was water and good grass. Half the company kept watch by +turns, being posted with their horses some half a mile out in the +country, taking the animals with them not only because they could fall +back more quickly, but because they knew the horses would hear any +approaching sound long before their masters were able to do so, and +would evince their uneasiness unmistakably. There was, however, no +alarm, and two days later, travelling by easy stages, they arrived at +Estcourt, where their arrival with so large a number of cattle created +quite a sensation. They at once put up a notice at the post-office, that +all persons who had been raided by the Boers could come and inspect the +herd and take all animals bearing their brand. It soon appeared that the +cattle were the property of four farmers living within a short distance +of each other. They had arrived in Estcourt with their families two days +previously, weary and broken down with fatigue, hunger, and the loss and +ruin of their property. Their gratitude was deep indeed at this wholly +unexpected recovery of a large portion of their herds, and they started +the next morning, mounted on some ponies they had picked up for a +trifle, to drive them down the country. + +Chris saw the officer in command as soon as they arrived in the town, +and gave him an outline of their adventure, upon which he was warmly +congratulated. "Shall I send in a written report to you, sir?" Chris +asked. + +"No, you are not under my orders; and I should say that you had better +write and post it to the officer commanding the force at Maritzburg. I +do not know who it may be." + +"Is the road closed to Ladysmith?" Chris asked. + +"Yes, two days since. General French, who is ordered to Port Elizabeth +to take command of the cavalry brigade that is forming to drive back the +Boers who have crossed the Orange River, came down in the last train +that got out. It was hotly fired upon by the Boers, but luckily they had +not taken up the rails, and the train got through safely. We have had no +news since, for even the wire to Colenso has been cut, and for anything +we know the place may be in possession of the Boers. We have a little +fort here, and have been throwing up entrenchments, but if they come in +any force there is not much hope of our getting off. We have an armored +train, which yesterday ran to within a mile or so of Colenso without +being interfered with, though several parties of the enemy could be seen +in the distance. I have great hopes that we shall get half a battalion +up from Maritzburg to-morrow; if so, by loopholing the houses and +throwing up some breastworks, we ought to be able to keep the Boers out +of the place, unless they come in force. At any rate, I should advise +you to scout next time beyond the Mooi River and to make Maritzburg your +head-quarters. So far as we know the Boers have not yet gone beyond that +river, and any news of their doing so would certainly be of value. You +have done marvellously well in getting away from that party you met, but +you might not be so lucky next time, for as they push on they are sure +in a short time to be strong all over the country between the Tugela and +the Mooi." + +This, after some consultation, was agreed to by the troop. There was no +reason for haste, and they rode by easy stages down to Maritzburg, +stopping at Weston and Hawick. Many of their friends had gone down to +Durban, but some still remained, and from these they received a hearty +welcome. All found letters awaiting them, for it had been arranged that +as it would be impossible to give any address, these should be sent to +Maritzburg. Their friends were scarcely ready to credit their stories, +but, on being shown General Yule's letter, saw that at least the +accounts of their early doings were strictly correct. + +Troops were coming up fast from Durban, and there was already a strong +brigade there. Chris called upon the brigadier and presented General +Yule's letter, and his own report of the fight with the Boers +subsequently. + +"This shows what can be done by young fellows who are good shots and +good riders, and who, I may say, Mr. King, have been admirably +commanded. What are your wishes now? There are two or three troops of +volunteer horse here; would you wish to be attached to one of them? Of +course, if you do so there will be no difficulty about it; but really, I +think that you would be more useful in carrying on your work in your own +way." + +It had been known for a long time past that a large proportion of the +cannon, rifles, and ammunition of the Boers had been landed at the +Portuguese port of Lorenzo Marques, and taken up by rail from there to +Komati-poort--a station on the frontier, where there was a bridge across +the Komati river--and thence by rail to Pretoria. Chris heard that it +was generally known that the Portuguese officials, who had long been +influenced by Boer money extracted from the Uitlanders, were still +winking at the practice, although it was a breach of neutrality. So much +indignation was expressed on the subject at Maritzburg that Chris, one +day when the party assembled at the spot where their horses were +tethered, said: + +"I want to have a serious talk with you all. You have all heard that +immense quantities of arms and dynamite are passing through Lorenzo +Marques. Now, at present we don't see much for us to do here. My idea +is, that if we could manage to blow up the bridge across the river that +divides Portuguese territory from the Transvaal, we should do an +infinitely greater service than by killing any number of plundering +Boers." + +His troop looked at each other in surprise. + +"You are not really in earnest, Chris?" Peters said; "it would be a +tremendous business." + +"It would be a big business, no doubt, but I was never more earnest in +my life than in proposing it. Now that we know how strong the Boers are +round Ladysmith, and what terribly hard work it will be for an army to +fight its way through all those hills, we can see that the first +calculations as to the time when it can be relieved are a good deal +short of the mark. There must be at least twenty thousand men collected +here to do it, and I think it is more likely to be the end of January +than the end of December before the Boers are driven off. We have in the +one case seven weeks and in the other twelve before the place is +relieved, and we begin to turn the tables on the Boers; and according to +the way we carry my idea out it depends whether we are back here by the +end of the year or by the end of January--that is, I acknowledge, if we +get back at all. + +"I have been thinking it over. There are two ways of doing it. We can go +on board a ship touching at Durban and going on to Lorenzo Marques. I +don't say that we could not all do it, but it would be better to choose +only four; a larger number would excite more observation. Those who go +will of course take dynamite with them. We can buy that at Durban. At +Lorenzo Marques we should assume the character of four young Irish +fellows. We know there are lots of them already up there, and Germans +too, fighting in the Boer ranks and I am glad to know that they got +peppered at Elandslaagte, although that is not to the point. We should +go as four Irish lads who have come across from America to fight for the +Boers. We have heard plenty of Irish in the mines and at Johannesburg, +so shall be able to put enough brogue in our talk to pass. I know from +what I have heard that a trip to the Portuguese officials would be quite +sufficient for them to pass anything without examination; but even if +they did open our cases and find dynamite in them, we could account for +it by saying that we had been told before starting that it would be the +handiest thing to take with us, and would be of more assistance to the +Boers than anything we could bring them. + +"No doubt some of the passengers would know that we got on board at +Durban, but if any questions were asked we could account for that by +saying that the ship we came over in, was going on to Australia, and +therefore we had been obliged to land and take another on to Lorenzo +Marques. Once landed, we should of course take a train for Komati-poort, +and slip off it after dark at some station a few miles from there. Then, +you know, we could first reconnoitre the bridge, and when we had settled +on the best place for the dynamite, we could put it there the next +night. I know a good deal about the use of dynamite. It is not like +gunpowder, that you have to put in a hole and fasten up tightly, you +only have to lay it upon an iron girder or arch, and light your fuse and +leave it to do its work." + +The boys listened with increasing surprise to his proposal. + +"And what is your other plan?" Peters asked after a long pause. + +"The other plan is that we should all take a passage in some small +craft, which we could hire, to St. Lucia Bay, and then go up through +Zululand and Swaziland, which extends to within a short distance of +Komati-poort. Both tribes are friendly enough with us, and hate the +Boers like poison. Of course in that case we shall take the dynamite +with us, and then must be guided by circumstances as to our course and +what we should do when we got to the bridge." + +There was again a long silence, then Brown said: "If anyone but you had +proposed it, Chris, I should have scoffed at it as impossible, but for +myself I have come to have such confidence in you that I believe you +would manage it. There can be no doubt that it would be a grand thing if +we could do it. I have heard my father say that the river is a terribly +bad one, and that sometimes it is altogether impassable for weeks at a +time. Except by the bridge, even in the best times, I should think, from +what he said, it would be quite impossible for them to take heavy things +like cannon across. Anyhow, I am ready to go with you." + +"Thank you, Brown," Chris said. "I should certainly not ask anyone to +go. Those who are willing to do so must volunteer. Of course we only +combined for the purpose of acting as scouts, and no one ever +contemplated doing more. So far, we have, as all allow, carried out that +object well; and I have no doubt that those who do not care to join in +what is a sort of forlorn hope, will continue to do well after we have +started on it, and of course I shall, if I get back, rejoin them. My +scheme would, no doubt, be considered a very wild one, but I can see no +reason why, with good luck, it should not succeed. Indeed, I believe +that it will succeed, if, when we arrive there, we do not find that the +Boers are guarding the bridge. Of course, if they do so there is but +little hope of carrying the matter out. They will know the importance of +the bridge to them, and how greatly its destruction would be desired by +the British Government, and may think it possible that such an attempt +as I propose would be made, and take precautions to prevent its success. + +"I do not mean to throw away my life. If, when I get there, I find that +it is next to impossible to carry the matter out, I shall give it up; +but even then the information I should get about matters up there, both +as to the Boers and the Swazis, would be of use. We know that Boer +agents have been doing their utmost to get the Basutos to join them, and +it is likely that they may be trying to induce the Zulus and Swazis to +do the same; and even if we fail in the principal object, I should say +that the time would not be wasted. When I am up there, I can, of course, +get news as to how the war is going on, and if I find that our forces +are pushing up into the Transvaal, I shall make straight across the +country and join them. I have been thinking over the matter a good deal +since we came here, and made up my mind that anyhow I shall try to carry +it out, so I now resign the leadership, and also for the present my +membership. Now, I don't want to influence you in any way. It has all +come suddenly upon you. You had better talk it over together. All I ask +you is that you will not say a word about it to anyone, not even to your +relations. + +"Not only because, as I know would be the case, they would be afraid of +having anything to do with what they would consider an absolutely mad +scheme, but because a chance word might prove fatal to success. As +everyone knows, there are a great number of Dutch in the colony, who, +although they may not be openly hostile, are in favour of the Boers, and +will no doubt keep them acquainted with every movement of troops here, +and can have no difficulty in communicating with them by native runners. +Were one of our friends even to mention it casually that we had gone +north, suspicions might be aroused. Therefore I beg that no one will +breathe a word about the matter, but that you will decide for yourselves +without consulting anyone. I shall leave you now, and we will meet here +at the same time to-morrow. You will have had time to think it over +then. I wish to say before I go that I don't consider that the success +of my plan depends upon my having the whole twenty of you with me. I +repeat, that four would be quite sufficient. + +"There are advantages as well as disadvantages in having only that +number. We should travel without exciting so much notice; we should have +less difficulty about food; we could conceal ourselves more easily in +case we were pursued. On the other hand, with a stronger party we could +repulse an attack if chased by the Boers. So you see I really do not +want more than three of you to join. I think four is the best number, +and should be glad if only two besides Brown wished to go with me; but +at the same time if more desire it, of course, as we are all comrades, +they would have a right to go." + +So saying he turned away, leaving the others to talk the matter over. +They went through their usual drill that afternoon without any allusion +being made to the subject. When they met the next day Chris said +cheerfully, "Well, what have you decided? First, Brown, do you stick to +what you said yesterday, or do you think better of it?" + +"Certainly I stick to it," Brown said. "When I say a thing I mean it." + +"And how about the others?" + +"I have made up my mind to go with you, Chris," Peters said, "and so has +Willesden. Field and Capper and Sankey would all go with you if you +wanted to take more than four, and all would go if you wanted the troop; +but if you would rather only have three of us, it is settled that Brown, +Willesden and I go." + +"Very well," Chris said, "that just suits me. I am glad that you would +all go if you were wanted; but really I think that four would be the +best number, so we will consider that as settled. And now there is one +other thing I want to ask you about. You see, we have no right to take +any money out of the common fund, but we shall have some heavy expenses. +In the first place we shall want, I should say, a couple of hundred +pounds of dynamite; then we shall have to take some natives with us, a +couple of Zulus and two or three Swazis. There will be no difficulty in +getting them, as so many have been thrown out of employment owing to the +farmers losing their herds. We may find it useful to make presents to +chiefs as we go along, and, of course, we shall have to take a certain +amount of provisions for the party. Have you any objection to our each +taking half our share out of the bank? Nothing has been drawn at +present, and with a couple of hundred pounds between us we shall have +enough and to spare for however long we may be away." + +There was a chorus of agreement. + +"We are all awfully sorry that you are going, Chris," Field said. "It +won't be the same without you at all. We have agreed to ask you to +nominate a leader during your absence." + +"I would much rather not do that," Chris said. "Everyone has done +equally well, and it is a question that you should settle among +yourselves." + +"We are all against that," Field said positively. "We have talked it +over and agree that we shall never be able to fix on one. Suppose our +votes were divided between four and five I don't think we should feel +more comfortable afterwards. We would rather put all the names in a hat +and draw one out, just leaving it to chance." + +"I almost think that it would be better," Chris said, "to do as you +propose. Agree first that, as we have done up till now, all important +matters shall be discussed and decided by vote, then draw all the names +from a hat and let each be leader for a week in the order in which they +come out, with the proviso that if as time goes on you find that you can +have more confidence in one than another, you can by a majority of three +to one elect him as permanent leader." + +"That would be a very good plan," Carmichael said, "but, you see, the +difficulty is that, supposing we were going to attack the Boers or the +Boers attack us, the plan the leader fixed on might not seem to us at +all the best. In the two fights we have had there was not that +difficulty, for everyone felt that the plan you adopted was the best, +and indeed much better than any of us would have been likely to think +of. I don't say that that would occur, but it might. It is not everyone +who could fix upon the best thing to be done all at once as you did." + +Chris thought for a minute. "I would suggest," he said, "that in such a +case as you mention the leader should tell the next two on the list what +he proposed. If one of the two agreed with him it would be a majority, +and there would be nothing more to be said on the matter. If both +disagreed with him there must be a general vote. I should hope such a +thing would never occur, because the loss of five minutes would +sometimes be disastrous, though in some cases it might not make any +difference. Still, that is the best plan I can think of. There is no +occasion for you to decide that straight off. At any rate, if you should +find that any arrangement you make does not act perfectly well, I should +advise you to join Captain Brookfield's troop and act with him." + +The general opinion was strongly in favour of Chris's suggestion. It was +agreed that at any rate the first leader should be chosen by chance. +Carmichael's name came first out of the hat. + +"I shall not have much responsibility," he said, "as we have settled to +remain here until the advance begins. Now, Chris, about the spare +horses." + +"I should like to take one of them. We may have to gallop for it, and it +is of no use our being well mounted if we are hampered with a pony that +cannot keep up with us. We have only to lighten its load by getting rid +of most of its burden, and then we should be free to go our own pace. + +"I should like to take one of our Kaffirs. They have both turned out +very well, and have a good idea of cooking, and are accustomed to our +ways. I don't care which I have, but I should certainly like to have one +of them. He would stick to the spare horse, while the other natives +would be all right if they scattered and shifted for themselves." + +"Would you not like two spare horses, Chris?" + +"No, thank you, one would be enough. He would carry our stores, and I +should get two native ponies to take the dynamite along. We shall not be +travelling at any extraordinary rate of speed, and if they broke down we +could always replace them. Certainly there would be no danger if we go +through Zululand, and, I should think, not until we get north of the +Swazis' country; for though I know there are Boers settled among them, a +good many would of course have joined their army, and it would be easy +to avoid the others. The danger will only lie in the last part of the +journey." + +"Then you have settled to go by land?" + +"Yes, I have decided to go all the way on horseback. We might find +difficulties with the Portuguese at Lorenzo Marques, and if we manage to +blow up the bridge, should have no horses, and should have a very bad +time indeed in getting back. If I can get dynamite here I shall go all +the way by land, and it would be safer. No doubt the Boers have spies at +Durban, and we might have difficulty in hiring a craft to take us to St. +Lucia, and our starting with horses and five or six natives would be +safe to attract the attention of someone looking out for news to send to +the Boers. I think the best plan will be to keep a little to the east of +the road to Greytown, where no doubt there are some Dutch, and strike +the road that runs from there to Eshowe. A little west of Krantzkop +there must be either a drift or a bridge or a ferry where it crosses the +Tugela. I shall of course avoid Eshowe, and then keep along inside the +Zulu frontier as far as the Maputa, which is its northern boundary, then +we shall cross the Lebombo range into Swaziland. I don't know how far it +would be by the way we should have to go, but as the crow flies it is +about three hundred miles from here. I suppose, what with the detours +and passes and so on, it will be four hundred. Ordinarily that distance +could be done in twenty days, but we must allow a good bit longer than +that; fifteen miles a day is the utmost we can calculate upon. However, +in about a month after we start we ought to be there or thereabouts. +Coming back we should do it more quickly, as we should have got rid of +our weight and need not be bothered with pack ponies." + +"You talk as coolly about it," Field laughed, "as if you were going out +for a few days' picnic." + +"It is the same sort of thing," Chris said, "except that it will be +longer, a bit rougher, and a good deal more interesting." + +"When will you start?" + +"As soon as possible; all I have to see about are the dynamite and +stores for the journey. We know pretty well by this time what we shall +want. We are sure to be able to buy mealies and a bullock when we want +one from the natives. Some tea and coffee, a dozen tins of preserved +milk, and half a hundredweight of biscuits, in case of finding ourselves +at a lonely camp with no native kraals near, and we shall be all right. +Of course we will take a gallon or two of paraffin, a frying-pan, a +small kettle, and so on, and a lantern that will burn paraffin. We will +fill up our pouches with a hundred rounds of rifle cartridges and fifty +for our revolvers, and then I think we shall be ready. Now mind, the +success of our enterprise depends entirely upon your all keeping the +secret absolutely. Neither Willesden, Brown, nor Peters have friends +here to bother themselves about their absence. We are not likely to be +missed, but if any questions are asked, you can say casually that we are +off on a scouting expedition. I shall write four or five letters, with +dates a week or ten days apart, and direct them from here, and leave +them for you to post one by one to my mother. Be sure you send them in +the right order. As she will suppose that we are stopping here quietly, +and out of all harm, she won't be uneasy about me. Peters' and +Willesden's friends have gone to England, so they are all right, and +Brown's are at the Cape. You had better write two or three letters too, +Brown, to be posted a fortnight or three weeks apart." + +When these matters were arranged, Chris saw Jack, and the Kaffir agreed +without hesitation to go with him. He had been so well treated since he +joined them that he had become quite attached to Chris, who generally +gave him his orders. He was only told they were going up on an +expedition to Zululand and Swaziland. + +"I want you to find two good Zulu and two Swazis. Do you think that you +could do that?" + +"There are plenty of them here, baas. I look about and get good men. +What shall I tell them that they will have to do?" + +"To act as guides, to tell the chiefs who we are, and on the march to +look after two or three ponies. We shall only take one of the spare +horses, you will look after him." + +"Will they have guns, baas? All men like to have guns." + +"Yes, they may as well carry guns, and you too, Jack." + +"Much better for men to have guns, baas. They would be thought nothing +of without them." "All right Jack, there shall be no difficulty about +that; the stores are full of them." + +This was the case. Men entering the volunteer corps, or who intended to +do any fighting, sold the rifles they had previously used and obtained +those of Government pattern and carrying the regulation cartridge, so +that for ten pounds Chris got hold of five really good weapons, +carefully selecting those that carried the same-sized cartridge. + +"You can take whichever you like," he said to Jack, who had gone with +him to buy them; "and I shall tell the men I engage that if at the end +of the journey I am well satisfied with their behaviour, I shall give +them the guns in addition to their pay." + +A few hours afterwards Jack brought up four natives for his inspection. +They were all strong and well-built men, and looked capable of hard +work. Having been thrown out of their employment by the events of the +past fortnight, they were glad of a fresh job, and were highly satisfied +when they were offered wages considerably higher than those they had +before received. All preparations were completed by the following +evening, and the next morning at daybreak, after bidding their comrades +a hearty farewell, the little party started. + + + + +CHAPTER IX + +KOMATI-POORT + + +The four lads were no longer dressed in the guise of farmers. These +suits were carried in the packs to be resumed when they neared the +Transvaal. They now dressed in the tweeds they had worn at Johannesburg, +and either felt hats or straw. They still wore jack-boots. The heat of +the day was now great, much more so, indeed, than they had been +accustomed to, for while Maritzburg lies two thousand two hundred feet +above the sea, Johannesburg is five thousand seven hundred. Behind them +Jack led the spare horse, and the four new men stepped lightly along +with their muskets slung behind them by the side of two strong Basuto +ponies, each carrying a couple of boxes containing half a hundredweight +of dynamite. These were concealed from view by sacks and blankets, the +cooking utensils, and other light articles. The spare horse carried the +flour, paraffin, fuses, and other stores, which brought up the weight to +a hundred and twenty pounds. This was somewhat lighter than that carried +by the ponies, but they were anxious to keep it in good condition in +case one of their own gave out. + +The baggage had all been very carefully packed, so that even when going +fast it might not be displaced. They had found no difficulty in +obtaining the dynamite, as several of the stores kept it for the use of +the mines. They made no difficulty in selling it, and would not have +been sorry to part with their whole stock. In view of the possibility of +a siege, it was not an article that any sane man would care to keep on +the premises. Chris had gone round to these stores and had obtained an +offer from each, and as he said that he intended to accept the lowest +tender, it was offered to him at a price very much below what he would +ordinarily have had to give for it. The cases were sewn up in canvas, on +which was painted respectively, Tea, Sugar, Biscuits, and Rice. +Travelling five hours and halting at ten o'clock at a farmhouse that was +still tenanted, and again travelling from half-past three until eight, +they made about twenty-five miles the first day. Then they encamped at a +spot where there was a small spring and consequently good feed for the +horses, and knee-haltering them and taking off their saddles they turned +them loose. + +The natives had collected fuel as they went along, and a fire was soon +made. When the kettle approached boiling, some slices of bacon, of which +they had brought thirty pounds with them, were fried. There was no +occasion to make bread, as they had enough for a two days' supply. The +natives parched some mealies (Indian corn) in the frying-pan when the +bacon was done, the fat serving as a condiment that they highly +appreciated, and they quenched their thirst from the spring. + +Four days' travelling took them to the drift across the Tugela. So far +their journey had been wholly uneventful. Before crossing the next day +they had a long talk with the two Zulus. Their language differed +somewhat from that of Jack, but Chris understood them without +difficulty; for a considerable portion of the labourers in the mines at +Johannesburg were Zulus, and mixing with these, as Chris had done, he +understood them even better than he did Jack. + +The different routes were discussed, and the position of kraals, at +which mealies for the five natives and the horses could be purchased, +and meat possibly obtained. This, unless they bought a sheep, would be +in the form of biltong, that is, strips of meat dried by being hung up +in the sun and wind, and similar to the jerked meat of the prairies and +pampas of America. The points at which water could be obtained were +discussed. Some were at considerable distances apart; but the Zulus were +of opinion that the late heavy rains had extended to the hills of +Zululand, and that there would be abundance of water in little dongas +and water-courses that would be dry after a spell of fine weather. While +passing through Zululand there would be no occasion whatever for +vigilance by day or a watch at night, for there perfect order reigned. +Here and there resident magistrates were stationed, and at these points +a few white traders had settled. All disputes between the natives were +ordinarily decided by their own chiefs, but in serious cases an appeal +could be made to the nearest magistrate, who at once interfered in cases +of violence or gross injustice. + +At the first kraal they came to they learned that the natives were +everywhere much excited. They were most anxious to be allowed to join in +the war against their old enemies, and were greatly disappointed on +learning from the magistrates that this was only a white man's war, and +that no others must take part in it. If, however, the Boers invaded +their territory they would of course be allowed to defend themselves. + +Some of the Zulus urged with reason, that though the English might wish +to make it a white man's war, the Boers did not desire it to be so, for +they knew that they had been urging the Swazis and the Basutos to join +them against the English, and that offers of many rifles and much +plunder had been made also to some of their own chiefs. To this the +magistrates could only reply, that they knew of old that the Boers' +words could not be trusted, and that they were always ready to break any +arrangement that they had made. "They would like you to join them," they +said, "because they would take your help and afterwards turn against you +and steal your land. You know well enough that we have always stood +between you and them; but they would know that if you had joined them +against us we should be angry, and after our war with them was over +would no longer protect you." The Zulus, from their knowledge of the +Boers, felt that this would be so. But in any case no offers made to +them would have induced them to side with the Boers; and it was the +general hope that something might occur which would induce the English +to allow them to attack their enemies. + +Chris and his friends had laid aside their bandoliers, retaining only +the cartridges carried in their belts, in order to assume the appearance +of Englishmen merely travelling for sport, and as they went on they +generally managed to shoot deer enough for the needs of the whole party. +Occasionally they slept in the kraals of chiefs, but greatly preferred +their own little tents as the smoke in them was often blinding, and more +than once the attacks of vermin kept them awake. Still, it would have +been a slight to refuse such invitations, and they had to go to the +kraals as it was necessary to frequently buy supplies of mealies. At +times the travelling was very rough, and with the utmost exertions they +could not make more than twelve or fourteen miles a day, and at other +times they could make five-and-twenty. Without the supply of Indian +corn, the ponies could not have continued this rate of going without +breaking down. The native horses are accustomed occasionally to make +very long journeys, and can perform from sixty to eighty miles in a day, +but after such an exertion they will need a week's rest before making +another effort. With their Basuto masters they are not called upon to do +so. When one of these makes a long journey he will leave his pony with +the person he visits and return on a fresh mount, or if he returns to +his own home after his first day's journey he will take a fresh horse +from his own stock, which may vary from five to fifty ponies. As they +rode they seldom talked of the work that was to be done. Until they saw +the country, the positions, and approach, no plans could possibly be +formed, and they therefore treated the matter as if it were a mere +sporting expedition in a new country, and enjoyed themselves thoroughly. +They had heavy work in crossing the Lebombo range, and, travelling a +day's journey farther west, turned to the north again. They were now in +Swaziland, a wild and mountainous country. Here also they were +hospitably received where they stopped, although the Swazis were deeply +aggrieved by the shameful manner in which England had refused, after the +valuable aid they had rendered in the last war, to give them any support +against the Boers. A word would have been sufficient to have kept the +latter out of Swaziland, as it had kept them from raiding in Zululand; +but that word was not given, and the unfortunate people had been raided +and plundered, their best land taken from them, and they themselves +reduced to a state of semi-subjection. However, they were glad to see +four English sportsmen among them again, and to learn something of the +war that had broken out between their oppressors and the British. + +"If you beat them we shall be free again," they said. "Last time you +were beaten, and gave over the whole country to the Boers, and left all +our people, who had fought for you, at their mercy. This time you must +not do that. If you beat them, shoot them all like dogs, or make slaves +of them as they make slaves of the natives who dwell in their land. Only +so will there be peace." + +"I don't know that the English will do that," Chris said; "but you may +be sure that, when the war is over, the Boers will be no longer masters, +and there will be just law made by us, and all white men and all natives +will be protected, and no evil deeds will be allowed." + +"We are no longer united among ourselves," one of the chiefs said. "Some +have been taken by the promises and gifts of the Boers, and our queen is +also, it is said, in their favour. She is afraid of them, but most of us +would take advantage of their fighting you to drive all of them out of +our land, and to win back all the territory they have taken from us. We +are very poor, our best land is gone, we can scarce grow enough food; +and we long for the time when once again we can have rich mealie +patches, and good grazing land for our oxen and our horses, and are +again a strong people, and they afraid of us. Had not the English +interfered and taken over the Boer country, we should have wasted it +from end to end; and they knew it well, and begged your Shepstone to +hoist your flag and protect them. Ah, he should have stayed there then! +The natives, our friends in the plain, still talk of that happy time +when you were masters, and the Boers dared no longer shoot them down as +if they were wild beasts and treat them as slaves, and the towns grew +up, and your people paid for work with money and not with the lash of a +whip or a bullet. All of us have mourned over the time when the English +bent their knee to the Boers, and gave them all they wanted,--the +mastery of the land, and the right to kill and enslave us at their +will." + +"That was not quite so," Chris said. "They promised to give good +treatment to the natives; that was one of the conditions of the treaty." + +"And you believed them!" the chief said scornfully. "Did you not know +that a Boer's oath is only good so long as a gun is pointed at him? +Perhaps it will be like this again, and when you have conquered them you +will again trust them, and march away. But they tell us, it is not you +who will conquer them, but they who will conquer you. They tell our +people that they will be masters over all the land, and that your people +will have to sail away in your ships. Runners have brought us news that +they have gathered round the place where our people go to work digging +bright stones from the ground, and that very soon they will take all the +English prisoners, and that they have also beset Mafeking, and that they +have beaten the English soldiers in Natal, and there will soon be none +left there; and more than that, that the people of the other Boer state +have joined them, and have entered the English territory, and are being +joined by all the Boers there. Therefore we, who would like to fight +against them, are afraid. We thought the English a great people; they +had beaten the Zulus, and dethroned the great King Cetewayo. But now it +seems that the Boers are much greater, and our hearts are sore." + +"You need not fear, chief," Chris said. "Our country is very many miles +away, many days' journey in ships; it will take weeks before our army +gets strong. The Boers have always said they wanted peace, and we +believed them and kept but a few soldiers here, and until the army comes +from England they will get the best of it; but we can send, if +necessary, an army many times stronger than that of the Boers, and are +sure to crush them in the end." + +"But how could you believe they wanted peace?" the chief asked. +"Everyone knew that they were building great forts, and had got guns +bigger than were ever before seen, and stores full of rifles. How could +you believe their words when your eyes saw that it was not peace but war +that they meant?" "Because we were fools, I suppose," Chris said +bitterly. "It was not from want of warnings, for people living out here +had written again and again telling what vast preparations they were +making, but the people who govern the country paid no attention. It was +much easier to believe what was pleasant than what was unpleasant; but +their folly will cost the country very dear. If they had sent over +twenty thousand men a year ago there would have been no war; now they +will have to send over a hundred thousand men, perhaps even more; and +great sums of money will be spent, and great numbers of lives lost, +simply because our government refused to believe what everyone out here +knew to be the fact. We did nothing, and allowed the Boers to complete +all their preparations, and to choose their own time for war. But though +we have made a horrible mistake, do not think, chief, that there is any +doubt about our conquering at last; the men who now govern our country +are men and not cowards, and will not, as that other government did, go +on their knees to the Boers, and even if they would do so, the people +would not sanction it." + +"If what the chief has heard is correct," Chris said as they rode along +the next morning, "we must get back again as soon as we can. The Boers +may be lying, and, of course, they would make the best of things to the +Swazis. It certainly sounds as if not only at Ladysmith, but at all +other places, things are going badly at present. However, in another +couple of days we shall not be far from the bridge. The chief said that +the frontier was only a few miles away, and our own men tell us that it +is a very hilly country on the other side, just as it is here. We have +certainly come faster that we had expected. Thanks to their good +feeding, the horses have all turned out well. If it is really only two +days farther, we shall get there in just three weeks from starting." + +They had not brought the same ponies all the way; as soon as one showed +signs of fatigue, it was changed for another with the arrangement that, +should they return that way, they would take it back and give the chief +a present for having seen that it was taken care of. The four natives, +although well contented with the way in which they were fed and cared +for, were much puzzled at the eagerness of their employers to push on, +and the disregard they paid to all the information obtained for them of +opportunities for sport. Several times they had said to Jack: "How is it +the baas does not stop to shoot? There are plenty of deer, and in some +places lions. There are zebras, too, though these are not easy to get +at, and very difficult to stalk. Why do you push on so fast that the +ponies have to be left behind, and others taken on? We cannot understand +it. We have been with white men who came into our country to shoot, or +to see what the land was like, but they did not travel like this. +Besides, we shall soon be in the land of the Boers, and as the English +are at war with them, they will shoot them if they find them." + +Jack had only been told that his masters were going to strike a blow at +the Boers, and had not troubled himself as to its nature. He had seen +how they had defeated much larger parties than their own, and had +unbounded confidence in them. He therefore only said: + +"The baas has not told me. I know that all the gentlemen are very brave, +and have no fear of the Boers. I do not think that we need fear that any +harm will happen. They shoot enough for us to eat heartily, they buy +drink for us at every kraal they stop at, and if they have seen no game +they buy a sheep. What can we want more? They have got you guns, but you +have never needed to use them; perhaps you may before you get back. If +the Boers meddle with them you will be able to fight." + +The prospect of a chance of being allowed to fight against the Boers +would alone have inspired the four natives to bear any amount of fatigue +without a murmur, and each day's march farther north had heightened +their hopes that they might use their guns against their old enemies. It +was on the twenty-first day after starting that, from a hill commanding +a broad extent of country, they caught sight of a train of waggons, and +knew that their journey was just at an end. They had debated which side +of the Komati river would be the best to follow, and had agreed to take +the eastern bank. + +The Boer territory extended a few miles beyond this. Komati-poort was +close to the frontier. As they knew nothing as to the construction of +the bridge beyond the fact that it was iron, and were not even sure +whether it was entirely on Boer ground, or if the eastern bank of the +river here belonged to the Portuguese, they decided that at any rate it +was better to travel as near the frontier as possible, as, were they +pursued they could ride at once across the line. Not that they believed +that the Boers would respect this, but they would not know the country +so well as that on their own side, and would not find countrymen to join +them in the pursuit. + +Keeping down on the eastern side of the hills, they continued until they +could see the white line of steam that showed the direction in which a +train from the south-east was coming, and were therefore able to +calculate within half a mile where the bridge must be situated. They +camped in a dry donga, and next morning at daybreak left their horses +behind them in charge of the men and walked forward. A mile farther they +obtained a view of the bridge. It stood at the point where the river, +after running for some little distance north-west, made a sharp curve to +the south. The bridge stood at this loop. If the object had been to +render it defensible, it had been admirably chosen by these Boers who +laid out the line to the Portuguese frontier, for from the other side of +the bank the approach could be swept by cannon and even musketry on both +flanks. + +Lying down, they took in all the details of the construction through +their glasses, and then, choosing their ground so that they could not be +seen by any on the bridge, they kept on until they were able to obtain a +view from a distance of a quarter of a mile. The examination that was +now made was by no means of a satisfactory nature. Near the bridge there +were sidings on which several lines of loaded trucks stood. An engine +was at work shunting. At least a score of natives were at work under the +direction of Portuguese, while several men, who were by their dress +evidently Boers, were pointing out to the officials the trucks they +desired to be first forwarded. Three or four of these carried huge +cases, two of them being each long enough to occupy two trucks. + +"There is no doubt those are guns," Chris said. "If we can do nothing +else, we can work a lot of damage here, which will be some sort of +satisfaction after our long ride. As to our main object, things don't +look well." + +Half a dozen armed Boers could be made out stationed at the Portuguese +side of the bridge, and as many more at the opposite end. Two lately- +erected wooden huts, each of which could give shelter to some fifty men, +stood a short distance beyond the bridge, and it was evident by the +figures moving about, and a number of horses grazing near, that a strong +party was stationed there to furnish guards for the bridge. + +"I am afraid we cannot do it," Peters said, after their glasses had all +been fixed on the bridge for several minutes; "at least, I don't see any +chance. What do you say, Chris?" + +"No, I am afraid there is none. If we were to crawl up to them to-night +and shoot down all at this end of the bridge, we should be no nearer. +You see, there are a line of huts on this side, and two or three better- +class houses. No doubt the railway officials and natives all live there; +they would all turn out when they heard the firing, and the Boers would +come rushing over from the other side. It would be out of the question +for us to carry forward those four boxes to the middle of the bridge, +plant them over the centre of the girders, and light the fuses. A +quarter of an hour would be wanted for the business at the very least, +and we should not have a minute, if there is as good a guard by night as +there is by day. It is likely to be at least as large, perhaps much more +than that. The thing is impossible in that way. However, of course we +can crawl up close after dark and satisfy ourselves about the guard. + +"If it is not to be managed in that way, we must go down to the river +bank and see whether there is anything to be done with one of the piers. +If that is not possible, we must content ourselves with smashing things +up generally on this side. Several of the trucks look to me to be full +of ammunition, and there are eight with long cases which are no doubt +rifles. We all remember that terrific smash at Johannesburg, and though +I don't say we could do such awful damage as there was there--for there +were I don't know how many tons of dynamite exploded then, I think about +fifty--still, it would be a heavy blow. Any amount of stores would be +destroyed, some thousand of rifles, and, for aught I know, all those +waggons with tarpaulins over them are full of cartridges. However, the +bridge is the principal thing. We will stop here for an hour or two and +examine every foot of the ground, so as to be able to find our way in +the dark. We need not mind about the trucks now, we can examine their +position to-morrow if we have to give up the idea of the bridge." + +On returning to their horses they had a long talk. Chris was deeply +disappointed, but the others, who had never quite believed that his +scheme could be carried out, were greatly delighted at the knowledge +that at any rate they might be able to do an immense deal of damage to +the enemy. As soon as it became quite dark, they set out again; they did +not take their rifles with them, but each had his brace of revolvers. +They had no intention of fighting, except to secure a retreat. Before +starting, each had wound strips of flannel round his boots, so that they +could run noiselessly. Brown had in the first place suggested that they +should take their boots off, but Chris pointed out that if they had to +run in the dark, one or other of them was sure to lame himself by +striking against a stone or other obstacle. There were several large +fires in the shunting yard, and at each end of the bridge, and at the +Boer barracks. Crawling along on their hands and knees they were +completely in the shade, and managed to get within some twenty or thirty +yards of the Boers, who were sitting smoking and talking. They were all +evidently greatly satisfied with news that they had heard during the +day. Listening to their talk, they gathered something of what had +happened since they left Estcourt. Colenso had been evacuated by us, an +armoured train coming up from Estcourt had been drawn off the line, and +most of the soldiers with it had been killed or captured. The last news +was that the British had sallied out from Estcourt, which was now +surrounded, and had attacked the Boers posted in a very strong position +near a place called Willow Grange, but had been repulsed, principally by +the artillery, with, it was said, immense loss. This was not pleasant +hearing for the listeners. The Boers then had a grumble at being kept so +far away from the fighting. It was not that they were so anxious to be +engaged, as to get a share of the loot, as it had been reported that +something like twenty thousand cattle and horses had been driven off +from Natal. + +Then their conversation turned upon a point still more interesting to +the listeners. A commando had started from Barberton, a border town some +thirty or forty miles to the west, into Swaziland. A native had +mentioned to one of the Boers there that four Englishmen had passed +north. They had stopped at his chief's kraal. They were all quite young, +and had five natives with them, and three pack-horses. They had come to +shoot and see the country, they said; but they had spoken with one of +the men with them, who said that so far they had not done much hunting, +only enough for food; he supposed that they were going to begin further +on. The Boer had an hour later ridden down to Barberton with the news, +and it had been at once resolved to send off a commando of a hundred men +to search the hills, for there was a suspicion that the hunters were +British officers who had come up to act as spies. + +"Our cornet had a telegram this afternoon," one of them said, "that we +were to be specially vigilant here, and we must keep a sharp lookout at +night. I don't suppose they are on this side of the river. They may be +going to pull up the railway, or blow up a culvert somewhere between +this and Barberton. Four men with their Kaffirs might do that, but they +certainly could not damage this bridge." + +At ten o'clock most of the party retired into a small shed a few yards +away, but two remained sitting by the fire, and were evidently left on +guard, for they kept their rifles close at hand. The lads now crawled +away some distance, and then made their way down a steep bank to the +river. It was a stream of some size, running with great rapidity, and it +did not take them long to decide that it would be impossible to swim out +with the cases and place these in such a situation that the explosion +would damage the structure. They then moved quietly up to the spot where +the end of the last span touched the level ground; it rested upon a +solid wall built into the rock, and ran some forty feet above their +heads. They were now just under where the Boers were sitting, could hear +their voices, and see the glow of their fire. They were unable to make +out the exact position of the girders, but they had, when watching it, +obtained a general view of the construction. + +It consisted of two lines of strong girders on each side, connected by +lattice bars, with strong communications between the sides at each pier. +The depth of the girders was some twenty feet. After cautiously feeling +the wall and finding that there were no openings in which their +explosives could be placed, they crawled away noiselessly, ascended to +the bank again a couple of hundred yards from the bridge, and returned +to their camping ground. They observed as they went that there were +still fires burning in the station yard, that some Kaffirs were seated +near these, and as, in the silence of the night, a faint sound could be +heard like that of a distant train, they had no doubt that they were +waiting up for one to arrive. Indeed, before they had reached the +camping place they saw a train pass by. It had no lights save the head- +lights and that of the engine fire, and they therefore had no doubt that +it was another train with stores. + +When they reached their tents they had a long consultation. No fire had +been lighted. The horses had been taken some way up a little ravine down +which a stream of water trickled; here the four natives had taken up +their post. These had only come down in the middle of the day to fetch +their food, which Jack cooked over the spirit stove. This was alight +when the lads returned, but was carefully screened round by blankets so +that not the slightest glow could be seen from a distance. + +"What do you think of it, Chris?" Brown said. + +"I don't know what to think about it. I have no idea what effect +dynamite would have when exploded at a distance of thirty or forty feet +below a bridge. Certainly it would blow the roadway up, but I have very +great doubts whether it would so twist or smash the main girders as to +render the bridge impassable. The distance to the first pier is not +great, and unless one entirely destroyed the bridge, I should say that +it could be repaired very soon--I mean, in a week or two--by a strong +gang. If the girders kept their places, two or three days' work might +patch it up temporarily. If it were destroyed altogether as far as the +first pier, it would stop the cannon getting over till a temporary +bridge is constructed; but by rigging up some strong cables, they could +pass cases of musket ammunition across the gap in the same way, you +know, as I have seen pictures of shipwrecked people being swung along +under a cable in a sort of cradle. What do you think, Peters?" + +"Two hundred pounds of dynamite would do a lot of damage, Chris. I +should think that it would certainly bring the wall down." + +"I have no doubt that it would do that, Peters, but the ironwork goes +some ten yards farther, and no doubts rests on the solid rock. I expect +the wall is put there more to finish the thing off than to carry much of +the weight. Again, you see it is only a single line, and not above ten +feet wide, which is against us, for the wider the line the better chance +it has of being smashed by an explosion some forty feet below it. Well, +we will have another look at the bridge and the waggons to-morrow. Of +course the bridge is the great thing if it can be managed, though I +don't say that blowing up the yard would not be a good thing if we can't +make sure of the other. Anyhow, we need not feel down-hearted about it. +We came up here on the chance, and even though we may not be able to do +exactly what we want, we ought to manage to do them a lot of damage." + +After eating their supper they turned in to their two little tents. The +spirit-lamp had been extinguished, and as they had not the least fear of +discovery, they did not consider it necessary to place a sentinel. In +the morning they were out again early and at their former post of +observation. + +"What are they up to now?" Brown said an hour later when he saw a party +of Boers come down the opposite side close to the bridge, carrying posts +and planks. + +Chris made no answer, he was watching them intently. They stopped near +the bank of the river close to the bridge. Then some of them set to work +to level a space of ground, while others made holes at the corners. + +"I am afraid that it is all up with our plans as far as the bridge is +concerned. They are going to put up a hut there, and I have not the +least doubt it means they are going to station a guard under the bridge. +If they do it that side, they are probably doing the same on this, only +we can't see them. The Boers are stupid enough in some things, but they +are sharp enough in others, and it is possible that the commando from +Barberton has come upon one of the kraals where we slept, and asking a +lot of questions about us, they have found out that we had four heavy +boxes with us, and the idea may have struck them that these contained +explosives. If that did occur to them, it is almost certain that a man +has been sent off at once to Barberton with orders to telegraph here and +to other bridges, to take every precaution against their being blown up. +Anyhow, there is a hut building there, and I don't see that it can be +for any other purpose." + +After three hours' work the hut was completed, and a party of eight men +brought down blankets and other kit. Two of these at once ascended the +bank with their rifles and sat down at the foot of the wall. + +"That ends the business," Chris said. "However, I will creep round to a +point where I can get a view of this side of the bridge. Possibly they +have only taken precautions on their own side, for we were travelling +for some time in the Swazis' country to the west of the Komati, and that +is where they will have heard of us." He crawled away among the rocks, +and rejoined his companions an hour later. + +"It is just the same this side. They have settled the question for us. +Now we will give our attention to the waggons." + + + + +CHAPTER X + +AN EXPLOSION + + +Having given up all hopes of blowing up the bridge, Chris and his +comrades turned their whole attention to the lines of waggons. The train +that had come in on the previous evening had added to the number, +although it had taken some of them away with it up country. They now +made out that there were eight waggons piled with cases, that almost +certainly contained rifles; six with tarpaulins closely packed over +them, and these they guessed contained ammunition boxes; four, each with +two large cases that might contain field guns; while the two with what +they were sure were big guns still remained on the siding. + +"I should say that about four or five pounds of dynamite would be an +abundance for each of those ammunition waggons; less than that would do, +as we could, by slitting the tarpaulins, put a pound among the cases, +and if one case were exploded it would set all the others off. There is +no trouble about them. I will just take a note. They are on the second +siding; there are eight other waggons in front of them and six behind, +so we cannot make any mistake about that. There must be a good heavy +charge under the rifle trucks, for we shall have to blow them all well +into the air to bend and damage them enough to be altogether +unserviceable. As for the guns, and especially the heavy ones, it is a +difficult question. Of course, if we could open the cases and get at the +breech-pieces, and put dynamite among them, we could damage all the +mechanism so much that the guns would be useless until new breech-pieces +were made, which I fancy must be altogether beyond the Boers; but as +there is no possibility of opening them, we must trust to blowing the +guns so high in the air that they will be too much damaged for use by +the explosion and fall. We have got altogether two hundredweight; now +two pounds to each ammunition waggon will take twelve pounds. What shall +we say for the rifles?" + +"Ten pounds," Brown suggested. + +"That would take eighty more pounds," Willesden objected, "which would +make a big hole in our stores." + +"We must have a good charge," Chris said. "Suppose we say nine pounds to +each, that will save eight pounds; fifteen pounds apiece ought to give +the eight cases which we suppose hold field-guns a good hoist; that will +leave us with over a hundred pounds, fifty for each of the big guns. Now +that we have seen all that is necessary, we may as well be off and begin +to get ready." + +The covers were taken off the boxes of dynamite, and these were +unscrewed, and the explosive was with great care divided into the +portions as agreed upon. Two of the cases furnished just sufficient for +the ammunition waggons and the two big guns, the other two for the +smaller cannon and the trucks with the rifles. The charges were sewn up +in pieces of the canvas, the smaller charges for the ammunition boxes +being enclosed in thinner stuff that had been sewn under the canvas used +in packing; the fuses and detonators were then cut and inserted. Chris +was perfectly up in this work, having performed the operation scores of +times in the mines. The length it should burn was only decided after a +discussion. + +There would be in all nineteen charges to explode, and these were in +three groups at some little distance from each other, all the cannon +being on the same siding. It would be necessary, perhaps, to wait for +some time till all these were free from observation by natives or others +who might be moving about the yard, then a signal must be given that +they could all see. It would not take long to light the fuses, for each +of them would be provided with a slow match, which burns with but a +spark, and could be held under a hat or an inverted tin cup till the +time came for using it. The question was how far must they be away to +ensure their own safety, and Chris maintained that at least four or five +hundred yards would be necessary to place them in even comparative +safety from the rain of fragments that would fall over a wide area. +Finally it was agreed to cut the fuses to a length to burn four minutes; +this would allow a minute for any hitch that might occur in lighting +them, and three minutes to burn. It was of course important that they +should be no longer than was absolutely necessary, as there existed a +certain risk that one of the little sparks might be seen by a passing +Kaffir, or, as was still more probable, the smell of burning powder +should attract attention. It was agreed that Chris should light the +fuses at the cannon, which were farthest from the others, that Peters +should see to the six rifle trucks, and Willesden and Brown attend the +eight trucks with the ammunition, one to begin at each end of the line. + +When each had finished his work, he was to run straight away in the +direction of the encampment, and all were to throw themselves down when +they felt sure that the time for the explosions had arrived. As soon as +all was over they were to meet at their place of encampment. Tents and +all stores were to be removed before the work began to the ravine where +the horses were, the men with them being charged to stand at the +animals' heads, as there would be a great explosion, and the horses +might break loose and stampede. The matter that puzzled them the most +was how, when they reached their respective stations--separated from +each other by lines of waggons, and in some cases by distances of a +couple of hundred yards--they were to know when the work of lighting the +fuses was to begin. It could not be done by sound, for this would reach +the ears of any awake in the yard or the sentries at the bridge. Chris +at last suggested a plan. + +"When we start, Jack shall be stationed at a point on the hillside high +enough for us to see him from all points of the yard. We will show him +the exact spot while it is light. When we start he shall go down with us +to the edge of the yard, and as we separate will turn and go up to the +point we had shown him. He will be ordered to walk up quietly, and not +to hurry; that will give us ample time to get to our stations before he +reaches his. We must all keep our eyes fixed on that point. He will take +the dark lantern with him; when he gets there he must turn the shade +off, so as to show the light for a quarter of a minute. That will be our +signal to begin. It is most unlikely that anyone else will see it, but +even if they did they would simply stare in that direction and wonder +what it was. Of course, only a flash would be safer; but some of us +might not see it, and would remain waiting for it until the other +explosions took place." + +All agreed that this would be a very good plan. Chris crawled up with +Jack until he reached a spot where he commanded a perfect view of the +yard, and explained to him exactly what he was to do. He had already +been told what was going to take place. Knowing that the Kaffirs have +very little idea of time, he said: "You will hold it open while you say +slowly like this, 'I am showing the light, baas, and I hope that you can +all see it.' You will say that over twice and then turn off the light, +and lie down under that big rock till you hear the explosion. Wait a +little, for stones and fragments will come tumbling down. When they have +stopped doing so make your way straight to where the horses are; you +will find us there before you. Now, repeat over to me the words you are +to say slowly twice." + +Jack did so, and finding on questioning him that he perfectly understood +what he was to do, Chris went back with him to the encampment, where +they remained quietly until the sun set and darkness came on. Then, +according to arrangement, the four natives came in and carried all the +things back to the ravine, and laid them down ready to pack the horses +as soon as their masters returned. + +The day passed slowly to the lads. All were in a state of suppressed +excitement, an excitement vastly greater than they had felt during their +two fights with the Boers. + +"How they will wonder who did it when they hear the news down in Natal!" +Peters said. + +"I don't expect they will hear much about it," Chris said. "You may be +sure the Boers will not say much; they make a big brag over every +success, but they won't care to publish such a thing as this. Probably +their papers will only say: 'An explosion of a trifling nature occurred +on the Portuguese side of Komati-poort. Some barrels of powder exploded; +it is unknown whether it was the result of accident or the work of +spies. Due precaution will be taken to prevent the recurrence of the +accident. Beyond a few natives employed at the station, no one was +hurt.'" + +The others laughed. "I suppose that will be about it, Chris. However, I +have no doubt that that commando from Barberton will keep a very sharp +look-out for us as we go back." + +"Yes, but they won't catch us. We won't venture into Swaziland again, +but will make our way down on the Portuguese side, following the railway +till we are fairly beyond the mountain range. We can ride fast now that +we have got rid of the dynamite. It will be some time before they get +the news about what has happened here, for the telegraph wires are sure +to be broken and the instruments smashed. I really think that our best +way will be to ride straight down to Lorenzo Marques. When we get there +we can very well state that we had been ordered to leave Johannesburg, +and that, as the trains are so slow and so crowded with fugitives, we +had ridden down. I don't suppose that we shall attract the least notice, +for we know that a great many of those who had intended to stay have +been ordered off. That way we shall get back to Natal in a few days and +avoid all danger." The others agreed that this would be a capital plan; +and the distance by the road, which they had crossed a few miles to the +south, and which runs from Lorenzo Marques up to Ladysdorp and the +Murchison and Klein Lemba gold-fields, would not be above seventy miles. +They would wait till daybreak showed them the amount of damage that had +been done, and then start, and would be down at Lorenzo Marques in the +evening, when, even if the news of the explosion reached the town, the +Boers' suspicions that some Englishmen were in the hills, and that it +was probably their work, would not be known. Not until ten o'clock was a +move made. Then they took up the packages of dynamite, and, accompanied +by Jack, made their way noiselessly down to the railway yard. + +Here they separated. Chris, aided by Jack, carried the big packets for +the large guns and for the eight smaller ones. They met no one about, +and depositing their packages in the right position under them--the +fuses had been already inserted--they returned to the spot they had +left. In a minute or two they were joined by the others. Peters had +placed his parcels under the eight trucks with rifles; Willesden and +Brown had cut holes in the tarpaulins of the ammunition trucks, and +thrust down their charges well among the boxes. All was ready. While the +others stood closely round him Jack opened the lantern just widely +enough for them to light their slow matches. + +"Now, you are not to hurry back to the place, Jack; we shall all be on +the look-out for you by the time you get there. You know your +instructions; you are to turn round, open the slide of the lantern, say +the words I told you over twice slowly, then shut the lantern and get +under that great boulder lying against the rock. You will be perfectly +safe in there." + +"I understand, baas," he said, and at once turned and went off. The +others hurried to their respective posts, and then turned round and +gazed at the spot where the light would be shown. In their anxiety and +excitement the time seemed interminable, and each began to think that +the native had somehow blundered; at last the light appeared, and they +turned at once to their work. Half a minute sufficed to light the fuses, +and then they hurried away cautiously until past all the waggons, and +then at full speed along the hillside, their thickly-padded shoes making +no noise upon the rocks. Knowing that they were sure to be confused as +to the time, they had calculated before the sun had set how far they +could run in three minutes, which should be, if all went well, the time +they would have after leaving the yard. They thought that even on the +rough ground, and in the dark, they could make a hundred and fifty yards +a minute, and at about four hundred and fifty from the waggons there was +a low ridge of rock behind which they would obtain protection from all +fragments blown directly outwards. + +Chris was the first to arrive, for the trucks with the cannon were those +farthest away from the bridge, and he was able to run for some distance +along the line before making for the elope, and therefore travelled +faster than his companions, who had farther to run on broken ground. In +half a minute they rushed up almost together. + +"Throw yourselves down," Chris shouted; "we shall have it directly." + +Twenty seconds later there was a tremendous roar and a blinding crash, +and they felt the ground shake. Almost simultaneously came eight others, +then in quick succession followed six other reports, and mingled with +these a confused roar of innumerable shots blended together. There was a +momentary pause, and then a deafening clatter as rifles, fragments of +iron and wood came falling down over a wide area. Several fell close to +where the lads were crouched against the rock, but none touched them. +For a full half-minute the fragments continued to fall, then the boys +stood up and looked round. It was too dark to see more than that the +yard was a chaos; the long lines of waggons, the huts and buildings, had +all disappeared; loud shouts could be heard from the other side of the +bridge, but nearer to them everything was silent. There was no doubt +that the success of the attempt was complete, and the lads walked back +quietly until they were at the spot where the horses had been placed, +Jack overtaking them just as they reached it. + +"It was terrible, baas," he said in an awed voice. "Jack thought his +life was gone. Things fell on the rock but could not break it." + +"Nothing short of one of those big cannon would have done that, Jack. +Well, we shall see in the morning what damage is done." + +The four natives, although they had been warned, were still terribly +frightened. The horses had at the first crash broken away and run up the +ravine, but they had just brought them down again, still trembling and +lathering with fear. For some minutes the boys patted and soothed them, +and accustomed to their voices and caresses they gradually quieted down, +but were very restless until day began to break. The boys had no thought +of sleep. The lamp was lit and tea made, and each of the Kaffirs was +given a glass of spirits and water, for they had brought up a bottle +with them in case of illness or any special need; and it was evident +from their chattering teeth and broken speech that the natives needed a +stimulant badly. Before it became light the horses were saddled, and the +five natives told to take them along the hill a mile farther. When they +had seen them off the lads returned to their former post above the +station. They had several times, when they looked out during the night, +seen a great light in that direction, and had no doubt that some of the +fallen huts had caught fire. + +[Illustration: "THERE WAS A TREMENDOUS ROAR AND A BLINDING CRASH."] + +Prepared as they were for a scene of destruction, the reality far +exceeded their expectations. All the waggons within a considerable +distance of the explosions were smashed into fragments, their wheels +broken and the axles twisted. The ammunition trucks had disappeared, and +many close to them had been completely shattered. Those in which the +muskets had been were a mere heap of fragments; the rest of the trucks +lay, some with their sides blown in, others comparatively uninjured. +Some were piled on the top of others three or four deep; their contents +were scattered over the whole yard. Boxes and cases were burst open, and +their contents--including large quantities of tea, sugar, tinned +provisions in vast quantities, and other stores--ruined. + +Some still smoking brands showed where the huts had stood, and the dead +bodies of some twenty natives and several Portuguese officials, were +scattered here and there. The bodies of eight Boers were laid out +together by the bridge, and forty or fifty men were wandering aimlessly +amid the ruins. A huge cannon stood upright nearly in the centre of the +yard. It had fallen on its muzzle, which had penetrated some feet into +the earth. They could not see where its fellow had fallen. Five others, +which looked like fifteen-pounders, were lying in different directions, +the other three had disappeared. Rifles twisted, bent, and ruined were +lying about everywhere. + +"It is not as good as the bridge," Chris said after they had used their +glasses for some time in silence, "but it is a heavy blow for them, and +I should think it will be a week before the line can be cleared ready +for traffic. Even when they begin they will feel the loss of so much +rolling-stock. There were five engines in the yard. Every one of these +has been upset, and will want a lot of repairs before it is fit for +anything again. I wish I had a kodak with me to take a dozen snap-shots, +it would be something worth showing when we get back. Well, we may as +well be moving. The Boers look as if they were stupefied at present, but +they will be waking up presently, and the sooner we start for Lorenzo +Marques the better." + +Half an hour later they had mounted and were on their way, travelling +slowly till they came upon the road, and then at a fast pace. Jack rode +the spare horse, the other natives rode the ponies in turn, those on +foot keeping up without difficulty by laying a hand on the saddles. +Sometimes they trotted for two or three miles, and then went at a walk +for half an hour, and stopped altogether for four hours in the heat of +the day, for they were now getting on to low land, being only some three +hundred feet above the sea. They reached Lorenzo Marques at about nine +o'clock in the evening, and failing to find beds, for the town was full +of emigrants from the Transvaal, they camped in the open. In the morning +they sold the two ponies, and were fortunate in finding a steamer lying +there that would start the next day. Being very unwilling to part with +their horses they arranged for deck passages for them, taking their own +risk of injury to them in case of rough weather setting in. Every berth +was already engaged, but this mattered little to them, as they could +sleep upon the planks as well as on the ground. + +They found that there was some excitement in the town, as there was a +report that there had been an explosion and much damage done near +Komati-poort. No particulars were, however, known, as the railway +officials maintained a strict silence as to the affair. It was known, +however, that the telegraphic communication with the Transvaal was +broken, and that three trains filled with Kaffir labourers, and +accompanied by a number of officials and a company of soldiers, had gone +up early that morning. Among the fugitives strong hopes were expressed +that the damage had been serious enough to interrupt the traffic for +some little time, and to cause serious inconvenience to the Boers, and +some even hazarded the hope that the bridge had suffered. This, however, +seemed unlikely in the extreme. + +Fortunately the weather was fine on the run down to Durban, and the +passage of three hundred miles was effected in twenty-four hours. It was +now just a month since they had left Maritzburg, and as soon as they +landed with their horses and followers they learned that much had taken +place during that time. + +They had started on the 10th of November. The Boers were then steadily +advancing, and so great did the danger appear, that Durban had been +strongly fortified by the blue jackets, aided by Kaffir labour. On the +25th Sir Redvers Buller had arrived, and by this time a considerable +force was gathered at Estcourt. The British advance began from that town +on the following day. The place had been entirely cut off, Boers +occupying the whole country as far as the Mooi river. General Hildyard, +who commanded at Estcourt, had been obliged to inarch out several times +to keep them at a distance from the town, and one or two sharp artillery +engagements had taken place, the Boers being commanded by General +Joubert in person. They had always retired a short distance, but their +movements were so rapid that it was useless to follow; and the troops +had each time fallen back to Estcourt. On the 28th the Boers had blown +up the bridge across the Tugela, and our army was moving forward, and a +great battle was expected shortly. On landing Chris rode at once to the +address given by his mother, and found that she had sailed for Cape Town +a week before. Riding then to the railway, he found that the line was +closed altogether to passenger traffic, but that a train with some +troops and a strong detachment of sailors was going up that evening. +Learning that a naval officer was in command, as the military consisted +only of small parties of men who had been left behind, when their +regiments left, to look after and forward their stores, he went to him. +He had, before landing, donned his civilian suit. + +"What can I do for you, sir?" the officer, who was watching a party +loading trucks with sheep, asked. + +"My name is King, sir. I have just returned from an expedition to +Komati, I and three friends with me, and we have succeeded in blowing up +a large number of waggons containing a battery of field artillery, two +very heavy long guns, which, by the marks on the case, came from +Creusot, some eight or ten thousand rifles, and six truck-loads of +ammunition." + +"The deuce you have!" the officer said, looking with great surprise at +the lad who told him this astonishing tale. Then sharply he added: "Are +you speaking the truth, sir? You will find it the worse for you if you +are not." + +"What I say is perfectly true," Chris said quietly. "We only arrived an +hour since from Lorenzo Marques. This open letter from General Yule will +show you that the party of boys of whom I was the leader, have done some +good service before now." + +The officer opened and read the letter. "I must beg your pardon for +having doubted your word," he said, as he handed it back. "After +adventuring into a Boer camp, and giving so heavy a lesson to a superior +force of the enemy, I can quite imagine you capable of carrying out the +adventure you have just spoken of. Now, sir, what can I do for you?" + +"I have come to ask if you will allow myself and my three friends to +accompany you." + +"That I will most certainly. And indeed, as you have a report to make of +this matter to General Buller, you have a right to go on by the first +military train. Is there anything else?" + +"Yes, sir; I should be greatly obliged if you will authorize the +station-master to attach a carriage to the train to take our five +horses." + +"I will go with you to him," the officer said. "I can't say whether that +can be managed or not." + +The station-master at first said that it was impossible, for his orders +were for a certain number of carriages and trucks, and with those orders +from the commanding officer he could not add to the number. + +"But you might slip it on behind, Mr. Station-master," the officer said. +"There are four gentlemen going up with a very important report to Sir +Redvers Buller." + +"I would do it willingly enough," the station-master said, "but the +commanding officer is bound to be down here with his staff, and he would +notice the horses directly." + +"They might be put in a closed van, sir," Chris urged. "And as there are +so many full of stores, it would naturally be supposed that this was +also loaded with them." + +The official smiled. "Well, young gentleman, I will do what I can for +you. As the officer in command of the train has consented, I can fall +back upon his authority if there should be any fuss about it. The train +will start at eight this evening; you had better have your horses here +two hours before that. Entrain them on the other side of the yard, and I +will have the waggon attached to the train quietly as soon as you have +got them in. The general is not likely to be down here till half an hour +before the train starts, and it is certainly not probable that he will +count the number of carriages." + +It was now half-past five, and Chris joined his friends, who were +waiting with the horses and Kaffirs near the station. They had hardly +expected him so soon, as they did not know that his mother had left. + +"Good news," he said. "There is a through train going up this evening, +and I have got permission for us and the horses to go; but they must be +put in a truck by half-past six, and we may as well get them in at once. +We still have our water-skins; the Kaffirs had better get them filled at +once, and a good supply of mealies for the horses on the way; there is +no saying how long we may be. Willesden, do you run into a store and get +a supply of bread and a cold ham for ourselves; a good stock of bread +for the Kaffirs, and a jar of water, and a hamper, with a lock, +containing two dozen bottles of beer, the mildest you can get, for them. +We are sure to get out for a few minutes at one of the stations, and can +then unlock the hamper and give them a bottle each. It would never do to +leave it to their mercy; they would drink it up in the first half-hour, +and then likely enough quarrel and fight. For ourselves, we will have a +small skin of water and, say, three bottles of whisky. The carriage is +sure to be full, and it will be acceptable in the heat of the day +tomorrow. The remainder of our supply of tea and so on, and the lamp and +other things, had better all go in with the horses, and everything we do +not absolutely want in the train with us; there will be little room +enough. Get an extra kettle, then we can not only make ourselves a cup +of tea or cocoa on the road, but give some to any friend we may make; +besides, it is sure to come in useful when we get to the front." + +"I will see to all that." + +"If you will, take Jack with you to carry the things you buy." + +"I had better take two of them; it will be a good weight." + +"Very well, take one of the Zulus; the other can lead the spare horse, +and likely enough we shall have some trouble in getting them into the +waggon." + +That work, however, turned out more easy than he had expected. The +station-master pointed out the waggon that he was to take, which was +standing alone on one of the lines of rails. They all set to work, and +were not long in running it alongside an empty platform, from which the +horses were led into it without trouble, being by this time accustomed +to so many changes that they obeyed their masters' orders without +hesitation. They had, too, already made one railway journey, and had +found that it was not unpleasant. The station-master happened to catch +sight of them, and sent two of the porters to take the waggon across the +various points to the rear of the train, where it was coupled. The +water-skins had been filled and the horses given a good drink before +entering the station, and the stores, waterproofs, and other spare +articles stowed with the horses. The shutter was closed, and the Kaffirs +told that on no account were they to open it or show their faces until +the train had left the station. + +In a few minutes Willesden came up with the two natives heavily laden. +As soon as the stores and natives were all safely packed away and the +door of the van locked by one of the porters, the lads went out and had +a hearty meal at an hotel near the station. When they returned a large +number of soldiers and sailors were gathered on the platform. Their +baggage had already been stowed, and they were drawn up in fours, facing +the train, in readiness to enter when the word was given, the officers +standing and chatting in groups. The station was well lighted, as, in +addition to the ordinary gas-lamps, several powerful oil-lamps had been +hung up at short intervals. The naval men were in the front part of the +train, and on Chris walking up there the officer in command beckoned to +him. + +"I will take you in the carriage with me, Mr. King. We want very much to +hear your story, and there is plenty of room for you. Your three +companions will go in the next two compartments, which will contain +junior officers and midshipmen, and I am sure that they too will be very +welcome. Before we board the train I will get you all to go and sit at +the windows at the other side. If you will bring your friends up I will +introduce them to their messmates on the trip. As soon as we have all +entered, we shall be at the window saying good-by to our friends, and no +one will catch sight of you. It is just as well, for although I feel +perfectly justified in taking you on to make your report to the +commander-in-chief, my senior might fuss over it; and although he might +let you go on, there would be a lot of explanations and bother. Have you +got your horses in?" + +"Yes, sir; we were able to manage that capitally." + +"Then you had better bring your comrades up at once, Mr. King, and I +will introduce them to those they will travel with." Chris brought up +his three friends and introduced them to the officer, who then took them +to the group of youngsters. + +"Gentlemen," he said, "these three gentlemen will travel in your +compartment. They have seen a great deal of the war, and belong to one +of the mounted volunteer corps. They have a wonderful story to tell you, +and I am sure you will be delighted with their companionship. They will +take their seats just before the men entrain. They must occupy the seats +near the farther window, and as you will no doubt all be looking out on +this side, they will probably not be noticed, which would be all the +better, as it is a little irregular my taking them up." + +By this time a considerable number of people were crowded in the +station, friends of the officers and comrades of the sailors, who looked +enviously at those going forward, while they themselves might possibly +not get a chance of doing so. A quarter of an hour later the officer +said: + +"I am going to give the order to entrain. This is my compartment. You +and your friends had better slip into your places at once." + +As soon as they had got in the order was given, and with the regularity +of a machine the three hundred men entered the train. As soon as they +had done so the officers took their places. The crowd moved up on to the +platform, and there was much shaking of hands, cheering, and +exhortations to do for the Boers. Suddenly there was a backward movement +on the part of the spectators, and the commanding naval officer on the +station, with several others and a group of military men, came on to the +platform. They were received by the officers in command of the sailors +and soldiers, and walked with them along the platform talking. This was +evidently a matter of ceremony only. The usual questions were put as to +the stores, and after standing and chatting for eight or ten minutes the +officers took their places in the train, the engine whistled, and the +train moved on, amid loud cheering both from those on the platform and +the men at the windows. As soon as they were fairly off, Chris's friend +said: + +"I have already introduced you to these officers, Mr. King, but I have +not told them any of your doings. I can only say, gentlemen, that this +young officer is in command of a section of Volunteer Horse, and has +done work that any of us might be proud indeed to accomplish. The best +introduction I can give him, before he begins to tell his story, is by +reading a letter with which General Yule has furnished him." + + + + +CHAPTER XI + +BACK WITH THE ARMY + + +While the letter was being passed round from hand to hand, a good deal +to Chris's discomfort, he had time to look more closely than he had done +before at his travelling companions. Three of them were young +lieutenants, the fourth an older man, shrewd but kindly faced. In +introducing him, his friend said: "This is our medico, Dr. Dawlish. I +hope that you will have no occasion to make his professional +acquaintance." When they had all read the letter, the senior lieutenant +said: "Now, Mr. King, we won't ask much of you to-night; we shall have +all to-morrow to listen to your story. We have all had a pretty hard +day's work, and shall before long turn in. Perhaps you will tell us to +begin with what your corps is, and how you became the officer." "There +are twenty-one of us, sir, and we are all about the same age. We were +great friends together at Johannesburg, where our fathers were for the +most part connected with mining. As things went on badly, we decided to +form ourselves into a corps if the war broke out. They chose me as their +leader--for no particular reason that I know of--and with the +understanding that if I did not quite give satisfaction, I should resign +in favour of one of the others. We all came down with our families from +Johannesburg when war was declared, and were grossly insulted and ill- +treated by the Boers, several of the ladies, among them my mother, being +struck on the face with their whips; which, you can imagine, quite +confirmed our determination to fight against them. We had all obtained +our parents' consent, and when we got to Pietermaritzburg, proceeded to +get our horses and equipments. That is all." + +"A great deal too short, Mr. King," the lieutenant said. "We want to +know what steps you took, and how you managed it. Did you come down all +the way by train?" + +Chris related the events of the journey with more detail, and how, all +being well furnished with money, they had lost no time in getting all +they required, and going back by train to Newcastle. + +"That is a good point to leave off," the officer said. "Tomorrow morning +we will take your story in instalments, and I do hope you will give us +the details as minutely as you can. They will greatly interest us, as we +are going in for that sort of thing, and it will show us what can be +done by a small number of young fellows accustomed to the country, well- +mounted, and, I am sure, from what General Yule says, remarkably well +led." All were provided with flasks, and after sampling the contents of +these, they wrapped themselves in their rugs and were soon fast asleep. +The other three lads did not get off so easily, the younger officers +were all so delighted at the prospect of soon being engaged that they +were in no way inclined to sleep, and it was not until the seniors had +long been soundly off that they too agreed to postpone the rest of the +boys' narrative until the next morning. The train travelled very slowly, +and Pietermaritzburg--a distance of seventy miles--was not reached until +day was breaking. Here there was a long pause, and all alighted to +stretch their limbs. The lads ran to the end of the train; Jack was +looking out. + +"I thought that we should stop here, baas," he said; "and I have got the +kettles boiling and ready." + +"Good man!" Chris said. "How have the horses passed the night?" + +"They have been very quiet, baas." + +"That is good to know. Take the kettles off and put three good handfuls +of tea in each." + +"Yes, baas." + +"When they are emptied, fill them with fresh water and put them again on +the stove. When they boil, bring them to our carriages, having of course +put some tea in before you take them off the lamp. Now, give me one of +those large loaves and the ham, and all the mugs and knives. We will +start breakfast first in my compartment, Willesden; we will pass you in +the ham when we have done with it. Anyhow, the kettles will hold enough +for a mug for everyone in our three compartments, and by the time we +have drunk that the second lot will be boiling. Open a couple of tins of +milk, Jack, and then you can bring them along when you have taken the +kettles. There is no extraordinary hurry, for I heard them say that we +should wait here at least an hour." + +There was some amusement among the soldiers and sailors as Jack, +carrying the kettles, and Chris, Willesden, Brown, and Peters with ham, +bread and butter, tin mugs, plates, and three open tins of preserved +milk, came along down the platform. + +"What have you got here?" the doctor asked in surprise, as they arrived +at the carriage. + +"Breakfast," Chris said. "It is in the rough, but you will get it +rougher than this before you get to Ladysmith." + +"Why, you must be a conjurer. Where did you get the water from? We were +just discussing whether we should go out and try to fight our way to +those barrels of beer where the Tommies are clustered, or content +ourselves with spirit and water, a drink I cannot recommend in the +morning." + +There were exclamations of pleasure from all in the carriage as Jack was +handing in the things. + +"We shall not want the ham, Mr. King," the senior lieutenant said. "We +provided ourselves with a great basket of eatables and a few bottles of +wine, but the idea of making tea in the train did not, I think, occur to +any of us." + +Chris was not allowed to cut his ham, for the basket contained pies, +chicken, and other luxuries; but the tea was immensely appreciated. By +the time that the first mugs were empty Jack arrived with the fresh +supply, and long before the train started breakfast was over, pipes had +been lighted, and all felt thoroughly awake and cheery. "Do you always +travel so well provided, Mr. King?" the doctor asked. + +"We always carry tea, preserved milk, and preserved cocoa, and two or +three gallons of paraffin for cooking with. In case we can't find wood +for a fire, it makes all the difference in the world in our comfort." + +"Now, Mr. King, we must waste no more time; so please begin at once, or +there will be no time to hear all your story. Tell us something about +your expedition to Komati-poort. The other we shall hope to hear on +another occasion in our camp, where we shall all be glad to see you at +any time." + +Chris then related the idea he had formed at Maritzburg, of blowing up +the bridge, and how he had carried out the adventure. He passed very +briefly over the journey, but described fully how they had been obliged +to relinquish their original project, owing to the bridge being so +strongly guarded at both ends; and how, failing in that respect, they +had determined to do as much damage as possible to the great assemblage +of waggons filled with arms and military stores; and fully detailed the +manner in which this had been accomplished, and the aspect of the yard +on the following morning. + +"Splendidly planned and carried out!" the commander of the party +exclaimed, and the others all echoed his words. It was astonishing +indeed to think that such a plan should have been conceived and carried +out by a lad no older than some of their junior midshipmen, and assisted +by only three others of the same age. + +"The day before we started," the doctor said, "I saw in one of the +Durban papers a telegram from Lorenzo Marques saying that there had been +an explosion at Komati-poort, where a few waggons had been injured and +two natives killed, but that the Boers had suffered in any way, and that +the damage would be repaired and the line opened for traffic in a few +hours." + +"There is only one word of truth in that, sir," Chris said smiling, "and +that is that no Boers suffered. I am convinced that is strictly true, +for the eight Boers at the bridge were certainly instantaneously killed; +and of the natives, whom I am sorry for, there were certainly eighteen +killed, together with some eight or ten Portuguese employés. If I could +by any possibility have got the natives out of the way I would have done +so. As to the Portuguese I do not feel any great regret, for I believe +all the officials in the custom-house on the railway are bribed by the +Boers to break the official orders they receive as to observing strict +neutrality, and aid in every way in passing the materials of war into +the Transvaal." + +There was no time for further conversation, for they were now within a +short distance of the Tugela, and the train was winding its way between +steep hills which could have been held successfully by a handful of men. + +"The only wonder to me is," another officer said, "that the Boers did +not take up and drag away the rails all the way from here to Estcourt. +If they had lifted them out of their sleepers, they had only to harness +a rail behind each horse and trot off with it. I know that there is a +considerable amount of railway material at Durban, but I doubt if there +is anything like sufficient to make twenty miles of road. And the +business would have been still more difficult if the Boers had collected +the sleepers in great piles and burned them. Of course they have +destroyed a good many culverts and the bridge at Estcourt. It is +wonderful that the railway people should have managed to get up a +temporary trestle bridge so soon, and to make a deviation of the line to +carry the trains over. It does their engineers immense credit. This pass +is widening," he added after putting his head out of the window. "I +fancy we shall be at Chieveley in a few minutes." + +The train came to a stand-still at a siding a short distance outside the +station, which was crowded by a long line of waggons with stores of all +kinds. A number of sailors were unloading shells for their guns, and a +crowd of Kaffirs, under the orders of military officers, were getting +out the stores. As they alighted, after hearty thanks to the officer +whose kindness had been the means of their getting forward so promptly, +and who now went to report his arrival to Captain Jones, who was +superintending the operations of the sailors, Chris and his party +hurried to the rear waggon. It was a work of considerable difficulty to +get the horses out, and could not have been accomplished had there not +been a stack of sleepers near the spot. A number of these were carried +and piled so as to make a sloping gangway, by which the horses were +brought down. The sleepers being returned to their places, Chris and his +friends mounted and rode to the camp, which was placed behind a long, +low ridge which screened it from the sight of the enemy on the opposite +hills, although within easy range of their heavy guns. + +Here before daybreak on the 12th, Major-general Barton's Fusilier +brigade, with a thousand Colonial Cavalry, three field batteries, and +the naval guns, had marched north, and were the following night joined +by another brigade with some cavalry. The next day the big naval guns +had opened fire; but although their shell had reached the lower +entrenchments of the Boers, their batteries on the hill had proved to be +beyond their range even with the greatest elevation that could be given +to them, while the Boer guns carried far beyond the camp. + +Chris had learned at Estcourt, where the train stopped a few minutes, +that Captain Brookfield's troop formed part of the Colonial Horse that +had advanced with General Barton's brigade, and they soon discovered +their position. Leaving the horses with the natives, they went to his +tent. + +"I am delighted to see you back," he exclaimed as they entered. "I heard +in confidence from one of your party, when they joined me a week back, +that you had gone on a mad-brained adventure to try and blow up the +Komati-poort bridge. I was horrified! I had, of course, given you leave +to act on your own responsibility, but I never dreamt of your +undertaking an expedition of that sort. Of course you found it +impossible to get there. A lad told me that you had reckoned on being +away six or seven weeks, and it is less than a month since the date on +which he told me you left. Anyhow, I heartily congratulate you on all +getting back." + +"We got there, sir, but nothing could be done with the bridge, it was so +safely guarded. However, we did blow up two big cannon and a battery of +small ones, some ten thousand rifles, and an enormous quantity of +ammunition." "You don't say so, Chris? Then you had better luck than you +deserved. One of the correspondents told me this morning that there was +news in the town by a telegram from Lorenzo Marques that there had been +an accidental explosion at Komati-poort, but it did not seem to be +anything serious. Tell me all about it." + +"I congratulate you most heartily," he said, when Chris had finished the +story. "Of course you have written a report of it?" "Here it is, sir. I +have made it very brief, merely saying that I had the honour to report +that, with Messrs. Peters, Brown, and Willesden, I succeeded in blowing +up, with two hundredweight of dynamite, the things I have mentioned to +you, destroying a large quantity of rolling stock, badly damaging five +locomotives, and destroying roads and sidings to such an extent that +traffic can hardly be resumed for a fortnight. Is the general here, +sir?" + +"No, but he will be here this afternoon. Now, I will not detain you from +your friends. No doubt they saw you ride in, and will be most anxious to +hear of your doings. You will hardly know them again. When they came up +to join us they adopted the uniform of the corps, feeling that it would +be uncomfortable going about in a large camp in civilian dress. They +brought with them uniforms for you all, for they seemed very certain +that you would return alive." + +"I am very glad of that, sir, for the soldiers all stared at us as we +came up here. I suppose they took us for sight-seers who had come up to +witness the battle." + +As they left the tent they found the rest of their party, gathered in a +group twenty yards away, and the heartiest greeting was exchanged. The +delight of the party knew no bounds when they found that their four +friends had not had their journey in vain. They had two tents between +them, and gathering in one of them they listened to Peters, who told the +story, as Chris said he had told it twice, and should probably have to +tell it again. The four lads at once exchanged their civilian clothes +for the uniforms that had been brought up. They were, like those of the +other Colonial corps, very simple, consisting of a loose jacket reaching +down to the hip, with turned-down collar and pockets, breeches of the +same light colour and material, loose to the knee and tighter below it; +knee boots, and felt hats looped up on one side. + +The first step when they were dressed was to mount an eminence some +distance in rear of the camp, whence they had a view of the whole +country. In front of them was a wide valley with a broad river running +through it. Beyond it rose steep hills, range behind range. It was +crossed by two bridges, that of the railway, which had been blown up and +destroyed, and the road bridge, which was still intact; though, as +Sankey, who had accompanied them, told them, it was known to be mined. +To the left of the line of railway was a hill known as Grobler's Kloof, +on the summit of which a line of heavy guns could be seen. There were +other batteries on slopes at its foot commanding the bridge, to the +right of which on another hill was Fort Wylie, and in a bend of the +river by the railway could be seen the white roof of the church tower of +Colenso. There was another battery behind this, and others still farther +to the right on Mount Hlangwane. Heavy guns could be seen on other hills +to the left of Grobler's Kloof; while far away behind Colenso was the +crest of Mount Bulwana, from which a cannonade was being directed upon +Ladysmith and an occasional white burst of smoke showed that the +garrison were replying successfully. On all the lower slopes of the +hills were lines, sometimes broken, sometimes connected, rising one +above another. These were the Boer entrenchments, and Cairns said that +he heard that they extended for nearly twenty miles both to the right +and left. + +"It is believed that we don't see anything like all of them," he went +on, "but we really don't know much about them, for the Boers only answer +occasionally from their great guns on the hilltops, and although +yesterday the sailors fired lyddite shells at these lower trenches, +there was no reply." + +"It is an awful place to take," Chris said, after examining the hills +for a quarter of an hour with his glasses. "We have seen that the Boers +are no good in the open, but I have no doubt they will hold their +entrenchments stubbornly, and it is certain that a great many of them +are good shots. I have gone over the ground at Laing's Nek, and that was +nothing at all in comparison to this position. Do you know how many +there are supposed to be of them, Cairns?" + +"They say that there are about twenty-five thousand of them, but no one +knows exactly. Natives get through pretty often from Ladysmith, but they +know no more there than we do here. They are all jolly and cheerful +there, in the thought that they will soon be relieved." + +"I hope that they are not counting their chickens before they are +hatched," Chris said. "I doubt very greatly whether we shall carry those +hills in front of us, and if we do the ranges behind are no doubt +fortified. How about crossing the river?" + +"There are several drifts. There is one about four miles to the left of +the bridge, called Bridle Drift. Waggon Drift is about as much farther +on. There is a drift just this side of where the Little Tugela runs into +it, and one just farther on; there is Skeete Drift and Molen Drift, with +a pontoon ferry; there is an important one called Potgieter's Drift, +where the road from Springfield to Ladysmith crosses; and another, +Trichardt's, where a road goes to Acton Homes. I know there are some to +the right, but I don't know their names." + +"Well, that is comforting, because even if we take Colenso there would +be no crossing if the bridge is mined. And as the town will be commanded +by a dozen batteries, we should not gain much by its capture. Well, I +tell you fairly that I am well satisfied that we belong to a mounted +corps and shall be only lookers-on, for even if we win we shall +certainly lose a tremendous lot of men. Is there no way of marching +round one way or the other?" + +"I believe not. The only way at all open seems to be round by Acton +Homes; that is a place about fifteen miles west of Ladysmith, and on the +principal road from Van Reenen's Pass. From there down to Ladysmith the +country is comparatively open, but it is a tremendously long way round. +I don't know how far, but I should say forty or fifty miles; and +certainly the road will in many places be commanded by Boer guns; and +they will most likely have fortified strong positions at various points. +But, of course, the great difficulty will be transport; I am sure we +have nothing like enough to take stores for the army all that distance. +Besides, Chris, I don't see that we should gain any advantage from going +to Ladysmith that way, we should be as far as ever from thrashing the +Boers, and certainly could not remain in Ladysmith; we should eat up all +the provisions there in no time." + +"I don't like the outlook at all," Peters said. + +"Ah, there is a general officer with a staff riding into the camp. Most +likely it is Buller. We had better go down, for if Brookfield gives in +my report he may want to speak to me." + +The party went down the hill. When they reached their camp they were at +once sent for to Captain Brookfield's tent. + +"I am glad that you are back," he said. "Sir Redvers Buller has just +ridden up on to the ridge, I will speak to him as he comes down. You had +better come with me and stand a short distance off. Bring your rifles +with you, and stand in military order; you three in line, and Chris two +paces in front of you." + +Having got their rifles they followed Captain Brookfield till he stopped +at the foot of the slope below the point where the general and his staff +were standing. Their leader advanced some fifty yards ahead of them. In +a quarter of an hour the party were seen descending the hill. Captain +Brookfield stepped forward and saluted the general as he came along a +horse's length in front of his staff. Sir Redvers checked his horse a +little impatiently. + +"What is it sir?" he said sharply. "I cannot attend to camp details +now." + +"I command the Maritzburg Scouts," Captain Brookfield said. "Three of my +men, with Mr. King, who commands the section to which they belong, have +just returned. I wish to hand you Mr. King's report; it contains news +which is, I think, of importance." + +"Give it to Lord Gerard," the general said briefly, motioning to one of +the officers behind him. "Please see what it is about, Gerard." And he +then moved forward again, briefly acknowledging Captain Brookfield's +salute. He had gone, however, but twenty yards when Lord Gerard rode up +to him and handed to him the open dispatch. + +"It is of importance, sir." + +Supposing that it was merely the report of four scouts who had gone out +reconnoitring, and with his mind absorbed with weightier matters, the +general had hardly given the matter a thought. Without checking his +horse he glanced at the paper, and then abruptly reined in his charger +and read it through attentively. Then he turned to where Captain +Brookfield was still standing and called him up. + +"I do not quite understand this report, sir," he said. "Is it possible +that your men have been up to Komati-poort? I gathered from your words +that they had merely returned from reconnoitring." + +"No, sir; they only came in this morning by the train from Durban with +the naval detachment with details." + +"But how in the world did they get to Komati-poort?" + +"They started from Maritzburg, sir, and rode up through Zululand and +Swaziland. Their object was to blow up the bridge, and to stop supplies +of munitions of war continuing to pass up through Lorenzo Marques. I may +say that they acted on their own initiative. The section to which they +belong is composed entirely of gentlemen's sons from Johannesburg; they +provide their horses and equipment, and draw no pay or rations, and when +they joined my corps made it a condition that so long as not required +for regular work they should be allowed to scout on their own account." + +Before calling up Captain Brookfield the general had handed back the +despatch to Lord Gerard, with the words, "Pass it round." + +"Are those your men?" the general said, pointing to the little squad. + +"Yes, sir." + +Sir Redvers rode up to them, and on returning their salute, said: "You +have done well indeed, gentlemen; it was a most gallant action. Have you +your own horse with you?" he asked Chris. + +"Yes, sir." "Then mount at once and join me as I leave camp. Then you +can tell me about this matter on my way back." + +Chris was soon on horseback. He waited at a short distance while the +general talked with General Barton, and as soon as he saw him turn to +ride off cantered up and joined the staff. The general looked round as +he did so. He beckoned to him to come up to his side. + +"Now, sir, let me hear more about this. The captain of the troop that +you belong to, tells me that you and twenty other young fellows, all +from Johannesburg, formed yourselves into a party of scouts, and are +making war at your own expense, and that although in a certain way you +joined his troop you really act independently when it so pleases you." + +"Yes, sir. We and our families have received great indignities from the +Boers; and although we are conscious that we should be of little use as +troops, we thought that we could do service as scouts on our own +account, and have been lucky in inflicting some blows on them. I was +fortunate enough to attract Colonel Yule's attention at Dundee, and he +furnished me with an open letter addressed to you, and to officers +commanding stations, saying that we had done so." + +"Have you it about you?" + +"Yes, sir." + +Sir Redvers held out his hand, and Chris handed him the letter. "So you +went into the Boer camp! Do you speak Dutch well?" + +"Yes, sir; we all speak Dutch fairly, and most of us Kaffir also, that +was why we thought that we should be more useful scouting; until now we +have all been dressed as young Boers, and could, I think, pass without +suspicion anywhere." + +"Now as to this other affair," Sir Redvers said, returning Colonel +Yule's letter. "You had better take this, it will be useful to you +another time. Now tell me all about it. Was it entirely your own idea?" + +"I first thought of it, sir, and my three friends agreed to go with me. +I did not want a large number. We started from Maritzburg with our own +Kaffir servant, and two Zulus and two Swazis to act as guides, two +ponies, each of which carried a hundredweight of dynamite; we had also a +spare riding horse." + +He then related their proceedings from the time of their start to their +arrival at Komati-poort; their failure at the bridge in consequence of +the strong guard that the Boers had set over it; and how, finding that +the main object of their journey could not be carried out, they +proceeded to wreck the station yard and its contents. + +"Thank you, Mr. King," the general said, when Chris concluded by +mentioning briefly how they had ridden down to Lorenzo Marques, and +taken a ship to Durban, and come up by train. "I saw the telegram of the +accident at Komati-poort. I imagined that it was probably more severe +than was stated, but certainly had no idea that such wholesale damage +had been effected, or that it was the work of any of our people. I think +that it would be unwise for me to take any public notice of it at +present; possibly there may be another attempt made to destroy that +bridge. If nothing more is said about it, the Boers may in time cease to +be careful, and a few determined men landed at Lorenzo Marques may +manage to succeed where you were unable to do so. It would be worth any +money to us to put a stop to the constant flow of arms and ammunition +that is going on via Lorenzo Marques. I consider your expedition to have +been in the highest degree praiseworthy, and to have been conducted with +great skill." "My father is a mining engineer, and managing-director of +several mines round Johannesburg, general. I have been working there +under him and learning the business, and therefore know a good deal +about dynamite, and what a certain quantity would effect." + +"Have you thought of going into the army? because if so, I will appoint +you and your three friends to regiments at once, and you will be +gazetted as soon as my report goes home." + +"I am very much obliged to you, general, but I have no thought of +entering the army. I will, of course, mention it to my friends. I have +never heard them say anything on the subject. We are fighting because we +hate the Boers. No one can say, unless he has been resident there, what +we have all had to put up with, for the past year especially. On the way +down the Boers not only threatened to strike us, but struck many of the +ladies, my mother among them, besides robbing everyone of watches and +all other valuables. If it had not been for that, some of us might have +changed our minds before we got down here. That settled the matter. And +besides, sir, I hope that we shall be able to do more good in our own +way than if we became regular officers, as we know nothing about drill +and should be of very little good, whereas we do understand our own way +of fighting. I can say so without boasting, for we have twice thrashed +the Boers; once when they were twice our number, and the other time when +they were nearly four times as strong as we were." + +"Go on doing so, Mr. King; go on doing so, you cannot do better. +However, if any of your three friends, or all of them, choose to accept +my offer, it is open to them." + +They were by this time close to Frere, and the general went on: "I am +sorry that I cannot ask you to dine with me this evening, as we shall +all be too busy for anything like a regular meal, for in a few hours +there will be a general advance. Good-evening. When I am less busy I +shall be glad to hear about those two fights that you speak of. You +colonists have taught us a few lessons already." + +Chris saluted, wheeled his horse round, and cantered back to Chieveley. +There was much satisfaction among the whole of the party when Chris +related what General Buller had said. None of his three companions had +any desire to accept a commission. Willesden's father was a doctor with +a large practice in Johannesburg, and the lad himself was going home +after the war was over to study for the profession and to take his +medical degree; while Brown and Peters were both sons of very wealthy +capitalists. + +"If I could not have done any fighting any other way I should have liked +a commission very much. Of course I could have thrown it up at the end +of the war. But I would a great deal rather be on horseback than on +foot, and I own I have no inclination to fight my way across those +hills. Talana was a pretty serious business, but it was child's play to +what this will be." + +"Very well," Chris said; "I did not think that any of you would care for +it, although I could not answer for you. There is no need for hurry in +sending in a reply; there will be time to do that when we get into +Ladysmith. Then I will get Captain Brookfield to draw up the kind of +letter that ought to be sent, for I have not the least idea how I should +address a commander-in-chief. Of course, a thing of this sort ought to +be done in a formal sort of way; I could not very well say, 'My dear +general, my three friends don't care to accept your kind offer. Yours +very truly.'" There was a general laugh, and then they talked over the +coming fight, for it was now generally known that the attack was to be +made in a couple of days at latest. The next morning General Buller's +column started before daybreak, and were by nine o'clock encamped on the +open veldt three miles north of Chieveley; Barton's brigade having +already marched out to the site of a new camp, some five thousand yards +south of Colenso. Although well within reach of their guns, the Boers +made no effort to hinder the operation, or to shell the camp after it +was formed. It was evidently their policy to conceal their guns until +the last moment, and although a very heavy bombardment of their +positions was maintained all day by the naval guns, no reply whatever +was elicited, though through the glasses it could be seen that much +damage was being done to the entrenchments. + +"I don't like this silence," Chris said, as he and some of the others +were standing watching the hills in front of them. "It does not seem +natural when you are being pelted like that not to shy something back. I +am afraid it will be a terribly hot business when they do open fire +tomorrow." + +There had been a discussion that morning whether the four natives Chris +had engaged for his expedition should be taken on permanently, and they +unanimously agreed that they should be. It was quite possible that all +the colonial corps would at some time be called upon to act as infantry, +and it would be a good thing to have six men to look after the twenty- +five horses while they were away. Then, too, it would be very handy to +have a stretcher party of their own. On the question being put to them, +the four men had willingly agreed to follow the party whenever they went +into a fight, to take two stretchers with which they could at once carry +any who might be wounded back to camp. They were all strong fellows +belonging to fighting peoples, and would, the boys had no doubt, show as +much courage as the Indian bearers had displayed at Dundee and +Elandslaagte. In the evening Captain Brookfield sent for Chris. + +"The orders for to-morrow are out," he said, "as far as we are +concerned. A thousand mounted infantry and one battery are to move in +the direction of Hlangwane--that is the hill, you know, this side of the +river to the right of Colenso. We shall cover the right flank of the +general movement and endeavour to take up a position on the hill, where +the battery will pepper the Boers on the kopjes north of the bridge. Two +mounted troops of three and five hundred men will cover the right and +left flanks respectively and protect the baggage. Half my troop are to +accompany Dundonald, the other half will form a part of the force +guarding the left wing. Your party will be with this force. You have had +your share of fighting, and none of the others have yet had a chance." + +"Very well, sir, I shall not be sorry to be on this duty; for naturally +we shall have a good view of the whole fight, while if we were engaged +we should see nothing except what was going on close to us." + +"Yes, it will be something to see, Chris, and something to hear, for I +doubt whether there has been so heavy a fire as that which will be kept +up to-morrow, ever since war began. We have some twenty-three thousand +men, and the Boers more than as many, and what with magazine-guns, +machine-guns, and fast-firing cannon of all sizes, it will be an +inferno." + + + + +CHAPTER XII + +THE BATTLE OF COLENSO + + +By daybreak next morning the whole force was under arms. General +Hildyard in the centre was to attack the iron bridge at Colenso. General +Hart's Irish brigade was to march towards Bridle Drift, and after +crossing to move along the left bank of the river towards the kopjes +north of the iron bridge. General Barton was to move forward east of the +railway towards Hlangwane Hill, and to support General Hildyard, or the +Colonial troops moving against that hill as might appear necessary, +while General Lyttleton's brigade, half-way between those of Hildyard +and Hart, were to be prepared to render assistance to either as might be +required. One division of the artillery was to follow Lyttleton's +brigade. The six naval guns were to advance on his right. The sixth +brigade were to aid General Hart, and three batteries of Royal Artillery +to move east of the railway, under cover of the sixth brigade, to a +point from which they could prepare the way for Hildyard's brigade to +cross the bridge. + +The action began before six o'clock, the naval guns opening with lyddite +on the trenches on Grobler's Hill, and those between it and Fort Wylie. +No reply whatever was made by the Boers, and the troopers standing by +their horses' heads in readiness to mount should any party of Boers make +a raid on the camp, began to wonder whether the enemy had not retreated. +Hildyard's men advanced in open order close to the railway; the Queen's +own, with the West York in support, on the right of the railway; and the +Devons, with East Surrey behind them, on the left. They marched as +steadily and in as perfect alignment as if on parade, eight paces apart. +Hart's Irish brigade, far away to the left, were in close order. The +cavalry could be seen proceeding at a trot towards Hlangwane, General +Barton's brigade still bearing to the east; and Colonel Long and Colonel +Hunt with their batteries, without waiting for their protection, +galloped straight forward, and, taking up a position almost facing Fort +Wylie, a few hundred yards beyond the river, opened a heavy fire; the +six naval guns, which were drawn by bullocks, being still a considerable +distance behind them. + +Still the Boer guns remained silent. But at half past six their musketry +opened suddenly upon the Queen's Own, the Devons, and the guns, in one +continuous roar. It came not only from the entrenchments on the face of +the hill, but from trenches close down by the river, and from the houses +of Colenso, from some railway huts, and from the bushes that fringed the +south bank of the river, which had been believed to be wholly +unoccupied. Five minutes later their cannon joined in the roar, with +machine-guns, one-pounder Maxims, and the great Creusots and Krupps. And +yet through this storm of lead and iron our soldiers went on quietly and +steadily. The very ground round them was torn up by bullet and ball. +Many fell, but there was no flinching; while on their right, Long's +batteries, though swept by a hail of missiles from unseen foes, +maintained a continuous fire at Fort Wylie. + +"It is awful!" Peters exclaimed as he lowered his glasses. "I thought it +would be dreadful, but I never dreamt of anything like this. Look at the +bodies dotting the ground our men are passing over, and yet the others +go on as if it was a shower of rain through which they were passing. I +can't look at it any longer." "It is as bad for the artillery," Chris +said, with his glasses still riveted upon them. "I saw a lot of the +horses go down before they were unlimbered, and I can see the men are +falling fast. Surely they can never have been meant to go within five or +six hundred yards of magazine rifles. I thought everyone had agreed that +artillery could not live within range of breech-loaders. Why doesn't +Barton's brigade move down towards them, and try and keep down the fire? +How is Hart getting on?" + +But it was not easy to see this even with glasses. They had not become +engaged until a little later than the others, but as they approached the +river an equally terrible fire opened upon them. Being in comparatively +close order, they suffered more heavily than Hildyard had done. +Presently they came upon a spruit which they took to be the main river, +and under a tremendous fire from the Mausers and guns, dashed across it, +and swinging round their left made for the drift, sweeping before them a +number of Boers who had been hidden in the long grass. Trenches were +there line after line, but over these the four regiments--the Connaught +Rangers, the Border regiment, the Inniskilling and Dublin Fusiliers-- +dashed forward with such fury that the Boers did not stop to meet their +bayonets. By a quarter-past seven the enemy had been driven across the +Tugela. Without hesitation the Irish dashed into the river. Many fell +headlong, for along the bottom barbed wires had been stretched. Worse +still, it was found that instead of being two feet deep, as was +expected, it was eight feet; for the Boers had erected a dyke across the +river a little lower down, and had dammed the water back. + +Some swam across with their rifles and ammunition, but it was a feat +beyond all except the strongest swimmers, and after maintaining +themselves for some time they were forced to retire. The naval guns did +their best to assist them, and silenced some of the Boer cannon that +were pounding them, but they failed to draw the Boer fire upon +themselves. It was only in the centre that even partial success was +gained. Hildyard's men had reached but not captured Colenso bridge. In +spite of the tremendous fire, some of the soldiers tried to make their +way along it, but were recalled; for they were deprived of the support +of the artillery that should have covered their passage, had no hope of +Hart bringing his brigade round to clear the enemy out from the kloofs +on the opposite side, and but little of aid from Lyttleton, who had been +obliged to move farther to the left to lend assistance to Hart. Some of +the Scottish Fusiliers had joined them from Barton's brigade, but the +brigade itself was far away. + +Terrible as the fighting was at all points, it was the batteries down by +the river that most engaged the attention of the anxious spectators. +Desperate attempts were being made to get the guns back. Almost all the +horses had been killed, but the drivers of the teams of the ammunition +waggons, the few survivors of the officers, and several of the general's +staff dashed recklessly forward under a hail of fire. Horse and man went +over, but two of the guns were carried off. Fortunately, the naval +battery and the third field battery had not been taken so far forward, +and were withdrawn with comparatively little loss; and the ten guns +stood alone and deserted by the last of the party as it seemed. Then, to +the surprise of the watchers, one of them spoke out, for four of the men +who worked it had stood to their charge to the last. Again and again it +sent its shrapnel among the Boer trenches. One fell and then another, +but two remained. They continued to fire until the last round of reserve +ammunition was finished. Then those who were near enough to make out +their figures saw them take their stand, one on each side of the gun, at +attention, until both fell dead by the side of the piece they had served +so well. Even on the right, where success might really have been hoped +for, everything had gone badly. The dismounted Colonials had fought +their way gallantly up the slopes of the Hlangwane, and nearly reached +the crest. But they were not seconded by Lord Dundonald's cavalry; +Barton's brigade, which was charged with aiding them, were kept at a +distance, and the Colonials were at last forced to fall back. + +Great as was the loss at other points, the failure to capture this hill +was really the greatest misfortune of the day. From its position on the +south of the river, and in a loop, batteries erected on its summit would +have taken all the Boer defences on the lower slopes of the hills in +flank, and it would have covered the crossing of the river at Colenso. +Cut off by the river from the rest of the Boer position it could hardly +have been retaken, and its fire would have searched the valley up which +the roadway ran almost as far as Mount Bulwana. + +Renewed attempts were made for some time to carry off the guns, but +early in the afternoon the general saw that it was but a waste of life +to persevere further, and orders were despatched for the troops to +retire. It had been a day of misfortunes, and yet a day of glory, for +never had the fighting power of British troops been more splendidly +exhibited, never were greater deeds of individual daring performed; +never had troops supported with heroic indifference so terrible a fire. +Undoubtedly the English general had greatly underrated the fighting +powers of the Boers and the amount of artillery to which he was exposed. +Had he not done so, he would scarcely have distributed his force over so +wide a face, or attacked at three points nearly four miles apart, but +would have prepared for the grand assault by seizing Hlangwane and +firmly establishing some of his batteries there, even at the cost of two +or three days' labour, and only attempted to cross the river when the +movement would have been covered by their fire. + +The Boers were quick in discovering the importance of the hill, and +speedily covered its face with such entrenchments, that not until after +long weeks of effort and failure was an attack again attempted against +it; and the success of that attack opened the way to Ladysmith. But had +the general's orders been carried out at all points it would probably +have been captured. Hart's brigade was to have begun the attack, but +owing to the map with which he was furnished being defective, his troops +losing their way in the spruit, and their being led in far too close a +formation under the enemy's fire, its attempt failed; this being, +however, largely due to the astuteness of the Boers in damming back the +river and rendering the ford impracticable. The impetuosity of the +officers commanding two of the batteries of artillery, in pushing their +guns forward unattended by infantry as ordered, not only caused the loss +of ten guns and of nearly all the men who worked them, but deprived +Hildyard's column of the protection they would have had in crossing the +bridge, and rendered the undertaking impossible; while the failure of +Barton's brigade to give assistance either to Hildyard or to the +assailants of Hlangwane, contributed to the one failure, and entirely +brought about the other. + +General Buller and General Clery had been wherever the shots were flying +the thickest. Three of the former's staff, Captains Schofield and +Congreve, and Lieutenant Roberts, son of Lord Roberts, had ridden +forward as volunteers to try and get the guns off. Roberts was fatally +wounded, Congreve was wounded and taken prisoner, and Schofield alone +escaped unharmed with the two guns that were saved. + +The day had been almost more terrible for the troops who remained +unoccupied near the baggage than for those actually engaged in the +terrible light. The latter, animated by excitement and anger at their +inability to get at the foe, had scarce time to think of their danger, +and even laughed and joked in the midst of the hail of bullets, but the +watchers had nothing to distract them during the long hours. With their +glasses they could plainly see that no advance had been made at any +point. To them it seemed incredible that any could come back from that +storm of fire. From time to time they learned from wounded men brought +up by the bearers, who fearlessly went down into the thick of the fire +to do their duty, news of how matters were going on in the front. + +Gladly, had they received orders to do so, would they have dashed down +to try and carry off the guns. Many shed tears of rage as they heard how +the Irish strove in vain to cross the deep river, and how many were +drowned in their attempts to swim it. They expected, when in the +afternoon the troops came in, that they would see an utterly dispirited +body of men, and were surprised when the Irish, who were the first to +return to camp, marched along smoking their pipes and joking as if they +had returned from a day of triumph rather than of failure. They were +animated by a knowledge that they had done all that men could do, had +proved they were worthy successors of their countrymen who had won glory +in so many hard-fought fields, and that no shadow of reproach could fall +upon them for their share in the day's work. Although they had suffered +far more heavily than the other brigade, they returned more cheerfully. +And yet there was no depression anywhere evinced, although there was +anger, fierce anger, that they had not been able to get at the enemy, +and a grim determination that next time they met, things should go +differently. + +A good many prisoners had been lost. Parties had spread along among the +bushes that lined the river, and maintained a steady fire against the +Boer entrenchments facing them. Some of these had not heard the bugle +sounding the retire. When they were aware what was being done some had +left their shelter and rushed across the open ground to join the +columns, the majority being shot down as they did so. Others had waited +among the bushes, intending to try after nightfall; but as soon as we +fell back the Boers had again crossed the river and spread along its +banks, and had thus made prisoners those who were in hiding there or in +the little dongas. Among those so captured were fourteen of the Devons +and as many gunners, with Colonel Hunt, Colonel Bullock, Major +MacWalter, and Captains Goodwin, Vigors, and Congreve; the total loss in +killed, wounded, and prisoners amounted to about one thousand five +hundred, of whom nearly half belonged to the Irish brigade. That evening +the searchlight, which had been placed on a lofty hill visible from one +end of the high kopjes held by the garrison of Ladysmith, flashed the +news that the attack had failed, and that the garrison must be prepared +to hold out for some time yet. + +The news of the reverse created a tremendous sensation throughout Natal, +where it had been confidently anticipated that the army would brush +aside without difficulty the opposition of the Boers, relieve Ladysmith +and, advancing sweep the invaders out of the colony. In England, too, +the sensation was scarcely less pronounced, and for the first time the +gravity of the war in which we were engaged was recognized. Hitherto it +had been thought that fifty thousand men would suffice to bring it to a +successful conclusion; now it was perceived that at least double that +number would be required. The offers of the colonies to aid the mother +country with troops had hitherto been coldly received, but these were +now accepted thankfully, and although our military authorities would not +as yet recognize that the volunteers could be relied upon as a real +fighting force, there was a talk that some of the militia regiments +might be embodied, and a large number of reservists were at once +summoned back to the ranks. + +At the front matters went on as before. It was now known how it was that +the guns had advanced so far. Colonel Long had sent forward some of his +mounted men with two officers. The Boers allowed them to approach the +river bank without firing a shot. One of the scouts actually rode across +the bridge to the other side, and returning to the battery they reported +that there were no Boers about, and it was only after receiving this +message that Colonel Long took the guns forward to within six hundred +yards of the river, and twelve hundred of Fort Wylie. + +The wounded were all taken to Frere or Estcourt, where hospitals had +been prepared. Hart and Lyttleton's brigades were sent back to Frere, +and the camp at Chieveley was moved nearer to the station, both for +convenience of supply, and because the position now taken up was a more +defensible one, and was less exposed to the fire of the big Boer guns; +large numbers of transport animals and waggons were brought up country. +It was known that a newly-landed division under General Sir Charles +Warren was now coming up, one regiment, the Somersets, arrived in camp +two or three days after the battle, and the loss of the cannon was to +some extent retrieved by the arrival of a 50-lbs. howitzer battery. + +It was but dull work in camp. The more impetuous spirits were longing to +be employed in annoying the Boers by frequent surprises at night; but as +these could have achieved no permanent advantage, and must have been +attended with considerable loss of life, Sir Redvers Buller set his face +against any such attacks, and went steadily on with his preparations. As +troops came up anticipations of a certain success when the next forward +movement was made were generally entertained. Chris and his companions +passed the time pleasantly enough. Being old friends they had plenty to +talk about, and occasional scouting expeditions to the east gave them a +certain amount of employment. Not having been engaged in the attack on +Hlangwane, they did not participate in the soreness felt by the rest of +the colonials at their failure to capture the hill, owing to the want of +support from Lord Dundonald's cavalry or Barton's brigade. + +The chagrin felt at the mistake that had been made in not making this +the prime object of attack was general, for the Boers could be seen +working unceasingly at their entrenchments. They had not only made a +ford by throwing great quantities of rock and stones into the channel, +but had also built a bridge, so that the force on the hill could be +speedily reinforced to any extent, and what could have been effected on +the day of the attack by half a battalion of infantry would now be a +very serious undertaking even by a whole division. + +The lads were chatting one day over the chances of the next fight, most +of them taking a very sanguine view. + +"What do you say, Chris?" one of them said after the discussion had gone +on for some time. "You have not given us your opinion." + +"My opinion does not agree with yours," Chris replied. "After what I saw +the other day, I think the difficulties of fighting our way over those +mountains are so enormous that I doubt whether we shall ever do it." + +There was a chorus of dissent. + +"Well, we shall see," he said. "I hope that we shall do it just as much +as you do, but it is tremendous business. I have no doubt Sir Redvers +will go on trying, but I should not be surprised if at heart he has +doubts that it can be done. The Boers have more guns that we have, and +any number of those Maxims and Hotchkiss that keep up a stream of balls. +The Boers' trenches enable them to fire at us without showing anything +but a head, except when they stand up or have to move across the open. +If we drive them out of one position they have others to fall back upon. +It is not one natural fortress that we have to take, but a dozen of +them. They know every foot of the country they occupy, while we know +nothing but just what we can see at a distance." + +"Well, if Sir Redvers thought as you do, why should he go on hammering +at it?" + +"For several reasons, Peters. In the first place, if Ladysmith saw that +there was no chance of rescue it would at last give in; and in the +second place, if there was an end of all attempts to relieve the place +England would go wild with indignation; and in the third place, and by +far the most important, Sir Redvers knows that he is keeping from +twenty-five thousand to thirty thousand of the Boers inactive here, and +so relieving the pressure on our troops on the other side. We know +regiments are arriving from England at the Cape every day. When they get +strong enough to invade the Orange Free State and take Bloemfontein, and +march north, the Boers here will be hurrying away to defend their homes. +Of course the Free Staters will go first, but the Transvaalers will have +to follow. We hear that Methuen has been beaten at Magersfontein, and +that he has been brought to a stand-still within the sound of the guns +round Kimberley, just as we are here, and that the Boers have a very +strong position there also. So at present the advance is as much checked +there as it is here. Gatacre has had a misfortune too, so that we are +all in the same boat. I saw a Pietermaritzburg paper in the naval camp +just now; there are about twenty thousand men on the sea at the present +moment, besides those in the colony, and two more divisions are being +formed. So it is safe to come right in the long run. But at present, if +those twenty-five thousand Boers opposite to us were not there now, they +would be riding all over Cape Colony, and if Buller were not to keep on +hammering away here a good many of them would be off at once. They say +Ladysmith can hold out for another three months. By that time there +ought to be such a big force in the Orange State that the Boers won't +dare to stop here any longer, and no end of loss of life will be +avoided. + +"I never thought that you were a croaker before," Field said, "except +just before the last fight; but certainly things have gone very badly +lately. Three disasters in seven or eight days are a facer; but I cannot +think that we shall not succeed next time. When Warren's division is up +Buller will have over thirty thousand men with him, in spite of our +losses the other day, and we ought to be able to do it with that." + +"Well, we shall see, Field. I hope you are right." + +The news of Methuen's repulse and the terrible losses in the Highland +brigade, and of Gatacre's disaster, cast a greater gloom over Buller's +army than their own failure had done. The one topic of conversation +among the officers was, what would be the feeling in England, and +whether there would be any inclination to patch up another dishonourable +peace like that after Majuba. But the feeling wore off as day after day +the news came that the misfortunes had but raised the spirit and +determination of the people of Great Britain to carry the war through to +the bitter end; that recruiting was going on with extraordinary +rapidity; that fresh regiments had been ordered out; that Lord Roberts +had been appointed to the supreme command in South Africa, and that Lord +Kitchener was coming out as chief of his staff. The fact, too, that the +volunteers had been asked to send companies to the regiments to which +they were attached, that the City had undertaken to raise a strong +battalion at its own expense, that the Yeomanry were to furnish ten +thousand men, and that public, spirit had risen to fever heat, soon +showed that these apprehensions were without foundation, and that +Britain was still true to herself, and was showing the same indomitable +spirit that had carried her through many periods of national depression, +and brought her out triumphant at the end. + +Christmas passed cheerily; no gun was fired on either side, although the +Boers worked diligently at their trenches; and our men feasted as they +had not done since they landed at Durban. Bacon, milk, fresh bread, +beef, and a quart of beer were served out for each man, and on these men +and officers made a memorable meal; the latter producing the last +bottles of wine and spirits that had been specially sent up to them from +Maritzburg. And on that and the following day there were sports--lemon- +cutting, tent pegging, races for the cavalry; athletic sports, tugs-of- +war, mule and donkey races for the infantry. The drums and fifes played +national airs, and the sailors bore their full share in the fun. As time +went on the preparations for the next move advanced. None were more +pleased at the prospect of active work again than the Colonial +Volunteers, who had several times entreated to be allowed to get out and +drive back the bands of plundering Boers, who were still wasting the +farms and destroying the farmhouses and furniture of the loyalists. + +On the 27th a small party of Captain Brookfield's scouts had been sent +out to reconnoitre the windings and turnings of the Tugela to the east, +to ascertain as far as possible what the Boer positions were on that +side, and whether they had placed bodies of skirmishers on the south +side of the river as they did opposite Fort Wylie. Included in the +party, which was a hundred strong, was the Johannesburg section. When +well away from the camp they were broken up into small parties, the +better to escape the observation of the Boers on the Hlangwane and other +heights. The instructions given by their commander were that they should +take every advantage of ground to conceal their movements from the +enemy, but where the ground near the river was level and fit for +galloping they should dash across it, and, if not fired at, should skirt +along the banks, mark if there were any tracks by which horses or cattle +had at some time come down to the water, and observe if similar tracks +were to be seen on the opposite bank, as this would show that, though +possibly only in dry weather, the river was fordable there. Where the +ground was too broken and rock-covered to permit of horses passing +rapidly across it, they were to dismount and crawl down the river to +make their observations. + +Only a small portion of the troop had been engaged on this work, the +main body were to keep along on the hills, maintaining a vigilant watch +over the country to the south and east as well as that around them, as +many parties of marauding Boers were known to be still across the river. +Knowing the sharpness of the lads, Captain Brookfield had told off their +section to explore the river bank, a choice which excited no jealousy +among the rest, as these were hoping for a brush with some wandering +party of Boers, and the satisfaction of rescuing cattle and goods they +might be carrying off. His instructions to Chris were that he was to +detach two of his party at each mile, choosing points where they could +best make their way to the river unobserved. As he himself with the main +body would go up considerably farther, each pair, when they had searched +their section, were to ride a mile or so back from the river and fall in +with the main body on its return. + +Riding rapidly along, Chris carried out his instructions, until, when +some twelve miles from the camp, he remained with only Sankey with him. +The country they had passed was rolling, and from time to time he had +caught sight of small parties of Captain Brookfield's scouts. Arriving +at a spot where there was a slight depression running down towards the +river, he said, "We may as well follow it, Sankey. It will deepen into a +donga presently, no doubt, and we can leave our horses there and go on +on foot. It looks to me as if this had been used as a path. Of course it +may only have been made by cattle going down to the water, but it may +lead to a drift. If it is, we must be all the more careful, for it is +just at these points that the Boers are very likely to be on the look- +out." + +They rode for some distance and then dismounted, knee-haltered their +horses and moved forward cautiously. Chris still believed they were on a +track, but the heavy rains of the week before had sent the water rushing +down it in a torrent, which would have destroyed any marks there might +have been. When they could see the opening to the river in front of them +they climbed the side of the donga. All seemed quiet, and stopping and +taking advantage of the bushes, they crept forward to the edge of the +water. There was no sign of a break in the opposite bank. + +"There is no drift here," Chris said. "If there had been there would be +a pass cut or worn down on the other side. Now let us push on, but don't +show yourself more than you can help, any Boer lurking on the other side +could hardly miss us. A hundred and fifty yards, I should say, is about +the width." + +After walking some little distance along they suddenly came upon another +break in the bank. + +"There is a break opposite, Sankey. Ten to one this is a drift. The +question is, how deep is it? You can see the river is not as high as it +was by four feet, and I dare say that it will be lower yet if we get +another week of fine weather. It's very important to find out. I will +try to ford it; it's hardly likely there are any Boers so far down, but +have your rifle ready, and keep a sharp look-out on the opposite side." + +A minute later they went down the slope. "Keep back under the shelter of +these bushes as soon as I go in, Sankey." Then he stepped into the water +and waded out. In a few yards it was up to his waist; then it deepened +slowly. He was a third of the distance across when two rifles cracked +out from some bushes on the opposite bank. Chris felt a sudden smart +pain in his ear. He instantly threw himself down in the water, and +diving, made for the shore, allowing the stream to take him down. +Swimming as hard and as long as he could, he came for a moment to the +surface, turning on his back before he did so, and only raising his +mouth and nose above water. He took a long breath and then sank again, +swimming this time towards the shore. His breath lasted until he was in +water too shallow to swim farther, and, leaping to his feet, he dashed +up the bank and threw himself down. He heard two bullets hum close to +him, but the Boers had not been looking in his direction, and only +caught sight of him in time to take a snap shot. He crawled along +through the high, coarse grass, feeling very anxious as to what had +become of Sankey. He had heard the report of the Boer rifles, but there +came no reply from his friend, who would assuredly have been lying in +shelter in readiness to shoot as soon as he saw a flash on the opposite +bank. Could he have forgotten to take cover the instant he himself +entered the water, could he possibly have remained standing there +watching him? Two shots had been fired: one had certainly hit his ear; +had the other been aimed at Sankey? He crawled along until he came to +the point where he could see down on to the road. To his horror Sankey +was lying there on his back. + + + + +CHAPTER XIII + +PRISONERS + + +The exclamation that burst from Chris's lips as he saw Sankey on the +ground was answered by another from his friend. + +"Thank God that you are there, Chris. I have been in an awful state +about you. I saw you go down into the water just as I was bowled over. I +made sure that you were killed, and I was in a state, as you may +imagine, till I heard two more shots. That gave me a little hope; for as +you had not been killed in the first, you might have escaped the +others." + +"But what is the matter with you, Sankey. Where are you hit?" + +"I am hit in the arm. I can't tell much about it. I only know that I +went slap down; and there is certainly something the matter with my +shoulder. Like an idiot I did not take shelter as you told me, but I was +watching you so anxiously I never thought about it. If I had not been a +fool I should have jumped up and got under cover at once; but I fancy I +must have knocked my head as I fell. At any rate, I did not think about +moving till I heard those two shots." + +"It is just as well that you didn't," Chris said. "They could have put +half a dozen bullets in you with their Mausers before you had moved a +foot. The question is, what is to be done?" + +"Have you got your rifle, Chris?" + +"Yes, I stuck to that, and I expect it is all right; these cartridges +are quite water-tight. The question is how to get you out of their line +of sight." "The best plan will be for me to roll over and over," Sankey +said. "I expect it will hurt a bit, but that is no odds." + +"No, no; don't do that yet. Let us think if we can't contrive some plan +of attracting their attention." + +"Don't do anything foolish, Chris," Sankey said earnestly. "I would +rather jump up and make a run for it than that anything should happen to +you." + +"I will be careful, Sankey. The first thing to do is to find out whether +there are only two of these fellows or half a dozen. Where I am lying +now the ground is a foot lower than it is just at the edge of the bank. +I will put my cap on my rifle and raise it so as just to show." + +The instant he did so three or four rifles cracked and two bullets +passed through the cap. As it dropped a shout of triumph rose from the +Boers. He at once crawled forward, and as he did so five of them ran +down the bank and as many more stood up, believing that both the scouts +had been killed. + +Throwing the magazine into play Chris fired three shots in close +succession, and then rolled over two or three yards, half a dozen +bullets cutting the grass at the spot he had just left. Peering +cautiously out again he saw that the Boers had all disappeared except +two, one of whom lay apparently dead just at the edge of the water; the +other was sitting down, but was waving a white handkerchief. + +"I am not going to shoot you," Chris muttered, "though I know the +fellows with you would put a bullet at once into Sankey if they thought +that he was alive. Hullo, there!" he shouted in Dutch; "I will let you +carry off your wounded man and the dead one if you will let me carry off +my dead comrade." The answer was three bullets, but he had drawn back a +yard or two before he spoke and was in shelter. The thought of firing +again at the wounded man did not enter Chris's mind, and he crawled back +to the spot where he had before spoken to Sankey. The latter was looking +anxiously up. + +"Are you all right?" he asked. + +"Yes." + +"Well, I wish you would not do it," Sankey said angrily. "If you do I +will get up, and they can either pot me or take me prisoner." + +"Don't be an ass, Sankey. I am going on all right. I have shot two of +them; there are about a dozen of them over there, I should say. Now let +us talk reasonably. Of course, if I was sure they would not cross, I +would make off to where the horses are, ride out, and meet Brookfield +and the others as they come back. The orders were that we were to join +them in about an hour and a half, which would give them time to go seven +or eight miles farther, and for us to do our work thoroughly. But I am +afraid that if I went away the Boers would presently guess I had done +so, and would come across and carry you off. But though it would be no +joke for you to be taken prisoner to Pretoria, it would be a good deal +better than for you to have two or three more rifle bullets in your +body, which I am sure you would have were you to move. So we must risk +it. Anyhow, I will stop for another hour. There will be plenty of time +then for me to make off and meet the others." + +Chris crept forward again and watched the opportunity. Half an hour +later he saw what he thought was a head appear, and at once fired, +rolling over as before the instant he had pulled the trigger. Three or +four shots answered his own almost instantly and there was a laugh that +told him that they had practised the same trick that he had done, and +had only raised a hat to draw his shot. Again there was silence for some +time. Then he went back and told Sankey that he was about to start. + +"All right, Chris; I shall be very glad when you have gone. You will get +hit sooner or later if you go on firing, and I shall be a great deal +more comfortable when you are once off. I don't believe they will +venture across the drift; they know how straight you shoot." + +Chris crawled back for some distance, and then got down into the road. +He had scarcely done so when a shot rung out fifty yards away. His right +leg gave way and he fell, and with a shout of triumph two Boers ran up +to him. Chris did not attempt to move. The rifle had flown from his hand +as he fell, and lay some five or six yards away. + +"I surrender," he said when they ran up to him. + +"Well, rooinek," they exclaimed, "you are a brave young fellow to make a +fight alone against a dozen of us. It would have been wiser if you had +gone away when you were lucky enough to get up the bank without being +hit. What was the use of staying by your dead comrade?" + +"He is not dead," Chris said. "He is hit in the arm or shoulder, but he +knew if he moved he would be hit again to a certainty." + +"But where are you hurt?" + +"In the calf of my leg." + +"It is lucky for you," the Boer said, "that I stumbled just as I fired. +Now, get up and I will carry you across the drift." + +They helped him up, and the other assisted him on to his shoulders. The +man's clothes were wet. + +[Illustration: "WITH A SHOUT OF TRIUMPH THE TWO BOERS RAN DOWN."] + +"Did you swim the river?" Chris asked. + +"No, there is a drift a mile lower down. It is a bad one, but we managed +to get across. We knew that you were alone, and as you seemed determined +to remain here, we made sure of getting you." + +As they came near to Sankey, Chris called out, "You can get up, Sankey; +they have beaten us." + +"I am very glad to hear your voice," Sankey replied as he raised himself +into a sitting position. "When I heard that shot behind me I made sure +it was all up with you. Where are you hit?" + +"Only in my calf. Luckily this gentleman who is carrying me stumbled +just as he fired, and I got the ball there instead of through my head. +It serves me right for not having thought before that some of them might +cross somewhere else and take us in rear. Well, it can't be helped; it +might have been a good deal worse." + +The other Boer had picked up the two rifles. They now entered the river. +The stream in the middle was breast-high, and the Boer with the rifles +told Sankey to hold on to him, which he was glad to do, for the force of +the stream almost took him off his feet. The other Boers had now left +their hiding-places, and received them when they reached the opposite +bank. The one who seemed to be their leader said not unkindly, "You have +given us a great deal of trouble, young fellows, and killed one of our +comrades and badly wounded another." + +"If you had left us alone we should have been very glad to have let you +alone," Chris said. + +The Boers laughed at the light-heartedness of their prisoner, and then +examined their wounds. Chris had, as he said, been hit in the calf. The +ball had entered behind, and had come out close to the bone. Chris +believed that he could walk, but thought it best to affect not to be +able to do so. The wound had bled very little, and the two holes were no +larger than would be made by an ordinary slate-pencil. Sankey had been +hit just below the shoulder. The ball had in his case also gone right +through, and from the position of the two holes it was evident that it +must have passed through the bone. The Boers bandaged the wounds, and +told them to lie down under the shade of a bush, and then took their +places near the bank to watch the drift again. + +"I suppose we have a journey to Pretoria before us," Sankey said. "I +don't care so much about myself, because that is only the fortune of +war, but I am awfully sorry that you are taken, Chris, and all through +my beastly folly in not taking shelter as you told me." + +"Oh, we may just as well be together, Sankey. Besides, I don't mean to +go to Pretoria, I can assure you. I believe I could walk now if I tried; +but you may be sure I don't mean to try. I should advise you to avoid +making any movement with your arm; make them put it in a sling. When +they start with us, we had better be sent up with wounded prisoners +rather than with the others. They won't look so sharply after the +wounded, and it will be very hard if we cannot manage to slip away +somehow. I hope the others will find the horses all right, or that if +they don't the horses will find their own way back." + +"Oh, they are safe to find them," Sankey said confidently. "There will +be a hunt for us when it is found that we have not joined the others. +Anyhow, they will search to-morrow. I am quite sure that some of our +fellows will be out the first thing in the morning, and I dare say they +will take a couple of the natives with them. If they start at the point +where we turned off they will track the horses down that donga without +any difficulty, and even if they have strayed away they will soon have +them." + +"Yes, I suppose they will be all right," Chris agreed. "Of course we +have got the spare horses, but we should miss our own, and I think they +are as fond of us as we are of them." + +As the sun got low two of the Boers brought up four ponies which were +grazing some little distance from the river. They lifted Chris on to +one, and helped Sankey to mount another, and then taking their seats on +the other horses, rode off at a walk, and arrived an hour and a half +later at a camp in a hollow behind Fort Wylie. Here they were put into a +large tent, where some thirty wounded prisoners were lying. A German +surgeon at once examined and again bandaged their wounds. + +"You are neither of you hurt badly," he said in English. "A fortnight +and you will have little to complain of. These Mauser bullets make very +slight wounds, except when they hit a vital spot. You are a good deal +better off than most of your comrades here." + +As it was now dark they lay down at once, after taking a basin of +excellent soup. The German ambulance was scrupulously clean. The more +serious cases were put in beds, those less severely wounded lay on the +ground between them; for the number of wounded to be dealt with was very +large, and in the tents in which the Boers were treated were many +terribly mangled by fragments of shrapnel and lyddite shells. The boys +were some time before they went off to sleep, for their wounds smarted a +good deal. However, they presently fell off, and it was broad daylight +when they woke. Chris lay where he was, while Sankey got up and went +round the tent. The men all belonged to either the Devon or the Queen's +Own regiment. Most of them were awake, and all asked anxiously for news +from Chieveley, and looked disappointed when they heard that it was +likely to be some time before a fresh attempt was made to relieve +Ladysmith. + +"They are all right there. Of course they were disappointed that we did +not get in, but they have provisions enough to last for some time yet." + +"The Boers don't seem to think so," one of the men said. "As they were +carrying us in here I heard one of them say that they had certainly got +Ladysmith now, for the provisions there were pretty nearly exhausted, +and in a few days they would have to surrender. If they did not, they +meant to carry it by assault." + +"I don't think they will do that," Sankey said confidently. + +"Not they," the soldier replied scornfully. "They will find that it is a +very different thing meeting our chaps in the open to what it is +squatting in a trench, and blazing away without giving us as much as a +sight of them. It is a beastly cowardly way of fighting, I calls it. I +was not hit till just the end of the day, and I had been blazing away +from six in the morning, and I never caught sight of one of them. I +should not have minded being hit if I could have bowled two or three of +them over first." + +After breakfast the surgeon said to the two lads: "You will be sent off +in half an hour; all the slight cases are to go on. There may be another +battle any day, and room must be made for a fresh batch of wounded." + +"Very well, sir," Chris replied, "as we have to go, it makes no +difference to us whether it is to-day or next week." + +"You are colonists, I suppose, as you have not the name of any regiment +on your shoulder-straps?" + +"Yes, sir; we belong to Johannesburg. I know your face. You are Dr. +Muller, are you not?" + +"Yes; I do not recognize you." + +"I am the son of Mr. King, sir; and my comrade is the son of Dr. +Sankey." + +"I know them both," the doctor said. "I am not one of those who think +that the Uitlanders have no grievances, and I am not here by my own +choice. But I was commandeered, and had no option in the matter. Well, I +am sorry for you lads. For though I believe that in the long run your +people will certainly win, I think it will be a good many months before +they are in Pretoria. They fight splendidly. I watched the battle until +the wounded began to come in, and the way those regiments by the railway +advanced under a fire that seemed as if nothing could live for a minute, +was marvellous. But brave as they are, they will never force their way +through these hills. They will never get to Ladysmith. Well, perhaps we +shall meet some day in Johannesburg again." + +"Yes, doctor. I suppose we shall be taken up in waggons?" + +"You will, for a time, certainly. But I don't know about your friend." + +"Oh, do order him to be sent up with me, doctor, that is, if it will not +hurt him too much. You see, his wound is really more serious than mine, +as the ball has gone through the bone." + +"Yes. I have a good many cases of that sort, but all seem to be healing +rapidly. However, I will strain a point and give instructions that he is +to be among those who must go in the waggons." + +"Thank you, sir," both boys said; and Sankey added: "We are great +friends, sir. Though I don't care for myself, it would be a great +comfort to us to be together, and my wound really hurts me a good deal." + +"I have no doubt it does," the surgeon said. "You can't expect a ball to +pass through muscle and bone without causing pain." + +Half an hour later some natives came into the tent, and under the +directions of the surgeon carried out Chris and three others whose +wounds were all comparatively slight, and placed them in a waggon which +already contained eight other wounded prisoners. Sankey, with his arm in +a sling, walked out and was lifted into the waggon, into which he could +indeed scarcely have climbed without assistance. Seven more were +collected at other tents, and the waggons then moved off and joined a +long line that were waiting on the road. Some more presently came up, +and when the number was complete, the native drivers cracked their whips +with reports like pistols, and the oxen got into motion. Some twenty +mounted Boers kept by the side of the waggons. They followed the road +until within four or five miles of Ladysmith, then turned off, crossed +the Klip river, and came to a spot where a hospital camp had been +erected; here they halted for the night. + +The wounded were provided with soup and bread, and such as were able to +walk were allowed to get out and stroll about. The surgeon who +accompanied the train and the doctor in charge of the hospital attended +to all the serious cases, and these were carried into the tent for the +night thus making room for the others to lie at length in the waggons. +Only three of these contained British wounded, the others were all +occupied by Boers. Chris and Sankey excited the admiration of the +wounded soldiers by conversing with the Boers and the natives in their +own languages. Most of the Boers, indeed, could speak English perfectly, +but did not now condescend to use it. Some even refused to speak in +Dutch to the lads, as their dislike to the colonists who had taken up +arms against them was even more bitter than that which they felt for the +soldiers. + +For six days they travelled on, at the end of that time Chris felt sure +that he could walk without difficulty. He had, at very considerable pain +to himself, each night undone his bandage, and had with his finger +scratched at the two tiny wounds until they were red and inflamed, so +that on the two occasions on which they were examined by the doctor, +they appeared to be making but little progress towards healing. The +inflammation was, however, only on the surface, and after several +furtive trials, Chris declared that he was ready for a start. A move was +generally made before daylight, in order that a considerable portion of +the day's journey should be got over before the heat became very great. + +"Are you quite sure, Chris?" + +"I am as sure as anybody can be who has not actually tried it. I may be +a little stiff at the start, but I believe that once off, I shall be +right for eight or ten miles; and after the first day, ought to be able +to do double that." + +They had been travelling at the rate of about twelve miles a day, and +halted that night near Newcastle. Chris heard from the guards that they +would only go as far as Volksrust, and there be put in a train. The +reason why this had not been done before was that the railway was fully +occupied in taking down ammunition and stores, and that no carriages or +trucks were available. The watch at night was always of the slightest +kind. The Boers had no thought whatever that any of the wounded would +try to escape. Two were posted at the leading waggon, which contained +stores and medical comforts that might, if unguarded, be looted by the +native drivers. The rest either slept wrapped up in their blankets, or +in any empty houses that might be near. + +At nine o'clock the boys told the others in the waggon that they were +going to escape. They had before informed them of their intention to do +so, somewhere along the road, and had taken down the names and regiments +of all of them, with a note as to their condition, and the addresses of +their friends. These they had promised to give to the commanding +officers if they got safely back. They had filled their pockets with +bread, all those in the waggon having contributed a portion of their +ration that evening. After a hearty shake of the hand all round, and +many low-muttered good wishes, they stepped out at the rear of the +waggon, with their boots in their hands. It was a light night, and the +figures of the two men on sentry over the store waggon could just be +made out. There was no thought of any regular sentry duty, no marching +up and down among the Boers; the two men had simply sat down together to +smoke their pipes and chat until their turn came to lie down. The lads +therefore struck off on the opposite side of the waggon, and making +their way with great caution to avoid running against any of the Boers, +they were soon far enough away to be able to put on their boots and walk +erect. + +"How does your leg feel, Chris?" "It feels stiffer than I expected, +certainly, but I have no doubt it will soon wear off. We must take it +quietly till it warms up a bit." + +Gradually the feeling of stiffness passed off, and going at a steady but +quiet pace they made their way along the road, to which they had +returned after they had gone far enough to be sure that they were beyond +the hearing of the Boers and Kaffirs. From time to time they stopped to +listen for the tread of horses, which could have been heard a long way +in the still night air, but they were neither met nor overtaken. After +walking for five hours they came upon a stream that, as they knew, +crossed the line at Ingagone station and ran into the Buffalo. They had +gone but ten miles, and decided to leave the road here, follow the +stream up half a mile, and then lie up. Chris admitted that he could not +go much farther, and as they would not cross another stream for some +distance they could not, even putting his wound aside, do better than +stop here. Sankey was equally contented to rest, for his arm, which he +still carried in a sling, was aching badly. + +"It does not feel sore," he said, "or inflamed, or anything of that +sort; it just aches as if I had got rheumatism in it. I dare say I shall +have that for some time; I have heard my father say that injuries to the +bones were often felt that way for years after they were apparently +well, the pain coming on with changes of weather. However, it is no +great odds." + +Neither wanted anything to eat, but had taken long draughts when they +first struck the stream, and as soon as they found a snug spot among +some bushes a short distance from the water they lay down and were soon +asleep. They remained quiet all the day, only going out once after a +careful look round to get a drink of water. Starting again as soon as +darkness closed in they walked on, with occasional rests, until within a +few miles of Glencoe, having followed the line of the railway, where +they had no chance whatever of meeting anyone. Here they again halted at +a stream. They had agreed that they would on the following night cross +the line between Glencoe and Dundee, and take the southern road by which +the British force retired after the battle there. By that route they +would be altogether out of the line of Boers coming from Utrecht or +Vryheid towards the Boer camps round Ladysmith. Their stock of food was, +however, now running very short, and they ate their last crust before +starting that evening. This they did earlier than usual, as they were +determined if possible to get some bread at Dundee. They knew that a few +of the residents had remained there, and probably there would not be +many Boers about, for as Dundee lay off the direct line from Ladysmith +to the north there would be no reason for their stopping there. Sankey +had insisted on undertaking this business alone. + +"It is of no use your talking, Chris," he said positively; "I can run +and you can't. I may not be able to run quite as fast as I could; but I +don't suppose this arm will make much difference, and anyhow, I could +swing it for a bit, and I would match myself against any Boer on foot. +We will cross the line, as we agreed, about a mile from Dundee. When we +strike the southern road you can sit down close to it, and I will go +in." + +"I don't like it," Chris said, "but I see that it would be the best +thing. I wish we had our farmer's suits with us, then I should not fear +at all." + +"I don't think that makes much odds, Chris, lots of the Boers have taken +to clothes of very much the same colour; really, the only noticeable +thing about us is our caps. If I come upon a loyalist I will see if I +can get a couple of hats for us, either of straw or felt would be all +right. Well, don't worry yourself; it will be a rum thing if I can't +bring you out something for breakfast and dinner to-morrow." + +"Don't forget a little bit extra for supper to-night, Sankey," Chris +laughed; "that crust went a very short distance, and I feel game for at +least a good-sized loaf." + +Although he said good-bye to his friend cheerfully, Chris felt more +down-hearted than he had done since he had said farewell to his mother +more than two months before, as Sankey disappeared in the darkness, +leaving him sitting among some bushes close to the road. His last words +had been, "It is somewhere about nine o'clock now; if I am not back by +twelve don't wait any longer. But don't worry about me; if I am caught, +I have no doubt sooner or later I shall give them the slip again, but I +don't think there is any real occasion for you to bother. Unless by some +unlucky fluke, I am safe to get through all right." Then with a wave of +his hand he started confidently along the road. + +He met no one until he was close to the town. The first thing he had +determined upon was to get hold of a hat somehow. The houses were +scattered irregularly about in the outskirts of the town; but very few +lights were to be seen in the windows. + +"Of course they have all been plundered," he said to himself; "but if I +only had a light I have no doubt I should be able to find an old hat +somewhere among the rubbish, but in the dark there is no chance +whatever." Presently he saw a light in a window in a detached house of +some size. He made his way noiselessly up and looked in. A party of five +or six Boers were sitting smoking round a table. "The place has not been +sacked," he said to himself; "therefore there is no doubt the owner is a +traitor. It is a beastly custom these Boers have of wearing their hats +indoors as well as out, still there are almost sure to be some spare +ones in the hall. A Boer out on the veldt would not be likely to possess +more than the hat he wears, but a fellow living in such a house as this +would be safe to have a variety for different sorts of weather. At any +rate I must try." + +He took off his boots, and then stole up to the front door and turned +the handle noiselessly. As he expected, no light was burning there, but +the door of the room in which the men were sitting was not quite closed, +and after he had stood still for a minute, his eyes, accustomed to the +greater darkness outside, took in his surroundings. To his great delight +he saw that four or five hats of different shapes and materials were +hanging there, and a heap of long warm coats were thrown together on a +bench. Looking round still more closely he saw five or six rifles in the +corner by the door, and to these were hanging as many bandoliers. He +first took down two felt hats of different sizes, and picked out two of +the coats; then, with great care to avoid any noise, he took two rifles +with their bandoliers from the corner and crept out through the door, +which he closed behind him carefully; for if they found it open the +Boers might look round and discover that some of their goods were +missing, whereas any one of them coming casually out, even with a light, +would not be likely to notice it. He put on one of the bandoliers, then +a coat, and then slung one of the rifles behind him; then, after putting +on his boots he went out with the other articles and hid them inside the +gate of an evidently deserted house a hundred yards from the other. He +felt sure that even when the loss was discovered there would be no great +search made for the thief. It would be supposed that some passing Kaffir +had come in and stolen the things, and they would consider that, until +the following morning, it would be useless to look for him. Feeling now +perfectly confident that he could pass unsuspected, he entered the +principal street. Here there were a good many Boers about, but none paid +the slightest attention to him. Presently he came to a store that was +still open. The owner was of course Dutch. He had been a pronounced +loyalist when Sankey was last in Dundee, but had evidently thought it +prudent to change sides when the British left. Sankey had been in the +shop twice with Willesden, and had found the man very civil, and, as he +thought, an honest fellow, but with so much at stake he dared not trust +him now. Food he must have, that was certain, but if he had to obtain it +by threats, he must do it at one of the outlying houses. It would be +dangerous anyhow, for, though he could frighten a man into giving him +what he required, he could not prevent him from giving the alarm +afterwards. While he was looking on a mounted Boer stopped at the shop +door. He dismounted at once, and lifted a large bundle from his saddle. + +"Look here!" he said to the shopkeeper. "I have just come into the town, +having ridden up from near Greytown. I picked up some loot at a house +that had been deserted. Here are twenty bottles of wine and a lot of +tea--I don't know how much. There was a chest half-full, and I emptied +it into a cloth. What will you give me for them? I am riding home to +Volksrust. I want three loaves and a couple of bottles of dop [Footnote: +The common country spirit.], and the rest in money." The bargaining +lasted for some minutes, the storekeeper saying that the wine was of no +use to him, for no Boer ever spent money on wine; the tea of course was +worth money, but he had now a large stock on hand, and could give but +little for it. However, the bargain was at last struck. The Boer brought +out the bread and two bottles of spirits and placed them in his saddle- +bag, then he went back into the shop to get the money. The moment he +entered Sankey moved quietly up to the other side of his horse, +transferred the bottles of spirits to his own pocket, and then, +thrusting the loaves under his coat, crossed the street, and turned down +a lane some twenty yards farther on. He had gone but a few steps when he +heard a loud exclamation followed by a torrent of Dutch oaths. He stood +up for a moment in a doorway, and heard the sound of heavy feet running +along the street he had left, with loud shouts to stop a thief who had +robbed him. The instant that he had passed Sankey walked on again, and +in five minutes was in the outskirts of the town. He made his way to the +place where he had hidden the other things, and taking them up, walked +briskly on until he came to the bushes where his friend was anxiously +expecting him. As he uttered his name Chris sprang out. + +"I had not even begun to expect you back, Sankey. How have you done? I +see that you have got on another hat and a coat." + +"That is only a part of it. I have got three loaves and two bottles of +dop, and a coat and a hat for you, and a rifle and ammunition, as well +as clothes for myself and the gun that you see over my shoulder." + +"But how on earth did you do it, Sankey?" + +"Honestly, my dear Chris, perfectly honestly. The rifles and clothes +were fairly spoils of war, the loaves and spirits were stolen from a +thief, which I consider to be a good action; but let us go on, I will +tell you about it as we walk. Here is your bandolier, slip that on +first; there is your coat and hat. Now I will put the sling of the rifle +over your shoulder. There you are, complete, a Boer of the first water! +I will carry the bottles and the bread. Now, let's be going on." + +Then he told Chris how he had obtained his spoil, and they both had a +hearty laugh over the thought of the enraged Dutchman rushing down the +street shouting for the eatables of which he had been bereaved. + +"It was splendidly managed, Sankey. I shall have to appoint you as +caterer instead of Willesden. He pays honestly for all he wants for the +mess, but I see that if we entrust the charge to you, we shall not have +to draw for a farthing upon our treasure chest. And how is your arm +feeling?" + +"I have almost forgotten that I have an arm," Sankey said. "I suppose +the excitement of the thing drove out the rheumatics." + +"We might have some supper," Chris suggested. + +"No, no, we must wait till we can get water. I can't take dop neat." + +"But how are you going to mix it when you do get water?" "I had not +thought of that, Chris," Sankey said in a tone of disgust. "Well, I +suppose we shall be reduced to taking a mouthful of this poison, and +then a long drink of water to dilute it. We shall not have very far to +go, because, if you remember, we crossed a little stream three or four +miles after we rode out from Dundee. I am as hungry as a hunter, but it +would destroy all the pleasure of the banquet if we had to munch dry +bread with nothing to wash it down." After walking two miles farther +they came upon the stream and going fifty yards up it, so as to run no +risk of being disturbed, they sat down and enjoyed a hearty meal. + + + + +CHAPTER XIV + +SPION KOP + + +"It is almost a pity that you did not commandeer two ponies and saddles +while you were about it," Chris laughed, as they set off again feeling +all the better for their meal. "We only want that to complete our +outfit." + +"You should have mentioned it before I started, Chris. There is no +saying what I might not have done; and really, without joking, a pony is +one of the easiest things going to steal when there are Boers about. +They always leave them standing just where they dismount, and will be in +a store or a drinking-place for an hour at a time without attending to +them." + +"It is not the difficulty, but the risk; for even if a thief gets off +with a pony, he is almost sure to be hunted down. It is regarded as a +sort of offence against the community, and a man, whether a native or a +mean white, would get a very short shrift if he were caught on a stolen +horse." + +"Yes, I know. Still, for all that, if I could come upon a saddled pony, +and there was a chance of getting off with it, I should take it without +hesitation as a fair spoil of war." + +"Yes, so should I, for the betting would be very strongly against our +running across its owner; and in the next place, it would greatly +increase our chance of getting safely through. It is the fact of our +being on foot that will attract attention. We could walk about a camp +full of Boers without anyone noticing it, but to walk into the camp +would seem so extraordinary, that we should be questioned at once. A +Boer travelling across the country on foot would be a sight hitherto +unknown." + +"There I agree with you; and I do think that when we get to Helpmakaar, +which we can do to-morrow evening if we make a good long march to-night, +we had better see if we can't appropriate a couple of ponies. We can +walk boldly into the place, and no one would notice we were new-comers. +There are sure to be ponies standing about, and it will be hard if we +cannot bag a couple. Then we can ride by the road south from there to +Greytown, and after crossing the Tugela, strike off by the place where +we had the fight near Umbala mountain, which would be a good landmark +for us, and from there follow our old line back to Estcourt. It would be +rather shorter to go through Weenen, but there may be Boers about, and +the few miles we should save would not be worth the risk." + +They made a long journey that night, slept within seven or eight miles +of Helpmakaar, and started late in the afternoon. When near the town +they left the main road, passed through some fields, and came into the +place that way, as had they entered by the road they were likely to be +questioned. Once in the little town, they walked about at their ease. It +did not seem that there were any great number of Boers there, but the +town was well within the district held by them, and such loyalists as +remained were sure to be keeping as much as possible without their +houses. In front of the principal inn were nearly a score of Boer +ponies, but the lads considered it would be altogether too risky to +attempt to take a couple of these, as their owners might issue out while +they were doing it; however, they stood watching. For some time there +was a sound of singing and merriment within, and for a quarter of an +hour no one came out. + +"If we had taken a couple of ponies at first," Sankey said savagely, "we +might have been two miles away by this time." + +"Yes; I don't know that it is too late now. Wait till they strike up +another song with a chorus, none of them are likely to leave the room +while that is going on, and it will drown the sound of hoofs." + +There were few people about in the streets; and even had anyone passed +as they were mounting, he could not tell that they were not the +legitimate owners. + +"If anyone should come out," Chris said, "don't try to ride away. We +should have the whole lot after us in a minute, and it is not likely we +should have got hold of the fastest ponies. Besides, they would shoot us +before we got far. So if anyone does come out and raises an alarm, jump +off at once and run round the nearest corner, and then into the first +garden we come to. We should be in one before they could come out, mount +their ponies, and give chase. Once among the gardens we should be safe. +If the man who comes out does not shout we would pay no attention to +him, but ride away quietly. If the ponies don't happen to belong to him +or some friend of his, he would not be likely to interfere, for he would +suppose that we were two of the party who had left the place without his +noticing them. But if he gives a shout, jump off at once, and rush round +the corner of the nearest house." + +They waited for a minute or two, and then two Boers came out, mounted a +couple of the ponies, and rode quietly down the street. At that moment +another song was struck up. "That is lucky. If anyone comes out and sees +us mounting he will take us for the two men who have just ridden off." +Then they strolled leisurely across the street, took the reins of two of +the ponies, sprang into the saddles, and started at a walk, which, +twenty yards farther, was quickened into a trot. The two men had +fortunately gone in the other direction. Once fairly beyond the town, +they quickened their pace. "Now we are Boers all over," Chris said +exultantly; "but there is one thing, Sankey, we must be careful not to +go near any solitary farmhouse. There must still be some loyal men left +in these parts, and if we fell in with a small party of them the +temptation to pay off what they have suffered might be irresistible." + +"Yes, Chris; but they certainly would not shoot unless certain of +bringing us both down, for if one escaped, he would return with a party +strong enough to wipe them out altogether. However, we need not trouble +about that for the present, though no doubt it will be well to be +careful when we are once across the Tugela." + +"Well, we shall be there long before morning; it is not more than seven- +or eight-and-twenty miles." + +They rode fast, for it was possible that when the loss of the ponies was +discovered someone who might have noticed them go down the street might +set the Boers on the track, and in that case they would certainly be +hotly pursued. The ponies, however, turned out to be good animals, and +as the lads were at least a couple of stones lighter than the average +Boer, they could not be overtaken unless some of the ponies happened to +be a good deal better than these. + +After riding at full speed for eight or nine miles, they broke into a +walk, stopping every few minutes to listen. They knew that they would be +able to hear the sound of pursuit at least a mile away, and as their +ponies would start fresh again, they were able to take things quietly. +So sometimes cantering sometimes walking, they reached the river at +about one o'clock in the morning. On the opposite bank stood the little +village of Tugela Ferry. Here there was a drift, and there was no +occasion to use the ferry-boat except when the river was swollen by +rain. It now reached only just up to the ponies' bellies; they therefore +crossed without the least difficulty, and after passing through the +village, left the road, and struck off across the country to the south- +west. When four or five miles away they halted at a donga, and leading +the ponies down, turned them loose to feed, ate their supper, and were +soon asleep. + +It was no longer necessary to travel by night, and at eight o'clock they +started again. They kept a sharp look-out from every eminence, and once +or twice saw parties of mounted men in the distance and made detours to +avoid them. So far as they were aware, however, they were not observed. +The distance to be ridden from their last halting-place was about +thirty-five miles, and at one o'clock they were within five miles of +Estcourt. On an eminence about a mile in front of them they saw a +solitary horseman. + +"That is evidently one of our scouts," Chris said. "I dare say there is +a party of them somewhere behind him. If I am not mistaken I can see two +or three heads against the sky-line--they are either heads or stones. We +should know more about it if the Boers hadn't bagged our glasses when +they took us." + +Two or three minutes later Sankey said, "Those little black spots have +gone, so they were heads. I dare say they are wondering who we are, and +put us down either as Boers or as loyal farmers, though there cannot be +many of them left in this district." + +Presently from behind the foot of the hill six horsemen dashed out. The +lads had already taken the precaution of taking off their hats and +putting on forage-caps again. + +"It is always better to avoid accidents," Chris said. "It would have +been awkward if they had begun to shoot before waiting to ask questions, +especially as we could not shoot back. They are Colonials; one can see +that by their looped-up hats, which are a good deal more becoming than +those hideous khaki helmets of our men." + +The horsemen had unslung their guns, but seeing that the strangers had +their rifles still slung behind them with apparently no intention of +firing, they dropped into a canter until they met the lads. + +"Who are you?" the leader asked. "Do you surrender?" + +"We will surrender if you want us to," Chris said; "though why we should +do so I don't know. We belong to the Maritzburg Scouts, and were taken +prisoners, being both wounded, eight or nine days ago; and, as you see, +we have got away." + +"I dare say it is all right," the officer said; "but at any rate we will +ride with you to Estcourt." + +"We shall be glad of your company, though I don't suppose we shall be +identified until we get to Chieveley. Will you please tell us what has +taken place since we left?" + +"That, I think had better be deferred," the officer said dryly. "We +don't tell our news to strangers." + +"Quite right, sir." + +"It is evident that you are not Dutch," the officer went on; but there +is more than one renegade Englishman fighting among the Boers, and +except for your caps you certainly look as if you belonged to the other +side rather than to ours." + +"Yes, they are Boer coats, Boer ponies, and Boer guns," Chris said. "We +have taken the liberty of borrowing them as they borrowed our guns and +field-glasses. Whether they borrowed our horses we shall not know till +we get back. You see," he went on, opening his coat, "we still have our +uniforms underneath. Who is at Estcourt now? Ah, by the way, we are sure +to find some officers in the hospital who know us." + +The officer by this time began to feel that the account Chris had given +him of himself was correct, and when they arrived at Estcourt it was +rather as a matter of form than anything else that he accompanied him to +the hospital. Upon enquiry Chris found that among the wounded there was +one of the naval officers he had travelled with from Durban. Upon the +surgeon in charge being told that he wished to see him, he was allowed +to enter with the officer. The wounded man at once recognized him. + +"Ah, King," he said, "I am glad to see you again. Have you brought me +down a message from Captain Jones or any of our fellows?" + +"No; I am very sorry to find you here, Devereux, but I am glad to see +you are getting better. I have really come in order that you might +satisfy this gentleman, who has taken me prisoner, that I am King of the +Maritzburg Scouts." + +"There is no doubt about that. Why, where have you been to be taken +prisoner?" + +"Oh, it was a fair capture. I was with one of my section caught while +out scouting, and have got away in Boer attire, and as we were riding in +we met this officer's party some five miles out, and not unnaturally +they took us for the real thing instead of masqueraders." + +[Illustration: "PRESENTLY FROM BEHIND THE FOOT OF THE HILL SIX HORSEMEN +DASHED OUT."] + +"I can assure you that King is all right," the sailor said. "He came up +in the train with three of his party from Durban." + +"Thank you," the officer said with a smile. "I am perfectly satisfied, +and was nearly so before I came in here. Well, I wish you good-day, sir, +and hope we may meet again," and shaking hands with Chris he left the +tent. + +Chris remained chatting for a few minutes more with the sailor. + +"I suppose there is no great chance of getting a bed here?" he said, as +he rose to go. "We have had two pretty long days' ride, and I don't care +about going on to Chieveley." + +"Not a chance in the world, I should think." + +"Well, it does not matter much. We have been sleeping in the open for +the past five nights, and once more will make no difference. We are just +back in time, Sankey," he said when he joined his friend outside. +"Devereux tells me that there is a big movement going on, and that a +severe fight is expected in a day or two. He hears that the baggage +train has been moving to Springfield, so that it will be somewhere over +in that direction; and I suppose we are going to move round to Acton +Homes and force our way into Ladysmith through Dewdrop. You know, they +say that it is comparatively flat that way." + +They got rid of their long coats and fastened them to their saddles; +then led their ponies to the station, and leaving them outside entered. +An enterprising store-keeper had opened a refreshment stall for the +benefit of the troops passing through, or officers coming down from the +front to look after stores or to visit friends in hospital. Chris had +explained their position to Devereux, and the latter had said: "Then I +suppose they have eased you of all your money?" + +"Yes; they did not leave us a penny." + +"There is my purse with my watch in that little pocket over my bed," he +said. "You must let me lend you a sovereign till I see you again." And +Chris had thankfully taken the money. + +They now had what to them was a gorgeous feast; some soup, cold ham, and +a bottle of wine. They gave what little remains they had of bread to the +ponies, and then led them a quarter of a mile out of the town and camped +out with them there, the Boer coats coming in very useful. The next +morning they started at daybreak, and arrived at their camp at Chieveley +just as their friends were sitting down to breakfast. They were received +with a shout of welcome, and a torrent of questions was poured upon +them. + +"I will leave Sankey to tell you all about it," Chris said. "I must go +and report myself to Brookfield and get our names struck off the list of +missing. I shall not be five minutes away." + +The captain received Chris as heartily, though not so noisily, as his +comrades had done. + +"We have been very anxious about you," he said, after the first +greeting. "When we came back to the point where you left us, and did not +find you there, we thought there might be some mistake, and that you had +ridden on. We picked up all the others, but were not uneasy until we got +into camp, and found that you did not return. Then two of your friends +took fresh horses and rode out again, taking two of your blacks with +them. The blacks found the place where you had left us, and following +your tracks down came on your horses. Then they went on till they saw +the river in front of them. The blacks traced your footsteps along near +the bank till they came to a spot where there was evidently a drift, as +a road was cut down to the water on both sides. They then crawled along +till they could look down into the road. They were some time away, and +returned with the news that they had seen below them on the road a patch +of blood and the mark of a body in the mud, another step they said had +gone down to the water, and had not come back. Crawling along by the +edge of the bank they found some empty cartridges. They said whoever had +been up there had crawled once or twice to the edge above the sunken +road where the other was lying, and that he had then gone back from the +river and afterwards down into the road. A little farther there seemed +to have been a fall, and then two men with big feet came to the spot, +and, they asserted, carried the one who had fallen there down to the +other; but they could not see what had happened then, for it was evident +that the Boers were in force on the other side of the river, and they +dared not go down farther to examine the tracks. Enough had been seen, +however, to show that you must both have been wounded. It was pretty +certain that you had not been killed, for if so the Boers would not have +troubled to carry your bodies across the drift. Now, Chris, let us hear +your story." + +"If you don't mind, Captain Brookfield," Chris said with a smile, "I +will put off telling it for another half-hour. The fact is, breakfast is +ready, and I have only had one square meal since I went away, and that +was yesterday at Estcourt." + +"Go, by all means," the captain laughed. "I breakfasted half an hour +before you came in, and forgot that it was possible that you had not +done so." It was a full half-hour before Chris returned, and when he did +so he left Sankey still telling the story of their adventures, which had +made very little progress, as he had declared that he could not enjoy +his breakfast if he was obliged to keep on talking all the time. When +Chris, on his part, had told the story to Captain Brookfield, the latter +said: + +"I can't say that I am altogether surprised to see you back, though I +certainly did not expect you for a long time, for I felt sure that if +you and Sankey were not seriously wounded you would manage to give them +the slip before you got to Pretoria; and I thought we should hear the +first news of you at Durban, for it would be shorter and easier for you +to make your way down again to Lorenzo Marques than to follow this +line." + +"We should certainly have gone that way if we had not escaped until we +were near Pretoria, but it was a great deal easier to slip away from the +waggons than it would have been if we had been once put into the train. +I hope, sir, we have not been returned as missing, for it will have +frightened our mothers terribly if we have been." + +"No; I thought that there was no occasion to give your names until you +had been away for a month. If you were not heard of by that time, I +should consider it certain that you were dead or at Pretoria. I knew +that, as you say, it would be a terrible shock to your mothers if they +were to see your names among the missing; while it could do no harm to +anyone if I kept it back for a month, and put you down as missing the +first time after the corps were engaged. Well, you are just back in time +for a big fight, though we are not likely to take any part in it. It is +supposed to be a secret as to the precise position, but orders have been +privately circulated this morning. Dundonald with the regular cavalry, +the Natal Horse, and the South African Light Horse went on four days +ago, with one or two other colonial corps, and occupied Springfield, and +the baggage train followed them; and after occupying the place, instead +of waiting for infantry to come up, he moved on to a river. Some of his +men, with extraordinary pluck, swam across and managed to bring the +ferry-boat over under a very heavy fire. Then a number of them crossed, +scattered the Boers like chaff, and took possession of a rough hill +called Swartz Kop, and held it till support came up. It was a capitally +managed affair, and one cannot but regret that the same care was not +shown at Hlangwane. We are to go on this afternoon, but as we are not in +Dundonald's brigade I expect that our duty will be, as it was in the +last fight, to guard the baggage." + +"But what will Dundonald's brigade do?" + +"The general opinion is, that they will push round to Acton Homes. I am +not sure that the whole force is not going that way. It would be a grand +thing if it could be done; but I doubt whether the train could carry +enough stores, for it would be a long way round, and we should probably +have to fight two or three times at least, and it might take us five or +six days." + +"Then most of the infantry have gone on already?" + +"Yes, Hart's and Hildyard's brigades have marched straight from Frere. +By the way, did you hear of the Boer attack on Ladysmith on the night of +the 6th?" + +"No; that was the night we were at Glencoe. On our way up we did hear +some very heavy firing. At least, we were not certain that it was +firing, and rather thought it was a distant thunder-storm." + +"The firing began at two o'clock in the morning," Captain Brookfield +said, "and was so heavy that everyone turned out. It lasted four hours, +and there was no doubt that the Boers were making a determined attack. +Everyone wondered that we did not at once make a diversion. When the day +broke it could be seen that numbers of mounted Boers were hurrying off +from their camps among the hills towards Ladysmith, but it was not until +two in the afternoon that five battalions of infantry marched down +towards Colenso, and the naval guns opened in earnest on their lines. It +had the effect of bringing the Boers scurrying down again to their +trenches. Our fellows marched in open order and worked their way nearly +down to Colenso, which was more strongly garrisoned than it had been at +the time of our last attack. No doubt they had seen us preparing to +advance, and strongly reinforced the garrison. Our guns were taken a +long way down, and at six o'clock their trenches were bombarded; then it +came on to rain, and the Boers ceased to fire, and at seven o'clock our +men turned into camp. The firing in Ladysmith had ceased some time +before that." + +"And what had taken place there?" Chris asked anxiously, "for I know the +place has not fallen or we should have heard of it." + +"No, they beat the Boers off splendidly. However, they had hard work to +do it, for the heliograph flashed a signal at about nine o'clock in the +morning to say that they had so far beaten off the enemy, but were much +pressed. We heard the next day that this had indeed been the case. +Caesar's Camp had been taken and retaken several times--by our men at +the point of the bayonet, by the Boers, by rushing up in overwhelming +numbers. It is said that we have twelve hundred casualties, and the +Boers at least fifteen hundred, of whom a large number were bayoneted. +They say the loss fell chiefly upon the Free Staters, who were put in +the front by the Transvaal people. They fought pluckily, and several of +their commanders were among the killed. I should think that they would +hardly try it again. A native got through two days afterwards with a +despatch. We have not heard what it contained, but we fancy from what +has leaked out that our defences were very weak." + +"We ought to take a lesson from the Boers," Chris said. "I saw something +of their trenches as we went up the railway valley, and they are +wonderful." + +"Yes, we must do the Boers the justice to say that they are not afraid +of hard work. Ever since they first came here they have been at work +everywhere every day in the week, including Sundays. Of course, as we +are not standing on the defensive, there is no occasion for us to +construct works to the same extent; but I cannot myself understand why +we do not throw up batteries for our guns, pushing forward zigzags every +night, and advancing the batteries until we can plant all our naval and +field guns within a hundred yards of Colenso, when we should be able to +smash their entrenchments in no time, and effectually cover an advance +across the bridge or one of the drifts. When I was in the army it was +always said that the next war would be fought with the spade as much as +with the rifle, but so far we have seen nothing whatever of the spade, +except just by the guns. We were also taught that strong positions held +by steady troops armed with magazine guns and supported by good +artillery were absolutely impregnable against direct attack. I grant +that Dundee and Elandslaagte, and Belmont and Enslin on the other side, +seemed to contradict that idea, but our experience here is all the other +way; and if we keep on knocking our heads against those hills I suppose +the axiom is likely to be finally confirmed." + +"Then you don't think that we are going to fight our way into Ladysmith, +Captain Brookfield?" + +"Not direct into Ladysmith. Possibly we may work our way round; but +after what we saw of the fire from their position, trench above trench, +and miles upon miles in length, my own conviction is, that allowing to +the utmost for the gallantry and devotion of our men, we shall never win +our way across those hills." + +"Then we move off at two o'clock, sir?" + +"Yes, fresh batches of waggons are going on, and we are to escort them, +and if we reach Springfield by to-morrow night we may think ourselves +lucky, for some of the officers who went with the first lot have come +back, and say that the roads are simply awful--there are dongas to be +passed where the waggons sink up to their axles--and that at one point +ninety oxen were fastened to a single waggon and could not pull it out +from a hole in which it was sunk, and there it would be now if one of +the Woolwich traction engines hadn't got hold of it and drawn it out. +They are doing splendid work, and if the War Office authorities can but +take a lesson to heart, the next war we go into we shall have five +hundred of them and not a single transport animal. They would cost +money, no doubt, but they would eat nothing and drink nothing; they +would only require to be oiled and cleaned occasionally to keep them in +order, and when they were wanted they would do the work without our +having to hunt the world over for transport animals. They would save +their cost in one war; there would be a thousand drivers and stokers +instead of twenty thousand camp followers; it would not matter whether +the country was burnt up dry or deep in grass, they would drag their +fuel with them; and would save the artillery horses by dragging the guns +till they were in the neighbourhood of an enemy. It might not look so +pretty or picturesque as the present system, but it would be enormously +more useful, and in the long run vastly more economical. I should like +to see Kitchener put at the War Office with authority to sweep it out; +Hercules in the Augean stable would be nothing to it." + +Chris laughed at the earnestness and vehemence with which the commander +spoke. + +He went on. "I am an old army man, and have been as staunch a believer +in army traditions as any man, but I tell you fairly that I am disgusted +at the amount of routine work, delay, and, if I may use the word, +priggism, that I see going on. I am not surprised that the Colonials to +a man are convinced that they would manage matters infinitely better if +they were left to themselves. They would harass the Boers night and day, +sweep their plundering parties out of the land, make a circuit no matter +how far into Zululand, and come down behind and cut the line of railway, +and blow up the bridges, and worry them out of the colony. I don't say +they would succeed, but I am sure they would try, and I believe firmly +that five thousand mounted Colonials fighting in their own way would +relieve Ladysmith and clear Natal sooner than we with thirty thousand +shall do. I am not saying that they would succeed in a Continental war, +though they would certainly harass and bother any regular force four +times their own strength. To succeed they would require guns and a +greater degree of discipline than they have got, but such a force would +be absolutely invaluable as an assistant to a regular army. Don't repeat +what I say, Chris; there is a good deal of soreness of feeling on both +sides already, and I don't want any utterance of mine to add to it. +Still, I can assure you it has been a relief to me to let the steam +off." + +At the appointed hour the Maritzburg Scouts and another Colonial corps +started with a train of two hundred waggons, and with immense exertion +made eight miles before it became dark. The men were more often on foot +than in their saddles, sometimes roping their horses to the sides of the +waggons to aid the oxen, sometimes putting their shoulders to the +wheels, or working with a score of others with railway sleepers that had +been brought for the purpose, to lever the axles out of deep holes into +which the wheels had sunk. + +"I don't think I ever knew what it was to be really dirty before," Field +said, as they finally dismounted and prepared to camp. "I thought I did +know something about mud, but I can see that I did not. I feel that I am +a sort of animated pie, and could be cooked comfortably in an oven. If +we could but get a big fire and stand round it, our crust might peel +off; and I really don't see any other way. There is one advantage in it, +and that is that we shall be able to skirmish, if necessary, across +either a sandy or muddy country, without the possibility of our being +made out more than fifty yards away by the keenest-sighted Boer. What do +you propose, Captain Chris? If there were running water near, the course +would be clear. We would lie down by turns, and be rolled over and over, +and thumped with stones, and rubbed with anything that came handy till +we were in a state of comparative cleanliness." + +"Why running water?" Chris asked. "Why not a pond?" "A pond!" Field +said, contemptuously. "Why, sir, before our section alone was washed, +the water of anything short of a lake would be solid." + +There was a general burst of laughter. + +"Well, Field, you do us almost as much good as a wash," Peters said. +"Anyhow, we are better off than the others. We have got our tents and +our spirit-lamp, and can have our tea with some degree of comfort, which +is more than the others will be able to do. Now, as we have not running +water, I think we might as well scrape as much of this mud off as we +can." + +"I would almost rather remain as we are," Field said. "Hitherto I have +felt rather proud of our appearance. As we only got our uniforms when we +came up here, and have always had our tents to sleep in, we looked a +great deal cleaner than the average. Now we shall be conspicuous for our +dirtiness." + +"In spite of what Field says, I will adopt your suggestion, Peters. We +had better help the Kaffirs to get up our tents first," Chris said, +"then we can do the scraping while they are getting our supper ready. It +is very lucky that we had the water-skins filled before starting. We +should hardly taste the tea if it had been made from water from any of +these spruits." + +The tents were erected, and then jack-knives were taken out; and giving +mutual aid to each other, they succeeded in removing at least the main +portion of the mud. That done, they sat down to supper. Fortunately, the +rain that had come down steadily the greater portion of the day had now +ceased, and with a tin of cocoa and milk, and some fried ham and +biscuits, they made an excellent meal. Their less fortunate comrades +brought their kettles, which were boiled for them one after another, +until all who had waited up in hopes of their turn coming had been +served. As they carried tea and their ration bread, they were able to +make a fairly comfortable meal, instead of going supperless to bed, +which they would otherwise have done, as few would have cared after +their hard work to go out into the veldt to gather soaked sticks, which +they would hardly have been able to light had they found them. A small +ration of spirits and water was given to each of the five natives, and +then the lads crept into their tents feeling that after all, things +might have been much worse. + + + + +CHAPTER XV + +SPION KOP + + +The country immediately round Springfield was level and well cultivated, +with pretty farmhouses and orchards scattered about. Some little +distance to the west rose two hills, Swartz Kop, which had been occupied +by the mounted infantry, and Spearman's Hill, named from a farm near its +base. Here General Buller had established his head-quarters. Spearman's +Hill, which was generally called Mount Alice, was a very important +position, and here the naval guns were placed, their fire commanding the +greater portion of the hills on the other side of the Tugela, and also +Potgieter's Drift, where it was intended the passage of the river should +be made. Swartz Kop was a less important position, though it also +dominated a wide extent of country; but as ridges on the other side +covered some important points from its fire, Mount Alice was selected as +the position for the naval battery, and also for the signallers, as from +here a direct communication could be kept up by heliograph and flash- +light with one of the hills held by the defenders of Ladysmith. + +[Illustration: THE NAVAL GUNS ON MOUNT ALICE] + +It was late on the 16th when the convoy which the Maritzburg Scouts were +escorting arrived at Springfield. All day they had heard the boom of +artillery and the rattle of machine-guns and musketry along the line of +hills on the other side of the Tugela and from the heights of Mount +Alice, and groaned in spirit as they laboured at their work of assisting +the waggons, that they were thus employed when hard fighting was going +on within eight miles of them. + +At half-past two that day Lyttleton's brigade had moved forward along +the foot of Mount Alice to force the passage of the river at Potgieter's +drift. As soon as the Boers caught sight of them, they could be seen +galloping forward to take their places in the trenches. + +A thunder-storm that burst and a torrent of rain screened the movements +of the advancing troops from view for some time, and enabled them to +near the river without having to pass through any shell fire from the +Boer batteries on the hilltops. Between Mount Alice and the river the +brigade passed across meadows and ploughed fields. They reached the +ferry, but the boat was stuck fast, and an hour was lost at this point +before a party of sailors and colonial troops accustomed to such work +came forward to the aid of the Engineers, and speedily got it into +working order. But in the meantime the Scottish Rifles and the Rifle +Brigade had moved along the banks to the drift. Although usually almost +dry, the water was now coming down it breast-deep. Two gallant fellows +went across, and when they found the line of shallow water they returned +and guided their comrades over. The rush of the water was so great that +many would have been swept away; but, joining hands, they crossed in a +line, and although this was broken several times, it was always +reformed, and not many lives were lost. + +As soon as some of the troops had passed, they lined the bank until the +two battalions were over, and then advanced over some low hills, +clearing out a few Boers who occupied some advanced trenches. By six +o'clock the ferry-boat began to carry the main body across, taking over +half a company at a time; but it was not until half-past three in the +morning that the horses, waggons, the guns of the brigade, and a +howitzer battery were on the northern bank, and the whole brigade +established on a ridge a mile beyond the river. + +The Maritzburg Scouts were delighted at receiving orders on the morning +after their arrival at Springfield that they were to move forward at +once and encamp close to Spearman's Farm, and to furnish orderlies for +carrying messages for the general. They started at once, and after an +hour's fast riding arrived at the point assigned to them. + +Twenty men and an officer were at once sent to the farmhouse. They took +with them three tents which they had brought in the regimental waggon, +and erected these some fifty yards from the house; the rest of the troop +established their camp at a point indicated by a staff officer a quarter +of a mile away. It had been two o'clock in the morning before the convoy +had reached Springfield, and horses and men were alike tired out; and as +soon as breakfast had been prepared and eaten most of the troopers +turned in to sleep. Chris and half a dozen of his party, however, +obtained leave from Captain Brookfield to ascend Mount Alice and see +what was going on. From half-past five a tremendous fire had been kept +up on the Boer positions. The naval guns were distributing their heavy +lyddite shells among the entrenchments distant from three to six miles, +and occasionally throwing up a missile on to the summit of the lofty +hill known as Spion Kop away to the left front. Not less steadily or +effectively the howitzer battery was pounding the Boer position. + +At eight o'clock the lads reached the top of Mount Alice, and watched +with intense interest the picturesque and exciting scene. Here they were +far better able than they had been when at Chieveley to see the general +aspect of the country. On the right from Grobler's Kloof hill after +hill, separated apparently by shallow depressions, rose, and from the +higher points occasional flashes of fire burst out as the guns tried +their range against those on Mount Alice, whose heights, however, they +failed to reach. Spion Kop stood out steep and threatening, its summit +being some hundred feet higher than that of Mount Alice. They could now +see that it was not, as it had appeared from the distance, an isolated +and almost conical hill, but was, in fact, connected with hills farther +to the left by a ridge of which it was the termination. + +Immediately behind it was a deep valley, and the ascent from this side +was to some extent commanded by the guns on Mount Alice and Swartz Kop. +Between Spion Kop and the river there was a flat belt of country, and it +was along this that Lord Dundonald had ridden with his brigade of +cavalry to Acton Homes, where he was still stationed. The point of +greatest interest, however, was at Trichardt's Drift, lying six miles +west of Mount Alice. From their look-out they could make out the +division under the command of Sir Charles Warren advancing to the ford. +As far as they could see, no serious opposition was being offered; they +could, however, in the intervals of silence of the guns, hear a dropping +musketry fire in that direction, and a few rounds of shot from Warren's +field-guns, but it was evident that only a small party of the enemy +could be disputing the passage. + +Peters, who was intently watching what was going on through his glasses, +said: "They are at work at two points on the river. I think they are +building bridges." + +The naval guns dropped a few shells among the farm buildings and +orchards facing the spot where the troops were gathered, as a hint to +the Boers that it was well within their range, and that they had best +abstain from interfering with what was going on. In an hour from the +time the troops reached the bank two bridges had been thrown across the +river, and the passage began. By ten o'clock the whole were across, the +firing soon after ceased, and Warren's troops bivouacked quietly. It was +all over for the day, and the lads returned to their camp. The next day +passed quietly, except that in the afternoon the Boer entrenchments near +Spion Kop and Brakfontein, a hill facing the position occupied by +Lyttleton's brigade, were pounded by the naval guns and howitzers. A +message was heliographed from Ladysmith that two thousand Boers were +seen moving towards Acton Homes, and as the occupation of that village +was of no value until the infantry arrived there, the cavalry were +recalled to a position where they could protect Warren's left flank from +attack. + +On the 19th, Warren pushed forward a portion of his force with a view to +driving back the Boers' right and gaining the main road leading through +Dewdrop to Ladysmith, while Woodgate's brigade watched Spion Kop. +Fighting went on all day, the British forcing the enemy back step by +step. On the 20th it began early and continued the whole day. Every inch +of the ground was contested stubbornly by the Boers, but the Irish +Brigade, who were in the hottest position, pressed them back fiercely +with sudden rushes, and, had the rest of the division kept up with their +advance, might have cleared the way through the enemy's centre. But the +cannonade to which the advancing troops were exposed was terrible. +Maxims and Nordenfeldts, the heavy cannon, and the field-pieces captured +from us a month before, hurled shot and shell incessantly among them, +while the rattle of the Boer rifles was continuous. Still, fair progress +was made, and with less loss than might have been expected in such +strife. Two officers only were killed, Captain Hensley of the Dublin +Fusiliers, and Major Childe, who was a most popular officer. He had a +presentiment that he would fall, and actually asked a friend the evening +before to have a tablet placed over his grave with the inscription, "Is +it well with the child? It is well." + +At three o'clock the fighting slackened, and a heavy thunderstorm seemed +to be the signal for firing to cease. Later Sir Charles Warren summoned +all the officers commanding corps, and pointed out that there was not +sufficient food remaining to allow of the wide circuit by Acton Homes to +be carried out, and gave his opinion that now they had won so much +ground, it was better to continue to advance by the shorter line on +which they were pushing, but that in order to do this it was necessary +that Spion Kop, whose fire would take them in the rear, should be +captured. This was unanimously agreed to, and General Warren then saw +the commander-in-chief, and obtained his consent to the change of plans. +It was not, however, considered necessary to take Spion Kop until the +troops had farther advanced. All Sunday, fighting was continued as +before, but the progress made was slower, as the Boers were largely +reinforced and fresh guns brought up. + +The 22nd was comparatively quiet. The situation was not improving. Five +miles of rough ground had been won in as many days' fighting, but the +force was becoming lengthened out and the line weaker. Lyttleton's force +had to guard the line from Potgieter's Drift to Warren's right against +any attempt of the Boers to cut the lines of communication. Woodgate was +similarly employed in keeping the line from Trichardt's Drift to +Warren's left, and it became increasingly evident that not much further +progress could be made until the left of the advance was protected by +the establishment of guns on the great hill. It was then, on the 23rd, +decided that Woodgate's brigade should assault Spion Hop that night. It +was known that it was not strongly held. + +Starting at six o'clock, the column made its way slowly and with vast +difficulty up the ascent. This was everywhere rugged and rocky, and in +many places so precipitous that men had to be pushed or pulled up by +their comrades. + +Colonel Thorneycroft led the way with a few men, finding out the spots +at which an ascent was practicable, and scouting on either side to +discover if Boers were hidden; behind him followed Woodgate leading his +men. He was in bad health and quite unfit for such a climb, but in spite +of remonstrances he had insisted upon going, although he was obliged to +be assisted at the more difficult places. The distance was not more than +six miles, but it was not until nearly ten hours after starting that the +summit was gained. The hilltop was enveloped in mist, and they were +unseen until the Lancashire Fusiliers, who were leading, were within +fifty yards of the top. Then a Boer challenged them, and directly fired +his rifle. Almost instantly a dozen of his comrades joined him, and +bringing their magazines into play opened a fierce fusillade. But the +aim was hurried, they could scarce see their foes, and the Lancashire +men, cheering loudly, rushed up to the crest without loss. + +The Boers did not await their arrival; only one of them was bayoneted +before he turned to fly, and but two or three were overtaken by the +eager soldiers. As soon as the Boers had gone, the troops set to work to +construct breastworks to hold the spot they had gained against any +attempts of the Boers to recapture. The ground was too rocky for +digging, and the stones that were scattered thickly about were used for +the purpose; but long before the breastwork could be completed a +dropping fire was opened by the enemy. The morning was gray and misty, +and the clouds hung heavily on the hilltop. As these cleared off slowly, +it could be seen that the position was less favourable than it had +seemed, for the flat crest extended some distance beyond the point they +had entrenched, and from the rocks and low ridges a hot fire broke out. +Before the mist cleared off, the Boers had crept up in considerable +force, and were, it was evident, preparing to retake the position that +had been wrested from them. + +By six o'clock the scattered fire had grown into a continuous roar, the +Boers occupying not only the nek itself, but the flanks of the hill. +Several times our men made rushes to endeavour to clear off the foe, but +these proved too costly, and they were now lying or kneeling behind the +unfinished barricade. In a very short time the clouds had lifted +sufficiently for the Boer artillery to discover the exact position, and +from the hills on three sides a terrible fire of shot and shell, from +cannon great and small and machine-guns, rained upon them. Again and +again parties of men started to their feet and dashed forward to drive +the hidden Boers facing them from their hiding-places. Sometimes they +succeeded for a time, but their numbers thinned so fast that the +survivors were forced to fall back again. To add to the horror of the +situation, the shot from our own guns also fell among the defenders, the +officers commanding the batteries not having been informed of the +intention to occupy the hill, and knowing nothing of the situation. +Scores of men were killed or wounded, but the position was held +unflinchingly. + +At ten o'clock General Woodgate was mortally wounded by the fragment of +a shell that struck him in the eye, and Colonel Crofton took the +command. He at once flashed a message to General Warren, stating that +Woodgate was killed, and that reinforcements must be sent at once; +General Coke was therefore ordered to take the Middlesex and Dorset +regiments, and assume the command. Immediately afterwards Warren +received an order from General Buller to appoint Lieutenant-colonel +Thorneycroft, who was colonel of a colonial force, to take the command. +It was now hoped that all was well there. Unfortunately, neither Buller +nor Warren was able to give his undivided attention to the struggle on +the mountain, for Lyttleton's brigade had advanced before daybreak +against the eastern slopes of the hills running north from Spion Kop. +They advanced briskly, their Maxims clearing out the Boers, from whose +fire they suffered but little; but they sustained some loss from the +shell fire from Mount Alice, the sailors having been as uninformed of +the advance the brigade were to make as they were of the capture of +Spion Kop. The Scottish Rifles and the 3rd King's Royal Rifles pushed on +rapidly and gained the spur farthest north. Had there been guns on Spion +Kop the object of the movement would have been attained, and the advance +by direct road on Ladysmith have become a possibility; but no guns had +reached the summit, and the troops there were so far from being able to +render assistance that they were with difficulty maintaining their +desperate resistance. As the two rifle regiments were therefore exposed +to a concentrated fire from the Boer batteries, and were without +support, they were directed to withdraw, but the order had to be +repeated three times before it was obeyed. The fire slackened at this +point to some extent in the afternoon, no farther advance being +attempted, but it raged as hotly as ever on the summit of Spion Kop. + +As neither General Buller nor Warren had come up to see the state of +things on the all-important position of Spion Kop, General Coke went +down in the evening to explain the situation. He stated that unless the +artillery could silence the enemy's guns the troops could not support +another day's shelling. In the evening two naval twelve-pounders, the R. +A. mountain battery, and one thousand two hundred men as reliefs, +started to ascend the hill and to strengthen the entrenchments. On the +way up they met Colonel Thorneycroft and the rest of the force coming +down, that officer, who had displayed splendid gallantry throughout the +day, having decided on his own responsibility that the position could +not be longer held. Strangely enough, the news of the retirement was not +communicated to General Buller, who, after reporting in his despatches +written next morning that Spion Kop was firmly held, was riding to the +front when he for the first time learned the news. Altogether it was a +day of strange blunders, redeemed only by the splendid bravery of the +troops engaged. The news came as a heavy blow to the army, but it was +supposed that a fresh attempt would be made to capture the position by +ascending the northern spurs that had been carried and held for a time +by the two rifle battalions. But while soldiers think only of the +chances of battle, and burn to engage the enemy, a feeling only +accentuated by previous failures, generals in command have to take other +matters into consideration. They may feel that they may conquer in the +next fight, but what is to follow? In this case the chances of success +would be smaller than before, the loss more serious, for the Boers from +all parts had united to oppose us. Many of the cannon had been brought +over from the positions from which Ladysmith was bombarded. The +advantage of surprise gained by the long march from Chieveley had been +lost; more serious still was it that a large proportion of the +provisions, brought at the cost of so much labour and exhaustion of the +transport animals, was consumed, and what remained would be insufficient +had fresh battles to be fought to capture the positions, one behind +another, held by the Boers. + +General Buller was the last man to retire as long as there was a hope of +success. He knew that not only at home, but all over the civilized +world, men were anxiously awaiting the news of his second attempt to +relieve Ladysmith, and it must have been hard indeed for him to have to +acknowledge a second reverse; but in spite of this he sternly determined +to fall back. The movement was admirably executed; every horse, waggon, +gun, and soldier was taken safely across the Tugela without hindrance by +the Boers, a fact that showed how deeply they had been impressed with +the valour of our soldiers. Sullenly and angrily the troops marched +away. Had they had their will they would have hurled themselves against +the Boer entrenchments until the last man had fallen. To them the +necessities of the situation were as nothing; to retreat seemed an +acknowledgment that they had been beaten, a feeling that is seldom +entertained by British soldiers. Their losses had been heavy, but there +were still enough of them, they thought, for the work they had to do, +and it was with a deep feeling of unmerited humiliation that they +received the order to retire. + +The feeling, however, was not of long endurance, for two days later, +when they had settled down in camp near the Tugela and round Spearman's +Farm, the general rode through the lines, congratulating the troops on +the valour they had displayed, and promising them that ere long they +would be in Ladysmith. + +"I shall be heartily glad when we are there," Chris said when he heard +what the general had promised, "not only for the sake of the town, but +for our own. We are really doing no good here. It is hateful to look on +when other fellows are fighting so desperately. If it were not that the +orders were strict against the mounted Colonial corps going out over the +country, to clear the scattered Boers out, we might be doing useful +service; and as soon as Ladysmith is relieved--that is to say, if we can +hold out till we get there--I should certainly vote that we come back +here instead of staying with the army, and go on again on our own +account." + +"I quite agree with you," Carmichael said. "Still, it is something to +have seen two big fights." + +"Yes," Brown grumbled, "but if we tell anybody that we were there, +naturally the first question will be, 'What part did you take in it', +and we shall have to own that we took no part at all, and only looked on +at a distance at the other fellows fighting. I call it sickening." + +"Well, never mind, Brown," Chris said; "after all, during this business, +we have killed twice our own number of Boers at the least, and if +everyone had done as much the Boers would be pretty well extinct." + +"Yes, there is certainly something in that," Brown admitted, "but if we +had been allowed to scout on our own account it would be hard if we had +not killed twice as many more by this time." + +"We certainly might have done so, but you must remember, also, that a +great many of us might have been killed too. One cannot always expect to +have the luck we had in those two fights; and, I am sure, we should +bitterly regret gaps being made in our number." + +"That we should," Harris said warmly. "We were all good friends before, +but nothing to what we are now after living so long together, roughing +it and sharing each others' dangers. For my part I would rather go +without any more fighting than that any of us should go down." + +"I agree with you thoroughly, Harris," Chris said. "As most of us are +likely to remain out here for life, we shall often meet, and I do hope +that when we talk of these times we shan't have our pleasure marred by +having to say how we miss so and so, and so and so. I should be sorry +even to lose one of our blacks. They have stuck to their work well, and +are always cheerful and willing in the worst of weather and under the +most miserable conditions. I should really be very sorry if any of them +were killed." + +It needed but a day or two for the troops to recover their cheerfulness. +It was certain that they would soon be launched against the enemy again, +and it was known that General Buller would himself command. The ground +was now more known than it was before, the plans could he better laid, +and all looked forward confidently to the next engagement. + +No thanks were due to the weather for the renewed spirits of the men. It +rained almost unceasingly. The flat ground on which the troops were +encamped was a sea of mud. There was one good effect in this: there was +water in all the spruits, and the men were able to indulge in a wash-up +of their clothes and an occasional bath; and although they had to put +their clothes on wet, they were scarcely more damp than when they took +them off. There was other work to be done. Two naval guns, a mountain +battery, and some large cannon were with great labour got up on the top +of Swartz Kop. + +The lads had given up the two tents allotted to them to let the rest of +the men have more room, and they now felt the full benefit of their +little shelter tents. The allowance throughout the rest of the camp was +sixteen men to a tent. On coming in and out, as the men were muddy up to +the knees, it was impossible to keep these even tolerably clean, and the +discomfort of so many men crowded together and obliged to live, eat, and +sleep in such confined quarters was very great indeed. + +The lads on the other hand, suffered from none of these inconveniences, +and except that they could not stand up, and could only sit upright in +the middle of the tent, they were perfectly comfortable. The tents were +about seven feet wide on the ground, and as much long. Their natives had +cut and brought in bundles of grass, which made them soft beds, one on +each side of the tent. A blanket was stretched on each bed, another +doubled lay over it. It was a strict rule that everyone should take off +his boots on entering his tent, and leave them just inside the entrance. +They had purchased at the sale of the effects of some of the officers +killed in action some more blankets and rugs, and these were thrown over +the entrance to the front of the tents at night, and made them perfectly +warm and comfortable. A trench some eighteen inches deep was dug round +each tent, and this kept the floor fairly dry. + +Some blankets had been given to the Kaffirs, who constructed a little +shelter, in which they squatted by day and slept at night, and in which +cooking operations were carried on. The lads had no occasion to feel +dull, for they now knew many officers in the line regiments, and among +the Colonial troops, as well as the naval brigade; and "Brookfield's +boys", as they were generally called, were always welcome, and it was +seldom that more than half of them dined in their own camp. Chris could +always have been an absentee, for the sailors had told to each other the +story of his attempt to blow up the bridge at Komati-poort, and he +received any number of invitations. But he by no means liked to have to +retell the story, and generally made some excuse or other for remaining +in camp. + +Another battery of artillery arrived on the 31st of January, and on the +3rd of February there were sports in the camp of the South African Light +Horse, and a camp-fire sing-song afterwards. The men were all now in +high spirits, for it was certain that in a day or two another attack +would be made. On Sunday, February 4th, it was known that the move would +commence the next day. + +General Buller's plan was to make a strong feint against Brakfontein, +the highest hill of the ridge connected with the Spion Kop range, while +the real attack was to be delivered against an isolated hill named Vaal +Krantz, which, as viewed from Swartz Kop and Mount Alice, seemed to be +the key to the whole position, and it was thought that its possession +would open the way for a direct advance to Ladysmith. All was now in +readiness for the attack, and the sailors had with steel hawsers, and +the aid of the troops, got four more naval guns on to Swartz Kop. + +Before daybreak the troops were ready to advance. The regular cavalry +were near the base of Swartz Kop, while all the Colonial Horse, under +Lord Dundonald, were near Potgieter's Drift. At six o'clock the cavalry +went forward, but not far, for the morning was so misty that the +artillery could not make out the Boer positions until an hour later, +when a tremendous fire was opened from Mount Alice, Swartz Kop, and guns +placed on a lower spur of Spion Kop. While this was going on, a bridge +was thrown by the Engineers across another drift. Major-general Wynne +led the Lancashire brigade in the direction of Brakfontein. They went +forward in skirmishing order, supported by five field batteries and the +howitzer battery, all of which kept up an incessant fire of lyddite, +shell, and shot against the Boer position, their fire being guided by an +engineer officer in a balloon, who was able from a lofty altitude to +signal where the Boers were clustering most thickly. + +When another bridge had been completed General Lyttleton advanced with +his brigade across it, and as the feint against Brakfontein had +succeeded in gathering the greater portion of the Boers at the spot they +supposed to be most in danger, the Lancashire brigade was withdrawn, +retiring in excellent order, the movement being covered by an incessant +firing of the guns with them, which completely dominated those of the +Boers. Lyttleton's brigade now pressed forward under a storm of musketry +and shell from machine and other guns, which were answered even more +thunderously by the British artillery. The din was tremendous--greater +even than any that had been previously heard. It seemed impossible that +men could live for a moment in such a storm of missiles. But they +pressed on unfalteringly, and the batteries with them as steadily +maintained their fire, though shells fell continually round and among +them. The batteries that had gone out with the Lancashire Brigade now +directed their fire against Vaal Krantz, having moved across from +Brakfontein under a tremendous fire. One of the waggons lost all its +horses; but the five artillerymen with it manned the wheels and brought +it safely out of fire. + +At three o'clock Lyttleton's brigade advanced in earnest, and dashed +forward at the double against Vaal Krantz, heedless of the rifle fire +from the hills on both flanks and from the front. The defenders soon +lost courage, as they saw the Durhams and 3rd King's Royal Rifles +dashing up the hill with bayonets fixed, and scarce two hundred of them +remained till the British gained the crest. These were speedily +scattered or bayoneted. + +The position when won was found to be unsatisfactory, for it was +dominated by a hill beyond, which could not be seen from the British +look-out stations, and the cannon of Spion Kop were able to sweep the +plateau. At one time the Boers gathered and made an effort to retake the +hill, but two more battalions were sent up to reinforce the defenders, +and the enemy were driven back and the fire gradually languished. The +troops remained on the ground they had won during the night. From +prisoners they learned that four thousand Boers occupied Doornkloof, the +hill on their flank, and that the whole of the Transvaalers under +Joubert were gathering in their front. + +The baggage waggons were all collected by the river in readiness to +advance; but the way was not yet sufficiently cleared for them, and the +Boer guns on Brakfontein and Spion Kop commanded the road which they +would have to traverse. It was evident to all that no advance was +possible until the guns on these heights had been silenced or captured. +For the same reason the two brigades of cavalry had remained inactive. +During the night the Boers set fire to the grass on Vaal Krantz, and by +the assistance of the light kept up a shell and Maxim fire upon the +troops holding it. By morning they had brought up one of their big +hundred-pound Creusot guns on to Doornkloof, and it added its roar to +the chaos of other sounds. Under the shelter of its fire and that of the +other guns the Boers made several attempts to recapture the hill, but +were smartly repulsed each time they advanced. + +All day Tuesday and Wednesday the uproar of battle never ceased. We +could advance no farther. The Boers could not drive us back, although +they made a very determined night attack on Hildyard's brigade. That +afternoon General Buller held a council of war, at which all the +generals were present. Their opinions were unanimous that the Boer +position could not be forced without terrible loss, and that when they +arrived at Ladysmith they would but add to the number shut up in that +town, as it might be found as difficult to force their way out as to +arrive there. General Hart pleaded to be allowed to make an attempt on +Doornkloof with his brigade; but, strongly held as that position was, it +was deemed impossible that it could be captured by a single brigade. The +original intention was that guns should be taken up on to Vaal Krantz, +and that with their assistance a strong force would wheel round and take +Doornkloof in the rear; but owing to the discovery that the former hill +was dominated from several points, it was found impracticable to carry +the plan into execution. Orders were therefore given for the supply +column, which had advanced some distance, to retire. + +As the movement was being carried out, the Boers kept up a heavy fire +upon the waggons and on the hospital, which, relying upon the protection +of the Red Cross flag, had advanced within range, but here, as upon +almost every occasion, the enemy paid no respect whatever to the Geneva +emblem, although when, as once or twice happened, one of our shells fell +near an ambulance of theirs, they had sent in indignant protests against +our conduct. All that night and the next day the movement to the rear +continued, and not only were the infantry moved across the Tugela, but +the guns on Swartz Kop and Mount Alice were removed, and orders were +given for a general retirement to Springfield, a proof that the next +attack would be made in an entirely different direction. + + + + +CHAPTER XVI + +A COLONIST'S ADVENTURE + + +In the morning after the battle orders were issued for the greater part +of the troops to return to Chieveley, and among the first to leave were +the Maritzburg Scouts. They were heartily glad to be off. During the +three preceding days the position of the cavalry had been a galling one. +They had seen nothing of the fighting, being kept down at Potgieter's +Drift in readiness to advance the moment that orders came. They had +nothing to do but to stand or sit down near their horses, watching the +fire from the enemy's batteries on the hills, and the bursting of our +lyddite shells among them, the outburst of brownish-yellow smoke +rendering them easily distinguishable from the sudden puffs of white +vapour caused by the explosion of the shrapnel shells of the artillery. +How the battle was going was only known from the wounded men brought +down from the front. The reports at first were encouraging, but it +became evident on the following days that no progress was being made. + +Each evening when the sun set both the colonial and regular cavalry +returned to their camp, for it was certain that they could not act at +night. When it became known on Wednesday evening that a retreat was +ordered, the news came almost as a relief, for the suspense had been +very trying. + +After dinner Chris went into the tent where the officers of the troop +were gathered. As usual, the talk was of the battle, but in a short time +Captain Brookfield said: + +"Let us try and get away from the subject. We have talked of nothing +else for the past three days, and I defy anyone to say anything new +about it; it is not a pleasant subject either. Richards, you were in the +last war, I know, and took part in the defence of Standerton. Suppose +you tell us about that; it is one of the few pleasant memories of that +time." + +"I don't know that there is much to tell you about it, but I will let +you know how I came to take share in it. That was an exciting time for +me, for I was never so near rubbed out in all my life. Just before the +last business broke out I happened to be returning from Pretoria, +intending to sell for anything that I could get a large farm that I +owned in the Leydenburg district. Of late the Boers had been getting so +offensive in their manner that I thought something would come of it, and +made up my mind to sell out at any price and return to Natal. When I +rode into Leydenburg I found that two hundred and fifty men of the 94th +Regiment were starting next day with a large train of waggons for +Pretoria. As I was frequently in the town, and had made the acquaintance +of several of the officers, I thought it would be pleasant to ride down +with them, as it made no difference whether I got into Pretoria a day or +two earlier or later. The general idea was that war would come of it, +but no one thought it would begin without the usual notice and warning. + +"I told the officers that I would not trust the Boers further than I +could see them, for that a more treacherous set of fellows are not to be +found on the surface of the earth. Still, I must own that I had no more +idea that an attack would be made upon us than they had. Well, you all +know what came of it. We were going along a hollow with rising ground on +either side when, without the slightest warning, a tremendous fire was +opened from both flanks. It can hardly be said that there was any +resistance. The troops were strung out along the line of waggons; +numbers were shot down before a single musket was fired in defence. The +main body, such as it was, fought stoutly, but as they could only catch +an occasional glimpse of the heads of the enemy, while they were +themselves altogether exposed, there could be but one end to it. A +hundred and twenty men were killed or wounded in a few minutes, and to +save the rest from a similar massacre the officer who commanded +surrendered. + +"I fired a few shots at first, but as soon as I saw how it would end I +rode for it. I was with the rear-guard when the firing began, and so +took the back track. As soon as the firing ceased I saw half a dozen +Boers galloping after me. My blood was up, as you may imagine, and on +getting to a dip I jumped off my horse, left it in shelter, and threw +myself down on the crest of the hollow, and as they came within range I +picked off the one who was nearest to me. That brought the others up +with a round turn. They retired a little way, then dismounted and +separated, and proceeded to stalk me. We exchanged shots for an hour or +two. I killed another, and got, as you see by this scar on my cheek, a +graze. However, I think they would have tired of the game first. But +suddenly I saw a dozen Boers galloping across the country in our +direction. They were doubtless a party who had arrived too late to take +part in the fight, if you can call such a treacherous massacre a fight, +and hearing the sound of shots were riding to see what was going on. + +"I saw that things were getting too hot, and ran down to my horse again +and rode along in the hollow, which fortunately hid me from the sight of +either the men I had been fighting or those riding up. I had therefore +about a quarter of a mile start when I heard a shout, and knew that they +were after me. After what had happened I did not dare ride for +Middleburg, as there was no saying whether that place might not have +already risen; so there was nothing to depend upon but the speed and +bottom of my horse. It was a fairly good animal, but nothing particular. +It had had an easy time of it while on the march, for we had only done +some fourteen or fifteen miles a day. I might have had hopes that I +should outride the men in pursuit of me, but they would be joined by +more men on fresh horses from any Boer farmhouse or village we came +near. Besides, the news of this intended attack on the convoy must have +been known far and wide. Occasionally a shot was fired, but as I was +riding at a gallop, and the Boers were doing the same, I had no great +fear of being hit. I gained a little at first, but after two hours' +riding they were about the same distance behind as when they had first +started on the chase. + +"I felt that my horse was beginning to fag a bit, but the sun was +setting, for the attack had taken place in the afternoon. I kept on till +it was too dark for me to make out my pursuers, some of whom were not +more than three hundred yards behind me; then, while my horse was going +at full gallop I leapt of? without checking him, a trick that most +hunters can do. I chose the spot because I could make out that there was +some low scrub close to the road. Stooping among this I ran forward. I +was glad to hear that my horse was still galloping at the top of his +speed, and, deprived of my weight, would probably get a good bit farther +before he was taken, if he did but keep on. This I hoped he would do, +for he had evidently entered into the spirit of the chase, and had laid +back his ears whenever the Boers raised their voices in a yell or a +rifle was fired. They were yelling pretty hard when they passed me, +urging their horses on in the belief that the chase was almost at an +end. I heard no more of the Boers that time, for as soon as they had +gone on I ran at the top of my speed for some distance, and then broke +into a trot, and by the morning must have been thirty miles away. + +"I decided to make for Standerton, for there I felt sure I should be +safe, for at that place was a considerable English population, and they +would certainly hold out. I had a Colt's rifle with me and a brace of +revolvers, for even when I went down to Leydenburg I heard that several +Englishmen had been maltreated, and one or two shot by Boers they met. I +tramped for four days, and as the attack on our troops had been made on +the 20th of December, it was now Christmas-eve. I had not ventured to go +near a Boer farm, for fortunately I had shot a springbok, and was +therefore under no trouble as to food; but on the previous day I had not +come across water, and the heat was terrible, so I felt that whatever +came of it I must go and ask for a drink. I saw a farmhouse about nine +in the morning and made for it. As I approached, a woman came out of the +door and, seeing me, re-entered, and two Boers with their guns in their +hands ran out. + +"Who are you?" they shouted. Of course I speak Dutch as well as English, +and shouted back that I only wanted some water. + +"'Are you an Englishman?' they shouted again. + +"'Yes, I am,' I said; 'but what difference does that make?' I saw their +guns go up to their shoulders, and flung myself down, and their shots +went over my head. It was my turn now, and I fired twice, and the two +Boers rolled over. I walked forward now ready to fire on an instant, as +there might be more of them. Some women ran out but no man, and I went +straight up. They were screaming over the bodies of the men, and heaped +curses on me as I came up. I slung my rifle behind me, and taking out my +pistols I said, 'Your men brought it on themselves. I only asked for +water, and they fired at me. I don't want to hurt any of you, but if you +attack me I must protect myself.' Several times I thought they would +have done so, but the sight of my pistols cowed them, I walked straight +into the house, dipped a pannikin into a pail of water, took a long +drink, then I filled my water-bottle, and went out. Though they cursed +me again, they did not attempt to stop me, as I rather feared they +would; but I understood it when, before I had gone fifty yards, I heard +a horse's hoofs, and looking round saw a girl riding at full speed +across the veldt. She had no doubt gone to fetch the men who were away +or to the next farm to summon assistance. The draught of water had done +me a world of good, and I soon broke into a run, though I did not +conceal from myself that I was in a bad fix. Once out of sight of the +farm I changed my course, and did so several times in the course of the +next two hours; then, on getting to the crest of high ground, I saw a +river half a mile away. This, I felt sure, was Broot Spruit. Before +starting to walk down I looked round, and a little over a mile away +could see a party of some fifteen Boers. I ran at full speed down the +slope, and could see no other place where I could make a fight of it; +but many of the rivers have, like those here, steep banks, and I could +at least sell my life dearly. It could only be for a time, for some of +the Boers would cross the spruit and take me in rear. Still, there was +nothing else to be done. + +"When I reached the bank I gave a shout of satisfaction. The river was +in flood; there must have been rain up in the hills, and you know how +quickly the streams rise. Unless the Boers knew of some very shallow +place, there would be no crossing it; for it was running like a mill- +stream, and except at some waggon drift the banks were almost +perpendicular. At any rate I could not hope to swim half across before +the Boers came up, and so I must fight it out where I was. I had +scarcely found a point where I could get a comfortable foothold on the +bank, with my head just above the level, when the Boers appeared on the +top of the hill. They stopped for a minute and then broke up, and +scattering rode forward. They felt sure that I must have made for the +river, as there was no other place where I could be concealed. When they +came within a couple of hundred yards of it they dismounted, and three +or four came forward on foot. When the nearest was within a hundred +yards of me I fired. + +"At so short a distance, and with so good a rest, I could not miss, and +before the smoke cleared away I winged another, and the rest ran back +hastily. I sent a shot or two among them as they were consulting, with +the result that they rode off three or four hundred yards farther back. +They did not attempt to return my fire, for, except when I raised my +head for a moment, they could see nothing of me. They doubtless learned +from the women that I had a Colt's rifle and a brace of revolvers, and +that if they were to make a rush across the open not many of them were +likely to reach me. After a talk two or three of them mounted their +horses and rode so as to strike the river both above and below me, +intending no doubt to cross if they found a place where there was a +chance of doing so. I felt pretty sure that they would do nothing till +it was dark, then they would crawl up and make a rush; I was certain, +anyhow, that they would not give it up, as there were two of their +number lying on the veldt besides the two at the farmhouse. There was, +however, more pluck in them than I had given them credit for, for about +mid-day they began to advance, crawling along the ground as if stalking +a quarry. The men who had gone out on horseback had all returned, but +just as the others started crawling up three of them galloped away down +stream. I determined at once to shift my position a bit, so as to put +off the evil hour. I pulled a stone as big as my head out of the clay of +the bank and put it on the edge where my head had been, and then got +down into the water. It was waist-deep at a couple of feet from the +bank, which above was too steep to walk along. I had gone a hundred +yards when I saw, seven or eight inches above the water-level, a hole, +and pushing my arm in I found it was a place where a good bit of the +bank had caved in. Laying my gun and pistols down on a ledge I felt +about farther. At the top it went in nearly three feet, and was higher +at the back than it was at the water's edge. At any rate it afforded a +good chance of safety. Holding the revolvers, the chamber of the rifle, +and my ammunition above water, I stooped until I could get into the +hole, which was but just wide enough for the purpose; then I pushed +myself back to the end. I found there was just height enough for me to +sit with my mouth above water. The back sloped so that I had to dig my +heels into the clay to prevent myself from slipping forward. + +"It was not a comfortable position, but that was a secondary +consideration. I had noticed as I came along that the river was already +falling, so that I had no fear of being drowned as long as I kept my +position. With some trouble I fastened my pistols and ammunition on the +brim of my hat; the rifle I was holding between my knees. There I sat +hour after hour. Fortunately, being pretty near midsummer day, the water +was not cold. I had at least the consolation of knowing what a state of +fury the Boers must be in. They would have seen by my footsteps where I +had entered the river, just below where I had been standing. No doubt +they would have gone along the top of the bank to see if I had come out +of the water again, and when they reached their friends on horseback and +heard that I had not swum down the river, they would have concluded that +I must have been drowned. Had I managed to cross, they would have seen +me climb the opposite bank. + +"In an hour the water had fallen to my shoulders, and when it became +dark it was but waist-deep where I was sitting. To make a long story +short, by midnight the water was below my feet and still falling +rapidly. I waited a couple of hours and then started to cross. It was +about fifty yards wide, and I was fully half-way over before it reached +my chin. The stream had lost much of its force, and I had no difficulty +in swimming across the rest of the way, though the water was deep until +I was within a couple of yards of the bank. Then I climbed the bank and +made off. I saw nothing more of my pursuers, and three days later I +arrived at Standerton, and remained there til the end of the war, for +the gallant little town repulsed all attempts of the Boers to capture +it." + +"That was a narrow escape indeed, Richards," Captain Brookfield said. +"If you hadn't had your wits about you the Boers would certainly have +got you. It was a first-rate hiding-place, but I don't think many of us +would have thought of adopting it. Now, will someone else give us a +yarn?" + +Two or three more stories were told, and then the party broke up, +feeling all the better for having for an hour avoided the standing +topic. Two days later all were settled at Chieveley again, and it was +generally believed that the next attack would take place very shortly, +and that it would probably be directed against Colenso. That evening a +farmer came into camp. His horse had dropped dead a mile away. He +stopped, as he passed through the tents of the scouts, and asked where +he could find the general. Captain Brookfield, who heard the question, +stepped out from his tent with Chris, to whom he had been talking. + +"Why, Searle, is it you? I thought the voice was familiar to me. What is +it?" + +"I have ridden in to get help. The other day a raiding party of Boers +came down through Inadi, and riding in between Dingley Dell and Botha's +Castle--you know the hill--swept off a quantity of cattle. They have not +penetrated so far before, and no one about thought that there was any +danger while you were attacking them up here. One of the farmers rode to +Greytown for help. Most of the young men there had joined one or other +of the colonial troops, but fifteen of us said that we could go out. It +seemed that there were not more than some fifteen or twenty Boers. Well, +I can't tell you all about it, for, as it is a matter of life and death, +I have not a moment to lose. However, we came up to them north of +Botha's Castle. We had a sharp fight. Two of our men were killed and +five of the Boers; the rest rode off. We set to work to bunch all the +cattle, and as we were at it we were attacked suddenly by a party sixty +or seventy strong. The fellows that we had driven off had evidently come +across them and brought them down upon us. We made a running fight, but +our horses were not so fresh as theirs; and seeing that they had the +speed of us we made for an empty farmhouse, and as they rode up we +brought down several of them. + +"There was a wall round the yard, and the Boers drew off for a bit to +consider. Then they dismounted and planted themselves round the house in +such shelter as they could find within two or three hundred yards, and +the affair began in earnest. The first day they kept up a heavy fire, to +which we could make but little reply, for it was certain death to lift a +head above the wall or to show one's self at a window even for a moment. +We lost three men that way. During the night they tried to carry the +place, but we were all at the wall; and had the best of it, as we had +only to show our heads, while they were altogether exposed. There was +not much firing next day, and it was evident that they meant to starve +us out. There was not a scrap of food to be found in the place; but +fortunately there was a small thatched kraal inside the yard which gave +some forage for the horses. The next day we killed one of them for food. + +"That night we agreed that when the Boers saw that we did not surrender +in a day or two they would be sure that we must be eating the horses, as +any food we brought with us must be exhausted, and they would then make +a determined attack; for we knew we had killed eight or ten of them, and +that they would not go away. So we decided that the only hope was for +one of us to ride here; we tossed up who should try to get through the +Boers, and the lot fell upon me. I took the best of the horses. We had +agreed from the first that this would have to be done, and had given +what scraps of bread we could spare to it; besides which, they were all +in fair condition, as the yard was strewn with rubbish, and some party +of Boers had ripped up all the beds and straw mattresses and scattered +the contents about. + +"Some of them were sure to be on watch, and I rode at a walk. I made for +the north, as that side was less likely to be watched. I had gone about +two hundred yards when a man jumped up just in front of me. My rifle was +ready, and before he could lift his I shot him, and then clapped spurs +to nay horse. There was a tremendous hubbub; shots were fired at random +in all directions, but I doubt whether they could have seen me after I +had gone fifty yards. I rode for a quarter of a mile due north, and then +turned west. I had no fear of being overtaken, for although the Boers +would all have their horses close, in readiness to mount if we should +try to break out, I must have got a good quarter of a mile start, and +they were not likely to keep up the chase long, as they could not tell +which way I might have doubled, and if they pursued far, it would be in +the direction of Greytown. It was about a seventy-mile ride, and as I +started about twelve, I have done it in nine hours. I foundered the +horse, but fortunately he did not drop till I was within half a mile of +the camp. Now, where can I find the general?" + +"You will find him at Frere, but I am afraid it will be of no use. We +have tried him again and again--at least, one or other of us have done +so--to let us go out scouting, but he will not hear of it, though the +whole of us Colonials are terribly sore at leaving the whole country at +the mercy of the Boer marauders; and now that we shall probably be at +work here again directly, he is less likely than ever to let anyone go." + +"You can't go without orders, I suppose?" + +Captain Brookfield shook his head. "We are just as much under orders as +the regular troops are, and it would be a serious matter indeed to fly +in the face of his repeated orders on this subject." The farmer made a +gesture of despair. + +"Captain Brookfield," Chris said, speaking for the first time, "I think +that by the terms of our enlistment in your corps we were to be allowed +to take our discharge whenever we asked for it?" + +"That was so, Chris, but--" + +"Then I beg now, sir, to tender our resignation from the present +moment." + +"But Chris, you have but twenty men, and by what Searle says, there are +sixty or seventy of them." + +"Of whom ten or so have been killed. Well, sir, we have fought against +nearly a hundred before now, and got the best of it; besides, we shall +have the help of the little party shut up. However, now that we have +resigned, that is our affair. I suppose that if we rejoin you, you will +have no objection to re-enlist us?" + +Captain Brookfield smiled. "I should have no objection certainly, Chris, +but General Buller might have." + +"I don't suppose he will know of our having been away, sir; he has +plenty more serious things to think of than the numerical strength of +your troop, and as the news of a skirmish some thirty miles north of +Greytown is not likely to be reported in the papers, or at any rate to +attract his attention, I don't think you need trouble yourself on that +score. Besides, if it was reported, it could only be said that one of +the besieged party escaping, returned with a small body of volunteers he +had collected; and the name of the Maritzburg Scouts would not be +mentioned. I am sure that Mr. Searle would impress the necessity for +silence about that point, on his friends." + +"Well, I accept your resignation, Chris; a headstrong man will have his +way; and indeed I have great faith in your accomplishing, somehow, the +relief of this party." + +The farmer had listened with surprise to this discussion between the lad +and Captain Brookfield. The latter now turned to him and said: + +"This young gentleman is the commander of twenty lads of about his own +age. They have been in two serious fights, and in both cases against a +Boer force much superior to themselves in numbers, and I have as much +confidence in them as in any men in my troop. They are all good shots, +and admirably mounted, and you can be perfectly sure of them, and can +take my assurance that if any twenty men can relieve your friends, they +will do so." + +"Will you be able to ride back again with us, sir? I can mount you." + +"Certainly I can, if my friend Captain Brookfield can furnish me with a +meal before I start." + +"That I will with much pleasure. How long will it be before you are +ready, Chris?" + +"Half an hour, sir. I left them all rubbing down their horses when I +came in here a quarter of an hour ago, and it will take but a very short +time to pack up and start." + +"Very well; I dare say that Mr. Searle will be ready by that time. +Breakfast shall be ready for you in ten minutes, Searle, and while you +are eating it I will tell you enough of these gentlemen's doings to +reassure you, for I see that you do not feel very confident that they +will be able to tackle the Boers." + +"After what you have said, Captain Brookfield, I can have no doubt that +they will do all they can, but it seems to me that twenty men--or twenty +boys--are no match for fifty or sixty Boers. While they were speaking, +Chris had returned to his camp. The lads were all engaged in rubbing up +their saddlery. + +"You can knock off at once," Chris said; "I have need for you. You no +longer belong to the Maritzburg Scouts." + +There was a general exclamation of astonishment. + +"What do you mean, Chris?" + +"I mean that I have resigned in my own name and yours, and Captain +Brookfield has accepted the resignation." + +"Are you really in earnest, Chris?" + +"Very much so; but I will not keep you in suspense. A small party of +Greytown men are besieged near Botha's Castle; one of them has just +ridden in for help. But you know well enough that Buller will not hear +of detached parties going out all over the country; and Captain +Brookfield told the farmer that it was of no use his going to the +general, and that none of the Colonial troops could leave the camp +without orders. As it was evident that there was nothing more to be +done, and we could not leave the man's friends to be massacred, the only +thing to do was to give in our resignation at once; and of course, now +that it is done and accepted, we are at liberty to mount and ride off +where we please. When we have done our work we will come back and +reenlist, and no one will be any the wiser. We shall start in half an +hour. We need not take the tent poles, or anything but a blanket and a +waterproof sheet." + +There was lively satisfaction at the news that they were again going to +be employed in what they considered their proper work. + +"What shall we do about the men and stores?" Willesden asked; "you know +that those two big boxes of the things we ordered at Maritzburg arrived +yesterday." "I think, Willesden, we will take Jack and the two Zulus, +and leave Japhet and the Swazis here in charge of the stores, and +blankets, and other things we leave behind us. Captain Brookfield will +keep an eye on them for us. The farmer is going to ride back with us on +one of the spare horses, and the three natives can ride the others. +There is a hundredweight of biscuits in the sack that came with the +boxes; each of us can take five pounds in his saddle-bag, a tin of cocoa +and milk, and a pound or two of bacon. Jack can take a kettle and +frying-pan, and the natives their blankets and twenty pounds of mealie +flour for themselves and five times as much mealies for the horses. We +can get them at the stores that were opened a few days ago." + +Some of the men from the other tents walked over on seeing the tents +pulled down and the waterproof sheets and blankets rolled up, and asked: +"Where are you fellows off to?" + +"We have resigned; we are sick of doing nothing." + +As it was known that they drew neither pay nor rations, the news did not +create much surprise. + +"You are lucky fellows," one said. "We get no share of the fighting and +a full share of the hardships; still, I wonder you do not stop till we +are in Ladysmith." + +"When is that going to be?" Field asked innocently. "We have been told +that we shall be in Ladysmith in a week many times since we first came +up here in the middle of December, and we are no nearer now than when we +arrived here. Do you think that you could guarantee that we should be +there in another week? because, if so, we might put off going." + +The trooper shook his head with a laugh. "That is a question no man in +camp can answer," he said. "Perhaps in a week, perhaps in a fortnight, +perhaps," he added more gravely, "never. We know by the messages they +flash out that they are nearly at the end of their food, and if we don't +get there in a fortnight or thereabout, our motive for going on may be +at an end. In that case I suppose we shall wait here till Roberts has +relieved Kimberley and marches on Bloemfontein. That will send all the +Free Staters scurrying back in a hurry, and even the Transvaalers will +begin to think that it is time to go. Then I suppose we shall advance +and clear Natal out." + +"Well, perhaps we may be back again to help you by that time," Field +answered; "but we are heartily tired of this place, and of watching the +Boers making their positions stronger and stronger every day." + +"It is about the same with us all," the trooper grumbled, "and I for one +wish that I could go down with you to Maritzburg and have a week off. It +would be such a comfort to sleep in a dry bed and to dress in dry +clothes, that I doubt whether I should ever have the strength of mind to +come back again. I wish that the general would issue an order +dismounting us all and filling up the gaps in the line regiments with +us. Then at least we should have a chance of fighting, which does not +seem likely ever to come to us here. You are not going to leave those +big boxes behind you, are you?" + +"Yes, we are going to leave them in the care of the captain, with a note +saying that if we do not turn up again before Ladysmith is relieved, +they are to be handed over to the poor beggars there." + +"There is one thing I cannot say, and that is that we have been short of +food, for the Army Service Corps has done splendidly, and no one has +ever been hungry for an hour, except when on a long march or engaged in +a battle. If everything had been worked as well, we should certainly +have no reason whatever to complain. If I were my own master, and could +afford it, I would go down to Durban and take a passage for myself and +my horse for Port Elizabeth, and then go up and enlist in one of the +yeomanry corps with Roberts. When he once starts there will be plenty of +movement on that side; while here, even if we get to Ladysmith, we may +be fixed there for no one can say how long. You see what it is here, and +if the Boers don't lose heart, and defend the Biggarsberg and the +Drakensberg, we shall find at least as much difficulty there as we shall +here. It is quite certain that the Ladysmith men will take a long time +to recover from what they have gone through; and as for the cavalry, I +fancy their horses have been eaten. If they had been out here with us, +instead of being cooped up in there, we should have been able to make it +hot for the Boers when they retire, and to keep them on the run, but +with so small a force as we have we should hardly be able to do so. +Besides, they have so many lines of retreat. The Free Staters can go +over to the left to Van Reenen and the other passes; another commando +can go east; there are plenty of fords on the Buffalo; and they would +retire on Vryheid, while the main body could make a stand at the +Biggarsberg; and as they always seem able to carry their cannon off with +them, our cavalry would do nothing without artillery and infantry." + +There had been no pause in the work of preparation while they were +talking, and the horses were now saddled, the food divided, the saddle- +bags packed, and the blankets and waterproofs strapped on. Chris went +across to Captain Brookfield's tent. "We are all ready for a start, +sir." + +The officer looked at his watch. "It is three minutes under the half- +hour, Chris. How much ammunition are you taking with you?" + +"A hundred and fifty rounds each, sir, of which I don't suppose we shall +use above ten at the outside. Still, there is never any saying; and if +we should get besieged we shall want it all. Your horse is ready for +you, Mr. Searle." + +"And I am ready too," the farmer said, getting up from the table and +stretching himself. "I ought not to have sat down. I could ride as far +as most at twenty, but I have not done so much for the last fifteen +years, and I feel stiff in every limb. However, I shall be all right +when I have gone a few miles, and that wash I had before breakfast has +done me a world of good. Now, sir, I am ready, and whether we shall +succeed or not, I thank you with all my heart for coming with me." +"Good-bye, Chris!" Captain Brookfield said. "I expect you will all turn +up again, like bad pennies, before many days have gone." + +"I hope so, sir," Chris said. "I should be sorry to miss the end here +after having seen it so far." + + + + +CHAPTER XVII + +A RESCUE. + + +When Chris went out with Captain Brookfield and the farmer, the lads had +shaken hands with all their friends, and were standing by the side of +their horses ready to mount. Jack and the two Zulus were standing a few +yards behind them. Japhet had brought up the other spare horse. + +"It is a nice piece of horse-flesh," the farmer said as he looked at it +critically. + +"Yes, it was bred by Duncan. We purchased pretty well the pick of those +he brought down the country." + +"That accounts for it. They are in good condition, too." + +"Yes; our horses all get two feeds of mealies a day, or, when it is wet, +one feed of mealies and a hot mash made of mealie flour, besides what +they can pick up, for we don't draw horse rations. Now, sir, we will be +off;" and he gave the word "Mount!" + +The lads all in a second swung into their saddles. + +"Good-bye, lads, and good luck!" Captain Brookfield said; and the men +standing by broke into a hearty cheer. + +There was a strong suspicion that the party were not going down to +Maritzburg. It was felt that they were not the sort to throw it up +before Ladysmith was relieved. And their suspicions were heightened when +they saw the farmer mount and ride by the side of Chris. + +"It is all gammon about their resigning, is it not, Brookfield?" one of +the officers said, as they stood looking after them. "Why should they +have left two of their men here with some of their traps and stores if +they had not been coming back? They would naturally give them all away. +Besides, I noticed that farmer come in on foot half an hour ago; there +was no talk of their leaving before he arrived, and he has gone off with +them on one of their horses." + +Captain Brookfield smiled. + +"All I know about it officially is that this morning Mr. King resigned +in the name of himself and his party; and as you know, I told you when +they first joined us, they did so on the explicit understanding that +they should be allowed to resign when they chose, and that provision was +inserted when they were sworn in." + +"That is all you know officially?" + +"Yes. If they are missed, and the question is asked me what has become +of them, that is the answer I shall give. What else I know I must for +the present keep to myself." + +"I suppose we shall see them back soon?" + +"Well, I consider that that is within the limits of possibility." + +"I suppose that you have formed no plan yet, Mr. King?" the farmer said, +when they had left the camp. + +"No; my present idea is to follow the line half-way down to Frere. If we +were to strike off towards the country at once, we should, of course, be +noticed; so I would rather get three miles on. You say it is about +seventy miles?" + +"About that." + +"Well, allowing for a halt, we can do it in twelve hours; that would be +just as it is getting dark. Of course we shall not show ourselves till +they begin to attack the house. I hope we shall find your friends still +holding out." + +"I hope so indeed. You see, the Boers were quiet when I started, and I +should hardly think that they would make an attack again after I left. +They seemed to have settled down to starve us out; but it is quite +possible that now I have got away they will grow nervous lest I should +bring help up, and are very likely to make another attempt this evening. +They would be pretty sure to succeed this time, for there are only seven +of us left there; and though they could make a good fight in daylight, +they would have no real chance if the Boers went at them in earnest, +which they are sure to do next time. We agreed before I started that it +would not do to try to defend the yard. After I left they were going to +pile everything movable against the doors and windows and fight hard to +keep the Boers out, and would then go upstairs and sell their lives +dearly." + +"How far are the Boer horses out?" + +"About five hundred yards away, in a dip. We know they always keep three +or four men on guard there, for we have seen them come out of the hollow +sometimes." + +"And the cattle, have they driven them off yet?" + +"Yes; four of the Boers and twenty or thirty natives went straight on +with them as soon as they had driven us into the farmhouse. I am afraid +there is no use thinking of getting them back." + +"It depends upon how far they have gone," Chris said. "The rains have +brought the grass up, and as likely as not they may halt when they get +to some good pastures and wait till the others join them. It is not +likely that all that gang came from one place." + +"I expect that they have been gathered up from lonely farmhouses where +they have escaped the commandos, and they will want to divide their +plunder between them; they don't trust each other a bit, and each would +cheat his fellows of his share if he could. So I should think that what +you suggest is likely enough, and that it has been arranged to wait when +they come to a good place till the others arrive. But you are not +thinking of rescuing them, are you?" + +"If we thrash the Boers at the farm I shall certainly have a try. We did +carry off two or three thousand head about two months ago from the hands +of at least as large a party as this, and I don't see why we should not +do it again. It was near Mount Umhlumba." + +"Was it your party that did that?" the farmer exclaimed. "Why, it was +the talk of the whole district, and some of the cattle belonged to a +friend of mine. He told me how he had been saved from ruin. Well, sir, +after that I shall feel more confident than I acknowledge I have been up +to now. Captain Brookfield told me about your going into the Boer camp +in disguise, and to Komati-poort, and how you surprised a party of Boers +looting a farm near Dundee; but he did not mention that. In fact, he had +only just finished telling me the other affairs when you came in saying +that you were ready to start. Well, well, it is wonderful that a party +of young gentlemen like yours should have done such things!" + +They did not hurry their horses, but for the most part went at the +steady canter to which the animals were most accustomed; occasionally +they would walk for a bit. + +At Weenan, where they crossed the Bushman river, they halted for half an +hour, and for double that time after crossing the Mooi at Intembeni; +then as the sun began to lose its power they went fast, until, when they +reached one of the farthest spurs of Botha's Castle, the farmer said: + +"When we get over the next rise we shall see the house." + +Chris gave the order to dismount, and, going forward on foot, they threw +themselves down when close to the crest, and crawled forward until they +obtained a fair view. Sankey and Chris were again provided with glasses, +having bought them on the day before starting at the sale of the effects +of several officers who had fallen in a fight at Vaal Krantz, and all +gazed intently for some time at the house. "Thank God they are all right +so far!" Chris said to the farmer. "I can see the Boers lying all round +the house, and that dark clump is their horses; so our ride has not been +in vain. I suppose it is about a mile and a half from here. I don't see +the gate into the yard. Which side is it?" + +"That corner of the house hides it. It is on the eastern side." + +"It will be quite dark in an hour; when it is so, we will move down a +bit farther, then we will halt till we hear them attacking. We must not +go nearer, for the moon will be up by that time. If I had known that we +should have got here before dark, we need not have troubled to bring the +Zulus. I intended to send them forward to see how matters stood, then +they could have guided us right up to the gate. However, as they have +all got guns, and can shoot, it will add to the panic our attack will +create, and they will all be pleased at the chance of at last getting a +shot at the Boers. They were complaining to me the other day that they +were very happy in all other respects, but they were very much +disappointed at not having had a fight." + +The natives were indeed delighted when, on Chris rejoining them, he told +them that they should take their share in the attack on the Boers. Chris +and his friends all threw themselves on the ground, after sending up +Jack to the crest to keep watch. But the farmer said, "I dare not lie +down; if I did, I should never get up again." + +He had, indeed, to be lifted off his horse when they dismounted. + +"I can quite understand that," Chris said. "I feel stiff and tired +myself, and you must be almost made of iron to have ridden one hundred +and forty miles almost without halting." + +"If anyone had told me that I could do it, I should not have believed +him. Of course one is on horseback a good many hours a day. Often, after +going round the farm, I start at two or three o'clock and ride into +Greytown and back; but that is only a matter of some fifteen miles each +way. Still, when one has got seven men's lives depending upon one, one +makes a big effort." + +"I tell you what, Mr. Searle. The best thing you can do is to strip and +lie down. I will set the two Zulus to knead you. You will find yourself +quite a new man after it." + +"That is a good idea, King, and I will adopt it." + +For half an hour the two men rubbed and kneaded the farmer's muscles +from head to foot, exerting themselves until the perspiration streamed +from them. Then one of them brought up one of the water-skins and poured +the contents over him. + +"That has certainly done me a world of good," the farmer said when he +had dressed himself. "I don't say the stiffness has all gone, but I +certainly don't feel any worse than I did when I got to your camp. I +should never have thought of it myself." + +"It is what is done after a Turkish bath," Chris said. "I have had them +often at Johannesburg. The natives do something of the same sort. They +make a little hut of boughs, and fill a hole in the middle with hot +stones and pour water over them, and steam themselves, and I believe get +rubbed too." + +As soon as they considered it dark enough to be perfectly safe, they led +their horses down until they judged that they were within half a mile of +the house, then dismounted and waited. Chris had already made all +arrangements. Carmichael, who was the leader for the time being of one +of the sections of five, was with his party to ride straight for the +Boers' horses directly the attack began. The firing at the house would +act as a guide to the spot where they were placed, and he was, if +possible, to attack them from behind. He was to shoot down the guards, +but not to pursue them if the horses bolted on hearing the attack on the +house. + +"What you have to do is to stampede them," Chris said. "As soon as you +have got them on the run, keep them going, and if they scatter, do you +scatter too. The Boers without their horses will be at our mercy. Don't +stop till you have driven them five miles away. Then you can halt till +morning. As you come back, you are likely enough to hear firing, and can +then ride towards it and join us. But don't get within rifle-shot of the +Boers. I don't want any lives thrown away. If you hear three shots at +regular intervals during the night ride towards the sound. I may want +you here." + +It was just ten o'clock when there was a violent outburst of fire at the +farmhouse, and all sprung into their saddles. + +"Now, Carmichael, do you gallop on. Get as close as you can to the +horses without being observed. Go at a walk the last hundred yards or +so; the horse guards are not likely to hear you, they are sure to be up +on the edge of the dip watching the farm. Stay quiet till you hear our +yell, and then go straight in to them. In that case you may manage +without their getting a shot at you, for as likely as not they will have +strolled up without their rifles." + +As soon as Carmichael's little party had started, Chris moved on with +the rest at a walk. + +"There is no occasion to hurry," he said. "It will take the Boers some +time to force their way in, and the hotter they are at work the less +likely they will be to hear us." In two or three minutes he ordered them +to canter. "It is of no use charging; I expect that they are all inside +the yard." It was, however, at a fast pace that they rode up towards the +wall. Chris blew his whistle, and the cheer of the whites and the warcry +of the two Zulus burst out at the top of their voices. + +"Give it to them hot, lads!" Chris shouted, for the benefit of the +Boers. "Kill every man-jack of the scoundrels!" And at once nineteen +rifles opened upon the dark figures clustered round the house. "Use your +magazines," Chris shouted again. "Don't let a man of them get off." + +Appalled by the sudden attack, ignorant of the number of their +assailants, and mown down by the terrible fire, the Boers on the two +sides of the house exposed to it did not think of resistance, but all +who could do so made a rush round to the other sides, and, joining their +companions there, clambered over the wall and made for their horses; but +these had already gone. As Chris had anticipated, the four guards were +watching the farmhouse, and did not hear the approach of Carmichael's +party. As Chris's whistle sounded these galloped forward, and at their +volley three of the Boers fell, the other fled. At once with loud shouts +they charged in among the ponies, who were already kicking and plunging +at the sudden sound of firearms. A minute later they were all in full +flight, followed by the five lads shouting and yelling. The firing had +been unnoticed by the Boers round the house, and these, when on arriving +at the hollow they found their horses gone, gave vent to their alarm and +rage in many strange oaths, and then scattered in flight all over the +country. + +"It is of no use trying to pursue," Chris said, as soon as it was found +that all the Boers, save those lying dying or dead, had escaped from the +yard. "We should only ruin the horses, and they have done a big day's +work already." + +The besieged could be heard hastily removing the barricades against the +door, and in two or three minutes ran out, almost bewildered at the +suddenness of their relief, when they thought that nothing remained to +be done but to sell their lives dearly. A few hurried words explained +the position to them, and their gratitude to Chris and his party was +unbounded. Their first step was to attend to the fallen Boers. Of these +there were eighteen wounded and eleven killed, and as soon as all in +their power had been done for the former, and they had been carried into +the house, a blazing fire was lit in one of the rooms and the party all +gathered there. + +"Now, Mr. King," Searle said, "you are the baas of this party; what do +you think had best be done?" + +"I think the first thing," Chris said, "is to post half a dozen men, +three or four hundred yards away, round the house. We must not run the +risk of the tables being turned on us by the Boers crawling up and +surprising us; they may still be hanging about in numbers. Peters, you +take Harris, Bryan, and Capper, and the two Zulus, and post them round +the house. The natives' ears are much sharper than yours are, and if +either of them thinks he hears anything let them crawl out in that +direction and reconnoitre. When I whistle, do you come in to me, leaving +the others on guard, then I will tell you what we have decided upon." + +The four named at once went outside, and, calling the natives, left the +yard. Jack had already filled the kettles the colonists had brought with +them, and placed them over the fire. + +"While the tea is getting ready," Chris said, "we had better give a good +feed of mealies to all the horses. How many of yours are there left?" he +asked one of the colonists. + +"All the twelve we had at first were unwounded this evening, but I can't +say whether any of them have been hit since. The wall was too high for +bullets to touch them as long as the Boers were outside, but most likely +as we were firing through the window we may have hit some of them." + +"I don't suppose you did so, because I fancy that directly the Boers +began fighting here the horses bunched in one corner of the yard. Well, +will you feed them also, and see how many are uninjured. That is a +matter of importance, for our horses will scarcely be fit for work in +the morning. Do you think yours may be?" + +"Yes, I think so; we have only been shut up three days, and they have +had a good deal of pickings, what with the beds and what was lying about +in the yard before; and a good feed now will certainly set them up. What +do you propose to do?" + +"Well, I want in the first place to get enough of the Boer ponies in to +mount us all, and in the second to overtake and cut the Boers off if +possible, and lastly to rescue the cattle. Five of our party are away +after the horses, but their object was to scatter them. They were to +halt about five miles away, and if they heard three rifle shots at +regular intervals they were to ride towards them." + +"Do you want them in here? if so, I will go out and give the signal. We +have taken it by turns to sleep, so we are all fairly fresh." + +"Yes, I want them in, but I specially want them to collect and drive in +a score of the Boer ponies." "At daybreak we will all go," another of +the farmers said, "and lend a hand." + +"With this moon we ought to be able to find some of the men without +waiting for daylight," Chris said. "It would be an immense thing if we +could be after them before they have got too long a start." + +"It would indeed. Well, we will feed our horses at once, and by the time +we have had a cup of tea they will be ready to start. If we have luck, +we ought not to be away more than a couple of hours." + +"It would make our success pretty well a certainty if we could get the +ponies by that time," Chris said. + +In less than half an hour the seven farmers started. Only one of the +horses had been killed, and they rode away at a rate that showed that +the others were none the worse for their three days on somewhat short +rations. + +"Now," Chris said, after seeing them off, "we will get a couple of +hours' sleep. I wish Peters and his party could do the same, but it +would not do to trust to the Boers not coming back again." + +All were asleep in a few minutes, but an hour later they heard a shot +fired, followed by several others. They leapt to their feet, seized +their rifles, and ran out into the yard. There was, however, no +repetition of the firing, and a few minutes later Peters came in and +reported that the Zulus had discovered a number of Boers making their +way cautiously forward. Both had fired, and some shots had been +returned, but the Boers had at once drawn off. + +"I don't suppose we shall hear any more of them. They hoped they might +catch us asleep. Now they find that we are on watch. I expect they will +give up the idea and make off. It is a nuisance having been disturbed, +but I am not sorry for it, for the Boers will have lost a couple of +hours, and even if the horses do not come in we shall still have a +chance of overtaking them. Now, Peters, you had better get forty winks; +I will go out with Brown, Field, and Sankey, and relieve the three out +there. I don't suppose they will come in, but they can take a nap where +they are. You need not send out when the farmers come back; we shall see +them." + +Chris had been nearly two hours on watch when he made out in the bright +moonlight a number of horses and mounted figures going towards the +house. He at once woke the sleepers and called the others in, and by the +time they reached the farm some thirty unmounted ponies, followed by +Carmichael's party and the farmers, came up. + +"We have been longer than we expected," one of the latter said as he +dismounted, "but we were lucky at last in finding this lot together in a +kloof. Have you seen anything of the Boers? We thought we heard a few +shots." + +"Yes, they came here and tried to turn the tables on us; but we had the +Zulus and some of the scouts out. When they found that we were watchful +they decamped. Now, Carmichael, go in with your party and get a cup of +tea." + +"What! are we going to start again?" Carmichael asked rather dismally; +"we were only just getting off to sleep when Willesden, who was on +watch, heard three shots." + +"Some of us have only had an hour's sleep, Carmichael. But there is +another day's work before us, and after that you may sleep for twenty- +four hours if you like." + +"Oh! I suppose I can do it if the others can; still, after seventy-five +miles here, five miles out, and something like five miles chasing the +horses, and five miles back again, I think we have done a pretty good +day's work." "No doubt you have," Chris said, "a thundering good day's +work; but a fellow is not worth calling a fellow if he can't manage to +do two days' work at a stretch for once in a way. At any rate, the +horses will be fresh, which is of much more importance than our being +so; they have had three days' perfect rest. Now, while you are having +your tea we will see about the other arrangements. Of course Mr. Searle +will stop here; he has done double the work that we have. His friends +can do as they like. Naturally we shall be glad to have them with us, +but that is as they choose." + +"Of course we will go with you," one of the colonists said. + +"Thank you! At any rate two of you had better stop with Mr. Searle. +There are the wounded Boers to look after. I see there is a waggon in +the yard; I should think they had better be put in that and carried to +Greytown. If we recover the cattle, we will drive them down there." + +None of the farmers was willing to stay, and at last they had to decide +the question by lot. + +"Now," Chris said, "you gentlemen know the country a great deal better +than we do, and can tell us which way they are most likely to take their +cattle." + +"They are sure to go north, there is no other way for them to go. If the +whole party were together and mounted, they might go up through +Zululand; as it is, they would not venture to do that. They will cross +the Tugela, I should say, between the point where the Mooi runs into it +and its junction with the Buffalo, and go up through Colsie, and then +either through Helpmakaar or Lazarath." + +"Well, I hope we shall catch them long before they get to the Tugela." + +"I expect the cattle will be somewhere near Inadi; there is some good +grazing along there, and as all the loyalists have cleared off long ago +they will have no fear of being disturbed." + +The saddles were transferred from their own horses to the Boer ponies, +and it was finally arranged that the waggon with the wounded should not +start until their return. Jack and the two Zulus were left with them, +and even should another party of Boers come along the six men would be +able to defend themselves till the others returned. Half an hour after +the arrival of Carmichael's party they started in pursuit, and directed +their course for Inadi, as it would have been useless to search for the +Boers, and it was certain that these would make for the point where it +had been arranged that the cattle should cross. It was some fifteen +miles away, and they were confident that they would arrive there before +the Boers, who, bad walkers at the best of times, and disheartened by +their failure, at the loss of many of their companions and of all their +horses, would not have got more than half-way by the time they started. + +It was half-past two when they left, and when they approached Inadi day +was breaking. They had put on their Boer hats, and knew that the men in +charge of the herd would take them to be some of their own party until +they were quite close. To their satisfaction they saw the herd grazing +half a mile south of the village, and it was not until they were within +a hundred yards of the spot where the smoke of a fire showed that the +guard were posted, that they saw any movement. Then a man rose to his +feet, and, looking at them earnestly, gave a shout of alarm. The others +leapt up at once and ran towards their ponies; these were fifty yards +away, and before they could reach them Chris and his party dashed up, +rifle in hand. "Surrender," he shouted in Dutch, "or we fire! Down with +your rifles!" + +Seeing that resistance was useless the Boers threw down their weapons, +and in a minute were tied hand and foot with the ropes from their +saddles. They were then lashed to bushes at some little distance from +each other, so as to prevent their rolling together and loosening each +other's cords. The natives with them had at the first alarm fled at full +speed, and were already out of sight. Then the whole party rode to a +ridge a quarter of a mile back, dismounted at its foot, and crawled up +to the crest. A mile away some fifty men could be seen wearily making +their way on foot towards them. + +"We have done quite enough in the way of fighting," Chris said, "and I +should think that they have had more than enough; we will get them to +surrender if we can. We will wait till they are within forty or fifty +yards and then fire a few shots over their heads, and see what comes of +it. We have good cover here, and they are in the open. They will know +very well that there is not a chance of their getting away, for, as we +have horses and they have none, we could defend any eminence we chose to +occupy, and ride off to another if they were likely to take it. Besides, +they would never be able to cross the river under our fire." + +When the Boers were within eighty yards half a dozen rifles were +discharged. They at once threw themselves on the ground. + +"I will give them a chance of talking it over," Chris said, "then I will +hail them." + +A pause ensued, and the Boers could be heard talking excitedly together. +When he thought that he had given them time enough to appreciate their +condition, Chris shouted in Dutch: + +"Hullo, Boers! We don't want to have to kill you all, which we could +certainly do. You must see that you are at our mercy. If you choose to +surrender you may go home; if you don't, we shall let you lie there as +long as you like, and shoot you down when you get on your feet. I will +give you five minutes to make up your minds." + +At the end of that time one of the Boers held up his rifle with a white +flag tied to it. + +[Illustration: "ONE OF THE BOERS HELD UP HIS RIFLE WITH A WHITE FLAG +TIED TO IT."] + +"That is not good enough for us," Chris shouted. "That trick has been +tried too often. If you surrender, you will take off your bandoliers and +belts and leave them and your rifles behind you, and come forward +unarmed." + +There was a shout of fury among the Boers as they found that their +treacherous design had failed in success. + +"I will give you another five minutes," Chris shouted; "and if you don't +do as I tell you we shall open fire on you." + +Before that time was up the Boers were seen to be taking off their +bandoliers, and one by one they rose and came forward in a body without +their rifles. Chris allowed them to come half-way, so that they could +not, when they found themselves in superior force, run back to their +arms again. He gave the word, and his party rose to their feet. + +"Now," he said, as the Boers came up, "you will turn all your pockets +inside out. I have not the least doubt that you are all taking off +mementos of your visit here." + +Indeed, the pockets of the prisoners were all bulging out. Sullenly the +Boers obeyed the order. The collection was a miscellaneous one. They had +between them the spoil of a dozen farms. Women's finery formed a large +proportion of their loot, and was evidently intended for their wives at +home. Besides this were spoons, forks, and cutlery, chimney ornaments, +children's clothes, several purses, and packets of spare cartridges. + +"That will do very nicely," Chris said, when it had been ascertained +that all the plunder had been disgorged. "Now, gentlemen, you are at +liberty to go, and I wish you a pleasant walk home. It is only about a +hundred miles. Your friends with the cattle shall join you at once. I +have no doubt that you will be able to obtain food from your countrymen +as you go along. You are sure to find friends at all the villages, and +some of you may get ponies at Helpmakaar." + +Then, paying no attention to the curses and threats of the Boers, the +party rode forward and collected the Boer guns, emptied the bandoliers +and belts, and then rode back to the cattle and released the four Boers +with them, and, pointing to their comrades, told them to rejoin them. +Then they collected the cattle, and, driving them before them, rode off. +When they had gone five miles away they halted, and the farmers +undertaking to keep watch by turns, the lads, throwing themselves down, +were in a few minutes fast asleep. + +In four hours they were roused, and continued their course till they +reached the farm. Here they rested till the next morning, then at +daybreak the wounded Boers were placed in a waggon; the ammunition was +divided among the farmers; and the rifles taken from the Boers, and +those that belonged to the killed and wounded, amounting in all to +eighty-one, were, after the charges had been carefully drawn, also +placed in the waggon, Chris saying, "They would be useless to us, and +they may be useful to you, for they will arm all the people in Greytown; +and with eighty magazine rifles you ought to be able to beat off any +parties you may meet. As the cattle are all branded you will have no +difficulty in returning them to their owners; as to the Boer ponies and +saddles, no doubt there are many who have lost their horses who will be +glad of them." + +Then, after renewed expressions of gratitude from the farmers, the party +separated, the colonists going south to Greytown, while the scouts rode +west by the line they had come, and late that evening arrived at +Chieveley. They had intended to halt after crossing the Bushman's river +at Weenan, but they heard the sound of artillery and knew that Buller +was again moving forward. + +Their return created quite an excitement in the camp of the Maritzburg +Scouts, and innumerable questions were asked. + +"We have been on a little business of our own," Chris said. "Beyond the +fact that it has been successful we have nothing to say. You know how +strict the orders are against scouting, and therefore I can only say +that we wanted to give our horses a change of food, and have taken them +three days off." + +"Your horses don't look any better for the change, anyhow," one of the +troopers said. "They look as if they had been worked off their legs." + +"Yes, they look a little drawn, but in a couple of days they will feel +the benefit of it; they were getting too fat before. Some day we may be +able to tell you more about it, but just at present we feel that it is +as well to keep the matter to ourselves. What has been doing here? We +heard the firing; that brought us in, or we should not have been back +till to-morrow." + +"Nothing particular, except that we have been battering them all along +the line. No move has been made yet, but the general idea is that we +shall this time make a try at Hlangwane to-morrow." "I hope we shall +take it," Chris said. "We shall have a good deal more trouble about it +than we should have had at the attack in December, when it was virtually +in our hands, whereas now it looks stronger than any point along the +line." + +Chris, however, was much more communicative to Captain Brookfield, who +said as he entered his tent, "Well, Chris, did you get there in time?" + +"Yes, sir; we caught them as they were attacking the house at ten +o'clock that night. They were too busy to notice us, and we killed +eleven and wounded eighteen, and stampeded their ponies. They bolted on +foot, but came back in hopes of surprising us two hours later, which I +need hardly say they failed to do. Then they made off for the place +where the herds they had captured were waiting for them. We drove their +ponies in, as our own were too much done up to go on, and intercepted +the Boers close to Inadi, and made them surrender. We took their guns, +ammunition, and loot from them, and let them go. There were forty-nine +of them altogether, and we did not see what we were to do with them. We +could not have brought them here without the whole thing being made +public, and we were certainly not disposed to escort them down to +Maritzburg. They will have at least a hundred miles to tramp home. We +recovered all the cattle, about two thousand head. We gave them to the +farmers to find their proper owners, and thirty of the Boer horses that +we captured. I dare say they will pick up some more of them; for as we +were in a hurry, we only drove in as many as we wanted. We have no +casualties. It could hardly be called a fight, it was a sudden surprise, +and they did not stop to count us." + +"Bravo! bravo, Chris! And now I suppose you are going to enlist again?" +"Yes, sir, if you will take us." + +"Certainly I will. Fortunately Buller was at Frere until they moved on +again yesterday, and nobody has missed your little camp as far as I +know, so I don't think that there is any chance of questions being +asked. I will swear you all in again if you will bring the others +round." + + + + +CHAPTER XVIII + +RAILWAY HILL + + +There was little talking that evening. As soon as the tents had been +erected, a cup of cocoa and a biscuit taken, all turned in, and even the +constant booming of the artillery and the occasional sharp crack of +musketry had no effect whatever on their slumbers. Just before Chris lay +down, however, an orderly told him that Captain Brookfield wished to see +him. + +"I have just received orders, Chris, that our brigade of cavalry is to +turn out tomorrow morning to support the infantry. Hildyard, Lyttleton, +and Barton are going. Their object is to carry Cingola, which is the +small peak at the end of the nek extending from it to the high peak of +Monte Cristo. The duty of the mounted infantry will be to clear the +eastern side of the southern end of the range, and to hold the nek +separating it from the highest peak, and so prevent the Boers from their +main position reinforcing the defenders of the lower peak. I think that +your party had better remain in camp, for after doing over seventy miles +today they won't be fit for work tomorrow." "We should not like to be +left behind here, sir, and the hill is not very far away, so that it +would not be hard work for the horses. No doubt we should be dismounted +a considerable part of the day." + +"Then you would rather go, Chris?" + +"Much rather, sir. We should all be terribly disappointed if we could +not go out the first day that there has been a chance of our doing +something." + +"It is always as well to be on the right side, but I hardly think so +many troops will really be required; and I think it is a symptom that a +serious attack will be made in a day or two on Monte Cristo and +Hlangwane. You see, the possession of Cingola and Monte Cristo will take +us pretty well round its flank, and I do not expect the Boers will be so +much prepared there as they are in front." + +An hour before daylight all were out engaged in grooming their horses, +which, having received a hot mash of mealie flour directly they came in +on the previous evening, looked better than could have been expected +after their hard work on two days out of three. By the time they had +finished, the natives had breakfast ready, and they had scarcely eaten +this when a trumpet sounded to horse. Five minutes later the mounted +infantry belonging to the regular regiments and the Colonial Horse +formed up, and, led by Lord Dundonald, marched north-east, followed by +the three infantry brigades and some batteries of artillery. When within +a couple of miles of the nek, the mounted infantry galloped forward, and +selecting a spot where the ascent was gradual, pushed rapidly up the +hill until they reached its brow. Here the horses were placed in a +depression, and the men scattered themselves across the crest. They were +but just in time, for a considerable force of Boers from Monte Cristo +were hurrying along to assist the defenders of Cingola, it having now +become evident to them that this was the point to which the infantry +moving across the plain were making. + +A brisk fire was opened as they approached, and the Boers at once +stopped in surprise, for as they came along they had been unable to see +that the cavalry had quitted the rest of the column, and had therefore +no idea whatever that their way to Cingola was barred. As the rapid fire +showed them that the nek was held in force, they did not think it +prudent to advance farther, but after an exchange of fire fell back to +Monte Cristo. The task of the infantry was now comparatively easy. +Cingola was not held in any great force; and seeing that their retreat +along the nek was cut off, and that they could not hope to resist the +strong force that was approaching, the enemy contented themselves with +keeping up a brisk fire for a time, and then retreated hastily down the +northern face of the hill, and scattered among numerous kopjes between +it and the river. Lyttleton and Hildyard's brigades occupied the peak, +and Barton, with the Fusilier battalions, remained to the left of its +base. + +As the mounted infantry had, before opening fire, taken shelter behind +bushes and rocks, there were only two or three casualties, and they were +much disappointed that the affair had been so trifling. It was afternoon +now, and for the rest of the day comparative quietude reigned, although +Monte Cristo threw an occasional shell on to the crest of Cingola. The +mounted infantry remained all night in their position, acting as an +advanced guard to the infantry; but they had orders to descend the hill +before daybreak and return to Chieveley, there being no water obtainable +for their horses, and their services not being required for the +succeeding operations. The next morning (Sunday) a battery of field- +artillery, which had been taken half-way up Cingola, began to shell +Monte Cristo, and as if this had been the signal, the whole of the +artillery on the plain opened a terrific fire on the entrenchments of +Monte Cristo, Hlangwane, and Green Hill, which was close to Monte +Cristo. + +On the morning of the 18th, Lyttleton and Hildyard's brigades moved +forward to storm the precipitous peak, and Barton's brigade marched +against the tangled and difficult ground that surrounded Green Hill. The +Queen's on the right and the Scotch Fusiliers on the left led the attack +against the peak. The hillside was partly wooded, but although the +smokeless powder gave little indication as to the progress the troops +were making, occasional glimpses of the Boers flitting among the trees +showed that these were falling back. The roar of musketry was +continuous, as Hildyard's brigade and Lyttleton's were both engaged. For +a short time there was a pause, and then Lyttleton's men, having +gathered at the edge of a wood some couple of hundred yards from the +summit, advanced with a rush up the terribly steep rocks. The Boers +fired hurriedly, but the bullets flew for the most part far over the +heads of the Queen's, and then, fearful of being caught by Hildyard's +men, who were also rapidly coming up, they fled hastily. + +The opposition had finally been trifling. The vast majority of the Boers +had cleared off, and the rest, after emptying their magazines, had +followed their example before the troops gained the summit, upon which a +heavy cannonade was at once opened from Grobler's Hill, Fort Wylie, and +other Boer positions. This, however, gradually slackened under the storm +of lyddite shells with which they were pelted by the naval guns, and the +important position of Hlangwane was at last secured, and no time was +lost in getting up guns and preparing for a farther advance. Barton's +brigade had been equally successful in their attack, and half an hour +after the capture of Monte Cristo the Fusiliers crowned the summit of +the wood-covered Green Hill. + +The Boers' defences were now examined, and proved to be of a most +formidable nature. On the south face of the hill the trenches were in +tiers, line behind line. Most of them were fully six feet deep, and in +many cases provided with shelter from the weather by sheets of +corrugated iron, taken from the roofs of the houses in Colenso. In some +cases these were supported by props, and covered with six feet of earth. +These had evidently been used for sleeping and living places. The ground +was strewn with straw, empty tins, fragments of food, bones, cartridge- +cases, old bandoliers, and large quantities of unopened tinned food and +sacks of mealie flour. Here and there were patches of dried blood, +showing where the wounded by our shell had been brought in, and laid +down until they could be removed to the hospital under cover of night. +On the plateau the scene was similar. Here every irregularity of ground +had been utilized, and long lines of trenches intersected it, showing +that the Boers had intended to make a desperate resistance even after we +had won our way up the hill. These were in a similar state of litter and +disorder. + +Although they had saved their guns, they had left behind them large +quantities of ammunition and provisions in the hurried flight, +necessitated by our attack being delivered in a direction from which no +danger had been apprehended, Four waggons full of ammunition had been +left by them in a kloof near the river. These had been observed by the +Engineers in the balloon, and their position had been signalled to the +naval brigade, who, turning their guns upon them, before long succeeded +in blowing them up. + +When the infantry prepared for their final rush the Boers appeared, +indeed, to be entirely disconcerted at an attack from an altogether +unexpected direction. While for weeks they had been working incessantly +to render the hill impregnable, they had prepared it only on the face +against which they made sure the British infantry would dash itself. +Nevertheless, in this, as in every action, the Boers, as soon as they +saw that there was a risk of the position being taken, began early to +make preparations for retreat. While keeping up a very heavy musketry +fire on the woods through which the British infantry were advancing, +they began to withdraw their guns. + +The speed and skill with which on every occasion throughout the war they +shifted heavy pieces of artillery from one point to another, or withdrew +them altogether, was a new feature in warfare. Except when the garrison +of Ladysmith, on two occasions of night sorties, surprised and destroyed +three of their guns, they scarcely lost a piece either in the numerous +actions during our advance to Ladysmith, or in their final retreat from +that town. And similarly on the other side, of the very large number of +guns employed at the fight on the Modder, at Magersfontein, and in the +siege of Kimberley the whole were, with the exception of a few pieces +captured when Cronje was surrounded, withdrawn in spite of the hurried +evacuation of their position, a feat almost unparalleled even in an army +accompanied only by field-artillery, and extraordinary indeed in the +case of works mounting heavy siege-guns. + +No farther advance was made till the afternoon, when General Buller +arrived on the summit of Green Hill, and seeing that Hlangwane was not +entrenched on its northern side, which was completely turned by our +advance, sent Barton's brigade against it. But the loss of Monte Cristo +had for the time quite taken the fight out of the Boers, and after +maintaining a brisk fire for a short period, they evacuated the position +as soon as the infantry neared the summit, and, hurrying down the +western slope, crossed the Tugela. Three camps full of provisions, +blankets, and the necessaries of Boer life fell into the hands of the +captors, together with a large amount of rifle and Maxim ammunition. The +place had been turned into a fortress. Trenches and some breastworks +covered all the approaches by which the Boers might look for an attack, +and as the whole mountain was covered with huge boulders, they were able +to withstand even the storm of lyddite shell that was poured upon them. + +On the following day Hart's brigade received orders to advance towards +Colenso. This was still held in force by the Boers, but was now +commanded by guns that had been got up the slopes of Hlangwane, and on +Tuesday morning General Hart captured the position without serious loss, +the Boers suffering severely from our shrapnel fire as they retreated, +some by the iron bridge and others by a ford. Thorneycroft's Mounted +Infantry, which was called up in the evening, took advantage of the +discovery that a drift existed there, and a squadron forded the river in +spite of a scattered fire from the Boers on the opposite bank. Another +portion of the colonial force occupied Fort Wylie, a redoubt that had +been thrown up by our troops when they occupied Colenso, but had been +abandoned when the advance of the Boers to cut the line between Colenso +and Frere forced them to retire. + +The next morning Thorneycroft's regiment crossed, and, moving to the +left, seized the kopjes facing Grobler's Kloof; the Boers, still +suffering from the effect of their unexpected reverses, offered no +resistance, but, abandoning all their camps, trenches, and redoubts, +retired at once to the hill. The Scouts had followed Thorneycroft's +Horse in support, and now, placing their horses under shelter in the +abandoned entrenchments, prepared to act as infantry should the Boers +take the offensive. This, however, they showed no intention of doing, +and in the afternoon the troops who had crossed were able to examine the +deserted camps. They presented very much the same appearance as those on +Monte Cristo and Hlangwane. Many of them appeared to have been occupied +by men of a better position, as many articles of luxury, choicer food, +wearing apparel, newspapers, Bibles, fruit, and other signs of comfort +littered the places; but even here dirt had reigned supreme. Although +they must have been inhabited for a long time, it could be seen that no +attempts had been made to clear away the refuse, or to make them in any +degree tidy. As was natural, the effect of the heat of the sun on scraps +of food, vegetables, and refuse of all kinds caused a sickening stench, +and the soldiers spent as short a time as possible over their +investigations. One article which would have been found in a British +camp was altogether absent from those of the enemy, and it was a joke +among our troops that the only piece of soap ever captured was found in +the pocket of a dead Boer, and that its wrapper was still unopened. + +The strength of the position was, however, even more surprising than the +state of filth; every trench was enfiladed by another, great boulders +were connected by walls of massive construction, this being specially +the case where guns had been placed in position. Colenso itself had been +in a similar manner rendered almost impregnable to a frontal attack, and +could hardly have been captured by an assaulting force until Hlangwane +had been taken. + +The hills beyond the railway still covered the road bridge by their +fire, and had the troops marched across it they would have suffered +severely. Accordingly a pontoon train was sent through an opening in the +Hlangwane range, and a bridge thrown over the Tugela north of Fort +Wylie. The Dorsets, Middlesex, and Somersets crossed at once, and, +ascending the kopjes, extended their line south until they were in +communication with Thorneycroft's men, holding therefore the railway +line along the river bank nearly half the distance between Colenso and +Pieters station. Other regiments and artillery followed. + +It was now six days since the advance had commenced, and for the past +four fighting had been almost continuous. On Wednesday the three +regiments advanced towards Grobler's Hill in order to ascertain what +force was occupying it. They met with no opposition until they reached +the lower slopes, nor could any Boers be seen moving. Then suddenly a +heavy fire broke out from the boulders which covered the whole face of +the hill, and afforded such perfect shelter that it had not been +considered necessary to form entrenchments. As only a reconnaissance, +and not an attack, had been ordered, the force retired, the Somersets, +who were the leading regiment, having nearly a hundred casualties. The +other regiments had as many more between them. The next day a continuous +fire from all the points held by the Boers showed that large +reinforcements had reached them. The Lancashire Brigade, under Colonel +Wynne, started at two o'clock that afternoon to carry the kopjes up the +Brook Spruit, which ran in the rear of Grobler's Kloof. The Royal +Lancasters led the way, but as soon as they left the shelter of the +ridges by the side of the railway they were exposed to a terrible fire, +both in front and from Grobler's Kloof. The artillery on Hlangwane, and +those still on the plain, endeavoured to silence the enemy's guns, but +though they poured numbers of lyddite and shrapnel shells among them +they were unable to do so. The Lancasters advanced with the greatest +coolness up the spruit, followed by the South Lancasters. As they +pressed forward they were met by a heavy rifle fire both from the kopjes +in front and on the left. The Boers stuck to the hill until the +Lancasters were within a hundred yards, then most of them slunk off. Not +knowing this, the Lancasters lay under shelter for a few minutes until +their ammunition pouches had been replenished, then, being joined by the +South Lancasters and King's Royal Rifles, they rushed to the crest. + +For the past two days the Dublin Fusiliers had been lying near Colenso. +They had suffered very heavily in the first attack at Potgieter's Drift, +but they now volunteered to take Grobler's Hill; and this, aided with +the fire of the artillery and Colonel Wynne's brigade, they did in +gallant style, the Boers being evidently nervous that they might find +their retreat cut off should the Lancasters advance farther up the +spruit. + +On Friday afternoon the Irish Brigade advanced along the line, and then +turned off towards Railway Hill, a steep jagged eminence almost +triangular in shape, with one angle pointing towards the river. The +sides were broken with sharp ledges covered with boulders. The railway +passed through this, separating the last jagged ledge from the higher +portion of the hill, which rises almost precipitously. Running back +several hundred yards at the base of this line was a dip full of thorn +trees. This deep winds round the rear of the hill, and here there was a +large Boer Camp. + +A little farther to the rear was another steep hill, on which the +enemy's Creusot guns were now mounted. Several trenches were cut +alongside the hillsides, and on the crest were some strong redoubts. It +was a most formidable position, but as it seemed to bar all progress +farther up the line, it was necessary to carry it at all costs. The +mounted infantry had, after the skirmish towards Grobler's Kloof, +returned to the camp, as the country was so terribly broken as to be +altogether impracticable for mounted men. + +On Thursday, Captain Brookfield had obtained a pass for himself and +three other officers to go to Hlangwane to view the operations, but one +of these being unwell, Captain Brook-field invited Chris to take his +place. After inspecting the plateau, they made their way down to the +left. Hearing that an attack was about to be made on Railway Hill, they +clambered down until they reached a point where, seated in an open spot +among the trees, they could command a view of what was passing. + +"It is an awful place," Chris said, "and it seems to me almost +impossible to be carried." + +"It is an awful place," Captain Brookfield agreed. "This is one of the +times, Chris, when one feels the advantage of belonging to a mounted +corps, for without being less brave than other men, I should regard it +as an order to meet certain death were I told to attack that rugged +hill. Ah, there are the Irish Brigade!" + +The storming party consisted of the Inniskillings, with companies of the +Dublins, the Connaught Bangers, and the Imperial Light Infantry. From a +building called Platelayer's House at the mouth of the spruit, to the +foot of the hill, the ground was perfectly open to the point where the +left face of Railway Hill rose steeply up, and across this open ground, +a distance of half a mile, the assailants had to march. + +"Here they come!" + +As, in open order, with their rifles at the trail, the Inniskillings +appeared in view, a terrible fire broke out from every ledge of Railway +Hill, while the cannon joined in the roar. The guns on Hlangwane, and +those on the slopes nearer the river, with Maxims and quick-firing guns, +replied on our side. + +"It is awful," Chris said, speaking to himself rather than to the +captain who was standing beside him. "I don't think that even at +Badajos, British soldiers were ever sent on a more desperate enterprise. +It looks as if nothing could live under that fire even now; what will it +be when they get closer?" + +Not a shot was fired by the advancing infantry in reply to the storm of +bullets from the Boer marksmen. Every round of ammunition might be +wanted yet, and it would only be wasted on an invisible foe. They took +advantage of what little shelter could be obtained, sometimes close to +the river bank, sometimes following some slight depression which +afforded at least a partial protection. At last they reached a deep +donga running into the river; this was crossed by a small bridge, and in +passing over it they had to run the gauntlet of the Boer fire. Many fell +here, but the stream of men passed on, and then at a double rushed to a +sheltered spot close to the foot of the ascent, where they had been +ordered to gather. Here they had a breathing space. Their real work was +yet to begin, but already their casualties had been numerous. The +Inniskillings alone had lost thirty-eight killed and wounded. Not a word +had been spoken among the little group on the hill, for the last ten +minutes; they stood with tightly-pressed lips, breath coming hard, and +pale faces looking at the scene. Occasionally a short gasp broke from +one or other as a shell burst in the thick of the men crossing the +little bridge, a cry as if they themselves had been struck. When the +troops gained their shelter there was a sigh of relief. + +"They will never do it," Captain Brookfield said decidedly. "It would +need ten times as many men to give them a chance." + +This was the opinion of them all, and they hoped even now that this was +but the advance party, and that ere long they would see a far larger +body of men coming up. But there were no signs of reinforcements, and at +five o'clock the troops were re-formed and the advance began. They +dashed forward up the hill under a heavy fire, to which the supporting +line replied. The boulders afforded a certain amount of shelter, and of +this the Inniskillings took every advantage, until they reached the last +ledge with comparatively little loss. But the work was still before +them. Leaping over, they rushed down on to the railway line. Here a +wire-fence arrested their course for a moment, and many fell while +getting through or over it. Then they ran across the line, passed +through a fence on the other side, and dashed up the steep angle of the +hill to the first trench. Hitherto the fire of the Boers had been far +less destructive than might have been expected, their attention being +confused and their aim flurried by the constant explosion of lyddite +shell from the British batteries. They had but one eye for their +assailants, the other for the guns, and as each of the heavy pieces was +fired, they ducked down for shelter, only to get up again to take a +hasty shot before having to hide again. + +Thus, then, they were in no condition to reckon the comparatively small +numbers of their assailants, and as they saw the Irishmen dashing +forward, cheering loudly, with pointed bayonets, they hesitated, and +then bolted up the hill to the next trench. Instead of waiting until the +supports had come up for another rush, the Irishmen with a cheer dashed +across the trench in hot pursuit. But the next line was far more +strongly manned, and a storm of bullets swept among them. Still, for a +time they kept on, but wasting so rapidly that even the most desperate +saw that it could not be done; and, turning, the survivors retreated to +the trench that they had already won, while the supports fell back to +the railway, both suffering heavily in the retreat. No fewer than two +hundred of the Inniskillings had fallen in that desperate charge, their +colonel and ten officers being either killed or wounded, while the +Dublins also lost their colonel. + +All through the night the trench was held sternly, in spite of repeated +and desperate efforts of the Boers to dislodge its defenders. Nothing +could be done for those who lay wounded on the hill above. Morning +broke, and the fight still continued. At nine o'clock another desperate +charge was made; but the Boers were unable to face the steady fire that +was maintained by the defenders of the trench, and they again turned and +ran for their shelters. Just as this attack was repulsed, Lyttleton's +brigade arrived on the scene, exchanging a hearty cheer with the men who +had so long borne the brunt of this terrible conflict. The Durham Light +Infantry at once relieved those in the trenches, and these descended the +hill for the rest that was so much needed. All that day the fighting +continued, and while Lyttleton's men held to the position on Railway +Hill, there was fierce fighting away to the left, where the Welsh +Fusiliers and other regiments were hotly engaged. The roar of artillery +and musketry never ceased all day, but towards evening white flags were +hoisted on both sides, and a truce was agreed upon for twelve hours to +bury the dead. + +The scene of the conflict presented a terrible sight. The hillside +between the two trenches was strewn with dead and wounded. The +sufferings of the latter had been terrible. For six-and-thirty hours +they had lain where they fell, their only relief being a little water, +that in the short intervals during the fighting some kindly Boers had +crept down to give them. The truce began at four o'clock in the morning +of Sunday the 25th, and the foes of the previous day mingled with each +other in the sad work, conversing freely with each other. The Boers +expressed their astonishment that such an attempt should ever have been +made, and their stupefaction at the manner in which the Irish had +pressed on through a fire in which it had seemed that no human being +could have existed for a minute. When informed of the relief of +Kimberley, and the fact that Cronje was hopelessly surrounded, they +scoffed at the news as a fable, and were so honestly amused that it was +evident they had been kept absolutely in the dark by their leaders. +Captain Brookfield and his party had remained at the lookout until +darkness set in. After the first exclamation of pain and grief as they +saw the attack fail, and the fearfully thinned ranks run back to +shelter, there had been little said. "It was impossible from the first," +Captain Brookfield sighed as they turned. "If the relief of Ladysmith +depends on our carrying that hill, Ladysmith is doomed to fall." + +They returned to the spot where they had left their horses in charge of +two of the blacks, and rode back to Chieveley. It was a sorrowful +evening. The men's hopes had risen daily as position after position had +been carried, and now it seemed that once again the enterprise had +hopelessly failed. On Monday there was a continuation of the lull of +firing. Many of the officers in camp who were off duty rode up to +examine the scene of the fight, and they were not surprised when they +saw the infantry recrossing the pontoon bridge. All wore a dejected +aspect, but especially the men who had fought so heroically and, as it +now seemed, in vain. They sat watching until the last soldier had +crossed, and then rode to the top of Hlangwane. All Chris's party had +come out, and those who had not before seen the view waited there for a +couple of hours, ate some refreshment they had brought with them, +discussed the difficulties that lay in the way of farther advance, and +the probable point against which General Buller would next direct his +attack. + +"Hullo!" Chris exclaimed suddenly, "that pontoon train is not coming +back to camp. Do you see, after moving to the point where it passed +through this range, it has turned to the north again and not to the +south. Hurrah! Buller is not going to throw up the sponge this time. The +Boers have not done with us yet." This indeed was the case. The general, +seeing that Railway Hill was too strong to be carried by assault, unless +with an enormous loss of life, had caused the river to be reconnoitred +some distance farther up, and this had resulted in the discovery of a +spot where, with some little labour, the troops could get down to the +river and a pontoon bridge be again thrown. Such a spot was found by +Colonel Sandbach of the Royal Engineers, and a strong working party was +at once set to work to make a practicable approach. The point lay some +three or four miles below Railway Hill, and the most formidable of the +obstacles would therefore be turned. That night the troops crossed, and +the Boers--who were in ignorance of what had been going on, the point +chosen for the passage being at the bend of the river and hidden by an +intervening eminence from their positions--were astonished at finding a +strong force again across the river. + +As soon as the news reached the camp that the army was again crossing, +satisfaction took the place of the deep depression that had reigned +during the past two days, and the situation was eagerly discussed. Those +who at all knew the country were eagerly questioned as to the ground +farther on near the line of railway. All these agreed that the hill +called Pieter's was a formidable position, almost, though not perhaps +quite, as strong as Railway Hill, but that beyond it the line ran +through a comparatively open country, and that if this hill could be +captured the relief of Ladysmith would be ensured. The Scouts had not +escaped altogether scatheless. At the reconnaissance towards Grobler's +Hill, Brown, Harris, and Willesden had all been wounded, but none very +seriously, although at first it was thought that Willesden's was a +mortal injury, for he had been hit in the stomach. The doctors, however, +assured his anxious comrades that there was every ground for hope, for +very many of those who had been so injured had made a speedy recovery. + +"Poor old Willesden!" Field had said as they talked it over; "it is hard +that he should have been hit in the stomach, for he was a capital hand +at taking care of it." + +"And of ours too, Field. He has been a first-rate caterer. I do hope he +will pull through it." The lad himself had not seemed to suffer much +pain, and three days later the surgeon had been able to assure his +friends that as no fever had set in they had little fear of serious +consequences ensuing. The boys had not been allowed to see him. Captain +Brookfield, however, reported that he was going on capitally, but was in +a very bad temper because he was allowed to eat nothing but a piece of +bread and a sip of milk, while he declared himself desperately hungry, +and capable of devouring a good-sized leg of mutton. + +"I don't think you need worry about him," he said to Chris; "the doctor +told me that in a fortnight he would be very likely to be about again, +and none the worse for the wound, the bullet having evidently missed any +vital point, in which case its passage would heal as quickly as the +little wounds where the bullet enters and passes out usually do." + +Harris had his arm broken just above the elbow, and Brown a flesh wound +below the hip. He was the stoutest of the party, and jokingly said, as +he was carried back, that the bullet had passed through the largest +amount of flesh in the company. Chris once or twice went into the +hospitals with a doctor whose acquaintance he had made. They offered a +strong contrast to the scene that had taken place after the battle of +Elandslaagte, as in the hospitals at Chieveley and Frere everything was +as admirably arranged as they would have been in one of a large town. In +the daytime the sides of the marquees were lifted to allow of a free +passage of air. The nurses in their neat dresses moved quietly among the +patients with medicines, soups, jellies, and other refreshments ordered +for them. There were books for those sufficiently convalescent to be +able to read them, and those who wished to send a letter home always +found one of the nurses ready to write at their dictation. By some of +the bedsides stood bouquets of flowers sent by the ladies of Maritzburg, +and all had an abundance of delicious fruit from the same source. + + + + +CHAPTER XIX + +MAJUBA DAY + + +"Did you hear of that plucky action of Captain Philips, of the Royal +Engineers, last night?" an officer who had just ridden in from the front +asked Chris that evening. + +"No; I heard that the Boers set up a tremendous musketry fire in the +evening after the truce was over, but no one that I have spoken to knew +what it was about." + +"Well, we ourselves didn't know till next morning. The general idea was +that it was a Boer scare. They thought that we were crawling up to make +a night attack, and so blazed away for all they were worth. We found out +afterwards that Philips had conceived the idea that it was possible to +destroy that search-light of the Boers. He had learned from prisoners +that it was the last they had with them, and although we have not made +any night attacks yet, it was possible we might do so in the future, and +so he made up his mind to have a try to smash it up. He took with him +eight blue-jackets, crawled along in the dark beyond our lines, and got +in among the Boers. He had taken particular notice of points he should +have to pass, boulders and so on, and he found his way there without +making a blunder. There were plenty of Boers round, but no one just at +the search-light. The blue-jackets all understood the working of their +own search-lights; but the Boers have no electric lights, you know, and +work their signals with acetylene, and so they stood on guard while +Philips opened the lamp, took out the working parts, whatever they are, +and shut the lamp again. Just as they had done so they heard four Boers +who had been sitting talking together get up. He and his party dropped +among the bushes and lay there quiet while the Boers came up to the +lamp. + +"'We are to keep it going to-night,' one of them said, 'for they may +take it into their heads to make an attack, thinking that after having +had a truce all day we shall not be expecting trouble, and they may +catch us unprepared. I expect our German officer in a few minutes; he +said he would be here about ten o'clock, for the rooineks are not likely +to move until they think we are asleep.' + +"They moved away again, and Philips and his men stole quietly off, but +before they rejoined our fellows they heard a sudden shot, and in a +minute a tremendous rifle fire broke out. Evidently the German had +arrived and found the search-light would not act, and they concluded at +once that we were marching against them, and for twenty minutes every +man in the trenches blazed away at random as fast as he could load. I +should say that they must have wasted a hundred thousand cartridges. As +there was no reply they began to think that they had been fooled. Our +fellows were just as much puzzled at the row, and fell in, thinking that +the Boers might possibly be going to attack them. However, matters +quieted down, and it was not until the next morning that anyone knew +what it had all been about." + +"That was a plucky thing indeed," Chris said; "though, as I should +hardly think we should attack at night, it may not be of much service, +for the Boers have long since given up trying with their feeble flash- +lights to interrupt our night signalling with Ladysmith, especially as, +now the weather is finer, we can talk all day if we like with our +heliograph." + +Chris was just turning in when Captain Brookfield came to the entrance +of his tent. "I have just heard, Chris, that the pontoon bridge has been +successfully thrown across just below the cataract, and that the troops +are all crossing. I just mention it to you. I cannot get away myself, +but if I find you and your boys are--not here in the morning, I shall +say nothing about it. We certainly shall not be wanted. The orders are +out, and there is no mention of our corps nor any of the mounted +colonials." + +"Thank you, sir! I am very much obliged." Chris went round to the tents +and told the others that they must be up an hour before daybreak and be +ready to start at once, as there would probably be another very big +fight. Then he told the natives, who were, as usual, still talking +together in their tent, that they were all going off very early, and +that chocolate must be ready at daybreak, and the water-skins filled, as +the horses would probably be out all day. + +"Will you want anything cooked, baas?" Jack asked. + +"No; we will take some tins with us. There is going to be another big +fight to-morrow; as we are all going, you can go too if you like. We +shall want you for the horses. Three of you can stop with them at a +time, and the others can go and see what is doing, and then change +about, you know, so that you can all see something. The spare horses +must have plenty of food left them, and must have a good drink before we +start." + +They were all astir in good time. The natives had made some hot cakes, +and these they ate with their chocolate. Then they saw that the horses +had a good feed, and a stock of biscuit and tinned meat for themselves +was put into the saddle-bags, and when daylight broke they were across +the plain and arrived at the dip in the hills through which the pontoon +train had gone. Knowing where the cataract was, they were able to +calculate pretty accurately where they had best dismount. This they did +in a small clump of trees. Then each took a tin of meat and a couple of +pounds of biscuit in his pocket. "Now," Chris said to the natives, "you +had better all stay here quietly till you hear firing begin; then, Jack, +you can go with the two Zulus. You can stay and look on till the middle +of the day. When the sun is at its highest you must come back and let +Japhet and the Swazis go. At sunset you must all be here again, and wait +till we come. Perhaps we may be back sooner, and if so we shall ride +away at once; and those of you who are away when we start must go back +to camp at once if you find that the horses have gone when you get here. +Now let's be off." + +They made their way up the hills, well pleased that there were enough +trees and bushes to shield them from observation. The roar of artillery +and the rattle of musketry had been going on for some time, but not with +the fury that marked the commencement of an attack. A fortnight before +it would have seemed to them that a great battle was in progress, but by +this time they were accustomed to the almost incessant fire, and knew +that although the cannonade was heavier than usual, no actual fighting +was going on. They met no officers as they went along, nor did they +expect to do so, for none of these would be able to leave their +regiments, as even were these not included in the force told off to +assault, they might be called upon later in the day. At last they +reached the top of a hill whose face sloped steeply down to the river, +and from here they could obtain a view of the Boer position, and of the +line of railway up and down. + +To the right was Pieter's station, with a steep hill of the same name +rising close to it. To the left of this was another strongly-posted +hill, while beyond it was the scene of the fighting on Friday and +Saturday, Railway Hill, which had been rechristened Hart's Hill, in +honour of the commander of the brigade that had fought so valiantly. It +was evident that at these three points the whole of the fighting force +of the Boers had gathered. A heavy rifle fire was being kept up against +the British infantry, whose passage of the river had now been +discovered, and who were lying crouched behind boulders and other +shelter. + +They now saw that the guns had all been brought forward during the +night, had taken up commanding positions, and were pouring a terrible +fire into the enemy's encampment at a distance of little over a mile. +The enemy's guns were replying, but at this short range the naval guns +were able to fire point-blank, and their shells ripped the defences +erected to shelter the Boer camp into fragments, and carried destruction +everywhere. + +On a kopje about a quarter of a mile behind and above them General +Buller and his staff had taken up their position, and the lads kept +themselves well within the trees to avoid observation. + +"See, Chris, there are some of our fellows creeping along by the side of +the river. They must be hidden from the sight of the Boers. I expect +they will be the first to begin." + +All their glasses were turned upon the column of men. They were two +battalions of the eth Brigade and the Dublin Fusiliers, and these, under +General Barton's command, made their way down the river bank for a mile +and a half. Then the lads saw that they were leaving the river and +crossing the line of railway. + +"They have evidently gone down there," Sankey said, "because that spur +just this side must hide them from the Boers on Pieter's Hill." + +The column were lost sight of for upwards of an hour, and then they +appeared on the opposite crest, five hundred feet above the line; then +they were lost sight of again as they passed beyond the crest. + +"That is a splendid move!" Chris exclaimed. "By working round there they +will gain the top of Pieter's Hill, and come down like a thunderbolt +upon the Boers." + +The roar of artillery continued unabated. Clouds of yellowish-brown +smoke floated over the Boer entrenchments, lit up occasionally by a +vivid flash of a bursting lyddite shell. So terrible was the bombardment +that the rifle fire of the Boers against the troops crouching behind +their shelters was feeble and intermittent, as they dared not merge from +their shelter-places to lift a head above their line of trenches. It was +a long time before Barton's troops were again seen. Doubtless they had +orders to wait for a time when they had gained their desired position, +in order to allow the bombardment to do its work, and prepare the way +for the assault of the other positions by the fourth and eleventh +brigades. It was not, indeed, until the afternoon that the lads saw +Barton's brigade sweeping along to the attack of Pieter's Hill. + +The Boers saw them now, and could be seen leaping out of their +entrenchments, regardless of the redoubled fire of the artillery now +concentrated upon them, and climbing up the hill to oppose this +unexpected attack. But before they could gather in sufficient numbers +the British were upon them, keeping up a terrible fire as they advanced. +The Boers, however, fought sturdily. Many, indeed, had already begun to +make their way along the southern face of the hill, either to join their +comrades on the hill between Pieter's and Hart's, or to escape up the +valleys between them, and so make their way to Bulwana, where a large +force was still encamped. + +"We may as well help," Chris said; "the general can but blow us up." + +Delighted to be able to do even a little towards the success of the day, +the party at once picked up their rifles lying beside them. + +"It is about a thousand yards, I should say, to the middle of the hill. +Take steady aim and try and pick them off as they leave their trenches." + +The firing began at once slowly and steadily, and occasionally there was +an exclamation of satisfaction when a bullet found its mark. Five +minutes later a dismounted staff-officer came down to the trees behind +them. + +"What men are these?" he asked; "the general wishes to know." + +"We are the Johannesburg Scouts," Chris said. + +"Are you in command, sir?" + +"Yes." + +"Then, will you please to accompany me at once to the general." + +On arriving at the spot where the general was standing a little in +advance of his staff, the latter at once recognized Chris. "Oh, it is +you, Mr. King!" he said. "I was afraid some of the men had left their +stations. And what are you doing here?" + +"We are trying to lend a hand to the troops over there, and as we are +all good shots, I think we are being of some assistance." + +"You had no right to leave the camp, sir. I suppose you call this +independent service?" + +"I do, general. I hope that we are affording some help here, and we +should not be doing any good in camp; and as we have been nearly out of +it through all this fighting, and there were no orders for the corps to +do anything to-day, we thought we might be of use." + +"You did wrong, sir," the general said, his face relaxing into a smile +at the lad's defence of himself. "Well, as you are there, you may as +well stop." + +"Thank you, sir!" Chris said, saluting, and then hurried off to rejoin +his comrades. + +"He is a plucky boy," the general said to his staff. "I heard the other +day--though not officially, so I was not obliged to take notice of it-- +that he, with the twenty lads with him, rode out to a place seventy +miles away, and rescued some farmers who were besieged by Boers, +defeated their assailants, killed and wounded more than their own +number, made the rest of them, still double their own strength, lay down +their arms, and recaptured nearly two thousand head of cattle they had +driven off. The news came to me from the mayor of Maritzburg, who had +heard of it from a friend who had ridden in from Grey town. He wrote to +me expressing his admiration at the exploit. I sent privately to their +captain and questioned him about it, intending to reprimand him severely +for letting them go; but he said that they had all resigned, as they had +a right to do, for they are all sons of gentlemen, and draw no pay or +provisions, and that he had therefore no control whatever over their +actions after they left camp. I told him not to say anything about his +having seen me, for that, as they had returned, I should be obliged to +take notice of the matter if it came to be talked about. That young +fellow who came here is the one who, with three of the others, tried to +blow up the bridge at Komati-poort. He could not do that, but he played +havoc with a large store of rifles, ammunition, and six or eight guns. +After that I could not very well scold him." And he again turned his +glass on the opposite hill. + +Here the fighting was almost over, and in a very short time all +resistance had ceased. Some of the Boer guns on the next hill had now +been turned round, and opened upon the captured position, which took +their own in flank. An aide-de-camp was sent off to order some of the +guns to be taken, if possible, up to the top of Pieter's Hill, and after +immense exertions two batteries were placed there. As soon as this was +accomplished, orders were sent for the rest of the infantry to advance. +General Warren was in command, and the fourth brigade, under Colonel +Norcott, and the eleventh, under Colonel Kitchener, now moved forward, +taking advantage of what shelter could be obtained as they advanced. At +the same time a strong force of colonial infantry moved to the right to +attack the Boer trenches farther up the line of railway, and were soon +hotly engaged. The defenders of Hart's Hill, and the position between +that and Pieter's, opened a heavy fire as soon as the British infantry +showed themselves; but their morale was so shaken by the terrific +bombardment to which they had been subjected, by the loss of Pieter's +Hill, and by the rifle fire now opened by its captors, that their fire +was singularly ineffective. Many men dropped, but the loss was +comparatively much smaller than that suffered by the Irish division when +moving across the open on the 23rd. + +Taking advantage of every shelter, the troops moved steadily forward, +maintaining a heavy fire whenever they did so, and winning their way +steadily. Colonel Kitchener's Brigade pressed on towards Hart's Hill, +which on the side by which they now attacked was far less formidable +than that against which the Irish had dashed themselves. It had never +entered the Boer's minds that they would be attacked from this side, and +their most formidable entrenchments had all been placed to resist an +assault from Colenso. Arrived at its foot, the troops were in +comparative shelter among the boulders that covered the slopes. Foot by +foot they made their way upwards, until at last they gathered for a +final assault, and then with a loud cheer scrambled up the last slope +and with fixed bayonets drove the Boers in headlong flight. A similar +success attended the eleventh brigade, who just at sunset carried the +centre position, and a mighty cheer broke out all along the line at the +capture of what all felt to be the last serious obstacle to their +advance to Ladysmith. On the right, the Colonial troops had driven the +Boers in front of them for nearly three miles, capturing entrenchment +after entrenchment, until they arrived at Nelthorpe station. The three +camps of the Boers contained an even larger amount of spoil than had +been discovered in those of Monte Cristo and Hlangwane. It seemed that +they had been perfectly confident that the positions were impregnable, +and had accumulated stores sufficient for a prolonged residence. It was +evident, too, that the wealthier men with them had preferred this +situation to the more exposed camps on the summit of the hills. The +amount of provisions and stores of all kinds was large, Great quantities +of rifle ammunition were found in every trench. Clothes of a superior +kind proved that their owners had been residents of Johannesburg or +Pretoria, and of a different class altogether from the farm-labourers +and herdsmen who formed the majority of the Boer army. The haste with +which they had fled, when to their astonishment they discovered that the +British attack could not be repulsed, was shown by the fact that a good +many watches were found on bed-places and rough tables where they had +been left when the Boers rushed to arms, and in the hurry of flight had +been forgotten. + +The number of rifles that had been thrown away was very large. Among the +dead bodies found were those of two women, one quite young and the other +over sixty. It was notorious that women had more than once been seen in +the firing ranks of the Boers, and there were reports that Amazon corps +were in course of formation in the Transvaal, the Boers, perhaps, +remembering how sturdily the women of Haarlem had fought against the +Spaniards in defence of their city. + +So complete had been the panic evinced by the headlong fight of the +enemy that the general opinion was that it would be some time before +they would again attempt a stand against our men, and that unless any +entrenchments higher up the valley were held by men who had not +witnessed what had taken place, and were commanded by leaders of the +most determined character, Ladysmith would almost certainly be relieved +within a couple of days, and the rescuing army would be thus rewarded +for its toils and sacrifices. + +In a state of the wildest delight the lads returned to the spot where +they had left their horses, where they found that Japhet and the two +Swazis had arrived just before them. They and the Zulus were exhibiting +their intense satisfaction at the defeat of the Boers by a wild war- +dance. The party rode fast back to camp, for their spirits did not admit +of a leisurely pace, and they left the natives to follow them more +deliberately. The news had already been received in camp by the return +of officers who witnessed the scene from a point near to that which the +lads had attained, and its occupants were in a frenzy of delight. The +Colonial corps were especially jubilant. This was the anniversary of +Majuba Hill, the blackest in the history of the Colony, and one that the +Boers in the Transvaal and Orange State always celebrated with great +rejoicings, to the humiliation of the British Colonists. Now that +disgrace was wiped out. A position even stronger than that of Majuba, +fortified with enormous pains, defended by artillery and by thousands of +Boers, had been captured by a British force, and although it was as yet +unknown in camp, the old reverse had been doubly avenged by the +surrender on that day of Cronje and his army. + +Late that evening an order was issued that Lord Dundonald with a +squadron of Lancers and some Colonial corps, in which the Maritzburg +Scouts were included, were to reconnoitre along the line of railway. All +felt sure that no serious opposition was likely to be met with; the +defeat of the Boers had been so crushing and complete that assuredly few +of the fugitives would be found willing to again encounter the terrible +artillery fire, followed by the irresistible onslaught of the infantry. +That evening, in spite of the scarcity of wood, bonfires were lighted, +and the Scouts gathered round them. Every bottle of spirits and wine +that remained in the camp was broached, and a most joyous evening was +spent. + +"I shall be able to breathe freely;" one of the colonists, a man from +Johannesburg, said, "on Majuba Day in future. I have made a point for +years, whenever I wanted to do any business in Natal, to put it off till +that date, so that I could get out of the Transvaal. When I could not +manage it, I shut myself up and stopped in bed all day, though even +there I used to grind my teeth when I heard the brutes shouting and +singing in the streets. Still, to me it was not half such a humiliation +as surrender day. The one was a piece of carelessness, a military +blunder, no doubt; the other was a national disgrace. And though I saw +Majuba myself, it did not affect me half as much as did the abject +backing down of the British Government after they had collected an army +at Newcastle in readiness to avenge Majuba. We could not believe the +news when it came. The fury of the troops was unbounded, and I would not +have given a farthing for the lives of any of the men who were the +authors of the surrender, had they been in the camp that day." + +"What were you doing there?" Chris asked. + +"I had a farm near Newcastle at that time, and two of my waggons had +been taken up by the military for transport purposes. I was not on the +hill, as you may suppose, or I might not be here to tell the story. I +went forward with Colley. It was just the same then as it was at the +beginning here. There were plenty of colonists ready to take up arms, +but the military authorities would have none of them; they could manage +the thing themselves without any aid from civilians. They knew that the +natives had over and over again beaten the Boers, and what natives could +do would be, merely child's play to British soldiers. Sir George Colley +was a brave officer, and I believe had proved himself a skilful one, but +he knew nothing whatever of the Boer style of fighting, while we +colonists understood it perfectly, and could match them at their own +game. As it turned out, the British soldiers on that occasion did not, +and it made all the difference. If Sir George Colley had accepted a few +hundreds of us, who knew the Boers well, as scouts and skirmishers, the +affair would have turned out very differently; for, as you know, they +did not succeed through the whole affair in taking one of the places +held by our colonists. + +"Well, we started from Newcastle, and the blundering began from the +first. It was but twenty-five miles to Laing's Nek. At the time we +started there was not a Boer there, for they were doubtful which line we +should advance by. That twenty-five miles could have been done in a day, +and there we should have been with our difficulties at an end; the +baggage and stores could have come up in two or three days, and then +another advance could have been made. Instead of that, six days were +wasted in going over that miserable bit of ground. The Boers, of course, +took advantage of the time we had given them to prepare and entrench +Laing's Nek. I don't think that troubled the military authorities at +all; an entrenchment thrown up by farmers and peasants could be but a +worthless affair, and would not for a moment check the advance of +British infantry. The consequence of all this was that we got the +licking we deserved. Their entrenchment at the crest of the ridge was +held by something like three thousand men. Colley had but three hundred +and seventy infantry, a force in itself utterly inadequate for the work +in hand. But, seeing some parties of Boer horsemen riding about, he +thought it necessary to leave a strong body for the defence of his +baggage, and accordingly sent only about two hundred and fifty men +forward to attack the place. + +"Well, we among the waggons hadn't a doubt how it was going to turn out. +The one battery with us opened fire upon the entrenchment, but you who +know what their entrenchments are will guess that there was little +damage done; and when the soldiers went up the hill the Boers held their +fire until they were close, and then literally swept them away, and, +leaping over the entrenchments, took many of them prisoners. None would +have got away at all if a few mounted infantry, who had managed to get +up the Nek at another point, hadn't charged down and so enabled the +survivors to escape. One hundred and eighty out of the two hundred and +fifty were killed or taken prisoners. Colley at once fell back four +miles. The Boers on their part, making sure that they had got him safe, +sent a strong force round, and this planted itself on the road between +him and Newcastle, but before they did so some small reinforcements +joined us. Three or four days passed, and then we Colonials quite made +up our mind that there was nothing for it but surrender. Colley +determined at last to try and open the road back, and with about two +hundred and fifty men, with four cannon--two of them mountain guns-- +moved out. Some sixty soldiers were left on a commanding spot to cover +the passage of the Ingogo. As soon as the force under Colley had got to +the opposite crest of the ravine through which the river runs, they were +attacked in great force. They took shelter among the boulders, and +fought as bravely as it was possible for men to fight. The guns, +however, were useless, for in half an hour every officer, man and horse, +was killed or wounded. However, the Boers could not pluck up courage to +make a rush, and the little force held on till it was dark, by which +time more than two-thirds of them were killed or wounded. A lot of rain +had fallen, the Boers thought that the Ingogo could not be forded, and +so, believing they would have no trouble in finishing the little force +in the morning, they were careless. Colley, however, sent down and found +that the water had not risen so high as to make it impossible to pass, +and in the darkness, covered by the blinding rain that was falling, he +and the survivors moved quietly off, crossed the river, picked up the +party left on the eminence commanding it, and returned to camp. + +"It was certain now that unless succoured our fate was sealed, but +fortunately Evelyn Wood came up to Newcastle with a column that had been +pressing forward from the sea. Colley, of course, ought to have waited +for him to arrive before he moved at all, and if he had done so, things +might have turned out very differently. But he made the mistake of +despising the Boers, and thinking that it was nothing but a walk over. +When they heard that the column had reached Newcastle the Boers cleared +off the line of communication, and Colley rode into Newcastle and saw +Wood. We felt that we were well out of a bad business; and were sure +that the Boers, who are no good in attack, however well they fight +behind shelter, would not venture to attack us, and that even if they +did so we could keep them off till help came. But Colley could not let +well alone. Instead of waiting till Wood came up and joined him, lie +thought he might make a good stroke on his own account, and so retrieve +the two defeats he had suffered; so when the 92nd Regiment came up he +determined to seize Majuba Hill. + +"It was well worth seizing, for it completely commanded the Boer's +position on Laing's Nek, and had the whole force come up the Boers must +have fallen back directly it was captured. However, Colley decided not +to wait, and with about five hundred and fifty men and officers he +started at night. The hill was only four miles off as the crow flies, +but the ground was frightfully cut up, and it was not until after six +hours of tremendous work that they reached the summit. Two hundred men +were left at the bottom of the hill to keep open communications with the +camp. + +"From a hill close to the camp we could make out what was going on. Soon +after daybreak we saw a party of mounted men ride towards the hill, +where they usually stationed vedettes. They were fired at as they +approached, and directly a turmoil could be seen on Laing's Nek. Waggons +were inspanned, and we thought at first that they were all going to move +off, but this was not so. They were only getting ready to go if they +failed to recapture the hill, and in a short time we could see all their +force moving towards it. Well, from where we were it seemed that the +force on Majuba could have kept a hundred thousand Boers at bay, and so +they ought to have done. + +"For a time the Boers did not make much progress. With glasses, puffs of +smoke could be made out all along the crest, and among the rocks below. +The firing began in earnest at seven, and between twelve and one the +Boer fire had ceased and ours died away. We thought it was all over, and +went back to our waggons again. Soon after one o'clock there was a +sudden outburst, and the men with the glasses observed that the Boers +were close up to the top of the hill. A few minutes later it was on the +plateau itself that the firing was going on. + +"Colley had not known the Boers. No doubt his men were completely done +up with their six hours' toil among the hills and six hours' fighting, +and I don't think a tenth of them were ever engaged, for Colley thought +it was impossible that the position could be stormed; so he only kept a +handful of men at the edge of the plateau and allowed the rest to lie +down and sleep. Certainly that was the case when the Boers, who had been +crawling up among the rocks and bushes, made their rush. + +"Well, you all know what happened. The few men on the edge were cut down +at once. The Boers dashed forward, keeping up a heavy fire. Our fellows +jumped up, but numbers were shot down as they did-so, and in spite of +the efforts of their officers, a panic seized them. They had far better +rifles than the Boers, and had they been steady might still have driven +them back; but only a few of them ever fired a shot, and but one Boer +was killed and five wounded; while on our side eight officers, among +them Colley himself, were killed, and seven taken prisoners. Eighty-six +men were killed, one hundred and twenty-five wounded, fifty-one taken +prisoners, and two missing. A few managed to make their way down the +hill, and joined the party that had been left there at the bottom. + +"These were also attacked, but beat off the Boers, and, maintaining +perfect order, fought their way back to camp. You can imagine the +consternation there was when the hideous business became known. We fell +back at once to Newcastle, and mightily lucky we thought ourselves to +get there safely. Fresh troops came up, and we were on the point of +advancing again, confident that, after the lesson the Boers had given +us, things could be managed better. Suddenly, like a thunderclap, the +news came that the British Government had surrendered to the Boers, +given up everything, abandoned the colonists, who had so bravely +defended their towns, to their fate; and, with the exception of making a +proviso that the natives should be well treated--but which, as nothing +was ever done to enforce it, meant allowing the Boers to enslave and +ill-treat them as they had done before--and another proviso, maintaining +the purely nominal supremacy of the Queen, the treaty was simply an +entire and abject surrender. + +"There is not a colonist who, since that time, has not known what must +come of it, and that sooner or later the question whether the Dutch or +the British were to be masters of the Cape would have to be fought out. +But none of us dreamt that the British Government would allow the Boers +to import hundreds of thousands of rifles, two or three hundred cannon, +and enormous stores of ammunition in readiness for the encounter. Well, +they have done it, and we have seen the consequences. Natal has been +overrun, and a considerable portion of Cape Colony. We have lost here +some ten thousand men, and half as many on the other side, and we may +lose as many more before the business is finished. And all this because +a handful of miserable curs at home twenty years ago were ready to +betray the honour of England, in order that they might make matters +smooth for themselves at home." Just as the story came to an end the +assembly blew in the camp of the Scouts, and on running in the men found +that Captain Brookfield had received an order to mount at once and ride +to join the cavalry under Lord Dundonald at the front, as a +reconnaissance was to be made in the morning. Five minutes later all +were in the saddle and trotting across the plain towards Colenso, as +they were to follow the line of railway up. + + + + +CHAPTER XX + +LADYSMITH + + +It was exciting work as the mounted horse under Lord Dundonald rode +along. As far as could be seen from the various points in our possession +the passage was clear, but experience had taught how the Boers would lie +quiet, even when in large numbers, while scouts were passing close to +them. At Colenso Colonel Long had sent two mounted men on ahead of his +battery. They had been permitted to pass within a hundred yards of +thousands of Boers among the bushes on the river bank, and had even +crossed the bridge and returned without a rifle shot being fired or a +Boer showing his head. And it was on their report that there were +apparently no Boers in the neighbourhood that the batteries were pushed +forward into the fatal trap prepared for them. So Chris and his +companions, at the rear of the colonial cavalry, trotted along ready at +a moment's notice to swing round their rifles for instant action. They +watched every stone and clump of bushes on the slopes of the valley for +any foe that might be lurking there, and who at any moment might pour +out a rain of bullets into the column. Very few words were spoken on the +way, the tension was too great. They knew that Ladysmith had telegraphed +that the Boers appeared to be everywhere falling back. But a few +thousands of their best fighting men might have remained to strike one +terrible blow at the troops who in open fight had shown themselves their +superiors, and had driven them from position after position that they +believed impregnable. However, as one after another of the spots where +an ambuscade would be likely to be laid passed, and there were still no +signs of the enemy, the keenness of the watch began to abate, and the +set expression of the faces to relax. Then as the hills receded and the +valley opened before them a pleasurable excitement succeeded the grim +expectation of battle. The task that had proved so hard was indeed +fulfilled; the Boers were gone, and the siege of Ladysmith was at an +end. As they emerged from the valley into the plain in which Ladysmith +is situated, there was an insensible increase of speed; men talked +joyously together, scarcely waiting for replies; the horses seemed to +catch the infection of their riders' spirits, and the pennons of the +Lancers in front to flutter more gaily. Onward they swept, cantering now +until they approached the town. + +Then men could be seen running towards the road; from every house they +poured out, men and women, some waving hats and handkerchiefs, some too +much overpowered by their feelings for outward demonstrations. As the +columns reached this point they broke into a walk, and answered with +ringing cheers the fainter but no less hearty hurrahs of those they came +to rescue; and yet the troopers themselves were scarcely less affected +than the crowd that pressed round to shake them by the hand. They had +known that provisions were nearly exhausted in the city, and that for +some time past all had been on short rations; but they had not dreamt of +anything like this. It seemed to them that they were surrounded by a +population of skeletons, haggard and worn, almost too weak to drag +themselves along, almost too feeble to shout, their clothes in rags, +their eyes unnaturally large, their hands nerveless, their utterances +broken by sobs. They realized for the first time how terrible had been +the privations, how great the sufferings of the garrison and people of +Ladysmith. For the soldiers were there as well as the civilians. There +was little military in their appearance; there was no uniformity in +their dress, save that all were alike ragged, stained and destitute of +colour. + +Could their rescuers have seen them, themselves unseen, a few days +earlier, they would have been even more shocked. Then the listlessness +brought about by hope deferred, and of late almost the extinction of +hope, weakness caused by disease and famine, had been supreme; and had +the Boers had any idea of the state to which they were reduced, a +renewal of the attack of the eth of January could hardly have failed of +success. The last few days, however, had revived their hopes. They had +learned by the ever-nearing roar of the cannon that progress was being +made, and for the past four days had from elevated points near the town +been able to make out the movements of our troops on the positions they +had captured. They had seen the Boers breaking up their camps, carrying +off their stores either by waggon across the western passes or by the +trains from Modder Spruit. They had seen the cannon being withdrawn from +their positions on the hills, and felt that their deliverance was at +hand. + +Through an ever-increasing crowd the column moved on. + +[Illustration: THE RELIEF OF LADYSMITH.] + +From barrack and hospital, from dwelling-house and the dug-out shelter- +caves on the railway bank people flocked up. Sir George White and his +staff, the mayor, and the town guards, every officer and soldier, joined +in the greeting. But no stay was made. After a few minutes' talk with +Sir George White, Lord Dundonald gave the order, and the cavalry moved +forward, and as soon as they were free from the crowd trotted on at a +rapid pace in hopes of overtaking the retiring Boers, and glad that the +scene to which they had looked forward with such pleasant expectations +was at an end. There had not been a dry eye among them. None could have +witnessed the sobbing women, the men down whose cheeks the tears +streamed uncontrolledly, and have remained himself unmoved. + +"It is terrible," Chris said to Sankey, who was riding next to him. "I +could not have imagined anything so dreadful as their appearance. I did +not realize what it was like when, two or three months before I left +Johannesburg, I read in Motley's book about the war in the Netherlands +of the state of things in Leyden when the Prince of Orange burst his way +through to their rescue, and of the terrible appearance of the starved +inhabitants, but now I can quite understand how awfully bad it was. It +must have been even worse then. Here there were some rations +distributed--little enough, but some. There the people had nothing but +the weeds they gathered, and boiled down with the scraps they could pick +up. There they died in hundreds of actual starvation; it cannot have +been quite so bad here. But as we see, though there has been just enough +food to keep life together, that has been all, and it has been from +disease brought on by famine, and not by famine itself, that they have +died. Then, too, shells were always falling among them, and at any +moment they might be attacked. I expect that anxiety and fever have had +as much to do with it as hunger." + +"Yes, Chris. You know, when we were grumbling sometimes at not being +employed in the fighting, we have wished we had stopped in Ladysmith, +and gone through the siege there; now, one can thank God that one did +not do so. We have pictured to ourselves everyone actively employed, the +vigilance at all the outposts, the skirmishing with the Boers who crept +up too closely, the excitement of repelling their attack, and all that +sort of thing. It is all very good to read about, but now we know what +it really meant one sees that we were a pack of fools to have wished to +be there." + +"Yes; I suppose one never knows what is g'ood for one, Sankey. Now as I +look back I think that we have been extraordinarily fortunate. We have +had some fights, just in the way we had expected, and, thanks +principally to our being so well mounted, we have done very well. We +have lived well; I don't say we have not had a certain amount of +discomfort, but of course we expected that. What I am most pleased at is +that not one of us has been killed, and only a few of us wounded, the +only serious one being Willesden, and he is fairly on the way to +recovery. For boys we have done a very good share, and I expect that now +we have driven the Boers back here, and Kimberley has been relieved, and +there is a tremendous force gathering on that side, it will soon be +over." + +"Yes, I think with you, Chris. And I fancy that the others are all +beginning to long for the end of it. I should say that those whose +people have gone to England may stop on for a bit, but the rest of us +will go to our friends at Durban or the Cape, at any rate for a time, +till we see how things go. We know that Lord Roberts has got Cronje +surrounded and shut up. I expect that is one of the reasons that the +Boers have been moving from here. The Free Staters will certainly wish +to get back to defend Bloemfontein, and the Transvaal people must feel +that it is no use stopping here when their own country will be shortly +invaded." + +"Yes; I expect that is the reason for their shutting up as suddenly as +they have done after fighting so hard for the first five or six days of +our advance." + +On arriving at Modder Spruit it was found that the last train had left +an hour before; they pushed on, however, until a smart fire from a hill +in front of them, which was evidently held in force, broke out suddenly, +and two cannon from another eminence joined in. Having thus discovered +that the Boers were not entirely evacuating the country, but intending +to defend the Biggarsberg, at any rate until a strong force came up, +Lord Dundonald returned to Ladysmith. In the afternoon General Buller +rode over attended by only one or two of the staff. He stayed but a very +short time, to learn from General White the state of affairs, and then +returned. + +"Do you think that we shall pursue at once, sir?" Chris asked Captain +Brookfield. + +"Not at once, Chris. Practically, as you see, there is not a soldier +here fit to carry arms, nor a horse fit for work, and I should say that +it will be a month before General Buller can reckon upon any assistance +from the garrison. As to his own army, I expect he will keep the main +portion round Chieveley. No doubt he will bring the greater part if not +all the garrison of Ladysmith back to Frere and Estcourt, both to get +them out of the pestilential air here and for convenience of feeding +them. The civilian population will leave, of course, as soon as they +possibly can. I should think that Buller will leave in garrison here an +infantry brigade, part of the cavalry, and two or three batteries, and +this with the sick who cannot be moved, will be about as much as our +transport will be able to manage until the railway bridge is repaired +and the line put in running order. Till that is done there is no +possibility of a general advance; and indeed there will have to be a +great accumulation of stores here, as this will then become our base +instead of Chieveley. + +"No doubt a great deal will depend on how things are going on the other +side. Now that Roberts has as good as captured Cronje and his force he +will of course advance to Bloemfontein and occupy it. He will then be no +more able to advance farther than Buller can--in fact, less able. Our +line of railway is secured, and we can be fed by it; but at present we +have not crossed the Orange River from the south, and the railway +between that and Bloemfontein is in the hands of the Boers, and we know +that they have blown up the bridges across the river. Until these are +restored, and the line secure in our hands, Roberts's army will have to +live on the stores that they have brought with them. Then the work of +forming a base depot from the coast will begin, and it needs something +enormous in the way of provisions and carriage to supply an army of +sixty or seventy thousand men, all of whom must as they advance be fed +from Bloemfontein. + +"As long as he is stationary there it is likely enough that the bulk of +Joubert's army will cling to Natal, knowing well enough that before we +shall be in a condition to move forward they can entrench their +positions on the Biggarsberg and the Drakenberg until they are quite as +formidable as those we have been knocking our heads against. I should +not be at all surprised if it is a couple of months before Roberts is in +a position to advance. Of course at present we have no idea what the +plans are, but likely enough at least half the force here may be sent +down to Durban, and then by water to East London, and from there to +Bloemfontein by rail. It would be ridiculous for us to renew the sort of +fighting we have been doing when the enemy are sure to clear out when +Roberts crosses the Vaal, and Natal be thus freed without any further +loss of life. Possibly the troops may not be sent round by sea, but will +remain here until Roberts gets as far as Kroonstadt. Then, no doubt, a +division will be sent down through Bethlehem to Harrismith, and so open +Van Reenen's Pass, in which case the troops from here can go up by train +to Bethlehem. At any rate, I am afraid that most of us will remain here +for at least two months. + +"You see, most of the colonial irregulars were enlisted for only three +months, and that is up already, and no doubt a great many of them will +not extend their time, and I don't suppose the military authorities will +want them to do so. There is no doubt that while mounted men were +invaluable in the fighting in Cape Colony, and will be so in the Orange +Free State, they are of very little use in this mountainous country in +the north of Natal--they are so many more mouths to be fed, man and +beast, without any corresponding advantage. They have done splendidly +where they have had a chance, and the Imperial Light Horse have suffered +heavily, but as a whole I think that we should have been more useful as +infantry than as mounted men. Infinitely more useful if, instead of +being kept at the head-quarters of the army as we have been, for no +possible reason that anyone can see, we had all been scattered over the +country to the east, in which case we should have kept the marauding +Boers from wandering about, should have saved hundreds and hundreds of +loyal farmers from being ruined, and the loss of many thousands of +cattle and horses, which will have to be paid for after the war is over. +I do not think that there is a single colonist who is not of opinion +that the way in which we have been kept inactive from the beginning of +the war, instead of being employed as irregular cavalry should have +been, in protecting the country, preventing the Boers from drawing +supplies, and forcing them to keep in a body as our own troops have +done, has been a stupendous mistake." + +Chris repeated this conversation to his comrades. "I think," he said, +"that if there is no chance of doing anything for another two or three +months, we might as well break up. I have no doubt a good many of the +Colonials will re-enlist. Numbers of them are working men, either from +Johannesburg or belonging to Natal; they would find it very difficult to +get work here, and the five shillings a day pay is therefore of the +greatest importance to them. But it is different with us. We don't draw +pay, we simply agreed to band ourselves together to have an opportunity +of paying out the Boers for their treatment of us. At the time we agreed +to that, we had no idea that they would invade Natal. Of course that was +an additional inducement to us to fight. As loyalists, and capable of +bearing arms, it would have been our duty, even if we had no personal +feeling in the matter, to enlist to help to clear the country of the +enemy who invaded it. Now that Ladysmith is rescued and there are +certainly enough troops in South Africa to finish the business up, I do +not see that it is our duty to continue our service. Anyhow, I have +pretty well made up my mind to resign and go round to Cape Town. There I +am almost sure to find my mother, and perhaps my father, for we know +that they have expelled almost all the English remaining about the +mines, and he may have been among them." + +"I agree with you heartily," Sankey said. "At any rate, I should vote +for our breaking up for the present. It will be beastly for us to have +to stop here doing nothing for another month or two, and then perhaps, +when Buller moves forward to join Roberts, to be told that the colonial +force will no longer be required." + +Twelve of the others expressed similar opinions. The friends of the +eight who did not do so had returned to England. Carmichael was one of +these. "Well," he said after a pause, "I do not say that you are not +quite right, but I have no one to go to here. My people went home as +soon as they reached Durban. If I were to join them I might hear when I +landed that the war was just over, and that they had either started to +come back again, or were on the point of doing so. I was born out here, +and have never seen any of my relations in Scotland. Though I should +like very much to spend a few months in the old country, it would not be +worth while going home for so short a time; for I am sure my father will +hurry back to his work at the mines as soon as Johannesburg is taken by +us. I fancy all those who have not spoken are in about the same +situation that I am." + +There was a murmur of assent. "I don't say," he went on, "that I should +care, any more than you do, to stop here for the next two months. The +smell of dead horses and things is enough to make one ill. The water of +the river is poisonous, for we know the Boers used to throw their dead +animals in it on purpose. So I shall go down to Maritzburg and wire to +my people where I am, and ask for orders. There remains, Willesden said +the other day, still about £80 apiece at the bank, and I expect we shall +get as much for the horses as we gave for them, so that we who have no +friends here could live very comfortably for two or three months, or +have enough to pay our passage home in case they send for us. I shall +tell them to telegraph, so in a week after sending off my wire I shall +get an answer." + +The others who had no friends in South Africa expressed their intention +of doing the same. + +"I don't think we need bother about the horses," Chris said; "being such +good animals, I have no doubt that there are plenty of officers in the +cavalry regiments here who will be glad to buy them as remounts for the +money we gave for them. That would save us all the trouble of getting +them down by train to Maritzburg and selling them there. Well, then, as +there are no dissentients, I will tell Captain Brookfield what we have +settled." + +"I quite agree with you," the officer said when Chris had told him of +their intentions. "In the first place, it would be a serious waste of +time for you to remain here. Still, that is of comparatively little +consequence, but I do think that it would be a grievous pity for you to +risk your lives further. You have done wonderfully good service. You +have had an experience that you will look back upon with satisfaction +all your lives. You have done your duty, and more than your duty. You +have before you useful lives, and have amply shown that in whatever +position you may be placed you will be a credit to yourselves and your +friends. Therefore, Chris, I think in every respect your decision is +right. It will be some relief to me, for to tell you frankly, when you +started on that expedition to Komati, and the other day, when you all +rode off to the farm, I felt that it would probably be my duty to write +to some of your parents to tell them of your deaths. Therefore, by all +means give me your resignations. I dare say that a good many of the men +in my own and other corps will be leaving also; and in that case those +who remain will, I should think, be formed into one strong regiment, +which will be of a good deal more use than half a dozen small corps." + +It was agreed among the party that as they had decided to go they might +as well go at once. + +"I hear," Chris said, "that General Buller is going to make a formal +entry here on Saturday, and that the garrison will line the road. I +don't know whether Dundonald's brigade will have anything to do with it; +but if he does, Brookfield will certainly like to make a good show. So +until that is over I won't do anything about the horses." + +On the day appointed the garrison turned out to receive the general and +the troops who had struggled so long and gallantly to effect their +rescue, and the Devons, Gloucesters, Rifles, Leicesters, Manchesters, +Liverpools, sappers, artillerymen, and the Naval Brigade marched out +from their camps and lined the road as far as the railway-station, where +the remnant of the cavalry brigade were drawn up. At eleven o'clock Sir +George White, Sir Archibald Hunter, and Colonel Duff and his staff rode +up and took their place in the front of the shattered tower of the town- +hall. Here, too, Captain Lambton and many other officers took their +place. Not far from these were a score of civilians who had not shared +in the general exodus that had been going on from the day on which the +town was relieved, but had delayed their departure in order to witness +the historical scene. At last the head of the column was seen +approaching. Lord Dundonald's men had ridden down on the previous day, +and the mounted Colonial Volunteers had now the honour of forming the +general's escort. They led the way, and after them came General Buller +with his escort. The Dublin Fusiliers were placed at the head of the +column in acknowledgment of the gallantry displayed by them in every +fight; then came the men of Warren's, Lyttleton's, and Barton's +brigades, with their artillery. Great indeed was the contrast between +the sturdy, bronzed, and well-fed soldiers who cheered as they marched, +many of them carrying their helmets on their bayonets, and the lines of +emaciated men through whom they passed. These cheered too, but their +voices sounded strange and thin, and many, indeed, were too much +overcome by weakness and emotion to be able to add their voices to the +shouts. The enthusiasm of the troops rose to the highest when they +passed a group of women and children, who, with streaming eyes, greeted +them as they passed. + +The pipes of the Highlanders and the beating of drums added to the roar +of sound. The contrast between the dress of rescuers and rescued was as +great as their personal appearance. Sir George White's men had of late +had but little work, and had prepared for the occasion to the best of +their power, as if for a review at Aldershot. They had done what they +could. Their khaki suits had been washed and scrubbed until, though +discoloured, they were scrupulously clean. The belts, accoutrements, and +rifles had all been rubbed up and scoured. On the other hand, the +uniforms of regiments that marched in were travel-stained, begrimed with +the dust of battle and the mud of bivouac, until their original hue had +entirely disappeared. They looked as if they had at first been dragged +through thorn bushes and then been given a mud-bath. + +Captain Lambton rode forward to meet the sailors of the Terrible with +the guns that had done such service, followed by the howitzers which had +almost equally contributed to the final success of the operations. He +was loudly cheered by the sailors, and the heartiest greetings were +exchanged between him and their officers. Both in attack and defence the +Naval Brigade had performed inestimable services. + +Behind the column came a large body of men in civilian dress. Their +appearance was as unkempt as that of the troops, but among these there +was no approach to military order, and yet their heroism had been in no +way inferior to that of the troops. These were the stretcher-bearers, +who had in every fight carried on their work of mercy under the heaviest +fire, and that without the excitement that nerves soldiers to face +danger. Many of them had fallen while so engaged, but this had in no way +unnerved their companions, who had not only carried on the work during +daylight, but had often laboured all night until the last wounded man +had been found and carried down to the hospital. When the names of the +heroes of the force that relieved Ladysmith are recounted those of the +stretcher-bearers are worthy of a place among them. + +After the troops had been dismissed and matters had settled down a +little, Chris went over to the camp of the cavalry brigade, and spoke to +the first officer he met. "I have come across, sir," he said, "to ask if +any of you wish to buy remounts. The party to which I belong have +twenty-five horses; they are exceptionally good animals, and cost us +sixty pounds apiece last October. We furnished our own equipment. As we +are all sons of gentlemen at Johannesburg, we did not much mind what we +paid. Anyhow, we are ready to sell them at the price we gave for them." + +"We all want remounts badly enough," the officer said. "Will you come in +with me to the colonel?" + +Entering the mess tent, where the colonel and several officers were +standing talking, Chris's guide introduced him to them, and repeated the +offer he had made. "Well, at any rate, Leslie," the colonel said, "you +and Mainwaring may as well go down and look at the horses; it would +certainly be a comfort to get remounts, for more than half of our +chargers are gone, and the rest are skeletons. I can't ask you, Mr. +King, if you would like to take anything to drink. I suppose it will be +another ten days before we are in a position to be able to offer even +the smallest approach to hospitality." + +"I quite understand that, sir," Chris said. "In that respect we have +been nearly as badly off at Chieveley. We have had plenty to eat and +drink, but a cup of tea or chocolate has been the only refreshment we +have been in a position to offer to a visitor, for the line has been so +fully occupied with government transport that it has been next to +impossible to get up any private stores. I am afraid that very little in +that way can be brought up here until the bridge is repaired and the +line in working order, for it is as much as the transport will be able +to do to bring food enough from Chieveley for the troops and people +here." + +The two officers were more than satisfied with the appearance of the +horses. On their report all their comrades went down, and eleven of the +animals were at once taken; a visit to the camps of two other regiments +resulted in the sale of the remainder. None of the officers was able to +pay in gold, as the paymaster's department had not a coin left, though +small payments were made to the men until nearly the end of the siege. +Chris, however, readily accepted their drafts and cheques, as these +could be paid into the bank at Maritzburg. + +"That is all done," he said to his friends. "Now we will get rid of our +remaining stores which the men brought up yesterday. I propose that +instead of selling them we divide them into three and send them down to +the three cavalry messes. I am sorry we have not a few bottles of +spirits left, but the tea, and chocolate, and sugar, and so on, will be +very welcome to them." + +The six natives carried the things down, and brought back with them +notes of warm thankfulness from the colonels. + +"How about our saddles, Chris?" + +"We can take them with us to Maritzburg. We can hand over the kettles +and so on, and the waterproof sheets, to Brookfield's men who remain +here, and the blankets can be given to the natives when we get there." + +The next day, after a hearty farewell from Captain Brookfield and their +comrades, who sent them off with a ringing cheer, the party started, +marching by the side of one of the waggons that had brought up stores; +in this they placed their saddles and blankets. When they arrived at +Chieveley they had no difficulty in getting a place in a covered truck. +In this they travelled to Maritzburg. Here they stayed for three or four +days; then, after making a handsome present in addition to what they had +promised to the natives, and further gladdening their hearts by giving +them their blankets, Chris and those who were going down said good-bye +to Carmichael and his party, with hopes that they would all meet again +at Johannesburg before long. Three or four whose friends had remained at +Durban stayed there, the rest took passage together for Cape Town. + +At Maritzburg Chris had found a letter awaiting him from his mother, +saying that his father had a fortnight before joined her there, as the +Boers had commandeered the mines and had ordered him to leave, as he +would not work them for their benefit and so provide funds for the +support of the Boer army. She said that they intended to leave at once +for England, and that he was to follow them when he gave up his work +with the army. He therefore, with Field, Brown, and Capper, continued +the voyage straight on to England, and joined his parents in London, +where he enjoyed a well-earned rest, his pleasure being only marred by +the necessity for telling the story of his adventures again and again to +the relations and friends of his parents. + +THE END + + + + + +End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of With Buller in Natal, by G. A. Henty + +*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK WITH BULLER IN NATAL *** + +This file should be named 8bull10.txt or 8bull10.zip +Corrected EDITIONS of our eBooks get a new NUMBER, 8bull11.txt +VERSIONS based on separate sources get new LETTER, 8bull10a.txt + +Produced by Tony Hyland, Charles Franks and the +Online Distributed Proofreading Team. + +Project Gutenberg eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the US +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we usually do not +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + +We are now trying to release all our eBooks one year in advance +of the official release dates, leaving time for better editing. +Please be encouraged to tell us about any error or corrections, +even years after the official publication date. + +Please note neither this listing nor its contents are final til +midnight of the last day of the month of any such announcement. +The official release date of all Project Gutenberg eBooks is at +Midnight, Central Time, of the last day of the stated month. A +preliminary version may often be posted for suggestion, comment +and editing by those who wish to do so. + +Most people start at our Web sites at: +http://gutenberg.net or +http://promo.net/pg + +These Web sites include award-winning information about Project +Gutenberg, including how to donate, how to help produce our new +eBooks, and how to subscribe to our email newsletter (free!). + + +Those of you who want to download any eBook before announcement +can get to them as follows, and just download by date. This is +also a good way to get them instantly upon announcement, as the +indexes our cataloguers produce obviously take a while after an +announcement goes out in the Project Gutenberg Newsletter. + +http://www.ibiblio.org/gutenberg/etext03 or +ftp://ftp.ibiblio.org/pub/docs/books/gutenberg/etext03 + +Or /etext02, 01, 00, 99, 98, 97, 96, 95, 94, 93, 92, 92, 91 or 90 + +Just search by the first five letters of the filename you want, +as it appears in our Newsletters. + + +Information about Project Gutenberg (one page) + +We produce about two million dollars for each hour we work. The +time it takes us, a rather conservative estimate, is fifty hours +to get any eBook selected, entered, proofread, edited, copyright +searched and analyzed, the copyright letters written, etc. Our +projected audience is one hundred million readers. If the value +per text is nominally estimated at one dollar then we produce $2 +million dollars per hour in 2002 as we release over 100 new text +files per month: 1240 more eBooks in 2001 for a total of 4000+ +We are already on our way to trying for 2000 more eBooks in 2002 +If they reach just 1-2% of the world's population then the total +will reach over half a trillion eBooks given away by year's end. + +The Goal of Project Gutenberg is to Give Away 1 Trillion eBooks! +This is ten thousand titles each to one hundred million readers, +which is only about 4% of the present number of computer users. + +Here is the briefest record of our progress (* means estimated): + +eBooks Year Month + + 1 1971 July + 10 1991 January + 100 1994 January + 1000 1997 August + 1500 1998 October + 2000 1999 December + 2500 2000 December + 3000 2001 November + 4000 2001 October/November + 6000 2002 December* + 9000 2003 November* +10000 2004 January* + + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation has been created +to secure a future for Project Gutenberg into the next millennium. + +We need your donations more than ever! + +As of February, 2002, contributions are being solicited from people +and organizations in: Alabama, Alaska, Arkansas, Connecticut, +Delaware, District of Columbia, Florida, Georgia, Hawaii, Illinois, +Indiana, Iowa, Kansas, Kentucky, Louisiana, Maine, Massachusetts, +Michigan, Mississippi, Missouri, Montana, Nebraska, Nevada, New +Hampshire, New Jersey, New Mexico, New York, North Carolina, Ohio, +Oklahoma, Oregon, Pennsylvania, Rhode Island, South Carolina, South +Dakota, Tennessee, Texas, Utah, Vermont, Virginia, Washington, West +Virginia, Wisconsin, and Wyoming. + +We have filed in all 50 states now, but these are the only ones +that have responded. + +As the requirements for other states are met, additions to this list +will be made and fund raising will begin in the additional states. +Please feel free to ask to check the status of your state. + +In answer to various questions we have received on this: + +We are constantly working on finishing the paperwork to legally +request donations in all 50 states. If your state is not listed and +you would like to know if we have added it since the list you have, +just ask. + +While we cannot solicit donations from people in states where we are +not yet registered, we know of no prohibition against accepting +donations from donors in these states who approach us with an offer to +donate. + +International donations are accepted, but we don't know ANYTHING about +how to make them tax-deductible, or even if they CAN be made +deductible, and don't have the staff to handle it even if there are +ways. + +Donations by check or money order may be sent to: + +Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +PMB 113 +1739 University Ave. +Oxford, MS 38655-4109 + +Contact us if you want to arrange for a wire transfer or payment +method other than by check or money order. + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation has been approved by +the US Internal Revenue Service as a 501(c)(3) organization with EIN +[Employee Identification Number] 64-622154. Donations are +tax-deductible to the maximum extent permitted by law. As fund-raising +requirements for other states are met, additions to this list will be +made and fund-raising will begin in the additional states. + +We need your donations more than ever! + +You can get up to date donation information online at: + +http://www.gutenberg.net/donation.html + + +*** + +If you can't reach Project Gutenberg, +you can always email directly to: + +Michael S. Hart <hart@pobox.com> + +Prof. Hart will answer or forward your message. + +We would prefer to send you information by email. + + +**The Legal Small Print** + + +(Three Pages) + +***START**THE SMALL PRINT!**FOR PUBLIC DOMAIN EBOOKS**START*** +Why is this "Small Print!" statement here? You know: lawyers. +They tell us you might sue us if there is something wrong with +your copy of this eBook, even if you got it for free from +someone other than us, and even if what's wrong is not our +fault. So, among other things, this "Small Print!" statement +disclaims most of our liability to you. It also tells you how +you may distribute copies of this eBook if you want to. + +*BEFORE!* YOU USE OR READ THIS EBOOK +By using or reading any part of this PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm +eBook, you indicate that you understand, agree to and accept +this "Small Print!" statement. If you do not, you can receive +a refund of the money (if any) you paid for this eBook by +sending a request within 30 days of receiving it to the person +you got it from. If you received this eBook on a physical +medium (such as a disk), you must return it with your request. + +ABOUT PROJECT GUTENBERG-TM EBOOKS +This PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm eBook, like most PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm eBooks, +is a "public domain" work distributed by Professor Michael S. Hart +through the Project Gutenberg Association (the "Project"). +Among other things, this means that no one owns a United States copyright +on or for this work, so the Project (and you!) can copy and +distribute it in the United States without permission and +without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, set forth +below, apply if you wish to copy and distribute this eBook +under the "PROJECT GUTENBERG" trademark. + +Please do not use the "PROJECT GUTENBERG" trademark to market +any commercial products without permission. + +To create these eBooks, the Project expends considerable +efforts to identify, transcribe and proofread public domain +works. Despite these efforts, the Project's eBooks and any +medium they may be on may contain "Defects". Among other +things, Defects may take the form of incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other +intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged +disk or other eBook medium, a computer virus, or computer +codes that damage or cannot be read by your equipment. + +LIMITED WARRANTY; DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES +But for the "Right of Replacement or Refund" described below, +[1] Michael Hart and the Foundation (and any other party you may +receive this eBook from as a PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm eBook) disclaims +all liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including +legal fees, and [2] YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE OR +UNDER STRICT LIABILITY, OR FOR BREACH OF WARRANTY OR CONTRACT, +INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE +OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE +POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. + +If you discover a Defect in this eBook within 90 days of +receiving it, you can receive a refund of the money (if any) +you paid for it by sending an explanatory note within that +time to the person you received it from. If you received it +on a physical medium, you must return it with your note, and +such person may choose to alternatively give you a replacement +copy. If you received it electronically, such person may +choose to alternatively give you a second opportunity to +receive it electronically. + +THIS EBOOK IS OTHERWISE PROVIDED TO YOU "AS-IS". NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, ARE MADE TO YOU AS +TO THE EBOOK OR ANY MEDIUM IT MAY BE ON, INCLUDING BUT NOT +LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A +PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +Some states do not allow disclaimers of implied warranties or +the exclusion or limitation of consequential damages, so the +above disclaimers and exclusions may not apply to you, and you +may have other legal rights. + +INDEMNITY +You will indemnify and hold Michael Hart, the Foundation, +and its trustees and agents, and any volunteers associated +with the production and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm +texts harmless, from all liability, cost and expense, including +legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any of the +following that you do or cause: [1] distribution of this eBook, +[2] alteration, modification, or addition to the eBook, +or [3] any Defect. + +DISTRIBUTION UNDER "PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm" +You may distribute copies of this eBook electronically, or by +disk, book or any other medium if you either delete this +"Small Print!" and all other references to Project Gutenberg, +or: + +[1] Only give exact copies of it. Among other things, this + requires that you do not remove, alter or modify the + eBook or this "small print!" statement. You may however, + if you wish, distribute this eBook in machine readable + binary, compressed, mark-up, or proprietary form, + including any form resulting from conversion by word + processing or hypertext software, but only so long as + *EITHER*: + + [*] The eBook, when displayed, is clearly readable, and + does *not* contain characters other than those + intended by the author of the work, although tilde + (~), asterisk (*) and underline (_) characters may + be used to convey punctuation intended by the + author, and additional characters may be used to + indicate hypertext links; OR + + [*] The eBook may be readily converted by the reader at + no expense into plain ASCII, EBCDIC or equivalent + form by the program that displays the eBook (as is + the case, for instance, with most word processors); + OR + + [*] You provide, or agree to also provide on request at + no additional cost, fee or expense, a copy of the + eBook in its original plain ASCII form (or in EBCDIC + or other equivalent proprietary form). + +[2] Honor the eBook refund and replacement provisions of this + "Small Print!" statement. + +[3] Pay a trademark license fee to the Foundation of 20% of the + gross profits you derive calculated using the method you + already use to calculate your applicable taxes. If you + don't derive profits, no royalty is due. Royalties are + payable to "Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation" + the 60 days following each date you prepare (or were + legally required to prepare) your annual (or equivalent + periodic) tax return. Please contact us beforehand to + let us know your plans and to work out the details. + +WHAT IF YOU *WANT* TO SEND MONEY EVEN IF YOU DON'T HAVE TO? +Project Gutenberg is dedicated to increasing the number of +public domain and licensed works that can be freely distributed +in machine readable form. + +The Project gratefully accepts contributions of money, time, +public domain materials, or royalty free copyright licenses. +Money should be paid to the: +"Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +If you are interested in contributing scanning equipment or +software or other items, please contact Michael Hart at: +hart@pobox.com + +[Portions of this eBook's header and trailer may be reprinted only +when distributed free of all fees. Copyright (C) 2001, 2002 by +Michael S. Hart. Project Gutenberg is a TradeMark and may not be +used in any sales of Project Gutenberg eBooks or other materials be +they hardware or software or any other related product without +express permission.] + +*END THE SMALL PRINT! FOR PUBLIC DOMAIN EBOOKS*Ver.02/11/02*END* + diff --git a/old/8bull10.zip b/old/8bull10.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..c47ee4c --- /dev/null +++ b/old/8bull10.zip |